Operations

JMAG Version 22.
2
User's Manual
Operations
JSOL Corporation
Issue date of 1st Edition: August 2023
 COPYRIGHTS
Copyright © 2023 JSOL Corporation All Rights Reserved.
• Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
• No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or any means electronic or
mechanical, including photocopying and recording for any purpose other than the purchaser’s personal use without the written per-
mission of JSOL Corporation.
JMAG Division
JSOL Corporation
Tokyo/ KUDAN-KAIKAN TERRACE 11th Floor, 1-6-5 Kudanminami, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo 102-0074, Japan
Phone: +81(03)6261-7361 Phone (Support): +81(03)6261-7362 FAX: +81(03)5210-1142
Osaka/ Tosabori Daibiru Bldg. 2-2-4 Tosabori, Nishi-ku, Osaka 550-0001, Japan
Phone: +81(06)4803-5820 FAX: +81(06)6225-3517
Email: jmag-support@sci.jsol.co.jp URL: https://www.jmag-international.com/
 Trademarks
• JMAG and JMAG-RT are registered trademarks of JSOL Corporation.
• Abaqus, CATIA, SIMULIA and SOLIDWORKS are trademarks or registered trademarks of Dassault Systemes or its subsidiaries in
the United States and/or other countries.
• AMD and AMD Opteron is a trademark of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc.
• Amesim, LMS Virtual.Lab, NX, Parasolid, Siemens, Simcenter, Simcenter 3D, Solid Edge, and STAR-CCM+ are trademarks or reg-
istered trademarks of Siemens Industry Software Inc., or its subsidiaries or affiliates, in the United States and in other countries.
• CAPRI CAE Gateway is a registered trademark of CADNexus Inc. in the United States and other countries.
• Creo and Pro/ENGINEER are registered trademarks of PTC, inc.
• DXF and Inventor are trademark or registered trademark of Autodesk, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.
• Excel, Microsoft, Visual C++, Windows, and Windows 10 are either registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
• Flexera Software and FLEXlm are registered trademarks of Flexera Software LLC in the United States and other countries.
• Intel and Intel Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other
countries.
• LabVIEW is a registered trademark of National Instruments Corporation.
• Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States and other countries.
• LSF is a registered trademark of IBM Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both.
• MATLAB and Simulink are registered trademarks of The MathWorks, Inc.
• MSC NASTRAN is a trademark of MSC Software Corporation.
• NASTRAN is a registered trademark of the National Aeronautics and Space Administration.
• NX Nastran is an enhanced proprietary version developed and maintained by Siemens Product Lifecycle Management Software Inc.
• NVIDIA is a trademark or registered trademark of NVIDIA Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
• OpenOffice.org and Apache OpenOffice are registered trademarks of the Apache Software Foundation.
• PSIM is a registered trademark of Powersim Inc.
• ROMAX is a trademark of Romax Technology, LTD.
• Tecplot is a registered trademark of Tecplot, Inc. in the United States and other countries.
• Trademark information for PowerCore, owned by ThyssenKrupp Electrical Steel GmbH.
• All other product and company names are trademarks, registered trademarks, or service marks of their respective companies, organiza-
tions, or holders.
• This document does not include the letters ® and TM.
CONTENTS
About This Edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Basic Operations
Creating Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Opening Existing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Using Trees and Tool Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Expand and Collapse the Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Select Multiple Items in the Tree. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Duplicate with a Drag and Drop Operation on the Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Rearrange Models and Studies in the Tree. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Switch Tabs in Toolbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Saving Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Creating New Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Checking/Setting Project Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Loading Files into Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Using the Direct Access Function to Execute Commands and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Undoing/Redoing Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Setting JMAG-Designer Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Checking JMAG-Designer Version Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Specifying Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Common Operations for Screen Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Expand the Graphics Window (Temporarily Hiding the [Toolbox] and [Undo Stack] Box) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Switch Panels, Buttons, and Shortcut Icons Between Show/Hide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Detach and Attach Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Reset Window and Dialog Positions to Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Selecting Display Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Select Model Types for Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Select Model Display Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Display Only a Selected Part, Element, Air Region, Shell Element, or Beam Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Display IDs for Parts, Faces, Edges, Vertices, Elements, and Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Change a Graphics Window Layout and Background Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Set a Part Color and Transparency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Highlight a Vertex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Disable the Highlight Function During Mouse Hover in the [Project Manager] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Selecting Viewpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Rotate a Model Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Change the Display Size of a Model or Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Move the Display Position inside a Graphics Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Scroll in the Circuit Creation Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Change the Viewpoint Using Menus and Toolbar Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Change the Viewpoint by Specifying the Rotation Angle in Each Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
3
JMAG Version 22.2 User's Manual
Operations
Add a User-Defined Viewpoint and Apply It to a Custom Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Displaying Models Using Multiple Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Selecting Parts, Faces, Elements, and Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Switching Selection Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Selecting with the Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Selecting All Objects in the Specified Frame at Once . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Specify a Region Using the Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Specify a Region Using the Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Selecting Objects by Specifying Their IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Selecting Objects by Specifying Their Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Parameter Settings
Setting Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Specifying Analysis Condition and Function Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Defining Axes and Directions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Define the Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Define the Directions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Define the Axes or Directions by Referencing Edges, Faces, and Vertices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Define the Axes or Directions Using Reference Targets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Specifying Results Files To Be Referenced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Specify Results Files in the Setting Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Use the Reference Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Reference the CSV File/Text File Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Assigning Numerical Expressions and Variables to Parameter Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Assign Numerical Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Assign Equation Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Use Created Equation Variables in Other Projects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Dragging-and-Dropping Settings and Copying Between Models or Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Referencing Part Geometries Other Than the Currently Edited Part (Geometry Editor) . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Using User-Defined Coordinate Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Creating an User-Defined Coordinate Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Setting Nonlinear Characteristics Using Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Creating Table Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Create 2D Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Create 3D Tables and 2D Tables That Vary with Physical Quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Creating Table Data Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Importing Table Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Exporting Table Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Managing Table in Study Using the [List Point Sequence] Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Managing Table in Project Using the Graph Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
4
CONTENTS
Model Operations
Importing Models from Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Importing CAD Models into JMAG-Designer from CAD Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Import CAD Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Replace the CAD Models Imported. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Importing Mesh Models into JMAG-Designer from Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Importing Model Outlines into JMAG-Designer from Drawing Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Importing Models into Geometry Editor from Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Import a Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Merge a Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Creating 2D CAD Models Using Geometry Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

2D CAD Model Creation Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Setting Geometry Editor Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Setting the Link Option Between JMAG-Designer and Geometry Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Exporting Model Images to Image Files and Printing Model Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Creating Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Editing Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Exit Sketch Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Drawing Outlines of Cross Sections of Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Draw a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Draw a Spline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Draw a Function Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Draw a Rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Draw a Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Draw an Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Draw an Ellipse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Draw an Elliptical Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Draw a Vertex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Create Coordinate Systems to Use with Drawings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Add Basic Shapes to a Sketch Using Sketch Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Perpendicular Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Parallel Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Horizontal/Vertical Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
A Line or Arc with a Constant Angle from the X-axis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Delete a Basic Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Merging Vertices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Using the Sketch Tool for Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Copy Basic Shapes Between Two Differing Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Using the Basic Shape Tool for Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Trim a Basic Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Divide Basic Shapes at Intersections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Create a Fillet on a Corner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Create a Chamfer on a Corner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Connect Two Basic Shapes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Create a Tangent Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Create a Vertical Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Create a Parallel Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Connect Two Points By Adding a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Merge Lines or Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
5
Operations
Scale a Basic Shape. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Divide Basic Shapes by Specified Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Delete Duplicate Vertices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Setting 2D Constraints to Limit Shape Position and Size of Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Set a 2D Constraint to a Basic Shape Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Set a 2D Constraint to a Basic Shape Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Edit a 2D Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Delete a 2D Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Moving Basic Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Move a Basic Shape Using a Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Move a Basic Shapes Using the Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Move a Basic Shape Between Two Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Copying Basic Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Use a Function to Copy a Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Copy a Basic Shape to a User-Defined Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Creating Regions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Create a Region Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Automatically Add a Region Boolean Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Delete a Region. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Processing Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Scale a Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Round the Corner of a Region (Fillet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Chamfer the Corner of a Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Offset a Region Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Move a Region Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Running Boolean Operations to Eliminate Duplication of Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Moving Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Copying Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Automatic Settings of Region Feature Based on Shapes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Convert a Region Edge to a Fillet Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Set Region Pattern Features Based on Region Periodicity or Symmetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Creating 2D Model Using the Geometry Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Search for Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Insert a Geometry Added to the Geometry Library into an Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Add Geometries Created to the Geometry Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Use the Same Geometry Library on Another Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Share a Geometry Library on a Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Creating 2D Wire Models Using Wire Templates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Using Original Region Templates Using Python Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Setting Geometry Parameter Set Lists to the Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Creating Points, Lines, and Faces at User-Defined Positions and Using Them for Model Creation . . 166
Grouping Geometries, Defining Directions and Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Setting Properties of Features or Sketches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Disabling Features and Sketches (Suppression Settings). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Creating Conditional Expressions to Determine Shape Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Responding to Errors and Warnings that Occurred in the Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Importing Models Created in the Geometry Editor into JMAG-Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Replacing Models Already Imported into JMAG-Designer with Models Edited in the Geometry Editor
172
Saving Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Exporting Models to Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
6
CONTENTS
Creating 3D CAD Models Using Geometry Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

3D CAD Model Creation Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Setting Geometry Editor Preferences, Setting the Link Option Between JMAG-Designer and Geometry
Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Creating Parts and Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Editing Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Exit Part Editing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Drawing Outlines of the Cross Sections of Parts, Creating Regions, and Setting 2D Constraints. . . . 182
Moving 2D Sketch Under Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Creating Solids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Extrude a Sketch to Create a Solid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Extrude a Solid Face to Create a Solid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Create Solid Connecting Faces or Faces and Vertex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Processing Solids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Cut Out Part of a Solid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Divide a Solid into Multiple Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Create a Vertex on a Solid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Scale a Solid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Round the Edges of a Solid (Fillet). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Chamfer the Edges of a Solid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Offset a Solid Face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Move a Solid Face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Automatically Perform Solid Feature Based on Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Convert a Solid Edge to a Fillet Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Set Solid Pattern Features Based on Solid Periodicity or Symmetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Running Boolean Operations to Eliminate Duplication of Solids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Separate Faces of Solids That Are Touching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Creating Shells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Creating Beams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Moving Solids, Shells, and Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Copying Solids, Shells, and Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Creating 3D Models Using the Geometry Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Creating Coil Models Using Coil Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Using Original Solid Templates Using Python Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Setting Geometry Parameter Set Lists to the Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Defining Part Positions with 3D Constraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Manually Set a 3D Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Edit a 3D Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Delete a 3D Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Processing Multiple Parts Simultaneously . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Cut a Part from Multiple Parts Simultaneously . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Divide Multiple Parts Simultaneously . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Scale Multiple Parts or Sketches Simultaneously. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Running Boolean Operations to Eliminate Part Duplication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Separate Faces of Parts That Are Touching. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Projecting Outlines of Solids to Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Creating Points, Lines, and Faces at User-Defined Positions and Using Them for Model Creation . . 214
Grouping Geometries, Defining Directions and Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
7
Operations
Creating Paths and Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Create a Path or Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Combine Paths or Beams into One . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Setting Properties of Features or Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Disable Features and Parts (Suppression Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Creating Conditional Expressions to Determine Shape Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
218
Saving Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Creating Mesh Models Using Geometry Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Mesh Model Creation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Setting Geometry Editor Preferences, Setting the Link Option Between JMAG-Designer and Geometry
Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Creating Parts and Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Drawing on Sketches, Creating Regions, and Setting 2D Constraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Creating 2D Meshes for Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Creating 3D Meshes Based on 2D Meshes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Creating 3D Meshes Based on 3D Mesh Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Deleting Duplicate Nodes in Meshes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Moving/Copying Meshes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Checking Mesh Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Renumbering Element IDs and Node IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Deleting a Mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Modifying Meshes in Element Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Convert a Part or Sketch to a Mesh Part. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Extrude an Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Make a Beam Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Copy an Element. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Move a Node. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Delete a Duplicate Node in a Mesh Part. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Split an Element Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Merge Multiple Element Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Scale an Element. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Subdivide an Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Change the Order in Which Element Nodes Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Copy/Merge Mesh Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Move/Copy Element Blocks Between Different Mesh Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Delete Elements in a Mesh Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Setting Properties of Features or Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Disable Features and Parts (Suppression Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
243
Saving Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
8
CONTENTS
Creating Geometries Using JMAG Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Creating Motor Models with JMAG-Express Classic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Creating a New Motor Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Editing the Imported Motor Model in JMAG-Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Creating 3D Transformer Models with the Transformer Modeling Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Creating a New Transformer Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Editing an Imported Transformer Model to JMAG-Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Importing Models from Commercial CAD Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Importing CAD Models Created With CAD Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Closing the Link Between JMAG-Designer and CAD Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Importing a CAD Model That Was Updated in CAD Software into JMAG-Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Using the Functions on Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Setting the Units of Measurement to Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Create and Apply the User-Defined Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Add the Units Applied to the Models in JMAG-Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Moving and Rotating Models Relative to the Global Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Checking Geometry Models for Setting Conditions and Generating Meshes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Deleting Mesh Generation Cache Data Associated with Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Setting Model or Part Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Deleting Models from Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Deleting one model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Deleting multiple models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Changing Names of Selected Parts Simultaneously. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Grouping Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Grouping Parts Using the Graphics Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Grouping Parts Using a Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Grouping Parts Using Names of Parts as Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Grouping parts Using Similar Strings as Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Grouping Parts Using Materials as Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Adding/Removing a Part to an Existing Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Ungrouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Ungrouping All of the Groups under [Assembly] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Removing Parts from Analysis Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Measuring Lengths and Angles of Shapes or Between Shapes (JMAG-Designer, Geometry Editor) . 266
Calculating Volume or Area for Parts and Elements (JMAG-Designer, Geometry Editor) . . . . . . . . . 267
Editing Dimensions in JMAG-Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Extending 2D Models to 3D Models in JMAG-Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Exporting Model Images to Image Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Exporting Model Images to Hoops Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Printing Model Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
9
Operations
Study Operations
Creating Analysis Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Creating a New Basic Study . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Creating Studies for Section Analysis from Existing Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Creating 2D/Axisymmetric Studies from Section Analysis Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Creating Iron Loss Analysis Studies from Magnetic Field Analysis Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Duplicating Studies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Duplicate Studies within the Same Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Duplicate Studies Between Differing Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Editing Studies with Results Included . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Deleting Studies from Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Managing Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Setting Study Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Exporting Studies to JCF Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Export an Active Case. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Export All Cases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Merging Two Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Responding to Errors and Warnings that Occurred in the Study . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Material Settings
Material Database Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Adding Material Data to the Material Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Create New Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Duplicate Existing Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Export Materials Created with JMAG-Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Import Materials Created with JMAG-Designer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Import Materials Created with JMAG-Studio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Import Materials Simultaneously . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Import Materials Created Individually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Import User Magnetized Magnets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Import Material Data Output from ThyssenKrupp's PowerCore Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Import the EMERF Material Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Editing Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Deleting Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Sharing Material Data on the Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Editing Materials That Have been Used in Analysis (Lock System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Organizing the Material Databases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Create Sub Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Modify Sub Folder Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Delete Sub Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Move Material Data between Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Synchronizing the Material Database File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
10
CONTENTS
Applying Materials to Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

Checking Material Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Selecting Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Search for Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Select a Categories and Display Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Bookmarking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Bookmark a Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Remove a Material from Bookmarks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Applying Materials to Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Apply Materials to Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Apply a Material to Part in the [Project Manager] tree. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Apply a Material Under [Materials] in the [Project Manager] tree to Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Apply a Material to Multiple Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Applying Materials to Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Changing Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Duplicating Materials Between Different Models or Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Setting Magnet Magnetization Distributions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

Setting Fixed Pattern Magnetization Distributions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Setting Magnetization Distributions of User-Defined Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Creating Magnets with User-Defined Magnetization Distributions (Magnetic Field Analysis with
Magnetization) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Process of Running Magnetic Field Analysis with Magnetization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Using Superconductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Process of Running Magnetic Field Analyses Using Superconductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Analysis Condition Settings
Setting Analysis Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Setting Conditions for a Study . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Setting Conditions for Grouped Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Changing Inflow/Outflow Current Direction in Each FEM Coil or Conductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Set Multiple FEM Coil/Conductor Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Group Conditions (Group (FEM Coil/Conductor Condition)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Group Existing FEM Coil/Conductor Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Group Multiple FEM Coil/Conductor Conditions That Are Created Based on One FEM Coil/Conductor Condi-
tion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Link Group Conditions (FEM Coil/Conductor) to Circuit Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Creating Part/Face/Edge/Vertex Groups to Set Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Create Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Use Sets to Specify Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Creating Element/Element Face/Element Edge/Node Groups to Set Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Create Mesh Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Set Conditions for Mesh Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Create a Mesh Group at the Same Time as Setting Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
11
Operations
Modify the Element of the Mesh Group during Condition Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Select Elements, Element Faces, Element Edges, and Nodes as Groups in Mesh Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Circuit Settings
Setting Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

The Basic Procedure for Creating Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Adding Circuits to Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Add an Empty Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Import a Circuit from the Circuit Information File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Exporting Circuits as Circuit Information Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Editing Circuits That Are Set in the Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Deleting Circuits That Are Set in the Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Creating Circuit Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Add or Delete a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Move a Component or Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Duplicate a Component or Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Rotate a Component or Wire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Exporting Circuit Diagrams as Image Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Recreating Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Setting Circuit Component Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Replacing Circuit Component Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Deleting Circuit Component Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Creating Original Circuit Component by Combining Multiple Components (Macro Component) . . 367
Create a New Macro Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Use the Created Macro Component on Another Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Delete the Created Macro Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Editing the Sub Circuit of the Macro Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Using Circuit Libraries to Reuse the Created Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Register the Created Circuit in the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Use Circuits Registered in the Library on Another Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Delete the Circuit Registered in the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Using JMAG-RT Models in Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

Running Control Circuit Analyses Using JMAG-RT Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Linking FEM Analysis and Control Circuit Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Meshing
Generating Mesh with JMAG-Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

Generating Mesh in Solid Models or Region Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Generating Mesh Leaving Existing Mesh Untouched . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Evaluating Generated Mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Using Options for Generating Mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
12
CONTENTS
Set Element Sizes for Parts, Faces, Edges, and Vertices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Set Element Sizes for Specified Regions in Air Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Use the Slide Mesh Function and the Standard Mesh Function ([Extended Slide Plane]). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Use the Slide Mesh Function and the Function That Generates a Mesh at Each Analysis Step ([Extended Slide Plane
(Used until V.18.0)]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Generate a Mesh with a Differences in Coarseness in Each Direction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Simplify a Part of Model Geometry at Mesh Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Generate a Mesh That Takes the Skin Effect into Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Generate a Layered Mesh Simulating a Laminated Steel Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Generate Meshes That Take the Thin Film Wire Coatings into Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Generate a Layered Mesh in Shell or Thin Laminated Solid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Generate the Same Mesh for Multiple Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Generate Symmetric Meshes in Models with Rotational Periodicity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Specify Mesh Division of a Surface Using a Result File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Using Options for Editing Mesh Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Change Mesh Model Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Apply Skews to Mesh Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Regenerate a Mesh for Specified Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Restoring Mesh Models to Their State Before Mesh Regeneration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Showing/Hiding Mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Creating a New Mesh Model Containing Only the Mesh of the Selected Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Coil Winding Settings
Automate Coil Windings/Cage Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

Setting Windings Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Running Analyses
Running Analyses from JMAG-Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

Using Cache for Calculations with Environment Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Running Analyses on Studies While They Are Displayed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Monitoring the Results of a Running Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Cancelling an Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Running Analyses on All Studies in Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Resuming Interrupted Analyses or Continuing Completed Analyses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Running Calculations Continuously Using Analysis Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Checking That Analyses Completed Correctly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Check Error/Warning Messages for Each Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Check Convergence Status of Calculations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Running Analyses from JMAG-Scheduler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425

Adding Jobs to JMAG-Scheduler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Add a Job from JMAG-Designer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Submit Jobs of All Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Submit Jobs of Active/All Cases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Resume Suspended Cases, Executing Extensions of Executed Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
13
Operations
Add a Job in the JMAG-Scheduler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428

Monitoring the Results of a Running Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Canceling Jobs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Resuming Interrupted Jobs or Continuing Completed Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Deleting Jobs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Resubmitting Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Specifying a Priority Job (Interrupt Job on Local Machine). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Changing the Job Execution Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Changing Job’s Status from [Queued] to [Wait]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Changing Job’s Status from [Wait] to [Queued]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Specifying the Number of Jobs to Run Simultaneously. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Exporting Job Settings to a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Adding a Job to the Job Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Excluding a Job from the Job Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Removing Job Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Loading Results Files into JMAG-Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Running Analyses from the Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437

Performing Analyses Using JMAG-Scheduler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
JMAG-Scheduler Command-Line Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Run Analyses from the Command Line Using JCF Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Run Analyses from the Command Line Using Scheduler Job Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Check Job Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Change the Number of Concurrent Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Cancel Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Remove Finished Jobs from the Job List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Performing Analyses Using ExecSolver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Perform Analyses Using JCF Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Resume Interrupted Analyses or Continue Completed Analyses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Interrupt Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Loading Results Files into JMAG-Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Displaying Results
Output Physical Quantities and Their Display Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453

Unit Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Magnetic Field Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Iron Loss Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Thermal Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Structural Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Electric Field Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Thermal Stress Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Transformer Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
14
CONTENTS
Integration Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Handling Result Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467

Load Result Data from Result Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Load Result Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Load Result Data by Specifying a Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Load Only Result Data for the Necessary Cases After Checking the Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Open Result Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Delete Result Data from Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Delete Result Data from Cases to Delete Result Files at the Same Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Delete Result Data from Cases While Keeping Result Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Delete Some Result Data from Result Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Checking Analysis Results in Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473

Displaying Analysis Results Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Restricting Items Displayed in Results Tables or Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Displaying Analysis Results Tables for Each Element or Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Displaying Analysis Results of Circuits in Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Display Terminal Voltages, Terminal Temperatures, or Terminal Control Signals in Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Display Potential Differences between Terminals or Temperature Differences between Terminals in Tables . . . 477
Display Contact Angles Between Brushes and Commutators in Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Checking Analysis Results in Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481

Displaying Time Series Graphs of Analysis Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Displaying Graphs of Result Values for Specified Paths. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Displaying Time Series Graphs of Result Values for Specified Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Creating Graphs That Take Skew Effects from 2D Analysis Results Data into Account . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Adding Calculation Processing to Graph Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Changing the Graph Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Exporting Graph Data to Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Exporting Graphs to Image Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Printing Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Checking the Distribution and Flux from an Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495

Displaying Results Contour Plots. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Displaying Results Vector Plots, Tensor Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
Displaying Flux Lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Displaying Multiple Result Plots Simultaneously . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Applying Magnification to Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Showing an Overlapping Model Outline Before Deformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Selecting Steps and Phases to be Displayed in the Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Displaying Results Images as Animations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Displaying Results Images of User-Defined Cross Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Displaying Partial Model Results in Full Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Displaying Circuit Analysis Results on Circuit Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Adding Calculation Processing to Analysis Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515

Calculating Magnetic Flux from Analysis Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Calculating the Average Value and Total Value of Specified Parts, Faces, and Edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
15
Operations
Calculating Electromagnetic Force and Torque from Analysis Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518

Creating Surfaces or Edges for Results Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Creating Custom Results by Applying Expressions to Analysis Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Adding Calculation Processing to Analysis Results of Distribution Quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
Using Scripts to Automate Results Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525

Adding Post Calculation Scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
Create New Post Calculation Scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
Import Post Calculation Scripts from Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Copy Results for Post Calculation Script from [Toolbox] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Setting Input Parameters for Post Calculation Script. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Editing Post Calculation Scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Copying Post Calculation Scripts to Toolbox Scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Deleting Post Calculation Scripts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Running Post Calculation Scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
Disabling/Enabling Post Calculation Scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Using User-Defined Response Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
Use User-Defined Response Values for Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
Displaying Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533

Displaying Case Reports or Parametric Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Managing Input/Output Table Data
Comparing Table Results Using the Graph Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537

Starting the Graph Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
Creating Datasets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Displaying Datasets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Deleting Datasets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Combining Datasets (Lissajous). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
Creating New Datasets by Adding Calculation Processing to Existing Datasets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
Creating Graphs That Account for Skew Effects from Datasets of 2D Analysis Results. . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Adding Datasets to Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Creating New Empty Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Removing Datasets from Graphs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Deleting Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Displaying Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Analysis Templates
Creating Templates of Analysis Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547

Procedure of Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
Creating an Analysis Template. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
16
CONTENTS
Add an Analysis Template under the [Analysis Templates] Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549

Save an Analysis Template in Any Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Applying an Analysis Template to a Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Checking the Contents of the Analysis Template. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
Parallel Computing, Remote Execution
Performing Large Scale Calculations Using Parallel Computing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557

Running Analyses Using SMP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
Running Analyses Using MPP/Hybrid Parallel Computing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
Prepare the Environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
Prepare the Analysis Hardware Environment (Network Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
Install JMAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
Prepare the MPI Environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
Check Network Operation and the MPI Environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Create Input Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
JCF Files (.jcf). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
MPP Hosts Files (.txt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Run Analyses Using MPP Function/Hybrid Parallel Computing Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Run with JMAG-Scheduler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
Run MPP Solvers from Shell/Batch Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
Run MPP Solvers via ExecSolver from Shell/Batch Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
Run MPP Solvers from Shell/Batch Files with Commercial Schedulers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
Run MPP Solvers via ExecSolver from Shell/Batch Files with Commercial Schedulers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
Running Analyses Using GPUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
Use the New GPU Solver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
Use the Previous GPU Solver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
Remote Execution of Analysis and Mesh Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585

Remote Execution Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
Remote Execution Methods and OS Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
Directly Using a Remote Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
Using Computation Nodes Managed by JMAG-RemoteSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
Using Computation Nodes Managed by Commercial Job Scheduler System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
Creating Custom Shell Scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
Shell Script Sample Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
Commands for Submitting Jobs to the Job Scheduler System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
Commands for Executing JMAG Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
JMAG-Designer Execution Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
ExecSolver Execution Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
JCoupled Execution Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
JobSystem Execution Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599
GroupedJobRunner Execution Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
Environment Variables Required for Remote Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
Adding Remote Machines and Job Scheduler System Settings on the Local Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
Set on the JMAG-Designer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
Set from the Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
Notes When Settings from the Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
Setting Remote Machines and Shells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
Exporting Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620
17
Operations
Importing Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620

Testing a Remote Machine Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620
Displaying a List of Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620
Displaying the Details of Each Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
Using Remote Machine to Run Analysis and Generate Mesh. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622
Analysis That Cannot Be Run Using Remote Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622
Run Analysis and Mesh Generation from JMAG-Designer Using Remote Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
Run Analysis from JMAG-Scheduler Using Remote Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624
Multiple Calculations
(Parametric Analysis and Optimization)
Running Calculations of Multiple Cases with Some Parameters as Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627

The Basic Procedure for Parametric Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
Selecting Parameters Having Values That Will Be Changed (Selecting Design Variables) . . . . . . . . . 630
Use Parameters as Design Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
Use Dimension Values as Design Variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
Use Part Materials as Design Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
Use Material Properties as Design Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
Assigning Values to Design Variables and Creating Multiple Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
Running Analyses on Multiple Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
Checking Results of Multiple Cases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
Filtering Cases with Specified Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
Creating Scalar Response Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
Creating Vector Response Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
Creating Response Graphs from Response Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
Formulating Objective-Based Optimal Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643

The Basic Procedure for Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644
Execute Parameter Optimization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644
Execute Topology Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
Execute Topology Optimization (Sensitivity Analysis) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646
Selecting Parameters Having Values That Will Be Changed (Selecting Design Variables) . . . . . . . . . 649
Running Optimizations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
Checking Optimization Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654
Check Parameter Optimization/Topology Optimization Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654
Check Topology Optimization (Sensitivity Analysis) Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655
Resuming Optimizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657
Parameter Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657
Topology Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
Topology Optimization (Sensitivity Analysis) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
Recreating Calculation Case of Topology Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659
Creating Input Files for Parametric Analysis From the Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662
Basic Procedure for Using JparamGenerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
Creating Input CSV Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664
Running JparamGenerator From the Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
18
CONTENTS
Procedure for Running JparamGenerator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665

JparamGenerator Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666
Output JPARAM Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667
Coupled Analysis
Running One-Way Coupled Analyses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671

Basic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672
Running One-Way Coupled Analyses Using Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
Use Loss Calculated from a Magnetic Field Analysis or Iron Loss Analysis in a Thermal Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
Use Loss Calculated from an Electric Field Analysis in a Thermal Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676
Running One-Way Coupled Analyses Using Temperature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678
Use Temperature Calculated from a Thermal Analysis in a Magnetic Field Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678
Use Temperature Calculated from a Thermal Analysis in an Electric Field Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679
Use Temperature Calculated from Thermal Analysis in a Structural Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680
Running One-Way Coupled Analyses Using Force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683
Use Electromagnetic Force Calculated from a Magnetic Field Analysis in a Structural Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683
Running One-Way Coupled Analyses Using Stress and Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685
Use Stress or Displacement Calculated from a Structural Analysis in a Magnetic Field Analysis or Iron Loss Analysis
685
Use Displacement Calculated from a Structural Analysis in a Thermal Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686
Running Direct Coupled Analyses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689

Basic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690
Creating Input Files for Coupled Analyses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690
Running Direct Coupled Analyses from JMAG-Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691
Run Direct Coupled Analyses Using Analysis Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691
Running Direct Coupled Analyses from JMAG-Scheduler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693
Add Jobs to JMAG-Scheduler from JMAG-Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693
Add Jobs in JMAG-Scheduler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 694
Running Direct Coupled Analyses from the Command Line Using JMAG-Scheduler . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696
Perform Analyses Using JCF Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696
Perform Analyses Using Job Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698
Application Study and Integration Study
Executing Application Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701

Executing Efficiency Map Analysis Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702
Create Maps in Speed-Priority Studies or Reduced Order Model Studies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702
Perform Efficiency Map Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702
Create an Efficiency Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704
Create a New Response Table from an Existing Response Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706
Update Response Tables by Adding Calculation Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706
Create an Accuracy-Priority Study from a Speed-Priority or Reduced Order Study. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706
Create Maps in Accuracy-Priority Studies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707
Perform Efficiency Map Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707
19
Operations
Create an Efficiency Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709

Add Result Values to an Existing Response Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710
Create a New Response Table from an Existing Response Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710
Update Response Tables by Adding Calculation Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710
Create Maps from External Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711
Create a Difference Map or Ratio Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 712
Executing Integration Analysis Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715

Create JMAG-RT Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716
Run an Integration Analysis Study. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
Create Maps from JMAG-RT Model Circuit Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718
Run Direct Coupled Analysis Between Integration Analysis Studies and Magnetic Field Analysis Studies
720
Dashboard Functions
Input Parameter and Result Items List Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 725

Checking and Editing Study Input Parameter Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727
Open the [Analysis Parameter View] Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727
Change the Layout and Display Items in the [Analysis Parameter View] Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728
Change Input Parameters in the [Analysis Parameter View] Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 732
Call Input Parameter Setting Values from the [Analysis Parameter View] Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 734
Generate Mesh and Execute Analysis from the [Analysis Parameter View] Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736
Run Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736
Checking the Results of Individual Cases or All Cases in a Single Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738
Prepare Diagrams and Filters to Display in the [Result View] Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738
Open the [Result View] Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738
Set the Layout and Display Items in the [Result View] Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
Executing Parametric Analysis from the [Analysis Parameter View] Dialog and Displaying the Results .
741
Tools
Using Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 747

Launching Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 749
JMAG-Express
Using JMAG-Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753

Use JMAG-Express to Perform Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 754
Use JMAG-Express to Perform Parametric Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 759
Use JMAG-Express to Perform Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 764
Link JMAG-Express and JMAG-Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766
Switch from JMAG-Express to JMAG-Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766
20
CONTENTS
Switch from JMAG-Designer to JMAG-Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766

Show Hidden Parameters in the Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767
Use Your Own Geometry in JMAG-Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768
Use Geometry Created in the Geometry Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768
Use Geometry in JMAG-Express That Was Created in the Geometry Editor on Another Machine. . . . . . . . . . . . 769
Third-party Software Links
Linking with SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773

Performing Coupled Analyses by Running JMAG and SPEED Simultaneously. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774
Linking with Abaqus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 779

Using JMAG Analysis Results in Abaqus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780
Use Force Calculated by JMAG in Abaqus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780
Use Loss Calculated by JMAG in Abaqus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 781
Using Abaqus Analysis Results in JMAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 783
Use Abaqus Results in a JMAG Magnetic Field Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 783
Use Abaqus Results in a JMAG Structural Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784
Simultaneously Running JMAG and Abaqus Using Mutual Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785
Add Jobs from JMAG-Scheduler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785
Add Jobs to JMAG-Scheduler from JMAG-Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788
Run Analyses from the Command Line Using CseCouplingDriver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788
Perform Coupled Analyses Using JCoupled Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788
Execute Extensions of Executed Jobs from JMAG-Scheduler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 790
Linking with STAR-CCM+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 791

Simultaneously Running JMAG and STAR-CCM+ Using Mutual Results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 792
Run StarccmpCosimDriver Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795
Notes When Executing STAR-CCM+ and JMAG Coupled Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795
Linking with Circuit Simulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797

Simultaneously Running JMAG and Circuit Simulators Using Mutual Results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798
Link with Simulink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798
Using JMAG Analysis Results in Circuit Simulators (JMAG-RT, JMAG-Express) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802
Running Batch Files for Analyses Linked with Third-party Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803
Linking Processes Using Batch Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804
Creating Batch Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805
Using Scripts
Using Scripts to Automate Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811

Recording Operations in JMAG as Scripts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812
Creating Scripts in Script Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813
Editing Scripts in Script Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814
Running Scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815
21
Operations
Importing Scripts from Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815

Exporting Scripts to Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816
Export Scripts from [Toolbox] in JMAG-Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816
Export Scripts from Script Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816
Using Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819

Accelerator Keys (Access Keys) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 820
Shortcut Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821
Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 822
JMAG-Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 822
Circuit Editor ([Edit Circuit] Dialog) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 824
Geometry Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825
Script Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826
Graph Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827
JMAG-Scheduler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 828
[Analysis Parameter View] Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 828
[Result View] Dialog/[All Cases Result Review] Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830
Solutions for Abnormal JMAG Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835

Opening Projects after JMAG-Designer Terminates Abnormally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836
Automatically Recording Scripts for Operations After Saving Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839
22
About This Edition
“JMAG User's Manual Operation Edition” explains the operation procedure of each function in the following
programs according to purpose.
• JMAG-Designer
• Circuit Editor
• Geometry Editor
• Transformer modeling tool
• JMAG-Scheduler
• Script Editor
MEMO JMAG user's manual is divided into contents.
• “JMAG Installation Manual”.
• “JMAG User's Manual Screen Configuration Edition”
• “JMAG User's Manual Operations Edition”
• “JMAG User's Manual Parameter Explanation Edition”
• “JMAG User's Manual JMAG-Express, JMAG-RT, JMAG-RT Viewer Edition”
• “JMAG User's Manual Coupled Analysis Edition”
• “JMAG User's Manual Files Edition”
• “JMAG User's Manual Licenses”
• “JMAG User's Manual Scripts Edition” and “Script Help”.
• “JMAG User's Manual Analysis Guide”
• “JMAG User's Manual Iron Loss Formulas”
23
Operations
24
Basic Operations
Creating Projects
This chapter describes JMAG-Designer's operations related to projects and environment setting.
The configuration of parts and analysis conditions are managed within “Projects.” JMAG-Designer launches
every time with an empty project (.jproj) open.
 Topics in This Chapter

• Opening Existing Projects (page 28)
• Using Trees and Tool Boxes (page 30)
• Saving Projects (page 32)
• Creating New Projects (page 33)
• Checking/Setting Project Properties (page 33)
• Loading Files into Projects (page 33)
• Using the Direct Access Function to Execute Commands and Functions (page 34)
• Undoing/Redoing Operations (page 35)
• Setting JMAG-Designer Preferences (page 36)
• Checking JMAG-Designer Version Information (page 36)
27
Operations
Opening Existing Projects

Open the project file (.jproj) in JMAG-Designer.
 Opening from startup window
1. Start JMAG-Designer.
When you start JMAG-Designer, the startup window will be displayed. JMAG-Designer
launches every time with an empty project open.
2. Select [JMAG Project Files (.jproj)] under [Open File].
The [Open File] dialog is displayed.
3. Select a project file.

Sample project files are stored in the JMAG installation folder.
(JMAG installation folder)\sample
When installing JMAG with the default setting in Windows machine, it becomes the following
folder.
C:\Program Files\JMAG-Designer22.2\sample
4. Click [Open].
The contents of the project are displayed in a tree format in JMAG-Designer's [Project Manager]
tree according to its hierarchical structure.
electric_Relay_result.jproj in the sample folder
28
Creating Projects
 Opening from JMAG-Designer
1. Select [File] > [Open] from the JMAG-Designer menu bar.

Or, click [Open] on the toolbar.
2. In the [Open File] dialog, select [JMAG Project Files (.jproj)] from list.
Here, [All JMAG Files (.jcf, .jproj, .plot, .jplot)] can be also selected.
3. Select the project file.
4. Click [Open].
 Operating the project files directly

The project file can also be opened from the following operation:
• Drag and drop the project file to active JMAG-Designer.
• Open the folder where the project file is located and double-click the project file.
29
Operations
Using Trees and Tool Boxes

The items of the JMAG-Designer project are managed in the [Project Manager] tree. The items of
the Geometry Editor assembly and the electrical/thermal circuit items of the Circuit Editor are also
managed in the tree.
The conditions and materials to be set for the JMAG-Designer project are managed in the [Tool-
box].
Expand and Collapse the Tree

• When clicking on the left side of each item in the tree, the item expands and the lower hierar-
chy is displayed. When the [] key on the keyboard is pressed with each item selected, it is dis-
played in the same way.
• Conversely, when clicking on the left side of each item in the tree, the item being expanded is
closed and the lower hierarchy is hidden. When the [] key on the keyboard is pressed with an
item selected, it will be hidden in the same way.
• To expand and collapse the tree from the menu, select the command under [View] > [Tree View
Control]. You can select [Expand All], [Collapse All], or [Collapse Inactive].
• To expand and collapse the tree using the shortcut keys, press the [Shift] and [\] keys to expand
all, the [\] key to collapse all, and the [/] key to close inactive items.
Select Multiple Items in the Tree

To select multiple items from the tree, click each item while holding down the [Ctrl] key or [Shift]
key on the keyboard. The following operations can be performed with multiple items selected:
 [Project Manager] tree of JMAG-Designer

• Set assembly properties (color and transparency level of parts)
• Set and clear parts constant settings
• Apply materials
• Delete conditions, materials, and mesh groups, and mesh conditions set to studies
• Group FEM Coil conditions and FEM Conductor conditions
• View settings and current directions for FEM Coil conditions and Group (FEM Coil) conditions
• Duplicate and delete cut planes, sets, coordinate systems, and mesh groups
• Switch between deleting, running, and disabling post-calculation scripts
• Delete images for case reports and analysis reports
• Duplicate and delete the display of results (history graphs, section graphs, probes, calculation
tools, response values, response graphs, contour plots, vector plots, flux lines).
MEMO Items spanning multiple studies cannot be selected.
 [Circuit Manager] tree of Circuit Editor

• Edit, duplicate, and delete circuit component properties:
This can only be performed when the circuit component properties are the same
30
Creating Projects
Duplicate with a Drag and Drop Operation on the Tree

With an item selected from the tree, hold down the [Ctrl] key on the keyboard while dragging the
mouse pointer, and the pointer is displayed with an arrow . Continue dragging the item to
another model or study in the tree to duplicate it and set it to where it was dropped. When the
selected item is a material, the material is applied to the part where it is dropped.
For example, if one or more studies created in model A are selected and dragged to model B, the
selected studies are duplicated to model B.
Rearrange Models and Studies in the Tree

The order of models and studies in the [Project Manager] tree can be changed from the [Project
Management] dialog.
1. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click a project.

2. Select [Manage Project].
The [Project Management] dialog is displayed. In the dialog, the models and studies included in
the project are displayed in a tree.
For details on the [Project Management] dialog, see “Parameter Explanation Edition”.
3. To rearrange models and studies one at a time, select the model or study from the list
and click a change position button ( or ).
To sort by model name or study name, click [Sort (Ascending)] or [Sort (Descending)].
4. Click [OK].
The rearranging performed in the [Project Management] dialog is reflected in the [Project Man-
ager] tree.
Switch Tabs in Toolbox

When changing the tab to be displayed, perform one of the following operations:
• Click each tab displayed in the left hand side of [Toolbox].
• When holding down the [Ctrl] key on the keyboard and pressing the [Page Up] key, the upper
tab of the current tab become active. When holding down the [Ctrl] key and pressing the [Page
Down] key, the lower tab of the current tab become active.
31
Operations
Saving Projects
 Overwrite the project
1. Select [File] > [Save] from the JMAG-Designer menu bar.

Or, click [Save] on the toolbar.
If this is the first time you are saving a project, the [Save As] dialog will appear when you perform
this operation. Specify a name and location to save the project, then click [Save].
If the project has been saved once before, this operation will overwrite it.
 Save the data with a different file name as a project file
1. Select [File] > [Save As] from the JMAG-Designer menu bar.
2. In the [Save As] dialog, set the file name and location.
3. Click [Save].
 Save only the model and study selected as a new project
1. Select [File] > [Project Export] from the JMAG-Designer menu bar.
2. In the [Project Export] dialog, select the checkboxes of the models and studies to be
exported.
• The corresponding model or study will be filtered and displayed on the list when part of the
model or study name is entered in the [Filter] box. A wildcard character (?, *) can be used.
• Click [Select All] and the checkboxes of all models and studies in the list will be selected.
• Click [Clear All] to clear the checkboxes of all models and studies.
3. To save the project in the old version format, change the [Save Version].
4. To save the analysis results (.jplot) with the project, select [Save Analysis Results].
5. Click [OK].
A dialog is displayed for specifying the file name and location.
6. Set the file name and location.
7. Click [Save].
When saving the project in an older version format, the [Project Export Warning] dialog displays
a list of features not supported in the old version.
32
Creating Projects
Creating New Projects

1. Select [File] > [New] from the menu bar.
A message dialog opens asking if you want to save the currently open project before closing it.
2. Click [Yes] or [No].
The open project closes and a new project opens.
Checking/Setting Project Properties

You can rename the project or add a description.
1. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click [Project].

2. Select [Properties].
3. In the [Project Properties] dialog, set the parameters.
For details on parameters, see “Parameter Explanation Edition”.
4. Click [OK].
Loading Files into Projects

Load analysis model data from the input JCF file for analysis execution of JMAG in the project.
 Opening from JMAG-Designer
1. Select [File] > [Open] from the menu bar.

Or, click [Open] on the toolbar.
The [Open File] dialog is displayed.
MEMO JCF file can be load from startup window.
2. Select [JMAG Jcf Files (.jcf)] from list.
Here, [All JMAG Files (.jcf, .jproj, .plot, .jplot)] can be also selected.
3. Select the JCF file.
4. Click [Open].
33
Operations
Using the Direct Access Function to Execute Commands and

Functions
Direct Access is a function to search for JMAG commands and functions from the keyword entered
by the user. The command you found can be executed on the spot and the setting panel of the func-
tion you found can be opened.
The functions and commands that can be searched for in the Direct Access function is as follows:
Program Items to be searched

JMAG-Designer • Commands displayed in the menu
• Commands displayed when right-clicking a model, study, or analysis group
in the [Project Manager] tree
• Functions displayed in the setting panels of the [Preferences] dialog
• Functions displayed in the setting panels of the [Study Properties] dialog of
the current study
Geometry Editor • Commands displayed in the menu
• Functions displayed in the setting panels of the [Preferences] dialog
MEMO In Geometry Editor, the result of the searched commands and fea-
tures depend on which item (assembly, sketch, part, mesh part) is active.
The steps for using Direct Access is as follows:
1. From the menu bar, select [View] > [Direct Access].

The [Direct Access] dialog is displayed.
2. Enter a keyword for a command or function in the [Direct Access] box.
Typing in part of the keyword will display the commands and functions related to the keyword.
3. From the commands and functions displayed, select the one you want to execute.
4. Press the [Enter] key on the keyboard.
This will execute the command selected or display the settings panel of the function selected.
34
Creating Projects
Undoing/Redoing Operations
Operations done on JMAG-Designer, Geometry Editor, Circuit Editor can be restored and redone
using the menu bar and toolbar buttons.
 Canceling the last performed operation

Select [Edit] > [Undo (XXX)] from the menu bar. “(XXX)” contains the operation performed
immediately before. For example, “new contour plot”, “Add local coordinate” etc.
You can also use [Undo] on the toolbar.
MEMO [Maximum Undo Level] can bet set in [System] in the [Preferences] dialog. For details, see “Set-
ting JMAG-Designer Preferences” on page 36.
 Restoring an operation that was canceled

Select [Edit] > [Redo (XXX)] from the menu bar.
You can also use [Redo] on the toolbar.
35
Operations
Setting JMAG-Designer Preferences

The settings that apply to the entire system of JMAG-Designer can be set in the [Preferences] dialog.
1. Select [Tools] > [Preferences] from the menu bar.

The [Preferences] dialog is displayed.
2. Set the parameters on each setting panel.
Click [Restore Defaults] displayed in the lower part of the dialog, when specifying each setting to
default in the [Preferences] dialog.
3. Click [OK].
The setting in the [Preferences] dialog is applied to JMAG-Designer.
Checking JMAG-Designer Version Information

1. Select [Help] > [About] from the menu bar.
The [Version Information] dialog is displayed.
36
Specifying Views
This chapter describes the procedure for changing the items displayed in the graphics window and for changing
the viewpoint.

• Common Operations for Screen Layout (page 38)
• Expand the Graphics Window (Temporarily Hiding the [Toolbox] and [Undo Stack] Box) (page 38)
• Switch Panels, Buttons, and Shortcut Icons Between Show/Hide (page 39)
• Detach and Attach Panels (page 40)
• Reset Window and Dialog Positions to Default (page 41)
• Selecting Display Items (page 42)
• Expand the Graphics Window (Temporarily Hiding the [Toolbox] and [Undo Stack] Box) (page 38)
• Switch Panels, Buttons, and Shortcut Icons Between Show/Hide (page 39)
• Select Model Types for Screen Display (page 42)
• Select Model Display Methods (page 42)
• Display Only a Selected Part, Element, Air Region, Shell Element, or Beam Element (page 43)
• Display IDs for Parts, Faces, Edges, Vertices, Elements, and Nodes (page 45)
• Change a Graphics Window Layout and Background Color (page 45)
• Set a Part Color and Transparency (page 46)
• Highlight a Vertex (page 47)
• Disable the Highlight Function During Mouse Hover in the [Project Manager] (page 47)
• Selecting Viewpoints (page 48)
• Rotate a Model Display (page 48)
• Change the Display Size of a Model or Circuit (page 49)
• Move the Display Position inside a Graphics Window (page 49)
• Scroll in the Circuit Creation Window (page 49)
• Change the Viewpoint Using Menus and Toolbar Buttons (page 49)
• Change the Viewpoint by Specifying the Rotation Angle in Each Axis (page 50)
• Add a User-Defined Viewpoint and Apply It to a Custom Model (page 51)
• Displaying Models Using Multiple Windows (page 53)
37
Operations
Common Operations for Screen Layout

• Expand the Graphics Window (Temporarily Hiding the [Toolbox] and [Undo Stack] Box) (page
38)
• Switch Panels, Buttons, and Shortcut Icons Between Show/Hide (page 39))
Expand the Graphics Window (Temporarily Hiding the [Toolbox] and [Undo Stack]
Box)
By clicking , the [Toolbox] in JMAG-Designer and the [Toolbox] and [Undo Stack] box in Geom-
etry Editor can be hidden temporarily. Use this function when wanting to expand the graphics win-
dow.
In the default screen layout, buttons are displayed in the lower left corner of [Toolbox] and the
upper right corner of the [Undo Stack] box.
38
Specifying Views
By clicking , [Toolbox] or the [Undo Stack] box can be hidden from the JMAG-Designer or
Geometry Editor window. will then change to .
By clicking , [Toolbox] or the [Undo Stack] box can be made to appear in the JMAG-Designer (or
Geometry Editor) screen. will then change to .
MEMO [Toolbox] and the [Undo Stack] box will remain hidden via only while JMAG-Designer is
running. To keep [Toolbox] and the [Undo Stack] box hidden, follow the steps as described in the expla-
nation “Switch Panels, Buttons, and Shortcut Icons Between Show/Hide” on page 39.
Switch Panels, Buttons, and Shortcut Icons Between Show/Hide
 Panels and toolbars

The [Project Manager], [Toolbox] and toolbars in JMAG-Designer can be displayed/not-displayed,
as well as the [Model Manager] and the [Undo Stack] box.
• Click on the right corner of the title bar of each panel to hide the panel.
Example: Project Manager
• Selecting [View] > [Toolbar] from the menu bar on each window displays a menu with the titles
of the panels and toolbars. The same menu is also displayed when right-clicking in an empty
space within the area where the menu or toolbar is displayed.
A check mark is attached to the left side of the currently displayed panel or toolbar. Selecting the
displayed panel or toolbar from the menu hides it, and if you select the non-displayed panel or
toolbar, it switches to display.
 Toolbar buttons
Buttons are displayed in the toolbar per item. When all buttons in the toolbar are not displayed due
to the screen size, all buttons can be expanded and shown by clicking [>>] displayed on the right
side of the toolbar.
Also, buttons of Geometry Editor toolbars may be displayed in groups of related functions. In that
case, the arrow icon is displayed on the right side of the buttons. Clicking the arrow icon  dis-
plays all buttons belonging to the group.
39
Operations
Left: The arrow icon  displayed on the right side of the button on the toolbar,
Right: [>>] displayed on the right side of the toolbar
 Shortcut icon
The shortcut icons are displayed in the lower part of the JMAG-Designer graphics window. Click
each icon to display the dialog of the current study.
Shortcut icon Dialog

JMAG-Express View
[Analysis Parameter View] dialog
[All Cases Result View] dialog
[Study Properties] dialog

[Equation Group] dialog
[Optimization] dialog
[Mesh Properties] dialog
To hide a shortcut icon, select [Display] > [Shortcut] > (dialog name) from the menu bar and clear
the checkbox.
To show the shortcut icon again, select [Display] > [Shortcut] > (dialog name) from the menu bar
and select the checkbox.
Detach and Attach Panels

Panels can be detached from the main window.
• Click the button on the right side of each panel title bar to detach that panel from the main win-
dow. The same operation is possible by double clicking the title bar of each panel itself, or by
dragging the title bar of each panel to out-side the main window with the mouse pointer.
Example: Model Manager title bar
• When wanting to attach each panel to the main window, drag-and-drop each panel onto the
main window. A panel can be dragged to inside a space on the main window and attached there
40
Specifying Views
while that space is displayed in blue. The same operation is possible by double clicking the panel
title bar while it is detached.
Example: Model Manager
Reset Window and Dialog Positions to Default

To restore the default position of windows and dialogs, such as the [Edit Circuit] window and the
[Study Properties] dialog, select [Tools] > [Reset Window Position] from the JMAG-Designer menu
bar.
41
Operations
Selecting Display Items

• Select Model Types for Screen Display (page 42)
• Select Model Display Methods (page 42)
• Display Only a Selected Part, Element, Air Region, Shell Element, or Beam Element (page 43)
• Display IDs for Parts, Faces, Edges, Vertices, Elements, and Nodes (page 45)
• Change a Graphics Window Layout and Background Color (page 45)
• Set a Part Color and Transparency (page 46)
• Highlight a Vertex (page 47)
Select Model Types for Screen Display

One model sometimes has both CAD data (solid, region) and mesh data. The model type for dis-
playing can be selected with the following operations.
• Clicking [View Model] displays the CAD model.
• Clicking [View Mesh Geometry] displays the outline of the mesh model.
• Clicking [View Mesh] displays the mesh model.
MEMO [View Model] is not available when displaying the vector or contour results. Select the [View
Mesh Geometry] to display the vector or contour plot results.
Select Model Display Methods

Selecting the displaying method for a model can be selected as follows:
• Clicking [Shaded] displays a shaded model. A model is shaded by default.
• Clicking [Hidden Lines Removed] displays a model with the same color as the background so
that only the visible lines of the model are displayed.
• Clicking [Wireframe] shows a model using a wire frame.
42
Specifying Views
Left: Shaded, Center: Hidden Lines Removed, Right: Wireframe
Display Only a Selected Part, Element, Air Region, Shell Element, or Beam
Element
 Switch between show/hide from the tree

Parts can be switched between being shown/hidden by using the checkboxes for each part under
[Assembly] in the [Project Manager] tree.
Air regions, shell elements, and beam elements can similarly be switched between being shown/hid-
den. checkboxes for air regions, shell elements, and beam elements are displayed under [Mesh] for
each study.
43
Operations
Geometry and elements can be switched between being shown/hidden by using the menu displayed
when right-clicking each item displayed in the [Model Manager] tree. The icon image displayed in
the [Model Manager] tree will change for the geometry and elements that are hidden from display.
(1) Shown, (2) Hidden (using the [Invisible] command),

(3) Hidden (using the [Hide Selected Geometries] command),
(4) Hidden (using the [Invisible] command and the [Hide Selected Geometries] command)
 Switch between show/hide from the graphics window

Parts and elements can also be switched between being shown/hidden from the menu that is dis-
played when right-clicking in the graphics window. Parts and elements can be switched between
being shown/hidden even while setting panels for conditions and features remain open.
JMAG-Designer
• [Show Selected Part] • [Show All Shell] for 3D models
• [Hide Selected Part] • [Hide All Shell] for 3D models
• [Show All Parts] • [Show All Beam] for 2D models
• [Hide All Parts] • [Hide All Beam] for 2D models
• [Show All Air Region]
• [Hide All Air Region]
Note the following:

• When a single case or study is displayed in multiple windows, show/hide settings remain separate
for each window.
44
Specifying Views
• Show/hide settings for elements are effective only for the active case. When switching the active
study or case via the [Project Manager] tree, show/hide settings for each individual element are
cleared.
Geometry Editor
• [Show Only Selected Geometries] • [Show Only Selected Elements]
• [Hide Selected Geometries] • [Hide Selected Elements]
• [Show All Geometries] • [Show Only Elements of Selected Mesh Blocks]
• [Hide All Geometries] • [Hide Elements of Selected Mesh Blocks]
Note the following:

• Commands for switching geometry between being shown/hidden are displayed in [Geometry
Select] mode .
• Geometry that can be shown/hidden are limited to those that can be selected in [Geometry
Select] mode . The following geometry and items can be selected during [Geometry Select]
mode .
Solids, regions, basic shapes, reference geometries, paths
• Commands for switching elements between being shown/hidden are displayed when mesh parts
are being created.
Display IDs for Parts, Faces, Edges, Vertices, Elements, and Nodes
To display part or face IDs in the graphics window, select [View] > [ID] > (item) from the menu bar.
The check marks to the left of each item indicate that the item is displayed (or applied) in the graph-
ics window.
When [Show All IDs] is checked under [View] > [ID], the IDs of parts and faces that do not appear
on model surfaces are also displayed.
Change a Graphics Window Layout and Background Color

The layout and background color of the graphics window can be changed in the [Preferences] dia-
log. Selecting [Tool] > [Preferences] from the menu bar opens the [Preferences] dialog.
 JMAG-Designer
• [Rendering]
• [Display]:
[Axis Triad], [Shadow]
45
Operations
• [Appearance]
• [Background Color]
• [Mesh Line Color], [Model Outline Color], [Element Color], [Node ID Color]
• [Layout]
• [Labels]:
[Study Title], [Case], [Step], [Time/Frequency], [Coupled Analysis Time], [Phase]
• [Scalebar]:
[Vector], [Contour]
• [Contour] of [Probes], [Maximum position], and [Minimum position]
 Geometry Editor
• [Rendering]
• [Display]:
[Axis Triad], [Number of Elements/Number of Nodes], [Shadow]
• [Appearance]
• [Background Color]
• [Select Color]:
[Element ID Color], [Node ID Color]
Set a Part Color and Transparency

To set the color and transparency of a part or parts, right-click the part under [Assembly] in the
[Project Manager] tree, and select [Properties].
• To change the transparency of a part or parts, move the [Transparency] slider bar.
• To change the color of a part or parts, click [Color], and select the color from the color palette.
Color palette
To use a color not displayed in the color palette, click . Create the color in the [Select Color] dia-
log and click [OK].
46
Specifying Views
Highlight a Vertex
Select [View] > [Visibility] > [Vertices] from menu bar to highlight the vertices of all the parts in the
graphics window.
Disable the Highlight Function During Mouse Hover in the [Project Manager]
Hover the mouse pointer over items displayed in the [Project Manager] tree such as materials and
conditions, to display the parts and elements, etc., to which those items are set to as highlighted in
the graphics window.
The highlight function during mouse hover can be disabled when using large-scale models to reduce
the amount of load on JMAG-Designer and enable operations to proceed more smoothly.
To disable the highlight function during mouse hover, select [Select] > [Highlight Target on Mouse
Over] from the menu bar, and remove the check mark from the left of the [Highlight Target on
Mouse Over] command. When not checked, highlight by clicking on the item in the [Project Man-
ager] tree.
47
Operations
Selecting Viewpoints
By changing the viewpoint, materials and conditions can easily be set for each part.
In the lower left corner of the graphics window, the orientation of the model in the coordinate sys-
tem is indicated by the icon as shown in the following figure.
MEMO Shortcut settings for operations such as enlarging/shrinking and rotating, for models can be
changed and customized to the same as those for commercial CAD software in the JMAG-Designer
[Preferences] dialog [Operation] setting panel. Settings configured in the [Operation] setting panel are
made effective not only in JMAG-Designer, but also Geometry Editor and the Circuit Editor. For
details, see “Parameter Explanation Edition”.
• Rotate a Model Display (page 48)
• Change the Display Size of a Model or Circuit (page 49)
• Move the Display Position inside a Graphics Window (page 49)
• Scroll in the Circuit Creation Window (page 49)
• Change the Viewpoint Using Menus and Toolbar Buttons (page 49)
• Change the Viewpoint by Specifying the Rotation Angle in Each Axis (page 50)
• Add a User-Defined Viewpoint and Apply It to a Custom Model (page 51)
Rotate a Model Display

The model can be rotated as follows. While a model is rotated, a red mark indicating the center of
rotation is displayed.
 Using the toolbar button

Move the mouse pointer while holding down the left-click button on the mouse in the graphics win-
dow after selecting [Rotate] .
48
Specifying Views
 Using the mouse

• Rotate the model relative to the center of the graphics window:
Press and hold the mouse wheel and drag the model.
• Rotate the model relative to any point in the graphics window:
Press and hold the [Shift] key on the keyboard, press the mouse wheel at a point that is to be the
center of the rotation, and drag the model.
• Rotate the model relative to the center of the model:
Press and hold the [Ctrl] key on the keyboard and on the mouse wheel, and then drag the model.
Change the Display Size of a Model or Circuit
 Using toolbar buttons

• [Fit to Window] adjusts the view to display the entire model in the graphics window.
• With selecting [Zoom] , the view of a model can be enlarged by pressing and holding the left
mouse button, and then moving the mouse pointer up in the graphics window. The view of a
model can be shrunk by pressing and holding the left mouse button, and then moving the mouse
pointer down in the graphics window.
• With selecting [Zoom to Area] , the view for an area of the model can be enlarged by pressing
and holding down the left mouse button while selecting the area to enlarge and then releasing.
 Zoom in and zoom out using the mouse

• When scrolling the mouse wheel forward, the display of the graphics window zooms in based on
the position of the pointer. Scrolling backwards zooms out.
• When holding down the [Shift] key on the keyboard and performing the same operation, the
display zooms in or out with the center of the graphics window as the reference position.
Move the Display Position inside a Graphics Window

The position of the model or circuit diagram that is displayed in the window can be changed as fol-
lows:
• The model is panned as the mouse is moved while pressing and holding the left mouse button
after selecting [Pan] .
• Moving the mouse while holding down the right mouse button and center mouse button (the
scroll wheel) allows the display position inside the circuit creation window to be moved in the
same direction.
Scroll in the Circuit Creation Window

Holding down the center mouse button (the scroll wheel) while pressing the left, right, up, or down
arrow key on the keyboard allows the window to be scrolled in the same key direction.
Change the Viewpoint Using Menus and Toolbar Buttons

JMAG has menu and toolbar buttons for various viewpoints. To change the viewpoint, select [View]
> [Viewpoint] > (Viewpoint name) from the menu bar.
49
Operations
MEMO You can also use the toolbar buttons on the [Viewpoint] toolbar (such as [Front] ) and the
menu displayed by right-clicking in the graphics window.
JMAG has the following default viewpoints.
Coordinate
Viewpoint Toolbar button Descriptions
System
Front Displays the front of the model.
The Z-axis of the coordinate system faces out of the
screen, and the Y-axis faces upward.
Back Displays the back of the model.
The Z-axis of the coordinate system faces into the
Top Displays the top of the model.
The Y-axis of the coordinate system faces out of the
screen, and the Z-axis faces downward.
Bottom Displays the bottom of the model.
The Y-axis of the coordinate system faces into the
screen, and the Z-axis faces upward.
Left Displays the left side of the model.
The X-axis of the coordinate system faces into the
Right Displays the right side of the model.
The X-axis of the coordinate system faces out of the
Isometric View Displays the model in an isometric view.
The coordinate system is shown so that the angle of
each coordinate axis to the viewpoint axis is equal.
The X, Y, and Z axes are shown to be 120 degrees
apart from each other referenced to the plane of the
graphics window.
Change the Viewpoint by Specifying the Rotation Angle in Each Axis

The viewpoint can be adjusted precisely by specifying the rotational angle from each global coordi-
nate axis.
1. Select [View] > [Viewpoint] > [View Control] from the menu bar.
Or click [Show the View Control Dialog] .
2. In the [View Control] dialog, set the parameters.
3. Click [Apply] or [Apply All Windows].
When [Apply] is clicked, the viewpoint set is applied to the active window.
When [Apply All Windows] is clicked, the viewpoint set will be applied to all windows.
4. Click [Close].
50
Specifying Views
Add a User-Defined Viewpoint and Apply It to a Custom Model

By adding any viewpoint to the list on the [Views] tab of the Toolbox, different models can be dis-
played from the same viewpoint.
You can also save the added viewpoints to a file and use them on another machine.
 Saving a viewpoint
1. Click the [Views] tab in the [Toolbox].

2. Position the model in the desired orientation to save the viewpoint.
3. Click [Add].
The orientation setting is added to the [Views] list.
 Applying a viewpoint

2. Select a viewpoint from the [Views] list.
3. To apply a viewpoint to the active window only, click [Apply].
To apply to all windows, click [Apply All Windows].
The orientation of the model will change to the selected viewpoint.
MEMO Double-clicking a viewpoint in the [Views] list applies that viewpoint to the active window.
MEMO Viewpoints apply only to windows that are expanded, not to windows that are minimized.
 Changing the name of a viewpoint

Right-click a viewpoint in the [Views] list and select [Rename] to open the entry field. Enter the
new name and press [Enter] on the keyboard.
MEMO The entry field is also displayed if you do the following:
• Double-click a viewpoint.
• Select a viewpoint in the [Views] list and press the [F2] key.
 Deleting a viewpoint
Select a viewpoint in the [Views] list and click [Delete].
 Exporting viewpoints to a file

2. Click [Export].
3. In the [Export Viewpoints] dialog, select the checkbox of the viewpoint to export.
Click [Select All] to select all checkboxes.
Click [Select None] to clear all checkboxes that are selected.
4. Click [OK].
5. In the [Export Viewpoints] dialog, specify a file name and location.
The file type is set at [Viewpoint Files (.xml)].
6. Click [Save].
51
Operations
 Importing viewpoints from a file

2. Click [Import].
3. In the [Import viewpoint] dialog, select a viewpoint file to import from the list.
The file type is set at [Viewpoint Files (.xml)].
4. Click [Open].
The imported viewpoints are displayed in the [Views] list.
52
Specifying Views
Displaying Models Using Multiple Windows

A model can be displayed using multiple windows.
 Opening a new window

Select [Window] > [New Window] from the menu bar. The active window is duplicated and a new
window of the same model is displayed.
 Switching an active window

Clicking on a window changes that window to the active window.
Also, select [Window] > [Next]/[Previous] from the menu bar to switch the active window to
another window.
 Displaying windows side-by-side

Select [Window] > [Tile] from the menu bar to display multiple windows vertically.
Select [Window] > [Cascade] from menu bar to display multiple windows in cascading order.
 Closing a window
Select [Window] > [Close] from the menu bar to close the active window.
Select [Window] > [Close not active] from the menu bar to close all the windows that are not active.
53
Operations
54
Selecting Parts, Faces, Elements, and Nodes
This chapter describes how to select a part (or face, edge, vertex, node, element edge, element face, element)
from the model. In JMAG, there are many opportunities to select parts (or aces, edges, vertices, nodes, element
edges, element faces, elements) by setting conditions, materials, mesh generation, etc.

• Switching Selection Types (page 56)
• Selecting with the Mouse (page 57)
• Selecting All Objects in the Specified Frame at Once (page 58)
• Selecting Objects by Specifying Their IDs (page 61)
• Selecting Objects by Specifying Their Coordinates (page 61)
55
Operations
Switching Selection Types

Click the following buttons to switch what you select.
 JMAG-Designer
• [Select Vertex]
• [Select Edge]
• [Select Face] :
3D model only.
• [Select Part]
• [Select Node]
• [Select Element Edge]
• [Select Element Face] :
3D model only.
• [Select Element]
MEMO [Select Element Face] cannot be used for 2D model or an axisymmetric model.
In a section analysis study or a transformer analysis study, [Select Element Face] can be used for condi-
tions or setting materials in a 3D model. [Select Element Face] cannot be used to display results for a 2D
model or an axisymmetric model.
 Geometry Editor
• [Geometry Select]
• [Basic Shape Select Filter]
• [Constraint Select Filter]
• [Region Select Filter]
• [Node Select]
• [Element Edge Select]
• [Element Face Select] :
3D model only.
• [Element Select]
56
Selecting with the Mouse

1. Select [View] > [Select].
2. On the graphics window, click the part (or face, edge, vertex, node, element edge, ele-
ment surface, element).
The part (or face, edge, vertex, node, element edge, element face, element) is selected.
3. You can simultaneously select multiple parts (or faces, edges, vertices, nodes, element
edges, element faces) by holding down the [Shift] key or [Ctrl] key on the keyboard.
 Select using the keyboard

Targets can be selected by placing the cursor over the target, such as part or edge, and then left-click-
ing in the graphics window.
The selecting operation in JMAG-Designer is altered as the following by pressing a modifier key on
a keyboard.
• [Shift] key: Add to existing selection
• [Ctrl] key: Invert selection
• [Alt] key: Clear selection
The following are examples where the modifier keys are used in specific operations. Use the modifier
keys when it is necessary for required operations.
[Shift] key (add to existing selection)

• An object that exists on the position where the cursor is placed is selected when clicking on the
graphics window while pressing the [Shift] key.
• The object is still selected if the cursor is placed on the same position, and is clicked again while
pressing the [Shift] key.
• While an object is still selected, move the position of the cursor to another area and click the
graphics window while pressing the [Shift] key. This can select a new object while the previously
specified object is still selected.
• Specifying an area while pressing the [Shift] key selects the entire area including the area that is
not selected previously.
[Ctrl] key (invert selection)

• An object that exists on the position where the cursor is placed is selected, when clicking on the
graphics window while pressing the [Ctrl] key.
• Clicking on an area that is already selected while pressing the [Ctrl] key clears the selection
• The area that is selected is cleared and instead, the area that was not selected is specified when
selecting an area while pressing the [Ctrl] key.
[Alt] key (clear selection)

• An object cannot be selected by clicking on the graphics window while pressing the [Alt] key.
• Clicking on a single object while pressing the [Alt] key when multiple objects are already selected
clears the selection where the cursor is placed, but does not clear the other objects.
• The entire area that is selected is cleared when selecting an area while pressing the [Alt] key.
57
Operations
Selecting All Objects in the Specified Frame at Once

You can select parts, faces, edges, vertices, nodes, element edges, element faces, or elements collec-
tively within a specified rectangle or circle.
• Specify a Region Using the Mouse (page 58)
• Specify a Region Using the Dialog (page 59)
Specify a Region Using the Mouse
 Specify a rectangle frame

By specifying the positions of two vertices on the diagonal, the frame of the rectangle is determined
and the object within that frame is selected.
1. From the menu bar, select [Select] > [Rectangle Region Selection].
Or, click [Rectangle Region Selection] on the toolbar.
When this operation is performed, [Select] in the toolbar is automatically selected.
2. Click at any position and drag.

The clicked position becomes the vertex of the rectangle. The rectangular frame is displayed as a
blue line on the graphics window.
3. Release your finger from the left mouse button at the desired position.
The position of the mouse pointer when the finger is released becomes the other vertex of the
rectangle.
The rectangle frame is now determined and the object within the frame is selected.
MEMO To deselect a selection, click a blank space in the graphics window.

MEMO To deselect a portion of a selection, hold down the [Ctrl] key and click the object to be dese-
lected.
MEMO If you select an object while [Sight Through] is selected, the object will be selected even if
it is not visible on the surface.
 Specify a circular frame

By specifying the center point and one point on the circumference, a circular frame is determined
and the object within that frame is selected.
1. From the menu bar, select [Select] > [Circular Region Selection].
Or, click [Circular Region Selection] on the toolbar.
58
2. Click and drag at the desired position.

The clicked position becomes the center point of the circle. The circle frame is displayed as a red
line on the graphics window.
3. Release your finger from the left mouse button at the desired position.
The position of the mouse pointer when the finger is released becomes a point on the circumfer-
ence of the circle.
The circular frame is now determined and the object within that frame is selected.
lected.
 Specify a polygonal frame

By specifying multiple vertices, you can determine the frame of the polygon and select objects
within that frame.
1. From the menu bar, select [Select] > [Polygon Region Selection].
Or, click [Polygon Region Selection] on the toolbar.
2. Click and drag at the desired position.
The clicked position is the starting point of the polygon. The polygonal frame is displayed as a
green line on the graphics window.
3. Move the mouse pointer to the desired position and click.
4. Repeat moving and clicking to the desired position to determine the vertices of the
polygon.
5. Move the mouse pointer to the starting point of the polygon and click.
The polygonal frame is now determined and the object within that frame is selected.
lected.
Specify a Region Using the Dialog
 Specify a rectangular or rectangular frame

By specifying the positions of two vertices on the diagonal, a rectangular or rectangular frame is
determined, and the object within the frame is selected.
1. From the menu bar, select [Select] > [Select Range].

2. In the [Select Range] dialog, set the parameters.
3. Click [Apply].
59
Operations
The object within the specified frame is selected.

MEMO Only parts, faces, edges, vertices, elements, element faces, element edges, and nodes that are
completely contained in the specified frame will be selected. Objects that are only partially contained
in the frame will not be selected.
4. To make an additional selection, change the coordinates of [Lower Left] and [Upper
Right] and click [Apply] again.
To cancel the selection, click [Cancel].
5. When the selection is complete, click [Close].
 Specify a circular or cylindrical frame

By determining a circular or cylindrical frame, you select the object within that frame. In addition to
circular or cylindrical frames, fan or doughnut shaped frames can also be specified.
1. From the menu bar, select [Select] > [Select Circle].

2. In the [Select Circle] dialog, set the parameters.
3. Click [Apply].
The object within the specified frame is selected.
4. To make an additional selection, change the value of each parameter and click [Apply]
again.
To cancel the selection, click [Cancel].
60
Selecting Objects by Specifying Their IDs

You can select a part, face, edge, element, vertex, or node with an ID by specifying its ID.
1. From the menu bar, select [Select] > [Select ID].

2. In the [Select ID] dialog, enter an ID in the [ID] box.
For details on parameter, refer to “Parameter Description Edition”.
3. Click [Apply].
4. To make an additional selection, change the number in [ID] and click [Apply] again.
To deselect, click [Clear].
Selecting Objects by Specifying Their Coordinates

You can select a part, face, edge, element, element face, or element edge that contains those coordi-
nates by specifying the coordinates. You can also select vertices or nodes at specified coordinates.
1. From the menu bar, select [Select] > [At Coordinate].

2. In the [Select at Coordinate] dialog, enter coordinate values in the [X], [Y], and [Z]
boxes.
For details on parameter, refer to “Parameter Description Edition”.
3. Click [Apply].
4. To make an additional selection, change the coordinates and click [Apply] again.
To deselect, click [Clear].
61
Operations
62
Parameter Settings
Setting Parameters
In this chapter, the procedure for setting parameters in JMAG-Designer, Geometry Editor, etc. is explained.

• Specifying Analysis Condition and Function Settings (page 66)
• Defining Axes and Directions (page 68)
• Specifying Results Files To Be Referenced (page 73)
• Assigning Numerical Expressions and Variables to Parameter Values (page 79)
• Dragging-and-Dropping Settings and Copying Between Models or Studies (page 82)
• Referencing Part Geometries Other Than the Currently Edited Part (Geometry Editor) (page 83)
65
Operations
Specifying Analysis Condition and Function Settings

Some conditions and functions specify the setting target in order to determine the range to which
they are applied. For example, the following apply.
• The periodic boundary of the Periodic Boundary condition (face, edge, element face, element
edge, set, mesh group).
• Heat source target of Heat Source condition (part, face, element, element face, set, mesh group).
• Rotor and mover of Motion condition (part, element, set, mesh group)
• Calculation target of Magnetic Flux Calculation (face, edge, element face, element edge, set,
mesh group).
• Calculation target of result calculation (part, surface, edge).
Setting target for conditions and functions are displayed in a list. The following operations can be
performed in each list:
 Operations from buttons

Button Description
[Edit] Updates elements, element faces, element edges, or nodes contained in the
currently selected mesh group. After clicking this button, select elements,
element faces, element edges, or nodes in the graphics window, then click
[OK] at the bottom of the graphics window.
[Delete] Removes the currently selected item from the list.
[Highlight All] Highlights all items in the list on the graphics window.
[Select Calculation Tar- This button is displayed in each of the setting panels of magnetic flux
gets] calculation, surface calculation, and edge calculation.
This button displays the [Calculation Target Selection] dialog. In the
[Calculation Target Selection] dialog, you can select a cross section or
an edge. For details on procedures for creating a surface or edge, see
“Creating Surfaces or Edges for Results Calculations” on page 521.
[Create Sets] Displays the [Create Set] dialog. The [Create Set] dialog allows you to cre-
ate a new set.
66
Setting Parameters
Button Description
[Select Sets] , [Select Displays the [Select] dialog. The [Select] dialog allows you to select sets
Sets and Mesh and mesh groups to be added to the list.
Groups] For details on mesh groups, see “Creating Element/Element Face/Element
Edge/Node Groups to Set Conditions” on page 349. For details on sets,
see “Creating Part/Face/Edge/Vertex Groups to Set Conditions” on
page 346.
 Context menu
After right-clicking the settings list, the following operations are possible from the menu that is dis-
played:
Command Description
[Select Sets and Mesh Displays the [Select] dialog. The [Select] dialog allows you to select sets
Groups] and mesh groups to be added to the list.
[Convert to Entity] Disbands the selected set and displays parts (or faces, edges, vertices) con-
tained in it.
[Edit] Updates elements, element faces, element edges, or nodes contained in the
currently selected mesh group. After clicking this button, select elements,
element faces, element edges, or nodes in the graphics window, then click
[OK] at the bottom of the graphics window.
[Delete] Deletes selected items from the list.
[Delete All] Deletes all items from the list.
[Collapse Part Groups] When a part group is selected, the group name is displayed in the list.
[Expand Part Groups] When the part group is selected, each part name in the group is displayed
in the list.
[Highlight Selected] Highlights selected items in the graphics window.
[Clear Highlight] Clears the highlighting on the settings highlighted in the graphics window.
67
Operations
Defining Axes and Directions

Axes or directions must be defined in some conditions and functions. For example, the following
must be defined:
• Axis:
Reference axis for permanent magnet magnetization patterns, rotation axis for Rotation Periodic
Boundary conditions and Rotation Motion conditions, and torque axis.
• Direction:
Magnetization direction for permanent magnet magnetization patterns, lamination direction for
electromagnetic steel sheet, translation direction of Translation Periodic Boundary and Transla-
tion Motion conditions, current direction of FEM Coil conditions and Current Density condi-
tions, and load direction of Concentrated Load condition.
Rotation Periodic Boundary condition of magnetic field analysis
Method for defining “axis” and “direction” are as follows:

• Define the Axes (page 69)
• Define the Directions (page 70)
• Define the Axes or Directions by Referencing Edges, Faces, and Vertices (page 70)
• Define the Axes or Directions Using Reference Targets (page 71)
68
Setting Parameters
Define the Axes

The axis is defined by the vector and the origin. Define the axes by using the following buttons or
setting parameters:
Vector
Origin
• [On Edge]:
Defines the axis on a selected edge. Click this button, and select a line edge.
• [From Arc]:
Defines the axis that is passing through the center point of a selected arc edge and on the line
that is piercing vertically through a plane that has the selected arc edge.
Click this button, and select an arc.
• [From Cylindrical Face]:
This button is displayed in the setting panel of magnetization direction.
Defines the axis on a center axis of selected cylindrical face. Click this button, and select a cylin-
drical face.
• [Select Reference Target]:
Defines the axis using the face (or edge, vertex) registered as a reference target. Clicking this but-
ton displays the [Select Reference Target] dialog. For details, see “Define the Axes or Directions
Using Reference Targets” on page 71.
• [X], [Y], [Z] of [Axis Direction]:
Specify each component of the axial direction directly. If you define the axial direction using [On
Edge], [From Arc], [From Cylindrical Face] or [Select Reference Target], the values of [X], [Y],
and [Z] are updated.
MEMO For 2D analysis, the [Axis Direction] Z component and the Z coordinates for [Point on
Axis] are not specified.
MEMO For magnetization patterns, the edge can be referenced when defining [Axis Direction] and
[Reference Axis Direction]. For details, see “Define the Axes or Directions by Referencing Edges,
Faces, and Vertices” on page 70.
• [X], [Y], [Z] of [Point on Axis]:
Specify each coordinate of a point on the axis. If you define the axis using [On Edge], [From
Arc], [From Cylindrical Face] or [Select Reference Target], the values of [X], [Y], and [Z] are
updated.
MEMO For 2D analysis, the [Axis Direction] Z component and the Z coordinates for [Point on
Axis] are not specified.
MEMO The vertex can be referenced when defining [Point on Axis]. For details, see “Define the
Axes or Directions by Referencing Edges, Faces, and Vertices” on page 70.
• [Upward] or [Downward]:
In a 2D analysis, reverses the Z-axis direction.
• [Reverse] :
Reverses the axial direction.
69
Operations
Define the Directions

Define the directions by using the following buttons or setting parameters:
• [Parallel to Edge]:
Defines the direction to be parallel with the selected line edge.
Click this button, and select a line edge.
• [Perpendicular to Face]:
Defines the direction to be perpendicular with the selected face.
Click this button, and select a face.
• [Select Reference Target]:
Defines the direction using the face (or edge, vertex) registered as a reference target. Clicking this
button displays the [Select Reference Target] dialog. For details, see “Define the Axes or Direc-
tions Using Reference Targets” on page 71.
• [X], [Y], [Z] of [Axis Direction]:
Specify each component of the direction directly. If you define the direction using [Parallel to
Edge], [Perpendicular to Face], or [Select Reference Target], the values of [X], [Y], and [Z] are
updated.
MEMO For a 2D analysis, the Z component of [Direction] does not need to be specified.
• [Outward] and [Inward]:
In a 2D/axisymmetric analysis, reverses the magnetization direction.
• [Upward] and [Downward]:
In a 2D analysis, reverses a direction other than the magnetization direction.
• [+ Theta] and [- Theta]:
In an axisymmetric analysis, reverses a direction other than the magnetization direction.
• [Reverse] :
Reverses the direction.
Define the Axes or Directions by Referencing Edges, Faces, and Vertices

When defining [Axis Direction], [Reference Axis Direction] and [Point on Axis] of the magnetiza-
tion pattern, the edge, face, and vertex can be referenced.
When referencing, the magnetization pattern settings are updated when the model geometry in a
parametric analysis changes and the position of the reference edge changes.
70
Setting Parameters
Settings of magnetization direction
When directly specifying each component for [Axis Direction] and [Reference Axis Direction], or
each coordinate for [Point on Axis], the magnetization pattern settings will not be affected even if
the model geometry is changed.
[Edge] can be specified when referencing an edge and specifying [Magnetization Direction] and
[Reference Axis Direction] in a 2D analysis. Select [Parallel] when setting the magnetization direc-
tion and reference axis in parallel to an edge that is referenced. Select [Perpendicular] when setting
perpendicular.
Define the Axes or Directions Using Reference Targets

Edges (or faces, vertices) referenced by axis and direction settings can be registered in advance in the
model. The one registered is called “reference target”.
The reference targets can be called when setting conditions and functions. In addition, the informa-
tion of reference target can be transferred to another model using analysis template.
MEMO The reference targets cannot be used for setting lamination direction.
 Save the edges (or faces, vertices) as reference targets in model

This section describes how to create a new set. A set can contain parts, faces, edges or vertices.
1. In the [Project Manager] tree, under [Template Parameter], right-click [Reference Tar-
get].
2. Select [New reference target].
3. In the [Reference Target] setting panel, set the parameters.
4. Click [OK].
Newly reference target is added under [Reference Target] in the [Project Manager] tree.
• By hovering the mouse cursor over reference target in the [Project Manager] tree, edge (or
face, vertex) contains in it is highlighted in the graphics window.
71
Operations
• Right-clicking the reference target in the [Project Manager] tree displays [Edit], [Duplicate],
and [Delete] as commands.
• To delete the reference targets that are not used at all by conditions and functions, right-click
[Reference Target] under [Template Parameter] in the [Project Manager] tree, and select
[Delete unused reference target].
MEMO The type of icons displayed in the [Project Manager] varies depending on the type of refer-
ence target.
: Displayed when a face is registered as a reference target.
: Displayed when an edge is registered as a reference target.
: Displayed when a vertex is registered as a reference target.
 Use reference target to setting conditions and functions
1. Open the setting panel for each condition and function.

2. Click the [Select Reference Target] (or [Select Reference Target] icon ) near the param-
eter for defining the axis or direction.
The [Select Reference Target] dialog is displayed.
3. Select the purpose of use to the reference target from [Type].
The options of [Type] change depending on the type of the parameter using the reference target
(directions, axis directions, coordinates ([Point on Axis], etc)).
• [Parallel to Edge]:
By selecting this, only reference targets of line edge are displayed in the lower list.
• [From Arc]:
By selecting this, only reference targets of arc edge are displayed in the lower list.
• [From Cylindrical Face]:
By selecting this, only reference targets of cylindrical surface are displayed in the lower list.
• [Perpendicular to Face]:
By selecting this, only reference targets of plane are displayed in the lower list.
• [From Vertex]:
By selecting this, only reference targets of vertex are displayed in the lower list.
4. Select a checkbox of the reference target to use.
5. Click [OK].
By specifying the reference parameter, the values of components of directions or coordinates of
point on axis are updated on the setting panel for each condition and function.
And, “(reference target name used by the parameter) is saved” is additionally displayed on the
end of the parameter name.
72
Setting Parameters
Specifying Results Files To Be Referenced

In the following conditions and functions, referencing a result file of another analysis enables the
result physical quantity written to that file to be used as an input value. Sections enclosed in paren-
theses are types of file format that can be referenced:
• Automatic mesh generation:
Constraint Mesh function (.jplot, .plot)
• Magnetic field analysis:
Vector Potential Boundary conditions (.jplot), Gap Flux Boundary condition (.jplot), Frozen
Permeability condition (.jplot, .plot), Stress Distribution condition (.jplot, .plot, .odb, .csv, .txt),
Temperature Distribution condition (.jplot, .plot, .csv, .txt), Displacement condition (.jplot,
.plot, .odb, .csv, .txt), Reuse Demagnetization condition (.jplot)
• Iron loss analysis:
Stress Distribution condition (.jplot, .plot, .odb, .csv, .txt)
• Thermal analysis:
Heat Source condition (.jplot, .plot, .loss), Heat Transfer Boundary condition (.csv, .txt), Initial
Temperature condition (.temp, .csv, .txt)
• Structural analysis:
Function that references 2D structural static analysis results (.jplot), function that references
eigenmode analysis results (.jplot), Electromagnetic Force condition (.jplot, .plot), Temperature
Load condition (.jplot, .plot, .csv, .txt), Initial Stress condition (.jplot, .plot, .odb, .csv, .txt)
• Electric field analysis:
Temperature Distribution condition (.jplot, .plot, .csv, .txt)
Stress Distribution condition of magnetic field analysis
Not only the output result files can be referenced, but also the result files to be output from an anal-
ysis can be reserved.
• Specify Results Files in the Setting Panels (page 73)

• Use the Reference Coordinate System (page 75)
• Reference the CSV File/Text File Format (page 77)
Specify Results Files in the Setting Panels

1. Select a specification method from the [Result File Selection Type] ([Coupled Data
Source]) list in the setting panel for each condition or function. Also, specify the
required item for each specification method.
73
Operations
• Select [Result File] when specifying a result file.

Click [Open] to open the [Open] dialog, and then specify a result file (.jplot, .plot, .odb,
.loss, etc.) to be referenced.
MEMO The type of result files that can be referenced differs based on the function and condi-
tion.
MEMO Only [Result File] can be selected in the Heat Transfer Boundary condition. The [Project
File] or [Current Project] cannot be selected.
MEMO Specify [Step], [Stress Unit], and [Length Unit] in the [Abaqus Setting] group box when
specifying an Abaqus DB file (.odb) in the Stress Distribution condition of magnetic field analysis
(or iron loss analysis) or Initial Stress condition of structural analysis.
MEMO For details about specifying a CSV file or a text file, see “Reference the CSV File/Text
File Format” on page 77.
• Select [Project File] when referring to a result file of a study that belongs to different project.
Click [Open] to open the [Open JMAG Project File] dialog, and then specify a project file
(.jproj). The [Select Study] dialog will open so select a study with a result file to be referenced.
Also, specify the case ID in the [Case] box in the settings for conditions and functions.
• Select [Current Project] when referencing a result file of a study belonging to the same proj-
ect.
Click [Open] in [Study]. The [Select Study] dialog will open, so select a study with a result
file to be referenced. Also, specify the case ID in the [Case] box in the settings for conditions
and functions.
MEMO The corresponding study will be filtered and displayed on the list when part of the study
name is typed in the [Filter] box of the [Select Study] dialog. A wildcard character (?, *) can be
used for the input.
• Select [Analysis Group] when referring to a result file of a study that belongs to the same anal-
ysis group. Select a study with a result file to be referenced in the [Study] list.
MEMO [Analysis Group] is not displayed in the [Result File Selection Type] list when the current
study does not belong to an analysis group.
MEMO Multiple result files may be output from one analysis. When referencing this type of analysis
result file, select the result file type from the [Result File Selection Type] list.
• For Heat Source condition of thermal analysis, select [Magnetic Field (Iron Loss, Electrical Field)
Result File] or [Iron Loss Result File in Magnetic Field Analysis].
• For Electromagnetic Force condition of structural analysis, select [Magnetic Field Result File] or
[Magnetostriction Result File in Magnetic Field Analysis].
2. Specify [Coordinate System] that is applied to the result file when referencing a result
file with mismatched mesh dimensions or positions.
Physical quantities can be mapped to the correct positions by applying a coordinate system to the
result file. The reference coordinate system is also used in such cases when mapping the result of
axisymmetric analysis extended to a full model. For details, see “Use the Reference Coordinate
System” on page 75.
3. When specifying a CSV file or text file as a result file, specify [Reading Option] and
[Mapping Option] if necessary.
• [Reading option]:
This option is used to skip reading in unnecessary rows and columns. For details, see “Refer-
ence the CSV File/Text File Format” on page 77.
• [Mapping Option]:
This option is used to adjust mapping accuracy. For details, see “Reference the CSV File/Text
File Format” on page 77.
74
Setting Parameters
Use the Reference Coordinate System

When the positions or dimensions of the mesh are mismatched between the model used for analysis
and the model output to the result file to be referenced, perform alignment of the 2 models using
the reference coordinate system.
Since positions of the mesh are mismatched between the model of the reference result
file (left) and the model for analysis (middle), physical quantities will not be mapped to
the correct positions.
Reference coordinate system
The physical quantities will be mapped to the correct positions by applying the reference
coordinate system to the result file to be referenced.
• Use one of the following methods to align the positioning of the analysis model with the model
that is output to the result file to be referenced.
• Align the position of the model output to the result file to reference with the model used for
analysis using the reference coordinate system.
• Align the position of the model used for analysis with the model of the reference result file
using the centering function of the model.
• In the [Coordinate System] list, [Global Rectangular], [Cylindrical], [Local Rectangular (Y-Z-
X)], and [Local Rectangular (Z-X-Y)] can be selected by default.
• A coordinate system needs to be created beforehand when selecting a coordinate system from the
[Coordinate System] list. For details, see “Use the Reference Coordinate System” on page 75.
• When alignment of positioning is not conducted, leave the settings in the [Coordinate System]
list as default (Global Rectangular).
• When the model for analysis is 3D and the model output to the reference result file is 2D, the Z-
axis (Tertiary axis) of the reference coordinate system corresponds to the height direction of the
2D model.
75
Operations
 Settings example
This section describes a case of referencing a magnetic field analysis result file for the Heat Source
condition in thermal analysis as an example.
The figure below on the left is a magnetic field analysis model; the figure below on the right is a
thermal analysis model. The magnetic field analysis model is arranged in a counterclockwise direc-
tion from the X-axis. The thermal analysis model is positioned in a counterclockwise direction from
-30 degrees from the X-axis.
Left: Magnetic field analysis model, Right: Thermal analysis model
In this case, create the following reference coordinate system beforehand, and select it from the
[Coordinate System] list in the Heat Source condition.
• In this example, to define the coordinate system with the X-axis as its basis, select [X] from the
[First Vector Direction] list.
• Since Os', the origin of the coordinate system, matches the origin of the thermal analysis model,
each value of the [Origin] group box should be left as their default values.
• In the [First Vector] group box, specify the (X, Y, Z) components of the direction vector directed
from the origin Os’ to Xs’ as the X-axis of the reference coordinate system.
• Input the value of cos(-(30 degree)) in the [X] box.
• Input the value of sin(-(30 degree)) in the [Y] box.
• In the [Second Vector] group box, specify the (X, Y, Z) component of the direction vector
directed from the origin Os’ to Ys’ as the Y-axis of the reference coordinate system.
• Input the value of -sin(-(30 degree)) in the [X] box.
• Input the value of cos(-(30 degree)) in the [Y] box.
76
Setting Parameters
Reference the CSV File/Text File Format

The CSV and text files created by the user can be specified as the result files to be referenced for the
following conditions and functions:
• Magnetic field analysis:
Stress Distribution condition, Temperature Distribution condition, Displacement condition
• Iron loss analysis:
Stress Distribution condition
• Thermal analysis:
Heat Transfer Boundary condition, Initial Temperature condition
• Structural analysis:
Temperature Load condition, Initial Stress condition
• Electric field analysis:
Temperature Distribution condition
 Syntax rules for the file

Prepare a file which adheres to the following conventions:
• For CSV files, each field is to be separated by a comma (,). For text files as well, each field is to be
separated by a comma (,). Other than the above (e.g., using column separators) will result in an
error.
• For each row in the file, write the coordinate value of the node or element center (x, y, z) + phys-
ical quantity as one set.
Example of CSV file
• The physical quantities and coordinate values should be referenced to a rectangular coordinate
system (X, Y, Z).
• Use m as the unit of length for the physical quantities and coordinate values. The data created
using other units such as mm should be converted to m and written in.
• When mapping to a 2D model, the z-coordinate of the node or the element center is to be spec-
ified as “0.0”.
• If the physical quantity to be mapped is stress, only real number data can be used.
77
Operations
 Using options
• Using the [Reading Option], skip the reading in of unnecessary rows and columns during the
mapping process.
• [Start Row]:
Enter the number of the beginning row of the file to be imported. If titles are typed in the
first row, it should be used.
• [Not Use First Column as ID]:
If the first row is to be skipped, select [Not Use First Column as ID].
• By using [Mapping Option], mapping accuracy can be adjusted.
• [Decide Search Distance Automatically]:
When arbitrarily specifying the range to search for the closest node in the model from the
coordinate value defined in the file, clear [Decide Search Distance Automatically] and specify
[Search Distance].
The file contains the coordinate system and the physical quantities in it. The node closest to
the coordinate value will be searched for and physical quantities will be mapped.
When shortening [Search Distance], a more accurate mapping is conducted, but there is a
higher possibility that mapping will fail. When lengthening [Search Distance], mapping will
have a higher success rate, but there is a higher possibility of incorrect mapping.
MEMO The value defined in the file is carried over when mapping based on [Search Distance]
fails.
 File formats and samples

The file format is the same as the input file (.csv) prepared by the user when running [CSV File to
Convert Files From Jcf ] using the multi-purpose file export tool.
• Regarding the CSV file formats to be used for the Temperature Distribution condition of mag-
netic field analysis, Initial Temperature condition of thermal analysis/electric field analysis, and
Temperature Load condition of structural analysis, see the explanation for “Nodal Temperature”.
• Regarding the CSV file format to be used for the Heat Transfer Boundary condition of thermal
analysis, see the explanation for “Heat Transfer Coefficient”.
• Regarding the CSV file format to be used for the Stress Distribution condition of magnetic field
analysis/iron loss analysis and the Initial Stress condition of structural analysis, see the explana-
tion for “Stress.”
• Regarding the CSV file format to be used for the Displacement condition of magnetic field anal-
ysis, see the explanation for “Displacement.”
78
Setting Parameters
Assigning Numerical Expressions and Variables to Parameter

Values
For some real number-type and integer-type parameters set in JMAG-Designer and Geometry Edi-
tor, numerical expressions and equation variables can be entered as their values.
Example: Magnetic field analysis, Rotation Motion condition [Constant Revolution Speed],
Geometry Editor angle constraint [Angle]
MEMO Equation variables can be used for geometry registered to the geometry library.
Assign Numerical Expressions

Numerical expressions, instead of numerical values, can be entered in parameter values. Note the
following points in these circumstances:
• Numerical expressions cannot be entered for the values of each parameter in the [Preferences]
dialog.
 Geometry Editor
• When a mathematical expressions is used for an integer type parameter and a real number is cal-
culated from that expression, the calculated value is rounded.
• The following parameters are determined from other parameters, and variables and mathematical
expressions can be used for these following parameters:
• [Length] and [Angle] in the [Line] setting panel
• [Angle] in the [Arc] setting panel
However, the mathematical expressions and variables are not retained. When a setting panel
using these parameters is closed and reopened, the variables and expressions are converted to
numerical values.
• When importing a geometry using variables and expressions from JMAG-Designer (or JMAG-
Express) from Geometry Editor, the values evaluated from the variables and expressions are
imported.
• When variables and mathematical expressions are entered as parameter values in the first case
geometry for parametric analysis, values evaluated from the expressions and variables are dis-
played for the parameters in each case created from the first case.
79
Operations
Assign Equation Variables

1. Create variables.
The following is an example procedure.
i. Right-click the text box of a real number type or a variable type.
ii. Select [Equations].
The [Equations] dialog is displayed.
MEMO The [Equations] dialog can also be opened from the following procedures:
• In the [Project Manager] tree, under a study, right-click [Case Control] and select [Equations].
• In the [Project Manager] tree, under a model, right-click [Equations] and select [Equations].
• In the [Equations] tab of the JMAG-Designer [Toolbox], click [Create New Equation Group],
and then click [Add] in [Equation Group].
• In the JMAG-Designer graphics window, click the shortcut icon .
• In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click an assembly and select [Equations].
iii. Click [Add].
iv. In the [Edit Equation] dialog, define variables.
v. Click [OK].
In the [Equations] dialog, the defined variable is set.
vi. Repeat until all the necessary variables are defined.
vii.Click [OK].
2. Assign a variable to a parameter.
i. Right-click a real number or integer text box.
ii. Select [Insert Variable] > (variable to be assigned).
The selected variable is entered in the text box.
MEMO If the mouse pointer is placed over the text box in which the variable was assigned, the
variable's value is displayed in the tooltip. If there is an error with inputting the variable, the error
is displayed in the tooltip. Error and warning messages are also displayed in the [Project Manager]
tree and the [Model Manager] tree.
80
Setting Parameters
MEMO For a study in an analysis group, response values set in other studies in this analysis group
can be used in this study.
Use Created Equation Variables in Other Projects

By registering equation variables in the [Equations] tab in the [Toolbox], the same equation vari-
ables can be used across several different projects.
1. Add variables to the [Equations] tab in the JMAG-Designer [Toolbox].

i. In the [Project Manager] tree, under a study, right-click [Case Control] and select
[Equations].
ii. In the [Equations] dialog, select one or multiple variables added to the [Equations]
tab from the table, and click [Register in Toolbox].
iii. In the [Add Equation to Toolbox] dialog, specify a group name and a save destination
folder and click [OK].
Equation groups structured from one or multiple variables are added to the [Equations] tab
in the JMAG-Designer [Toolbox].
MEMO In the [Edit Equation] dialog, variables can be corrected and deleted, and imports and
exports can also be executed from files (.xml).
iv. Click [OK] in the [Equations] dialog.
2. Variables added to the [Equations] tab in the JMAG-Designer [Toolbox] can be used in
different projects.
The following is an example procedure:
i. Create a new project in JMAG-Designer, import a model, and create studies for the
imported model.
ii. In the JMAG-Designer [Toolbox], from the [Equations] tab, select an equation group.
iii. To use the selected equation group for all studies in a model, drag the equation
group to the model in the [Project Manager] tree.
To use the selected equation group in a single study, drag the equation group to the
study in the [Project Manager] tree.
The [Add Equation] dialog opens, and the outcome of adding the variable is displayed. When
variables of the same name exist for the target model or study, then the intended variable can-
not be added.
81
Operations
Dragging-and-Dropping Settings and Copying Between Models or

Studies
1. Use Ctrl-Click to select an item in the [Project Manager] tree.
2. Drag the selected item while holding down a left button of the mouse and the [Ctrl] on
the keyboard.
An arrow is displayed on the lower right of the pointer.
3. Drop the item into another model or study in the tree.
The selected item is duplicated where it is dropped.
When the selected item is a material, the material is applied to the part where it is dropped.
For example, if one or more studies created in model A are selected and dragged to model B, the
selected studies are duplicated to model B.
82
Setting Parameters
Referencing Part Geometries Other Than the Currently Edited Part

(Geometry Editor)
Edges and faces included in parts other than the part being edited can be selected as a rotation axis
or reference face. For example, an edge of part A that is not currently being edited can be selected as
the rotation axis of a radial pattern feature for part B as in the following figure.
Ex. Radial Pattern feature
The following should be noted when specifying these settings.

• The reference geometry needs to be positioned higher than the part that is being edited in the
[Model Manager] tree. For example, the geometry included in part C cannot be referenced from
part B as in the bottom left figure. Change the order of the tree using drag and drop as required.
83
Operations
84
Using User-Defined Coordinate Systems
This chapter describes how to create a user's coordinate system.

A coordinate system is used to specify directions when setting conditions and can be set for each model. There
are two types of coordinate system available: rectangular coordinate system and cylindrical coordinate system.

• Creating an User-Defined Coordinate Systems (page 86)
85
Operations
Creating an User-Defined Coordinate Systems

• The rectangular coordinate system created here is a right-handed coordinate system with the axes
determined by the origin and the direction of the first vector, and the face defined by the first
and second vectors.
• The cylindrical coordinate system created here has the θ-axis whose positive direction is the right-
handed screw direction of the Z-axis. The axes are determined by the origin, the direction of the
first vector, and the face defined by the first and second vectors.
Left: rectangular coordinate system when the X-axis is in the first vector direction,
Right: cylindrical coordinate system when the R-axis is in the first vector direction
1. Create a coordinate system.

i. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click [Coordinate System].
ii. Select [Add Rectangular Coordinate System] or [Add Cylindrical Coordinate System].
iii. In the [Coordinate System] setting panel, set the parameters.
iv. Click [OK].
The new coordinate system is added under [Coordinate System] in the [Project Manager] tree
• Right-clicking on a coordinate system displays a menu. From that menu, you can perform
[Edit], [Duplicate], or [Delete].
• When you hover the mouse pointer over a coordinate system, the direction of the axis of
the coordinate system is displayed on the graphics window.
MEMO The type of icons displayed in the [Project Manager] tree varies depending on the type of
coordinate system.
:Displays when the type of coordinate system is a rectangular coordinate system.
:Displays when the type of coordinate system is a cylindrical coordinate system.
:Displays when the type of coordinate system is a user-defined rectangular coordinate system.
:Displays when the type of coordinate system is a user-defined cylindrical coordinate system.
2. Use a coordinate system.
The created coordinate system can be used with the following parameters:
• [Reference Coordinate System], [Evaluation Coordinate System] of probe
• [Reference Coordinate System] of Constraint Mesh function
• [Coordinate System for Table Output] of Force condition of magnetic field analysis
• [Coordinate System] of Frozen Permeability condition of magnetic field analysis
• [Coordinate System] of reuse demagnetization condition of magnetic field analysis
86
Using User-Defined Coordinate Systems
• [Coordinate System] of Displacement condition of magnetic field analysis

• [Coordinate System] of Stress Distribution condition of magnetic field analysis/iron loss anal-
ysis
• [Coordinate System] of Temperature Distribution condition of magnetic field analysis/elec-
tric field analysis
• [Coordinate System] of Initial Temperature condition of thermal analysis
• [Coordinate System] of Heat Source condition of thermal analysis
• [Coordinate System] of Heat Transfer Boundary condition of thermal analysis
• [Coordinate System] of Electromagnetic Force condition of structural analysis
• [Coordinate System] of Sound Pressure condition of structural analysis
• [Coordinate System] of Initial Stress condition of structural analysis
• [Coordinate System] of Temperature Load condition of structural analysis
87
Operations
88
Setting Nonlinear Characteristics Using Tables
This chapter describes the procedure for creating or editing table data.
A table needs to be specified in the [Edit Point Sequence] dialog to define the various properties for materials,
conditions, and circuit components.

• Creating Table Manually (page 90)
• Creating Table Data Automatically (page 93)
• Importing Table Data (page 94)
• Exporting Table Data (page 94)
• Managing Table in Study Using the [List Point Sequence] Dialog (page 95)
• Managing Table in Project Using the Graph Manager (page 96)
89
Operations
Creating Table Manually

• Create 2D Tables (page 90)
• Create 3D Tables and 2D Tables That Vary with Physical Quantities (page 91)
Create 2D Tables
Create 2D tables, such as B-H curves and T-mu curves.
1. Click [Edit] in the setting panel for material, condition, circuit component properties,
etc.
For example, this applies when [Table] is selected from the [Function Type] list of the [Current]
setting panel for the magnetic field analysis or when [Point Sequence] is selected from the [Type]
list of the [Electric Potential Source (1 Terminal)] setting panel of the circuit.
2. In the [Edit Point Sequence] dialog, create table.

The following items can be set in the [Edit Point Sequence] dialog.
i. Enter a name for the table in [Title].
The name you enter here will be displayed in the Graph Manager. You can only check the
Type.
ii. Enter the table data in the table sheet.
By right-clicking on the table sheet, you can automatically create table data, import table data
from a file, export table data to a file, and cut, copy, paste, delete, and select all table data.
For details about automatic creation, see “Creating Table Data Automatically” on page 93.
For information on importing and exporting files, see “Importing Table Data” on page 94
and “Exporting Table Data” on page 94.
3. Check the table data using graph by clicking [Show Graph].
Clicking this button will create a graph from the values entered in the table sheet and display it
on the right side of the table sheet.
• An area of the graph can be enlarged by left-clicking and dragging the area to enlarge.
• The entire graph can be displayed by clicking in the upper right of the graph.
• The [Graph Properties] dialog is displayed by clicking [Edit Graph Properties] . The dis-
play of the graph can be specified in this dialog as follows:
• Display range
• [Grid Line]
• [Draw Line at X=0], [Draw Line at Y=0]
90
MEMO When the smoothing function is used for a B-H curve, the table before smoothing is dis-
played as [Original] and the table after smoothing is displayed as [Smoothed] in the graph.
4. When creating a B-H curve, use the options as necessary.
For details on options, see “Parameter Explanation Edition”.
5. Click [OK].
Create 3D Tables and 2D Tables That Vary with Physical Quantities

This section describes the steps to create the following table.
• 3D tables
• [Magnetization Direction Table], [Residual Flux Density (Distribution)], and [Coercive
Force (Distribution)] in the [Any Specified Rectangular] or [Any Specified Cylindrical] mag-
net magnetization pattern settings
• 2D tables that vary with physical quantities
• [Stress B-H Curve] of soft magnetic material
• [Temperature B-H Curve] of permanent magnets
• Frequency and stress-dependent magnetic flux density - loss density curve in the iron loss
properties of a material ([Iron Loss Table], [Stress Dependent Iron Loss Table])
• Stress-dependent magnetic flux density - coefficient curve in the iron loss properties of a
material ([Stress Dependent Joule Loss Coefficient Table], [Stress Dependent Hysteresis Loss
Coefficient Table])
• Frequency-dependent magnetic flux density - loss correction factor curve in the iron loss
properties of a material ([Anomalous Eddy Current Loss Coefficient Table])
Example (left: stress-dependent B-H curve, right: magnetization direction table)
1. Click [Edit] in the setting panel for material, condition, circuit component properties,
etc.
2. In the [Edit Point Sequence] dialog, create table.
i. Enter a title for the table data in [Title].
ii. Select [New Table] from the [Table] list under the [Edit Point Sequence] dialog.
91
Operations
iii. Enter a value in the physical quantity text box in the upper area of the dialog.
Depending on the type of table, [Stress], [Temperature], [Frequency], or [Z1] box will be dis-
played.
iv. Enter the table data in the table sheet.
For example, if you enter “0” in the [Stress] box in the upper area of the dialog, the B-H curve
when the stress is 0 Mpa will be entered in the table sheet.
MEMO By right-clicking on the table sheet, you can automatically create table data, import table
data from a file, export table data to a file, and cut, copy, paste, delete, and select all table data.
For details about automatic creation, see “Creating Table Data Automatically” on page 93.
For information on importing and exporting files, see “Importing Table Data” on page 94 and
“Exporting Table Data” on page 94.
v. Click [Add] .
The created table will be added to the [Table] list.
vi. Repeat steps ii to v to input the physical quantity such as stress and the table data in
that physical quantity.
• When editing the existing table, select a table from the [Table] list, and edit the contents
in the text box and table sheet.
• When deleting the existing table, select a table from the [Table] list and click [Delete] .
• When importing table data from the file, click in the bottom area of the [Edit Point
Sequence] dialog. When exporting the created table data to a file, click in the bottom
area of the [Edit Point Sequence] dialog.
MEMO Depending on the table data, the file types that can be imported/exported will vary as in
the following:
• Stress-dependent B-H curve: HBS file (.hbs)
• Temperature-dependent B-H curve: HBT file (.hbt)
• Loss table: iron loss file (.iron) or stress-dependent iron loss file (.irons)
• Iron loss coefficient table: iron loss coefficient file (.jcoef )
• Anomalous eddy current loss coefficient table: csv file (.csv)
For subsequent operations, see “Create 2D Tables” on page 90.
92
Creating Table Data Automatically

Table data can automatically be created when the data is at regular intervals.
The function to automatically create table data supports the following specifying methods.
• [Specify Increment]:
Table data is automatically created based on the numerical value of the first point, arrangement
intervals of each point, and the number of points.
• [Specify Divisions]:
Table data is automatically created based on the numerical values of the first point, the last point,
and the number of divisions of the range determined from them.
1. Click the cell to specify the first point of the table data that is automatically created in
the table sheet of the [Edit Point Sequence] dialog.
The value specified in the selected cell is later specified as default in [Start] and [End] of the
[Insert Series] dialog.
2. Right-click the cell while it is selected.
3. Select [Insert Series].
4. In the [Insert Series] dialog, set the parameters.
5. Click [OK].
The table data created based on the setting in the [Insert Series] dialog is reflected on the table
sheet displayed in the [Edit Point Sequence] dialog.
93
Operations
Importing Table Data

Import table data from a file (.csv, .txt, .pa).
1. Right-click the table sheet of the [Edit Point Sequence] dialog.

2. Select [Import].
3. In the [Import Data] dialog, select the folder where the file is saved.
4. Select the type of file to import from the [File of type] list.
The files in the following formats can be imported as table data.
• CSV file (.csv):
This file can be edited using Microsoft Excel.
• Text file (.txt)
• Table file (.pa):
This file contains the table data that can be exported from JMAG-Studio.
MEMO The HBT file (.hbt) and iron loss file (.iron) can also be imported depending on the type of
table to be specified.
5. Select the file, and then click [Open].
The imported data is displayed in the table sheet.
Exporting Table Data

Export the table data to a file (.csv, .txt, .pa).
1. Right-click the table sheet of the [Edit Point Sequence] dialog.

2. Select [Export].
3. In the [Export Data] dialog, specify the type, name, and destination of the file to be
exported.
The following file formats can be exported.
• CSV file (.csv):
This file can be edited using Microsoft Excel.
• Text file (.txt)
• HTML file (.html)
4. Click [Save].
94
Managing Table in Study Using the [List Point Sequence] Dialog

The same type of table added to the same study is managed in the [List Point Sequence] dialog. You
can add and delete tables from this dialog.
The [List Point Sequence] dialog opens by the following procedure:
1. Click [List Point Sequence] in the setting panel for material, condition, circuit compo-
nent properties, etc.
The [List Point Sequence] dialog is displayed.
• To add a new table, click [Add]. The [Edit Point Sequence] dialog with an empty worksheet
is displayed.
• To edit a table, select the table to be edited from the list and click [Edit]. The [Edit Point
Sequence] dialog opens, and the table is displayed.
• To delete a table, select the table to be deleted from the list, and click [Delete].
95
Operations
Managing Table in Project Using the Graph Manager

The Graph Manager manages the tables for input parameters and the table for analysis results in the
project as a “dataset”. Tables for input parameters can be checked and deleted in Graph Manager.
1. Select [Tools] > [Graph Manager] from the menu bar.

The Graph Manager starts.
2. Search for the created table from the dataset list in the upper area.
Set the filter as needed in [Group] or [Show] in the upper area of the Graph Manager.
3. To check table data, right-click the table and select [Show Selected].
The [Dataset] dialog opens and the table data is displayed.
4. To delete a table, right-click the table and select [Delete Selected].
If there is a parameter that used the deleted table data, the settings of that parameter is cleared.
96
Model Operations
Importing Models from Files
This chapter describes how to import a model to JMAG-Designer or Geometry Editor from files.

• Importing CAD Models into JMAG-Designer from CAD Files (page 100)
• Importing Mesh Models into JMAG-Designer from Files (page 102)
• Importing Model Outlines into JMAG-Designer from Drawing Files (page 103)
• Importing Models into Geometry Editor from Files (page 104)
99
Operations
Importing CAD Models into JMAG-Designer from CAD Files

CAD models created using a CAD software or analysis software of other manufacturers can be
imported.
• Import CAD Models (page 100)
• Replace the CAD Models Imported (page 100)
Import CAD Models

1. From the JMAG-Designer menu bar, select [File] > [Import CAD File].
2. In the [CAD File Converter] dialog, enter the path to the CAD file to import.
Or click [Browse] to specify the CAD file in the [File to Convert] box.
The following files can be imported:
• ACIS (.sat, .sab)
• IGES (.iges, .igs)
• CATIA V4 (.model)
• CATIA V5 (.CATpart, .CATProduct)
• Creo Parametric (Pro/ENGINEER) (.prt, .asm, .prt., .asm.)
• NX (.prt)
• Parasolid (.x_t, .xmt_txt, .x_b, .xmt_bin)
• SOLIDWORKS (.sldprt, .sldasm)
• SolidEdge (.par, .asm, .psm)
• STEP (.stp, .step)
• Inventer (.ipt, .iam)
MEMO Some of the above file formats require a specialized license key for importing.
MEMO A icon will appear to the left of each file format if it can be imported, and a icon will
appear if it cannot.
3. If necessary, set the options.
For details on options, see “Parameter Explanation Edition”.
4. Click [Next].
Model is imported from file, and is displayed in the graphics window.
Replace the CAD Models Imported

The models imported from following CAD files to JMAG-Designer can be replaced with the mod-
els imported from another CAD files.
• CATIA V5 (.CATpart, .CATProduct)
• Creo Parametric (Pro/ENGINEER) (.prt, .asm, .prt., .asm.)
• NX (.prt)
• SolidEdge (.par, .asm, .psm)
• SOLIDWORKS (.sldprt, .sldasm)
100
If studies, materials, and conditions have been set for imported models, those settings can be inher-
ited to the new import model.
1. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click a model.

2. Select [Replace Model From File] or [Update Model From File].
[Replace Model From File] can be selected when the model that was right-clicked in step 1 has
no studies. Select this when replacing the model of the CAD file with the model that was right-
clicked in step 1.
[Update Model from File] can also be selected even if studies, conditions, and materials are set to
the model that was right-clicked in step 1. Select this when importing a model from CAD file
and inheriting the settings of the model that was right-clicked in step 1 to the new model.
By selecting those menus, the [Restore CAD Link] dialog is displayed.
3. Enter the path of CAD file that is same type as the model you right-clicked in step 1.
4. Click [OK].
When [Replace Model From File] is executed, the model that was right-clicked in step 1 is
replaced with the model imported from the CAD file.
When [Update model from file] is executed, a new model is imported from the specified CAD
file. In this new model, the studies, conditions, materials set for the model that was right-clicked
in step 1 are inherited.
MEMO If the difference between the model that was right-clicked in step 1 and the newly imported
model from the CAD file is only the dimensions, conditions and materials will be inherited. If the
number of parts (or the number of faces, the number of edges, the number of vertices) is different,
the conditions and materials are not inherited and a warning message is displayed.
101
Operations
Importing Mesh Models into JMAG-Designer from Files

A mesh model can be imported from a file (.nas, .bdf, .unv) exported from analysis software other
than JMAG.
1. From the JMAG-Designer menu bar, select [File] > [Open].

2. In the [Open File] dialog, enter the path to the file to import in the [File Name] box.
The following files can be imported.
• Nastran Files (.nas, .bdf )
• Universal Files (.unv)
3. Click [Open].
Model is imported from file, and is displayed in the graphics window.
MEMO From such a file (.nas, .bdf, .unv) exported from analysis software other than JMAG, ele-
ment shapes, and data pertaining to relationships between elements and parts, but not material and
condition settings, are imported.
MEMO Duplicate nodes can be deleted in JMAG-Designer even for a mesh model created with anal-
ysis software other than JMAG. See step 7 in “Generating Mesh in Solid Models or Region Models”
on page 380.
102
Importing Model Outlines into JMAG-Designer from Drawing Files

Model drawing created with a CAD software or analysis software produced by another manufactur-
ers can be imported.
MEMO It is necessary to create region in the Geometry Editor after importing a model drawing. How-
ever [Create Regions] in the [Import] setting panel of the [Preferences] dialog is selected as default,
regions are created automatically after importing a model drawing. If you creates regions manually,
clear the [Create Regions].
1. From the JMAG-Designer menu bar, select [File] > [Open].

2. In the [Open File] dialog, enter the path to the file to import in the [File Name] box.
The following files can be imported.
• DXF Files (.dxf )
• IGES Files (.iges, .igs)
3. Click [Open].
Model drawing is imported from file, and is displayed in the graphics window of Geometry Edi-
tor.
When [Create Regions] in the [Import] setting panel of the [Preferences] dialog is selected,
regions will be created.
4. If necessary, edit the model.
5. Import the model to JMAG-Designer from Geometry Editor.
Executing from Geometry Editor:

i. From the Geometry Editor menu bar, select [File] > [Back To JMAG-Designer].
The [Back To JMAG-Designer] dialog is displayed.
ii. Click [Import Model].
The model is imported and is displayed in the graphics window of JMAG-Designer.
Executing from JMAG-Designer

i. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click the project.
ii. Select [Geometry Editor] > [Import Geometry].
103
Operations
Importing Models into Geometry Editor from Files

CAD files and mesh files can be imported to Geometry Editor, and edits can be made.
• Import a Model (page 104)
• Merge a Model (page 105)
Import a Model
Import CAD models and mesh models from files exported from third-party CAD software and
analysis software.
1. Start Geometry Editor.

2. Set options for importing models in advance.
i. From the menu bar, select [Tools] > [Preferences].
ii. In the [Preferences] dialog, click [System Options] tab.
iii. On the navigation bar, click [Import].
iv. In the [Import] setting panel, set the parameters.
v. Click [OK].
3. Import file.
i. From the menu bar, select [File] > [Open].
ii. In the [Open File] dialog, specify the file to be imported.
• JMAG Model Files (.jmdl)
• ACIS Files [2D Entity] (.sat, .sab)
• ACIS Files [3D Solid] (.sat, .sab)
• IGES Files [2D Entity] (.iges, .igs)
• IGES Files [3D Solid] (.iges, .igs)
• CATIA V4 Files (.model)
• CATIA V5 Files (.CATPart, .CATProduct)
• Creo Parametric (Pro/ENGINEER) Files (.prt, .asm, .prt., .asm.)
• NX Files (.prt)
• Parasolid Files (.x_t, .xmt_txt, .x_b, .xmt_bin)
• SOLIDWORKS Files (.sldprt, .sldasm)
• SolidEdge Files (.par, .asm, .psm)
• STEP Files (.stp, .step)
104
iii. Click [Open].

Model or model drawing is imported from file, and is displayed in the graphics window of
Geometry Editor.
MEMO The file is added as a part when either ACIS file [3D Solid], IGES file [3D Solid],
CATIA V4 file, CATIA V5 file or Creo Parametric file is imported.
The file is added as a sketch when either a ACIS file [2D Entity], DXF file or IGES file [2D
Entity] is imported.

ii. In the [Back To JMAG-Designer] dialog, click [Import Model].

i. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click the project and select [Geometry Editor] >
[Import Geometry].
Merge a Model
Import CAD models and mesh models from files output from third-party CAD software and analy-
sis software to assembly during editing, and merge with models during editing.
1. Set options for importing models in advance.

See “Import a Model” on page 104.
2. Merge files.
i. From the menu bar, select [File] > [Merge].
ii. In the [Merge File] dialog, specify the file to be imported.
• ACIS Files [2D Entity] (.sat, .sab)
• ACIS Files [3D Solid] (.sat, .sab)
• IGES Files [2D Entity] (.iges, .igs)
• IGES Files [3D Solid] (.iges, .igs)
• CATIA V4 Files (.model)
• CATIA V5 Files (.CATPart, .CATProduct)
• Creo Parametric (Pro/ENGINEER) Files (.prt, .asm, .prt., .asm.)
• NX Files (.prt)
• Parasolid Files (.x_t, .xmt_txt, .x_b, .xmt_bin)
• SOLIDWORKS Files (.sldprt, .sldasm)
• SolidEdge Files (.par, .asm, .psm)
• STEP Files (.stp, .step)
105
Operations

iii. Click [Open].

Model or model drawing is imported from file, and is merged with model being edited.
MEMO The assembly name, default reference plane of the assembly and information in the
[Preferences] dialog will not be merged for JMAG model files. Also, the sketch name and part
name of the original merge file will be renamed (number will be added to the end of the name)
when merging sketches and parts with the same name.
See “Import a Model” on page 104.
106
Creating 2D CAD Models Using Geometry Editor
This chapter describes the procedure for creating a 2D CAD model using the Geometry Editor.

• 2D CAD Model Creation Procedure (page 109)
• Setting Geometry Editor Preferences (page 111)
• Setting the Link Option Between JMAG-Designer and Geometry Editor (page 111)
• Exporting Model Images to Image Files and Printing Model Images (page 111)
• Creating Sketches (page 112)
• Editing Sketches (page 112)
• Exit Sketch Editing (page 112)
• Drawing Outlines of Cross Sections of Parts (page 113)
• Merging Vertices (page 127)
• Using the Sketch Tool for Drawing (page 128)
• Using the Basic Shape Tool for Drawing (page 129)
• Setting 2D Constraints to Limit Shape Position and Size of Shapes (page 137)
• Moving Basic Shapes (page 141)
• Copying Basic Shapes (page 143)
• Creating Regions (page 145)
• Processing Regions (page 148)
• Running Boolean Operations to Eliminate Duplication of Regions (page 151)
• Moving Regions (page 152)
• Copying Regions (page 153)
• Automatic Settings of Region Feature Based on Shapes (page 154)
• Creating 2D Model Using the Geometry Library (page 155)
• Creating 2D Wire Models Using Wire Templates (page 160)
• Using Original Region Templates Using Python Programs (page 162)
• Setting Geometry Parameter Set Lists to the Assembly (page 163)
• Creating Points, Lines, and Faces at User-Defined Positions and Using Them for Model Creation (page 166)
• Grouping Geometries, Defining Directions and Coordinates (page 167)
• Setting Properties of Features or Sketches (page 168)
• Disabling Features and Sketches (Suppression Settings) (page 169)
• Creating Conditional Expressions to Determine Shape Errors (page 170)
• Responding to Errors and Warnings that Occurred in the Assembly (page 171)
• Importing Models Created in the Geometry Editor into JMAG-Designer (page 171)
• Replacing Models Already Imported into JMAG-Designer with Models Edited in the Geometry Editor
(page 172)
107
Operations
• Saving Models (page 172)

• Exporting Models to Files (page 173)
108
2D CAD Model Creation Procedure

The basic procedure is described below.
 Creating a new model

MEMO For Geometry Editor, the hot standby option and window synchronization option are enabled
by default.
When the hot standby option is enabled, Geometry Editor will also be launched in the background
when starting JMAG-Designer. This makes the Geometry Editor's startup at the time of CAD link
become smooth.
When the window synchronization option is enabled, JMAG-Designer's screen display and the Geome-
try Editor's screen display are synchronized. When changing the display case in JMAG-Designer, the dis-
play case of the Geometry Editor also changes accordingly.
These options can be set in the [Preferences] dialog of JMAG-Designer.

In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click a project and select [Geometry Editor] > [Create
Geometry].
If the project has never been saved before, a dialog is displayed prompting the user to save the
project or to continue without saving. Click [Yes] and save the project.
Start Geometry Editor and establish its link with JMAG-Designer.
2. Create a 2D CAD Model.
MEMO Procedures are different when using wire templates, user defined region templates or geome-
try libraries for a 2D model. For details, see following pages:
• “Creating 2D Model Using the Geometry Library” on page 155
• “Creating 2D Wire Models Using Wire Templates” on page 160
• “Using Original Region Templates Using Python Programs” on page 162
i. In the [Model Manager] tree, create a sketch under an assembly.
For details, see “Creating Sketches” on page 112.
ii. Draw a cross-section of a part in a sketch.
See the following pages for details:
• “Drawing Outlines of Cross Sections of Parts” on page 113
• “Merging Vertices” on page 127
• “Using the Sketch Tool for Drawing” on page 128
• “Using the Basic Shape Tool for Drawing” on page 129
• “Moving Basic Shapes” on page 141
• “Copying Basic Shapes” on page 143
iii. Set constraints on edges and vertices as necessary.
For details, see “Setting 2D Constraints to Limit Shape Position and Size of Shapes” on
page 137.
iv. Create a region
See the following pages for details:
• “Creating Regions” on page 145
• “Processing Regions” on page 148
109
Operations
• “Running Boolean Operations to Eliminate Duplication of Regions” on page 151

• “Moving Regions” on page 152
• “Copying Regions” on page 153
For details, see “Importing Models Created in the Geometry Editor into JMAG-Designer” on
page 171.
4. Exit Geometry Editor.
i. From the Geometry Editor menu bar, select [File] > [Exit].
The link between Geometry Editor and JMAG-Designer is released.
 Editing a model after it has been imported into JMAG-Designer

A copy of a model already imported to JMAG-Designer can be modified by using the modeling tool
and the original model in JMAG-Designer can be replaced with this modified model.
However, if a study has already been created for the imported model in JMAG-Designer, it cannot
replace that model. In that case, the modified model should be imported as a separate model into
JMAG-Designer.
1. Establish the link between JMAG-Designer and Geometry Editor.

In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click a model and select [Restore CAD Link].
The Geometry Editor will restart, and the model is loaded.
2. Edit the model in the Geometry Editor.
3. Re-import the model edited in the Geometry Editor into JMAG-Designer.
For details, see “Replacing Models Already Imported into JMAG-Designer with Models Edited
in the Geometry Editor” on page 172.
110
Setting Geometry Editor Preferences

The settings that apply to the entire system of Geometry Editor can be set in the [Preferences] dia-
log.
1. Select [Tools] > [Preferences] from the menu bar.

2. Set the parameters on each setting panel.
Click [Restore Defaults] displayed in the lower part of the dialog, when specifying each setting to
default in the [Preferences] dialog.
3. Click [OK].
The setting in the [Preferences] dialog is applied to Geometry Editor.
Setting the Link Option Between JMAG-Designer and Geometry

Editor
Option settings when linking JMAG-Designer and Geometry Editor are performed in the [Prefer-
ences] dialog of JMAG-Designer.
1. Select [Tools] > [Preferences] from the JMAG-Designer menu bar.

2. In the [Preferences] dialog, click [Link] from the navigation bar.
3. In the [Link] setting panel, change option settings.
• [Model Updating Option]
• [Import Both Geometry and Mesh]
• [Perform Conflict Check When Model Is Updated]
• [Do Not Include the Mesh Part Name in the Imported Name from the Geometry Editor]
• [Geometry Editor Handling]
• [Ignore Geometry Errors When Running Analysis]
• [Hot Standby Option]
• [Window Synchronization Option]
Click [Restore Defaults] displayed in the lower part of the [Preferences] dialog when returning
the parameters of each setting panel to defaults.
4. Click [OK].
Settings in the [Preferences] dialog are applied to JMAG-Designer.
Exporting Model Images to Image Files and Printing Model Images

Printing the graphics window of the Geometry Editor and saving the it to an image file is the same
as JMAG-Designer. See the following pages.
111
Operations
• Exporting Model Images to Image Files (page 272)

• Printing Model Images (page 273)
Creating Sketches
1. With no editing part or sketch in the [Model Manager] tree, select [Insert] > [Create
2DSketch].
Or, perform one of the following:
• With no editing part or sketch in the [Model Manager] tree, click [Create 2D Sketch] .
• Right-click an assembly on the [Model Manager] tree, select [Create 2DSketch].
The grid is displayed in the graphics window. A sketch is added under an assembly in [Model
Manager].
MEMO A 2D Sketch is usually created on the XY plane.
MEMO The 2D sketch under [Assembly] can be moved under a part. For details, see “Moving 2D
Sketch Under Parts” on page 182.
Editing Sketches
1. With selecting a sketch in the [Model Manager] tree, select [Insert] > [Edit 2DSketch].
• With selecting a sketch in the [Model Manager] tree, click [Edit 2DSketch] .
• Right-click a sketch on the [Model Manager] tree, select [Edit Sketch].
Exit Sketch Editing

1. In the [Model Manager] tree, make sure that a sketch is in the edit mode .
2. With selecting the sketch in the [Model Manager] tree, select [Insert] > [End Sketch].
• With selecting the sketch in the [Model Manager] tree, click [End Sketch] .
• Right-click the sketch on the [Model Manager] tree, select [End Sketch].
112
Drawing Outlines of Cross Sections of Parts

Combine basic shapes (lines, splines, function curves, rectangles, circles, arcs, ellipses, elliptic arcs,
vertices) to draw an outline of the cross section of a part.
• Draw a Line (page 113)
• Draw a Spline (page 114)
• Draw a Function Curve (page 115)
• Draw a Rectangle (page 116)
• Draw a Circle (page 116)
• Draw an Arc (page 118)
• Draw an Ellipse (page 120)
• Draw an Elliptical Arc (page 121)
• Draw a Vertex (page 122)
• Create Coordinate Systems to Use with Drawings (page 123)
• Add Basic Shapes to a Sketch Using Sketch Options (page 124)
• Delete a Basic Shape (page 126)
Draw a Line
2. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Line] > [Line].
• Click [Line] .
• Right-click anywhere in the graphics window, and select [Line].
This switches to the line creation mode.
MEMO The coordinates input panel is displayed in the lower portion of the graphics window during
line creation mode. Lines can also be drawn by specifying the parameters in this panel.
3. Click the point to start the line in the graphics window.
MEMO Press the [Esc] key on the keyboard and run again, when the start point is positioned in a
wrong area.
4. Double-click a point to end the line.
MEMO To draw multiple lines that are continuous and is sharing a vertex, click once on an end
point instead of double clicking. The mode to create lines continuously is specified, and the position
that is clicked becomes the start point of a line.
To end the mode to create lines continuously, click [Line] on the toolbar or press the [Esc]
key.
MEMO If [Automatic Constraints] , [Enable Snapping] , and [Snap Horizontally/Vertically]
are all selected in the toolbar when a line is drawn parallel to the X-axis or Y-axis, the horizontal or
vertical constraint is automatically applied.
113
Operations
5. If necessary, modify the position and length of line in the [Line] setting panel.
The following settings can be specified:
• Start Point: X, Y
• End Point: X,Y
• Geometry: Length, Angle
6. Click [OK].
The vertices and lines that are created are added to [Basic Shape] under the sketch.
7. To finish creating the line, select [Insert] > [Line] > [Line].
• Click [Line] .
• Click [Select] .
• Right-click anywhere in the graphics window, and select [Line].
• Right-click anywhere in the graphics window, and select [Select].
MEMO The basic shapes displayed in the [Model Manager] tree can be displayed by types that are
grouped. Right-click [Basic Shape] in the [Model Manager] tree, and select [View by Type].
Draw a Spline
Guide line
Vertex
Control point
IMPORTANT A region cannot be created by one spline. Two or more splines are required to
create a region.
2. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Line] > [Spline].
• Click [Spline] .
• Right-click anywhere in the graphics window, and select [Spline].
3. Click a point to specify the start point for the spline in the graphics window.
114
MEMO Constraints are automatically set when [Automatic Constraints] is selected.

Snapping to vertices can specify the settings of coincident constraints for spline and vertices, and fix-
ation constraints for vertices.
MEMO Press the [Esc] key on the keyboard and run again, when the start point or the pass point is
positioned in a wrong area.
4. Click the pass point of a spline.
5. Double-click a point to specify the end point of the spline.
Yellow guide lines are also displayed with the spline based on the curve of each control point, and
a control point is created at the tip of the guide lines.
MEMO Multiple control points may be created depending on the ratio of the curvature.
6. To finish creating the function spline, select [Insert] > [Line] > [Spline].
• Click [Spline] .
• Right-click anywhere in the graphics window, and select [Spline].
Draw a Function Curve

Create a straight line or curve defined by the equation y=f(x), or equations x= f(t), y=g(t).
2. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Line] > [Function Curve].
Or perform one of the following:
• Click [Function Curve] .
• Right-click anywhere in the graphics window, and select [Function Curve].
3. Click the point for the initial point of the function curve in the graphics window.
MEMO Constraints are automatically set when [Automatic Constraints] is selected. Snapping to ver-
tices can specify the settings of coincident constraints for the function curve and vertices, and of fixa-
tion constraints for vertices.
4. Double-click the point for the end point of the function curve.
The function curve is created. Also, the [Function Curve] setting panel is displayed.
5. Define the function in the [Function Curve] setting panel.
6. Click [OK].
The function curve that is created is added to [Basic Shape] under the sketch.
7. To finish creating the function curve, select [Insert] > [Line] > [Function Curve].
• Click [Function Curve] .

115
Operations
• Right-click anywhere in the graphics window, and select [Function Curve].

MEMO The basic shapes displayed in the [Model Manager] tree can be displayed by types. Right-
click [Basic Shape] in the [Model Manager] tree, and select [View by Type].
Draw a Rectangle
2. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Rectangle].
• Click [Rectangle] .
• Right-click anywhere in the graphics window, and select [Rectangle].
This switches to the rectangle creation mode.
rectangle creation mode. Rectangles can also be drawn by specifying the parameters in this panel.
3. Click a point in the geometry window to specify the first vertex.
MEMO Press the [Esc] key on the keyboard and run again, when a vertex of a rectangle is positioned
in a wrong area.
4. Click a point that is diagonal to the vertex created in Step 2.
MEMO If [Automatic Constraints] is selected in the toolbar, the horizontal and vertical con-
straints are automatically applied to each edge of the rectangle.
5. To finish creating the rectangle, select [Insert] > [Rectangle].

• Click [Rectangle] .
• Right-click anywhere in the graphics window, and select [Rectangle].
Draw a Circle
The types of creating a circle are as follows:
• Circle (center point and point on the circumference specified)
• Circle by three points
• Circle by diameter
• Circle by two point radius
116
• Circle By 2 Lines Radius

• Circle by three lines
2. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Circle] > [Circle], [Circle by 3Points], [Circle By
Diameter], [Circle By 2Points Radius], [Circle By 2Lines Radius], or [Circle By 3Lines].
• Click [Circle] , [Circle by 3Points] , [Circle By Diameter] , [Circle By 2Points
Radius] , [Circle By 2Lines Radius] , or [Circle By 3Lines] .
• Right-click in the graphics window, and select [Circle], [Circle by 3Points], [Circle By Diam-
eter], [Circle By 2Points Radius], [Circle By 2Lines Radius], or [Circle By 3Lines].
This switches to the circle creation mode.
circle creation mode. Circles can also be drawn by specifying the parameters in this panel.
3. Create a circle on the graphics window.
Depending on the creation method, the items to be set may differ.
• [Circle] (center point, point on the circumference):

Click a point to specify as the center point in the graphics window. Click a point to specify as
a point on the circumference of the circle to be drawn.
• [Circle By 3 Points] (three points on the circumference):
Click three points that are on the circumference of the circle to draw in the graphics window.
• [Circle By Diameter] (two points that are on the diameter of the circle):
Click the two points that are positioned on the diameter of the circle in the graphics window.
• [Circle By 2Points Radius] (two points on the circumference and radius):
Click the two points on the circumference in the graphics window. Click the possible points
that can be selected as the center point displayed in guidelines.
• [Circle By 2Lines Radius] (two lines radius tangent to a circle):

Click two lines that are tangent to a circle in the graphics window. Click the possible points
that can be selected as the center point displayed in guidelines.
• [Circle By 3Lines] (three lines tangential to circle):
Click three lines that are tangential to a line in the graphics window.
The [Circle] setting panel is displayed.
MEMO Press the [Esc] key on the keyboard and run step 2 again, when the center point of a circle is
4. If necessary, modify the position and size of the circle in the [Circle] setting panel.
117
Operations
• Center Point: X, Y
• Geometry: Radius
5. Click [OK].
The vertex and circle that are created are added to [Basic Shape] under the sketch in [Model
Manager].
Snapping to vertices specifies the settings of coincident constraint for circle and vertices, and fixation
constraints for vertices.
Selecting lines specifies the settings of coincident constraints for circles and vertices, and fixation con-
straints for lines.
6. To finish creating the circle, select [Insert] > [Circle] > [Circle] (or [Circle by 3Points], [Cir-
cle By Diameter], [Circle By 2Points Radius], [Circle By 2Lines Radius], [Circle By 3Lines]).
• Click [Circle] , ([Circle by 3Points] , [Circle By Diameter] , [Circle By 2Points
Radius] , [Circle By 2Lines Radius] , or [Circle By 3Lines] ).
• Right-click anywhere in the graphics window, and select [Circle] (or [Circle by 3Points],
[Circle By Diameter], [Circle By 2Points Radius], [Circle By 2Lines Radius], [Circle By
3Lines]).
Draw an Arc
The types of methods for creating an arc are as follows:
• Center Point Arc
• 3 Point Arc
• Arc by 2 Points Radius
2. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Circle] > [Center Point Arc], [3 Point Arc], or [Arc by
2 Points Radius].
• Click [Center Point Arc] , [3 Point Arc] , or [Arc by 2 Points Radius] ) on the toolbar.
• Right-click in the graphics window, and select [Center Point Arc], [3 Point Arc], or [Arc by 2
Points Radius].
This switches to the arc creation mode.
arc creation mode. Arcs can also be drawn by specifying the parameters in this panel.
3. Create an arc on the graphics window.
Depending on the creation method, the items to be set may differ.
118
• [Center Point Arc] (center point, start/end points):

Click a point in the graphics window to specify the center point of the arc. From the center
point, click a point to specify as the start point of the arc. From the start point, click a point
to specify the end point of the arc.
The end point can be located either side of the line connecting the center point and start
point. The direction of the arc is changed each time the mouse pointer moves across the line
connecting the center point and start point.
The end point can be

located here.
To create an arc with a blunt angle, move the mouse pointer as shown in the figure below, but
do not cross the line connecting the center point and start point.
• [3 Point Arc] (start/end point of the arc, point on the arc):

Click a point to specify the start point of the arc, and then click a point to specify the end
point of the arc in the graphics window. From the end point, click a point to specify the arc.
A point can be located either side of the line connecting the start point and end point.
The point can be located here
MEMO When creating an arc in [Arc by 3 Point] with [Automatic Constraints] selected,
the following constraints are set.
119
Operations
• When an existing point is selected as the start point, fixation constraint is set to the start point.
• When an existing point is selected as the end point, fixation constraint is set to the end point.
• When an existing point is selected as a point on the arc, coincident constraint and fixation con-
straint are set to that point.
• [Arc by 2 Points Radius] (start/end point of the arc, one point on the arc):
Click the start point of the arc in the graphics window. Then move the cursor to the end
point and then click. Next, move the cursor to any point besides the start point and end
point, and then click.
This point can be placed on either side of the line connecting the start point and end point.
MEMO When creating an arc in [Arc by 2 Points Radius] with [Automatic Constraints]
selected, fixation constraints are set to the start point and end point.
The [Arc] setting panel is displayed.

MEMO Press the [Esc] key on the keyboard and run step 2 again, when the center point of an arc is
4. If necessary, modify the position and size of the arc in the [Arc] setting panel.
• End Point: X, Y
• Geometry: Radius, Angle
5. Click [OK].
The vertices and arc that are created are added to [Basic Shape] under the sketch in [Model Man-
ager].
Snapping to vertices specifies the settings of coincident constraints for arc and vertices, and fixation
constraints for vertices.
6. To finish creating the arc, select [Insert] > [Circle] > [Center Point Arc] (or [3 Point Arc],
[Arc by 2 Points Radius]).
• Click [Center Point Arc] (or [3 Point Arc] , [Arc by 2 Points Radius]) .
• Right-click anywhere in the graphics window, and select [Center Point Arc] (or [3 Point Arc],
[Arc by 2 Points Radius]).
Draw an Ellipse
2. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Ellipse] > [Ellipse].
120
• Click [Ellipse] on the toolbar.

• Right-click in the graphics window, and select [Ellipse].
This switches to the ellipse creation mode.
ellipse creation mode. Ellipses can also be drawn by specifying the parameters in this panel.
3. Click a point in the graphics window to specify the center of the ellipse.
4. Move the mouse pointer to a point on the major axis and click.
5. Move the mouse pointer to a point on the minor axis and click.
The [Ellipse] setting panel is displayed when the ellipse is created.
MEMO If the center point of the ellipse has been positioned in the wrong place, press the [Esc] key
and redo the above procedures.
6. To modify the position or size of the ellipse, enter the values in each item on the
[Ellipse] setting panel.
The following settings can be specified on the [Ellipse] setting panel.
• Geometry: Major Radius, Minor Radius, Major Angle
7. Click [OK].
The vertex and ellipse that are created are added to [Basic Shape] under the sketch in the [Model
Manager] tree.
MEMO Constraints are automatically set if [Automatic Constraints] in the toolbar is selected.
If the vertex snaps, settings for the circle and vertex will be concentric constraints and fixed con-
straints for the vertex.
If the line is selected, settings for the circle and line will be concentric constraints and fixation con-
straints for the line.
8. To finish creating the ellipse, select [Insert] > [Ellipse] > [Ellipse].
• Click [Ellipse] on the toolbar.
• Right-click in the graphics window, and select [Ellipse].
Draw an Elliptical Arc

2. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Ellipse] > [Ellipse Arc].
• Click [Ellipse Arc] on the toolbar.
• Right-click in the graphics window, and select [Ellipse Arc].
This switches to the elliptic arc creation mode.
121
Operations
elliptic arc creation mode. Elliptic arcs can also be drawn by specifying the parameters in this panel.
3. Click a point in the graphics window to specify the center of the ellipse arc.
4. Move the mouse pointer to a point on the major axis and click.
5. Move the mouse pointer to a point on the minor axis and click.
6. Move the mouse pointer to the start point of the elliptical arc and click.
7. Move the mouse pointer to the end point of the elliptical arc and click.
The [Elliptical Arc] setting panel is displayed when the ellipse arc is created.
MEMO If the center point of the elliptical arc has been positioned in the wrong place, press the [Esc]
key and redo the above procedures.
8. To modify the position or size of the elliptical arc, enter the values in each item on the
[Elliptical Arc] setting panel.
The following settings can be specified on the [Elliptical Arc] setting panel.
• End Point: X, Y
• Geometry: Major Radius, Minor Radius, Major Angle
9. Click [OK].
The vertex and elliptical oval that are created are added to [Basic Shape] under the sketch in the
[Model Manager] tree.
MEMO Constraints are automatically set if [Automatic Constraints] in the toolbar is selected.
If the vertex snaps, settings for the circle and vertex will be concentric constraints and fixation con-
straints for the vertex.
If the line is selected, settings for the circle and line will be concentric constraints and fixation con-
straints for the line.
10.To finish creating the ellipse arc, select [Insert] > [Ellipse] > [Ellipse Arc].
• Click [Ellipse Arc] on the toolbar.
• Right-click in the graphics window, and select [Ellipse Arc].
Draw a Vertex
2. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Vertex].
• Click [Vertex] .
• Right-click in the graphics window, and select [Vertex].
122
This switches to the vertex creation mode.

vertex creation mode. Vertices can also be drawn by specifying the parameters in this panel.
3. Select the point to create the vertex in the graphics window.
The [Vertex] setting panel is displayed.
4. Specify a value in the [X] and [Y] boxes to change the position of the vertex.
5. Click [OK].
The vertex that is created is added to [Basic Shape] under the sketch.
6. To finish creating the ellipse, select [Insert] > [Vertex].
• Click [Vertex] .
• Right-click in the graphics window, and select [Vertex].
Create Coordinate Systems to Use with Drawings

Create a 2D coordinate system which can then be used with drawings. The following coordinate sys-
tems can be created.
• XY coordinate system (rectangular coordinate system)
• Rθ coordinate system (polar coordinate system)
• Relative coordinate system
2. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Create Coordinate System].
The [Coordinate System] setting panel is displayed. The [Coordinate System] setting panel can
also be displayed via the following methods.
• Click [Create Coordinate System] on the toolbar.
• Switch to the creation modes for lines or vertices, etc., to display parameters in the lower por-
tion of the graphics window for drawing basic shape. Select [Add Coordinate System] from
the [Add Coordinate System] list.
3. Set the parameters.

4. Click [OK] in the [Coordinate System] setting panel.
A new coordinate system is added under the sketch > [Coordinate System].
Added coordinate systems can be selected from the [Coordinate System] list in the setting panel
for setting the basic shape parameters.
123
Operations
Add Basic Shapes to a Sketch Using Sketch Options

With the sketch option, you can create the following shape with mouse operation.
• Perpendicular line
• Parallel line
• Horizontal line
• Vertical line
• Line or arc with a constant angle from the X-axis
Perpendicular Line
2. Make sure that [Enable Snapping] is selected in the toolbar, and then click [Snap Per-
pendicularity] .
The snap function is not enabled even if [Snap Perpendicularity] is selected when [Enable
Snapping] is not selected.
3. Click [Line] on the toolbar.

Or, right-click anywhere in the graphics window, and select [Line].
4. A yellow navigation line is displayed in the perpendicular direction from the line that is
created after the end point of the line is selected. A perpendicular line is created using
this navigation line.
MEMO If [Automatic Constraints] is selected in the toolbar, the perpendicular constraint is auto-
matically applied
5. To disable [Snap Perpendicularity], click [Snap Perpendicularity] on the toolbar.

Or, click [Enable Snapping] on the toolbar.
Parallel Line
A line parallel to an existing line can be created easily with only mouse operations using the snap fea-
ture.
2. Make sure that [Enable Snapping] is selected in the toolbar and then click [Snap Par-
allelism] .
The snap function is not enabled even if [Snap Parallelism] is selected when [Enable Snap-
ping] is not selected.
124

4. For the procedure to create a line, see “Draw a Line” on page 113.
A parallel line is created by double-clicking, not clicking, at the end point of the first line.
5. Click the starting point for the line to create parallel to the line created in Step 5.
The cursor automatically snaps along a parallel line if the cursor is moved in the parallel direction
to the line created in Step 5.
6. Select the end point for the parallel line.
If [Automatic Constraints] is selected, the parallel constraint is automatically applied.
7. To disable [Snap Parallelism], click [Snap Parallelism] on the toolbar.
Horizontal/Vertical Line
A line horizontal/vertical to an existing line can be created easily with only mouse operations using
the snap function.
2. Make sure that [Enable Snapping] is selected in the toolbar, and then click [Snap Hor-
izontally/Vertically] .
The snap function is not enabled even if [Snap Horizontally/Vertically] is selected when
[Enable Snapping] is not selected.

The cursor automatically snaps along a horizontal line or vertical line if the cursor is moved in
the horizontal or vertical line that was created.
4. Select the end point for the horizontal or vertical line.
If [Automatic Constraints] is selected in the toolbar, the horizontal or vertical constraint is
automatically applied.
5. To disable [Snap Horizontally/Vertically], click [Snap Horizontally/Vertically] on the

toolbar.
A Line or Arc with a Constant Angle from the X-axis

A line or arc that has a constant angle from the X-axis can be created easily with only mouse opera-
tions using the snap function.
1. Select [Angle OX] in the [Sketch] setting panel under the [System Options] tab of the
[Preferences] dialog.
The [Preferences] dialog is displayed by selecting [Tools] > [Preferences] from the menu bar
3. Make sure that [Enable Snapping] is selected in the toolbar, and then click [Snap
AngleOX] .
125
Operations
The snap function is not enabled even if [Snap AngleOX] is selected when [Enable Snap-
ping] is not selected.
4. Click [Line] on the toolbar to create a line.

Click [Center Point Arc] on the toolbar to create a center point arc.
Or, right-click anywhere in the graphics window, and select [Line] or [Center Point Arc].
The cursor automatically snaps along the specified angle if the cursor is moved close to the angle
specified in Step 1.
5. Select the end point for the line or center point arc.
6. To disable [Snap AngleOX], click [Snap AngleOX] on the toolbar.

Delete a Basic Shape

2. Click to select the basic shape to delete in [Model Manager] or the graphics window.
The basic shape that is selected is highlighted in the graphics window.
MEMO [Basic Shape Select Filter] needs to be selected beforehand when selecting a basic shape in
3. Use one of the following procedures to delete a basic shape:
• Click [Delete] .
• Press the [Delete] key on the keyboard.
• Right-click a basic shape, and select [Delete] from the context menu that is displayed.
MEMO The vertices which make up a line, circle, arc, or spline cannot be deleted.
Deleting basic shapes used to configure regions:

• Regions are also deleted when deleting basic shapes while [Region Select Filter] is selected.
• Basic shapes used to configure regions cannot be deleted when [Region Select Filter] is not
selected. Only basic shapes that are not used to configure regions can be deleted.
Deleting basic shapes with a constraint:

• Constraints with basic shapes are also deleted when deleting basic shapes while [Constraint
Select Filter] is selected.
• Basic shapes with a constraint cannot be deleted when [Constraint Select Filter] is not
selected. Only basic shapes without constraint can be deleted.
126
Merging Vertices
Two points can be merged.
First
Second
The two selected points are merged.
2. Select a point in the graphics window.
3. Select a point to merge with the point selected in Step 2 while holding down the [Shift]
key or [Ctrl] key.
4. Right-click anywhere in the graphics window, and select [Merge].
The point selected in step 2 is merged with the point selected in step 1 at the position of the
point selected in step 1.
127
Operations
Using the Sketch Tool for Drawing

• Copy Basic Shapes Between Two Differing Sketches (page 128)
Copy Basic Shapes Between Two Differing Sketches

A basic shape can be copied from one sketch to another sketch.
2. Select [Insert] > [Sketch Tool] > [Project Outline to Sketch] from the menu bar.
Or click [Project Outline to Sketch] .
The [Project Outline to Sketch] setting panel is displayed.
Basic shapes included in another sketch become available in the graphics window.
3. Select a shape to copy in the graphics window.
To copy multiple shapes, select the multiple shapes while pressing and holding the [Shift] key or
[Control] key.
To cancel the selection, click anywhere in the graphics window.
4. Click [Apply] in the [Project Outline to Sketch] setting panel.
The basic shape is copied from another sketch.
MEMO When [Automatic Constraints] is selected from the toolbar, a project coincident con-
straint is automatically added to a copied basic shape. The project coincident constraint will change
the copied basic shape according to the change of the original basic shape.
5. To continue to project the target sketches, run the same procedure.
Click [Close] to end this function.
IMPORTANT A basic shape can be copied between two different sketches using [Copy] .
The center of a basic shape that is selected is duplicated to the same position as the cursor
when a basic shape with the same position and configuration exists in the copy destination
sketch. The basic shape is copied on the same position when a same basic shape does not exist
in the target sketch.
128
Using the Basic Shape Tool for Drawing

• Trim a Basic Shape (page 129)
• Divide Basic Shapes at Intersections (page 129)
• Create a Fillet on a Corner (page 130)
• Create a Chamfer on a Corner (page 131)
• Connect Two Basic Shapes (page 132)
• Create a Tangent Line (page 132)
• Create a Vertical Line (page 133)
• Create a Parallel Line (page 133)
• Connect Two Points By Adding a Line (page 133)
• Merge Lines or Arcs (page 134)
• Scale a Basic Shape (page 135)
• Divide Basic Shapes by Specified Ratio (page 135)
• Delete Duplicate Vertices (page 135)
Trim a Basic Shape

A line, circle, or an arc that intersect with another shape can be trimmed at the closest intersections.
Clicking the line at the point indicated in the figure on the left trims the line as shown in the figure
on the right.
Example
2. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Basic Shape Tool] > [Sketch Trim].
Or click [Sketch Trim] .
3. Click the line, circle, arc, or spline to trim.
The shape is cut at the closest intersections, and a vertex is created where the shapes intersected.
Divide Basic Shapes at Intersections

Overlapping lines, circles, arcs, and splines can be divided where they intersect.
129
Operations
Left: Before dividing at the intersection (one line and one arc)
Right: After dividing at the intersection (three lines and three arcs)
2. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Basic Shape Tool] > [Break at Intersection].
Or click [Break at Intersection] .
3. Select lines, circles, arcs, and splines while holding down the [Shift] key or [Ctrl] key.
The intersection points are highlighted.
4. In the [Break at Intersection] setting panel, click [Apply].
The lines, circles, arcs, and splines are divided at the intersections.
When a break at intersection is executed and [Automatic Constraints] is selected, a coincident
constraint will be automatically set on the divided line.
5. To repeatedly divide the basic shape at an intersection, run the same procedure.
Create a Fillet on a Corner

A fillet is created to the angle which is made up with two lines, two arcs, or a line and an arc into an
angle. An arc is added to the fillet area.
A fillet can be created in the section where the two lines, two arcs, or a line and an arc are not con-
nected.
A A B
B
Example of line A with line B to create a fillet

Arc C is added to connect line A and line B to display a fillet.
2. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Basic Shape Tool] > [Create Fillet].
Or click [Create Fillet] .
3. Select lines or arcs while holding down the [Shift] key or [Ctrl] key to set the function to
create fillets in the graphics window.
A preview is displayed in the yellow line which is determined from the target shape and the value
of [Radius].
130
5. In the [Create Fillet] setting panel, click [Apply].

The fillet is created.
The constraint tangency and the constraint radius are added on the area where the fillet is created
when [Automatic Constraints] is selected in the [Preferences] dialog.
6. To repeatedly create fillets, run the same procedure.
Create a Chamfer on a Corner

A chamfer is created on an angle that is made up of two lines, two arcs, or a line and an arc into an
angle. A new line is added to the chamfer area.
A chamfer can be created in a section where two lines, two arcs, or in between a line and an arc that
are not connected from each other.
B
A
A
B
Example of line A combined with line B to create a chamfer

Line A and line B are extended and line C is added to connect with both lines to display a
chamfer.
2. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Basic Shape Tool] > [Create Chamfer].
Or click [Create Chamfer] .
3. Select lines or arcs while holding down the [Shift] key or [Ctrl] key to set the function to
create a chamfer in the graphics window.
A yellow line is displayed on the geometry to create a chamfer after the values are set in [Length]
and [Angle].
4. In the [Create Chamfer] setting panel, set the parameters.
[Angle]
[Length]
5. Click [Apply] in the [Create Chamfer] setting panel.

The chamfer is created.
131
Operations
6. To repeatedly create two chamfers, run the same procedures from steps.
Connect Two Basic Shapes

Two basic shapes that are selected can be connected by extending one or both of the basic shapes.
The intersection also break when shapes are connected.
B
A D
A
Example: Line A is extended in order to connect to the basic shape that is arc B when line
A is in combination with arc B. Arc B becomes arc C and arc D when the intersection
breaks.
2. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Basic Shape Tool] > [Connect 2 Basic Shapes].
Or click [Connect 2 Basic Shapes] .
3. Select lines, circles, arcs, and splines while holding down the [Shift] key or [Ctrl] key to
set the function.
A yellow line is displayed after the shapes are connected.
4. In the [Connect 2 Basic Shapes] setting panel, set the parameters.
5. Click [Apply].
The basic shapes are connected.
6. To repeatedly connect two basic shapes, run the same procedure.
Create a Tangent Line

Creates a line connecting a vertex and a circle (or arc) when they are selected.
2. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Basic Shape Tool] > [Tangent Line].
Or click [Tangent Line] from the tool bar.
3. Select a vertex and a circle (or arc) in the graphics window.
4. In the [Tangent Line] setting panel, click [Apply].
A tangent line is created.
When [Automatic Constraints] is selected during the creation of a tangent line, tangential
constraint is set for the created tangent line and the circle (or arc) it was based on.
132
5. To continue creating tangent lines, run the same procedures.

To finish creating the tangent line, click [Close].
Create a Vertical Line

Creates a vertical line connecting a vertex and a line when they are selected.
2. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Basic Shape Tool] > [Vertical Line].
Or click [Vertical Line] from the tool bar .
3. Select a vertex and a line in the graphics window.
4. In the [Vertical Line] setting panel, click [Apply].
A vertical line is created.
When [Automatic Constraints] is selected during the creation of a vertical line, vertical con-
straint is set for the created vertical line and the line it was based on.
5. To continue creating vertical lines, run the same procedures.
To finish creating the vertical line, click [Close].
Create a Parallel Line

Creates a separated parallel line based on a specified distance from the selected line.
2. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Basic Shape Tool] > [Parallel Lines].
Or click [Parallel Lines] .
3. Select a line that is the basis of the parallel in the graphics window.
The line that is the basis and the parallel line created from the value set in [Distance] is temporar-
ily highlighted in yellow.
4. In the [Parallel Lines] setting panel, set the parameters.
5. Click [Apply] in the [Parallel Lines] setting panel.
The parallel is created.
Parallel constraint is set for the parallel that is created and the line that it is based on, when
[Automatic Constraints] is selected during parallel creation.
6. To repeatedly create parallel lines, run the same procedures.
Connect Two Points By Adding a Line

Create a line to connect the end points of a basic shape in a closed state.
133
Operations
Added line
Left: Settings for a joint, Right: A joint after setting specifications
2. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Basic Shape Tool] > [Joint].
Or click [Joint] .
3. Select a basic shape to create a joint in the graphics window while holding down the
[Shift] or [Ctrl] key.
Dragging the area with a mouse where the basic shape exists can also create a joint.
A yellow line is created from the basic shape.
4. In the [Joint] setting panel, click [Apply].
The joint is created.
5. To repeatedly create a joint, run the same procedures.
Merge Lines or Arcs

Basic shapes that are the same type such as lines or arcs sharing a vertex can be merged.
Bias mesh can be eliminated by deleting unnecessary vertices using this function.
Shared vertex
A B
Left: Before merge, Right: After merge
2. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Basic Shape Tool] > [Merge].
Or click [Merge] .
3. Select basic shapes to merge in the graphics window while holding down the [Shift] or
[Ctrl] key.
The basic shape that is selected is highlighted in yellow.
4. In the [Merge] setting panel, click [Apply].
The basic shapes are merged.
5. To repeatedly merge basic shapes, run the same procedures.
134
Scale a Basic Shape

2. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Basic Shape Tool] > [Scale Basic Shape].
Or click [Scale Basic Shape] on the toolbar.
3. In the [Scale Basic Shape] setting panel, set the parameters.
4. Click [Apply].
Scaling is run.
5. To continue running scaling for the basic shape, run the same procedures.
Click [Close] to end scaling of basic shape.
Divide Basic Shapes by Specified Ratio

Selected basic shapes (lines, arcs, circles, elliptical arcs, ellipses, splines, and function curves) can be
divided according to a specified ratio.
2. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Basic Shape Tool] > [Divide Basic Shape].
Or, click [Divide Basic Shape] on the toolbar.
3. Click a basic shape to divide in the graphics window.
Click one of the following:
a straight line, arc, circle, elliptical arc, ellipse, spline, or function curve.
4. In the [Divide Basic Shape] setting panel, set the parameters.
5. Click [Apply].
The selected basic shape is divided.
6. To continue dividing the basic shape, repeat the same procedure.
To end dividing the basic shape, click [Close].
Delete Duplicate Vertices

Multiple vertices that exist in a specified range can be merged as a single vertex.
The region is not created. The region is created after

deleting the duplicate vertices.
Left: Before deleting duplications (vertices overlap),

Right: After deleting duplicates (the vertices are merged)
135
Operations
2. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Basic Shape Tool] > [Delete Duplication Node].
Or click [Delete Duplication Node] on the toolbar.
3. Select vertices while holding down the [Shift] key or [Ctrl] key for deleting duplications
in the graphics window.
Dragging the area with a mouse where vertices exists can also delete duplications.
4. In the [Delete Duplication Node] setting panel, set the parameters.
5. Click [Apply].
The vertices are merged.
6. To repeatedly delete duplicated nodes, run the same procedures.
136
Setting 2D Constraints to Limit Shape Position and Size of Shapes

By adding a 2D constraint, restrictions on the length and width, and position of the shape are set.
The types of 2D constraints are as follows:
• Fixation • Tangency
• Relative Fixation • Coincident
• Horizontality • Project coincident
• Verticality • Distance from origin
• Angle • Concentric with origin
• Parallelity
• Coincident with origin
• Perpendicularity
• Angle from X-axis
• Distance
• Distance from X-axis
• Distance (between two objects)
• Coincident with X-axis
• Horizontal Distance
• Tangency with X-axis
• Vertical Distance
• Angle from Y-axis
• Radius/Diameter
• Distance from Y-axis
• Major Radius/Major Diameter
• Coincident with Y-axis
• Minor Radius/Minor Diameter
• Tangency with Y-axis
• Concentric
Set a 2D Constraint to a Basic Shape Automatically

Settings for constraints are specified by automatically determining which areas can be set with con-
straint from a geometry in [Create Constraints From Geometry]. Constraints that needs to be spec-
ified can be set in a single process by selecting a type of constraint and geometry.
2. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Sketch Tool] > [Create Constraints From Geome-
try].
Or click [Create Constraints From Geometry] on the toolbar.
3. In the [Create Constraints From Geometry] setting panel, set the parameters.
4. Click [Apply].
MEMO The process time may take longer when the number of basic shapes specified for the setting
is too many. Cancel the process and then redo after specifying the number of basic shapes to a lower
number.
137
Operations
Set a 2D Constraint to a Basic Shape Manually

2. Select the basic shapes to set a constraint in the graphics window.
Multiple basic shapes can be selected while holding down the [Shift] key.
3. Right-click, and select the desired constraint from the short cut menu that is displayed
while the shapes are selected.
The constraint displayed on the menu depends on the figure selected.
In the case of the following constraints, the parameter setting panel is displayed:
• Distance constraints:
distance, horizontal distance, vertical distance, distance from origin, distance from X-axis,
and distance from Y-axis
• Angle constraints:
angle, angle from X-axis, and angle from Y-axis
• Radius/diameter constraints:
radius/diameter, radius/diameter (major axis), and radius/diameter (minor axis)
• Relative fixation constraints
4. For distance constraint, angle constraint, radius/diameter constraint, or relative fixation
constraint, set the parameters, and click [OK].
The constraint is added under the sketch > [Constraint] in the [Model Manager] tree. Marks and
arrows indicating distances and angles appear where constraints have been set. By right-clicking
on them, you can edit or delete the constraint from the menu that is displayed.
MEMO The display position of each constraint value can be moved by mouse dragging after closing
the settings panel.
MEMO The constraints displayed in the [Model Manager] tree can be displayed by types that are
grouped. Right-click [Constraint] in the [Model Manager] tree, and select [View by Type].
Edit a 2D Constraint
The following constraint parameters can be edited.
138
• Distance constraints:
distance, horizontal distance, vertical distance, distance from origin, distance from X-axis, and
distance from Y-axis
• Angle constraints:
angle, angle from X-axis, and angle from Y-axis
• Radius/diameter constraints:
radius/diameter, radius/diameter (major axis), and radius/diameter (minor axis)
• Relative fixation constraints
2. Double-click the value indicating the distance or angle of a constraint in the graphics
window.
Or, double-click a constraint displayed under the sketch > [Constraint] in the [Model Manager]
tree.
The parameter setting panel is displayed.
MEMO [Constraint Select Filter] needs to be selected in the toolbar beforehand when selecting
constraints in the graphics window.
3. Edit parameters in each settings panel.
The basic shapes with the constraint being edited will be highlighted on the graphics window.
4. Click [OK].
Delete a 2D Constraint
2. Select the symbol of the constraint to delete in the graphics window.
Or, select a constraint displayed under a sketch > [constraint] in the [Model Manager] tree.
The selected symbol or arrow is highlighted.
3. Use one of the following procedures to delete a constraint.
139
Operations
• Click [Delete] from the tool bar.

• Right-click the shape, and select [Delete].
140
Moving Basic Shapes

Move the basic shapes.
• Move a Basic Shape Using a Function (page 141)
• Move a Basic Shapes Using the Mouse (page 141)
• Move a Basic Shape Between Two Sketches (page 142)
Move a Basic Shape Using a Function

The following types are available:
• [Translate Basic Shape]:
Translates basic shape in the linear direction.
• [Rotate Basic Shape]:
Rotates basic shape around a point in the rotation direction.
2. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Move Basic Shape] > [Translate Basic Shape] or
[Rotate Basic Shape].
• Click the button on the toolbar ( , ).
• Right-click the basic shapes of the graphics window and select [Translate Basic Shape] or
[Rotate Basic Shape].
3. In the [Move Basic Shape] or [Rotate Basic Shape] setting panel, set the parameters.
4. Click [OK].
To return to the state before moving, use [Undo] .
Move a Basic Shapes Using the Mouse

Use the following procedure to move multiple basic shapes simultaneously.
2. Make sure that [Drag Basic Geometry By Mouse] is selected in the toolbar.
Basic shapes cannot be moved by operating the mouse if [Drag Basic Geometry By Mouse] is not
selected.
3. Select vertices, lines, circles, arcs, and splines to move on the graphics window.
The selected shapes are highlighted in the graphics window.
MEMO [Basic Shape Select Filter] in the toolbar needs to be selected beforehand when selecting
basic shapes in the graphics window.
4. Drag the group of selected shapes to the desired position while holding down the [Shift]
key with the left mouse button.
All the selected shapes move while retaining their relative positions.
141
Operations
5. Release the mouse button and the [Shift] key.

The shapes move to the location of the cursor.
Move a Basic Shape Between Two Sketches

A basic shape can be moved from one sketch to another sketch.
2. Select a shape to move in the graphics window.
Or, select a shape to move in [Model Manager].
3. Click [Cut] .
Or, select [Edit] > [Cut] from the menu bar.
4. Click [Edit Sketch] to cancel the edit mode .

5. Select another sketch to move the shape in [Model Manager], and then click [Edit
Sketch] .
The sketch enters the edit mode .
6. Click [Paste] .
Or, select [Edit] > [Paste] from the menu bar.
The shape is moved to another sketch that is in edit mode.
MEMO If there are shapes that have the same position and composition as the shape cut into the
sketch, the shape pastes to the position of the mouse pointer. If it does not exist, it paste to the same
position as the cut shape.
142
Copying Basic Shapes

Copy the basic shapes.
• Use a Function to Copy a Shape (page 143)
• Copy a Basic Shape to a User-Defined Position (page 143)
Use a Function to Copy a Shape

• [Parallel Copy Basic Shape]:
Copies the selected basic shape in the specified direction with equal spacing.
• [Rotate Copy Basic Shape]:
Copies the selected basic shape equally spaced in the circumferential direction around a point.
• [Mirror Copy Basic Shape]:
Copies the selected basic shape symmetrically about the axis.
2. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Copy Basic Shape] > [Parallel Copy Basic Shape],
[Rotate Copy Basic Shape], or [Mirror Copy Basic Shape].
• Click the button on the toolbar ( , , ).
• Right-click the basic shapes of the graphics window and select [Parallel Copy Basic Shape],
[Rotate Copy Basic Shape], or [Mirror Copy Basic Shape].
The [Parallel Copy Basic Shape], [Rotate Copy Basic Shape], or [Mirror Copy Basic Shape] set-
ting panel is displayed.
4. Click [OK].
The basic shape is added under the sketch > [Basic Shape] in the [Model Manager] tree.
To return to the state before copying, use [Undo] .
Copy a Basic Shape to a User-Defined Position

Copy a basic shape to a position on the same plane.
2. Select a shape to copy in the graphics window.
Or, select a shape to copy in [Model Manager].
3. Click [Copy] .
Or, select [Edit] > [Copy] from the menu bar.
143
Operations
4. Click [Paste] .
Or, select [Edit] > [Paste] from the menu bar.
MEMO The center of the basic shape that is duplicated is located at the position where the mouse
pointer is located.
144
Creating Regions
Creates an region (face) from the outline lines of the part cross section.
• Create a Region Manually (page 145)
• Automatically Add a Region Boolean Feature (page 146)
MEMO Selecting [Create Regions] in [Import] of the [Preferences] dialog creates regions automatically
when importing 2D CAD files.
MEMO Regions can be created where one or more basic shapes are connected to form a closed space.
Free vertices
Left: The space is not closed, so the region cannot be created.

Right: The space is closed, so the region can be created.
Create a Region Manually

1. Perform [Break at Intersection] before creating regions.
See “Divide Basic Shapes at Intersections” on page 129.
3. Select [Insert] > [Create Region] from the menu bar.
Or, click [Create Region] .
4. Select arcs and edges of a region while holding down the [Ctrl] or [Shift] key in the
graphics window.
The end points (floating vertex) are highlighted when the selected lines or arcs are not connected.
Highlighted area
5. In the [Create Region] setting panel, set the parameters.

6. Click [Apply].
A region is created.
MEMO The basic shape that configures the outline of a region and other basic shapes are displayed
in different colors.
145
Operations
MEMO The name or color of a region can be changed by right-clicking the region under [Region] in
[Model Manager], and then selecting [Properties] from the menu. In the [Properties] dialog, specify a
name and select a color.
7. Run same steps again to continue creating regions.
Click [Close] to exit creating regions.
Automatically Add a Region Boolean Feature

When a region overlapping with an existing region is created, the [Resolve Overlapped Regions] dia-
log is displayed. Select one of the following:
• When [Union] is selected, two regions are merged into one region, and it becomes one part.
• When [Subtraction] is selected, the two regions are left unchanged, but because the duplicate
area is removed from one of the regions, the duplicate state is resolved.
• When [Subtraction] is selected and [Delete Regions] is selected, the region to subtract is removed
along with the duplicate area, and only the region to be subtracted from remains.
• When [Intersection] is selected, only the duplicate area of the two regions is kept, and the rest is
removed.
From left to right: Original figure (Overlapping regions), region with [Union] selected,
region with [Subtraction] selected, region with [Subtraction] and [Delete Regions]
selected, region with [Intersection] selected
Click [OK] to perform the Boolean operation. Also, [Boolean] is added inside [Features] under the
sketch in [Model Manager] tree.
Delete a Region
2. Select a region to delete in the [Model Manager] tree or the graphics window.
The region that applies is highlighted in the graphics window.
MEMO [Region Select Filter] needs to be selected beforehand when selecting a region in the
graphics window.
3. Use one of the following procedures to delete a region:
• Right-click the region, and select [Delete].
Deleting region pattern features also deletes the region created by the feature.
It is not possible to delete the basic shape used to create the region, leaving the region. The basic
shapes can be deleted if they are included with the region.
146
To delete a basic shape that was used to create the region, select the [Basic Geometry Select Fil-
ter] and [Region Select Filter] in the [Select] toolbar, select the basic shape to be deleted,
and then perform the above operation. If a constraints have been set on the basic shape, you
must also select the [Constraint Select Filter] .
147
Operations
Processing Regions
• Scale a Region (page 148)
• Round the Corner of a Region (Fillet) (page 148)
• Chamfer the Corner of a Region (page 148)
• Offset a Region Edge (page 149)
• Move a Region Edge (page 150)
• Convert a Region Edge to a Fillet Feature (page 154)
Scale a Region
2. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Region Feature] > [Region Scale]
Or, click [Region Scale] on the toolbar.
3. In the [Region Scale] setting panel, set the parameters.
4. Click [OK].
[Region Scale] is added under the sketch > [Feature] in the [Model Manager] tree. Right-click it
to open a menu. From this menu, you can perform [Edit], [Suppress], [Delete], [Properties], etc.
Round the Corner of a Region (Fillet)

2. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Region Feature] > [Region Fillet].
Or, perform one of the following procedures.
• Click [Region Fillet] on the toolbar.
• Right-click a specified selection of multiple lines (or arcs) in the graphics window and select
[Region Fillet].
• Right-click one or a specified selection of multiple region vertices in the graphics window and
select [Region Fillet].
3. In the [Region Fillet] setting panel, set the parameters.
5. Click [OK].
[Region Fillet] is added is added under the sketch > [Feature] in the [Model Manager] tree.
Right-click it to open a menu. From this menu, you can perform [Edit], [Suppress], [Delete],
[Properties], etc.
Chamfer the Corner of a Region

148
2. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Region Feature] > [Region Chamfer].
Or perform one of the following procedures:
• Click [Region Chamfer] on the toolbar.
• Right-click a specified selection of multiple lines (or arcs) in the graphics window and select
[Region Chamfer].
• Right-click one or a specified selection of multiple region vertices in the graphics window and
select [Region Chamfer].
3. In the [Region Chamfer] setting panel, set the parameters.
4. Click [OK].
[Region Chamfer] is added is added under the sketch > [Feature] in the [Model Manager] tree.
[Properties], etc.
Offset a Region Edge

By specifying the offset and moving the region edge to the normal direction, change the geometry of
the region that contains the edge.
• When the offset object is a straight line or a spline, it moves in the normal direction while the
adjacent geometries remain fixed.
• When the offset object is a circle or arc, the center position remains fixed and moves in the radial
direction.
• When the offset object is an oval or elliptical arc, the center position remains fixed and moves in
the radial direction (principal axis and accessory axis).
2. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Region Feature] > [Region Edge Offset].
• Click [Region Edge Offset] on the toolbar.
• Right-click one or multiple region edges in the graphics window and select [Region Edge
Offset] > (offset type. For example, [Specify Offset]).
When the [Region Edge Offset] setting panel is displayed by this operation, the selected
region edges are added to the [Region Edges] list. Additionally, depending on the selected
menu, the corresponding item is added to the [Method Type] list.
3. In the [Region Edge Offset] setting panel, set the parameters.
4. Click [OK].
[Region Edge Offset] is added is added under the sketch > [Feature] in the [Model Manager]
tree. Right-click it to open a menu. From this menu, you can perform [Edit], [Suppress],
[Delete], [Properties], etc.
149
Operations
Move a Region Edge

By moving the region edge linearly or radially, change the geometry of the region that contains the
edge.
• When the movement target is a line or spline, it moves in a linear direction or rotation direction
while the adjacent geometries remain fixed.
• When the movement target is a circle or arc, the center position moves in a linear direction or
rotation direction while maintaining the radius.
• When the movement target is an oval or elliptical arc, the center position moves in a linear direc-
tion or rotation direction while maintaining the radius (principal axis and accessory axis).
Furthermore, specifying the positional relationships between a region edge (or its vertex) and
another geometry allows the region edge to be moved while preserving the specified positional rela-
tionships ([Positional Relations]).
2. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Region Feature] > [Region Edge Move].
• Click [Region Edge Move] on the toolbar.
• Right-click one or multiple region edges in the graphics window and select [Region Edge
Move] > (movement type. For example, [Parallel - Specify Move]).
When the [Region Edge Move] setting panel is displayed by this operation, the selected
region edges are added to the [Region Edges] list. Additionally, depending on the selected
menu, the corresponding item is selected in the [Type] list.
3. In the [Region Edge Move] setting panel, set the parameters.
4. Click [OK].
[Region Edge Move] is added is added under the sketch > [Feature] in the [Model Manager] tree.
[Properties], etc.
150
Running Boolean Operations to Eliminate Duplication of Regions

Runs Boolean operations on regions with duplicate areas, and remove the duplicate state. The three
Boolean calculation types are “union”, “subtraction”, and “intersection”.
From left to right: Original figure (overlapping regions), using “union” on the original
figure, Using “subtraction” on the original figure, using “subtraction” on the original
figure with [Delete Regions] selected, Using “intersection” on the original figure
• When “Union” is used, two regions are merged into one region, and it becomes one part.
• When “Subtraction” is used, the two regions are left unchanged, but because the duplicate area is
removed from one of the regions, the duplicate state is resolved.
When “Subtraction” is used and [Delete Regions] is selected, the region to subtract is removed
along with the duplicate area, and only the region to be subtracted from remains.
• When “Intersection” is used, only the duplicate area of the two regions is kept, and the rest is
removed.
2. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Region Feature] > [Boolean for Region].
Or click [Boolean for Regions] on the toolbar.
3. In the [Boolean for Regions] setting panel, set the parameters.
4. Click [OK].
[Boolean] is added is added under the sketch > [Feature] in the [Model Manager] tree. Right-
click it to open a menu. From this menu, you can perform [Edit], [Suppress], [Delete], [Proper-
ties], etc.
151
Operations
Moving Regions
2. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Region Feature] > [Region Move].
• Click [Region Move] on the toolbar.
• Right-click one or multiple regions in the graphics window and select [Region Move] >
(movement type. For example, [Parallel - Specify Move]).
When the [Region Move] setting panel is displayed by this operation, the selected regions are
added to the [Regions] list. Additionally, depending on the selected menu, the corresponding
item is selected in the [Type] list and [Method Type] list.
3. In the [Region Move] setting panel, set the parameters.
4. Click [OK].
[Region Move] is added is added under the sketch > [Feature] in the [Model Manager] tree.
[Properties], etc.
152
Copying Regions
• [Region Linear Pattern]:
Copies the selected region in the specified direction with equal spacing.
• [Region Circular Pattern]:
Copies the selected region equally spaced in the circumferential direction around a point.
• [Region Mirror Copy]:
Copies the selected region symmetrically about the axis.
2. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Region Pattern] > [Region Linear Pattern], [Region
Circular Pattern], [Region Mirror Copy].
• Right-click the regions of the graphics window and select [Region Linear Pattern], [Region
Circular Pattern], or [Region Mirror Copy].
3. In the [Region Linear Pattern], [Region Circular Pattern], or [Region Mirror Copy] setting
panel, set the parameters.
4. Click [OK].
[Region Linear Pattern], [Region Circular Pattern], or [Region Mirror Copy] is added under the
sketch > [Feature] in the [Model Manager] tree. Right-click it to open a menu. From this menu,
you can perform [Edit], [Suppress], [Delete], [Properties], etc.
MEMO When regions are copied using a pattern feature, the basic shapes used to create the region
are copied as well.
MEMO If you delete a pattern feature, the regions and basic shapes created using that feature will
also be deleted.
153
Operations
Automatic Settings of Region Feature Based on Shapes

• Convert a Region Edge to a Fillet Feature (page 154)
• Set Region Pattern Features Based on Region Periodicity or Symmetry (page 154)
Convert a Region Edge to a Fillet Feature

The curved edge of a region can be converted to a [Region Fillet] feature. By using the [Region Fil-
let] feature, the fillet radius can be changed and the fillet can be deleted.
2. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Region Feature] > [Convert to Fillet Feature].
Or, click [Convert to Fillet Feature] on the toolbar.
3. In the [Convert to Fillet Feature] setting panel, set the parameters.
4. Click [Apply].
[Region Fillet] is added under the sketch > [Feature] in the [Model Manager] tree.
To undo the conversion, select [Edit] > [Undo] from the menu bar. Even if added [Region Fillet]
are deleted using this function, the shape cannot be returned to its state before conversion.
Set Region Pattern Features Based on Region Periodicity or Symmetry

A region for one pattern can be cut out from regions having periodicity or symmetry. Region pattern
features can then be set as desired for the region of that one pattern.
Use the [Convert to Circular Pattern Feature] function when creating shapes for user-defined tem-
plates in JMAG-Express.
2. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Region Feature] > [Convert to Linear Pattern Fea-
ture], [Convert to Circular Pattern Feature], or [Convert to Mirror Copy Feature].
3. In the [Convert to Linear Pattern Feature], [Convert to circular pattern feature], or [Con-
vert to Mirror Copy Feature] setting panel, set the parameters.
4. Click [Apply].
[Region Linear Pattern], [Region Circular Pattern], or [Region Mirror Copy] is added under the
sketch > [Feature] in the [Model Manager] tree.
To undo the conversion, select the [Undo] under [Edit] from the menu bar. Deleting a region
pattern feature added by this function does not restore the state before conversion.
154
Creating 2D Model Using the Geometry Library

The geometry library contains geometries of motor parts (rotors, stators) and simple geometries
such as rectangles, circles, etc.
Left: 2D motor geometry, Right: 2D simple geometries
When selecting a geometry from the geometry library and specifying dimensions, the geometry is
added to an assembly as a new part or sketch.
Geometry library
It is also possible to add user-created geometries to the geometry library or to use the same geometry
on multiple machines by placing the geometry library in a shared folder.
MEMO The geometry added by the user is referred to as a custom geometry.
Search for Geometry

When a part of a folder name, model number, explanation, or tag name is entered in the [Look For]
box of the [Geometry Library] tab in the [Toolbox], the target folder or geometry is displayed.
• When performing an AND search, use half spaces as delimiters.
• The use of wild cards (?, *) are also supported.
• The search is not case sensitive.
• Double-byte and single-byte characters are distinguished.
MEMO The model number, explanation, and tag of custom geometries can be added and edited in the
[Properties] dialog. To open the [Properties] dialog, right-click the geometry in the [Geometry Library]
tab of the [Toolbox] and select [Properties].
Insert a Geometry Added to the Geometry Library into an Assembly

1. Under the [Geometry Library] tab in [Toolbox] in Geometry Editor, click a geometry.
The selected geometry is previewed in the lower part of [Toolbox].
2. Under the [Geometry Library] tab, double-click the geometry.
155
Operations
• Right-click the geometry under the [Geometry Library] tab and select [Insert].
• Select the geometry under the [Geometry Library] tab and click [Open] in the lower part.
• Select the geometry under the [Geometry Library] tab and drag and drop it into the graphics
window.
The [Geometry Library - (geometry name)] setting panel is displayed. In this setting panel, vari-
ables necessary for defining each geometry are displayed.
MEMO Geometries classified under [Motor] in the geometry library are created based on JMAG-
Express templates. For unknown variable names, check in JMAG-Express.
MEMO If a variable that is contained in a geometry to be inserted has the same name as another vari-
able that is in the assembly, before the [Geometry Library - (geometry name)] setting panel is dis-
played, the [Resolve Duplicate Variables] dialog is displayed. Perform the following settings and click
[OK].
• To avoid the duplication of a variable (when using the variable as a different variable), select the
checkbox for that variable. In this case, the duplicated variables included in the geometry to be
inserted are renamed with the names displayed in [Resolving Name]. If it is desired to change the
name of a variable from the JMAG suggested name before renaming it, double-click the cell for
that variable in [Resolving Name] and enter the desired character string.
• When not avoiding the duplication of a variable (when using as the same variable), clear the check-
box for that variable. In this case, the variable values of the geometry to be inserted will impact any
geometries using any of these variables. For example, if a geometry to be inserted has 4 poles, the
existing geometry will change to have 4 poles.
3. In the [Geometry Library - (geometry name)] setting panel, enter a value for each vari-
able.
When the value of a variable is entered, the geometry previewed in the graphics window is
updated.
For the types and Notes for variables, see “Parameter Explanation Edition”.
4. Click [OK].
The geometry is inserted from the geometry library into the assembly.
• When an incorrect geometry is inserted, the state can be restored before the insertion with
[Restore] in the toolbar.
• The values of the variables for each geometry can be modified in the [Equations] dialog. To
open the [Equations] dialog, right-click [Assembly] in the [Model Manager] tree and select
[Equations].
• When the setting panel for a feature or sketch which contribute to the structure of an inserted
geometry is displayed, for each feature or sketch parameter, whether the variables specified
when the geometry was inserted are being used or not can be checked.
156
Add Geometries Created to the Geometry Library

1. Create 2D or 3D geometries with Geometry Editor.
• If adding a geometry (CAD model) created by CAD software other than Geometry Editor to
the geometry library, select [File] > [Open] from the menu bar and import the CAD file (a
*.sat file for example) into the assembly.
• If parameterizing parameters of a geometry to be added, define variables in the [Equations]
dialog and assign them to the parameters.
To open the [Equations] dialog, right-click [Assembly] in the [Model Manager] tree and select
[Equations]. For details, see “Assigning Numerical Expressions and Variables to Parameter Val-
ues” on page 79.
2. In the [Model Manager] tree, make sure that there are no sketches or parts being
edited.
If there are parts or sketches being edited, right-click them in the [Model Manager] tree and
select [End Part] (or [End Sketch]).
3. In the [Model Manager] tree, right-click the assembly and select [Add to Geometry
Library].
4. In the [Add to Geometry Library] dialog, set the parameters.
5. Click [OK].
The geometry is added to the [Custom Geometry] folder under the [Geometry Library] tab in
[Toolbox].
• To customize the added geometry, right-click the [Custom Geometry] folder and select [Cre-
ate Folder]. Since a subfolder is created in the [Custom Geometry] folder, drag and drop the
geometry to this folder.
• To change the model number, explanation, and tag of the added geometry, right-click the
geometry in the [Geometry Library] tab and select [Properties]. Specify a new model number,
explanation, and tag in the [Properties] dialog and click [OK].
• To delete the added geometry, right-click the geometry under the [Geometry Library] tab and
select [Delete].
Use the Same Geometry Library on Another Machine

1. In Geometry Editor, add desired geometries to the geometry library.
See “Add Geometries Created to the Geometry Library” on page 157.
157
Operations
2. Export the geometry library.

i. Right-click the [Custom Geometry] folder or one of its subfolders under the [Geome-
try Library] tab in [Toolbox] and select [Export Library].
ii. In the [Export Libraries] dialog, specify a folder to which to export the geometry
library.
iii. Click [Select Folder].
The geometry library geometries are exported to the specified folder while maintaining the
folder structure.
3. Move or copy the geometry library exported in step 2 to another machine.
4. Import the geometry library to the Geometry Editor on the machine to move or copy
the geometry library to.
i. Start JMAG-Designer and start Geometry Editor.
ii. Right-click the [Custom Geometry] folder or one of its subfolders under the [Geome-
try Library] tab in [Toolbox] in Geometry Editor and select [Import Library].
iii. In the [Import Libraries] dialog, specify a folder to which to import the geometry
library.
iv. Click [Select Folder].
The geometry library is imported to Geometry Editor.
Share a Geometry Library on a Network

1. In Geometry Editor, add desired geometries to the geometry library.
2. Export the geometry library.
i. Right-click the [Custom Geometry] folder or one of its subfolders under the [Geome-
try Library] tab in [Toolbox] and select [Export Library].
ii. In the [Export Libraries] dialog, specify a folder to which to export the geometry
library.
iii. Click [Select Folder].
The geometry library geometries are exported to the specified folder while maintaining the
folder structure.
3. Move or copy the geometry library exported in step 2 to another machine on the net-
work.
4. Set the geometry library in step 3 so that it is referenced from Geometry Editor.
i. Start JMAG-Designer and start Geometry Editor.
ii. Select [Tools] > [Preferences] from the Geometry Editor menu bar to open the [Pref-
erences] dialog.
iii. On the navigation bar of the [System Options] tab, click [Geometry Library].
iv. In [Shared Geometry Library Folder], specify the geometry library from step 3.
158
v. Click [OK].
The geometries in the geometry library from step 3 are listed in the [Custom Geometry]
folder under the [Geometry Library] tab in [Toolbox].
159
Operations
Creating 2D Wire Models Using Wire Templates

By using the Wire Template, wires for each coil can be easily modeled by simply specifying the range
the wires pass and a few numerical parameters.
To evaluate current distribution inside of a wire, use the Wire Template to accurately model the wire
for the physical machine, and then use the FEM Conductor condition to run current through the
wire.
Example of creating wires using the Wire Template and the region circular pattern feature.
MEMO To evaluate current distribution inside of a wire, the FEM Conductor condition must be used
instead of the FEM Coil condition.
1. Create the region the wires pass before using the Wire Template function. When using
any shape in the wire cross-section, create a region for one wire cross-section in the
position which will be the start point for placing a wire.
2. In the [Model Manager] tree, make sure that the sketch is in the edit mode .
3. Select [Template Feature] > [Wire Template] from the menu bar.
Or click [Wire template] on the toolbar.
MEMO While the Wire Template is being used, support messages in a dialog are shown in the
graphics window.
4. In the [Wire Template] setting panel, set the parameters.

5. Click [OK].
160
[Wire Template] is added under the sketch > [Feature] in the [Model Manager] tree. Right-click
it to open a menu. From this menu, you can perform [Edit], [Suppress], [Delete], [Properties],
etc.
161
Operations
Using Original Region Templates Using Python Programs

User original region templates can be created by using programs written in Python.
1. Create a Python program for creating geometry.

Python programs can be created using the JMAG-Designer Script Editor, or a commercially
available text editor, etc.
For details about API functions that can be used, see “API Functions and Samples of User-
Defined Templates” in “Parameter Explanation Edition”.
2. In the [Model Manager] tree, make sure that a sketch is in the edit mode . .
3. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Template Feature] > [User Defined Region Tem-
plate].
Or, click [User Defined Region Template] on the toolbar.
4. In the [User Defined Region Template] setting panel, click [Edit Script].
The [User Defined Template: Edit Script] window is displayed.
The menus and toolbar buttons available in the [User Defined Template: Edit Script] window
are the same as those in Script Editor (with the exception of some functions). For details on how
to use Script Editor, see “Script Editor” in “Parameter Explanation Edition”.
5. Add the Python program created in step 1.
Copy and paste the Python program from step 1.
It is also possible to save the Python program from step 1 to a file (.py) and import it to a user-
defined template.
After clicking [Run] , the Python program is executed and parameters are added to the [User
Defined Region Template] setting panel. The model is then previewed in the graphics window. If
there is an error in the Python program, a “script error” message is displayed.
6. Click [Close].
If the message “Do you want to save script changes?” is displayed, click [Yes].
7. Click [OK] in the [User Defined Region Template] setting panel.
The user defined region template feature is added to the sketch. Right-clicking this displays
[Edit], [Suppress], [Delete], and [Properties] as commands.
162
Setting Geometry Parameter Set Lists to the Assembly

A geometry parameter set list is a table of reference between the values of geometry parameters to be
used as keys and the values of other geometry parameters. Geometry parameters to be used as keys
are known as “key variables”.
When users change the values of key variables, the values of several geometry parameters are scaled
as so to prevent Geometry Editor from causing breakdowns in geometry. In the event that break-
downs in geometry still cannot be avoided, Geometry Editor refers to a geometry parameter set list
to update the values of each geometry parameter to the values obtained from that geometry parame-
ter set list.
Geometry parameter set list example

“POLES” located on the left side of the table is a key parameter.
This explains the procedure for setting geometry created by the user themselves to geometry param-
eter set lists.
1. Create geometry.
2. Create key variables.
i. Right-click the text box of a real number type or a variable type.
MEMO The [Equations] dialog can also be opened from the following procedure.
• Right-click [Assembly] in the [Model Manager] tree, and select [Equations].
iii. Click [Add].
iv. In the [Edit Equation] dialog, select [Treat as a key variable in the geometry parame-
ter set list].
Other input parameters are the same as when creating regular variables.
v. Click [OK].
Created key variables are displayed in the [Equations] dialog.
vi. Click [OK].
3. Create variables for geometry parameters to associate with key variables.
While the creation process is the same as for key variables, [Treat as a key variable in the geome-
try parameter set list] must be cleared.
163
Operations
4. Real number type and variable type geometry parameter values can be entered for vari-
ables.
5. To the assembly, add a geometry parameter set list for the key variables created in Step
1.
i. Create a geometry parameter set list using spreadsheet software, etc., and save this
in a CSV file format (.csv).
For details on the CSV file format, see “Parameter Explanation Edition”.
ii. In the [Model Manager] tree, right-click the assembly and select [Open the geometry
parameter set list] > (key variable name).
iii. In the [Geometry Parameter Set List] dialog, click [Import].
iv. In the [Import Data] dialog, specify the geometry parameter set list CSV file and click
[Open].
Data imported to the [Geometry Parameter Set List] dialog is displayed.
6. Add new sets to the geometry parameter set list as necessary.
i. Open the [Edit Equation] dialog and modify the key variables.
ii. Similarly, modify the values of the geometry parameters added to the geometry
parameter set list.
iii. In the [Model Manager] tree, right-click the assembly and select [Register in the
geometry parameter set list] > (key variable name).
The values of the current geometry key variables and the values of the geometry parameters
associated with the key variables are added to the list as a set.
If sets with the same key variable values already exist in a list, then a message confirming the
overwriting of the sets is displayed.
7. Check that the geometry parameter set list is referenced.
The following is an example procedure for checking that this has occurred.
Using the geometry library:

i. In the [Model Manager] tree, right-click [Assembly] and select [Add to Geometry
Library].
ii. Specify the name and the geometry to be added, and click [OK].
The geometry is added to the geometry library.
iii. Click [New].
The graphics window is cleared.
iv. Add the geometry added to the geometry library to the graphics window via a drag
and drop operation.
The geometry setting panel is displayed.
v. Attempt to edit the values of key variables.
Enter values that should otherwise cause breakdowns in geometry. The geometry parameter
set list is referred to when breakdowns in geometry occur due to scaling alone as a result of
making changes to key variables.
164
Using JMAG-Designer:
i. From the menu bar, select [File] > [Back To JMAG-Designer].
ii. Click [Import Model].
iii. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click the model and select [New Study] > (current
study).
iv. In the [Project Manager] tree, under the study, right-click [CAD Parameters] and
select [Select CAD Parameters].
v. In the [Select CAD Parameters] dialog, select the checkbox displayed to the left of the
key variables, and click [OK].
The key variables are displayed under [CAD Parameters] in the [Project Manager] tree.
vi. In the [Project Manager] tree, under [CAD Parameters], double-click (key variable
name).
vii.In the [CAD Parameters] setting panel, edit the values of key variables.
Enter values that should otherwise cause breakdowns in geometry. The geometry parameter
set list is referred to when breakdowns in geometry occur due to scaling alone as a result of
making changes to key variables.
165
Operations
Creating Points, Lines, and Faces at User-Defined Positions and

Using Them for Model Creation
For the following purposes, the points, lines, and planes at any positions can be created.
• The reference point can be used for the center point when copying or moving the basic shapes or
regions.
• The reference line can be used for motion direction, axial direction, etc. when copying or moving
a region.
• The reference plane can be used for drawing faces of sketches, mirror faces when copying solids
or parts.
1. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Reference Geometry] > [Reference Point], [Refer-
ence Line], or [Reference Plane].

• Right-click a selected node or edge in the graphics window, and select [Reference Point],
[Reference Line], or [Reference Plane].
2. In the [Reference Point], [Reference Line], or [Reference Plane] setting panel, set the
parameters.
3. Click [OK].
[Reference Point], [Reference Line], or [Reference Plane] is added under the [Assembly] in the
[Model Manager] tree. Right-click it to open a menu. From this menu, you can perform [Edit],
[Suppress], [Delete], [Properties], etc.
166
Grouping Geometries, Defining Directions and Coordinates

Geometry sets are used to:
• Grouping one or more solids, regions, faces, edges, and vertices
• Defining orientations using edges and faces
• Defining coordinates using vertices
The geometry set information created in Geometry Editor is imported with a model into JMAG-
Designer or JMAG-Express.
In JMAG-Designer, analysis conditions can be set in the geometry set of solids, regions, faces, edges,
and vertices. The geometry set of directions or coordinates can be used for parameter settings of each
analysis condition.
If a geometry set with a fixed name is created for 2D shape JMAG-Express user-defined templates,
the geometry set is referenced when the shapes are imported into JMAG-Express, and automatically
sets the reference axes of periodic boundaries and magnetization directions of magnets.
1. Make sure that sketch, part and mesh part are not active in the [Model Manager] tree.
2. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Geometry Set] > [Solid/Region Set], [Face Set],
[Edge Set], [Vertex Set], [Direction Set], [Point Set].
• Click the button on the toolbar ( , , , , , ).

• Right-click a selected solid or face in the graphics window, and select the geometry set menu
command from the displayed menu ([Solid/Region Set] etc.)
3. In the [Solid/Region Set], [Face Set], [Edge Set], [Vertex Set], [Direction Set], or [Point
Set] setting panel, set the parameters.
4. Click [OK].
The [Geometry Set] folder is displayed under [Assembly] in the [Model Manager] tree, and the
specified geometry set is added to the folder. Right-clicking on a geometry set displays a menu.
From this menu, you can perform [Edit], [Delete], [Properties], etc.
167
Operations
Setting Properties of Features or Sketches

The properties of the following items can be set.
• Assemblies • Mesh parts • basic shapes

• Reference geometries • Features • Regions
• Geometry sets • Sketches • Constraints
• Parts • Coordinates
1. In the [Model Manager] tree, right-click an item (for example, a sketch).

The [Properties] dialog is displayed.
MEMO Before step one, hold the [Shift] or [Ctrl] key and select multiple items from the [Model
Manager] tree when setting the properties for multiple types.
When multiple targets of different types are selected, the parameters that can be set in the [Proper-
ties] dialog will be for the target that the cursor was on when the [Model Manager] was right-clicked.
For example, suppose the part, sketch, and reference line were selected and the sketch was right-
clicked to display the [Properties] dialog. For this case, the parameters that can be set for the sketch
will become active in the [Properties] dialog.
3. In the [Properties] dialog, set the parameters.
4. Click [OK].
168
Disabling Features and Sketches (Suppression Settings)

Suppression settings can be set on reference geometries, parts, sketches, mesh parts, and features.
• Reference geometries, parts, sketches, and mesh parts cannot be displayed in the graphics win-
dow and cannot be edited or deleted, when the suppression is set.
• The effects of a feature cannot be applied to a model when suppression is specified. For example,
a model not set with the fillet feature can be handled by setting suppression to the fillet feature.
Once suppression is removed, the model can be handled in the state that the original fillet feature
is applied so it will take less time than to remove or re-set the fillet feature.
1. In the [Model Manager] tree, right-click the reference shapes, paths, parts, sketches,
mesh parts, or features.
2. Select [Suppress].
The reference shapes (or paths, parts, sketches, mesh parts, features) with suppression set is not
available on the [Model Manager] tree. Also it will be hidden in the graphics window.
3. To cancel suppression, in the [Model Manager] tree, right-click the reference shapes,
paths, parts, sketches, mesh parts, or features for which constraint has been set, and
select [Unsuppress].
169
Operations
Creating Conditional Expressions to Determine Shape Errors

In Geometry Editor, conditional expressions that define variable value ranges can be created to
determine shape errors in accordance with those conditional expressions.
1. Create variables in Geometry Editor and enter those variables for the parameter values.
• Variables are created in the [Equations] dialog.
Right-click [Assembly] in the [Model Manager] tree and select [Equations] to open this dia-
log.
• Variables can be entered as real number-type or variable-type parameter values. To enter vari-
ables, right-click the text box to enter the variables into, and select [Insert Variable] > (vari-
able name).
2. Create a conditional expression to define a variable value range.
i. In the [Model Manager] tree, right-click [Assembly].
iii. In the [Equations] dialog, click [Add] displayed beneath the [Expression Range Set-
tings] table.
The [Equation Conditions] dialog is displayed.
iv. Use the variable created in Step 1 to create a conditional expression.
Once an equals sign, less-than sign, or greater-than sign has been selected from the list, enter
both the right and left sides of the conditional expression in the respective text boxes.
v. Click [OK].
The created conditional expression is now added to the [Expression Range Settings] table.
Displayed to the left of each conditional expression are the results of determining whether or
not shape errors have occurred based on those conditional expressions ( , , ).
If there are conditional expressions displaying error icons , then error marks are also dis-
played in the [Assembly] in the [Model Manager] tree.
170
Responding to Errors and Warnings that Occurred in the Assembly

Errors or warning icons will be displayed in the [Model Manager] tree when an error or warn-
ing occurs in the constraint set on the feature or basic shape for a part/sketch. Messages are displayed
when the cursor is placed over an icon .
Follow the instructions in the message and modify the settings.

MEMO The messages list can be checked with the messages button on the bottom right of the window.
Importing Models Created in the Geometry Editor into JMAG-

Designer
 Executing from Geometry Editor
1. From the Geometry Editor menu bar, select [File] > [Back To JMAG-Designer].
2. In the [Back To JMAG-Designer] dialog, click [Import Model].
 Executing from JMAG-Designer
1. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click a project.

2. Select [Geometry Editor] > [Import Geometry].
171
Operations
Replacing Models Already Imported into JMAG-Designer with

Models Edited in the Geometry Editor
 Executing from Geometry Editor
1. From the Geometry Editor menu bar, select [File] > [Back To JMAG-Designer].
2. In the [Back To JMAG-Designer] dialog, click [Replace Model] or [Update Model].
• To replace a model that has already been imported, click [Replace Model].
• To import as a new model, click [Update Model].
The edited model is imported into JMAG-Designer. Settings of the model prior to editing are
inherited by the newly imported model.
 Executing from JMAG-Designer
1. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click a model an select [Replace Model] or [Update
Model].
• To replace a model that has already been imported, select [Replace Model].
• To import as a new model, select [Update Model].
The edited model is imported into JMAG-Designer. Settings of the model prior to editing are
inherited by the newly imported model.
Saving Models
Save the model created or edited using the Geometry Editor in the project of JMAG-Designer.
1. From the Geometry Editor menu bar, select [File] > [Save Model].
Or click [Save Model] on the toolbar.
2. In the [Save Model] dialog, set the parameters.
3. Click [Save].
JMAG-Designer becomes active and models are imported.
172
Exporting Models to Files

1. Set options for exporting models in advance.
i. From the Geometry Editor menu bar, select [Tools] > [Preferences].
ii. In the [Preferences] dialog, click [System Options] tab.
iii. On the navigation bar, click [Export].
iv. In the [Export] setting panel, set the parameters.
v. Click [OK].
2. Export file.
i. From the Geometry Editor menu bar, select [File] > [Export].
ii. In the [Export] dialog, set the file name, type, and location.
The following files can be exported:
• ACIS Files (.sat, .sab)
iii. Click [Save].
173
Operations
174
This chapter describes the procedure for creating a 3D CAD model using the Geometry Editor.

• 3D CAD Model Creation Procedure (page 177)
• Setting Geometry Editor Preferences, Setting the Link Option Between JMAG-Designer and Geometry Edi-
tor (page 180)
• Creating Parts and Sketches (page 181)

• Editing Parts (page 182)
• Exit Part Editing (page 182)
• Drawing Outlines of the Cross Sections of Parts, Creating Regions, and Setting 2D Constraints (page 182)
• Moving 2D Sketch Under Parts (page 182)
• Creating Solids (page 183)
• Processing Solids (page 186)
• Automatically Perform Solid Feature Based on Shapes (page 192)
• Running Boolean Operations to Eliminate Duplication of Solids (page 194)
• Separate Faces of Solids That Are Touching (page 195)
• Creating Shells (page 196)
• Creating Beams (page 197)
• Moving Solids, Shells, and Beams (page 198)
• Copying Solids, Shells, and Beams (page 199)
• Creating 3D Models Using the Geometry Library (page 200)

• Creating Coil Models Using Coil Templates (page 201)
• Using Original Solid Templates Using Python Programs (page 202)
• Setting Geometry Parameter Set Lists to the Assembly (page 203)

• Defining Part Positions with 3D Constraints (page 204)
• Processing Multiple Parts Simultaneously (page 207)

• Running Boolean Operations to Eliminate Part Duplication (page 210)
• Separate Faces of Parts That Are Touching (page 211)
• Projecting Outlines of Solids to Sketches (page 212)
• Creating Points, Lines, and Faces at User-Defined Positions and Using Them for Model Creation (page 214)
• Grouping Geometries, Defining Directions and Coordinates (page 215)
• Creating Paths and Beams (page 216)
• Setting Properties of Features or Parts (page 218)

• Disable Features and Parts (Suppression Settings) (page 218)
175
Operations
• Creating Conditional Expressions to Determine Shape Errors (page 218)

(page 218)
176
3D CAD Model Creation Procedure

The basic procedure is explained below.
 Creating a new model

by default.
become smooth.

Geometry].
If the project has never been saved before, a dialog appears displays prompting the user to save
the project or to continue without saving. Click [Yes] and save the project.
2. Create the 2D CAD model.
MEMO Procedures are different when using coil templates, user defined solid template or 3D mod-
els from the geometry library. For details, see following pages.
• “Creating 3D Models Using the Geometry Library” on page 200
• “Creating Coil Models Using Coil Templates” on page 201
• “Using Original Solid Templates Using Python Programs” on page 202
i. Create the part under [Model Manager] > [Assembly], and also create a sketch below
that.
For details, see “Creating Parts and Sketches” on page 181.
ii. Draw a cross-section of the part in the sketch.
Sketch tools, strand templates, etc., can be used for plotting.
See the following pages for details.
• “Creating 2D Model Using the Geometry Library” on page 155
• “Creating 2D Wire Models Using Wire Templates” on page 160
MEMO When using a coil template, a solid can be created even if a cross-section is not sketched.
177
Operations
iii. Set 2D constraints as needed.

page 137.
iv. Create a region
MEMO Regions are not necessary when creating a beam or shell.
3. Set 3D Features in a 2D CAD Model.
i. Set 3D features in the region.
• “Creating Solids” on page 183
• “Processing Solids” on page 186
• “Running Boolean Operations to Eliminate Duplication of Solids” on page 194
• “Separate Faces of Solids That Are Touching” on page 195
• “Creating Shells” on page 196
• “Creating Beams” on page 197
• “Moving Solids, Shells, and Beams” on page 198
• “Copying Solids, Shells, and Beams” on page 199
ii. Set 3D constraints as needed.
For details, see “Defining Part Positions with 3D Constraints” on page 204.


ii. Select [Geometry Editor] > [Import Geometry].
i. Geometry Editor
ii. From the Geometry Editor menu bar, select [File] > [Exit].
178

A copy of a model that has already been imported into JMAG-Designer can be modified by using
the modeling tool, and the original model in JMAG-Designer can be replaced with this modified
model.
However, if a study has already been created for the imported model within JMAG-Designer, that
model cannot be re-placed. In that case, the modified model should be imported as a separate model
into JMAG-Designer.


ii. In the [Back To JMAG-Designer] dialog, click [Replace Model] or [Update Model].
The edited model is imported into JMAG-Designer. Settings of the model prior to editing
are inherited by the newly imported model.
Executing from JMAG-Designer:

i. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click the model and select [Replace Model] or
[Update Model].
179
Operations
Setting Geometry Editor Preferences, Setting the Link Option

Between JMAG-Designer and Geometry Editor
log. See “Setting Geometry Editor Preferences” on page 111.
ences] dialog of JMAG-Designer. See “Setting the Link Option Between JMAG-Designer and
Geometry Editor” on page 111.

• “Exporting Model Images to Image Files” on page 272
• “Printing Model Images” on page 273
180
Creating Parts and Sketches

1. With no editing part or sketch in the [Model Manager] tree, select [Insert] > [Create
Part].
• With no editing part or sketch in the [Model Manager] tree, click [Create Part] .
• Right-click the assembly in the [Model Manager] tree, select [Create Part].
A part is added under the assembly in [Model Manager] tree.
2. When creating a sketch on a plane created at any position, create a reference plane
under the part.
For the procedure of creating reference planes, see “Creating Points, Lines, and Faces at User-
Defined Positions and Using Them for Model Creation” on page 214.
3. Select a plane to create a sketch.
Select one of the following:
• [XY Plane], [YZ Plane], or [ZX Plane] under the assembly or part in the [Model Manager]
tree.
• A plane of an existing solid
• Reference plane
MEMO A sketch cannot be created on a curved surface.
4. Select [Insert] > [Sketch].

• Click [Create Sketch] .
• In the [Model Manager] tree, right-click [XY Plane], [YZ Plane], or [ZX Plane] under the
part, select [Create Sketch].
The grid is displayed in the graphics window. A sketch is added under the part in the [Model
Manager] tree.
MEMO Create a sketch under the assembly in the [Model Manager] tree when specifying [Extrude
Cut], [Revolve Cut], [Extrude Split], or [Revolve Split] on multiple parts.
MEMO The 2D sketch under the assembly can be moved under a part. For details, see “Moving 2D
Sketch Under Parts” on page 182.
181
Operations
Editing Parts
1. With selecting the part in the [Model Manager] tree, select [Insert] > [Edit Part].
• With selecting the part in the [Model Manager] tree, click [Edit Part] .
• Right-click the part in the [Model Manager] tree, select [Edit Part].
Exit Part Editing

1. In the [Model Manager] tree, make sure that a part is in the edit mode .
2. With selecting the part in the [Model Manager] tree, select [Insert] > [End Part].
• With selecting the part in the [Model Manager] tree, click [End Part].
• Right-click the part on the [Model Manager] tree, select [End Part] .
Drawing Outlines of the Cross Sections of Parts, Creating Regions,

and Setting 2D Constraints
Drawing outline of component cross section, area creation, setting of 2 dimensional constraint, etc.
are the same as when creating 2D model. See “Creating 2D CAD Models Using Geometry Editor”
on page 107.
Moving 2D Sketch Under Parts

Features can be specified to create 3D analysis models by moving a 2D sketch under a part.
Example
1. In the [Model Manager] tree, right-click a sketch under the assembly, and select [Move
to New Part].
A new part is created and a 2D sketch is also created under the new part.
MEMO The operations explained above can also be specified by using [Copy] , [Cut] , and
[Paste] in the toolbar.
182
Creating Solids
• Extrude a Sketch to Create a Solid (page 183)
• Extrude a Solid Face to Create a Solid (page 184)
• Create Solid Connecting Faces or Faces and Vertex (page 184)
Extrude a Sketch to Create a Solid

• [Extrude]:
Extends the selected region in the normal direction.
• [Revolve]:
Extends the selected region in the circumferential direction.
• [Sweep]:
Extends the selected region according to the specified path.
1. Create a sketch for the part.

In this case, prepare the sketch where the regions are created.
2. To extrude according to a path, create path.
See “Creating Paths and Beams” on page 216.
3. Set the feature to the sketch.
i. In the [Model Manager] tree, make sure that there are no sketches in edit mode in
the part you are editing on.
Right-click the sketch in the edit mode and select [End Sketch].
ii. To extrude in the normal direction, select [Insert] > [Extrude] > [Extrude] from the
menu bar.
To extrude in the circumferential direction, select [Insert] > [Revolve] > [Revolve]
from the menu bar.
To extrude according to a path, select [Insert] > [Extrude] > [Sweep] from the menu
bar.
• Right-click a sketch in the [Model Manager] tree and select [Extrude], [Revolve], or
[Sweep].
MEMO When these operations are performed with the sketch selected, the [Select Sketch] dialog
is not displayed and the feature setting panel appears.
iii. In the graphics window, select the regions included in the sketch to be extruded.
The sketch is selected.
iv. Click [OK] in the [Select Sketch] setting panel.
v. In the [Extrude] or [Revolve] setting panel, [Sweep] setting panel, et the parameters.
183
Operations
vi. Click [OK].

[Extrude], [Revolve], or [Revolve] is added under the part in the [Model Manager] tree.
[Properties], etc. When [Suppress] is made inactive without deleting a feature, when setting
the feature's name, execute [Properties].
Extrude a Solid Face to Create a Solid

• [Face Extrude]:
Extends the selected solid face in the normal direction.
• [Face Revolve]:
Extends the selected solid face in the circumferential direction.
• [Face Sweep]:
Extends the selected solid face according to the specified path.
1. Create a solid in the part.

3. Set the feature to the solid face.
i. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Face Extrude] > [Face Extrude], [Face Revolve],
or [Face Sweep].

• Right-click a solid face in the graphics window and select [Face Extrude], [Face Revolve],
or [Face Sweep].
The [Face Extrude], [Face Revolve], or [Face Sweep] setting panel is displayed.
ii. Set the parameters.
iii. Click [OK].
[Face Extrude], [Face Revolve], or [Face Sweep] is added under the part in the [Model Man-
ager] tree. Right-click it to open a menu. From this menu, you can perform [Edit], [Sup-
press], [Delete], [Properties], etc. When [Suppress] is made inactive without deleting a
feature, when setting the feature's name, execute [Properties].
Create Solid Connecting Faces or Faces and Vertex

Creates a solid connecting faces of a solid (or regions, or faces of a solid and regions). It is also possi-
ble to create a solid connecting multiple faces, regions, and vertices.
184
Solid created using loft
Loft connecting faces
1. Create multiple solids (or sketches with regions and vertices created) connected by lofts
to one part.
Lofts can connect faces of a solid, regions, and vertices within the same part.
2. Set the loft features.
i. In the [Model Manager] tree, make sure that a part is in the edit mode .
ii. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Face Extrude] > [Loft].
Or perform the following:
• Click [Loft] on the toolbar.
• Right-click a sketch or solid face in the graphics window and select [Loft].
The [Loft] setting panel is displayed.
MEMO When the [Loft] setting panel is opened with a sketch of a created face of a solid or of a
region selected, the face selected for [Start Face] is automatically added.
iii. Set the parameters.
iv. Click [OK].
[Loft] is added under the part in the [Model Manager] tree. Right-click it to open a menu.
From this menu, you can perform [Edit], [Suppress], [Delete], [Properties], etc. When [Sup-
press] is made inactive without deleting a feature, when setting the feature's name, execute
[Properties].
185
Operations
Processing Solids
• Cut Out Part of a Solid (page 186)
• Divide a Solid into Multiple Parts (page 187)
• Create a Vertex on a Solid (page 188)
• Scale a Solid (page 188)
• Round the Edges of a Solid (Fillet) (page 189)
• Chamfer the Edges of a Solid (page 189)
• Offset a Solid Face (page 190)
• Move a Solid Face (page 190)
Cut Out Part of a Solid

• [Extrude Cut]:
Extends the region contained in the selected sketch vertically to cut away the solid or shell
through which the extended region passes.
• [Revolve Cut]:
Extends a region in the selected sketch circumferentially around an axis to cut away the solid or
shell through which the extended region passes.
• [Sweep Cut]:
Extends the region contained in the selected sketch along any path to cut away the solid or shell
MEMO A solid for which a mesh has been generated cannot be cut.
1. Create a sketch for the part.

i. In the [Model Manager] tree, select the sketch under the part in edit mode.
ii. To cut in the normal direction, from the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Extrude Cut] >
[Extrude Cut].
To cut in the circumferential direction, from the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Revolve
Cut] > [Revolve Cut].
To cut according to a path, from the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Extrude Cut] >
[Sweep Cut].

• Right-click the sketch on the [Model Manager] tree and select [Extrude Cut], [Revolve
Cut], or [Sweep Cut].
iii. In the [Extrude Cut], [Revolve Cut], or [Sweep Cut] setting panel, set the parameters.
186
iv. Click [OK].

[Extrude Cut], [Revolve Cut], or [Sweep Cut] is added under the part in the [Model Man-
Divide a Solid into Multiple Parts

• [Extrude Split]:
Extends the basic shape in the selected sketch vertically to split the solid through which the
extended basic shape passes.
• [Revolve Split]:
Extends the basic shape in the selected sketch circumferentially to split the solid through which
the extended basic shape passes.
• [Sweep Split]:
Extends the basic shape in the selected sketch along any path to split the solid through which the
Basic shapes
Extrusion
direction
Example of [Extrude Split]
MEMO A solid with a generated mesh cannot be split.
1. Prepare the sketch.

In this case, the basic shapes needs to be drawn in the sketch to be prepared. There is no need for
a region to be created.
ii. To divide in the normal direction, from the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Extrude Cut] >
[Extrude Split].
To divide in the circumferential direction, from the menu bar, select [Insert] >
[Revolve Cut] > [Revolve Split].
To divide according to a path, from the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Extrude Cut] >
[Sweep Split].

• Right-click the sketch on the [Model Manager] tree and select [Extrude Split], [Revolve
Split], or [Sweep Split].
iii. In the [Extrude Split], [Revolve Split], [Sweep Split] setting panel, set the parameters.
187
Operations
iv. Click [OK].

[Extrude Split], [Revolve Split], or [Sweep Split] is added under the part in the [Model Man-
Create a Vertex on a Solid

A sketch (vertex) is projected onto a solid face that is positioned in perpendicular direction to create
a new vertex on the same position.
Extrude imprint can be used to create points to specify conditions in the structural analysis, electric
field analysis, and thermal stress analysis.
Points in a sketch that is from the

source of projection
Vertices

In this case, the vertices needs to be drawn in the sketch to be prepared.
ii. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Feature] > [Extrude Imprint].
• Click [Extrude Imprint] on the toolbar.
• Right-click the sketch on the [Model Manager] tree and select [Extrude Imprint].
iii. In the [Extrude Imprint] setting panel, set the parameters.
iv. Click [OK].
[Extrude Imprint] is added under the part in the [Model Manager] tree. Right-click it to
open a menu. From this menu, you can perform [Edit], [Suppress], [Delete], [Properties],
etc. When [Suppress] is made inactive without deleting a feature, when setting the feature's
name, execute [Properties].
MEMO The vertices that are created on the solid can be confirmed in the graphics window by
selecting [View Solid Vertex] in the toolbar.
Scale a Solid
2. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Solid Feature] > [Solid Scale].
Or click [Solid Scale] on the toolbar.
188
3. In the [Solid Scale] setting panel, set the parameters.

4. Click [OK].
[Solid Scale] is added under the part in the [Model Manager] tree. Right-click it to open a menu.
press] is made inactive without deleting a feature, when setting the feature's name, execute [Prop-
erties].
Round the Edges of a Solid (Fillet)

2. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Solid Feature] > [Edge Fillet].
Or click [Edge Fillet] .
MEMO A fillet cannot be created if there is a part including a sketch in edit mode .
3. In the [Edge Fillet] setting panel, set the parameters.
4. Click [OK].
[Solid Fillet] is added under the part in the [Model Manager] tree. Right-click it to open a menu.
press] is made inactive without deleting a feature, when setting the feature's name, execute [Prop-
erties].
MEMO If a fillet is set to the edge or face of a solid that has been copied using the [Solid Circular
Pattern] or [Solid Linear Pattern] feature, the fillet will not be applied to the copies of the original
solid.
MEMO To apply a fillet to copies of a solid, specify the fillet on a solid, and then copy the solid with
the fillet using the [Solid Circular Pattern] or [Solid Linear Pattern] feature.
Chamfer the Edges of a Solid

2. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Solid Feature] > [Edge Chamfer].
Or click [Edge Chamfer] .
MEMO A chamfer cannot be created if there is a part including a sketch in edit mode .
3. In the [Edge Chamfer] setting panel, set the parameters.
4. Click [OK].
[Edge Chamfer] is added under the part in the [Model Manager] tree. Right-click it to open a
menu. From this menu, you can perform [Edit], [Suppress], [Delete], [Properties], etc. When
[Suppress] is made inactive without deleting a feature, when setting the feature's name, execute
[Properties].
MEMO If a chamfer is set to the edge or face of a solid that has been copied using the [Solid Circular
Pattern] or [Solid Linear Pattern] feature, the chamfer will not be applied to the copies of the original
solid.
189
Operations
MEMO To apply a chamfer to copies of a solid, specify the chamfer on a solid, and then copy the
solid with the chamfer using the [Circular Pattern] or [Solid Linear Pattern] feature.
Offset a Solid Face

By specifying the offset and moving a solid face to the normal direction, change the geometry of the
solid that contains the face.
• When the offset target is a plane or a spline face, it moves in the normal direction while the adja-
cent geometries remain fixed.
• When the offset is a cylindrical face (or a toroidal face or conical face), it moves in a radial direc-
tion with the rotation axis remaining fixed.
2. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Solid Feature] > [Solid Face Offset].
• Click [Solid Face Offset] on the toolbar.
• Right-click one or multiple solid faces in the graphics window and select [Solid Face Offset] >
(offset type. For example, [Specify Offset]).
When the [Solid Face Offset] setting panel is displayed by this operation, the selected solid
faces are added to the [Faces] list. Additionally, depending on the selected menu, the corre-
sponding item is selected in the [Method Type] list.
3. In the [Solid Face Offset] setting panel, set the parameters.
4. Click [OK].
[Solid Face Offset] is added under the part in the [Model Manager] tree. Right-click it to open a
[Properties].
Move a Solid Face

By moving the solid face linearly or radially, change the geometry of the solid that contains the face.
• When the movement target is a plane or spline face, it moves in a linear direction or rotation
direction while the adjacent geometries remain fixed.
• When the movement target is a cylindrical face (or a toroidal face or conical face), it moves the
rotation axis in a linear direction or a rotation direction while maintaining the radius.
Furthermore, specifying the positional relationships between a solid face (or its vertex or edge) and
another geometry allows a solid face to be moved while preserving the specified positional relation-
ships ([Positional Relations]).
2. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Solid Feature] > [Solid Face Move].
• Click [Solid Face Move] on the toolbar.
190
• Right-click one or multiple solid faces in the graphics window and select [Solid Face Move] >
(movement type. For example, [Parallel - Specify Move]).
When the [Solid Face Move] setting panel is displayed by this operation, the selected solid
faces are added to the [Faces] list. Additionally, depending on the selected menu, the corre-
sponding item is selected in the [Method Type] list.
3. In the [Solid Face Move] setting panel, set the parameters.
4. Click [OK].
[Solid Face Move] is added under the part in the [Model Manager] tree. Right-click it to open a
[Properties].
191
Operations
Automatically Perform Solid Feature Based on Shapes

• Convert a Solid Edge to a Fillet Feature (page 192)
• Set Solid Pattern Features Based on Solid Periodicity or Symmetry (page 192)
Convert a Solid Edge to a Fillet Feature

The curved face of an imported solid can be converted to an [Edge Fillet] feature. By using the
[Edge Fillet] feature, you can change the fillet radius or delete the fillet.
2. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Solid Feature] > [Convert to Fillet Feature].
Or, click [Convert to Fillet Feature] .
3. In the [Convert to Fillet Feature] setting panel, set the parameters.
4. Click [Apply].
[Edge Fillet] is added to the [Model Manager] tree.
To undo the conversion, select [Edit] > [Undo] from the menu bar. Even if added edge fillet fea-
tures are deleted using this function, the geometry cannot be returned to its state prior to conver-
sion.
Set Solid Pattern Features Based on Solid Periodicity or Symmetry

Solids for one pattern can be cut out from solids having periodicity or symmetry. Solid pattern fea-
tures can then be set as desired for the solid of that one pattern.
2. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Solid Feature] > [Convert to Linear Pattern Fea-
ture], [Convert to Circular Pattern Feature], or [Convert to Mirror Copy Feature].

3. In the [Convert to Linear Pattern Feature], [Convert to circular pattern feature], or [Con-
vert to Mirror Copy Feature] setting panel, set the parameters.
4. Click [Apply].
192
The solid pattern feature is added to the [Model Manager] tree.

To undo the conversion, select the [Undo] under [Edit] from the menu bar. Deleting a solid pat-
tern feature added by this function does not restore the state before conversion.
193
Operations
Running Boolean Operations to Eliminate Duplication of Solids

Run a Boolean operation to clear the solids that are overlapping. The three types of Boolean opera-
tion are [Union], [Subtraction], and [Intersection].
• When [Union] is used, multiple solids are merged into one solid, and it becomes one solid (fig-
ure A).
• When [Subtraction] is used, multiple solids are left unchanged, but because the duplicate area is
removed from one of the solids, the duplicate state is resolved (figure B).
If the [Delete Solids] is selected when performing the [Subtraction], solid to subtract is removed
along with the duplicate area, and only the solid to be subtracted from remains (figure C).
• When [Intersection] is used, solid to subtract is removed along with the duplicate area, and only
the solid to be subtracted from remains (figure D).
From left to right; before boolean, [Union], [Subtraction],

[Subtraction] + [Delete Parts, Sketch], [Intersection]
2. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Solid Feature] > [Boolean for Solids].
Or, click [Boolean for Solids] .
3. In the [Boolean for Solids] setting panel, set the parameters.
4. Click [OK].
[Boolean for Solids] is added under the part in the [Model Manager] tree. [Edit], [Suppress],
[Delete], and [Properties] are displayed as menus after right-clicking [Boolean for Solids]. When
[Properties].
194
Separate Faces of Solids That Are Touching

The imprint feature is used to create a new solid face by projecting the area where solids (or solid
and shell) have contact with or are adjacent to one another.
2. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Solid Feature] > [Imprint for Solids].
Or, click [Imprint for Solid] .
3. In the [Imprint for Solid] setting panel, set the parameters.
4. Click [OK].
[Imprint for Solid] is added under the part in the [Model Manager] tree. [Edit], [Suppress],
[Delete], and [Properties] are displayed as menus after right-clicking [Imprint for Solid]. When
[Properties].
195
Operations
Creating Shells
The basic shapes (line, arc, circle, and spline) is extended in specified direction to create a shell.
• [Extrude Surface]:
Extrudes the selected basic shape in the normal direction.]
• [Revolve Surface]:
Extrudes the selected basic shape circumferentially around an axis.
• [Sweep Surface]:
Extrudes the selected basic shape along the specified path.

3. Set the surface feature to the sketch in step 1.
A shell is created by setting the surface feature to sketch.
i. In the [Model Manager] tree, make sure that the sketch is not in the edit mode .
ii. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Extrude] > [Extrude Surface], [Revolve Surface],
or [Sweep Surface].

• Right-click the sketch in the [Model Manager] tree and select [Extrude Surface], [Revolve
Surface], or [Sweep Surface].
The [Select Sketch] setting panel is displayed.
is not displayed and the feature setting panel appears directly.
iii. Select the sketch in step 1 from graphics window or [Model Manager] tree.
iv. Click [OK].
v. In the [Extrude Surface], [Revolve Surface], or [Sweep Surface] setting panel, set the
parameters.
vi. Click [OK].
[Extrude Surface], [Revolve Surface], or [Sweep Surface] is added under the part in the
[Model Manager] tree. [Edit], [Suppress], [Delete], and [Properties] are displayed as menus
after right-clicking this [Extrude Surface], [Revolve Surface], or [Sweep Surface]. When [Sup-
[Properties].
196
Creating Beams
A sketch (line, arc, circle, spline) is used as a beam.

2. Set the beam feature to the sketch in step 1.
By setting the beam feature to sketch, it will be treated as a beam.
i. In the [Model Manager] tree, make sure that the sketch is not in the edit mode .
ii. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Create Beam].
• Click [Create Beam] on the toolbar.
• Right-click the sketch in the [Model Manager] tree and select [Create Beam].
The [Select Sketch] setting panel is displayed.
is not displayed and the feature setting panel appears directly.
iii. Select the sketch in step 1 from graphics window or the [Model Manager] tree.
iv. Click [OK].
v. In the [Making to beam] setting panel, click [OK].
[Make Beam] is added under the part in the [Model Manager] tree. [Suppress], [Delete], and
[Properties] are displayed as menus after right-clicking this [Make Beam]. When [Suppress] is
made inactive without deleting a feature, when setting the feature's name, execute [Proper-
ties].
197
Operations
Moving Solids, Shells, and Beams

Translate or rotate solids, shells, or beams.
2. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Solid Feature] > [Solid Move].
• Click [Solid Move] on the toolbar.

• Right-click one or multiple solids in the graphics window and select [Solid Move] > (move-
ment type. For example, [Parallel - Specify Move]).
When the [Solid Move] setting panel is displayed by this operation, the selected solids are
added to the [Solids] list. Additionally, depending on the selected menu, the corresponding
item is selected in the [Type] list and [Method Type] list.
3. In the [Solid Move] setting panel, set the parameters.
4. Click [OK].
[Solid Move] is added under the part in the [Model Manager] tree. [Edit], [Suppress], [Delete],
and [Properties] are displayed as menus after right-clicking this [Solid Move]. When [Suppress]
is made inactive without deleting a feature, when setting the feature's name, execute [Properties].
198
Copying Solids, Shells, and Beams

• [Solid Linear Pattern]:
Copies the selected solids, shells, or beams in the specified direction with equal spacing.
• [Solid Circular Pattern]:
Copies the selected solids, shells, or beams equally spaced in the circumferential direction around
an point.
• [Solid Mirror Copy]:
Copies the selected solids, shells, or beams symmetrically about the axis.
2. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Solid Pattern] > [Solid Linear Pattern], [Solid Circu-
lar Pattern] or [Solid Mirror Copy].
• Right-click the solid, shell, or beam on the graphics window and select [Solid Linear Pattern],
[Solid Circular Pattern], or [Solid Mirror Copy].
3. In the [Solid Linear Pattern], [Solid Circular Pattern], or [Solid Mirror Copy] setting
panel, set the parameters.
4. Click [OK].
[Solid Linear Pattern], [Solid Circular Pattern], or [Solid Mirror Copy] is added under the part
in the [Model Manager] tree. [Edit], [Suppress], [Delete], and [Properties] are displayed as
menus after right-clicking [Solid Linear Pattern], [Solid Circular Pattern], or [Solid Mirror
Copy]. When [Suppress] is made inactive without deleting a feature, when setting the feature's
name, execute [Properties].
199
Operations
Creating 3D Models Using the Geometry Library

The geometry library contains geometries of motor parts (rotors, stators) and simple geometries
such as rectangular parallelepipeds, spheres.
Left: 3D motor geometries, right: 3D simple geometries
When selecting a geometry from the geometry library and specifying dimensions, the geometry is
added to an assembly as a new part or sketch.
Geometry library
It is also possible to add user-created geometries to the geometry library or to use the same geometry
on multiple machines by placing the geometry library in a shared folder.
The procedure is the same as when creating a 2D model. See “Creating 2D Model Using the Geom-
etry Library” on page 155.
200
Creating Coil Models Using Coil Templates

When using coil templates, coils with complicated shapes can be modeled with ease simply by spec-
ifying numerical parameters.
Left: Coil for radial gap motors (rectangular type), center: coil for axial gap motors,
right: coil for radial gap motors (rectangular type, beam)
1. Create the region of a coil cross-section in the start position of the coil path when using
any shape in the coil cross-section.
2. In the [Model Manager] tree, make sure that the part is in the edit mode .
3. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Template Feature] > [Coil Template].
Or click [Coil Template] on the toolbar.
4. In the [Coil Template] setting panel, set the parameters.
5. Click [OK].
[Coil Template] is added under the part in the [Model Manager] tree. [Edit], [Suppress],
[Delete], and [Properties] are displayed as menus after right-clicking this [Coil Template]. When
[Properties].
201
Operations
Using Original Solid Templates Using Python Programs

User original solid (or beam, shell) templates can be created by using programs written in Python.
1. Create a Python program for creating geometry.

Python programs can be created using the JMAG-Designer Script Editor, or a commercially
available text editor.
For details about API functions that can be used, see “API Functions and Samples of User-
Defined Templates” in “Parameter Explanation Edition”.
2. In the [Model Manager] tree, make sure that the part is in the edit mode .
3. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Template Feature] > [User Defined Solid Template].
Or, click [User Defined Solid Template] on the toolbar.
4. In the [User Defined Solid Template] setting panel, click [Edit Script].
The [User Defined Template: Edit Script] window is displayed.
The menus and toolbar buttons available in the [User Defined Template: Edit Script] window
are the same as those in Script Editor (with the exception of some functions). For details on how
to use Script Editor, see “Script Editor” in “Parameter Explanation Edition”.
5. Add the Python program created in step 1.
Copy and paste the Python program from step 1.
It is also possible to save the Python program from step 1 to a file (.py) and import it to a user-
defined template.
After clicking [Run] , the Python program is executed and parameters are added to the [User
Defined Solid Template] setting panel. The model is then previewed in the graphics window. If
there is an error in the Python program, a “script error” message is displayed.
6. Click [Close].
If the message “Do you want to save script changes?” appears, click [Yes].
7. Click [OK] in the [User Defined Solid Template] setting panel.
The user defined solid template feature is added to the sketch. Right-clicking this displays [Edit],
[Suppress], [Delete], and [Properties] as commands.
202
Setting Geometry Parameter Set Lists to the Assembly

Geometry parameter set lists are lists that define the relationship between the values of geometry
parameters and the values of other geometry parameters. When parametrically updating the values
of geometry parameters that affect other geometry parameters, such as the number of poles and slots
for motors, by configuring set lists of other geometry parameters to the assembly, such changes can
be made smoothly without causing any breakdowns in geometry.
For details, see “Setting Geometry Parameter Set Lists to the Assembly” on page 163.
203
Operations
Defining Part Positions with 3D Constraints

By adding a constraint, defines the position of parts.
The types of 3D constraints are as follows:
• Fixation • Distance (between two objects)
• Angle • Concentric
• Parallelity • Tangency
• Perpendicularity • Coincident
Manually Set a 3D Constraint

1. In the [Model Manager] tree, make sure that the part or the sketch under the part is not
in the edit mode , .
If in edit mode, right-click the assembly in [Model Manager], and select [Edit Assembly].
2. Select the shapes and faces to set constraints to, which belong to different parts, in the
graphics window.
Multiple basic shapes can be selected while holding down the [Shift] key.
MEMO When a face you wish to set 3D constraint is overlapping with another face, try a method to
select after temporarily changing the position of the part with “Moving a Part”.
3. Right-click, and select the desired constraint name (e.g. [Constraint (Fixation)] while the
shapes or faces are selected.
The constraints listed on the menu vary depending on the shapes and faces selected in step 2.
4. When angle constraint or distance constraint is set, set the parameters, and click [OK].
The constraint is added under the assembly > [Constraint] in the [Model Manager] tree. Marks
and arrows indicating distances and angles appear where constraints have been set. By right-
clicking on them, you can edit or delete the constraint.
MEMO The display position of each constraint value can be moved by mouse dragging after closing
the settings panel.
MEMO The constraints displayed in the [Model Manager] tree can be displayed by types that are
grouped. Right-click [Constraint] in the [Model Manager] tree, and select [View by Type].
MEMO To select a constraint on the graphics window, select the [Constraint Select Filter] in the
toolbar in advance.
204
Edit a 3D Constraint
Edit each parameter for distance constraint and angle constraint.
2. Double click the icon for either the angle constraint or the distance constraint in the
Geometry Editor.
Or, double-click a constraint under [Constraint] in [Model Manager].

The setting panel is displayed.
3. Change each of the settings.
The constraint that is being edited is highlighted in the Geometry Editor.
4. Click [OK].
Delete a 3D Constraint
2. Select the symbol or arrow for the constraint displayed on the part in the Geometry Edi-
tor.
Or, select the constraint to be deleted in [Model Manager].

The selected symbol or arrow is highlighted.
205
Operations
3. Use one of the following procedures to delete a constraint.
• Right-click the shape, and select [Delete].
206
Processing Multiple Parts Simultaneously

• Cut a Part from Multiple Parts Simultaneously (page 207)
• Divide Multiple Parts Simultaneously (page 207)
• Scale Multiple Parts or Sketches Simultaneously (page 208)
Cut a Part from Multiple Parts Simultaneously

• [Extrude Cut]:
Extends the region contained in the selected sketch vertically to cut away the part through which
the extended region passes.
• [Revolve Cut]:
Extends a region in the selected sketch circumferentially around an axis to cut away the part
• [Sweep Cut]:
Extends the region contained in the selected sketch along any path to cut away the part through
which the extended region passes.
MEMO A CAD part for which a mesh has been generated cannot be cut.
1. Create a 2D sketch for the part.

2. Set the feature to the 2D sketch.
i. In the [Model Manager] tree, make sure that parts and sketches are not in the edit
mode , .
ii. In the [Model Manager] tree, select the sketch under the assembly.
iii. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Extrude Cut] > [Extrude Cut], [Revolve Cut], or
[Sweep Cut].

iv. In the [Extrude Cut], [Revolve Cut], [Sweep Cut] setting panel, set the parameters.
v. Click [OK].
[Extrude Cut], [Revolve Cut], or [Sweep Cut] is added under the assembly in the [Model
Manager] tree. [Edit], [Suppress], [Delete], and [Properties] are displayed as menus after
right-clicking [Extrude Cut], [Revolve Cut], or [Sweep Cut]. When [Suppress] is made inac-
tive without deleting a feature, when setting the feature's name, execute [Properties].
Divide Multiple Parts Simultaneously

207
Operations
• [Extrude Split]:
Extends the basic shape in the selected sketch vertically to split the part through which the
• [Revolve Split]:
Extends the basic shape in the selected sketch circumferentially to split the part through which
the extended basic shape passes.
• [Sweep Split]:
Extends the basic shape in the selected sketch along any path to split the part through which the
Basic shapes
Extrusion
direction
Example of [Extrude Split]
MEMO CAD parts with solids that have generated meshes cannot be split. If a CAD part with a solid
that has a mesh generated is converted to a mesh part, it can be split into multiple blocks on an element-
by-element basis.
1. Create a 2D sketch for the part.

2. Set the feature to the 2D sketch.
i. In the [Model Manager] tree, make sure that parts and sketches are not in the edit
mode , .
ii. In the [Model Manager] tree, select the sketch under the assembly.
iii. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Extrude Cut] > [Extrude Split], [Revolve Split], or
[Sweep Split].

iv. In the [Extrude Split], [Revolve Split], [Sweep Split] setting panel, set the parameters.
v. Click [OK].
[Extrude Split], [Revolve Split], or [Sweep Split] is added under the assembly in the [Model
Manager] tree. [Edit], [Suppress], [Delete], and [Properties] are displayed as menus after
right-clicking [Extrude Split], [Revolve Split], or [Sweep Split]. When [Suppress] is made
inactive without deleting a feature, when setting the feature's name, execute [Properties].
Scale Multiple Parts or Sketches Simultaneously

Enlarge or shrink multiple parts or sketches at Once.
208
1. In the [Model Manager] tree, make sure that parts and sketches are not in the edit
mode , .
2. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Assembly Feature] > [Assembly Scale].
Or, click [Assembly Scale] on the toolbar.
3. In the [Assembly Scale] setting panel, set the parameters.
4. Click [OK].
[Assembly Scale] is added under the assembly in the [Model Manager] tree. [Edit], [Suppress],
[Delete], and [Properties] are displayed as menus after right-clicking [Assembly Scale]. When
[Properties].
209
Operations
Running Boolean Operations to Eliminate Part Duplication

Run a Boolean operation to clear the parts that are overlapping. The three types of Boolean opera-
tion are [Union], [Subtraction], and [Intersection].
• When [Union] is used, multiple parts are merged into one part, and it becomes one part (figure
A).
• When [Subtraction] is used, multiple parts are left unchanged, but because the duplicate area is
removed from one of the parts, the duplicate state is resolved (figure B).
If [Delete Parts, Sketches] is selected when performing the [Subtraction], part to subtract is
removed along with the duplicate area, and only the part to be subtracted from remains (figure
C).
• When [Intersection] is used, part to subtract is removed along with the duplicate area, and only
the part to be subtracted from remains (figure D).
From left to right; before boolean, [Union], [Subtraction],

[Subtraction] + [Delete Parts, Sketch], [Intersection]
mode , .
2. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Assembly Feature] > [Assembly Boolean].
Or, click [Assembly Boolean] on the toolbar.
3. In the [Assembly Boolean] setting panel, set the parameters.
4. Click [OK].
[Assembly Boolean] is added under the assembly in the [Model Manager] tree. [Edit], [Sup-
press], [Delete], and [Properties] are displayed as menus after right-clicking [Assembly Boolean].
When [Suppress] is made inactive without deleting a feature, when setting the feature's name,
execute [Properties].
210
Separate Faces of Parts That Are Touching

The imprint feature is used to create a new solid face by projecting the area where parts have contact
with or are adjacent to each other.
For example, the contact area between Part A and Part B are imprinted as shown in the following
figure. In this case, the shape of Part B is projected on the surface of Part A. The surface of Part A is
divided by the projected shape, and two faces are created.
Part B
Face 1
Face 2
Left: Before imprint (Part A and B), Right: After imprint (Part A)
An example is as follows:
• Suppose there are two solids and a boundary condition is set on the face A. The boundary condi-
tion cannot be set because the entire face of the part P2 is selected.
If the parts P1 and P2 are imprinted, the solid face is divided into two faces and the boundary
condition can be set on the face A.
Face B
Face A
Face A where the boundary

condition is set
Left: Example model
Center: The entire face of P2 is selected if the imprint feature is not used.
Right: With the imprint feature, only the face A can be selected from the face of P2.
mode , .
2. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Assembly Feature] > [Imprint for Parts].
Or, click [Imprint for Parts] on the toolbar.
3. In the [Imprint for Parts] setting panel, set the parameters.
4. Click [OK].
[Imprint for Parts] is added under the assembly in the [Model Manager] tree. [Edit], [Suppress],
[Delete], and [Properties] are displayed as menus after right-clicking [Imprint for Parts]. When
[Properties].
211
Operations
Projecting Outlines of Solids to Sketches

When a ACIS file that contains a 3D CAD model created with another CAD software is imported
to Geometry Editor, the geometry of the model cannot be edited because the dimensions of the
model are not imported.
If [Project Outline to Sketch] is clicked, the outline of the selected solid is displayed on the selected
plane as a sketch. The original solid can be created by adding features to a sketch, such as extruding
the surface.
Projected sketch
1. Select a part to convert in [Model Manager], and then click [Edit Part] .
A part can also be selected by right-clicking the part in [Model Manager], and then selecting
[Edit Part].
The selected part enters the edit mode .
2. Click [Edit Sketch] .

3. Select a plane (reference plane, or solid face) to project the outline of a solid in the
graphics window.
4. In the [Sketch Plane] setting panel, click [OK].
The sketch is displayed under the part in the [Model Manager] tree.
5. While the sketch is in edit mode , from the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Sketch Tool] >
[Project Outline to Sketch].
Or click [Project Outline to Sketch] .
6. Select a face (or edge) to project in the graphics window.
To project multiple faces (or edges), select multiple faces (or edges) while holding down the
[Shift] key or [Ctrl] key. To cancel the selections, click anywhere in the graphics window.
7. In the [Project Outline to Sketch] setting panel, click [Apply].
The basic shapes that are part of the outline of the projected face are added under the sketch in
the [Model Manager].
MEMO When [Automatic Constraints] is selected from the toolbar, a project coincident con-
straint is automatically added to a basic shape created by outline projection tool. The project coinci-
dent constraint will change the basic shape created by outline projection tool according to the outline
of the original solid.
212
8. To repeatedly project the target to sketches, run the same procedure.

MEMO The outline projection tool can also be used to create a 2D model using a 3D model. The pro-
cedure is as follows:
1. Create a sketch under the part in [Model Manager], and project the outline of the model to it.
2. Exit the part and sketch edit modes.
3. Select the sketch with created geometry by outline projection tool, and then click [Copy] .
4. Select an assembly, and then click [Paste] .
5. Delete any unnecessary parts (if a part exist, the geometry cannot be exported as a 2D model).
213
Operations
Creating Points, Lines, and Faces at User-Defined Positions and

Using Them for Model Creation
For the following purposes, the points, lines, and planes at any positions can be created:
• The reference point can be used for the center point when copying or moving the basic shapes or
regions.
• The reference line can be used for motion direction, axial direction, etc. when copying or moving
a region.
• The reference plane can be used for drawing faces of sketches, mirror faces when copying solids
or parts.
1. To create reference points, reference lines, reference planes to be used in the assembly,
make sure that there are no parts being edited in the [Model Manager] tree.
To create a reference point, reference line, reference plane to be used in a part, switch
that part in edit mode .
2. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Reference Geometry] > [Reference Point], [Refer-
ence Line], or [Reference Plane].

• Right-click a selected node or edge in the graphics window, and select [Reference Point],
[Reference Line], or [Reference Plane].
3. In the [Reference Point], [Reference Line], or [Reference Plane] setting panel, set the
parameters.
The remaining part of the procedure is the same as described in “Creating Points, Lines, and
Faces at User-Defined Positions and Using Them for Model Creation” on page 166.
214
Grouping Geometries, Defining Directions and Coordinates

A geometry set is a function to group one or multiple solids, regions, faces, edges, and vertices, to
define directions by using edges or faces, or to define coordinates by using vertices.
The geometry set information created in Geometry Editor is imported with a model into JMAG-
Designer or JMAG-Express.
In JMAG-Designer, analysis conditions can be set in the geometry set of solids, regions, faces, edges,
and vertices. The geometry set of directions or coordinates can be used for parameter settings of each
analysis condition.
The procedure for creating geometry sets with 3D models is the same as for 2D models. See
“Grouping Geometries, Defining Directions and Coordinates” on page 167.
215
Operations
Creating Paths and Beams

To create a sweep, use a path. A sweep with free form curves can be created by referencing the path.
Example: creating a helical sweep based on a helix path and a region
A beam passing through the specified path can be created by using the same function. By using
Boolean features (union), the created beam can be connected to beams created by the [Create Beam]
feature and the coil template feature.
The following are the path types:
Type Description
Vertices Path Creates a path or beam to connect the specified vertices.
Points Path Creates a path or beam to connect the specified coordinates.
Helix Path Creates a helical path or beam.
Spiral Path Creates a spiral path or beam.
Composite Path Combines the selected paths or beams into one.
Create a Path or Beam

Specify vertices or coordinates and create paths or beams passing through them.
1. To create a path for use with a feature for an assembly, make sure there are no parts
being edited in the [Model Manager] tree.
To create a path for use with a feature for a part, switch that part in edit mode .
2. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Path] > [Vertices Path], [Points Path], [Helix Path],
or [Spiral Path].
• Click the button on the toolbar ( , , , ).
• Right-click the graphics window and select [Vertices Path] while multiple vertices are selected.
3. In the [Vertices Path], [Points Path], [Helix Path], [Spiral Path] setting panel, set the
parameters.
4. Click [OK].
[Vertices Path], [Points Path], [Helix Path], or [Spiral Path] is added under the assembly or part
in the [Model Manager] tree. [Edit], [Suppress], [Delete], and [Properties] are displayed as
menus after right-clicking [Vertices Path], [Points Path], [Helix Path], or [Spiral Path]. When
[Properties].
216
Combine Paths or Beams into One

Combines multiple paths or beams into one. For example, a linear path and a helix path can be con-
nected. Not only paths, but edges and sketches can also be connected.
Example: To connect a helix path and a points path
1. To combine paths for an assembly, make sure there are no parts being edited in the
[Model Manager] tree.
To combine paths for a part, switch that part in edit mode .
2. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Path] > [Composite Path].
• Click [Composite Path] on the toolbar.

• With multiple paths selected, right-click the graphics window and select [Composite Path].
3. In the [Composite Path] setting panel, set the parameters.
4. Click [OK].
Paths, edges, and sketches are merged and treated as a single path.
[Composite Path] is added under the assembly or part in the [Model Manager] tree. [Edit],
[Invisible], [Suppress], [Delete], and [Properties] are displayed as menus after right-clicking
[Composite Path]. When [Suppress] is made inactive without deleting a feature, when setting the
feature's name, execute [Properties].
217
Operations
Setting Properties of Features or Parts

For details on property settings, see “Setting Properties of Features or Sketches” on page 168.
Disable Features and Parts (Suppression Settings)

For details on suppression settings, see “Disabling Features and Sketches (Suppression Settings)”
on page 169.
Creating Conditional Expressions to Determine Shape Errors

For details, see “Creating Conditional Expressions to Determine Shape Errors” on page 170.

For details on errors and warnings, see “Responding to Errors and Warnings that Occurred in the
Assembly” on page 171.

Designer
For details, see “Importing Models Created in the Geometry Editor into JMAG-Designer” on page
171.

For details, see “Replacing Models Already Imported into JMAG-Designer with Models Edited in
the Geometry Editor” on page 172.
Saving Models
For details on saving the model, see “Saving Models” on page 172.

For details on exporting the model to file, see “Exporting Models to Files” on page 173.
218
Creating Mesh Models Using Geometry Editor
This chapter describes how to create a mesh model using the Geometry Editor.

• Mesh Model Creation Procedure (page 221)
• Setting Geometry Editor Preferences, Setting the Link Option Between JMAG-Designer and Geometry Edi-
tor (page 226)
• Creating Parts and Sketches (page 226)

• Drawing on Sketches, Creating Regions, and Setting 2D Constraints (page 226)
• Creating 2D Meshes for Regions (page 227)
• Creating 3D Meshes Based on 2D Meshes (page 228)
• Creating 3D Meshes Based on 3D Mesh Surfaces (page 229)
• Deleting Duplicate Nodes in Meshes (page 230)
• Moving/Copying Meshes (page 231)
• Checking Mesh Quality (page 231)
• Renumbering Element IDs and Node IDs (page 232)
• Deleting a Mesh (page 233)
• Modifying Meshes in Element Blocks (page 234)

• Convert a Part or Sketch to a Mesh Part (page 234)
• Extrude an Element (page 234)
• Make a Beam Element (page 235)
• Copy an Element (page 236)
• Move a Node (page 236)
• Delete a Duplicate Node in a Mesh Part (page 237)
• Split an Element Block (page 238)
• Merge Multiple Element Blocks (page 238)
• Scale an Element (page 239)
• Subdivide an Elements (page 239)
• Change the Order in Which Element Nodes Connect (page 240)
• Copy/Merge Mesh Parts (page 240)
• Move/Copy Element Blocks Between Different Mesh Parts (page 241)
• Delete Elements in a Mesh Part (page 241)
• Setting Properties of Features or Parts (page 243)

• Disable Features and Parts (Suppression Settings) (page 243)
219
Operations
(page 243)
220
Mesh Model Creation Procedure

For mesh models, basic procedures are the same as with CAD models.
 Creating a new 2D mesh model

by default.
become smooth.

Geometry].
If the project has never been saved before, a dialog appears prompting the user to save the project
or to continue without saving. Click [Yes] and save the project.
2. Create a 2D CAD model.
MEMO Procedures are different when using wire templates or geometry libraries for a 2D model.
For details, see “Creating 2D Model Using the Geometry Library” on page 155, “Creating 2D Wire
Models Using Wire Templates” on page 160.
i. Create a sketch under an assembly in the [Model Manager] tree.
For details, see “Creating Sketches” on page 112.
iii. Specify constraints for edges and vertices.
page 137.
iv. Create a region.
221
Operations

3. Create a mesh in a 2D CAD Model.
i. Set the region mesh feature for the sketch that created the region.
See the following page for details.
• “Creating 2D Meshes for Regions” on page 227
ii. When editing meshes using element, element edge, or node; convert the sketches
that created the meshes to mesh parts and implement the settings.
• “Modifying Meshes in Element Blocks” on page 234
iii. Delete duplicated nodes as needed.
• “Deleting Duplicate Nodes in Meshes” on page 230
• “Delete a Duplicate Node in a Mesh Part” on page 237
Delete duplicate nodes except in special cases such as when creating a slide mesh manually.


[Import Geometry].
 Creating a new 3D mesh model

by default.
become smooth.

Geometry].
222
If the project has never been saved before, a dialog appears prompting the user to save the project
or to continue without saving. Click [Yes] and save the project.
2. Create a 2D CAD model.
MEMO Procedures are different when using wire templates or geometry libraries for a 2D model.
For details, see “Creating 2D Model Using the Geometry Library” on page 155, “Creating 2D Wire
Models Using Wire Templates” on page 160.
i. Create the part under [Model Manager] > [Assembly], and also create a sketch below
that part.
For details, see “Creating Parts and Sketches” on page 181.
iii. Set 2D constraints as needed.
page 137.
iv. Create a region.
3. Create a mesh in a 2D CAD Model.
i. Set the region mesh feature for the sketch that created the region.
See the following page for details.
• “Creating 2D Meshes for Regions” on page 227
ii. Delete duplicated nodes as needed.
4. Set 3D features in a 2D mesh model.
i. Set the 3D feature for the sketch that created the mesh.
• “Creating Solids” on page 183
223
Operations
ii. When editing meshes using element, element edge, or node; convert the parts that
created the meshes to mesh parts and implement the settings.
• “Modifying Meshes in Element Blocks” on page 234
iii. Delete duplicated nodes as needed.
• “Delete a Duplicate Node in a Mesh Part” on page 237


[Import Geometry].

However, if a study has already been created for the imported model in JMAG-Designer, it cannot
replace that model. In that case, the modified model should be imported as a separate model into
JMAG-Designer.


ii. In the [Back To JMAG-Designer] dialog, click [Replace Model] or [Update Model].
224

i. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click the model, select [Replace Model] or
[Update Model].
225
Operations
Setting Geometry Editor Preferences, Setting the Link Option

Between JMAG-Designer and Geometry Editor
log. See “Setting Geometry Editor Preferences” on page 111.
ences] dialog of JMAG-Designer. See “Setting the Link Option Between JMAG-Designer and

• “Exporting Model Images to Image Files” on page 272
• “Printing Model Images” on page 273
Creating Parts and Sketches

To create a 2D mesh model, create a sketch under [Assembly]. See “Creating 2D CAD Models Using
To create a 3D mesh model, create a part under [Assembly] and create a sketch beneath it. See “Cre-
ating 3D CAD Models Using Geometry Editor” on page 175.
Drawing on Sketches, Creating Regions, and Setting 2D Constraints

Drawing to sketches, region creation, setting of 2D constraint are the same as when creating a 2D
model. See “Creating 2D CAD Models Using Geometry Editor” on page 107.
226
Creating 2D Meshes for Regions

Create 2D meshes for the region created in the sketch.
MEMO A mesh is first created when a region is created on a sketch. Basic shapes cannot be created.
1. Create a mesh for the region created in the sketch.

i. In the [Model Manager] tree, make sure that the sketch is in the edit mode .
ii. Select [Insert] > [Mesh Feature] > [Create Region Mesh] from the menu bar.
Or, click [Create Region Mesh] .
iii. In the [Create Region Mesh] setting panel, set the parameters.
iv. Click [Apply].
v. To continue creating 2D mesh, repeat the same procedure.
To exit creating 2D mesh, click [Close].
2. If necessary, merge nodes that are present at the same coordinates.
If multiple nodes exist overlapping in the same coordinates, incorrect analysis results will be out-
put. See “Deleting Duplicate Nodes in Meshes” on page 230.
227
Operations
Creating 3D Meshes Based on 2D Meshes

Create 3D meshes by extending the 2D meshes created in the region to 3D.
1. Create a mesh for the region created in the sketch under the part.
i. In the [Model Manager] tree, make sure that the sketch is in the edit mode .
For the rest of the procedure, see “Creating 2D Meshes for Regions” on page 227. When
you finish creating the 2D mesh, please cancel the edit state of that sketch.
2. Create a 3D mesh based on 2D mesh.
i. In the [Model Manager] tree, make sure that there are no sketches in edit mode
under the part that is being edited.
Right-click the sketch in edit mode and select [End Sketch].
ii. To extend in the normal direction, select [Insert] > [Extrude] > [Extrude] from the
menu bar.
To extend in the radial direction around an axis, select [Insert] > [Revolve] > [Revolve]
from the menu bar.
Or, perform the following operation:
• Click the button on the toolbar ( , ).

• Right-click the sketch under the part in the [Model Manager] tree, and select [Extrude] or
[Revolve].
MEMO When these operations are performed with the sketch selected, the [Select Sketch] setting
panel is not displayed and the setting panel of each feature is displayed.
iii. In the [Select Sketch] setting panel, select the sketch created from the graphics win-
dow.
iv. Click [OK].
v. In the [Extrude] setting panel or [Revolve] setting panel, set the parameters.
vi. Click [OK].
[Extrude] or [Revolve] is added under the part in the [Model Manager] tree. Right-clicking
on them will open a menu with [Edit], [Suppress], [Delete], and [Properties]. When [Sup-
[Properties].
228
Creating 3D Meshes Based on 3D Mesh Surfaces

Create 3D meshes by extending the 3D mesh surfaces.
1. Create 3D mesh.
For the procedure, see “Creating 3D Meshes Based on 2D Meshes” on page 228.
2. Create a 3D mesh based on 3D mesh surface.
i. In the [Model Manager] tree, make sure that sketches under the part is not in the
edit mode .
ii. To extend in the normal direction, select [Insert] > [Face Extrude] > [Face Extrude]
from the menu bar.
To extend in the radial direction around an axis, select [Insert] > [Face Extrude] >
[Face Revolve] from the menu bar.
• Click [Face Extrude] or [Face Revolve] .
• Right-click the 3D mesh surface of the graphics window and select [Face Extrude] or
[Face Revolve].
iii. In the [Face Extrude] setting panel or [Face Revolve] setting panel, set the parame-
ters.
iv. Click [OK].
229
Operations
Deleting Duplicate Nodes in Meshes

Multiple vertexes (nodes) overlap each other in the process of creating meshes for every part and
region created. Each of the settings set for the model is not recognized properly during an analysis
when there duplicate nodes. The nodes that are duplicated needs to be deleted when creating a mesh
model (merge all nodes into one).
1. Select the area with duplicate nodes to delete.

Conduct the following operations.
• Specify a sketch with region in [Model Manager] and select [Edit Sketch] in the toolbar for
2D mesh created on a specified region.
• Specify a part in [Model Manager] and select [Edit Part] to delete duplicate nodes created
on a 3D mesh for a specified part.
• Parts or sketches should not be in edit mode / to delete duplicate nodes for an entire
mesh.
2. Select [Insert] > [Mesh Feature] > [Delete Duplicated Node Feature] from the menu bar.
Or click [Delete Duplicated Node Feature] .
3. In the [Delete Duplicated Node Feature] setting panel, set the parameters.
4. Click [OK].
MEMO The number of nodes decreases due to multiple nodes merging into one.The number of
nodes is displayed on the upper right side of the graphics window.
230
Moving/Copying Meshes
Moving/copying 2D mesh is the same procedures as moving/copying a region. See following pages.
• Moving Regions (page 152)
• Copying Regions (page 153)
Moving/copying 3D mesh is the same procedures as moving/copying a solid. See following pages.
• Moving Solids, Shells, and Beams (page 198)
• Copying Solids, Shells, and Beams (page 199)
Checking Mesh Quality

The quality of the mesh based on the flatness of the elements can be evaluated. Mesh quality will
affect the convergence of FEA.
MEMO This is the same function as [Mesh Quality] in JMAG-Designer.
1. Select [Tools] > [Mesh Quality] from the Geometry Editor menu bar.
2. In the [Mesh Quality] dialog, evaluate the quality of the mesh using numerical values.
The fewer the flat elements there are, the better the mesh is for analysis. For details on items dis-
played and evaluation criteria, see “Parameter Explanation Edition”.
MEMO The mesh for suppressed parts (or sketches or mesh parts) is not included in the mesh qual-
ity assessment. Suppression can be set from the context menu for any part (or sketch or mesh part) in
the Model Manager tree.
3. Click [Close].
231
Operations
Renumbering Element IDs and Node IDs

Element IDs and node IDs can be renumbered in Geometry Editor. Missing numbers that occur
with element IDs and node IDs can be avoided by renumbering IDs.
1. Display element IDs or node IDs in the graphics window.

i. To display element IDs, select [Element] under [View] > [ID] from the Geometry Edi-
tor toolbar.
To display node IDs, select [Node] under [View] > [ID] from the Geometry Editor tool-
bar.
Check marks displayed to the left of [ID] and [Node] will enable element IDs and node IDs
to be respectively displayed in the graphics window.
2. Renumber element IDs or node IDs.
i. To renumber element IDs, select [Renumber Element ID] under [Tools] from the
Geometry Editor toolbar.
To renumber node IDs, select [Renumber Node ID] under [Tools] from the Geometry
Editor toolbar.
Notes are displayed in the [Mesh ID Inheritance Confirmation] dialog when renumbering
element IDs or node IDs.
ii. Confirm the content shown.
Renumbering element IDs and node IDs will affect the conditions and material settings of
models that have already been imported.
iii. Select [Do not show this dialog in the future] to not show the [Mesh ID Inheritance
Confirmation] dialog again when renumbering element IDs or node IDs.
iv. Click [OK].
Element IDs or node IDs are renumbered.
MEMO Using [Undo] in the toolbar will return to the state prior to renumbering element IDs
and node IDs. Returning element IDs and node IDs to states prior to renumbering before using
[Update Model] will have no effect on condition or material settings.
232
Deleting a Mesh
Delete the mesh feature set in the region.
MEMO Changes a mesh model to a CAD model when deleting a mesh in this procedure.
MEMO Certain areas of a mesh can be deleted by converting a sketch or part to a mesh part. For details
about converting in mesh part, see “Convert a Part or Sketch to a Mesh Part” on page 234.
2. Use one of the following procedures to delete a mesh.
• Right-click [Region Mesh] in [Feature] under the sketch and select [Delete].
• Click [Delete] while [Region Mesh] is selected.
• Press the [Delete] key on the keyboard while [Region Mesh] is selected.
233
Operations
Modifying Meshes in Element Blocks

Mesh can be modified in the following blocks of element by converting a sketch or a part into a
mesh part.
• Extruding (drag) mesh
• Deleting mesh in a mesh part
• Creating beam elements
• Moving nodes
• Subdivisions for elements
• Shift element (modifying incidence)
Convert a Part or Sketch to a Mesh Part

Sketches or parts with mesh can be converted into mesh parts.
1. In the [Model Manager] tree, right-click either sketch or part where the mesh is created.
2. Select [Convert to Mesh Part].
The mesh part is added in the [Model Manager] tree, and also the mesh block which includes a
single or multiple elements for the mesh part in the [Model Manager] tree.
Right-click a mesh part and specify [Edit Part] to switch from to which is the non-edit
mode. Right-click a mesh part that is in edit mode and select [End Part] to switch from to
which is the non-edit mode.
The sketch or part that is based on a mesh part is specified with restrictions .
MEMO The mesh is duplicated when restrictions for the mesh part that is based on a sketch or part
is cleared.
An error may occur or the correct analysis result may not be obtained when mesh is duplicated.
Extrude an Element
• [Parallel Mesh Extrude]:
Extends the element parallel in the specified direction and for the specified distance.
234
• [Cylindrical Theta Mesh Extrude]:

Extends the element around the specified axis by the specified angle in the circumferential direc-
tion.
• [Cylindrical Radial Mesh Extrude]:
Extends the element around the specified axis by the specified distance in the radial direction.
Extrusion direction
Example: parallel mesh extrude
1. Extrude elements.
i. In the [Model Manager] tree, make sure that the mesh part is in the edit mode .
ii. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Parallel Mesh Extrude], [Cylindrical Theta Mesh
Extrude], or [Cylindrical Radial Mesh Extrude].
iii. In the [Parallel Mesh Extrude], [Cylindrical Theta Mesh Extrude], [Cylindrical Radial
Mesh Extrude] setting panel, set the parameters.
iv. Click [Apply].
The extrusion is run on a mesh part.
MEMO This operation can be restored to the state before execution by using [Undo] .
v. To continue extruding, execute the same procedure.
To end extruding, click [Close].
put. See “Delete a Duplicate Node in a Mesh Part” on page 237.
Make a Beam Element

Beam elements can be created from selected element edges. Beam elements are used in structural
analysis and electric field analysis.
1. In the [Model Manager] tree, make sure that the mesh part is in the edit mode .
2. Select [Insert] > [Make Beam Element] from the menu bar.
• Click [Make Beam Element] on the toolbar.

• Right-click an element edge while it is selected in the graphics window, and select [Make
Beam Element].
235
Operations
3. In the [Make Beam Element] setting panel, set the parameters.

4. Click [Apply].
A beam element is created. A mesh block including the beam element is additionally added to
the [Model Manager] tree.
MEMO Use [Undo] to return to the state prior to performing this procedure.
5. Perform this same procedure if creating additional beam elements.
Once beam elements have been created, click [Close].
Copy an Element
The following types are available]
• [Parallel Mesh Copy]:
Copies the selected elements parallel to the specified direction.
• [Rotate Mesh Copy]:
Copies the selected elements in the circumferential direction around the specified axis.
• [Mirror Mesh Copy]:
Copies the selected elements symmetrically about the specified plane.
MEMO Mesh parts can also be copied by using [Copy] and [Paste] in the toolbar.
2. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Parallel Mesh Copy], [Rotate Mesh Copy], or [Mir-
ror Mesh Copy] from the menu bar.
3. In the [Parallel Mesh Copy], [Rotate Mesh Copy], or [Mirror Mesh Copy] setting panel,
set the parameters.
4. Click [Apply].
5. To continue copying elements, execute the same procedure.
To end copying elements, click [Close].
Move a Node
Change the shape of the element by moving the selected node. The following types are available:
• [By Coordinate]:
Moves a node to the specified coordinates (X, Y, Z).
• [By Parallel]:
Moves a node in the specified direction and by the specified distance.
• [By Theta]:
Moves a node by a specified angle in the circumferential direction around a specified axis.
236
• [By Radial]:
Moves a node around a specified axis by a specified distance in the radial direction.
• [To Applicable Node]:
Moves the selected node to the same position as the specified node.
1. Move nodes.
i. In the [Model Manager] tree, make sure that the mesh part is in the edit mode .
ii. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Move Node] > [By Coordinate], [By Parallel], [By
Theta], [By Radial], or [To Applicable Node].
• Click the button on the toolbar ( , , , , ).
iii. In the [Move Node by Coordinate], [Move Node by Parallel], [Move Node By Radial],
[Move Node By Theta], or [Move Node To Applicable Node] setting panel, set the
parameters.
iv. Click [Apply].
v. To continue moving nodes, execute the same procedure.
To end moving nodes, click [Close].
put. See “Delete a Duplicate Node in a Mesh Part” on page 237.
Delete a Duplicate Node in a Mesh Part

Deletes duplicate nodes that are included in mesh parts. Duplicate nodes are multiple nodes that
exist on the same coordinate in a mesh.
Each of the settings set for the model is not recognized properly during an analysis when there are
duplicate nodes. Therefore, duplicate nodes needs to be deleted in the geometry before importing
into JMAG-Designer (merge duplicated nodes into one).
2. Select [Insert] > [Delete Duplicated Node] from the menu bar.
Or click [Delete Duplicated Node] .
3. In the [Delete Duplicated Node] setting panel, set the parameters.
4. Click [Apply].
Nodes are no longer duplicated. The number of nodes decreases due to multiple nodes merging
into one. The number of nodes is displayed on the upper right side of the graphics window.
5. To continue deleting duplicate nodes, execute the same procedure.
To end deleting duplicate nodes, click [Close].
237
Operations
Split an Element Block

Selected elements can be split from a mesh block to be set as a new mesh block.
A mesh part with multiple mesh blocks are imported into JMAG-Designer
MEMO This is not a function to subdivide elements.

MEMO Mesh parts are imported as different parts per mesh block when importing a mesh part into
JMAG-Designer.
2. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Split Mesh Block].
Or click [Split Mesh Block] .
3. In the [Split Mesh Block] setting panel, set the parameters.
4. Click [Apply].
In the [Model Manager] tree, a new mesh block is added under the mesh part.
MEMO Splitting a mesh block does not cause multiple nodes to be at the same coordinates.
5. To continue splitting, execute the same procedure.

To end spiting, click [Close].
Merge Multiple Element Blocks

Multiple mesh blocks can be merged into a single mesh block.
2. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Merge Mesh].
Or, click [Merge Mesh Block] on the tool bar.
3. In the [Merge Mesh Block] setting panel, set the parameters.
4. Click [Apply].
Multiple mesh blocks are merged into a single mesh block.
238
5. To continue merging, execute the same procedure.

To end merging, click [Close].
Scale an Element
2. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Element Scale].
Or click [Element Scale] on the tool bar.
3. In the [Element Scale] setting panel, set the parameters.
4. Click [Apply].
One element or more elements selected will be enlarged to the specified factor.
5. To continue scaling, execute the same procedure.
To end scaling, click [Close].
Subdivide an Elements
Divides elements into subdivisions. The elements can be divided into subdivisions as follows:
• The division pattern is specified and is divided into subdivisions
• Specifying the number of division for dividing elements in subdivision
MEMO The type of element that is supported differs on the type of subdivision.
• This function can be used for shell elements (quadrilateral elements) and solid elements (hexahedral
element) for [Divide Element By Pattern].
Shell elements (triangular elements) and solid elements (tetrahedral elements, square pyramid ele-
ments, triangular prism element) are not supported.
• This function is targeted for shell element (triangular element quadrilateral elements) and solid ele-
ment (hexahedral element, triangular prism element) for [Divide Element By Division].
Solid element (tetrahedral element, square pyramid elements) is not supported.
2. From the menu bar, select [Insert] > [Divide Element By Pattern] or [Divide Element By
Division].
Or click [Divide Element By Pattern] or [Divide Element By Division] on the tool bar.
3. In the [Divide Element By Pattern] or [Divide Element By Division] setting panel, set the
parameters.
4. Click [Apply].
5. To continue subdividing, execute the same procedure.
To end subdividing, click [Close].
239
Operations
Change the Order in Which Element Nodes Connect

The incidence for element (connectivity) is the order of connection for each node that configures an
element. Arrows are used to display the order of connection in JMAG.
4
3
8
7
1
2
6
Incidence of element and order of connection for nodes
MEMO Click [Element Incidence] when confirming an incidence of an element.

MEMO The incidence of element has no influence when running an analysis using a model created in
JMAG.
MEMO The incidence of element has no influence when running an analysis using a model that is not
created in JMAG. The specification in the incidence of element differs depending on the program. The
analysis cannot run when the arrow is in the direction of a left handed screw, in which it is handled as a
negative volume. In this case, the analysis can be run in JMAG by modifying the direction of the arrow
for incidence.
2. Select [Insert] > [Shift Element] from the menu bar.
Or click [Shift Element] on the tool bar.
3. In the [Shift Element] setting panel, set the parameters.
4. Click [Apply].
5. To continue shifting, execute the same procedure.
To end shifting, click [Close].
Copy/Merge Mesh Parts

Mesh parts can be copied, and multiple mesh parts can be merged into a single mesh part.
MEMO A different process occurs for merging mesh blocks. For details, see “Merge Multiple Element
Blocks” on page 238.
1. Select a mesh part in the [Model Manager] tree.

MEMO To select multiple mesh parts, click mesh parts while holding the [Ctrl] key or the [Shift]
key.
2. To copy, select [Edit] > [Copy] from the menu bar.
To merge, select [Edit] > [Cut] from the menu bar.
MEMO [Cut] and [Copy] can be used from the toolbar instead of the menu bar.
240
3. To copy, select the assembly from the [Model Manager] tree (or, select anything other
than mesh part).
To merge, select a mesh part from the [Model Manager] tree other than the mesh part
selected in step 1.
4. From the menu bar, select [Edit] > [Paste].
When copying, a copy of the mesh part in step 1 is added to assembly.
When merging, the mesh part from step 1 is merged with the mesh part selected in step 3.
MEMO [Paste] can be used from the toolbar instead of the menu bar.
Move/Copy Element Blocks Between Different Mesh Parts

Mesh blocks below a mesh part can be moved or copied to below a different mesh part.
1. Select a mesh block under a mesh part in the [Model Manager] tree.
MEMO To select multiple mesh blocks, click mesh blocks while holding the [Ctrl] key or the [Shift]
key.
2. To move, select [Edit] > [Cut] from the menu bar.
To copy, select [Edit] > [Copy] from the menu bar.
MEMO [Cut] and [Copy] can be used from the toolbar instead of the menu bar.
3. Select a mesh part from the [Model Manager] tree other than the mesh part selected in
step 1.
4. From the menu bar, select [Edit] > [Paste].
The mesh block from step 1 can be moved or copied to below a mesh part from step 3.
MEMO [Paste] can be used from the toolbar instead of the menu bar.
MEMO 1 mesh block below a mesh part can be moved to below a different mesh part using a drag-
and-drop operation.
Delete Elements in a Mesh Part

Elements included in a mesh part can be deleted.
MEMO The following procedures that are explained cannot delete mesh features (mesh created on a part
or 2D sketch). For details about the procedures for deleting a mesh feature, see “Deleting a Mesh” on
page 233.
 Deleting specified elements from a mesh part
2. Click [Element Select] .

3. Select the element to delete.
Use one of the following procedures. to delete a mesh part.
• Select [Edit] > [Delete] from the menu bar.
• Click [Delete] .
241
Operations
MEMO Nodes (Free Node) that do not belong to any elements are also deleted when deleting ele-
ments.
 Deleting elements per mesh block from a mesh part
2. Right-click a mesh block under the mesh part in the [Model Manager] tree, and select
[Delete].
MEMO Nodes (Free Node) that do not belong to any elements are also deleted when deleting ele-
ments.
242
Setting Properties of Features or Parts

For details on property settings, see “Setting Properties of Features or Sketches” on page 168.
Disable Features and Parts (Suppression Settings)

For details on suppression settings, see “Disabling Features and Sketches (Suppression Settings)”
on page 169.

For details on errors and warnings, see “Responding to Errors and Warnings that Occurred in the
Assembly” on page 171.

Designer
For details, see “Importing Models Created in the Geometry Editor into JMAG-Designer” on page
171.

For details, see “Replacing Models Already Imported into JMAG-Designer with Models Edited in
the Geometry Editor” on page 172.
Saving Models
For details on saving the model, see “Saving Models” on page 172.

For details on exporting the model to file, see “Exporting Models to Files” on page 173.
243
Operations
244
Creating Geometries Using JMAG Tools
JMAG has tools for creating geometries of specific products. This chapter describes how to prepare geometries
using these tools.
Models created using JMAG-Express
Models created using Transformer Modeling Tool (1/4model, 1/2model, full model)

• Creating Motor Models with JMAG-Express Classic (page 246)
• Creating 3D Transformer Models with the Transformer Modeling Tool (page 249)
245
Operations
Creating Motor Models with JMAG-Express Classic

In JMAG-Express Classic, a motor model with information such as geometry, materials, circuits,
etc. can be created by selecting a motor template and setting the parameters.
Brushless motor (left: 2D, right: 3D)
JMAG-Express has the following motor templates.

• Brushless motor (IPM)
• Brushless motor (SPM)
• Brushless motor (outer rotor/IPM)
• Brushless motor (outer rotor/SPM)
• Three-phase induction motor
• Single phase induction motor
• Switch reluctance motor
• Brush motor
• Universal motor
• Externally excited synchronous machine
• Wound-field AC synchronous machine
• Claw Pole Alternator
MEMO Although there are restrictions, a user him or herself can create templates but only if they corre-
spond to the above motors.
Creating a New Motor Model

1. In the [Link] setting panel of the JMAG-Designer [Preferences] dialog, specify options for
linking JMAG-Designer and JMAG-Express.
When the hot standby option is enabled, JMAG-Express will also be launched in the background
when starting JMAG-Designer. This makes the JMAG-Express's startup at the time of link become
smooth.
For information on how to open the [Preferences] dialog, see “Setting JMAG-Designer Prefer-
ences” on page 36. For details on options, see “Parameter Explanation Edition”.
If JMAG-Designer is restarted after the settings in the [Link] setting panel, the hot standby
option will be enabled.
2. Start JMAG-Express from JMAG-Designer.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click a project.
246
ii. Select [Motor Model] > [Create with JMAG-Express].

The [Start JMAG-Express] dialog is displayed.
MEMO The [Start JMAG-Express] dialog can also be opened in the following ways.
• Click [Motor Model] on the JMAG-Designer toolbar.
• From the JMAG-Designer menu bar, select [Tools] > [Motor Model].
MEMO If the above operation is performed while the project file is not open in JMAG-Designer,
a message dialog will ask whether or not to save the project file before the [Start JMAG-Express]
dialog is displayed. Click [Yes] and specify the destination folder for the project file.
MEMO If you do not want the [Start JMAG-Express] dialog to be displayed the next time
JMAG-Express starts up, select [Do not show this dialog in the feature] in the [Start JMAG-
Express] dialog.
iii. In the [Start JMAG-Express] dialog, click [OK].
JMAG-Express starts up, a link with JMAG-Designer is established, and the template win-
dow is displayed.
3. In the JMAG-Express template window, select the template to use.
Under the [Template] tab in the template window, click the link for the motor to be designed.
4. In the JMAG-Express main window, complete the settings.

The parameters specified depend on the type of motor.
Each parameter is explained in JMAG-Express manual.
5. Import the model designed by JMAG-Express into JMAG-Designer.
ii. Select [Motor Model] > [Import].
iii. In the [Save Options] dialog, set the parameters.
iv. Click [OK].
A motor designed with JMAG-Express is added as a new model to [Project Manager] tree in
JMAG-Designer.
6. Exit JMAG-Express.
i. Select [File] > [Exit] from the JMAG-Express menu bar.
Editing the Imported Motor Model in JMAG-Designer

• Once imported into JMAG-Designer, the motor model cannot be returned to JMAG-Express
and modified. Modify in JMAG-Express and re-import.
247
Operations
• The geometry output from JMAG-Express can also be edited in Geometry Editor. Right-click
the created model in the [Project Manager] tree in JMAG-Designer and select [Restore CAD
Link].
248
Creating 3D Transformer Models with the Transformer Modeling

Tool
With the transformer modeling tool, a 3D transformer model can be created by selecting a core tem-
plate and setting parameters such as bobbin and winding size.
Not only by using a template in the transformer modeling tool, a core can be selected from the data-
base provided by a core maker, or can be imported as a CAD model prepared by the user him or her-
self.
MEMO The model used in a transformer analysis study must be created using the transformer modeling
tool.
Creating a New Transformer Model

1. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click a project and select [Transformer Model] >
[Create].
2. In the [Transformer Model] dialog, set the parameters.
3. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click the project and select [Transformer Model] >
[Import].
4. Exit the transformer modeling tool.
i. Select [File] > [Exit] from the menu bar in the transformer modeling tool.
A dialog for confirming the closing of the transformer modeling tool opens.
ii. Click [OK].
Editing an Imported Transformer Model to JMAG-Designer

However, if a study has already been created for a model imported into JMAG-Designer, this model
cannot be replaced. In that case, the modified model should be imported as a separate model into
JMAG-Designer.
1. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click a transformer model and select [Restore CAD
Link].
2. In the [Transformer Model] dialog, edit the parameters.
3. Import the model designed by the transformer modeling tool into JMAG-Designer.
• If replacing a model that has already been imported, right-click the model in the [Project
Manager] tree and select [Replace Model].
• To import as a new model, right-click the project in the [Project Manager] tree and select
[Transformer Model] > [Import].
249
Operations
250
Importing Models from Commercial CAD Software
This chapter describes linking with commercial CAD software from JMAG-Designer.
JMAG-Designer can establish a link with CATIA V5, Creo Parametric, or NX.
Using the CAD link function allows geometry changes in CAD software to be sequentially applied to a JMAG-
Designer model. Because geometry data is shared between CAD software and JMAG-Designer, geometry and
condition settings in JMAG-Designer are retained even after geometry changes are reflected.
MEMO The latest information related to versions of CAD software that can be linked to JMAG is on the JMAG
website (https://jmag-international.com/).

• Importing CAD Models Created With CAD Software (page 252)
• Closing the Link Between JMAG-Designer and CAD Software (page 254)
• Importing a CAD Model That Was Updated in CAD Software into JMAG-Designer (page 254)
251
Operations
Importing CAD Models Created With CAD Software

1. Prepare the environment.
Two methods are available if using CATIA V5, Creo Parametric, or NX; not using linking soft-
ware or using CAPRI CAE Gateway.
CAPRI CAE Gateway does not need to be installed using the former method. Install CAPRI
CAE Gateway if using the latter method. Also, register a CAPRI license.
MEMO The choice between not using linking software or using CAPRI CAE Gateway depends on
the license used.
• When not using linking software, a JW_CATIA_V5 license, JW_ProE license, or JW_NX license
is required.
• When using CAPRI CAE Gateway, a JW_CAPRI_BASE license is required.
MEMO For information on installing CAPRI CAE Gateway, see “JMAG Installation Manual”.
3. In the [Link] setting panel of the JMAG-Designer [Preferences] dialog, specify options for
importing a model.
ences” on page 36. For details on options, see “Parameter Explanation Edition”.
4. Open a model created with CAD software in JMAG-Designer.
i. To open the [Open File] dialog, from the JMAG-Designer menu bar, select [File] >
[Open].
ii. Select the CAD assembly file type from the [File Type] list.
If any of the following is selected, linking software will not be used:
• [CATIA V5 file [CAD Link] (.CATPart, .CATProduct)]
• [Creo Parametric file [CAD Link] (.prt, .asm, .prt., .asm.)]
• [NX Files [CAD Link] (.prt)]
If any of the following is selected, CAPRI CAE Gateway will be used:
• [CATIA V5 Files [CAPRI] (.CATPart, .CATProduct)]
• [Creo Parametric Files [CAPRI] (.prt, .asm)]
• [NX file [CAPRI] (.prt)]
iii. Specify a CAD assembly file.
iv. Click [Open].
• When [CATIA V5 Files [CAPRI] (.CATPart, .CATProduct)], [Creo Parametric Files
[CAPRI] (.prt, .asm)], or [NX Files [CAPRI] (.prt)] is selected from the [File Type] list:
CAD software starts and the model is displayed. The same model is also displayed in the
graphics window in JMAG-Designer. A link is now established between JMAG-Designer
and the CAD software, and linked operations can be performed.
• When [CATIA V5 Files [CAD Link] (.CATPart, .CATProduct)], [Creo Parametric Files
[CAD Link] (.prt, .asm)], or [NX Files [CAD Link] (.prt)] is selected from the [File Type]
list:
The [CAD Link] dialog is displayed. Specify the options for importing a model in the
[CAD Link] dialog.
Click [OK] in the [CAD Link] dialog to start the CAD software and display the model.
252
Importing Models from Commercial CAD Software
The same model is also displayed in the graphics window in JMAG-Designer. A link is
now established between JMAG-Designer and the CAD software, and linked operations
can be performed.
253
Operations
Closing the Link Between JMAG-Designer and CAD Software

1. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click a model.
2. Select [Close CAD Link].
The link between JMAG-Designer and the CAD software is removed.
MEMO Closing the JMAG-Designer project file automatically removes the link between JMAG-
Designer and the CAD software.
Importing a CAD Model That Was Updated in CAD Software into

JMAG-Designer
1. While a project that includes an imported CAD software model is open, establish a link
between JMAG-Designer and CAD software.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click a model.
ii. Select [Restore CAD Link].
CAD software starts and the CAD software file linked to the project file opens.
2. In CAD software, edit the geometry and save.
3. Import models from CAD software into JMAG-Designer.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click the model.
ii. Select [Update Model].
The model edited in the CAD software while the link is disabled is imported into the [Project
Manager] of JMAG-Designer as a new model.
254
Using the Functions on Models
This chapter describes the operation procedure of the function related to the model.

• Setting the Units of Measurement to Use (page 256)
• Moving and Rotating Models Relative to the Global Coordinate System (page 258)
• Checking Geometry Models for Setting Conditions and Generating Meshes (page 259)
• Deleting Mesh Generation Cache Data Associated with Models (page 260)
• Setting Model or Part Properties (page 260)
• Deleting Models from Projects (page 261)
• Changing Names of Selected Parts Simultaneously (page 262)
• Grouping Parts (page 263)
• Removing Parts from Analysis Regions (page 265)
• Measuring Lengths and Angles of Shapes or Between Shapes (JMAG-Designer, Geometry Editor) (page
266)
• Calculating Volume or Area for Parts and Elements (JMAG-Designer, Geometry Editor) (page 267)
• Editing Dimensions in JMAG-Designer (page 270)
• Extending 2D Models to 3D Models in JMAG-Designer (page 271)
• Exporting Model Images to Image Files (page 272)
• Exporting Model Images to Hoops Files (page 273)
• Printing Model Images (page 273)
255
Operations
Setting the Units of Measurement to Use

A Unit system is defined per model. The timing in which the unit system is applied to the model is
as follows:
• When the model is added to [Project Manager].
• When the unit system is specified for the model.
IMPORTANT The units that are applied to a model cannot be modified if a result file is
imported or an analysis is run.
IMPORTANT If the unit of length set for a CAD model is different from the unit of length set
in the [Units] setting panel in the [Preference] dialog of JMAG-Designer, the unit of length set
for the CAD model is used.
This also applies to models created with Geometry Editor or JMAG-Express.
• Create and Apply the User-Defined Units (page 256)

• Add the Units Applied to the Models in JMAG-Designer (page 257)
Create and Apply the User-Defined Units

A user-defined unit system can be created by combining units.
1. Create unit system.

i. Select [Tools] > [Preferences] from the JMAG-Designer menu bar.
ii. In the [Preferences] dialog, click [Units] on the navigation bar.
iii. In the [Units] setting panel, click [Add] .

iv. In the [Edit Units] dialog, enter a name for the newly-created unit system in the
[Title] box.
v. Select a unit for each category in the table.
vi. Click [OK].
A new unit system is created and added to the list in the [Units] setting panel. The unit sys-
tem selected in the list will be applied to models added to JMAG-Designer in the future.
• To edit the unit system, select it from the list in the [Units] setting panel and click [Edit].
• To delete a unit system, select it from the list in the [Units] setting panel and click
[Delete] .
vii.Click [OK] in the [Preferences] dialog.
2. Apply the unit system to a model.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, under the model, right-click [Unit].
ii. Select [Show Table].
The [Units] dialog is displayed. A list of units applied to a model is displayed.
iii. To apply the selected unit system from the [Units] setting panel in the [Preferences]
dialog to the current model, click [Set from System Default].
A list of units is updated in the [Units] dialog.
IMPORTANT Even if the [Set from System Default] is clicked and the new unit system
256
is applied to the model, the values set for parameters of each condition and material will
not be converted automatically.
iv. Click [OK].
Add the Units Applied to the Models in JMAG-Designer

To use the same unit system for other models, this operation needs to be executed.
1. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click [Unit].

2. Select [Show Table].
The [Units] dialog is displayed. A list of units applied to a model is displayed.
3. Click [Register in Preferences].
The registered unit system can be selected in the [Units] setting panel of the [Preferences] dialog
when adding a new model.
To apply the added unit system to a future loading model, select the added unit system in the list
on the [Unit system] setting panel of the [Setup] dialog.
To apply the added unit system to subsequent models, select the added unit system in the list on
the [Unit system] setting panel of the [Preferences] dialog.
257
Operations
Moving and Rotating Models Relative to the Global Coordinate

System
Use this function in the following cases.
• When a model is not located near the origin of the global coordinate system after importing a
model created by a CAD program.
• When running a coupled analysis.
For example, a location relative to the global coordinate system needs to be the same when there
are several different models of the same device and mapping calculation results from one model
to the other.
MEMO This function is supported for 3D models, but it is not supported for 2D models.
MEMO This function is supported for CAD and mesh models.
1. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click a model and select [Center Model].
2. In the [Center Model] setting panel, set the parameters.
3. Click [OK].
The centering function is executed, and [Model Centering] is displayed under the model in
the [Project Manager] tree.
258
Checking Geometry Models for Setting Conditions and Generating

Meshes
Model geometry check is a function that detects errors of the geometry prior to running mesh gen-
eration or the analysis. It can check for small edges or faces included or intervening in the geometry
beforehand.
In addition, this function can check for geometry errors dependent on study conditions or mesh set-
tings.
MEMO Check geometry will check the geometry model of the model or study. Mesh models are not
checked.
MEMO All errors cannot be detected with this function. Even if errors are not detected in the geometry
check, there is a chance that an error may occur during mesh generation.
1. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click a model or study.

2. Select [Check Geometry].
3. In the [Check Geometry] dialog, set the parameters.
4. Click [Run Check].
The message will be output in the list when an error is detected. The relevant areas will be high-
lighted on the graphics window.
5. Click [Close].
259
Operations
Deleting Mesh Generation Cache Data Associated with Models

When exporting a JCF file from study created with a solid model, mesh generation cache data is cre-
ated. This cache data has the effect of reducing the time it takes to export the JCF file for the second
time onward. However, when you change the model geometry largely, it will be newly created each
time, so if you leave cache data that as is may put pressure on the disk capacity.
If required, delete cache data by the following procedures.
1. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click a model and select [Remove Mesh Cache].
The cache data with selected model is deleted from JFILES folder in the same directory as the
project file.
Setting Model or Part Properties

Changing the project name and add a comment to project.
1. To edit the properties of a model properties, in the [Project Manager] tree, right-click
the model and select [Properties].
To edit the properties of a part or part group, in the [Project Manager] tree, right-click
the part or part group and select [Properties].
1. In the [Model Properties] or [Part Properties] dialog, set the parameters.

2. Click [OK].
260
Deleting Models from Projects
Deleting one model

1. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click a model and select [Delete Model].
Deleting multiple models

Multiple models can be deleted from the project in one action by using the [Project Management]
dialog. When deleting models, the studies created for the models are also deleted.
1. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click a project and select [Manage Project].
2. In the [Project Management] dialog, select the models from the list.
Multiple models can be selected by holding down the [Ctrl] key or [Shift] key and clicking on
the models.
3. Click the delete button .
The selected models and the studies created for the selected models are deleted.
MEMO In some cases a message to confirm the deleting is displayed, in which case click [Yes] or
[No].
MEMO Since studies with text in the Analysis Group column in the list belong to an analysis group,
those studies and the models that contain those studies cannot be deleted.
4. Click [OK].
The operations performed in the [Project Management] dialog are reflected in the [Project Man-
ager] tree.
261
Operations
Changing Names of Selected Parts Simultaneously

1. Click [Select] on the toolbar.
2. While holding down the [Shift] key or [Ctrl] key, click the part on the graphics window.
Parts are selected.
3. While selecting a part, right-click the graphics window and select [Rename Selected
Parts].
4. In the [Rename Parts] dialog, enter a new name in the [Part Name] box.
5. Click [OK].
MEMO The name of the air region generated from the automatic mesh generation function such as
[Slide Mesh] or [Generate Mesh at Each Step] cannot be modified.
262
Grouping Parts
Multiple parts can be handled as one group at once. The icon for the grouped parts changes from
to under [Assembly] in the [Project Manager] tree.
Grouping Parts Using the Graphics Window

The parts to group can be selected in the graphics window, and then grouped using the menu dis-
played by right-clicking.
1. Click [Select] on the toolbar.

2. While holding down the [Shift] key or [Ctrl] key, click the part on the graphics window.
3. While selecting a part, right-click the graphics window.
4. Select [Grouping] > [Group Selected].
Grouping Parts Using a Dialog

Parts can be grouped in the [Edit Part Group] dialog. A specific part can be added or removed from
an existing group.
1. In the [Project Manager] tree, under a model, right-click [Assembly].

2. Select [Add Group].
3. In the [Edit Part Group] dialog, set the parameters.
4. Click [OK].
The parts are grouped and reflected in the parts list of [Assembly] in the [Project Manager] tree.
Grouping Parts Using Names of Parts as Reference

Parts can be grouped simultaneously using the names under [Assembly] as reference. Multiple parts
with the same names are grouped together.
1. Change the name of a part as required.

2. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click [Assembly] and select [Create Groups] >
[Match Names].
The parts that have the same name are grouped.
MEMO Part names can be modified in a single process from the context menu in the graphics win-
dow. For details, see “Changing Names of Selected Parts Simultaneously” on page 262.
Grouping parts Using Similar Strings as Reference

Parts that have the same first four or six characters in their names can be grouped.
1. Change the name of a part as required.
263
Operations
2. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click [Assembly], and select [Create Groups] >
[Match 4 Characters] or [Match 6 Characters].
Grouping Parts Using Materials as Reference

Parts are grouped together using the material assigned to each part as reference.
1. In the [Project Manager] tree, under a study, check that a material is specified for each
part in [Parts].
2. Right-click [Assembly], and select [Create Groups] > [Match Materials].
The parts are grouped by their assigned materials.
Adding/Removing a Part to an Existing Group

1. In the [Project Manager] tree, under [Assembly], right-click the group.
2. Select [Edit Group].
3. In the [Edit Part Group] dialog, set the parameters.
4. Click [OK].
Ungrouping
1. In the [Project Manager] tree, under [Assembly], right-click the group.
2. Select [Ungroup].
MEMO Select the grouped part in the graphics window, right-click, then select [Grouping] >
[Ungroup Selected].
Ungrouping All of the Groups under [Assembly]

1. In the [Project Manager] tree, under [Assembly], right-click the grouped parts.
2. Select [Ungroup All Parts].
264
Removing Parts from Analysis Regions

Parts can be specified to be suppressed, where they are automatically omitted from analysis targets.
For example, the scale of a model is suppressed in which computation time is shortened by suppress-
ing parts as in the following examples.
• When parts that are not required are included in a CAD data during an analysis.
• When there are parts that are not required in a magnetic field analysis, but are required in a ther-
mal analysis in a coupled magnetic field and thermal analysis.
Suppression on parts can be set per model or study.
1. To set suppression for parts in a model, in the [Project Manager] tree, under [Assembly],
right-click a part or part group .
To set suppression for parts in a study, in the [Project Manager] tree, under [Parts],
right-click a part or part group.
2. Select [Suppress Part].
Parts that are suppressed are not available in the [Project Manager] tree, and are not displayed in
3. Run step 1-2 again while a part has suppression to remove suppression.
265
Operations
Measuring Lengths and Angles of Shapes or Between Shapes

(JMAG-Designer, Geometry Editor)
Point coordinates, Edge lengths, face area, the distance between two points, distance between two
edges, distance between points and edges, and angles from three points can be measured.
1. For JMAG-Designer, from the menu bar, select [View] > [Measurement].
For Geometry Editor, from the menu bar, select [Tools] > [Measurement].
Or, click [Measurement] on the toolbar.
The [Measurement] dialog is displayed.
2. Select the measurement method.
• [Two Entities]
• [Single Entity]
• [Entity and Point]
• [Three Point Angle]
• [Two Points and Center Angle]
3. Switch the selection mode ( , , , , , ).

Six selection modes are available.
• [Select Vertex]
• [Select Edge]
• [Select Face]
• [Select Node]
• [Select Element Edge]
• [Select Element Face]
When multiple selection modes are enabled, the entity closest to where the user clicks is selected.
4. Select points and edges to be used for measurement on the graphics window.
Measurement results are displayed in the [Measurement] dialog and graphics window.
• Select a measurement result displayed in the [Measurement] dialog and right-click to display
menus for copying or clearing the measurement result.
• Click [Clear] to release the point and edge selection used for measurement.
• When the [Measurement] dialog is displayed, click [Measurement] on the toolbar to close
the [Measurement] dialog. Measurement results displayed in the graphics window will also
disappear with this operation.
266
Calculating Volume or Area for Parts and Elements (JMAG-

Designer, Geometry Editor)
The following volumes and areas can be calculated.
Program Calculation type Model type Calculation object

JMAG-Designer Volume calcula- CAD model 3D parts
tion (solid)
Mesh model 3D elements
Mixed model of 3D parts or 3D elements.
shape and mesh The calculation target changes depending
on the display type ( , , ).
Area calculation CAD model 3D part faces, 2D parts
Mesh model 3D element faces, 2D elements
Mixed model of 3D part faces, 2D parts, 3D element faces,
shape and mesh or 2D elements.
The calculation target changes depending
on the model dimension and display type
( , , ).
Geometry Editor Volume calcula- CAD model Solids
tion Mesh model 3D elements, 3D mesh blocks
Mixed model of Solids, 3D elements, or 3D mesh blocks.
shape and mesh The calculation target changes depending
on the display type ( , , , ). and
selection type ( , , ).
Area calculation CAD model Solid faces, shells (surfaces), regions
Mesh model 3D element faces, 2D elements, 2D mesh
blocks
Mixed model of Solid faces, shells (surfaces), regions, 3D ele-
shape and mesh ment faces, 2D elements, or 2D mesh
blocks.
The calculation target changes depending
on the model dimension, display type
( , , , ). and selection type ( ,
, , ).
1. To calculate the volume/area of a CAD model, click [View Model] on the toolbar.
To calculate the volume/area of a mesh model, click [View Mesh] or [View Mesh
Geometry] on the toolbar.
MEMO When you click elements or element faces included in the sketch (or part) on the graphics
window while [View Model/Mesh] is selected in Geometry Editor, those elements or element
faces may not be highlighted.
2. For JMAG-Designer, from the menu bar, select [View] > [Volume/Area Calculation].
For Geometry Editor, from the menu bar, select [Tools] > [Volume/Area Calculation].
Or, click [Volume/Area Calculation] on the toolbar.
267
Operations
The [Volume/Area Calculation] dialog is displayed.

3. Select the calculation object in the graphics window.
JMAG-Designer:
• To calculate the volume of a 3D part or the area of a 2D part:
Click [Select Part] on the toolbar to select a part, then click the part in the graphics win-
dow.
• To calculate the area of a 3D part:
Click [Select Face] on the toolbar to select a face, then click the face in the graphics win-
dow.
• To calculate the volume of a 3D element or the area of a 2D element:
Click [Select Element] on the toolbar to select an element, then click the element in the
graphics window.
• To calculate the area of a 3D element face:
Click [Select Element Face] on the toolbar to select an element face, then click the ele-
ment face in the graphics window.
Geometry Editor:
• To calculate the volume of a solid, or the area of a region, shell, or solid face:
Click [Geometry Select] on the toolbar to select a geometry, then click the solid or region
• To calculate the volume of a 3D element or the area of a 2D element:
Click [Element Select] on the toolbar to select an element, then click the element in the
graphics window.
• To calculate the volume of a 3D mesh block or the area of a 2D mesh block:
Click [Mesh Block Select] on the toolbar to select a mesh block, then click the mesh block
• To calculate the area of a 3D element face or a 2D element:
Click [Element Face Select] on the toolbar to select an element face, then click the ele-
ment face in the graphics window.
MEMO To select multiple parts or elements, hold down the [Shift] key on the keyboard and click
the parts or elements to be selected.
MEMO To deselect some of the selected parts or elements, hold down the [Shift] key on the key-
board and click the parts or elements to be deselected.
MEMO To clear the entire selection of parts or elements, click an open space in the graphics window.
4. Check calculation results in the [Volume/Area Calculation] dialog.

Selected parts or elements are highlighted.
The number of selected parts, elements, and their volume and area are displayed in the [Volume/
Area Calculation] dialog.
IMPORTANT In JMAG-Designer, the unit of length applied to the model is used as the
unit of volume and area in the [Volume/Area Calculation] dialog.
In Geometry Editor, the unit of length applied to the assembly is used as the unit of volume
and area in the [Volume/Area Calculation] dialog.
MEMO In JMAG-Designer, when a grouped part or the face of that part is selected, the volume and
area of the grouped part group are displayed.
268
MEMO Volume and area can also be calculated using the vol function and the area function of the
user component function in JMAG-Designer. For details on the user component function, see “Cre-
ating Custom Results by Applying Expressions to Analysis Results” on page 522.
269
Operations
Editing Dimensions in JMAG-Designer

Dimensions of models created in the Geometry Editor or CAD software can be edited in JMAG-
Designer. The width or height can easily be edited without displaying the CAD software window.
MEMO JMAG-Designer needs to be linked to the Geometry Editor or the CAD software. If JMAG-
Designer is not linked to Geometry Editor or the CAD software, a link needs to be established.
1. Select the CAD parameter whose value to change.

i. In the [Project Manager] tree, under a study, right-click [CAD Parameters].
ii. Select [Select CAD Parameters].
iii. In the [Select CAD Parameters] dialog, the settings related to geometry that can be
modified with JMAG-Designer are displayed.
Select the checkboxes for the settings to edit from the list.
iv. Click [OK].
The parameters that are selected are added under [CAD Parameters] in the [Project Manager]
tree.
2. Edit the dimensional parameter values.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, under [CAD Parameters], right-click the CAD parame-
ter.
ii. Select [Modify].
iii. In the [CAD Parameters] setting panel, edit the dimensional parameter values.
iv. Click [OK].
The icon displayed on the left side will change from to for the item modified.
The specified settings are not reflected in the model in the graphics window yet.
3. Apply the changed value to the model of each case.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, under the study, right-click [CAD Parameters].
ii. Select [Apply Values] when applying the changes to only one case.
Select [Apply All Cases] when applying the changes to all cases.
The modified values are reflected on the model in the graphics window.
The icon displayed on left side changes back from to when the value is reflected on the
model.
If the mesh is already generated for the model or the calculation is performed, a message ask-
ing whether or not to delete the mesh and results is displayed. If [Yes] is clicked, the mesh and
results are deleted. If [No] is clicked, the model will not be changed.
270
Extending 2D Models to 3D Models in JMAG-Designer

2D models created in the Geometry Editor or JMAG-Express can be extended to 3D without oper-
ating the Geometry Editor in JMAG-Designer.
MEMO This function can be used in 2D models. Axisymmetric models are not supported.
MEMO This function can be used on both region models and mesh models.
1. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click a model and select [Extend Model To 3D].
2. In the [Extend Model To 3D] dialog, set the parameters.
3. Click [OK].
The geometry is extended and a new model is added under [Assembly] in the [Project Manager]
tree.
MEMO The process is run on the Geometry Editor when extending to a solid model.
A message to establish a link is first displayed when there is no link with the Geometry Editor when
extending to a solid model. Click [OK] to start the Geometry Editor.
MEMO The process is run in JMAG-Designer when extending to a mesh model.
271
Operations
Exporting Model Images to Image Files

Export the graphics window of JMAG-Designer or Geometry Editor as an image file (.png, .jpeg,
.bmp).
1. If necessary, display either of contour plots, vector plots, or flux lines in the graphics
window.
See the following pages:
• “Displaying Results Contour Plots” on page 496
• “Displaying Results Vector Plots, Tensor Plots” on page 498
• “Displaying Flux Lines” on page 500.
2. Set the image size.
i. From the menu bar, select [File] > [Image Setup].
ii. In the [Image Setup] dialog, set the parameters.
iii. Click [Save].
3. Export the model image as an image file.
i. From the menu bar, select [File] > [Export Image].
ii. In the [Export Image] dialog, specify the file name, type, and place to export.
iii. Click [Save].
272
Exporting Model Images to Hoops Files

A contour and so on displayed in the graphics window can be saved in Hoops Streaming Files (.hsf ),
or Hoops Meta Files (.hmf ) format. The Hoops file that is exported can be confirmed in a viewer
that supports Hoops files.
1. If necessary, display either of contour plots or flux lines in the graphics window.
MEMO The vector plot cannot be saved to the Hoops file.
2. Export the model image as a hoops file (.hsf, .hmf).

i. From the menu bar, select [File] > [Export HSF File].
ii. In the [Export HSF File] dialog, specify the file name, type, and place to export.
iii. Click [Save].
Printing Model Images

Print the graphics window of JMAG-Designer or Geometry Editor.
1. If necessary, display either of contour plots, vector plots, or flux lines in the graphics
window.
2. Print the model image as an image file.
i. Select [File] > [Print] from the menu bar.
ii. In the [Print] dialog, set the parameters.
iii. Click [Print].
273
Operations
274
Study Operations
Creating Analysis Studies
This chapter explains the procedure for creating a study.

To perform an analysis, it is necessary to set operating environments and drive conditions for the analysis target,
as well as the material properties of each section. In JMAG-Designer, these types of settings are managed in units
referred to as a “study”. Studies are divided based on the type of performed analysis, and the items that can be set
differently for each study.

• Creating a New Basic Study (page 278)
• Creating Studies for Section Analysis from Existing Studies (page 280)
• Creating 2D/Axisymmetric Studies from Section Analysis Studies (page 281)
• Creating Iron Loss Analysis Studies from Magnetic Field Analysis Studies (page 281)
• Duplicating Studies (page 282)
• Editing Studies with Results Included (page 283)
• Deleting Studies from Models (page 283)
277
Operations
Creating a New Basic Study

Create FEA studies such as magnetic field analysis studies and thermal analysis studies. Basic studies
can be created for all applications.
MEMO For information about creating an application study, see “Executing Application Studies” on
page 701. For information about creating a consolidated analysis study, see “Executing Integration
Analysis Studies” on page 715.
1. Create a model to analyze, and then import to JMAG-Designer.

2. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click the model.
3. Select [New Study] > (analysis type).
The following analysis types are available:
• 3D models:
• [Magnetic]:
[Static Analysis], [Transient Analysis], [Frequency Analysis]
• [Thermal]:
[Steady State Analysis], [Transient State Analysis], [Speed Priority Mode Steady State
Analysis], [Speed Priority Mode Transient State Analysis]
• [Structural]:
[Static Analysis], [Eigenmode Analysis], [Frequency Analysis], [Modal Transient Analysis],
[Direct Transient Analysis]
• [Electric]:
[Static Analysis], [Frequency Analysis], [Current Distribution Analysis]
• [Transformer]:
[Transformer Analysis]
• [Thermal Stress]:
[Steady State Analysis], [Transient State Analysis]
• 2D models:
• [Magnetic]:
• [Axisymmetric Magnetic]:
• [Thermal]:
[Speed Priority Mode Steady State Analysis (2.5D)], [Speed Priority Mode Transient State
Analysis (2.5D)]
• [Structural]:
[Static Analysis], [Eigenmode Analysis], [Frequency Analysis], [Modal Transient Analysis],
[Direct Transient Analysis], [Speed Priority Mode Static Analysis]
• [Electric]:
[Static Analysis], [Frequency Analysis]
• [Axisymmetric Electric]:
[Static Analysis], [Frequency Analysis]
A new study is created. The study with the selected analysis type is displayed in the [Project
Manager] tree. Components of the model are listed under [Parts].
278
Studies that are not active (not selected) can not be edited when there are multiple studies in the
[Project Manager] tree.
279
Operations
Creating Studies for Section Analysis from Existing Studies

A section analysis study can be created from a magnetic or electric field analysis study using the 3D
model. Section analysis studies inherit the materials and conditions set in the 3D model.
1. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click the 3D model study to create the section analy-
sis study.
2. Select [New Section Study].
3. In the [Create Section Study] dialog, set the parameters.
4. Click [OK].
MEMO Settings that cannot be inherited from a study using a 3D model to a section analysis study
are deleted. The deleted settings are output to a message.
5. In the [Section] setting panel, define the cross section to be used in the section analysis
study.
6. Click [OK].
280
Creating 2D/Axisymmetric Studies from Section Analysis Studies

A 2D axisymmetric model study can be created from a section analysis study.
When running a section analysis study, a condition set on a part may be applied to other parts. In
such a case, create a 2D axisymmetric model study from the section analysis study, and then set the
conditions again. A new study independent of the section analysis study can be created.
1. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click the section analysis study.

2. Select [New 2D Study].
If the section analysis study uses a 2D model a 2D study is created, and if it uses an axisymmetric
model an axisymmetric study is created.
Creating Iron Loss Analysis Studies from Magnetic Field Analysis

Studies
An iron loss analysis study can be created from a magnetic field analysis study.
MEMO There are two methods to run the iron loss analysis using an iron loss solver.
• Creating an iron loss study from a magnetic field analysis and running it independently
• Running the magnetic field analysis and iron loss analysis together by setting the Iron Loss conditions
for the magnetic field analysis
1. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click the magnetic field analysis study.
2. Select [New Loss Study].
In an iron loss analysis study, Iron Loss conditions are set by default. If the magnetic field analysis
selected in step 1 has Iron Loss conditions, the Iron Loss conditions in the iron loss study inherit
those settings.
MEMO When the iron loss analysis study is selected in the [Project Manager] tree, the linked mag-
netic field analysis study is also selected, and vice versa.
281
Operations
Duplicating Studies
• Duplicate Studies within the Same Models (page 282)
• Duplicate Studies Between Differing Models (page 282)
Duplicate Studies within the Same Models

A new study is created by duplicating an existing study.
MEMO The study type can be changed to one different from the existing study when duplicating. For
example, a magnetic field transient analysis study can be duplicated as a thermal transient state analysis
study. The conditions and materials may not be succeeded when changing the study type during
duplication.
1. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click the study to duplicate.

2. Select [Duplicate Study].
3. In the [Duplicate Study] dialog, set the parameters.
4. Click [OK].
Duplicate Studies Between Differing Models

A study can be duplicated between different models under the same project.
1. In the [Project Manager] tree, select the study.

2. Drag while holding down the [Ctrl] key on the keyboard.
3. Drop study to another model in the [Project Manager] tree.
282
Editing Studies with Results Included

The study cannot be edited when the study already has analysis results. The [Results Query] dialog
appears when the following operations are executed for the study that is locked.
• Add materials or conditions
• Change parameters such as materials, conditions, study properties, and mesh.
MEMO As an exception to the locking feature of the study, the table used in materials or conditions can
be edited. However, recalculation is not possible as long as results remain in the study even if the table is
edited. Delete the study results to calculate again.
MEMO The [Results Query] dialog is not displayed when values are additionally defined in the [Add
Case] dialog for parameters selected for parametric analysis or design variables for optimization.
Deleting Studies from Models

 Deleting one study
1. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click the study.

2. Select [Delete Study].
 Deleting multiple studies

Multiple studies can be deleted from models using the [Project Management] dialog.
1. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click the project.

2. Select [Manage Project].
The [Project Management] dialog is displayed. In the dialog list, the models and studies included
in the project are displayed in a tree.
For details on the [Project Management] dialog, see “Parameter Explanation Edition”.
3. Select the studies from the list.
Multiple studies can be selected by holding down the [Ctrl] key or [Shift] key and clicking on the
studies.
4. Click the delete button .
MEMO In some cases a message to confirm the deleting is displayed, in which case click [Yes] or
[No].
MEMO Since studies with text in the Analysis Group column in the list belong to an analysis group,
those studies cannot be deleted.
5. Click [OK].
The operations performed in the [Project Management] dialog are reflected in the [Project Man-
ager] tree.
283
Operations
284
Managing Studies
This chapter explains the procedure of the operation related to the study.

• Setting Study Properties (page 286)
• Exporting Studies to JCF Files (page 287)
• Merging Two Studies (page 290)
• Responding to Errors and Warnings that Occurred in the Study (page 291)
285
Operations
Setting Study Properties

Items able to be set as study properties include all items related to the entire analysis, such as analysis
time, the content of result file output, and the likes of calculation methods for time analysis. Study
properties can be set in the [Study Properties] dialog.

The [Study Properties] dialog is displayed.
By default, only the icons for required settings are displayed in the navigation bar.
To display the icons for the optional settings, select [Show Advanced Settings] at the bottom of
the [Study Properties] dialog.
MEMO The [Study Properties] dialog can also be opened by clicking the shortcut icon .
3. Click the navigation bar icon.
Clicking each icon displays a parameter setting panel.
The displayed parameters will differ depending on the analysis type. For details, see “Parameter
Explanation Edition.”
286
Managing Studies
Exporting Studies to JCF Files

Each case of the study is exported to an input JCF file for analysis.
JCF files can be commonly used in JMAG-Designer, JMAG-Scheduler, JMAG-Express, and JMAG-
Studio. 1 JCF file can contain data for 1 case.
MEMO A JCF file cannot be exported from an iron loss analysis study or transformer analysis study.
MEMO When the following functions are used in study, the mesh data JCF file cannot be exported:
• Adaptive Mesh
• [Generate Mesh at Each Step] in the [Mesh Properties] dialog (patch mesh function)
• Layered Mesh
• Multi-Layer Coating
• Extended Slide (used until V.18.0)
• Morphing
• Eccentricity function for Rotation Motion condition in magnetic field analysis
• [Use Strain Region] function of Residual Strain condition in magnetic field analysis and iron loss anal-
ysis
• Section analysis study
Export an Active Case

1. When exporting a geometry data JCF file, specify an option to decide whether to
perform preprocessing when exporting the JCF file.
The following processing is included in the preprocessing. All of this processing is performed for
mesh generation:
• 3D model:
Healing, checking for interference between parts, meshing edges and surfaces
• 2D model:
Editing the model shape to generate a mesh for residual strain when the Residual Strain con-
dition [Use Strain Region] is selected in magnetic field analysis
If mesh generation or analysis is executed using a geometry data JCF file that has not been pre-
processed, preprocessing will be executed during mesh generation or analysis.
At this time, if you execute mesh generation or analysis on the local machine, the JMAG-
Designer license will be used in the preprocessing phase. When performing mesh generation and
analysis on a remote machine, the JW_ACIS_REMOTE_MESH license is used in the prepro-
cessing process.
To perform preprocessing when exporting a geometry data JCF file, perform the following oper-
ations.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click the study.
ii. Select [Export JCF] > [Preprocess Model When Exporting Geometry JCF] and remove
the check mark on the left side of this command.
If the geometry JCF file is exported with the check mark removed in [Preprocess Model
When Exporting Geometry JCF], preprocessing will not be performed.
To check [Preprocess Model When Exporting Geometry JCF], select [Preprocess Model
When Exporting Geometry JCF] again.
287
Operations
2. Export the JCF file.

ii. Select [Export JCF].
iii. Select [Geometry Data], [Mesh Data], [Geometry Data (Contain Partial Mesh)], [2D
Geometry Data], [2D Mesh Data], or [2D Geometry Data (Contain Partial Mesh)].
• [Geometry Data]:
Exports a JCF file that contains geometry data.
• [Mesh Data]:
Exports a JCF file that includes mesh data.
• [Geometry Data (Contain Partial Mesh)]:
Exports a JCF file that contains both geometry data and mesh data.
• [2D Geometry Data]:
Exports a JCF file that contains 2D geometry data from the section analysis study.
• [2D Mesh Data]:
Exports a JCF file that contains 2D mesh data from the section analysis study.
• [2D Geometry Data (Contain Partial Mesh)]:
Exports a JCF file that contains both 2D geometry data and 2D mesh data from the sec-
tion analysis study.
MEMO [Geometry Data (Contain Partial Mesh)] and [2D Geometry Data (Contain Partial
Mesh)] can be selected when a study created under a model with mixed geometry (solids or
regions) and mesh is active.
iv. Specify a file name and the folder to save the file in the [Export Geometry JCF],
[Export Mesh JCF], or [Export Geometry JCF (Contain Partial Mesh)] dialog.
The file type is fixed to “JMAG Jcf file (.jcf )”.
v. Click [Save].
Export All Cases

1. When exporting a geometry data JCF file, specify an option to decide whether to per-
form preprocessing when exporting the JCF file.
See the description on “Export an Active Case” on page 287.
2. Export the JCF file.
ii. Select [Export JCF].
iii. Select [Geometry Data for All Cases], [Mesh Data for All Cases], [Geometry Data for
All Cases (Contain Partial Mesh)], [2D Geometry Data for All Cases], [2D Mesh Data
for All Cases], or [2D Geometry Data for All Cases (Contain Partial Mesh)].
• [Geometry Data for All Cases]:
Exports a JCF file that contains geometry data from each of all cases of the active study.
• [Mesh Data for All Cases]:
Export a JCF file that contains mesh data from each of all cases of the active study.
• [Geometry Data for All Cases (Contain Partial Mesh)]:
Exports a JCF file that contains both geometry data and mesh data from each of all cases
of the active study.
288
Managing Studies
• [2D Geometry Data for All Cases]:

Exports a JCF file that contains 2D geometry data from each of all cases of the active sec-
tion study.
• [2D Mesh Data for All Cases]:
Exports a JCF file that contains 2D mesh data from each of all cases of the active section
study.
• [2D Geometry Data for All Cases (Contain Partial Mesh)]:
Exports a JCF file that contains both 2D geometry data and 2D mesh data from each of
all cases of the active section study.
MEMO [Geometry Data for All Cases (Contain Partial Mesh)] and [2D Geometry Data for All
Cases (Contain Partial Mesh)] can be selected when a study created under a model with mixed
geometry (solid or region) and mesh is active.
iv. Set the parameters in the [Export JCF Files for All Cases] dialog.
v. Click [Save].
289
Operations
Merging Two Studies

Merge the input JCF file of another study into the active study.
MEMO The information to be merged will differ depending on the likes of study type and geometry.
For details, see “Parameter Explanation Edition”.
1. Export a JCF file in advance for the study that is set to be merged.
The model dimension (3D, 2D, axisymmetric) and type ((solid/region), mesh) need to be con-
sistent for the JCF file exported here and the study to be merged.
For details about exporting JCF files, see “Exporting Studies to JCF Files” on page 287.
3. Select [Merge JCF].
4. In the [Merge JCF] dialog, specify the JCF file in step 1 from the list.
5. Click [Open].
A new model and study is added in the [Project Manager] tree. The information for the geome-
try, material, condition, included in the JCF file selected in step 4. is added to the study.
290
Managing Studies
Responding to Errors and Warnings that Occurred in the Study

Errors or warning icons will be displayed in the [Model Manager] tree when an error or warning
occurs in model shape, condition setting, mesh generation. Messages are displayed when the cursor
is placed over an icon .
 Errors
If an error occurs, correct the analysis model as the message instructs. Errors are output in the fol-
lowing cases:
• Parameters set in models and geometry cause mesh generation to fail
• Materials and conditions are set incorrectly, causing the analysis to fail
• Some irregularity within the program occurs
 Warnings
If a warning is displayed, evaluate the effect that the area pertaining to the error message has on the
analysis results. Make corrections to the model if it can be determined that the effect is large.
If a warning during mesh generation is displayed, verify the generated mesh as well as the analysis
results. When noticeable deviations occur in magnetic flux density and current density distribution,
generate the mesh again.
Warnings are output in the following cases:
• The program makes changes to some parameters during mesh generation:
For details on creating geometry suitable for analysis, see “Parameter Explanation Edition”.
• The program performs corrections due to a value being referenced which exceeded the set param-
eter range during a calculation.
291
Operations
292
Material Settings
Material Database Operations
This chapter describes the operation procedure for materials database.

In JMAG, materials that can be used for analysis are stored in the centrally managed material database. The
materials in the material database are displayed in the [Materials] tab of the [Toolbox].

• Adding Material Data to the Material Database (page 296)
• Create New Materials (page 296)
• Duplicate Existing Materials (page 298)
• Export Materials Created with JMAG-Designer (page 298)
• Import Materials Created with JMAG-Designer (page 298)
• Import Materials Created with JMAG-Studio (page 298)
• Import User Magnetized Magnets (page 299)
• Import Material Data Output from ThyssenKrupp's PowerCore Explorer (page 300)
• Import the EMERF Material Database (page 300)
• Editing Materials (page 303)
• Deleting Materials (page 303)
• Sharing Material Data on the Network (page 304)
• Editing Materials That Have been Used in Analysis (Lock System) (page 305)
• Organizing the Material Databases (page 306)
• Synchronizing the Material Database File (page 307)
295
Operations
Adding Material Data to the Material Database

• Create New Materials (page 296)
• Duplicate Existing Materials (page 298)
• Export Materials Created with JMAG-Designer (page 298)
• Import Materials Created with JMAG-Designer (page 298)
• Import Materials Created with JMAG-Studio (page 298)
• Import User Magnetized Magnets (page 299)
• Import Material Data Output from ThyssenKrupp's PowerCore Explorer (page 300)
• Import the EMERF Material Database (page 300)
Create New Materials

A new material can be created and added to the material database.
 Selecting a material from the material list
1. Select and right-click the [Custom Materials] folder (or a sub folder) from the material
list in [Toolbox].
2. Select [Create New].
3. In the [Material Editor] dialog, enter the basic information of material.
• [Name]
• [Manufacturer]
• [Category]
4. Set properties for each material.
• [Magnetic Properties]
• [Electric Properties]
• [Mechanical Properties]
• [Thermal Properties]
• [Loss]
The property values used depend on the type of analysis. The material should only have the
property values required for the analysis to be performed.
Material properties that are available for each type of analysis are listed in the following table.
Properties indicated with a circle need to be set for each analysis.
MAG: magnetic field analysis, LS: iron loss analysis, HT: thermal analysis,
DS: structural analysis, EL: electric field analysis, HS: thermal stress analysis
MAG LS HT DS EL HS
Magnetic Properties O O*1 X X X X
Electric Electric Conductivity O*2 X X X O*2 X

Properties Relative Permittivity X X X O*3 O*3 X
296
MAG LS HT DS EL HS
Isotropic/ Anisotropic, Shear modulus,
Poisson's ratio, Young's modulus O*4 X X O X O
Density O*5 X O*5 O*5 X O*5

Mechanical
Properties
Magnetostriction type O*4 X X X X X
Thermal expansion, reference
X X X O X O
temperature
Piezo electric stress constant X X X O X X
Thermal Properties X X O X X O
Iron Loss O*6 O X X X X
*1
Hysteresis curve (BH symmetric loops) settings are necessary when selecting calculating hyster-
esis loss and iron loss in a magnetic field analysis.
*2
The magnetic field analysis supports constant values and temperature dependency. The electric
field analysis supports constant values, temperature dependency, electric field dependency, and
frequency dependency. The user subroutine “conusr” can be used in the magnetic field analy-
sis, and the user subroutine cndusr can be used in the electric field analysis.
*3 The electric field analysis supports constant values, electric field dependency, and frequency
dependency. The structural analysis supports constant values and component input.
*4
This specification is required when setting the Magnetostriction condition or the Centrifugal
Force Calculation condition in a magnetic field analysis.
*5 In magnetic field, structural and thermal stress analyses, only constant values are supported.
The temperature dependency and user subroutine is only supported by a thermal analysis.
*6
The loss properties need to be set when an Iron Loss condition is set in a magnetic field analy-
sis.
5. Enter the comment in the text box of [Notes] tab.

6. Click [OK] in the [Material Editor] dialog.
The materials that are created are registered in the [Custom Materials] folder of the materials list.
The materials that are created are registered in a sub folder when the sub folder from step 1 is
selected.
 Clicking the [Create New Material] button
1. Click [Create New Material] below the [Materials] list of [Toolbox].
The [Material Editor] dialog is displayed.

The following procedures are the same as step 3 in “Selecting a material from the material list”
on page 296.
297
Operations
Duplicate Existing Materials

New materials can be created by duplicating materials. Material databases provided by a manufac-
turer of materials can also be duplicated and not just custom materials.
1. On the materials list of [Toolbox], right-click a material and select [Duplicate].

The duplicated material is added to the [Custom Materials] folder. “copy” is added to the name
of the duplicated material.
MEMO A duplicated material can be edited by right-click the material from the [Custom Materials]
folder, and then selecting [Edit] from the menu. The [Material Editor] dialog is displayed.
Export Materials Created with JMAG-Designer

Exports custom materials to the material files (.xml) with any file names
1. When exporting the entire custom materials into one file, in the material list, right-click
the [Custom Materials] folder and select [Export All Materials].
When exporting only one material from [Custom Materials], right-click a material dis-
played in the lower hierarchy of the [Custom Materials] folder, and select [Export].
2. In the [Export all materials] or [Export material] dialog, set a file name and destination.
3. Click [Save].
Import Materials Created with JMAG-Designer

Material files (.xml) can be imported in JMAG-Designer.
1. In the material list of [Toolbox], select and right-click a folder.

2. Select [Import Material].
3. In the [Import Material] dialog, from the list, select [All User Material Files (.hb, .hbt,
.hbs, .hbp, .iron, .irons, .xml, .jcm, .txt)] or [User Material XML Files (.xml)].
4. Select the file with materials to import from the list, and then click [Open].
Import Materials Created with JMAG-Studio

The following files can be imported from the [User_Steel] folder and [User_Magnet] folder located
in the material database directory of JMAG-Studio.
• HB file (magnetic properties)
• HBP file (temperature-dependent and irreversible demagnetization properties)
• HBS file (stress-dependent magnetic properties)
• IRON file (iron loss characteristics)
• IRONS file (stress-dependent magnetic property, iron loss characteristics)
MEMO The files above can also be imported from the [Material Editor] dialog.
MEMO For the instructions on how to import materials at the installation of JMAG-Designer, see the
“JMAG Installation Manual.”
298
Import Materials Simultaneously
1. In the [Materials] list, right-click a folder.

2. Select [Import JMAG-Studio Materials].
The imported materials are added to the [Custom Materials] folder.
Import Materials Created Individually
1. In the [Materials] list, right-click a folder.

.hbs, .hbp, .iron, .irons, .xml, .jcm, .txt)] or [All User Material Files (.hb, .hbt, .hbs, .hbp)].
4. Select a file to import, and then click [Open].
The imported material is added to the [Custom Materials] folder.
MEMO The materials created with JMAG-Studio are stored in two folders, the installation folder of
JMAG-Studio and the [My Documents] folder.
Import User Magnetized Magnets

A user magnetized magnet is a magnet obtained from a magnetization analysis. A user magnetized
magnet has the geometry data of magnetized parts and the magnetization distribution.
After a magnetization analysis, a created magnetized material is automatically added to the [User
Magnetization] folder under [Permanent Magnet] in the material list of [Toolbox].
If magnetization analysis is performed in the background using JMAG-Scheduler or other software,
user magnetized magnets must be manually added to the [User Magnetization] folder. This section
describes the procedure.
MEMO For information about the magnetization analysis, see “Creating Magnets with User-Defined
Magnetization Distributions (Magnetic Field Analysis with Magnetization)” on page 327
1. Check that “(Magnetization analysis input JCF file name)_magnetized.jcf” is exported to

the calculation folder of the magnetization analysis.
The user magnetized magnet data is output in “(Magnetization analysis input JCF file
name)_magnetized.jcf”.
2. From the material list in [Toolbox], select and right-click the [User Magnetization] folder
(or a sub folder).
3. Select [Create New User Magnetized].
4. In the [Open File] dialog, select “(Magnetization analysis input JCF file name)_magne-
tized.jcf” and click [Open].
The data of the selected file is added to the [User Magnetization] folder under [Permanent Mag-
net] in the material list.
5. In the [User Magnetization] folder, right-click a user magnetized magnet.
6. Select [Edit].
7. Click the [Magnetic Properties] tab in the [Material Editor] dialog.
299
Operations
The following item is displayed:

• Magnetized material JCF file path:
The path “(Magnetization analysis input JCF file name)_magnetized.jcf” is displayed. This
path can be changed because a copy of the JCF file is created in the material database of
JMAG-Designer.
8. Click [OK].
Import Material Data Output from ThyssenKrupp's PowerCore Explorer

Material data that is exported from Powercore Explorer provided by an European steel manufac-
turer, ThyssenKrupp Co. can be used in JMAG-Designer.
 Notes
• Powercore Explorer is a tool supplied by ThyssenKrupp Co. only to loyal customers. Please con-
tact ThyssenKruopp Co. if you are considering of using the software.
• Material data output from PowerCore Explorer contains the following information. This infor-
mation can be confirmed in the Material Editor of JMAG-Designer.
• B-H Curve (magnetic properties)
• Loss Data (iron loss properties):
Files exported from PowerCore Explorer uses W/kg for units of loss. The unit is converted to
W/m3 when the file has been imported to JMAG-Designer.
• Expire Date
• Comment
• Density
• Temperature
 Procedure
1. Write a material data file (.txt, .jcm) from PowerCore Explorer.

2. In the material list of [Toolbox], select and right-click the [Custom Materials] folder.
.hbs, .hbp, .iron, .irons, .xml, .jcm, .txt)] or [JMAG Neutral Material Files (.jcm, .txt)].
5. Select the file of step 1 from the list, and click [Open].
Imported materials are added to the [Custom Materials] folder in the material list of the [Tool
box].
MEMO To check information of the imported material in JMAG-Designer, right-click the material
in the [Custom Materials] folder under the material list of the [Toolbox], and select [Edit]. The
Material Editor opens and information of materials in each tab are displayed.
Import the EMERF Material Database

The Electric Motor Education and Research Foundation (EMERF), part of the U.S. trade group A3
Motion Control & Motors, provides (non-free) data for general purpose electromagnetic steel sheets
used in motors.
300
Follow the following steps to use this data in JMAG-Designer:
1. Obtain the data from EMERF, and then install the data in your machine.
For information about how to obtain and install the data, contact EMERF at: https://www.auto-
mate.org/a3-content/emerf-foundation.
MEMO The Internet address of EMERF provided here is as of December 2022. The address is sub-
ject to change.
2. Open the Excel macro that is required to register the EMERF material database (LSTE).
The Excel macro is in the following folder:
(JMAG installation folder)\sample\scripts\MaterialDataConverter.xls
The default directory of JMAG-Designer is:

C:\Program Files\JMAG-Designer\samples\scripts\MaterialDataConverter.xls
3. Confirm the density of materials in the Excel macro.

The density data is not included in the EMERF material database. Check if the default value of
density is appropriate. The value of density is used to convert the unit of measurement for the
iron loss curve. The unit of measurement used for the iron loss data provided by EMERF is (W/
kg); JMAG uses (W/m3). The iron loss data needs to be converted to the appropriate value for
JMAG-Designer.
4. Click [Preferences].
5. Click next to [Input directory (LATE Data Files)], and then specify the folder where the
EMERF material data is saved.
The default directory of the EMERF material database (LSTE) is:
C:\LSTE\LSTE Data File
6. Click next to the [Output directory], and then specify the folder to save the magnetic
properties file (.hb) and iron loss file (.iron) that are exported by clicking [Export] in step
8.
The default directory is:
C:\Users\JMAG-Designer\Scripts\Sample\Material
7. Click [OK].
8. Click [Export].
A material data file that can be imported to JMAG-Designer is created based on the material data
file (.xls) provided by EMERF.
9. Click [Resister].
The material data file exported in step 8 is imported to JMAG-Designer.
The material data imported to JMAG-Designer is added to [Magnetic Steel Sheet] or [Soft Mag-
netic Composite] under [Soft Magnetic Material] in the [Materials] list.
The procedure to assign these materials to a part is the same for any other materials.
MEMO The security level setting is necessary in Microsoft Excel for the correct operation of the Excel
macro. However, the change made for the security level setting of the Excel macro may harm your
301
Operations
machine. The proper settings are required by complying with your company's or organization's security
policy.
MEMO If multiple magnetic properties data or iron loss properties data are included in the material data
file (.xls) of EMERF, each data is imported as different material data.
302
Editing Materials
Editing custom materials and user magnetized magnets.
 Procedures from the material list
1. For custom materials, click the [Custom Materials] folder from the material list in [Tool-
box].
For user magnetized magnets, click the [User Magnetization] folder from the material
list in [Toolbox].
The material data that is registered as custom materials or user magnetized magnets are listed.
2. Right-click the material to edit.
3. Select [Edit].
 Procedures from the [Project Manager]
1. Double-click the material listed under [Materials] in the [Project Manager] tree.
MEMO The material can also be edited if you right-click the material listed under [Materials] in the
Deleting Materials
Custom materials or user magnetized magnets can be deleted.
1. Click the [Custom Materials] folder in the materials list of [Toolbox] for custom materi-
als.
Click the [User Magnetization] folder in the material list of [Toolbox] for user magne-
tized magnets.
Material data registered as custom materials or user magnetized magnet is displayed.
2. Select and right-click the material to delete.
3. Select [Delete].
The selected material is deleted from the [Custom Materials] folder or the [User Magnetization]
folder.
303
Operations
Sharing Material Data on the Network

When placing database files in the shared network folder (UNC path), the material database can be
shared on multiple computers connected to the network.
MEMO Shared material database files are read-only, and materials displayed in the [Shared] folder can-
not be directly edited.
1. Prepare a material database file (.xml).

i. Create custom materials.
See “Create New Materials” on page 296
ii. Export the custom materials to custom material files (.xml).
Or copy the user material database file (usermaterial_***.xml) in the JMAG user
folder.
To export the material files, see “Export Materials Created with JMAG-Designer” on page
298.
For details about user material database files, see “Synchronizing the Material Database
File” on page 307.
2. Place a material database file (.xml) in the shared network folder (UNC path).
3. Set the material database file to refer from JMAG-Designer.
i. Select [Tools] > [Preferences] from the menu bar to open the [Preferences] dialog.
ii. Click [Materials] on the navigation bar.
iii. In the [Materials] setting panel, click [Browse] and set the material database file for
[Shared Material Database File].
iv. Click [OK].
The [Shared] folder will be displayed in the [Toolbox] material list and the material will be
added to the [Shared] folder .
304
Editing Materials That Have been Used in Analysis (Lock System)

Once the result file has been generated through analysis, the material used in the analysis will be
locked.
Click [OK] after editing the locked material in the {Material Editor] dialog, and the [Material
Change Query] dialog will appear, asking whether to unlock the material. Select either one of the
procedures depending on the objective.
• If [OK] is clicked, the edited material will be registered in the material list as a new material.
• If [Use Material] is clicked, the material will be unlocked and the edited properties will be
applied.
When the [Material Change Query] dialog closes, the [Results Query] dialog will appear. Please
execute one of the following operations.
• If [OK] is clicked, the result file of the current study will be deleted, and the edited material
will be applied.
• If [Duplicate Study] is clicked, the current study will be duplicated, and the edited material
will be applied.
• If [Cancel] is clicked, the current study will not be changed, and the changes to the material
will be deleted.
• If [Cancel] is clicked, the changes to the material will be deleted.
MEMO The [Use Material] button of the [Duplicate Material] dialog will only appear if the material
was edited in the [Project Manager] tree. It will not appear if it has been edited in the material list.
305
Operations
Organizing the Material Databases

The magnetization materials or other materials created in the [Material Editor] dialog, is registered
in the [Custom Materials] folder of the material list in [Toolbox] of JMAG-Designer. The materials
that are duplicated from existing materials or from materials provided by a manufacture of materials
are also registered to the [Custom Materials] folder.
The user magnetized magnets outputted after running a magnetization analysis are registered in the
[User Magnetization] folder of the materials list.
Materials can be organized by creating a sub folder in the [Custom Materials] folder and the [User
Magnetization] folder.
• Create Sub Folders (page 306)
• Modify Sub Folder Names (page 306)
• Delete Sub Folders (page 306)
• Move Material Data between Folders (page 307)
Create Sub Folders

Materials can be organized by creating sub folders in the [Custom Materials] folder and the [User
Magnetization] folder.
1. Select and right-click the [Custom Materials] folder and the [User Magnetization] folder
from the material list in [Toolbox].
2. Select [Create New Folder].
3. In the [Create Folder] dialog, specify a folder name in the [Folder Name] box.
4. Click [OK].
A sub folder is created in either the [Custom Materials] folder or the [User Magnetization]
folder.
MEMO The number of hierarchies that can be created in a sub folder of the [Custom Materials] or
the [User Magnetization] folder is five.
Modify Sub Folder Names

1. Right-click the folder that applies in the material list of [Toolbox].
2. Select [Rename].
3. In the [Rename Folder] dialog, specify a new folder name.
4. Click [OK].
The folder name is modified.
MEMO The [Custom Materials] folder and the [User Magnetization] folder cannot be renamed.
Delete Sub Folders

Right-click a folder and select [Delete] when deleting folders.
306
Move Material Data between Folders

Materials in the [Custom Materials] folder can be moved freely with sub folders by drag and drop.
This also applies for the [User Magnetization] folder.
Synchronizing the Material Database File

Change in the custom material is saved as a material database file (usermaterial_***.xml) by version
in “JMAG Designer” of the JMAG user folder, when closing JMAG-Designer.
Material database file in “JMAG Designer” of the JMAG user folder
When closing multiple instances of JMAG-Designer of the same version simultaneously, the
changes saved in the JMAG-Designer custom material database closed last will overwrite the JMAG-
Designer material database that were closed earlier.
With the following procedures, each custom material of JMAG-Designer (1) and JMAG-Designer
(2) which were simultaneously launched can be merged in a material data file and synced.
1. Right-click the [Custom Materials] folder in the material list of [Toolbox] of JMAG-
Designer (1), to select [Synchronize Material Database File] from the menu.
The [Synchronize Materials] dialog notifying the changes in the custom material of JMAG-
Designer (1) have been saved to the material database file will be displayed.
2. Use the same procedure for JMAG-Designer (2) and select [Synchronize Material Data-
base File].
The material database file will be loaded and the [Synchronize Materials] dialog notifying that
the custom materials have been updated in JMAG-Designer (2) will be displayed. If the update
will delete custom materials, a dialog confirming the delete will be displayed.
MEMO Synchronization function of material database file does not support the undo function.
MEMO Materials in the material database file that will be synced are the custom materials and the user
magnetized magnets.
307
Operations
308
Applying Materials to Parts
This chapter explains the procedures related to applying materials from the material database to a part.

• Checking Material Properties (page 310)
• Selecting Materials (page 311)
• Bookmarking (page 313)
• Applying Materials to Parts (page 314)
• Applying Materials to Elements (page 317)
• Changing Materials (page 319)
• Duplicating Materials Between Different Models or Studies (page 319)
309
Operations
Checking Material Properties

The properties of the materials registered in the database can be viewed as follows:
1. Right-click a material in the [Materials] list.

MEMO A material can also be selected from the following locations.
• The material list under [Parts] in the [Project Manager] tree
• The material list under [Materials] in the [Project Manager] tree
2. Select [Details] if a material is provided by a manufacture.
Select [Edit] if a material is created by a user.
The properties of the selected material are displayed in the [Material Editor] dialog.
• [Magnetic Properties] tab:
The magnetic properties of the selected material are displayed.
To enlarge a part of a graph, press and drag an area on the graph.
To display an entire graph, click on the top right of the graph.
Clicking displays the [Graph Properties] dialog. The graph display preferences can be set.
• Axis Range:
The range of X-axis and Y-axis to display can be specified. If the [Default Min] and
[Default Max] are cleared, the minimum value and maximum value can be specified in
each text box.
• [Grid Line]:
The major and minor grid line can be displayed or hidden.
• Grid Line at X=0 or Y=0:
If the [Draw line at X=0] or [Draw line at Y=0] is selected, a grid line at X=0 or Y=0 is dis-
played.
• [Electric Properties] tab:
Displays the electrical properties of the selected material.
• [Mechanical Properties] tab:
Displays the mechanical properties of the selected material.
• [Thermal Properties] tab:
Displays the thermal properties of the selected material.
• [Loss] tab:
Displays the iron loss data of the selected material.
• [Notes] tab:
Displays special remarks for the selected material if any.
3. Click [Close] for the material provided by manufactures.
Click [OK] for the material created by a user after modifying the settings in each tab.
310
Selecting Materials
Materials can be selected from the [Materials] list in [Toolbox] of JMAG-Designer. The following
procedure is used to search for specific materials.
• Search for Materials (page 311)
• Select a Categories and Display Materials (page 311)
Search for Materials

Materials can be displayed by specifying part of a material name in the [Look For] box.
Specify a name of a manufacture of materials in the [Look For] box, when displaying only materials
by specific manufactures.
Select a Categories and Display Materials

Materials are divided into different categories and displayed in the [Materials] list. The sub categories
such as composition of materials and manufactures of materials may be included based on categories.
Click of the category with the specified material. The category and materials that are included are
displayed.
MEMO Branching hierarchies and collapsing hierarchies can be set by using the arrow keys on the key-
board.
The following categories are available:
• [Temporary]:
If a material used in the project that is loaded has not been added to the material database, the
material is added to the [Temporary] folder.
To use a material in the [Temporary] folder for another project, move the material to the [Cus-
tom Materials] folder.
• [Bookmarks]:
The bookmarked materials are listed.
For how to add a material to the [Bookmarks] folder, see“Bookmarking” on page 313
• [Custom Materials]:
The materials that are created or moved from the [Temporary] folder are listed.
• [Ambient]:
The material “Air” is displayed.
• [Permanent Magnet]:
Sintered NdFeB or ferrite magnets are displayed.
311
Operations
• [User Magnetization]:
user magnetized magnet outputted after running a magnetization analysis is displayed.
• [Soft Magnetic Material]
Materials such as magnetic steel sheet and soft magnetic composite are displayed.
• [Conductor]:
Reference materials provided by JSOL such as aluminum and copper are displayed.
• [Insulation]:
Plastic materials are displayed.
MEMO By mousing over each material data displayed in the material tree, a description of each material
data is displayed. When materials have no description set, nothing is shown.
MEMO Material data such as electric properties and thermal properties that are provided by manufac-
turers of materials cannot be modified. However, electric properties and thermal properties can be modi-
fied if they are duplicated (some parameters cannot be modified). For details about duplicating materials,
see “Duplicate Existing Materials” on page 298.
MEMO For detailed information about the materials provided by manufacturers, contact the manufac-
turer of the material. See “Parameter Explanation Edition” for contact information on each manufacturer
of materials.
312
Bookmarking
The materials that are often used can be bookmarked. The bookmark feature improves the conve-
nience of users.
• Bookmark a Material (page 313)
• Remove a Material from Bookmarks (page 313)
MEMO Adding or deleting materials to or from the [Bookmark] folder does not affect the material data-
base.
Bookmark a Material
1. Right-click a material to bookmark in the [Materials] list.
MEMO A material to bookmark can be selected from the following locations:
2. Select [Add to Bookmarks].
The selected material is added to the [Bookmarks] folder.
3. Check that the selected material is added to the [Bookmarks] folder in the [Materials]
list. Click the + mark at the [Bookmarks] folder.
The added material is displayed under [Bookmarks].
Remove a Material from Bookmarks

1. Right-click a material to remove from [Bookmarks].
MEMO A material to remove from the [Bookmarks] folder can be selected from the following loca-
tions.
• The [Materials] list of [Toolbox]
2. Select [Remove from Bookmarks].
The selected material is removed from the [Bookmarks] folder.
313
Operations

Apply material to a part. The following three methods are available.
• Apply Materials to Parts (page 314)
• Apply a Material to Part in the [Project Manager] tree (page 315)
• Apply a Material Under [Materials] in the [Project Manager] tree to Parts (page 315)
• Apply a Material to Multiple Parts (page 316)
MEMO Magnets cannot be used in a magnetic field frequency analysis.
Apply Materials to Parts

1. From the [Materials] list, select a material.
2. Drag the selected material to a part in the graphics window.

The outline of the part is highlighted in red. When the part is grouped, all part outlines in the
same group are high-lighted in red.
3. Drop the material (Release the mouse button).
When the material is dropped onto a part that is grouped, the same material is applied to all
parts within that group.
Drop the material onto a part and the material properties setting panel is displayed.
5. Click [OK].
The material set to a part is displayed under [Part] in the tree. Right-clicking will display
[Details], [Suppress Part], [Properties], [Move to custom], [Add to Bookmarks] and [Remove
from Bookmarks] as commands. Select [Details] and the Material Editor is displayed.
The material applied to a part is added beneath [Materials]. Right-clicking will display [Details],
[Apply to Selected], [Delete], [Add to Bookmarks] and [Remove from Bookmarks] as com-
mands. Select [Details] and the Material Editor is displayed.
314
Apply a Material to Part in the [Project Manager] tree

2. Drag the selected material to a part under [Parts] in the [Project Manager] tree.
3. Release the mouse button.

The setting panel of material properties is displayed.
The following procedures are the same as “Apply Materials to Parts” on page 314.
Apply a Material Under [Materials] in the [Project Manager] tree to Parts

The same material can be assigned for multiple parts.

2. Drag the selected material to [Materials] under a study in the [Project Manager] tree.
315
Operations

The material is added to [Materials] under [Study] in the [Project Manager] tree.
4. Select [Select] and [Select Part] .

5. In the graphics window, click a part.
The part is highlighted.
MEMO To select multiple parts, click each part in the graphics window while pressing and holding
the [Shift] or [Ctrl] key.
6. Under [Materials] in the [Project Manager] tree, right-click the material.
7. Select [Apply to Selected].
The setting panel of material properties is displayed.
The following procedures are the same as “Apply Materials to Parts” on page 314.
Apply a Material to Multiple Parts

2. Drag the selected material to [Materials] under a study in the [Project Manager] tree.
3. Do one of the following.
• Select parts from the graphics window. Next, right-click a material displayed under [Materi-
als] in the [Project Manager] tree, and select [Apply to Selected].
• Select multiple parts in the [Project Manager] tree, right-click the selected parts to select
[Apply Material], then select a material from a list. Each material displayed in [Materials] in
the [Project Manager] tree can be selected from the menu.
316
Applying Materials to Elements

Materials can be applied to parts in an undivided mesh model. The following methods are available.
• The element group function in JMAG-Designer can be used to divide a mesh model into parts
and apply materials to them.
• The [Split Mesh Block] function in Geometry Editor can be used to divide a mesh model into
parts, after which the model can be imported into JMAG-Designer and materials can be applied
to the parts.
This section presents the procedure for using the element group function.
MEMO Magnets cannot be used in magnetic field frequency analysis.
1. Creating an element group for each part.

i. In the [Project Manager] tree, under [Mesh], right-click [Group].
ii. Select [New Element Group].
iii. In the [Element Group] setting panel, enter a group name in the [Title] box.
iv. In the graphics window, select the elements that make up one part.
Before selecting an element, click [Selection] to switch modes, making it easier to select addi-
tional elements.
When an element is selected, the number of selected elements is displayed in the [Element
Group] setting panel.
v. Select [Set parts].
An element group for which [Set parts] is selected is treated as one part.
vi. When treating as a new part, select [Create New Part] from the [Part] list and enter a
name in the [Part name] box.
When replacing an existing part, select the part to replace from the [Part] list.
vii.Click [OK].
An element group is created. The created element group is added under [Parts] and under
[Mesh] > [Group].
viii.Repeat the above procedure for each part.
317
Operations
2. Check that there are no elements in more than one element group.
An element cannot be added to more than one element group that is treated as a part.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, under [Mesh], right-click [Group].
ii. Select [Element Parts Duplication Check].
iii. In the [Element Parts Duplication Check] dialog, click [Check].
When the check is completed, the IDs for elements belonging to multiple element groups
and those element group names are displayed in a table. Clicking an element ID highlights
the element with that ID in the graphics window.
Check the table, and if necessary, correct the element group settings.
3. Apply a material to the element group displayed under [Parts].
See the “Applying Materials to Parts” on page 314.
318
Changing Materials
The material assigned for the part can be changed.
MEMO For studies in which results have already been exported, the study is locked when attempting to
modify the material. See “Editing Studies with Results Included” on page 283.
1. Press and drag a new material from the [Materials] list to the part where a material is
already set.
The [Material] setting panel or [Permanent Magnet] setting panel is displayed.
3. Click [OK].
The new material assigned for the part is displayed in the [Project Manager] tree.
Duplicating Materials Between Different Models or Studies

Materials set for different models and studies within the same project can be duplicated.
1. Use Ctrl-Click to select a material under [Material] in the [Project Manager] tree.
2. Drag the selected material while holding down a left button of the mouse and the [Ctrl]
on the keyboard.
An arrow is displayed on the lower right of the pointer.
3. Drop the material into another study in the tree.
The selected material is duplicated where it is dropped.
319
Operations
320
Setting Magnet Magnetization Distributions
This chapter explains the procedure for setting the magnetization distribution of a magnet. In JMAG, the mag-
netization distribution of a magnet can be defined in the following way.

• Setting Fixed Pattern Magnetization Distributions (page 322)
• Setting Magnetization Distributions of User-Defined Patterns (page 324)
• Creating Magnets with User-Defined Magnetization Distributions (Magnetic Field Analysis with Magnetiza-
tion) (page 327)
321
Operations
Setting Fixed Pattern Magnetization Distributions

1. Create permanent magnet data and register in the material database.
See “Applying Materials to Parts” on page 309.
This is not necessary when using material data provided by the material manufacturer.
2. Prepare the model and create a study.
With no study created, materials cannot be set for parts.
3. Apply magnet to parts.
i. Click the [Materials] tab in [Toolbox].
ii. Under the [Materials] tab, select a magnet.
iii. Drag and drop the magnet onto a part.
The [Permanent Magnet] setting panel is displayed.
MEMO There are other procedures as well for setting materials for parts. See “Applying Materi-
als to Parts” on page 309.
4. When considering changes in magnetization properties due to temperature in the analy-
sis, select a method for specifying the magnet temperature from [Temperature].
5. Select the magnetization pattern to be applied to the magnet and define the magnetiza-
tion direction.
There the following patterns are available:
• [Parallel Anisotropic Pattern]
• [Radial Anisotropic Pattern]
• [Circumferential Anisotropic Pattern]
• [Spherical Anisotropic Pattern]
• [Parallel Pattern (Circular Direction)]
• [Parallel Pattern (Circular Any Direction)]
• [Radial Pattern (Circular Direction)]
• [Radial Pattern (Circular Any Radial Direction)]
• [Polar Anisotropic Pattern (Circular Direction)]
• [Axial Pattern (Circular Direction)]
• [Axial Polar Anisotropic Pattern (Circular Direction)]
• [Sinusoidal Radial Pattern (Circular Direction)]
• [Sinusoidal Parallel Pattern (Circular Direction)]
• [Sinusoidal Axial Pattern (Circular Direction)]
• [Parallel Pattern (Rectilinear)]
• [Polar Pattern (Rectilinear)]
• [Sinusoidal Parallel Pattern (Rectilinear)]
6. If necessary, set parameters for skew magnetization.
Skew magnetization can be specified when the following magnetization pattern is selected.
• [Parallel Anisotropic Pattern]
322
• [Parallel Pattern (Circular Direction)]

• [Parallel Pattern (Circular Any Direction)]
• [Radial Pattern (Circular Direction)]
• [Polar Anisotropic Pattern (Circular Direction)]
• [Parallel Pattern (Rectilinear)]
• [Polar Pattern (Rectilinear)]
7. If necessary, set the magnetic properties correction values.
8. Set parameters such as [Electric Properties].
9. Click [OK] on the [Permanent Magnet] setting panel.
323
Operations
Setting Magnetization Distributions of User-Defined Patterns

1. If necessary, create permanent magnet data and register in the material database.
See “Applying Materials to Parts” on page 309.
This is not necessary when using material data provided by the material manufacturer.
2. Prepare the model and create a study.
With no study created, materials cannot be set for parts.
3. Apply magnet to parts.
ii. Under the [Materials] tab, select a magnet.
iii. Drag and drop the magnet onto a part.
The [Permanent Magnet] setting panel is displayed.
MEMO There are other procedures as well for setting materials for parts. See“Applying Materials
to Parts” on page 309.
4. When considering changes in magnetization properties due to temperature in the analy-
sis, select a method for specifying the magnet temperature from [Temperature].
5. Select a any magnetization pattern from [Magnetization Pattern].
There the following patterns are available. Select one of them according to the magnet geometry.
• [Any Specified Rectangular]
• [Any Specified Rectangular (Temperature)]
• [Any Specified Cylindrical]
• [Any Specified Cylindrical (Temperature)]
6. Set the geometry of the magnet.
• Rectangular solid:
[Rectangular Width], [Rectangular Thickness], [Rectangular Height]
• Cylindrical body:
[Cylinder Outer Radius], [Cylinder Angle], [Cylinder Height]
MEMO [Cylinder Height] is set only a for 3D model.
MEMO Use the geometry measurement tool. Select [View] > [Measurement] from the menu bar to
start the geometry measurement tool.
7. Set the coordinate system to use when specifying the magnetization direction.
• Rectangular solid:
Set a rectangular coordinate system (X-axis: magnet width direction, Y-axis: magnet thickness
direction, Z-axis: magnet height direction).
• [Axis Direction] (rectangular coordinate system Z-axis direction)
• [Point on Axis] (rectangular coordinate system origin)
• [Reference Axis Direction] (rectangular coordinate system X-axis direction)
• Cylindrical body:
Set a cylindrical coordinate system (R: magnet radial direction, Theta: magnet circumferen-
tial direction, Z-axis: magnet height direction).
• [Axis Direction] (cylindrical coordinate system Z-axis direction)
324
• [Point on Axis] (cylindrical coordinate system origin)

• [Reference Axis Direction] (cylindrical coordinate system radial direction)
MEMO The magnetization direction of the magnet is specified by the angle from the reference
axis. The counterclockwise direction is the positive direction.
8. Set the magnetization direction table.
Using the table, set the magnetization direction of each coordinate point.
i. Click [Edit] in [Magnetization Direction Table] under [Magnetization Direction Speci-
fied] to open the [Edit Point Sequence] dialog.
ii. In the [Title] box, enter the title of the table.
The text entered here will be displayed in [Magnetization Direction Table] on the [Permanent
Magnet] setting panel.
iii. In the [Zl] box, enter the height for the magnetization direction table being defined.
The coordinate axes must be normalized so that the value entered in [Magnet Shape] corre-
sponds to 1.0 on each axis.
iv. For rectangular solids enter coordinates for [XI] and [YI] in the table, and for cylin-
ders enter coordinates for [RI] and [θl] in the table. In either case the first coordinate
is for the coordinate system's first axis (reference axis) and the second coordinate is
for the coordinate systems's second axis.
The coordinate axes must be normalized so that the value entered in [Magnet Shape] corre-
sponds to 1.0 on each axis.
Enter the coordinate axis values in ascending order.
v. Set the magnetization direction at each coordinate point as the angle from the refer-
ence axis.
The counterclockwise direction is the positive direction.
vi. Click [Add] to add the table to the study.
325
Operations
vii.Repeat steps iii - vi. to register as many tables needed but no more.
Make sure the number of coordinates (number of rows and number of columns) at each
height (ZI) are the same.
To edit an existing table, select it from [Table].
To delete a table, select it in [Table], then click [Delete].
viii.Click [OK].
9. If necessary, set the magnetic properties correction values.
The method of creating the [Residual Flux Density (Distribution)] table or the [Coercive Force
(Distribution)] table is the same as for the magnetization direction table.
10.Set parameters such as [Electric Properties].
11.Click [OK] on the [Permanent Magnet] setting panel.
12.Set the coercive force output.
With this setting, you can check the coercive force when using any magnetization pattern.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click [Study] and select [Properties].
ii. In the [Study Properties] dialog, select [Show Advanced Settings].
iii. Click [Output] in the navigation bar to open the [Output Control] setting panel.
iv. Select [Coercive Force (Normalized)] in [Output Results].
v. Click [OK].
326
Creating Magnets with User-Defined Magnetization Distributions

(Magnetic Field Analysis with Magnetization)
To use a magnet with a magnetization distribution close to that of the actual machine, instead of a
magnet with a simplified magnetization distribution, run the following two-step analysis:
• (1) Magnetic field analysis to magnetize magnet material (magnetization analysis):
Create magnet materials for magnetization analysis and apply them to the parts to be magne-
tized. After the analysis, a magnet with the geometry of the magnetized part and the magnetiza-
tion distribution data within that part is created.
• (2) Magnetic field analysis using magnets created from magnetization analysis:
Analysis is run using magnets created by analysis in (1).
Magnet material for magnetization analysis is called “magnetization material”. A magnet with user-
specified magnetization distribution obtained from magnetization analysis are called “user magne-
tized magnet”.
In magnetization analysis, not only magnetization materials but also user magnetized magnets can
be used. The magnetization distribution of the user magnetized magnet with the [Treat as Magneti-
zation Material] option selected is affected by the second and subsequent magnetization analysis of
the magnetization power source and updated (multiple magnetizations).
• Example-1: Accounting for demagnetization caused by external demagnetizing fields applied
during magnetization analysis
• Example-2: Accounting for self-demagnetization when taking the magnet out into the air after
magnetization (multiple magnetization)
Notes
 Magnetization analysis
• Eddy currents can be accounted for in magnetization analysis.
• Multi Slice conditions cannot be used in magnetization analysis.
327
Operations
• Magnetic field analysis studies for magnetization analysis cannot be coupled with another analy-
sis study.
• In magnetization analysis, even if multiple magnetization materials are used, only one user mag-
netized magnet is created. The magnetization distribution data of all parts that are applied with
magnetization material are included in one user magnetized magnet.
Even if a magnetization analysis that uses both magnetization material and user magnetized
material enabled with the [Treat as Magnetization Material] option, only one user magnetized
magnet is created.
• The orientation of the magnetization material can be defined using magnetization patterns or
the results of magnetic field analysis. A magnetic field analysis to obtain orientation data is called
“orientation analysis”.
• When [Account for Hysteresis During Magnetization] is selected, the magnetic hysteresis of the
magnetization material is accounted for in the analysis. For details on the movement of the oper-
ating point in this case, refer to the “Parameter Explanation Edition”.
Multiple magnetization
• The following settings are required when performing multiple magnetization on magnet mate-
rial:
• First magnetization analysis (use magnetization material):
Select [Account for Hysteresis During Magnetization] in the [Magnetization Material] setting
panel.
• Second and subsequent magnetization analysis (use the user magnetized magnet created in
the first magnetization analysis):
Select [Take Over Operating Point] and [Treat as Magnetization Material] in [Operating
Point Setting] of the [Magnetization Material] setting panel.
• In a magnetization analysis using user magnetized magnets enabled with the [Treat as Magnetiza-
tion Material] option, [Generate Mesh at Each Step] (patch mesh function) cannot be used.
 Magnetic field analysis with user magnetized magnets (magnetization analysis

using user magnetized magnets enabled with the [Treat as Magnetized Magnet]
option)
• Use mesh that is the same or as fine as the magnetization analysis model. A large difference in the
meshes used in the two analyses will reduce the accuracy of calculation.
• In the magnetic field analysis with user magnetized magnet, Multi Slice conditions can be used.
 Constraints on magnet geometry in magnetic field analysis with magnetization

Note the following when creating magnet geometry:
• Orientation data obtained from orientation analysis cannot be expanded nor moved.
Therefore, make sure the geometry and position of parts to which soft magnetic materials are
applied and parts to which magnetization materials are applied are matching.
• Magnetization distribution data of the user magnetized magnet cannot be expanded.
Therefore, match the geometry of parts to which magnetization material is applied with the
geometry of parts to which user magnetized magnet is applied. Also, make the parts to which
user magnetized magnets are applied one size smaller than the parts to which magnetization
material is applied. If you want to move the magnetization distribution data in the user magne-
tized magnet, set the transfer table.
328
The following is an example. In analysis 1) and 2), the geometry and position of the green part must
match. In analysis 2), 3), and 4), the geometry of the green parts must match or must grow smaller
in each step.
Magnetization analysis
Process of Running Magnetic Field Analysis with Magnetization
 Preparation stage
• A magnetization material with anisotropy has an orientation. An orientation can be set either
using a magnetization pattern or referencing the orientation analysis results.
If referencing the results of an orientation analysis, an orientation analysis is necessary before a
magnetization analysis.
 Step 1: Magnetic field analysis to magnetize magnetic material (magnetization

analysis)
1. Prepare a model that includes the magnetizing coil or yoke that generates the magnetiz-
ing field and the parts to be magnetized.
2. Create a magnetic field analysis study.
3. Create a magnetization material in the Material Editor.
i. Select [Tools] > [Material Editor] from the JMAG-Designer menu bar to open the
[Material Editor] dialog.
ii. Enter a name for the magnetization material in [Name].
iii. Select [Magnetization] in [Material Type] in the [Magnetic Properties] tab.
iv. Set the property values of magnetization materials.
v. Click [OK] to add the magnetization material to the material database.
4. Apply the created magnetization material to the part to be magnetized.
329
Operations
ii. Select the magnetization material you created from the [Custom Materials] folder
and drag and drop it onto the part to be magnetized.
There are other procedures for setting materials on parts. See “Applying Materials to Parts”
on page 309.
iii. Set the parameters in the [Magnetization Material] setting panel.
When magnetizing magnetization materials multiple times, select [Account for Hysteresis
During Magnetization].
iv. Click [OK] to close the [Magnetization Material] setting panel.
5. Set the magnetization power supply using Current conditions and FEM Coil conditions.
6. Set other analysis conditions and materials, and/or generate mesh.
7. Run the magnetization analysis.
If a magnetization analysis is performed in the foreground, the user magnetized magnet will be
added to the [User Magnetization] folder in the [Materials] tab of JMAG-Designer's [Toolbox]
after the analysis.
• The user magnetized magnet contains magnetization distribution data calculated from the
magnetization magnetic field and magnetization properties of the magnetization material, as
well as magnet geometry information.
• The user magnetized magnet has the same name as the magnetization analysis study.
• The magnetization ratio of user magnetized magnets can be checked as an analysis result of a
magnetic field analysis study using them, but not as an analysis result of a magnetization anal-
ysis study.
8. If a magnetization analysis is performed in the background, import user magnetized
magnet into JMAG-Designer.
In the following cases, user magnetized magnets must be manually added to the [User Magneti-
zation] folder in the [Materials] tab of the [Toolbox]:
• When a magnetizing analysis is run in batch
• When a magnetization analysis study is run from JMAG-Scheduler
See “Import User Magnetized Magnets” on page 299.
9. If necessary, use the created user magnetized magnet and run magnetization analysis
once more.
When re-magnetizing the user magnetized magnet and updating the magnetization distribution
data, create the following settings in the [Magnetization Material] setting panel:
• Select [Take Over Operating Point] and [Treat as Magnetization Material] in [Operating
Point Setting].
• Select [Anisotropic] from [Permeability Type].
 Step 2: Analysis using the magnetized magnetic material (magnet)
1. Prepare a model to be analyzed.

Note the points described in “Constraints on magnet geometry in magnetic field analysis with
magnetization” on page 328.
2. Create a magnetic field analysis study.
330
3. Apply user magnetized magnet to magnet parts.

ii. Select the user magnetized magnet from the [User Magnetization] folder.
iii. Drag and drop the user magnetized magnet onto a magnet part.
iv. Set parameters in the [Magnetization Material] setting panel.
When the user magnetized magnet is not re-magnetized, create the following settings:
• Select [Take Over Operating Point] and [Treat as Magnetized Magnet] in [Operating
Point Setting].
v. Click [OK] to close the [Magnetization Material] setting panel.
4. Set the initial magnetization output.
With this setting, the initial magnetization can be checked as magnetization analysis results. Fur-
thermore, by using the user component function, the magnetic flux density in the initial magne-
tization direction M 0 and the magnetic field results can be checked.

iii. Click [Output] in the navigation bar to open the [Output Control] setting panel.
iv. Select [Initial Magnetization] in [Output Results].
v. Click [OK].
5. Make settings to check the magnetization ratio of user magnetized magnets.
If [Do Not Use], [Magnetization Ratio], or [Magnetization Ratio/Recoil Relative Permeability]
was selected in [Magnetization Ratio Type] for a magnetization material, you can check the mag-
netization ratio of user magnetized magnet created based on that material.
The following settings are required to check the magnetization ratio of user magnetized magnets:
• Leave [Magnetization Ratio] selected under [Control of Distribution] in the [Output Con-
trol] setting panel of the [Study Properties] dialog. ([Magnetization Ratio] is selected by
default).
• For transient analysis, do not set distribution of the first step as non-output in [Control of
Output Interval] in the [Output Control] setting panel. This is because the magnetization
ratio distribution can only be displayed in the first step.
6. Set other analysis conditions and materials, and/or generate a mesh.
7. Run the analysis.
Magnetic field analysis with user magnetized magnets can also be performed using remote
machines.
8. Check the magnetization ratio of user magnetized magnets.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click [Results] under [Study], and select [New
Contour Plot].
ii. In the [Contour Plot] setting panel, select [Magnetization Ratio] in [Result Type].
iii. Click [OK] to close the [Contour Plot] setting panel.
331
Operations
iv. Check that the first step is specified in the [Step Control] slider.
v. Click both [View Mesh Geometry] (or [View Mesh] ) and [Display Contour
Result] to display a contour plot of the magnetization ratio.
332
Using Superconductors
This chapter describes the procedure for conducting analysis with superconductor.
IMPORTANT Analyses using superconductors cannot be run from the GUI.

• Notes (page 334)
• Process of Running Magnetic Field Analyses Using Superconductors (page 335)
333
Operations
Notes
• Superconductors can be used in a 3D transient analysis.
• [Successive Iteration] is used regardless of the settings of the nonlinear calculation method in an
analysis dealing with superconductors.
• [Allow Eddy Current] is used regardless of the settings of the method to account for the eddy
current in an analysis dealing with superconductors.
• Specify the element size for the superconductor to a similar size or half the size of skin depth.
The skin depth can be calculated from the maximum amount of electric conductivity, relative
permeability in a conductor, and the frequency from an input current.
δ : Skin depth (m), ω = 2πf : Angular frequency ( f : frequency (Hz)),

σ : Electric conductivity (1/ohm), μ : Permeability (H/m)
The discontinuity unique to a superconductor may not be calculated, if the element size is too
small for skin depth. However, the calculation accuracy may decrease if the element size is too
large.
334
Using Superconductors
Process of Running Magnetic Field Analyses Using Superconductors

1. Create a project in JMAG-Designer.
2. Create a FEM model.
Prepare a 3D geometry to create a transient study, and then set the materials, conditions, mesh,
and circuit.
• Specify the entire items that are needed to run an analysis for materials specified for a super-
conductor, with the exception of the [Electric Properties] tab of the [Material Editor] dialog.
• Successive iterations is used on nonlinear iterative calculation in an analysis using supercon-
ductors. Select [Successive] in [Nonlinear Calculation] of the [Study Properties]. Specify also
the [Maximum Nonlinear Iterations] to a value in the hundred-digits and [Convergence Tol-
erance] to around “1e-5.”
• Write down the part ID for the superconductor as a memo for future reference. If there are
multiple IDs specified, all IDs need to be used for future reference.
The part ID is displayed in the window by selecting [View] > [ID] > [Part] from the JMAG-
Designer menu bar. The number displayed in the bracket next to the part name is the part
ID.
MEMO Part ID is used in step 4 that is described later.
3. Confirm the data, and then export the FEM model to a JCF file.
Output a mesh model or a geometry model based on whether or not there is mesh.
4. Specify the characteristics of a superconductor in the JCF file from step 3, using the edit-
ing function (SimpleFHI) of a JCF file.
The characteristics of a superconductor cannot be set in the JMAG-Designer window, where the
editing function (SimpleFHI) for JCF files needs to be used.
The following procedure needs to be specified:
i. Set the Windows environment variable “PATH”.
For details about detailed setting methods of environment variables, see “Overview Edition”.
• Variable name: PATH
• Variable value: The full path of the installation folder of JMAG. When JMAG-Designer is
installed with the default settings, it will be “C:\Program Files\JMAG-Designer22.2.”
ii. Open a sample file (.xls) to specify settings for a superconductor.
The sample file is in the following folder.
(JMAG installation folder)\Tools\SimpleFHI\samples\ExcelVBA
The sample folder is installed in the following folder if JMAG-Designer is installed by default
settings.
C:\Program Files\JMAG-Designer22.2\Tools\SimpleFHI\samples\ExcelVBA
iii. Specify the path of the JCF file exported in step 3 in [Input JCF].
iv. Specify a parameter for the superconductor.
• Part ID:
Specify the part ID of the superconductor set in step 2.
MEMO The part ID in JMAG-Designer matches with the material ID in a JCF file. It should
be noted when editing JCF files using SimpleFHI.
335
Operations
• Electric properties type:

[3]: Bean model, [4]: I-V model, [5]: User-defined model
• Initial electric conductivity [S/m]
• Maximum electric conductivity [S/m]
• n value in I-V model
• Isotropy or anisotropy for electric conductivity:
[0]: Isotropic, [Negative Integer]: Anisotropic (user subroutine (conusr is used))
• Critical current density type:
[0]: Critical current density is linear
[1]: Critical current density has a magnetic flux density dependency, and the magnetic
flux density to be referenced is the specified direction component
[2]: Critical current density has a magnetic flux density dependency, and the magnetic
flux density to be referenced is an absolute value.
[1] and [2] can be selected when the electric properties type is [3] or [4].
• Critical current density (constant value) (A/m2):
Specify when critical current density type is [0].
• Critical current density (Magnetic flux density dependency) (A/m2):
Specify when the critical current density type is [1] or [2]. Specify the path for the CSV
file containing a magnetic flux density- critical current density table (Jc-B table).
• Unit direction component of reference magnetic flux density (x, y, z):
Specify when the critical current density type is [1]. The default value is (1, 0, 0).
v. Click [Export].
The characteristics of a superconductor can be set in the exported JCF file from step 3.
Run steps iv. and v. again to continue setting characteristics in superconductors for multiple
parts.
5. Start JMAG-Scheduler, and then add the last JCF file that was created in step 4 as a job.
IMPORTANT The material is replaced to air when importing a JCF file set with supercon-
ductor characteristics into JMAG-Designer.
Start from JMAG-Scheduler instead of JMAG-Designer when using superconductors in an
analysis.
6. Run the job from step 5.
The analysis is run and the JPLOT file is exported.
7. Open the JPLOT file in JMAG-Designer, and then confirm the results.
336
Analysis Condition Settings
Setting Analysis Conditions
This chapter describes the procedure for setting analysis conditions to the studies.
Sets the status of the analysis target (power, load/no-load, motion, boundary, and so on) and evaluation items
(torque, electromagnetic force, heat source, sound pressure, and so on) as conditions in the model.

• Setting Conditions for a Study (page 340)
• Setting Conditions for Grouped Parts (page 341)
• Changing Inflow/Outflow Current Direction in Each FEM Coil or Conductor (page 342)
• Set Multiple FEM Coil/Conductor Conditions (page 343)
• Creating Part/Face/Edge/Vertex Groups to Set Conditions (page 346)
• Creating Element/Element Face/Element Edge/Node Groups to Set Conditions (page 349)
339
Operations
Setting Conditions for a Study

When performing an analysis, specify analysis variables (power, load/no-load, motion, boundary
conditions etc.) and evaluation items (torque, electromagnetic force, heat generation, sound pressure
etc.) as conditions in the model.
The procedures for specifying these conditions are as follows:
MEMO Trying to add, edit, or delete conditions of studies that have analysis results causes the system to
lock the study. For details, see “Editing Studies with Results Included” on page 283.
1. Prepare your model and create a study.

2. Display the [Condition] tab of [Toolbox].
• Descriptions of each condition are displayed in the conditions list by selecting [Show
Descriptions].
• Conditions can be sorted by its objective by clearing [Show Condition Groups].
3. Select a condition from the [Conditions] list.
The condition is highlighted.
4. Drag and drop the condition to [Conditions] under [Study] in the [Project Manager]
tree.
The setting panel is displayed.
MEMO You can drag and drop conditions from the [Condition] list onto parts or faces that are spec-
ified.
5. If necessary, select the part (or face, edge, vertex, set, mesh group) for which condition
is to be set.
See “Specifying Analysis Condition and Function Settings” on page 66.
• A group of elements (or element faces, element edges, node) can be set the conditions. For
details, see “Creating Part/Face/Edge/Vertex Groups to Set Conditions” on page 346.
• A group of parts (or element faces, element edges, node) can be set the conditions. For details,
see “Creating Element/Element Face/Element Edge/Node Groups to Set Conditions” on
page 349.
• For details about the procedures for setting the axis and direction, see “Defining Axes and
Directions” on page 68.
• For details about the procedures for setting the result file to be referenced, see “Specifying
Results Files To Be Referenced” on page 73.
• Some parameters can specify mathematical formulas as values. See “Assigning Numerical
Expressions and Variables to Parameter Values” on page 79 for details.
7. Click [OK] in the settings of each condition.
New conditions are added under [Conditions] in the [Project Manager] tree. Pointing the cursor
over the added condition highlights the settings in red.
To edit conditions, right-click a condition under [Conditions] in the [Project Manager] tree, and
select [Edit]. To delete conditions, right-click a condition under [Conditions] in the [Project
Manager] tree, and select [Delete].
340
Setting Conditions for Grouped Parts

CAD data containing a multi body is imported in the state where parts are grouped. A condition
can be set for all grouped parts, as well as a single part within the group.
 Setting a condition for a particular part in a group of parts
1. Right-click the [Parts] list of the setting panels for each condition, and select [Expand
Part Groups].
The [Parts] list display switches from a group to a part .
2. Remove parts without condition settings from the list.
 Setting a condition for a group of parts instead of a single part
1. Right-click the [Parts] list, and select [Collapse Part Groups].

The [Parts] list display switches from single parts to parts by group.
341
Operations
Changing Inflow/Outflow Current Direction in Each FEM Coil or

Conductor
In a FEM Coil condition and FEM Conductor condition of magnetic field analysis, the settings of
conditions can be divided into multiple sets and different inflow/outflow faces and current direc-
tions can be specified per set. These sets are called “coil set” and “conductor set.”
For example, parts A and B shown with the arrow in the diagram above, are both W-phase coils but
the current directions are different.
For this case, create a FEM Coil condition as a W-phase coil. Next, create two coil sets in the FEM
Coil condition and put parts A and B in different coil sets. Then, set different current directions for
each coil set.
The steps to set multiple groups for FEM coil conditions are explained below.
1. Click below the [Coils] list in the [FEM Coil] setting panel to add a coil set.
One coil set is registered in the [Coil] list by default.
Click to add a new coil set to the list.
Click to reduce coil sets, and click to change the order of the coil sets.
To set a new name for the coil set, move the mouse cursor over a coil set in the [Coil] list, right-
click, and select [Rename]. It becomes editable and a new name can be entered.
2. Select a coil set from the [Coil] list.
3. In the graphics window, click the coil to be put in the coil set selected in step two.
Parts are added to the [Parts per Coils] list.
4. Select the direction type, inflow/outflow face, and current direction for the coil set of
step two.
5. Repeat steps two to four, and specify the properties of each coil set and the parts that
belong to them.
342
Set Multiple FEM Coil/Conductor Conditions

• Group Conditions (Group (FEM Coil/Conductor Condition)) (page 343)
• Link Group Conditions (FEM Coil/Conductor) to Circuit Components (page 344)
Group Conditions (Group (FEM Coil/Conductor Condition))

Multiple conditions can be grouped in a FEM Coil condition and a FEM Conductor condition for
magnetic field analysis. Grouped conditions can be linked to macro components.
Multiple FEM Coil/Conductor conditions can be specified to a model at once and can also be
grouped (creating a pattern condition) based on a specified pattern.
MEMO Multiple FEM Coil conditions that are grouped is called the “Group (FEM Coil) Condition.”
Similarly, for FEM Conductor conditions, the condition is called “Group (FEM Conductor) Condi-
tion.”
• Group Existing FEM Coil/Conductor Conditions (page 343)
• Group Multiple FEM Coil/Conductor Conditions That Are Created Based on One FEM Coil/
Conductor Condition (page 343)
Group Existing FEM Coil/Conductor Conditions
1. In the [Project Manager] tree, under a study > [Conditions], right-click one of the FEM
Coil/Conductor conditions to group.
2. Select [Grouping].
3. In the [Condition Group Setting] setting panel, set the parameters.
4. Click [OK].
Expanding created [Group (FEM Coil)] or [Group (FEM Conductor)] in the [Project Manager]
tree displays the FEM Coil/Conductor conditions included in the group.
• To edit each FEM Coil/Conductor condition in a group, expand [Group (FEM Coil)] or
[Group (FEM Conductor)] and edit each FEM Conductor condition.
• To ungroup, right-click [Group (FEM Coil)] or [Group (FEM Conductor)], and select
[Ungroup] from the menu. The group is cleared when using this procedure, but the FEM
Coil/Conductor condition belong to the group is kept.
• Right-click [Group (FEM Conductor)], and select [Delete All Conditions], when also delet-
ing the FEM Coil/Conductor condition belonging to a group.
Or, select the [Delete] key on the keyboard while selecting.
Group Multiple FEM Coil/Conductor Conditions That Are Created Based on One FEM Coil/
Conductor Condition
In the pattern condition creation function, when the center of FEM Coil/Conductor condition
parts specified in the [Reference Pattern] is moved by the angle specified in [Pitch], the FEM Coil/
Conductor condition is set for the part with the matching center.
MEMO Setting FEM Coil/Conductor conditions with identical settings in constant intervals in the
translation direction is not supported in cases.
343
Operations
1. Set a FEM Coil/Conductor condition as a reference pattern.

2. In the [Project Manager] tree, under the study > [Conditions], right-click the FEM Coil/
Conductor condition you set.
3. Select [Grouping].
4. In the [Condition Group Setting] setting panel, set the parameters.
5. Click [Create Pattern Condition].
The pattern condition is created and the FEM Coil/Conductor condition is added to the [Add
Conditions] box.
6. Click [OK].
Link Group Conditions (FEM Coil/Conductor) to Circuit Components

The Group (FEM Coil) condition or Group (FEM Conductor) condition can be linked with the
macro component.
1. Create a circuit that using macro components in the study.

• The number of FEM Coil/Conductor condition included in a Group (FEM Coil) or Group
(FEM Conductor) condition and the number of FEM Coil/Conductor components included
in a macro component that is linked needs to be the same.
• A circuit with macro component (Lap Winding or Wave Winding) needs to be created when
linking circuit components from a Group (FEM Coil) condition.
• A circuit with macro component (Cage, or Series Conductor) needs to be created when link-
ing circuit components from a Group (FEM Conductor) condition.
2. Link a group (FEM Coil/Conductor) condition to a circuit component.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, under the study > [Condition], right-click [Group (FEM
Coil)] or [Group (FEM Conductor)].
ii. Select [Connect to Circuit].
iii. In the [Condition Group] setting panel, arrange the order of the FEM Coil/Conductor
conditions listed in [Condition List] using the arrow buttons .
The FEM Coil/Conductor conditions are linked to the FEM Coil/conductor components of
a macro component in this order.
iv. Click [Connect to Macro Component].
MEMO The [Connect to Macro Component] button becomes available when the macro compo-
nent is specified in a circuit and the number of FEM Coil/Conductor condition included in the
group condition and the number of FEM Coil/Conductor component included in a macro com-
ponent are the same.
v. In the [Connect to Macro Component] dialog, set the parameters.
vi. Click [Connect].
Specify the interval between the FEM Coil/Conductor conditions to be set by the pattern.
344
vii.Click [Connect].
The tables of conditions and linked components are updated.
viii.Click [OK].
345
Operations
Creating Part/Face/Edge/Vertex Groups to Set Conditions

Sets allow the grouping of multiple components of the model (i.e. parts, faces, edges and vertices) as
a single object. Once defined, a set can be used to specify the target of conditions. This is convenient
if several conditions have the same target so the target only needs to be defined once.
MEMO The differences between sets and grouping for parts are as follows:
• Grouping for parts is used for single parts that are created by dividing the part into multiple solids
when modeling. All of the solids to group as a part need to have the same material properties. Sets is a
function to treat multiple parts, faces, edges, or vertices as a single group whether or not the material
properties are different.
• One part can only be in one part group, but the same part can belong to many sets.
• Sets can also be used with the analysis template. Sets allows conditions specify parts, faces, edges, and
vertices to be maintained correctly when applying an analysis template to a new model. The condi-
tions are maintained by replacing the sets specified in the new model with the sets specified in the
analysis template.
• Create Sets (page 346)
• Use Sets to Specify Conditions (page 347)
Create Sets
You can create part sets, face sets, edge sets, and vertex sets.
 Create from [Project Manager] tree
1. In the [Project Manager] tree, under [Template Parameter], right-click [Set].

2. Select [New Part Set], [New Face Set], [New Edge Set], or [New Vertex Set].
3. In the [Part Set], [Face Set], [Edge Set], or [Vertex Set] setting panel, set the parameters.
4. Click [OK].
The new set is added under [Set] in the [Project Manager] tree.
• Mouse-over each set to highlight the parts, faces, edges, or vertices it contains on the graphics
window.
• You can right-click each set and run [Edit], [Duplicate], or [Delete].
• To delete sets that are not being used to set conditions, etc., at once, right-click [Set] under
[Template Parameter] in the [Project Manager] tree and select [Delete unused sets].
MEMO The type of icons displayed in the [Project Manager] tree varies depending on the type of
set.
• :This icon is displayed for a set of parts.
• : This icon is displayed for a set of faces.
• : This icon is displayed for a set of edges.
• : This icon is displayed for a set of vertices.
 Creating from the condition or function setting panel
1. Open a condition setting panel.
346
2. Click [Create Sets] below the list that manages the condition settings.
The [Create Set] dialog is displayed.
The parts, faces, edges, or vertices selected as the condition settings, are displayed in a list in the
[Create Set] dialog. Other sets in the list are not displayed. Mesh groups and air regions are also
not displayed.
MEMO To also display the parts, faces, edges, or vertices included in another set in the [Create Set]
dialog, before clicking [Create Sets] , in the list that manages condition settings right-click the set
and select [Convert to Entity].
3. Enter a set title in [Title].
The character string entered is displayed in the [Project Manager] tree and in the list that man-
ages the condition settings.
4. Check the checkboxes for parts, faces, edges, or vertices to include in the set.
Clicking on a part, face, edge, or vertex displayed in the list highlights the corresponding part,
face, edge, or vertex in the graphics window.
5. Click [OK].
The parts, faces, edges, or vertices that were displayed in the list that manages the condition set-
tings are replaced with a set.
6. Click [OK] in the condition setting panel.
The new set is added under [Set] in the [Project Manager] tree.
MEMO To display the name of a part, face, edge, or vertex instead of the set name, in the list that
manages the condition settings select the set from the list and select [Convert to Entity].
Use Sets to Specify Conditions

1. Open the setting panel for each condition.
2. Click [Select Sets] or [Select Sets and Mesh Groups] below the list that manages the
condition settings.
Or, right-click the list and select [Select Sets] or [Select Sets and Mesh Groups].
The [Select] dialog is displayed. The set or mesh group that can be selected as a setting for a con-
dition is displayed in this dialog list.
3. Select the settings to specify the condition.
Multiple sets can be selected.
4. Click [OK] in the [Select] dialog.
The set that is selected is added to the settings.
5. Select the set from the list and click [Delete] when deleting a set from the list.
Or, right-click a set in the dialog for the list, and select [Delete].
Right-click in the dialog of the list, and select [Delete All] when deleting the entire set or mesh
group from the settings list.
347
Operations
Example: setting panel for a rotation periodic boundary
348
Creating Element/Element Face/Element Edge/Node Groups to Set

Conditions
A mesh group is a grouping of elements, or element faces, element edges, nodes to set conditions in
a mesh model.
• Create Mesh Groups (page 349)
• Set Conditions for Mesh Groups (page 349)
• Create a Mesh Group at the Same Time as Setting Conditions (page 350)
• Modify the Element of the Mesh Group during Condition Settings (page 351)
• Select Elements, Element Faces, Element Edges, and Nodes as Groups in Mesh Groups (page
351)
Create Mesh Groups

1. In the [Project Manager] tree, under [Mesh], right-click [Group].
2. Select [New Element Group], [New Element Face Group], [New Element Edge Group], or
[New Node Group].
3. In the [Element Group], [Element Face Group], [Element Edge Group], [Node Group] set-
ting panel, set the parameters.
4. Click [OK].
The mesh group is added under [Mesh] > [Group] in the [Project Manager] tree.
Right-click a mesh group under [Mesh] > [Group] in the [Project Manager] tree when editing,
deleting, or duplicating mesh group that is created. Select a command from the [Edit], [Dupli-
cate], and [Delete] specification that is displayed.
MEMO Right-click [Group] in [Mesh] under each [Study] in the [Project Manager] tree, and select
[Delete unused groups] when deleting mesh groups that are not used by conditions in a single pro-
cess.
MEMO The icon displayed in the [Project Manager] tree is different depending on the type of mesh
group.
: Displayed when it is an element group.
: Displayed when it is an element face group.
: Displayed when it is an element edge group.
: Displayed when it is a node group.
Set Conditions for Mesh Groups

2. Click [Select Sets and Mesh Groups] under the list managing the settings for the con-
ditions.
Or, right-click in the dialog, and select the [Select Sets and Mesh Groups].
349
Operations
The [Select] dialog is displayed. The set or mesh group that can be selected as a setting for a con-
dition is displayed in this dialog list.
3. Select the checkbox of the mesh group to specify the condition.
Multiple mesh groups can be selected.
4. In the [Select] dialog, click [OK].
The mesh group that is selected is added to the settings.
Example: setting panel for a rotation periodic boundary
5. Select a mesh group from the list and click [Delete] when deleting a mesh group from
the list.
Or, right-click in the mesh group in the dialog for the list, and select [Delete].
Right-click in the dialog of the list, and select [Delete All] when deleting the entire set or mesh
group from the settings list.
Create a Mesh Group at the Same Time as Setting Conditions

2. Click in the graphics window.
The selection panel is displayed in the bottom part of the graphics window for a model in
JMAG-Designer.
3. Specify a mesh group name in the text box.
350
4. Select the elements, elements, elements faces, element edges, or nodes included in the
mesh group of the graphics window.
The number of elements, elements faces, element edges, or nodes that are selected is displayed in
the selection panel.
MEMO Select the applicable element while pressing the [Ctrl] key on the keyboard when clearing a
partial section of an element.
5. In the selection panel, Click [OK].
A new component for a mesh group is created.
Elements, element faces, element edges, or nodes under a group are displayed in the graphics
window when selecting a mesh group from the list managing the condition settings.
Modify the Element of the Mesh Group during Condition Settings

Elements, element faces, element edges, or nodes under a mesh group can be modified when setting
conditions.

2. Select a mesh group from the list managing settings for a condition, and then click
[Edit] .
The selection panel is displayed in the bottom part of the graphics window for a model in
JMAG-Designer.
3. Edit a mesh group name in the text box.
4. Select the elements, elements, elements faces, element edges, or nodes included in the
mesh group of the graphics window.
The number of elements, elements faces, element edges, or nodes that are selected is displayed in
the selection panel.
MEMO Select the applicable element while pressing the [Ctrl] key on the keyboard when clearing a
partial section of an element.
5. Click [OK] in the selection panel.
The component for the mesh group is modified.
Elements, element faces, element edges, or nodes under a group are displayed in the graphics
window when selecting a mesh group from the list managing the condition settings.
Select Elements, Element Faces, Element Edges, and Nodes as Groups in Mesh
Groups
Elements, element faces, element edges, or nodes that are under a group can be selected one at a
time.
1. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click a mesh group.

2. Select [Select].
The mesh group that is highlighted in the graphics window is selected.
351
Operations
352
Circuit Settings
Setting Circuits
This chapter describes how to create the circuit.

In JMAG, electric circuit, thermal circuit, and control circuit can be set.
• Electric circuits can be set in magnetic field analysis and transformer analysis.
• Thermal circuits can be set in magnetic field analysis, thermal analysis, and thermal stress analysis.
• Control circuits can be set in magnetic field transient analysis.
Electric circuit

• The Basic Procedure for Creating Circuits (page 356)
• Adding Circuits to Studies (page 357)
• Exporting Circuits as Circuit Information Files (page 358)
• Editing Circuits That Are Set in the Studies (page 359)
• Deleting Circuits That Are Set in the Studies (page 359)
• Creating Circuit Diagrams (page 360)
• Exporting Circuit Diagrams as Image Files (page 364)
• Recreating Circuits (page 364)
• Setting Circuit Component Properties (page 365)
• Replacing Circuit Component Properties (page 366)
• Deleting Circuit Component Properties (page 366)
• Creating Original Circuit Component by Combining Multiple Components (Macro Component) (page
367)
• Editing the Sub Circuit of the Macro Component (page 369)
• Using Circuit Libraries to Reuse the Created Circuit (page 371)
355
Operations
The Basic Procedure for Creating Circuits

1. Start the Circuit Editor and add the circuit to the study.
ii. Select [Add Circuit].
Circuit Editor starts and the empty circuit is displayed.
[Circuit] is added under [Study] in the JMAG-Designer.
2. Create a circuit diagram.
i. Place the circuit components on the circuit creation window.
Circuit components can be rotated.
ii. Wire the terminals of circuit components.
3. Specify the circuit component properties.
i. Double click the circuit component in the circuit diagram.
The setting panel for circuit component properties is displayed.
ii. Set the parameters.
A circuit component properties setting can be applied at multiple circuit component.
4. To use the created circuit in another project, register the circuit in the Circuit Library.
i. From the menu bar, select [File] > [Export Circuit to Toolbox].
ii. In the [Circuit Property] dialog, set the parameters and click [OK].
The circuit is registered in the [Libraries] tab of [Tool Box].
5. Exit the Circuit Editor.
i. From menu bar in the Circuit Editor, select [File] > [Exit].
Or click [Close] in the Circuit Editor.
356
Setting Circuits
Adding Circuits to Studies

• Add an Empty Circuit (page 357)
• Import a Circuit from the Circuit Information File (page 357)
Add an Empty Circuit

2. Select [Add Circuit].
Circuit Editor starts and the empty circuit is displayed.
Import a Circuit from the Circuit Information File
 JMAG-Designer
1. Import the circuit information file to the study.

ii. Select [Import Circuit].
iii. In the [Import Circuit] dialog, specify the circuit information file (.jcir, .cct).
Both of .jcir and .cct can be exported from JMAG-Designer or Circuit Editor.
iv. Click [Open].
If a circuit has already been added to the study, it will be replaced with the circuit imported
from the file.
2. If necessary, display the circuit.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, under [Study], right-click the [Circuit].
ii. Select [View].
Circuit Editor starts and the circuit imported from the file is displayed.
 Circuit Editor
1. From menu bar in the Circuit Editor, select [File] > [Import Circuit].
Or click [Import Circuit] on the toolbar in the Circuit Editor.
2. In the [Open File] dialog, specify the circuit information file (.jcir, .cct).
Both of .jcir and .cct can be exported from JMAG-Designer or Circuit Editor.
3. Click [Open].
Exiting circuit is replaced with the circuit imported from the file.
357
Operations
Exporting Circuits as Circuit Information Files

Export the circuit created as a circuit information file (.jcir, .cct).
 JMAG-Designer
1. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click a model and select [Export Circuit].
2. In the [Circuit Export Setting] dialog, select the format version of the exported circuit
information file.
MEMO To save the CCT file, select the current version.
3. Click [OK].
4. In the [Export Circuit] dialog, specify the file name, type, and place to export.
• JCIR files cannot be read in JMAG-Studio. To pass circuit data to a JMAG-Studio project,
export the file as a CCT file.
• CCT files do not contain unit information. To export a file containing unit information,
export the circuit data as a JCIR file.
5. Click [Save].
 Circuit Editor
1. From the menu bar in the Circuit Editor, select [File] > [Export Circuit].
1. In the [Export Circuit Setting] dialog, from [Save Version], select the format version of
the circuit information file to be exported.
MEMO To save the CCT file, select the current version.
2. Click [OK].
3. In the [Save As] dialog, specify the file name, type, and place to export.
• JCIR files cannot be read in JMAG-Studio. To pass circuit data to a JMAG-Studio project,
export the file as a CCT file.
• CCT files do not contain unit information. To export a file containing unit information,
export the circuit data as a JCIR file.
4. Click [Save].
358
Setting Circuits
Editing Circuits That Are Set in the Studies

2. Select [Edit Circuit].
Circuit Editor starts and the circuit that set in the study is displayed.
Deleting Circuits That Are Set in the Studies

2. Select [Delete Circuit].
The circuit that set in the study is deleted.
359
Operations
Creating Circuit Diagrams

• Add or Delete a Component (page 360)
• Move a Component or Wire (page 360)
• Duplicate a Component or Wire (page 361)
• Rotate a Component or Wire (page 361)
• Wiring (page 361)
Add or Delete a Component
 Adding
Perform the following procedure from the Circuit Editor.
• Click a component toolbar button (e.g.:[Resistor] ), and then click anywhere in the Edit Cir-
cuit window.
MEMO For some components, the setting panel for the component properties or number of input/out-
put ports is displayed after placing the component.
MEMO Perform one of the following operation to finish arranging the component.
• Right-click anywhere in the edit circuit window.
• Click the component toolbar button (e.g.:[Resistor] ) that is selected.
• Press the [Esc] key on the keyboard.
 Deleting
Perform one of the following procedures from the Circuit Editor.
• Right-click the component or wire, and select [Delete].
• Select the component or wire, and then press the [Delete] key on the keyboard.
• Right-click a component in the [Circuit Manager] tree, and select [Delete].
MEMO Multiple components can be deleted at once. To do this, select multiple components from the
[Circuit Manager] tree while holding down the [Ctrl] key or [Shift] keys on the keyboard, and then
right-click to select [Delete].
Move a Component or Wire

Perform one of the following operations in the Circuit Editor:
• Move the mouse to any position with a component or wire selected.
MEMO Movement by operating the mouse cannot be reverted using [Undo] .
• Right-click a component or wire, and select [Cut]. The component or wire is cut from the circuit
diagram and stored to the clipboard.
Right-click anywhere on the circuit creation window, and select [Paste]. The component or wire
is pasted on the circuit diagram from the clipboard.
• Select a component or wire, and then press the [X] key while holding down the [Ctrl] key. The
component or wire is cut from the circuit diagram and stored to the clipboard.
Press the [V] key while holding down the [Ctrl] key. The component or wire is pasted on the cir-
cuit diagram from the clipboard.
MEMO The circuit components and wires copied are keep in clipboard temporarily. The data kept in
clipboard can be pasted to the circuit of other study.
360
Setting Circuits
Duplicate a Component or Wire

Perform one of the following operations in the Circuit Editor:
• Right-click a component or wire, and select [Copy]. The component or wire is copied to the
clipboard.
• Right-click anywhere on the circuit creation window, and select [Paste]. The component or wire
is copied to the circuit diagram.
Select a component or wire, and then press the [C] key while holding down the [Ctrl] key on the
keyboard. The component or wire is copied to the clipboard.
• Press the [V] key while holding down the [Ctrl] key. The component or wire is copied to the cir-
cuit diagram from the clipboard.
• Right-click a component or wire, and select [Duplicate].
MEMO Macro component cannot be duplicated with this procedure.
MEMO Using this procedure to duplicate can be done with a single copy and paste operation. How-
ever, because components and wires are not copied to the clipboard, they cannot be pasted to other
studies.
• Right-click a component in the [Circuit Manager] tree, and select [Duplicate].
MEMO Multiple components can be duplicated at once. To do this, select multiple components
from the [Circuit Manager] tree while holding down the [Ctrl] key or [Shift] key on the keyboard,
and then right-click to select [Duplicate].
MEMO A circuit component properties setting is copied with a circuit component.
MEMO The circuit components and wires copied are keep in clipboard temporarily. The data kept in
clipboard can be pasted to the circuit of other study.
Rotate a Component or Wire
 Rotate 90 degrees clockwise

• With a component or wire selected, select [Rotate Right 90 Degrees] in the toolbar.
• With a component or wire selected, hold down the [Ctrl] key and then press [R] on the key-
board.
• With a component or wire selected, right-click and select [Rotate Right 90 Degrees] .
 Rotate 90 degrees counterclockwise

• With a component or wire selected, select [Rotate Left 90 Degrees] in the toolbar.
• With a component or wire selected, hold down the [Ctrl] key, [Shift] key, and [R] key on the
keyboard.
• With a component or wire selected, right-click and select [Rotate Left 90 Degrees] .
Wiring
Connect two terminals in a circuit component with a wire.
MEMO Wires are divided based on the following rules.
• If a wire is placed so it overlaps with a terminal, the wire is divided at the position of the terminal.
• If a terminal is placed on top of a wire, the wire is divided at the position of the terminal.
• If two angles of a wire bent in an L-shape overlap, the angle is shared as a terminal, so the wire is
divided at the position of the terminal.
361
Operations
• If the angles of two L-shape wire do not overlap on a wire, the wire is not divided. However, if the cir-
cuit data with the angles on a wire is exported as a CCT file, the wire is divided by the position of the
angle.
Left: Wire that is not divided, Right: Wire that is divided
1. In the Circuit Editor, start the wiring mode.

i. Click [Wire] on the toolbar.
Switching to wiring mode changes the appearance of the cursor ( > ).
MEMO It is also possible to switch to the wiring mode by right-clicking on the circuit creation
window and selecting [Add Wire].
2. Perform wiring.
During the wiring mode, use the mouse while following the rules below.
• The first click of the left mouse button starts to place a wire. The second click of the left
mouse button stops placing the wire.
• Moving the mouse while placing the wire extends the wire in that direction.
• When placing a wire, moving the pointer to the desired position, and then left-clicking the
mouse while holding the [Shift] key can create a new terminal at the position the mouse is
clicked. However, this operation will not discontinue the operation of placing a wire.
• Right-clicking the mouse while placing a wire cancels the wire placement made from the pre-
vious terminal. Pressing the [Esc] key on the keyboard performs the same action.
The following is an example of placing a wire. When terminals A, B, C and D are connected
with wires as in the diagram left below, perform the following operations.
Example: Delta connection
i. Click terminal A.
Start the wire placement.
ii. Move the cursor to the right.
Wires not yet placed are displayed with a dotted line.
iii. Move the mouse to the same position shown in the diagram below, and click the
mouse button while holding the [Shift] key.
362
Setting Circuits
A new terminal is created at the position of the cursor, and the wire connecting from terminal
A to the newly created terminal is finalized.
iv. Repeat the operation to move the mouse to the location to place the terminal and
click while holding down the [Shift] key.
The location enclosed in a dotted line in the diagram below is the location the terminal is
placed.
v. Lastly, move the cursor to the position of terminal C, and then click the mouse but-
ton.
Terminals A, B, and C are connected with a wire, and wire placement ends.
MEMO In this example, the procedure shows wire placement by connecting terminals A, B, and
C in succession, but they can also be connected with a wire two terminals at a time.
3. Exit the wiring mode.
i. Click [Wire] or [Select] on the toolbar.
MEMO It is also possible to end the wiring mode by clicking of the right mouse button.
4. Delete the unnecessary wire.
i. Right-click a wire, and select [Delete].
Or select a wire, and then press the [Delete] key on the keyboard.
363
Operations
Exporting Circuit Diagrams as Image Files

Export the circuit diagram as an image file (.png, .jpeg, .bmp).
1. If necessary, show/hide the grid of the circuit creation window.

To show/hide the grid, select [View] from the menu bar in the Circuit Editor and click [Show
Grid].
If [Show Grid] is checked, the grid is shown in the circuit creation window.
2. Export the circuit diagram as an image file.
i. From the menu bar in the Circuit Editor, select [File] > [Export Image].
ii. In the [Export Image] dialog, specify the file name, type, and place to export.
iii. Click [Save].
MEMO For image size, the size set in the [Image Setup] dialog in JMAG-Designer is applied.
Depending on the aspect ratio of the circuit diagram, however, the size is adjusted so that an excess
margin is not present in the image.
Recreating Circuits
Clear the existing circuit and recreate.
1. From the menu bar in the Circuit Editor, select [File] > [New Circuit].
Or, click [New Circuit] on the toolbar.
364
Setting Circuits
Setting Circuit Component Properties

Set parameters such as resistance and current values as circuit component properties.
 Electric circuit components, thermal circuit components, control circuit components,

and macro components
Perform one of the following procedures from the Circuit Editor to open the component properties
setting panel. An example of Resistor components on an electric circuit is explained below.
• Double-click a component in the circuit diagram.
• Right-click a component in the circuit diagram, and select [Edit].
• Double-click a component property displayed under the component type (e.g., [Resistor]) in the
[Circuit Manager] tree.
• Right-click a component property displayed under the component type (e.g., [Resistor]) in the
[Circuit Manager] tree, and select [Edit].
MEMO For some components, the setting panel for the component properties or number of input/out-
put ports is displayed after placing the component.
MEMO Multiple component properties can be edited at once. To do this, select multiple component
properties from the [Circuit Manager] tree while holding down the [Ctrl] key or [Shift] key on the key-
board, and then right-click to select [Edit].
 Circuit components in sub circuits of macro elements

To set the properties of a circuit component that is in a sub circuit of a macro component, perform
the following operations in the Circuit Editor. An example PAM Inverter component is explained
below.
1. Double-click a PAM Inverter placed in the circuit diagram.

Or, right-click a PAM Inverter placed in the circuit diagram, and select [Show Sub Circuit].
The sub circuit of the PAM Inverter is displayed.
2. Double-click each circuit component placed in the sub circuit diagram of the macro com-
ponent.
Or, right-click each circuit component placed in the sub circuit diagram of the macro compo-
nent, and select [Edit].
The properties setting panel for the circuit component is displayed.
MEMO To return to the circuit display from the macro component sub circuit display, click [Back]
displayed in the upper right corner within the sub circuit creation window.
365
Operations
Replacing Circuit Component Properties

Replace the properties of a circuit component with the properties of another component.
1. In the circuit diagram, right-click a component and select [Change Component Proper-
ties].
2. In the [Component Properties] dialog, select the component properties to apply to the
component, and then click [OK].
Deleting Circuit Component Properties

1. In the [Circuit Manager] tree, under the component type (e.g.:[Resistor]), right-click
each component property.
2. Select [Delete].
366
Setting Circuits
Creating Original Circuit Component by Combining Multiple

Components (Macro Component)
Circuit components can be combined to create original macro components.
• Create a New Macro Component (page 367)
• Use the Created Macro Component on Another Machine (page 368)
• Delete the Created Macro Component (page 368)
Create a New Macro Component

1. Create a circuit to add to the macro component from the Circuit Editor window.
The circuit in the macro component is called the “sub circuit”.
Do not include unwanted circuit components or wiring in the sub circuit. Unwanted circuit
components and wiring in macro components may cause analysis errors.
e.g. Delta connection
2. Connect the Left External Terminal component to the terminal to be used as the exter-
nal input terminal and connect the Right External Terminal component to the terminal
to be used as the external output terminal.
3. Create the macro component and register it to JMAG-Designer.

i. Select all the circuit components to be included in the macro component.
ii. From the menu bar, select [File] > [Create Macro].
iii. In the [Create Macro Component] dialog, set the parameters.
367
Operations
iv. Click [OK].

The macro component is added to the [Libraries] tab of the [Toolbox] or the [Macro Compo-
nent List] dialog.
4. Add the created Macro Component to the circuit.
There are two ways to add a Macro Component: the procedure using the [Toolbox] and the pro-
cedure using [Macro Component] in the toolbar.
This section describes the procedure using the [Toolbox].
i. From the [Libraries] tab in the [Toolbox], select a macro component.
ii. Drag-and-drop the selected macro component in the Circuit Editor window.
The macro component is added to the circuit.
Use the Created Macro Component on Another Machine

Macro components added to the [Libraries] tab can be saved as a ZIP file. Use this ZIP file to create
a macro component on another machine.
In the [Libraries] tab, in addition to the ZIP file, the macro component can also be imported as an
MCCT file.
 Export Macro Component to a file
1. In the [Libraries] tab of the [Tool Box], right-click the macro component or the folder
where the macro component is stored, and select [Export Circuit Libraries].
2. In the [Export Circuit Libraries] dialog, specify the save destination and name of the file,
and then click [Save].
 Import Macro Component from a file
1. In the [Libraries] tab of the [Tool Box], right-click the folder for adding the macro compo-
nent and select [Import Circuit Libraries].
2. In the [Import Circuit Libraries] dialog, specify the file and click [Open].
Delete the Created Macro Component

In the [Libraries] tab of the [Tool Box], right-click the macro component and select [Delete].
When this command is run, the macro component is also deleted from the [Macro Component
List] dialog.
368
Setting Circuits
Editing the Sub Circuit of the Macro Component

Not only can you edit the sub circuits of the macro components that you created, but you can also
edit the sub circuits of pre-installed macro components. (with some exceptions such as winding
components).
 Edit the sub circuit of the macro component
1. Right-click the macro component and select [Show Sub Circuit]

The sub circuit of the macro component is displayed.
2. Double-click the circuit component of the sub circuit and set the properties of this com-
ponent.
3. Click [Back] to go back to the main circuit from the sub circuit.
4. Right-click the macro component to be edited and select [Add to Library] to add the
edited macro component to the library.
5. In the [Add to Library] dialog, specify the component name and folder to which the
component is to be added and click [OK].
 Edit the sub circuit of the pre-installed PWM macro component
1. To edit the sub circuit of the PWM macro component, right-click the macro component
to be edited and select [Make Sub Circuit Editable].
PWM macro component is the generic term for the following components:
• PWM Inverter
• PWM Signal Generator
• PWM Current Vector Control 3-phase modulation (3-phase, DQ)
• PWM Current Vector Control 3-phase modulation with JMAG-RT (3-phase, DQ)
• PWM Current Vector Control 3-phase modulation Third-harmonic Control (3-phase, DQ)
• PWM Current Vector Control 3-phase modulation Third-harmonic Control with JMAG-
RT (3-phase, DQ)
• PWM Current Vector Control 3-phase modulation Space Vector Control (3-phase, DQ)
• PWM Current Vector Control 3-phase modulation Space Vector Control with JMAG-RT (3-
phase, DQ)
• PWM Current Vector Control 2-phase modulation (3-phase, DQ)
• PWM Current Vector Control (3-phase, DQ)
• PWM Current Vector Control with JMAG-RT (3-phase, DQ)
369
Operations
• PWM Current Vector Control (6-phase, DQ)

• PWM Current Vector Control with JMAG-RT (6-phase, DQ)
• PWM Current Vector Control 2-phase modulation with JMAG-RT (3-phase, DQ)
• PWM Current Vector Control (3-phase IM)
• PWM Current Vector Control (6-phase IM)
• PWM 120deg Conduction System (3-phase)
The sub circuit of the converted macro component is displayed.
2. Double-click the circuit component of the sub circuit and set the properties of the con-
verted macro component.
3. To go back to the main circuit from the sub circuit, click [Back].
4. Right-click [Add to Library] to add the edited macro component to the library.
5. In the [Add to Library] dialog, specify the component name and folder to which the
component is to be added and click [OK].
370
Setting Circuits
Using Circuit Libraries to Reuse the Created Circuit

By registering the created circuit in the library, you can easily recreate this circuit in a different proj-
ect or in a new version of a JMAG-Designer project.
• Register the Created Circuit in the Library (page 371)
• Use Circuits Registered in the Library on Another Machine (page 371)
• Delete the Circuit Registered in the Library (page 372)
Register the Created Circuit in the Library

1. Register the circuit in the library.
i. From the menu bar, select [File] > [Export Circuit to Toolbox].
ii. In the [Circuit Property] dialog, set the parameters.
iii. Click [OK].
The circuit is registered in the [Libraries] tab of the [Toolbox].
The registered circuit includes not only the circuit diagram but also the information on the
property values of each component.
2. Replace with circuit registered in the library.
i. From the [Libraries] tab of the [Tool Box], select circuit.
ii. Drag and drop the selected circuit to the Circuit Editor window.
The currently registered circuit is deleted and replaced with the circuit registered to the
library.
3. Set the properties of the circuit component.
Use Circuits Registered in the Library on Another Machine

Circuit registered in the [Libraries] tab can be saved as a ZIP file. Use this ZIP file if you want to use
the created circuit on another machine.
In the [Libraries] tab, in addition to the ZIP file, the circuit can also be imported as a JCIR or CCT
file.
 Export circuit to a file
1. In the [Libraries] tab of the [Tool Box], right-click the circuit or the file where the circuit
is saved and select [Export Circuit Libraries].
2. In the [Export Circuit Libraries] dialog, specify the save destination and name of file, and
then click [Save].
 Import macro component from a file
1. In the [Libraries] tab of the [Tool Box], right-click the folder where the circuit is to be
added and select [Import Circuit Libraries].
371
Operations
2. In the [Import Circuit Libraries] dialog, specify the file and click [Open].
Delete the Circuit Registered in the Library

In the [Libraries] tab of the [Tool Box], right-click the circuit and select [Delete].
372
Using JMAG-RT Models in Circuits
This chapter describes the procedure for running control circuit analyses using JMAG-RT models.
With JMAG-RT models, results calculated from JMAG FEM analyses are output in a file format (.rtt) for use
with circuit simulators. High-accuracy control circuit simulations can be run while accounting for motor charac-
teristics using these output RTT files. JMAG-RT models can be made using JMAG-RT or JMAG-Designer Effi-
ciency map analysis studies.
MEMO In addition to the method described here, there is another way to use the integration analysis study. See
“Executing Integration Analysis Studies” on page 715 for details.
MEMO For details on JMAG-RT and JMAG-Express, see “JMAG-Express, JMAG-RT, JMAG-RT Viewer Edition”.

• Running Control Circuit Analyses Using JMAG-RT Models (page 374)
• Linking FEM Analysis and Control Circuit Analysis (page 375)
373
Operations
Running Control Circuit Analyses Using JMAG-RT Models

MEMO When an integration analysis study is used, control circuit analysis is possible without having to
prepare a dummy shape model. For procedures on running an integration analysis study, see “Executing
Integration Analysis Studies” on page 715.
1. Create an FEM model in JMAG-Designer, and export an input JCF file for use with JMAG-
RT.
i. Start JMAG-Designer.
ii. Prepare a motor model, and create a study.
For induction motors, create a frequency analysis. For models other than induction motors,
create a transient analysis.
iii. Set materials, conditions, and study properties, and generate mesh.
Depending on the motor type, add an electric circuit. For details, see the explanation “JMAG-
Express, JMAG-RT, JMAG-RT Viewer Edition”.
iv. Export a JCF file from the study

This can be either geometry data or mesh data.
2. Start JMAG-RT, and create a RTT file using the file in step 1.
For details, see the explanation “JMAG-Express, JMAG-RT, JMAG-RT Viewer Edition”.
3. Create a circuit in JMAG-Designer.
ii. Prepare a dummy geometry model, and create a magnetic field transient analysis
study.
If no model is saved in JMAG-Designer, than a study cannot be created. For this reason, pre-
pare a temporary model.
iii. Set a circuit.
Create a control circuit. Place JMAG-RT Model components, and link to the JMAG-RT
model data file created in step 2.
See the following:
• “Running Analyses from JMAG-Designer” on page 415
• “Running Analyses from JMAG-Scheduler” on page 425
• “Running Analyses from the Command Line” on page 437
MEMO Transferring result files may take time if running calculations of several cases across a num-
ber of machines. Result file amounts and file numbers are reduced by configuring the following set-
tings under [Output] in the [Study Properties] dialog prior to running analysis. This can reduce the
time required to transfer and calculate the entire files themselves.
• Select [Output Table Results Only. (No Mesh will be Output)]
• Clear [Output Distribution Results] to prevent the output of unneeded physical quantities
5. Check the results.
374
Using JMAG-RT Models in Circuits
Linking FEM Analysis and Control Circuit Analysis

1. Create an FEM model in JMAG-Designer, and export an input JCF file for use with JMAG-
RT.
ii. Prepare a motor model, and create a study.
For induction motors, create a frequency analysis. For models other than induction motors,
create a transient analysis.
iii. Set materials, conditions, and study properties, and generate mesh.
Depending on the motor type, add an electric circuit. For details, see the explanation “JMAG-
Express, JMAG-RT, JMAG-RT Viewer Edition”.
iv. Export a JCF file from the study

This can be either geometry data or mesh data.
2. Start JMAG-RT, and create a RTT file (.rtt) using the file in step 1.
For details, see the explanation “JMAG-Express, JMAG-RT, JMAG-RT Viewer Edition”.
3. Create an FEM model with JMAG-Designer and create a circuit.
ii. Prepare a model, and create a magnetic field transient analysis study.
iii. Set a circuit.
Create an electric circuit.
• Place electric circuit components that possess terminals for connecting with control cir-
cuits.
• Place Coupling Control components if changing FEA and control circuit analysis step
interval width. FEA time interval width can be set as Coupling Control component prop-
erties as a ratio for the number of control circuit calculation steps including JMAG-RT
Model components.
Example: Running FEA 1 time for every 1,000 times that a control circuit analysis is run,
etc.
Coupling Control components are not required for circumstances similar to the left dia-
gram where FEA and control circuit analysis step widths are the same.
Coupling Control components are required for circumstances similar to the right diagram
where FEA and control circuit analysis steps widths differ.
Next, create a control circuit.
• Place JMAG-RT Model components, and link to the JMAG-RT model data file created in
step 2.
Additionally link the control circuit and the electric circuit.
375
Operations
• When transferring voltage values and current values obtained with JMAG-RT Model
components to FEM analyses, connect JMAG-RT Model component output terminals to
Control Voltage Source components or Control Current Source components.
• When transferring voltage values and current values obtained with electric current analy-
ses to JMAG-RT Model component input, connect Control Voltage Probe components or
Control Current Probe components to JMAG-RT Model component input terminals.
iv. Set materials, conditions, and study properties, and generate mesh.
If Coupling Control components are placed in a circuit, time interval widths set in the [Study
Properties] dialog [Step Control] tab are used as time step widths for control circuit calcula-
tions including JMAG-RT Model components.
See the following:
MEMO Transferring result files may take time if running calculations of several cases across a num-
ber of machines. Result file amounts and file numbers are reduced by configuring the following set-
tings under [Output] in the [Study Properties] dialog prior to running analysis. This can reduce the
time required to transfer and calculate the entire files themselves.
When confirming control circuit analysis results with no control probe components placed, it is
necessary to manually load the control circuit analysis result file “Control_Circuit.jplot” into
JMAG-Designer.
376
Meshing
Generating Mesh with JMAG-Designer
In this chapter, the procedure for generating meshes in JMAG-Designer is presented.
Geometry model Mesh model Mesh model with air region

• Generating Mesh in Solid Models or Region Models (page 380)
• Generating Mesh Leaving Existing Mesh Untouched (page 385)
• Evaluating Generated Mesh (page 387)
• Using Options for Generating Mesh (page 388)
• Set Element Sizes for Parts, Faces, Edges, and Vertices (page 388)
• Set Element Sizes for Specified Regions in Air Regions (page 389)
• Use the Slide Mesh Function and the Standard Mesh Function ([Extended Slide Plane]) (page 389)
• Use the Slide Mesh Function and the Function That Generates a Mesh at Each Analysis Step ([Extended
Slide Plane (Used until V.18.0)]) (page 390)
• Simplify a Part of Model Geometry at Mesh Generation (page 394)
• Generate a Mesh That Takes the Skin Effect into Account (page 394)
• Generate a Layered Mesh Simulating a Laminated Steel Sheet (page 395)
• Generate Meshes That Take the Thin Film Wire Coatings into Account (page 395)
• Generate a Layered Mesh in Shell or Thin Laminated Solid (page 396)
• Generate the Same Mesh for Multiple Parts (page 397)
• Generate Symmetric Meshes in Models with Rotational Periodicity (page 397)
• Specify Mesh Division of a Surface Using a Result File (page 398)
• Using Options for Editing Mesh Models (page 400)
• Change Mesh Model Dimensions (page 400)
• Apply Skews to Mesh Models (page 401)
• Regenerate a Mesh for Specified Regions (page 402)
• Restoring Mesh Models to Their State Before Mesh Regeneration (page 404)
• Showing/Hiding Mesh (page 404)
• Creating a New Mesh Model Containing Only the Mesh of the Selected Parts (page 405)
379
Operations
Generating Mesh in Solid Models or Region Models

Mesh generation in JMAG-Designer is performed with the following overall procedure.
1. Prepare a model and create a study.

When no study is created, a mesh cannot be generated.
If using the same mesh for another analysis is desired, use the study copy function.
2. Set the conditions and functions that affect mesh generation before setting the mesh.
• Set the boundary conditions (periodic boundaries, symmetric boundaries, natural boundar-
ies, etc.). Depending on the boundary conditions, the creation region of the air region may
change.
• When creating a slide mesh or rotation periodic mesh (automatic) for magnetic field analysis,
set the motion conditions.
• When calculating torque and electromagnetic force for magnetic field analysis, set the Torque
conditions or the Force conditions. In the case of a 2D model, the calculation region is auto-
matically expanded at mesh generation in order to obtain calculation accuracy.
• When setting [Set Step Control based on Motion Condition] to on when creating a slide
mesh with magnetic field analysis, set the study property step control.
• If using second order elements in electric field analysis or structural analysis and setting con-
ditions for intermediate nodes is desired, set conditions for parts (solid, shell, beam), faces,
sides, elements, element surfaces, and element edges.
• When using the following mesh generation methods, the material of the part is taken into
account when automatically determining the element size. Therefore, please set the material
of the part prior to mesh generation.
• [Method 3 (Automatic element size)]
• [Semi Auto Mesh (Automatic element size)]
• [Extruded Mesh (Automatic element size)]
3. Run geometry check.
If the model contains minute edges or faces, or if parts are interfering with each other, mesh gen-
eration will result in an error. Also, if the Periodic Boundary conditions are set incorrectly, an
incorrect mesh will be generated.
The geometry check function is used to check that these problems do not exist.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click a model and select [Check Geometry].
ii. In the [Check Geometry] dialog, set the item to be checked.
iii. Click [Run Check].
If a problem is found in the model, this is indicated in the [Geometry Check] dialog.
iv. Click [Close].
v. Correct the geometry and conditions as necessary.
4. Set the mesh properties.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, under the study, right-click [Mesh].
380
ii. Select [Properties].

The [Mesh Properties] dialog is displayed.
MEMO The [Mesh Properties] dialog can also be opened by clicking the shortcut icon .
iii. For magnetic field transient analysis (or magnetic field frequency analysis), select
[Mesh Type] under the [Basic Setting] tab.
Select one from [Standard Meshing], [Slide Mesh], and [Generate Mesh at Each Step].
Since [Standard Meshing] is the only option except with magnetic field transient analysis (or
magnetic field frequency analysis), the parameter [Mesh Type] itself is not displayed.
iv. Under each tab, set the parameters.
[Basic Setting]:
This tab allows you to specify the mesh type, whether to create air regions and higher-order
elements, whether to preserve the existing mesh, and so on.
[Element Size]:
This tab allows you to specify the size of the elements generated in the part or air region.
[Slide Division]:
This tab becomes active when selecting [Slide Mesh] under [Mesh Type]. This tab allows you
to set the parameters for the Slide Mesh function.
[Solid Modification]:
This tab becomes active in a 3D model. This tab allows you to specify options for modifying
solid models.
[Adaptive]:
This tab becomes active for magnetic field analysis, electric field static analysis, and electric
field frequency analysis. This tab allows you to set the parameters for the Adaptive Mesh
function.
[Parallel Process]:
This tab become active for magnetic field analysis, thermal analysis, structural analysis, elec-
tric field analysis, and thermal stress analysis. This tab does not become active for transformer
analysis. This tab allows you to specify the number of cores used during mesh generation on
machines that perform solid model mesh generation.
v. Click [OK].
5. Set the function used for mesh generation.
In addition to optional functions, there may be other settings required depending on the mesh
property settings.
For example, selecting [Extruded Mesh] or [Extruded Mesh (Automatic element size)] in
[Method] in the Mesh Properties dialog, the element size in the extrusion direction can be set.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click [Mesh].
ii. Select the options to use.
For details on how to use some of the functions, see “Using Options for Generating Mesh”
on page 388 and “Using Options for Editing Mesh Models” on page 400.
381
Operations
• When creating a slide mesh in a 3D model, the element size in the axial or width direction
of the slide surface can be specified.
• When creating an extruded mesh, the parts for creating an extruded mesh and the direc-
tion to adjust the number of subdivided elements when generating the extruded mesh can
be specified.
• When using the extended slide function, the creation region of the slide mesh and the
number of divisions in the circumferential direction can be specified.
iii. Set parameters on the setting panel for each function.
iv. Click [OK].
The functions set are added under [Mesh] in the [Project Manager] tree. When right-clicking
a function, [Edit] or [Delete] is available.
6. Generate or preview a mesh.
Depending on the conditions and functions used, mesh generation may be performed during
analysis, so mesh cannot be generated on JMAG-Designer, and only mesh preview is possible.
MEMO
MEMO Mesh generation will be performed during analysis when the following functions or condi-
tions are used:
• Adaptive Mesh
• [Generate Mesh at Each Step] in the [Mesh Properties] dialog (patch mesh function)
• Layered Mesh
• Multi-Layer Coating
• Extended Slide (used until V.18.0)
• Morphing
• Eccentricity function for Rotation Motion condition in magnetic field analysis
• [Use Strain Region] function of Residual Strain condition in magnetic field analysis and iron loss
analysis
MEMO When [Generate Mesh at Each Step] is used, the mesh previewed and the mesh used in the
analysis are different. This is because the air region mesh generated at each analysis step by [Generate
Mesh at Each Step] can not be previewed.
Run mesh generation in the foreground:

ii. Select [Generate] or [Preview].
382
MEMO If executing mesh generation of multiple cases is desired, use preinstalled script [Mesh
Generation for All Cases].
When the mesh generation is completed, [View Mesh] is displayed, and the mesh model is
displayed in the graphics window.
If mesh generation fails, an error or warning message is displayed under [Report] in the [Proj-
ect Manager] tree. Double click to check the details of the message. If the cause of the error is
from the geometry of the model, at the same time the place that caused the error is high-
lighted.
In accordance with the message, take corrective action.
• In the case of an error, modify the geometry or parameters and regenerate the mesh.
If the memory shortage error occurs, please consider measures such as mesh generation on
a machine with more memory, or increasing the element size to reduce the number of ele-
ments.
• In the case of a warning, check whether the places the message pertains to have an effect
on the analysis results.
If it can be determined that the effect is large, modify the geometry or parameters in the
model before mesh generation and regenerate the mesh.
If it can be determined that the influence is great, modify the shape or parameter in the
model before mesh generation and regenerate the mesh. However, if a considerable differ-
ence in the magnetic flux density or current density distribution is seen in the analysis
results, modify the geometry or parameters, regenerate the mesh, and re-execute the anal-
ysis.
Run mesh generation in the background using JMAG-Scheduler:

ii. To generate the mesh, select [Generate (Submit to Queue)] > [Current Case] or [All
Cases].
To preview the mesh, select [Preview (Submit to Queue)] > [Current case] or [All
Cases].
The [Submit to Queue] dialog is displayed.
383
Operations

MEMO A JMAG-Designer license is required to perform mesh generation on a local machine.
MEMO A JW_ACIS_REMOTE_MESH license is required to run mesh generation in the back-
ground using a remote machine.
iv. Click [OK].
A job for mesh generation is added to JMAG-Scheduler.
When [Submit Queue] is selected in the [Submit to Queue] dialog, the jobs added to JMAG-
Scheduler will be executed in order.
When [Waiting] is selected in the [Submit to Queue] dialog, switch the job added to JMAG-
Scheduler from the [Wait] state to the [Queued] state.
MEMO While jobs are being executed in JMAG-Scheduler, it is okay to execute or end the oper-
ation of another project in JMAG-Designer.
v. After the job is finished, in the [Project Manager] tree, right-click [Mesh].
vi. Select [Check Generated Mesh] > [Current Case] or [All Cases].
The generated mesh is loaded into the study.
7. Delete duplicate nodes.
Duplicate nodes are multiple nodes at the same coordinates (point) generated during mesh gen-
eration.
If an analysis is performed with duplicate nodes, the conditions set in the model will not be used
correctly during the analysis resulting in incorrect results being output. Check if there are unnec-
essary duplicated nodes in the mesh model used, and merge the duplicated nodes at each point
into one node if necessary.
MEMO Use this function for models with generated mesh. If a function that generates mesh during
analysis is used, it is unnecessary to use this function.
ii. Select [Delete Duplicate Nodes].
iii. In the [Delete Duplicate Nodes] setting panel, set the parameters.
iv. Click [Detected] under [Detected Duplicate Nodes].
The duplicate nodes in the model are detected, and the number of duplicate nodes is dis-
played in the [Delete Duplicate Nodes] setting panel.
v. Check where these duplicate nodes are, and if these duplicated nodes are not
needed, click [OK].
Click [Cancel] if they are needed.
If [OK] was clicked, [Delete Duplicate Nodes] is added to the [Project Manager] tree. When
a JCF file containing mesh data is exported from a study with [Delete Duplicate Nodes]
added, the duplicate nodes at each point are merged into a single node.
For details on evaluating generated mesh, see the description for “Evaluating Generated Mesh”
on page 387.
384
Generating Mesh Leaving Existing Mesh Untouched

For models that are a combination of mesh and solids (regions), meshes can only be generated for
solids (regions) while leaving the existing mesh.
Additionally, only air regions can be created in JMAG-Designer for mesh models created with anal-
ysis software other than JMAG.
1. Prepare a mesh model.

• When importing a mesh model into JMAG-Designer, please see the description in“Import-
ing Mesh Models into JMAG-Designer from Files” on page 102.
• When creating a mesh model with Geometry Editor, see “Creating Mesh Models Using
2. Delete unnecessary meshes as necessary.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click the mesh model.
ii. Select [Change Link to Geometry Editor].
Geometry Editor starts and the mesh model is loaded into Geometry Editor.
iii. In the [Model Manager] tree, right-click a mesh part.
iv. Select [Edit Part].
v. In the [Model Manager] tree, under the mesh part, right-click the mesh.
vi. Select [Delete].
vii.In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click the project.
viii.Select [Geometry Editor] > [Import Geometry].
3. Set the conditions and functions that affect mesh generation before setting the mesh.
See the description in “Generating Mesh in Solid Models or Region Models” on page 380.
The [Mesh Properties] dialog is displayed.
MEMO The [Mesh Properties] dialog can also be opened by clicking the shortcut icon .
iii. For magnetic field transient analysis (or magnetic field frequency analysis), select
[Mesh Type].
iv. Set the parameters under each tab.
To generate mesh while leaving existing mesh, [Preserve the Existing Mesh] in the [Basic Set-
ting] tab must be selected. When generating mesh with [Preserve the Existing Mesh] cleared,
all existing meshes will be deleted and new meshes will be generated.
To create an air region, select [Create Air Region] under [Air Region] on the [Basic Setting]
tab. alternatively, specify [Default Element Size] under [Element Size of Air Region] on the
[Element Size] tab.
v. Click [OK].
385
Operations
For the procedure after this step, see Step 5 and onwards under “Generating Mesh in Solid Mod-
els or Region Models” on page 380.
MEMO Using the local remeshing function, the mesh can partially be recreated.
386
Evaluating Generated Mesh

Mesh quality can be evaluated based on element flatness. Mesh quality effects FEM analysis conver-
gence.
1. Check the mesh quality.

ii. Select [Show Quality].
The [Mesh Quality] dialog is displayed.
MEMO The [Mesh Quality] function in JMAG-Designer is same as [Mesh Quality] function in
Geometry Editor.
iii. Evaluate the mesh quality using numerical values.
The fewer the flat elements there are, the more appropriate the mesh is for analysis. For
details on the items dis-played and the evaluation criteria, see “Parameter Explanation Edi-
tion”.
iv. Click [Close].
2. When generating 2D model mesh, if using options for automatically setting parameter
values related to mesh density, mesh reports can be used to check the automatically
determined parameter values.
By using the following options, the parameter values automatically determined by JMAG can be
checked in mesh reports.
• The [Element Size] tab in the [Mesh Properties] dialog:
[Set Element Size Automatically], [Set Air Region Size Automatically], [Set Density Gradient
Automatically]
• The [Slide Division] tab in the [Mesh Properties] dialog:
[Set Radial Divisions Automatically], [Set Circumferential Divisions Automatically], [Set
Gap Divisions Automatically], [Set Element Size in Motion Direction Automatically]
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, under [Mesh], right-click [Mesh Report].
ii. Select [Report of Current Case] or [Report of All Cases].
Either the [Mesh Report] dialog or the [Mesh Report (All Cases)] dialog is displayed.
iii. Check the parameter values used when generating mesh.
iv. Click [Close].
3. If the generated mesh quality is too low, then correct each parameter value and regen-
erate the mesh.
Right-click [Mesh] under [Study] in the [Project Manager] tree to display [Regenerate] or
[Repreview] in a menu.
MEMO Using the local remeshing function enables mesh to be partially reconstructed.
387
Operations
Using Options for Generating Mesh

The following options can be set:
• Set Element Sizes for Parts, Faces, Edges, and Vertices (page 388)
• Set Element Sizes for Specified Regions in Air Regions (page 389)
• Use the Slide Mesh Function and the Standard Mesh Function ([Extended Slide Plane]) (page
389)
• Use the Slide Mesh Function and the Function That Generates a Mesh at Each Analysis Step
([Extended Slide Plane (Used until V.18.0)]) (page 390)
• Simplify a Part of Model Geometry at Mesh Generation (page 394)
• Generate a Layered Mesh Simulating a Laminated Steel Sheet (page 395)
• Generate Meshes That Take the Thin Film Wire Coatings into Account (page 395)
• Generate a Layered Mesh in Shell or Thin Laminated Solid (page 396)
• Generate the Same Mesh for Multiple Parts (page 397)
• Generate Symmetric Meshes in Models with Rotational Periodicity (page 397)
• Specify Mesh Division of a Surface Using a Result File (page 398)
MEMO The procedures shown here include only the settings necessary for the functions described here.
When actually creating a mesh, use a combination of functions.
Set Element Sizes for Parts, Faces, Edges, and Vertices

Using the Element Size function, the element sizes of parts and faces can be specified. The element
sizes in the vicinity of edges and vertices can also be specified.
When [Extruded Mesh] or [Extruded Mesh (Automatic element size)] is selected as a mesh genera-
tion method for a 3D model, the element sizes for parts and faces in the extrusion direction can be
specified.
1. Set the Element Size function.

ii. Select [Add Size Control] > [Part], [Face], [Edge], [Vertex], [Part (Extrusion Direction)],
or [Face (Extrusion Direction)].
iii. In the [Element Size] setting panel, set the parameters.
iv. Click [OK].
[Element Size] is added under [Mesh] in the [Project Manager] tree. Right-clicking [Element
Size] displays [Edit] or [Delete] in a menu.
2. Generate the mesh.
388
Set Element Sizes for Specified Regions in Air Regions

With the Air Mesh Element Size Control function, the element size of a specified region (rectangu-
lar solid, cylinder) in an air region can be freely specified.
Also, when generating a slide mesh, the element size in the axial or width direction for slide face can
be specified.
1. Prepare a 3D model and set the space element size function.

ii. Select [Add Air Mesh Size Control] > [Box], [Cylinder], or [Slide Face].
Select [Box] to specify a rectangular solid region, [Cylinder] to specify a cylinder region, and
[Slide Face] to specify the element size of a slide face axial direction or width direction.
iii. In the [Air Mesh Element Size Control] setting panel, set the parameters.
iv. Click [OK].
[Air Mesh Element Size] is added under [Mesh] in the [Project Manager] tree. Right-clicking
[Air Mesh Element Size] displays [Edit] or [Delete] in a menu.
Use the Slide Mesh Function and the Standard Mesh Function ([Extended Slide
Plane])
When the Extended Slide function is used, a slide mesh is generated only in a specified region, and a
standard mesh is generated elsewhere.
Unlike the Extended Slide function provided up to and including Version 18, the current Extended
Slide function can be used in Translation Motion models. There is a great advantage in terms of
computation times compared to the function provided up to and including Version 18.
1. Prepare a 3D model and create a magnetic field analysis study.

2. Set conditions and functions that affect mesh generation before setting the mesh.
• Set the Motion conditions.
• When calculating torque/electromagnetic force, set the Torque conditions or Force condi-
tions.
mesh, set the step control in the [Study Properties] dialog.
iii. In the [Mesh Properties] dialog, under the [Basic Setting] tab, select [Slide Mesh] for
[Mesh Type].
iv. Select [Semi Auto Mesh], [Semi Auto Mesh (Automatic element size)], [Extruded
Mesh], or [Extruded Mesh (Automatic element size)] from [Method].
389
Operations
v. Under the [Slide Division] tab, select [Extended Slide Plane].

vi. Click [OK].
5. If the generated mesh is found to not be in good condition, use the Extended Slide
option to set the slide mesh creation region, and generate the mesh again.
ii. Select [Extended Slide (Rotation)] or [Extended Slide (Translation)].
iii. In the [Extended Slide (Rotation)] or [Extended Slide (Translation)] setting panel, set
the parameters.
iv. Click [OK].
[Extended Slide (Rotation)] or [Extended Slide (Translation)] is added under [Solid Model] >
[Study] > [Mesh] in the [Project Manager] tree. Right-clicking [Extended Slide (Rotation)] or
[Extended Slide (Translation)] displays [Edit] or [Delete] in a menu.
Use the Slide Mesh Function and the Function That Generates a Mesh at Each
Analysis Step ([Extended Slide Plane (Used until V.18.0)])
When using the [Extended Slide Plane (Used until V.18.0)] function, a slide mesh can be generated
only within a specified region, while in other regions meshes can be generated at each analysis step.
Since systematic grid meshes are generated in the gap between the rotor and the stator, calculation
accuracy is more easily obtained than when only the mesh generation function is used at each analy-
sis step.

• Set the Rotation Motion conditions.
tions.
mesh, set the step control in the [Study Properties] dialog.
[Mesh Type].
iv. Select [Semi Auto Mesh], [Semi Auto Mesh (Automatic element size)], [Extruded
Mesh], or [Extruded Mesh (Automatic element size)] from [Method].
v. Under the [Slide Division] tab, select [Extended Slide Plane (Used until V.18.0)].
vi. Click [OK].
390
4. Specify the creation region for the rotation slide mesh and the number of division in the
circumferential direction.
The extrusion direction is the same as the Motion condition axial direction.
MEMO If [Standard Meshing] or [Generate Mesh at Each Step] is selected and the extrusion direc-
tion is not specified, JMAG will automatically determine the extrusion direction from the model
geometry.
ii. Select [Extended Slide (Rotation)].
iii. In the [Extended Slide (Rotation)] setting panel, set the parameters.
iv. Click [OK].
[Extended Slide (Rotation)] is added under [Solid Model] > [Study] > [Mesh] in the [Project
Manager] tree. Right-clicking [Extended Slide (Rotation)] displays [Edit] or [Delete] in a
menu.
5. Preview the mesh.
When the [Extended Slide Plane (Used until V.18.0)] function is set in the study, the menu dis-
played when right-clicking [Mesh] under [Study] in the [Project Manager] tree is [Preview]
instead of [Generate].
Generate a Mesh with a Differences in Coarseness in Each Direction

Using the Extruded Mesh function, meshes with coarseness differences in each direction can be gen-
erated.
For example, when selecting [Auto Mesh] or [Semi Auto Mesh] as a method when generating a rota-
tion slide mesh, increasing the number of divisions in the circumferential direction automatically
increases the number of division in the axial direction. Thus many more elements than the necessary
number of elements necessary to obtain sufficient accuracy are created.
In such a case, by using the Extruded Mesh function, you can generate a coarse mesh in the axial
direction and a fine mesh in the circumferential direction suppressing the number of elements in the
whole model.
MEMO An extruded mesh cannot be used in combination with a translation slide mesh.
391
Operations
 When using an extruded mesh and a rotation slide mesh:

MEMO When using a rotation slide mesh, the extrusion direction is the same as the Motion condition
axial direction.

• When creating a slide mesh or rotation periodic mesh (automatic), set the Motion condi-
tions.
• When creating slide mesh, if [Set Step Control based on Motion Condition] is checked, set
the step control in the [Study Properties] dialog.
tions.
[Mesh Type].
iv. Select [Extruded Mesh] or [Extruded Mesh (Automatic element size)] from [Method].
v. Set [Prioritise Fillet and Taper Geometry Extrusion].
When this checkbox is selected, an extruded mesh (triangular prism element) is generated on
the fillets and tapers.
When this checkbox is cleared, tetrahedral elements are generated for fillets and tapers. No
extruded mesh is generated.
vi. Under the [Element Size] tab, set the element size in the extrusion direction.
The element size specified here applies to the whole extruded mesh.
However, for a part or face the extruded mesh element size functions take precedence.
vii.Click [OK].
4. If necessary, set the element size in the extrusion direction.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, under the solid model > [Study], right-click [Mesh].
ii. Select [Add Size Control] > [Part (Extrusion Direction)] or [Face (Extrusion Direction)].
iii. In the [Element Size Control (Extrusion Direction)] setting panel, set the parameters.
iv. Click [OK].
[Element Size] is added under [Solid Model] > [Study] > [Mesh] in the [Project Manager]
tree. Right-clicking [Element Size] displays [Edit] or [Delete] in a menu.
When selecting [Prioritise Fillet and Taper Geometry Extrusion], check the fillets and tapers after
mesh generation. There is a possibility that strain may have been produced due to the triangular
prism elements not being able to fully represent the geometry. In that case, clear [Prioritise Fillet
and Taper Geometry Extrusion].
392
 When using an extruded mesh and a standard mesh (or a mesh generated at each
analysis step):
1. Prepare a 3D model and create a study.

• When creating a rotation periodic mesh (automatic), set the motion conditions.
tions.
iii. In the [Mesh Properties] dialog, under the [Basic Setting] tab, select [Standard Mesh-
ing] or [Generate Mesh at Each Step] for [Mesh Type].
iv. Select [Extruded Mesh] or [Extruded Mesh (Automatic element size)] from [Method].
v. Under the [Element Size] tab, specify the element size in the extrusion direction.
The element size specified here applies to the whole extruded mesh. However, for a part or
face the extruded mesh element size functions take precedence.
vi. Click [OK].
4. Specify the extrusion direction and the part to be generated from the extruded mesh.
When selecting [Standard Meshing] or [Generate Mesh at Each Step] for [Mesh Type], set the
extrusion direction. If the extrusion direction is not specified, JMAG will automatically deter-
mine the extrusion direction from the geometry of the model.
ii. Select [Extrusion Direction].
iii. In the [Extrusion Direction] setting panel, set the parameters.
iv. Click [OK].
[Extrusion Direction] is added under [Solid Model] > [Study] > [Mesh] in the [Project Man-
ager] tree. Right-clicking [Extrusion Direction] displays [Edit] or [Delete] in a menu.
5. If necessary, specify the element size in the extrusion direction.
ii. Select [Add Size Control] > [Part (Extrusion Direction)] or [Face (Extrusion Direction)].
iii. In the [Element Size Control (Extrusion Direction)] setting panel, set the parameters.
iv. Click [OK].
[Element Size] is added under [Mesh] in the [Project Manager] tree. Right-clicking [Element
Size] displays [Edit] or [Delete] in a menu.
393
Operations
Simplify a Part of Model Geometry at Mesh Generation

By using the Defeature function, when performing mesh generation it is possible to simplify the
geometry and reduce the number of elements in the model. Use this function in places where there
is little influence on analysis accuracy.
1. Prepare a 3D or 2D model and create a study.

2. Set the Defeature function.
ii. Select [Defeature] > [Hole], [Fillet], or [Chamfer].
iii. In the defeature setting panel, set the parameters.
iv. Click [OK].
[Mesh Defeature] is added under [Mesh] in the [Project Manager] tree. Right-clicking [Mesh
Defeature] displays [Edit] or [Delete] in a menu.
Generate a Mesh That Takes the Skin Effect into Account

By using the Skin Depth function, you can generate a layered mesh (skin mesh) from the surface of
a part towards the interior. Use this function when taking into account the skin effect during analy-
sis.
1. If necessary, calculate the theoretical value of the skin depth in order to determine the
region in which to generate a mesh taking into account the skin effect.
In JMAG, it is recommended to enter a value twice the theoretical value of the skin depth and
less than half of the element size for the whole model for the region for generating the mesh tak-
ing into account the skin effect.
The theoretical value of the skin depth can be calculated from the following equation.
2 -
δ = -----------
ωσμ
δ : skin depth (m), ω = 2πf : angular frequency ( f : frequency (Hz)), σ : electrical conductiv-
ity (1/ohm m), μ : permeability (H/m)
2. Set the Skin Depth function.
ii. Select [Add Size Control] > [Skin Depth].
iii. In the [Skin Depth] setting panel, et the parameters.
iv. Click [OK].
[Skin Depth] is added under [Mesh] in the [Project Manager] tree. Right-clicking [Skin
Depth] displays [Edit] and [Delete] in a menu.
394

Generate a Layered Mesh Simulating a Laminated Steel Sheet

By using the Layered Mesh function, it is possible to generate a layered mesh in the neighborhood of
a specified surface of a solid. Use this function when simulating a laminated steel plate that makes
up only a part of the model is desired.
MEMO Only 3D models are supported.
1. When setting materials other than air for electromagnetic steel plate and insulating
layer portions of the layered mesh, add these materials to the study before setting the
layered mesh.
i. Select the electromagnetic steel plate or insulating layer material from the [Toolbox]
material list.
ii. Drag and drop the material to under [Solid Model] > [Study] > [Materials] in the
2. Set the Layered Mesh function.
ii. Select [Add Size Control] > [Layered Mesh].
iii. In the [Layered Mesh] setting panel, set the parameters.
iv. Click [OK].
[Layered Mesh] is added under [Solid Model] > [Study] > [Mesh] in the [Project Manager]
tree. Right-clicking [Layered Mesh] displays [Edit] and [Delete] in a menu.
When setting materials for electromagnetic steel plate and insulating layer portions of the lay-
ered mesh, the materials are displayed under [Layered Mesh] in the [Project Manager] tree.
If a layered mesh is set for a study, the menu displayed when right-clicking [Mesh] under [Study]
in the [Project Manager] tree is [Preview] instead of [Generate].
Generate Meshes That Take the Thin Film Wire Coatings into Account
By using the Multi-Layer Coating function, it is possible to generate a layered mesh in the neighbor-
hood of a region surface. Use this function if taking into account the magnetic/nonmagnetic thin
film covering a wire is desired.
MEMO Only 2D models are supported.
MEMO When using the Multi-Layer Coating function, there is no need to model the wires separately
from the layer coatings covering them. Model the wire where the size includes the wire and the layer
coating.
1. Add the materials to be applied to the coating layer to the study.

i. Select the coating layer material from the [Toolbox] material list.
395
Operations
ii. Drag and drop the material to under a 2D model > study > [Materials] in the [Project
Manager] tree.
2. Set the Multi-Layer Coating function.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, under the 2D model > [Study], right-click [Mesh].
ii. Select [Add Size Control] > [Multi-Layer Coating].
iii. In the [Multi-Layer Coating] setting panel, set the parameters.
iv. Click [OK].
[Multi-Layer Coating] is added under [2D Model] > [Study] > [Mesh] in the [Project Man-
ager] tree. Right-clicking [Multi-Layer Coating] displays [Edit] and [Delete] in a menu.
When a material is set for a coating layer, the material is displayed below [Multi-Layer Coat-
ing] in the [Project Manager] tree.
If the Multi-Layer Coating function is set for a study, the menu displayed when right-clicking
[Mesh] under [Study] in the [Project Manager] tree is [Preview] instead of [Generate].
Generate a Layered Mesh in Shell or Thin Laminated Solid

Based on a shell or laminated solid, a thick layered mesh is generated.
Use [Thin Shell Mesh] when creating based on a shell, and use [Thin Solid Mesh] when creating
based on a solid.
MEMO In magnetic field analysis, thermal analysis, electric field analysis, and thermal stress analysis a
model consisting only of shells cannot be used. If using shells are desired, use thin shell meshes (shells). If
using laminated solids are desired, use thin shell meshes (solids).
1. In advance, model a shell or laminated solid.

2. Set the Thin Shell/Solid Mesh function.
ii. Select [Add Size Control] > [Thin Shell Mesh] or [Thin Solid Mesh].
iii. In the [Thin Shell Mesh] or [Thin Solid Mesh] setting panel, set the parameters.
iv. Click [OK].
[Thin Shell Mesh] or [Thin Solid Mesh] is added under [Solid Model] > [Study] > [Mesh] in
the [Project Manager] tree. Right-clicking [Thin Shell] or [Thin Solid] displays [Edit] and
[Delete] in a menu.
396
Generate the Same Mesh for Multiple Parts

When using the Part Relation function, the same mesh can be generated for parts with parent-child
relationships set (the meshes of parts corresponding to “parent” are applied to parts corresponding to
“child”).
Use this function when improvement in analysis accuracy is desired. The symmetry of the mesh
influences the analysis accuracy such as for cogging torque.
MEMO Only 2D models are supported. However, when the Section condition is set in a 3D model for
magnetic field analysis, the part relation function can be used.
1. Set the part relation function.

ii. Select [Part Relation].
iii. In the [Part Relation] setting panel, set the parameters.
iv. Click [OK].
[Part Relation] is added under [Mesh] in the [Project Manager] tree. Right-clicking [Part
Relation] displays [Edit] and [Delete] in a menu.
Generate Symmetric Meshes in Models with Rotational Periodicity

By using the Rotation Periodic Mesh function, symmetric meshes can be generated for a model with
rotational periodicity in geometry. The symmetry of the mesh influences the analysis accuracy such
as for cogging torque.
 Automatic
JMAG discerns the symmetry of the model and generates a symmetric mesh in the neighborhood of
a gap.
1. In advance, make the necessary settings.

• Set the Rotation Motion conditions.
• For a 2D model, select [Method 3 (Automatic element size)] or [Method 2 (Used from
V.10.3)] in [Generation Method] under the [Basic Setting] tab in the [Mesh Properties] dia-
log.
• For 3D models, select one of the following in [Generation Method] under the [Basic Setting]
tab in the [Mesh Properties] dialog:
• [Semi Auto Mesh]
• [Extruded Mesh]
• For 3D models, clear [Subdivide Automatically] under the [Basic Setting] tab in the [Mesh
Properties] dialog.
2. Set Rotation Periodic Mesh function.
397
Operations

ii. Select [Rotation Periodic Mesh] > [Automatic].
iii. In the [Rotation Periodic Mesh (Automatic)] setting panel, set the parameters.
iv. Click [OK].
[Rotation Periodic Mesh (Automatic)] is added under [Mesh] in the [Project Manager] tree.
Right-clicking [Rotation Periodic Mesh (Automatic)] displays [Edit] and [Delete] in a menu.
 Advanced settings
From the parameters specified by the user, a symmetric mesh is generated.
1. In advance, make the necessary settings.

• For a 2D model, select [Method 3 (Automatic element size)] or [Method 2 (Used from
V.10.3)] in [Generation Method] under the [Basic Setting] tab in the [Mesh Properties] dia-
log.
• For 3D models, select one of the following in [Generation Method] under the [Basic Setting]
tab in the [Mesh Properties] dialog:
• [Semi Auto Mesh]
• [Extruded Mesh]
• For 3D models, clear [Subdivide Automatically] under the [Basic Setting] tab in the [Mesh
Properties] dialog.
MEMO If [Extruded Mesh] or [Extruded Mesh (Automatic element size)] is selected, [Axial
Gap] in [Gap Type] in rotation periodic mesh (advanced settings) cannot be selected.
2. Set Rotation Periodic Mesh function.
ii. Select [Rotation Period Mesh] > [Detailed].
iii. In the [Rotation Period Mesh (Detailed)] setting panel, set the parameters.
iv. Click [OK].
[Rotation Period Mesh (Detailed)] is added under [Mesh] in the [Project Manager] tree.
Right-clicking [Rotation Period Mesh (Detailed)] displays [Edit] and [Delete] in a menu.
Specify Mesh Division of a Surface Using a Result File

Using a Constraint Mesh function, the specified surface can be divided in the same way as the mesh
has been divided, at the same places, in the result file to be referenced.
398
MEMO For magnetic field analysis, zooming analysis can be performed by using the Constraint Mesh
function and the Vector Potential Boundary condition.
1. Set the Constraint Mesh function.

ii. Select [Constraint Mesh].
iii. In the [Constraint Mesh] setting panel, set the parameters.
iv. Click [OK].
[Constraint Mesh] is added under [Mesh] in the [Project Manager] tree. Right-clicking [Con-
straint Mesh] displays [Edit] and [Delete] in a menu.
399
Operations
Using Options for Editing Mesh Models

The following options can be set:
• Change Mesh Model Dimensions (page 400)
• Apply Skews to Mesh Models (page 401)
• Regenerate a Mesh for Specified Regions (page 402)
Change Mesh Model Dimensions

Using the Morphing function, the dimensions of a mesh model can be changed without changing
the number of nodes or the number of elements.
1. Prepare a study.
It does matter whether or not there is a mesh.
2. Enable or disable the [Fix Surrounding Nodes] option as required.
If this option is enabled, if the Morphing function moves its set target surfaces and/or edges, the
nodes surrounding these surfaces and/or edges do not move at all.
Depending on whether the [Fix Surrounding Nodes] option is enabled or disabled, [Morph-
ing Mesh (Fix Surrounding Nodes)] or [Morphing Mesh (Move Surrounding Nodes)] is dis-
played, respectively.
ii. To enable the [Fix Surrounding Nodes] option, select [Morphing Mesh (Move Sur-
rounding Nodes)] > [Fix Surrounding Nodes].
To disable the [Do not move neighboring nodes] option, select [Morphing Mesh (Fix
Surrounding Nodes)] > [Fix Surrounding Nodes].
3. Set the Morphing function.
ii. Select [Morphing Mesh (Move Surrounding Nodes)] or [Morphing Mesh (Fix Sur-
rounding Nodes)] > [Linear], [Radial], or [Circumferential].
iii. In the morphing setting panel, set the parameters.
iv. Click [OK].
[Mesh Morphing] is added under [Mesh] in the [Project Manager] tree. Right-clicking [Mesh
Morphing] displays [Edit] and [Delete] in a menu.
4. To limit the movement from the Morphing function, set the mesh morphing constraint
for faces or edges adjacent to moving faces (or edges).
If the mesh morphing constraint is set, it is difficult for geometry failure to occur due to morph-
ing.
rounding Nodes)] > [Constraint].
400
iii. In the [Mesh Morphing Constraint] setting panel, set the parameters.
iv. Click [OK].
[Mesh Morphing Constraint] is added under [Mesh] in the [Project Manager] tree. Right-
clicking the mesh morphing constraint, [Edit] and [Delete] are displayed in a menu.
5. To limit the movement from the Morphing function, specify the places for preserving
shapes (planes, cylindrical surfaces, straight lines, circular arcs) even after morphing.
If the shape is specified, it is difficult for geometry failure to occur due to morphing.
rounding Nodes)] > [Geometry Type].
iii. In the [Mesh Morphing Geometry Type] setting panel, set the parameters.
iv. Click [OK].
[Mesh Morphing Geometry Type] is added under [Mesh] in the [Project Manager] tree.
Right-clicking [Mesh Morphing Geometry Type] displays [Edit] and [Delete] in a menu.
6. Check the geometry after morphing.
ii. Select [Morphing Preview].
The morphing preview is displayed.
• To cancel morphing preview, right-click [Mesh] in the study and reselect [Morphing Pre-
view]. The checkbox on the left side of [Morphing Preview] becomes cleared.
• If morphing parameter values are changed after morphing, after a message is displayed the
parameter values will revert to their previous parameter values for the mesh before morph-
ing.
Apply Skews to Mesh Models

Apply Skew Control functions can be used to apply skews to mesh models without skews generated
with Geometry Editor and in addition to software other than JMAG. Apply Skew Control functions
support linear skews and V skews.
1. Configure skew application settings.

ii. Select [Apply Skew].
iii. In the [Apply Skew Control] setting panel, set the parameters.
iv. Click [OK].
[Mesh Morphing Skew] is added under [Mesh] in the [Project Manager] tree. Right-click this
[Mesh Morphing Skew] to display [Edit] and [Delete] in the menu.
When a skew is not applied, [Mesh Morphing Skew] in the [Project Manager] tree will dis-
play a warning icon .
401
Operations
2. Configure models before applying skews when using skin mesh functions.
It is necessary that skin mesh is set before applying skews.
3. Apply a skew.
When only a skew is applied:

ii. Select [Update].
After the operation finishes, a message dialog is displayed.
When the skew is successfully applied, the [Mesh Morphing Skew] icon in the [Project Man-
ager] will change from to .
iii. If a skew is not applied as intended, right-click [Mesh] in the [Project Manager] tree,
and select [Undo].
The model will return to a state prior to the skew being applied.
iv. Edit the settings, and apply the skew again.
While applying a skew and also using automatic mesh functions to generate mesh for
gap parts:
iii. In the [Mesh Properties] dialog, under the [Basic Setting] tab, select [Skew Gap Fill-
ing].
iv. Click [OK].
v. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click [Mesh].
vi. Select [Regenerate] or [Preview].
Mesh is generated for skew applications and gap parts.
Regenerate a Mesh for Specified Regions

Using the Local Remesh function, a mesh can be regenerated for a limited region.
1. Prepare a study.
Whether or not there is a mesh is irrelevant.
2. Set the Local Remesh function.
ii. Select [Add Size Control] > [Box (Remesh)], [Cylinder (Remesh)], [Rectangle
(Remesh)], or [Ring (Remesh)].
iii. In the [Element Size Control (Remesh)] setting panel, set the parameters.
iv. Click [OK].
[Element Size (Remesh)] is added under [Mesh] in the [Project Manager] tree. Right-clicking
[Element Size (Remesh)] displays [Edit] and [Delete] in a menu.
402
3. Regenerate the mesh in a specified region.

ii. Select [Update].
IMPORTANT If [Regenerate] is selected at this point, local remeshing is applied after

a mesh for the whole model has been regenerated.
MEMO After applying local remeshing, right-click right-clicking [Mesh] under [Study] in the
[Project Manager] tree and select [Undo] to return to the mesh before applying.
The undo (UNDO) function cannot return to the state before local remeshing was applied.
403
Operations
Restoring Mesh Models to Their State Before Mesh Regeneration

If a mesh is generated in the model of an existing study which has a parent model with a mesh, the
mesh can be reverted back to the state before generation. The meaning of “the state in which the
parent model of the current study has a mesh” is in line with, for example, the following cases:
• When the mesh is generated manually in Geometry Editor
• When importing a mesh model from a JCF file, Nastran file, or Universal file
1. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click [Mesh].

2. Select [Revert].
Showing/Hiding Mesh
 Show/hide mesh
In the [Project Manager] tree, under [Mesh], select or clear [Mesh Region] (or [Air Region] under
[Mesh Region]).
 Switch between showing/hiding mesh (shell/beam) at once

In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click [Mesh] and select [View] > [Show All Shell], [Hide All
Shell], [Show All Beam], or [Hide All Beam].
404
Creating a New Mesh Model Containing Only the Mesh of the

Selected Parts
It is possible to duplicate only the mesh of a specified part from mesh generated in the current case
and add this to a project as a new mesh model.
MEMO Materials and conditions set in the model of the current case will not be inherited by newly gen-
erated mesh models.
1. When a current study has multiple cases, operate case control to display the case used
to create a new mesh model in the graphics window.
A mesh model is generated from the mesh of the case displayed in the graphics window.
2. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click [Mesh].
3. Select [Create Model From Mesh].
4. In the [Create Model From Mesh] dialog, set the parameters.
5. Click [OK].
A new mesh model is created based on settings in the [Create Model From Mesh] dialog and is
added to the project.
405
Operations
406
Coil Winding Settings
Automate Coil Windings/Cage Settings
This chapter explains the procedure for winding setting using the Winding Setting function.
In magnetic field analysis, there are two methods for energizing conductors of the FEM model using an electric
circuit:
Method Description
Manual setting If settings are created manually, energization to the conductor can be set regardless of the shape
of the analysis model. You can determine the preferred connections of conductors (series and
parallel) and the resistance value of each conductor.
On the other hand, when there are a large number of conductors in the model, a large number
of circuit components and analysis conditions must be set, requiring considerable amount of
time and effort.
Using the Wind- The Winding Setting function can be used for analysis models in which conductors of the
ing Setting func- same shape are arranged periodically in the rotation direction.
tion Using the Winding Setting function, multiple analysis conditions and circuit components can
be set with only a few settings. The Winding Setting function is particularly effective when
there are a large number of conductors in the analysis model.
The following three settings are required to use the Winding Setting function:
• Adding winding components to the circuit:
The winding component is a circuit component that functions in conjunction with the
Winding Setting function. The FEM Coil components and FEM Conductor components
are arranged in the sub circuit of the winding component according to the setting in the
Winding Setting function.
• Settings for the region where conductors are passed through:
This setting is used to make the program recognize the position of the conductor.
• Parameter setting of Winding Setting function:
Number of slots, number of poles, connections of conductors (series, parallel), resistance
value of conductors, etc.
MEMO For details on winding setting parameters, see “Winding Setting” under “Parameter Explanation Edition”.

• Setting Windings Automatically (page 410)
409
Operations
Setting Windings Automatically

1. Create a model in Geometry Editor, import to JMAG-Designer, and create a magnetic
field transient analysis study.
The Winding Setting function can also be used for coil shapes created using coil templates and
wire templates.
2. Add a circuit to the study, and position the winding components.
ii. Click [Add Circuit].
The Circuit Editor starts, and an empty circuit is displayed.
[Circuit] is added under [Study] in the [Project Manager] tree.
iii. Position circuit components in the Circuit Editor window.
A circuit component assumed to be used in conjunction with winding settings is known as a
winding component. The following types of winding components are available:
• Winding Three Phase Coil
• Winding Multiphase Coil
• Winding Brush Motor
• Winding Three Phase Conductor
• Winding Multiphase Conductor
• Winding Cage
If these winding components are used in a study with no winding settings, then an error will
occur during analysis.
MEMO Depending on the coil shape, FEM Conductor conditions may not be set automatically
using the Winding Setting function. See “Parameter Explanation Edition”.
iv. Connect the terminal of each circuit component with wires.
v. Double click each component in the Circuit Editor window and open the component
properties setting panels, and set the parameters.
vi. Select [File] > [Close] from the Circuit Editor menu bar.
Or, click [Close] in the Circuit Editor
3. Add a winding setting to the study.
ii. Click [Add Winding].
[Winding] is added under [Study] in the [Project Manager] tree. [Region Setting] and
[Winding Setting] are displayed under [Winding].
MEMO Unless there is at least one setting added under [Region Setting], then [Winding Setting]
cannot be performed.
4. Define the model winding region.
i. Right-click [Region Setting] under [Winding] in the [Project Manager] tree.
ii. Select [Add Region (Coil Template)] or [Add Region (Geometry)] for coil geometry
created with the coil template function of the Geometry Editor.
410
Automate Coil Windings/Cage Settings
Select [Add Region (Geometry)] for coil geometry created without the coil template
function of the Geometry Editor.
For coil geometry created with the coil template function, there are fewer parameters to set
when selecting [Add Region (Coil Template)] than selecting [Add Region (Geometry)].
Click [Add Region (Coil Template) to display the [Winding Region (Coil Template)] setting
panel.
Click [Add Region (Geometry)] to display the [Winding Region (Geometry)] setting panel.
iv. Click [OK].
The winding setting is added under [Winding] > [Region Setting] in the [Project Manager]
tree. Additionally, a menu displayed when right-clicking on [Winding Setting] under [Wind-
ing] in the [Project Manager] tree can now be selected.
MEMO By right-clicking the winding setting, [Edit], [Duplicate], and [Delete] can be performed
from the menu.
5. Configure the winding setting.
i. Right-click [Winding Setting] under [Winding] in the [Project Manager] tree.
ii. Click [Add 3-Phase Winding], [Add Multiphase Winding], [Add Brush Motor Wind-
ing], or [Add Cage].
The [Winding Setting] dialog is displayed.
iii. Configure the winding setting properties.
• Set coil specifications in the [Coil] tab for three-phase winding settings, multi-phase
winding settings, and brush motor winding settings.
• For cage settings, set End Ring specifications in the [Cage] tab.
• Set coil windings in the [Winding] tab.
• Check coil windings by changing between the [Model View] tab, the [Winding View] tab,
and the [Slot View] tab on the right.
iv. Click [OK].
6. Configure other required settings such as materials, conditions, and study properties,
and generate mesh.
411
Operations
412
Running Analyses
Running Analyses from JMAG-Designer
This chapter describes the procedure for executing studies and cases of a project that is open in JMAG-Designer.
MEMO When running an analysis from JMAG-Designer, its progress can be checked. However, no other operations
can be performed during analysis in JMAG-Designer.

• Using Cache for Calculations with Environment Variables (page 416)
• Running Analyses on Studies While They Are Displayed (page 417)
• Monitoring the Results of a Running Analysis (page 418)
• Cancelling an Analysis (page 419)
• Running Analyses on All Studies in Models (page 419)
• Resuming Interrupted Analyses or Continuing Completed Analyses (page 420)
• Running Calculations Continuously Using Analysis Groups (page 421)
• Checking That Analyses Completed Correctly (page 423)
MEMO For the execution of a one-way coupled analysis, see “Running One-Way Coupled Analyses” on page 671.
MEMO For the execution of a direct coupled analysis, see “Running Direct Coupled Analyses” on page 689.
415
Operations
Using Cache for Calculations with Environment Variables

By using cache for calculations, the number of file transfers between modules is reduced, which then
reduces the time required for calculations in each case.
 Notes
• In JMAG-Designer Version 22.1, cache can be used in the following situations:
• Multi-case calculations such as optimization and parametric analysis using 2D models.
However, when using cache for topology optimization, JobSystem must also be used together
with cache. For details on JobSystem, see “Commands for Executing JMAG Programs” on
page 592.
• Analysis using licenses for JMAG-Express (FR licenses)
• Analysis run directly from JMAG-Express
• Analysis run directly from JMAG-Designer:
Speed-priority mode thermal steady state/transient state studies
Speed-priority mode structural static analysis studies
2D efficiency map analysis studies (reduced order model)
Analyses not listed here will not use cache, even if the JMAG_USE_CACHE value is set to 1.
• When using cache for calculations, the following functions cannot be used:
• Results Monitoring function (page 418)
• Direct coupled analysis
 Environment Variables
For the procedures for setting environment variables, see “Overview Edition”.
Environment variable Value Description

JMAG_USE_CACHE 0: Do not use cache for When JMAG_USE_CACHE=1
calculations (default) 1.If the cache server has not been started when
1: Use cache for calcula- the analysis starts, then JMAG-Designer or
tions ExecSolver will start the cache server.
ExecSolver is a module that manages solver
modules such as magnetic field analysis and
thermal analysis.
2.JMAG-Designer or ExecSolver adds the JCF
file for each case to the cache server.
3.The solver module receives the URLs of the
JCF files on the cache server from Exec-
Solver and runs the calculations.
4.After the calculations have finished, the JCF
files are removed from the cache server.
When JMAG_USE_CACHE=0
JCF files are transferred between modules.
416
Running Analyses on Studies While They Are Displayed

Execute an analysis on the case displayed in the graphics window of JMAG-Designer or all cases
included in the displayed study.
MEMO The “active case” indicates the model that is currently being displayed in the graphics window.
The case to display can be switched using the case control bar.

i. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click [Study].
ii. Select [Run Active Case] to run only an active case in the study.
Select [Run All Cases] to run all cases in the study.
The calculation starts, and the [Run Analysis] dialog indicating the progress of analysis is dis-
played.
MEMO The [Run All Cases] and [Run Active Case] cannot be selected when the Snapshot Cal-
culation function is set in a magnetic field analysis. Use JMAG-Scheduler when running a snap-
shot calculation.
MEMO When [Run All Cases] is selected, an analysis is run for only cases that do not have results
output and cases with results are disregarded. Cases that have been interrupted with only results
output up to the middle will also be disregarded.
Cases without the case control checkbox selected are also skipped.
2. While the analysis is in progress, confirm the progress of the analysis in the [Run Analy-
sis] dialog.
For the details, see “Parameter Explanation Edition”.
When the analysis is complete, the [Messages] dialog is displayed.
3. In the [Message] dialog, confirm whether the analysis was completed successfully.
The name of the study, mesh information, the result file, and the calculation folder directory are
displayed in the [Message] dialog. Clicking on part of the path displayed in [Calculation Folder]
opens that folder.
MEMO The solver report can also be used to confirm the convergence status of the calculation. For
details, see “Checking That Analyses Completed Correctly” on page 423.
MEMO After the analysis is completed, [Result Items] under [Study] in the [Project Manager] tree is
changed to [Results].
4. Confirming Results with JMAG-Designer.
For details, see “Displaying Results” on page 451.
MEMO Once the results are output, the studies are locked and cannot be edited.
417
Operations
Monitoring the Results of a Running Analysis

The results are displayed in graphs in the [Run Analysis] dialog during the analysis.
MEMO The monitoring result supports either independent or coupled analyses. However, it does not
support direct coupled analyses with JMAG and Abaqus.
1. Click [Customize Monitor] in the [Run Analysis] dialog.

The [Customize Monitor] dialog is displayed.
2. Select items to monitor from the list.
The following items are available.
Magnetic field analysis:

Rotation angle, displacement, electromagnetic force, torque, magnetic flux in FEM coils, Joule
loss, hysteresis loss, Lorentz force, stored energy, maximum magnetic field, maximum magnetic
flux density, current, voltage, voltage difference, control signal, ICCG iteration count
Thermal analysis, thermal stress analysis:

Temperature, heat flow, amount of heat generation, average temperature, temperature at a termi-
nal
3. Click [OK].
The [Run Analysis] dialog is displayed. The tab for the items selected in step 2 has been added to
the residual graph.
4. Click the added tab.
The physical quantity during the calculation is displayed in graph.
418
Cancelling an Analysis
To stop the calculation run from the [Run Analysis] dialog, click [Abort]. The [Stop Calculation]
dialog is displayed.
• To stop the calculation and check the condition settings and results, click [Yes, and open results].
• If the settings and results are incorrect, click [Yes, just cancel].
• If [Abort] is clicked accidentally, click [No].
Running Analyses on All Studies in Models

If multiple cases are included in the study, run all of them.
MEMO [Run All Cases] cannot be selected from the menu for analysis cases that have the snapshot anal-
ysis function set in a magnetic field analysis.
Use JMAG-Scheduler when running a snapshot analysis.
1. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click a model and select [Run All Studies].
The calculation starts, and the [Run Analysis] dialog indicating the progress of analysis is dis-
played.
The calculation of all studies starts, and the [Run Analysis] dialog indicating the progress of anal-
ysis is displayed for each study as studies are analyzed sequentially.
The rest of the procedure is the same as “Running Analyses on Studies While They Are Dis-
played” on page 417.
MEMO An analysis is run for only studies or cases without results when [Run All Cases] is selected
and studies and cases with results are not analyzed.
Cases without the case control settings selected are also not analyzed.
419
Operations
Resuming Interrupted Analyses or Continuing Completed Analyses

You can resume the calculation of an interrupted case. It is also possible to increase the number of
steps for a case whose calculation has been completed, and to resume the calculation from the con-
tinuation of the already calculated steps.
MEMO The [Restart] is available for the following analyses:
• Magnetic field transient analysis, magnetic field frequency analysis
• Thermal transient state analysis
• Structural eigenmode analysis
MEMO If files required for resume such as JCF files and JPLOT files are deleted, an analysis cannot be
resumed.
MEMO When [Delete Result Files After Calculation] in [CSV File Output Settings] in the study prop-
erties is selected and an analysis is performed, the analysis cannot be reopened.
1. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click [Study].

2. Select [Restart].
3. In the [Restart calculation] dialog, set the parameters.
The number of steps that are specified in the [Restart calculation] dialog when canceled, and at
which step the calculation has been canceled is displayed.
4. Click [OK].
The analysis is restarted.
420
Running Calculations Continuously Using Analysis Groups

Group studies and execute an analysis on that group.
MEMO For studies belonging to the analysis group, you cannot add new cases or edit existing cases. To
perform these operations, use the case control of an analysis group.
MEMO Direct coupled analysis of JMAG and Abaqus does not support the use of analysis groups. Use
JMAG-Scheduler.
1. Create an analysis group.

i. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click a project.
ii. Select [Create Analysis Group].
iii. In the [Create Analysis Group] dialog, set the parameters.
iv. Click [OK].
All the studies belonging to the analysis group are displayed under the analysis group in the
MEMO Use the [Edit Analysis Group] dialog to add new studies to analysis groups, or remove
studies from analysis groups. To open this dialog, right-click an analysis group in the [Project
Manager] tree, and select [Edit Analysis Group].
MEMO To cancel an analysis group, right-click the analysis group in the [Project Manager] tree
and select [Ungroup].
MEMO To switch studies to display on the screen within the same analysis group, right-click the
study displayed under the analysis group in the [Project Manager] tree, and select [Make Current
Study].
2. Set the properties of the analysis group.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click the analysis group.
ii. Select [Property].
iii. In the [Analysis Group Properties] dialog, set the parameters.
iv. Click [OK].
3. Execute the analysis in the analysis group.
ii. To execute an analysis of the current case, select [Run Active Case].
To execute an analysis of the case specified in the [Design Table] dialog, select [Run
All Cases].
To remotely execute analysis of the current case, select [Submit Active Case].
To remotely execute the analysis of the case specified in the [Case List] dialog, select
[Submit All Cases].
When [Submit Active Case] or [Submit All Cases] is selected, the [Submit to Queue] dialog
will be displayed. In this dialog, specify things such as the remote machine name.
MEMO If [Submit Active Case] (or [Submit All Cases]) is executed with the project not saved,
before the [Submit to Queue] dialog appears, the “You need to save the project file (.jproj),
before running the analysis” message is displayed.
421
Operations
• If [Yes] is clicked, the [Submit to Queue] dialog is displayed. The project is saved after [Submit
Job] is clicked in the [Submit to Queue] dialog.
• If [Cancel] is clicked, [Submit Active Case] (or [Submit All Cases]) is canceled.
MEMO If JMAG is installed on a machine on the same network as the local machine, that machine
can be used for analysis and mesh generation. This is called “remote execution”.
For remote execution, use the JMAG Remote System or a remote machine (or third-party job sched-
uler) using SSH. Which one should be used depends on the OS environment of the local and remote
machines. See “Remote Execution Methods” on page 587.
422
Checking That Analyses Completed Correctly

• Check Error/Warning Messages for Each Case (page 423)
• Check Convergence Status of Calculations (page 423)
Check Error/Warning Messages for Each Case

Errors or warnings that occur in each case can be confirmed after an analysis.
1. In the [Project Manager] tree, under a study, right-click [Report].

2. Select [Messages] when confirming a message for a single case.
Select [All Cases Message Browser] when confirming messages for the multiple cases in
a study.
The [Messages] dialog or the [All Cases Messages] dialog is displayed.
The contents displayed in the [All Cases Messages] dialog can be exported to a CSV file when
[Export] is clicked.
Check Convergence Status of Calculations

When an analysis completes successfully, an HTML-type analysis report is automatically created.
Confirm the contents of the file when error messages or warning messages for convergence informa-
tion in each step are displayed after running an analysis.
1. In the [Project Manager] tree, under a study, right-click [Report].

2. Select [Solver Report].
The solver report is displayed in the window.
The contents exported to the solver report differs based on the analysis type (magnetic field/ther-
mal/structural/electric field).
423
Operations
424
Running Analyses from JMAG-Scheduler
This chapter explains the procedure for running analyses from JMAG-Scheduler.
JMAG-Scheduler is a tool for running and managing analyses in JMAG. JMAG-Scheduler can be used when
running an analysis in the following ways.
• Run an analysis without launching JMAG-Designer
• Run an analysis continuously
• Run an analysis remotely:
By using JMAG-RemoteSystem or SSH (Secure Shell), analysis can be run on another machine.
• Run a direct coupled analysis:
Analysis using multiple solvers can be performed.
• Run a direct coupled analysis with JMAG and Abaqus.
MEMO If an analysis is run from JMAG-Scheduler, the result files must be manually loaded into JMAG-Designer,
see “Loading Results Files into JMAG-Designer” on page 436.

• Adding Jobs to JMAG-Scheduler (page 426)
• Monitoring the Results of a Running Jobs (page 430)
• Canceling Jobs (page 431)
• Resuming Interrupted Jobs or Continuing Completed Jobs (page 432)
• Deleting Jobs (page 432)
• Resubmitting Jobs (page 432)
• Specifying a Priority Job (Interrupt Job on Local Machine) (page 433)
• Changing the Job Execution Order (page 433)
• Changing Job’s Status from [Queued] to [Wait] (page 434)
• Changing Job’s Status from [Wait] to [Queued] (page 434)
• Specifying the Number of Jobs to Run Simultaneously (page 434)
• Exporting Job Settings to a File (page 435)
• Adding a Job to the Job Group (page 435)
• Excluding a Job from the Job Group (page 435)
• Removing Job Groups (page 435)
• Loading Results Files into JMAG-Designer (page 436)
MEMO For information about running a one-way coupled analysis, see “Running One-Way Coupled Analyses” on
page 671.
MEMO For information about running a direct coupled analysis, see “Running Direct Coupled Analyses” on page
689.
425
Operations
Adding Jobs to JMAG-Scheduler

• Add a Job from JMAG-Designer (page 426)
• Add a Job in the JMAG-Scheduler (page 428)
Add a Job from JMAG-Designer

Start JMAG-Scheduler from the JMAG-Designer [Project Manager] tree and add the analysis as a
job.
• Submit Jobs of All Models (page 426)
• Submit Jobs of Active/All Cases (page 427)
• Resume Suspended Cases, Executing Extensions of Executed Cases (page 427)
Submit Jobs of All Models

1. If necessary, set the functions for shortening the calculation time before running the
analysis.
When distributing multiple cases of calculation on multiple machines, it may take time to trans-
fer the result files. By setting the following options in the [Output Control] setting panel of the
[Study Properties] dialog, the result file size and the number of files are reduced, and the file
transfer time and the total calculation time can be shortened.
• Select [Output Table Results Only (No mesh will be Output)].
• Clear the checkboxes of unnecessary physical quantity in [Output Results].
2. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click the project.
3. Select [Submit All Models to Queue].
MEMO If steps 2 and 3 are performed with the project not saved, before the [Submit All Models to
Queue] dialog appears, the “You need to save the project file (.jproj), before running the analysis.”
message is displayed.
• If [Yes] is clicked, the [Submit All Models to Queue] dialog is displayed. The project is saved after
[Submit Job] is clicked in the [Submit All Models to Queue] dialog.
• If [Cancel] is clicked, [Submit All Models to Queue] is canceled.
4. In the [Submit All Models to Queue] dialog, set the parameters.
5. Click [Submit Job].
The calculation of the added jobs automatically starts and the JMAG-Scheduler icon is dis-
played on the taskbar.
MEMO When [Submit All Models to Queue] is performed, jobs added to JMAG-Scheduler are
automatically grouped into job groups for each study. The study name is used for the group name.
MEMO An analysis is run for only studies or cases without results when [Submit All Models to
Queue] is selected and studies and cases with results are not analyzed.
MEMO Cases set with the snapshot analysis function or massively parallel processing (MPP) func-
tion in magnetic field analysis cannot be run from [Submit All Models to Queue]. Use the JMAG-
Scheduler when using these functions.
426
Submit Jobs of Active/All Cases
1. If necessary, set the functions for shortening the calculation time before running the
analysis.
When distributing multiple cases of calculation on multiple machines, it may take time to trans-
fer the result files. By setting the following options in the [Output Control] setting panel of the
[Study Properties] dialog, the result file size and the number of files are reduced, and the file
3. Select [Submit Active Case to Queue] or [Submit All Cases to Queue].
MEMO An analysis is added as a job on JMAG-Scheduler for cases only with results that are not
exported when [Submit All Cases to Queue] is selected and cases with results that are exported are
not added.
MEMO When [Submit All Cases to Queue] is performed, jobs added to JMAG-Scheduler are auto-
matically grouped into a single group. The study name is used for the group name.
MEMO If steps 2 and 3 are performed with the project not saved, before the [Submit to Queue] dia-
log appears, the “You need to save the project file (.jproj), before running the analysis.” message is dis-
played.
• If [Cancel] is clicked, [Submit Active Case to Queue] or [Submit All Cases to Queue] is canceled.
4. In the [Submit to Queue] dialog, set the parameters.
The calculation of the added jobs automatically starts and the JMAG-Scheduler icon is dis-
played on the taskbar.
MEMO When [Submit All Cases to Queue] is performed, jobs added to JMAG-Scheduler are auto-
matically grouped into job groups. The study name (or analysis group name) is used for the job
group name.
Resume Suspended Cases, Executing Extensions of Executed Cases

Additional steps for a case where analysis has ended can be specified and analysis resumed from last
step executed.
MEMO The following analyses can be resumed:
• Magnetic field transient analysis, magnetic field frequency analysis
• Thermal transient analysis
• Structural eigenmode analysis
MEMO A study in which [Delete Result Files After Calculation] was selected in the [CSV File Output
Settings] setting panel in the [Study Properties] dialog cannot be resumed.

2. Select [Submit Restart to Queue].
3. In the [Submit to Queue] dialog, set the parameters.
427
Operations
In the [Submit to Queue] dialog at the time of suspension, the number of steps that were speci-
fied and the last step executed are displayed.
MEMO If steps 1 and 2 are performed with the project not saved, before the [Submit to Queue]
dialog appears, the “Confirm Submit Restart Study” message is displayed.
• If [Cancel] is clicked, [Submit Restart to Queue] is canceled.
4. Click [OK].
Add a Job in the JMAG-Scheduler

Start JMAG-Scheduler and run the analysis from JMAG-Scheduler.
1. Prepare the input files for the calculation.

Export the JCF file of the study to calculate to JMAG-Designer beforehand. Or, save the project
file (.jproj) including the study for calculation. If the snapshot analysis function or massively par-
allel processing (MPP) function is used in the magnetic field analysis study, export to the JCF
file. It cannot be run directly from the project file.
And when distributing multiple cases of calculation on multiple machines, it may take time to
transfer the result files. By setting the following options in the [Output Control] setting panel of
the [Study Properties] dialog, the result file size and the number of files are reduced, and the file
2. Start JMAG-Scheduler.
See “Screen Configuration Edition” for the startup procedure.
3. Select [Job] > [Add Job].
Or click .
4. In the [Add Job] dialog, select a file type from the list and specify a file (.jcf, .jproj) from
step 1.
Multiple files can be specified for JCF files. However, the following settings cannot be specified:
• Job title
• Direct coupled analysis
• Restarting calculation
In addition, the folder running the calculation is used by multiple jobs, so jobs cannot be run
simultaneously when running a job from a local machine and whether or not the machine has
multiple licenses. This problem does not occur for remote calculations.
MEMO When multiple JCF files are specified, all jobs created from these files are automatically
grouped into a single group. The name of the first specified JCF file is used as the first group name.
MEMO Even when a JPROJ file is specified, all jobs created from that file are grouped. The JPROJ
file name is used for the group name.
5. Click [Open].
6. In the [Submit to Queue] or [Submit Project File] dialog, set the parameters.
428
The calculation for the added study is automatically run. The [JMAG-Scheduler] icon is dis-
played in the taskbar.
MEMO When using a project file, the added jobs are automatically grouped by study. For the job
group name, the study name (or analysis group name) is used.
MEMO When the calculation is executed using JMAG-Scheduler, it is necessary to read the result
file manually. See “Handling Result Files” on page 467.
429
Operations
Monitoring the Results of a Running Jobs

Analysis result graphs for ongoing jobs in JMAG-Scheduler can be confirmed. The graph is dis-
played in the [Run Analysis] dialog.
1. Select one from the job list a job being run from JMAG-Scheduler and then click [Moni-
tor].
2. In the [Run Analysis] dialog, click [Customize Monitor].
3. In the [Customize Monitor] dialog, select items to monitor from the list.
The following items are available.
Magnetic field analysis:

Rotation angle, displacement, electromagnetic force, torque, magnetic flux in FEM coils, Joule
loss, hysteresis loss, Lorentz force, stored energy, maximum magnetic field, maximum magnetic
flux density, current, voltage, voltage difference, control signal, ICCG iteration count
Thermal analysis, thermal stress analysis:

Temperature, heat flow, amount of heat generation, average temperature, temperature at a termi-
nal
4. Click [OK].
The [Run Analysis] dialog is displayed. The tab for the items selected in step 3 has been added to
the residual graph.
5. Click the added tab.
The physical quantity during the calculation is displayed in graph.
 Result monitoring of remote execution of jobs

Result monitoring of remote execution of jobs is also possible. Make the following settings:
1. In the JMAG-Scheduler menu bar, select [Remote] > [Remote Monitoring Settings].
2. In the [Remote Monitoring Settings] dialog, set the parameters.
3. Click [OK].
It will now be possible to monitor results from jobs run remotely.
430
Canceling Jobs
1. With a running job (or job group) selected from the job list, click [Cancel Job] .
Or, from the JMAG-Scheduler menu bar, select [Job] > [Cancel Job].
If a job running on the local machine or a remote machine connected with JMAG-RemoteSys-
tem is selected, the [Cancel Job] dialog is displayed.
If a job running on a remote machine connected via SSH has been selected, the [Stop Calcula-
tion] dialog is displayed.
MEMO To select multiple jobs from the jobs list, click the jobs while holding down the [Ctrl] key or
[Shift] key on the keyboard. This can also be performed for selecting multiple job groups.
2. In the [Cancel Job] dialog, a message appears to asking whether or not to cancel the
selected job(s). Click [OK].
MEMO If [Do not show this dialog again] is selected in the [Cancel Job] dialog, the [Cancel Job]
dialog will not be displayed the next time job cancellation is performed.
After this selection, to have the [Cancel Job] dialog display when canceling a job, change the settings
in the [Dialogs] setting panel in the [Preferences] dialog in JMAG-Designer.
3. In the [Stop calculation] dialog, buttons for stopping jobs is displayed. Click one of the
buttons.
Click [Yes, and save files] to stop the analysis and to check the condition settings and results.
Click [Yes, just cancel] if it is unnecessary to check the results computed thus far, such as when
the settings are clearly wrong.
If [Cancel Job] is accidentally clicked, click [No].
431
Operations
Resuming Interrupted Jobs or Continuing Completed Jobs

You can resume the calculation of an interrupted job. It is also possible to increase the number of
steps for a job whose calculation has been completed, and to resume the calculation from the contin-
uation of the already calculated steps.
1. Select a job from the job list and click [Restart Job] when resuming a job.
Or, from the JMAG-Scheduler menu bar, select [Job] > [Restart Job].
2. In the [Restart calculation] dialog, set the parameters.
3. Click [OK].
The job is re-added.
Deleting Jobs
MEMO The input files in each jobs are not deleted when a job is deleted from the job list.
1. Select a job (or job group) from the job list and click [Delete Job] to delete a job.
Or, from the JMAG-Scheduler menu bar, select [Job] > [Delete Job].
MEMO To select multiple jobs in the job list, click each job while holding down the [Ctrl] key or
Resubmitting Jobs
Resubmitted jobs are restarted from the beginning.
1. Click [Resubmit Job] while the job (or job group) that is being canceled is selected
from the job list.
Or, from the JMAG-Scheduler menu bar, select [Job] > [Resubmit Job].
432
Specifying a Priority Job (Interrupt Job on Local Machine)

A selected local job (job executed on the local machine) can be executed before a waiting job.
MEMO Remote jobs (jobs executed on remote machines) cannot be specified as priority jobs.
1. With a job (or job group) selected from the job list, click [Run as High Priority] .
Or with a job selected, from the JMAG-Scheduler menu bar, select [Job] > [Run as High Prior-
ity].
The selected job is specified as a priority job and moves to the top of the JMAG-Scheduler job
list. It will be started as soon as there is space available in the job execution space on the local
machine.
A job that is postponed due to an interruption from a priority job is started as soon as there is
space available in the job execution space on the local machine after the priority job starts.
Changing the Job Execution Order

Jobs (or job groups) are executed in order starting from the top of the job list. The order of the jobs
(or job groups) that are queued or waiting in the job list can be changed.
 Changing the order of a job (or job group)
1. Select a job (or job group) from the job list and click [Increase Priority] or [Decrease
Priority] .
Or with a job or job group selected, from the JMAG-Scheduler menu bar, select [Job] > [Increase
Priority] or [Decrease Priority].
 Changing the order of jobs (or job groups) all at once
1. From the JMAG-Scheduler menu bar, select [Job] > [Change Priority Mode].
“Priority Change Mode” is displayed in the JMAG-Scheduler title bar. [Go] and [Cancel] are dis-
played in the toolbar.
2. Select jobs (or job groups) from the job list and drag and drop them onto any place in
the job list.
The order of the jobs (or job groups) changes.
3. Click [Go].
The change of the job (or job group) order is applied, and the priority change mode is exited.
If [Cancel] is clicked, the change of the job (or job group) order is not applied.
MEMO The priority change mode is exited automatically after thirty seconds of no activity.
433
Operations
Changing Job’s Status from [Queued] to [Wait]

Status of the jobs (or job groups) can be changed from [Queued] to [Wait] .
MEMO The waiting job (or job group) will not be executed even if it is added to the job list.
1. Select a job (or job group) from the job list and click [Cancel Queue] .
Or, from the JMAG-Scheduler menu bar, select [Job] > [Cancel Queue].
Changing Job’s Status from [Wait] to [Queued]

Status of the jobs (or job groups) can be changed from [Wait] to [Queued] .
MEMO The waiting job (or job group) will not be executed even if it is added to the job list.
 Changing the status of selected job (or job group) from [Wait] to [Queued]
1. Select a job (or job group) that is queued from the job list and click [Submit Queue] .
Or, from the JMAG-Scheduler menu bar, select [Job] > [Submit Queue].
 Changing the status of all jobs (or job groups) from [Wait] to [Queued]
1. Click [Submit Queue All] .

Or, from the JMAG-Scheduler menu bar, select [Job] > [Submit Queue All].
Specifying the Number of Jobs to Run Simultaneously

Multiple jobs can be performed simultaneously according to the performance of the machine run-
ning the jobs and the number of licenses.
MEMO [Number of Jobs] in JMAG-Scheduler is only be used when jobs are performed on a local
machine. The number of simultaneously executing jobs at remote execution using SSH is set in the
[Preferences] dialog.
1. From the JMAG-Scheduler menu bar, select [Setting] > [Number of Jobs].
2. In the [Setting Number of Jobs] dialog, set the parameters.
3. Click [OK].
434
Exporting Job Settings to a File

Save the settings for jobs added to the job list in a Scheduler job file (.xml). For JMAG and Abaqus
coupled analysis jobs, save the settings in a JCoupled file (.xml).
Scheduler job files and JCoupled files can be used when starting JMAG-Scheduler from the com-
mand line to run an analysis.
MEMO For information on running analyses from the command line, see the following pages:
• “Running Direct Coupled Analyses from JMAG-Scheduler” on page 693
• “Simultaneously Running JMAG and Abaqus Using Mutual Results” on page 785
1. Add jobs and specify settings in JMAG-Scheduler.

2. From the JMAG-Scheduler menu bar, select [Job] > [Export Settings].
3. In the [Export Settings] dialog, select Scheduler job file (.xml) or Jcoupled file (.xml) for
[File Type].
4. Specify the destination and name of the file.
5. Click [Save].
Adding a Job to the Job Group

1. Right-click a selected job from the job list, and select [Add Job Group].
[Shift] key on the keyboard
2. In the [Add Job Group] dialog, set the group name.
3. Click [OK].
Excluding a Job from the Job Group

1. Right-click a selected job belonging to a group, and select [Remove Job from Group].
[Shift] key on the keyboard.
Removing Job Groups

1. Right-click a selected job from the job list, and select [Remove Group].
2. In the [Remove Group] dialog, check the message displayed.
3. Click [OK].
435
Operations
Loading Results Files into JMAG-Designer

If you run an analysis from JMAG-Scheduler or the command line, you must manually load the
result file into JMAG-Designer.
• To associate a result file with studies when loading the result file, see “Load Result Data from
Result Files” on page 468.
• To load a result file only, see “Open Result Files” on page 470.

Solver reports are automatically exported after analysis completes. If an error message or warning
message related to convergence for each step is displayed, check the contents of the solver report.
The solver report file (.html) is output to the calculation folder.
436
Running Analyses from the Command Line
This chapter describes the procedure for executing analysis from the command line.
MEMO When analysis is executed from the command line, it is necessary to load the result file manually. See “Han-
dling Result Files” on page 467.
MEMO For the execution of one-way coupled analysis, see “Running One-Way Coupled Analyses” on page 671.
MEMO For the execution of direct coupled analysis, see “Running Direct Coupled Analyses” on page 689.

• Performing Analyses Using JMAG-Scheduler (page 438)
• JMAG-Scheduler Command-Line Options (page 438)
• Run Analyses from the Command Line Using JCF Files (page 440)
• Run Analyses from the Command Line Using Scheduler Job Files (page 441)
• Check Job Status (page 442)
• Change the Number of Concurrent Jobs (page 443)
• Cancel Jobs (page 443)
• Remove Finished Jobs from the Job List (page 444)
• Performing Analyses Using ExecSolver (page 445)
• Perform Analyses Using JCF Files (page 445)
• Resume Interrupted Analyses or Continue Completed Analyses (page 447)
• Interrupt Analysis (page 449)
• Loading Results Files into JMAG-Designer (page 450)
437
Operations
Performing Analyses Using JMAG-Scheduler

Call JMAG-Scheduler from the command line and execute analyses.
• JMAG-Scheduler Command-Line Options (page 438)
• Run Analyses from the Command Line Using JCF Files (page 440)
• Run Analyses from the Command Line Using Scheduler Job Files (page 441)
• Check Job Status (page 442)
• Change the Number of Concurrent Jobs (page 443)
• Cancel Jobs (page 443)
• Remove Finished Jobs from the Job List (page 444)
Notes
• By setting the environment variables can be changed the setting of parallel computing of the
input file of magnetic field analysis.
Use them when analyzing from the command line or when analyzing using remote machine with
SSH. For details, see “Parameter Explanation Edition”.
• Iron loss analysis studies cannot be executed from the command line. Magnetic field analysis
studies with Iron Loss conditions can be executed from the command line.
JMAG-Scheduler Command-Line Options

This section describes the JMAG-Scheduler options used when executing analysis from the com-
mand line. The JMAG-Scheduler options used when executing direct coupled analysis from the
command line are described in “JMAG-Scheduler command-line options for direct coupled analy-
sis” on page 697.
Use JMAG-Scheduler options according to the following rules:
• Options are specified after the command name (scheduler.exe).
• There are two types of options: short options and long options. Some options also take a value
after the option name.
• Short options require a single hyphen (-). For short options that take a value, separate the
option name and value with a space.
Example:
-j "D:\JMAG\Calc\mag.jcf"
• Long options require two hyphens (--). For long options that take a value, separate the option
name and value with a space or equal (=).
Example:
--job "D:\JMAG\Calc\mag.jcf"
--job="D:\JMAG\Calc\mag.jcf"
• If the value contains spaces, enclose the value in double quotes (").
• If an option is omitted, the default values shown in the table below will be used.
438
Example using options:

"C:\Program Files\JMAG-Designer22.2\scheduler.exe" "D:\JMAG\mag.jcf"^
--title JMAG --workdir "D:\JMAG\Calc"
Short option Long option Type Default Description

- --title String - Specifies the job title.
- --workdir String - Specifies the full path of the calculation
folder (working directory).
The calculation folder contains input files,
result files, log files, error files, and temporary
files.
Example:
--workdir “D:\JMAG\Calc”
- --machinename String localhost Specifies the remote machine name used for
analysis.
- --cpugroup String - Specifies the CPU node group name used for
analysis.
- --keepremote on/off/both off Specifies whether the results will be kept on
the control server when analysis is performed
on a remote machine.
• For “on”, the result file is not sent to the
local machine and remains on the remote
machine.
• For “off”, sends the result file to the local
machine without leaving a copy on the
remote machine.
• For “both”, sends the duplicated result file
to the local machine. The result file is saved
to both the local machine and remote
machine.
When “on” or “both” is specified, the status
of the job displayed in the [JMAG-Remote-
System Observer] dialog of JMAG-Remote-
System will change to [Finished (Results
Stored on Server)] after the job is finished.
Click [Finished (Results Stored on Server)] to
open the [Retrieve Results] dialog, and select
[Retrieve (Remove the results on the control
server)], [Retrieve (Leave the results on the
control server)], or [Cancel].
- --status - - Obtains the status of jobs running using the
calculation folder specified by the --workdir
option. (page 442)
- --list - - Obtains the status of all jobs added to the
JMAG-Scheduler job list. (page 442)
- --outfile String - Outputs the information obtained by the --
list and --status options to a text file (.txt).
Example:
--outfile “D:\JMAG\Calc\jobstatus.txt”
439
Operations
Short option Long option Type Default Description

- --max_jobs Integer - Specifies the number of jobs that can be run
simultaneously on a single machine. (page
443)
-c - - - Cancels a running job specified by the --job
option. (page 443)
-d - - - Cancels a waiting job specified by the --job
option. (page 443)
-j --job String - Specifies the path to the input file (.jcf or
.jproj) used by the job to cancel the job.
Example:
--job=“D:\JMAG\Calc\mag.jcf”
- --cleanup - - Removes finished jobs from the JMAG-
Scheduler job list. (page 444)
If the --group-name option is not used, all
jobs that are finished at the time the com-
mand is executed are removed from the job
list.
- --group-name String - Specifies the job group to be removed by the -
-cleanup option by group name.
Run Analyses from the Command Line Using JCF Files

Analysis can be run from the command line using an analysis input file.
 Windows
1. In JMAG-Designer, export a JCF file.

For details on exporting JCF files, see “Exporting Studies to JCF Files” on page 287.
MEMO When distributing multiple cases of calculation on multiple machines, it may take time to
transfer the result files. By setting the following options in the [Output Control] setting panel of the
[Study Properties] dialog, the result file size and the number of files are reduced, and the file transfer
time and the total calculation time can be shortened.
• Select [Output Table Results Only (NO mesh will be Output)].
2. Click the [Start] icon in Windows.
3. Select [Accessories] > [Command Prompt] to start the command prompt.
4. Execute the command.
• The command cannot run properly when single quotations are included in the argument file
path for scheduler.exe.
• The file path must be enclosed in double quotation marks (").
• When a command line and its arguments consists of two or more lines, enter a “^” (hat) at
the end of each line.
440
Command:
(JMAG_installation_folder)\scheduler.exe input_file_path(.jcf)
Example:
"C:\Program Files\JMAG-Designer22.2\scheduler.exe" "c:\JMAG\mag.jcf"
 Linux
1. In JMAG-Designer, export an input JCF file to be used for analysis.

2. Set environment variables InsDir, LD_LIBRARY_PATH.
For details on the procedure for setting environment variables, see “JMAG User’s Manual Overview
Edition”.
Variable Value
InsDir Directory where JMAG is installed (full path).
LD_LIBRARY_PATH Directory where shared libraries necessary for analysis in JMAG are
located.
For the 64-bit version: “JMAG_installation_directory/solver/mod/lib/
linux64.”

• When a command line and its arguments consists of two or more lines, enter a backslash (\)
at the end of each line. For details on escape characters such as backslash, use Linux Help.
• In the case of Linux, command and arguments are case sensitive.
Command:
(JMAG_installation_directory)/scheduler input_file_path(.jcf)
Example:
/home/user/installation/JMAG222/scheduler /home/jmaguser/Data/Input.jcf
Run Analyses from the Command Line Using Scheduler Job Files
Scheduler job files (.xml) contain the path to the analysis input file as well as the parameters and
their values set in the [Submit to Queue] and [Coupled Files] dialogs.
When using a Scheduler job file, you can use a project file (.jproj) as well as a JCF file analysis input
file.
MEMO The Scheduler job file can be used as the input file for JMAG-Scheduler, but the JobSystem exe-
cution job file (.xml) cannot be used. Refer to the “Files edition” for the difference between the two files,
and “JobSystem Execution Command” on page 599 for information on how to use the JobSystem exe-
cution job file.
441
Operations
 Windows
1. Export a Scheduler job file (.xml) with JMAG-Scheduler.

See “Exporting Job Settings to a File” on page 435 on procedures for exporting the Scheduler
job file.
The command cannot run properly when single quotations are included in the argument file
The file path must be enclosed in double quotation marks (").
When a command line and its arguments consists of two or more lines, enter a “^” (hat) at the
end of each line.
Command:
(JMAG_installation_folder)\scheduler.exe Job_file_path
Example:
"C:\Program Files\JMAG-Designer22.2\scheduler.exe" "c:\JMAG\job.xml"
Check Job Status

The --status and --list options can be used to check the status of jobs.
 Check status of jobs running in a specified calculation folder

To check the status of jobs running in the calculation folder (working directory) specified by the --
workdir option, use the --status option. Job information is output to the text file specified by the --
outfile option.
Windows
Command:
(JMAG_installation_folder)\scheduler.exe --status^
--workdir Calculation_folder_path^
--outfile Output_file_path(.txt)
Example:
C:\Program Files\JMAG-Designer22.2\scheduler.exe --status^
--workdir "c:\JMAG\Project.jfiles\Study1\Case1"^
--outfile "c:\output.txt"
The following information is described in the file that is exported after running this command:
Line 1: Calculation folder path
Line 2: Job status
Queued, Suspended, Running, Canceled, Finished, Wait, Error
Line 3: Job progress
Example:
Job: c:\JMAG\MyJobs\Project.jfiles\Study1\Case1
442
Status: Running
Progress: 80%
 Check status of all jobs added to the job list

To check the status of all jobs added to the job list, use the --list option. Job information is output to
the text file specified by the --outfile option.
Windows
Command:
(JMAG_installation_folder)\scheduler.exe --list^
--outfile Output_file_path(.txt)
Example:
C:\Program Files\JMAG-Designer22.2\scheduler.exe --list^
--outfile "c:\output.txt"
The text file output after the command is executed contains information about all jobs (calculation
folder path, status, and progress).
Change the Number of Concurrent Jobs

The --max_job option can be used to change the number of analysis jobs that can run simultane-
ously on a single machine.
Windows
Command:
(JMAG_installation_folder)\scheduler.exe^
--max_jobs=”the_number_of_jobs_to_run_simultaneously”
Example:
“C:\Program Files\JMAG-Designer22.2\scheduler.exe”^
--max_jobs=4
Cancel Jobs
The -c or -d option can be used to cancel the job specified by the --job option.
MEMO Pressing [Ctrl] + [C] on the keyboard at the same time cancels the running job as well.
 Cancel a running job

To cancel a running job, use the -c option.
If multiple jobs with JPROJ files of the same name have been added to the JMAG-Scheduler job list,
only the first job found will be canceled when canceling a job by specifying the name of that JPROJ
file.
Windows
Command:
The calculation folder is specified with the --workdir option.
(JMAG_installation_folder)\scheduler.exe -c^
--job=“Calculation_folder + input_file_path (.jcf or .jproj)”
443
Operations
Example:
“C:\Program Files\JMAG-Designer22.2\scheduler.exe” -c^
 Cancel a waiting job

To cancel a waiting job, use the -d option.
If multiple jobs with JPROJ files of the same name have been added to the JMAG-Scheduler job list,
only the first job found will be canceled when canceling a job by specifying the name of that JPROJ
file.
Windows
Command:
The calculation folder is specified with the --workdir option.
(JMAG_installation_folder)\scheduler.exe -d^
--job=“Calculation_folder + input_file_path (.jcf or .jproj)”
Example:
“C:\Program Files\JMAG-Designer22.2\scheduler.exe” -d^
Remove Finished Jobs from the Job List

If a large number of jobs are added to the JMAG-Scheduler job list due to optimization calculations
or other reasons, the load on JMAG-Scheduler increases and operation becomes slow. In such cases,
use the --cleanup option to remove the finished jobs from the job list.
 Windows
Command:
You can specify one job group to be removed by name with the --group-name option. If the --group-
name option is not used, all jobs that are finished at the time the command is executed will be
removed from the job list.
(JMAG_installation_folder)\scheduler.exe --cleanup --group-name=jobgroupname
Example:
“C:\Program Files\JMAG-Designer22.2\scheduler.exe” --cleanup
“C:\Program Files\JMAG-Designer22.2\scheduler.exe” --cleanup --group-name=gen2
444
Performing Analyses Using ExecSolver

ExecSolver is a module to manage solver modules such as magnetic field analysis and thermal analy-
sis. Command line execution is also possible using ExecSolver.
• Resume Interrupted Analyses or Continue Completed Analyses (page 447)
• Interrupt Analysis (page 449)
Notes
• By setting the environment variables can be changed the setting of parallel computing of the
input file of magnetic field analysis.
Use them when analyzing from the command line or when analyzing using remote machine with
SSH. For details, see “Parameter Explanation Edition”.
• Iron loss analysis studies cannot be executed from the command line. Magnetic field analysis
studies with Iron Loss conditions can be executed from the command line.
Perform Analyses Using JCF Files
 Windows
1. Export an input JCF file to be used in an analysis in advance when running an analysis
from the command line.
See “Exporting Studies to JCF Files” on page 287 for instructions on exporting a JCF file. When
exporting a JCF file, pay attention to the setting of the [Preprocess Model When Exporting
Geometry JCF] option.
2. Set the environment variables InsDir and WorkDir.
Variable name Variable value

InsDir The full path of the installation folder of JMAG.
When JMAG-Designer is installed with the default settings, it will be
“C:\Program Files\JMAG-Designer22.2.”
WorkDir The full path of the working folder that JMAG uses for calculations.
E.g.: “C:\Program Files\JMAG\Analysis.”
3. Click the Start icon in Windows.

445
Operations

the end of each line. For details on escape characters such as hat, use Windows Help.
Command:
Options in [ ] can be omitted.
(JMAG installation folder)\ExecSolver "input_file_path(.jcf)"^
[-remote] [-multi] [-reservation]
Example1:
"C:\Program Files\JMAG-Designer22.2\ExecSolver" "C:\mag.jcf"
Example 2:
When including the setting of environment variables
set InsDir=C:\Program Files\JMAG-Designer22.2
set WorkDir=D:\JMAG\Data
"C:\Program Files\JMAG-Designer22.2\ExecSolver" "D:\JMAG\Data\mag.jcf"
 Linux
1. Export an input JCF file to be used in an analysis in advance when running an analysis
from the command line.
See “Exporting Studies to JCF Files” on page 287 for instructions on exporting a JCF file. When
exporting a JCF file, pay attention to the setting of the [Preprocess Model When Exporting
Geometry JCF] option.
2. Set environment variables InsDir, WorkDir, LD_LIBRARY_PATH.

InsDir The full path of the installation directory of JMAG.
WorkDir The full path of the working directory that JMAG uses for calculations.
E.g.: “/usr/work/Analysis.”
LD_LIBRARY_PATH The full path of the directory where the shared libraries that JMAG refers
to during calculations are located.
For the 64-bit version: “JMAG_installation_directory/solver/mod/lib/
linux64.”

• When a command line and its arguments consists of two or more lines, enter a backslash (\)
at the end of each line. For details on escape characters such as backslash, use Linux Help.
• In the case of Linux, command and arguments are case sensitive.
446
Command:
(JMAG installation directory)/solver/bin/ExecSolver "input_file_path(.jcf)"\
[-remote] [-multi] [-reservation]
 ExecSolver command-line options

Option Type Default Description
-remote String - Performs distributed processing for jobs by using remote
machines connected via SSH.
For the value, specify the SSH/Execution Script settings
name ([Title] in the [Create Remote Machine] dialog) that is
set in JMAG-Designer on the remote machine.
When distributed processing is not used, this option does
not need to be specified.
-multi - - Uses power simulation licenses (PSL) when executing jobs.
• This option is only available when using LM-X license
servers.
• There is no need to specify this option when not using
PSL.
• This function is enabled when both of the following con-
ditions are satisfied:
• The value of the environment variable JMAG_MUL-
TI_LICENSE is “1”.
• The environment variable JMAG_PSL_CON-
TROL_xx is not set, or alternatively, the value of
JMAG_PSL_CONTROL_xx is “0”. Enter the solver
name in the xx at the end of the variable name (Example:
JMAG_PSL_CONTROL_ST).
For details on PSL, see “Licenses Edition”.
-reservation String - Uses reserved licenses prior to executing jobs.
When the value of the environment variable JMAG_RES-
ERVATION_KEY is not empty, specify reservation keys as
values. Reservation keys are the value of the environment
variable JMAG_RESERVATION_KEY.
• This option is only available when using LM-X license
servers.
• License reservations are made with the JMAG License
Center. For details on JMAG License Center, see “Licenses
Edition”.
Resume Interrupted Analyses or Continue Completed Analyses

Analysis execution can be resumed by using ExecSolver with the -restart option.
 Windows
447
Operations

Command:
(JMAG installation folder)\ExecSolver.exe^
-restart^
[-step="number of steps after restart"]^
[-startstep="step number to be output to jplot file"]^
[-adaptive_stge="number of stages after restart"]^
"inputjcffile_path"
Sample:
"C:\Program Files\JMAG-Designer22.2\ExecSolver" -restart -step=50 "C:\mag.jcf"
 Linux

Command:
(JMAG installation directory)/solver/bin/ExecSolver\
-restart\
[-step="number of steps after restart"]\
[-startstep="step number to be output to jplot file"]\
[-adaptive_stage="number of stages after restart"]\
"inputjcffile_path"
 ExecSolver command-line options for resuming analysis

For options not described here, refer to the description in “ExecSolver command-line options” on
page 447.
Option Type Default Description

-restart - - Resumes the calculation.
-step Integer - Number of steps to be calculated.
Calculations are performed up to the step specified here.
When using the -adaptive_stage option, the - step option
cannot be used.
-startstep Integer - Start step number for a resumed analysis to be outputted
to a result file.
For example, if 5 is specified, the results for the first
through the fourth step are not outputted and the results
from the fifth step to the last step are outputted.
When using the -adaptive_stage option, the - startstep
option cannot be used.
-adaptive_stage Integer - Adaptive mesh maximum number of stages
When executing an analysis using the Adaptive Mesh
function, analysis is executed up to and including the
stage specified here.
When using the -step option or -startstep option, the -
adaptive_stage option cannot be used.
448
Interrupt Analysis
Press [Ctrl] + [C] on the keyboard to forcibly terminate an analysis.
449
Operations
Loading Results Files into JMAG-Designer

If you run an analysis from JMAG-Scheduler or the command line, you must manually load the
result file into JMAG-Designer.
• To associate a result file with studies when loading the result file, see “Load Result Data from
Result Files” on page 468.
• To load a result file only, see “Open Result Files” on page 470.

Solver reports are automatically exported after analysis completes. If an error message or warning
message related to convergence for each step is displayed, check the contents of the solver report.
The solver report file (.html) is output to the calculation folder.
450
Displaying Results
Output Physical Quantities and Their Display Method
This chapter describes the output physical quantity of each analysis and how to confirm it.
In JMAG-Designer, the output physical quantities can be displayed using following method:
• Table:
See “Checking Analysis Results in Tables” on page 473.
• Total
• Element (or vertex, edge, face, part, node, element edge, element face)
• Graph:
See “Checking Analysis Results in Graphs” on page 481.
• History graph
• Section graph (Line/Arc):
A section graph is a graph of result values on a specified path.
• Section graph for arbitrary region (Line/Arc)
• Image:
See “Checking the Distribution and Flux from an Image” on page 495
• Contour
• Vector
• Flux line
Calculation processing can be added to the resulting quantities. You can use commercial spreadsheet software to
perform the calculations; see “Adding Calculation Processing to Analysis Results” on page 515 and “Using
Scripts to Automate Results Processing” on page 525.

• Unit Notes (page 454)
• Magnetic Field Analysis (page 455)
• Iron Loss Analysis (page 459)
• Thermal Analysis (page 460)
• Structural Analysis (page 461)
• Electric Field Analysis (page 462)
• Thermal Stress Analysis (page 463)
• Transformer Analysis (page 464)
• Integration Analysis (page 465)
453
Operations
Unit Notes
Each physical quantity is displayed in the units that are applied to analysis models in JMAG-
Designer. After analysis, or after result files have been loaded, units that are applied to analysis mod-
els cannot be changed.
In the following cases, physical quantities are displayed in the SI unit system (the units listed in the
[Units] column in the following tables):
• When calculating with data output from JMAG-Studio
• When a JPLOT file output from JMAG-Designer Version 10.3 or earlier is loaded
454
Magnetic Field Analysis

“” in the table indicates the result can be displayed.
for arbitrary region

(Element/Node)
(Line/Arc)
(Line/Arc)
Flux line
Contour
Section
Section
Vector
Table
Table
Result type Unit
Magnetic field A/m   *1 -   

Magnetization A/m   *1 -   -
Magnetic flux density T    -   
Vector potential Wb/m   - -   -
Current of current condi-
A - - -  - - -
tion
Current vector A -  - -  - -
Current density A/m2    *1 -   -
Surface current density A/m   - -   -
Coil flux-linkage Wb - - -  - - -
FEM coil inductance H - - -  - - -
FEM conductor inductance H - - -  - - -
FEM conductor resistance Ohm - - -  - - -
FEM conductor flux-link-
Wb - - -  - - -
age
Circuit current A - - -  - - -
Circuit voltage V - - -  - - -
Circuit electric power W - - -  - - -
Circuit loss W - - -  - - -
Voltage difference V - - -  - - -
Control signal - - - -  - - -
Terminal temperature (elec-
deg C - - -  - - -
tric circuit)
Terminal temperature (ther-
deg C - - -  - - -
mal circuit)
Circuit heat transfer coeffi- W/m2
cient - - -  - - -
/deg C
Circuit heat flow W - - -  - - -
Torque Nm - - -  - - -
Torque (moving frame) Nm - - -  - - -
Force N - - -  - - -
Force (moving frame) N - - -  - - -
Nodal force *2 N   - -   -
Nodal force (magnetostric-
N - - -  - - -
tion)
455
Operations

(Element/Node)
(Line/Arc)
(Line/Arc)
Flux line
Contour
Section
Section
Vector
Table
Table
Result type Unit
Surface force density N/m2   - -   -

Lorentz force N - - -  - - -
Lorentz force density *2 N/m3    *1 -   -
Total rotational displace-
degree - - -  - - -
ment
Rotational velocity r/min - - -  - - -
Total translational displace-
m - - -  - - -
ment
Translational velocity m/s - - -  - - -
Total rotational displace-
degree - - -  - - -
ment (arbitrary motion)
Total translational displace-
m - - -  - - -
ment (arbitrary motion)
Rotational velocity (arbi-
r/min - - -  - - -
trary motion)
Translational velocity (arbi-
m/s - - -  - - -
trary motion)
Relative permeability -  - - -   
Differential permeability -  - - -   
Demagnetization ratio
%  - - -   -
(compared to reference step)
(compared to undemagne- %  - - -   -
tized state)
(compared to undemagne-
%  - - -   -
tized state, temperature
dependent)
Residual flux density T  - - -   -
Permeance coefficient -  - - -   -
Initial magnetization (nor-
-   *1 -   -
malized)
Coercive force (normalized) -  - - -   -
Magnetization ratio -  - - -   -
Stored energy J - - -  - - -
Joule loss W - - -  - - -
Joule loss density W/m3  - - -   -
Surface Joule loss density W/m 2  - - -   -
Hysteresis loss W - - -  - - -
Hysteresis loss density W/m3  - - -   -
456

(Element/Node)
(Line/Arc)
(Line/Arc)
Flux line
Contour
Section
Section
Vector
Table
Table
Result type Unit
Iron loss W - - -  - - -
Iron loss density W/m3  - - -   -
Torque of external program Nm - - -  - - -
Force of external program N - - -  - - -
Temperature deg C  - - -   -
Principal stress Pa   - -   -
d-axis, q axis current A - - -  - - -
d-axis, q-axis inductance H - - -  - - -
Global stress (centrifugal
Pa  - - -   -
force)
Principal stress (centrifugal
Pa   - -   -
force)
Mises stress (centrifugal
Pa  - - -   -
force)
Global strain (centrifugal
-  - - -   -
force)
Principal strain (centrifugal
-   - -   -
force)
Mises strain (centrifugal
-  - - -   -
force)
Displacement m   - -   -
Deformation m   - -   -
Magnetic field (lamination) A/m - - - -  - -
Magnetic flux density (lami-
T - - - -  - -
nation)
Eddy current density (lami-
A/m2 - - - -  - -
nation)
Classical eddy current loss
W/m3 - - - -  - -
density (lamination)
Hysteresis loss density (lam-
W/m3 - - - -  - -
ination)
Initial magnetization vector A/m   - -   -
Continuous variables
-  - - -   -
(node)
*1 Displayed only for a 3D analysis study.
*2
The effective value, zeroth order component, and second order component is outputted when
a frequency analysis is specified.
Note the following:
457
Operations
• Section lines and section arcs for an arbitrary region cannot be created in an axisymmetric analy-
sis.
• The output physical quantities are converted according to the setting of Full Model Conversion
function or Circuit Conversion function/condition.
• Physical quantities converted by Full Model Conversion function:
Flux linkage of current condition, Joule loss by material, hysteresis loss by material, iron loss
by material, torque, electromagnetic force, Lorentz force by material, stored energy
• Physical quantities converted by Circuit Conversion function/condition:
Circuit current, circuit voltage, FEM coil interlinkage flux, FEM coil current, FEM coil
inductance, FEM conductor interlinkage flux, FEM conductor inductance, FEM conductor
resistance
• A number for a section is displayed at the end of each output item name in the results of each
section, when using the Multi-Slice condition.
Example: Magnetic flux density (slice 1), torque (slice 1)
• The following results can be checked in a history graph when using the Multi-Slice condition:
• Results for each slice
• Results of the whole model calculated based on the results of each slice
• The results in each section or the results in an averaged value or total value can be checked in a
history graph, when using the Multi-Slice condition.
• There are two types of principal stress. The principle stress outputted by setting the Stress Distri-
bution condition and the principle stress (centrifugal force) outputted by setting the Centrifugal
Force Calculation condition.
458
Iron Loss Analysis


(Element/Node)
(Line/Arc)
(Line/Arc)
Flux line
Contour
Section
Section
Vector
Table
Table
Result type Unit
Reference magnetic flux

T   -    -
density
Iron loss W - - -  - - -
Iron loss density W/m3  - - -   -
Joule loss W - - -  - - -
Joule loss density W/m 3  - - -   -
Excess eddy current loss W - - -  - - -
Excess eddy current loss
W/m3  - - -   -
density
Classical eddy current loss W - - -  - - -
W - - -  - - -
density of each strain region
W/m3  - - - - - -
density
Magnetic field (lamination) A/m   *1 -   -
Magnetic flux density (lami-
T   *1 -   -
nation)
Eddy current density (lami-
A/m2   *1 -   -
nation)
W/m3 - - -  - - -
density (lamination)
Hysteresis loss density (lam-
W/m3 - - -  - - -
ination)
*1
Displayed only for a 3D analysis study.
Note the following:

• The output physical quantities are converted according to the setting of the Full Model Conver-
sion function in the magnetic field analysis study referenced from the iron loss analysis.
• Physical quantities converted by Full Model Conversion function:
Iron loss, Joule loss, hysteresis loss, excess eddy current loss, classical eddy current loss density
459
Operations
Thermal Analysis

(Element/Node)
(Line/Arc)
(Line/Arc)
Flux line
Contour
Section
Section
Vector
Table
Table
Result type Unit
Temperature deg C  - - -   -
Heat flux W/m2    -   -
Heat flow W - - -  - - -
Heat generation density W/m 3  - - -   -
Surface heat generation
W/m2  - - -   -
density
Heat transfer coefficient W/m2/  - - -   -
deg C
Total heat generation W - - -  - - -
Total surface heat genera-
W - - -  - - -
tion
Average temperature (mate-
deg C - - -  - - -
rial)
Average temperature per
deg C - - -  - - -
condition
Contact thermal resistance deg C/W - - -  - - -
Total displacement (rota-
deg - - -  - - -
tional angle)
Total displacement (X/Y/Z
m - - -  - - -
direction)
deg C - - -  - - -
mal circuit)
cient - - -  - - -
/deg C
-  - - -   -
(node)
460
Structural Analysis

(Element/Node)
(Line/Arc)
(Line/Arc)
Flux line
Contour
Section
Section
Vector
Table
Table
Result type Unit
Electric potential V   -    -
Deformation m   - -   -
Velocity m/s   -    -
Acceleration m/s2   -    -
Global stress Pa  - - -   -
Mises stress Pa  - - -   -
Maximum Mises stress *1 Pa - - -  - - -
Global strain -  - - -   -
Principal strain -   - -   -
Mises strain -  - - -   -
Plastic strain -  - - -   -
Contact force N   - -   -
Pressure Pa   - -   -
Sound pressure Pa  - - -   -
Sound pressure level dB  - - -   -
Maximum sound pressure Pa - - -  - - -
Maximum sound pressure
dB - - -  - - -
level
Nodal force (input load) N*2   -    -
-  - - -   -
(node)
*1
This is output for speed-priority mode studies. Click [Display Max Position Result] to
show the position where the Mises stress is at a maximum in the graphics window with a label.
*2 Same for a 2D analysis or 3D analysis.
461
Operations
Electric Field Analysis


(Element/Node)
(Line/Arc)
(Line/Arc)
Flux line
Contour
Section
Section
Vector
Table
Table
Result type Unit
Electric potential V  - - -   -
Electric field V/m    -   
Normal electric field V/m   - -   
Force N - - -  - - -
Nodal force N   - -   -
Current of current condi-
A - - -  - - -
tion
Current density A/m2    -   -
Joule loss W - - -  - - -
Joule loss density W/m 3  - - -   -
Dielectric loss W - - -  - - -
Dielectric loss density W/m 3  - - -   -
Surface charge C - - -  - - -
Surface charge density C/m2  - - -   -
Shell charge C/m2  - - -   -
Solid dipole C/m2   - - -  -
-  - - -   -
(node)
Electric breakdown factor -  - - -   -
462
Thermal Stress Analysis


(Element/Node)
(Line/Arc)
(Line/Arc)
Flux line
Contour
Section
Section
Vector
Table
Table
Result type Unit
Temperature deg C  - -    -
Heat flux W/m2    -   -
Heat flow W - - -  - - -
Heat generation density W/m 3  - - -   -
Surface heat generation
W/m2  - - -   -
density
Heat source W - - -  - - -
Heat transfer coefficient W/m2/  - - -   -
deg C
Average temperature (mate-
deg C - - -  - - -
rial)
Average temperature (condi-
deg C - - -  - - -
tion)
Contact thermal resistance deg C/W - - -  - - -
deg C - - -  - - -
mal circuit)
cient - - -  - - -
/deg C
Global stress Pa  - - -   -
Mises stress Pa  - - -   -
Global strain -  - - -   -
Principal strain -   - -   -
Mises strain -  - - -   -
Nodal force (input load) N   -    -
-  - - -   -
(node)
463
Operations
Transformer Analysis

(Element/Node)
(Line/Arc)
(Line/Arc)
Flux line
Contour
Section
Section
Vector
Table
Table
Result type Unit
Magnetic field A/m   *1 -   

Magnetization A/m   *1 -   -
Magnetic flux density T    -   
Vector potential Wb/m   - -   -
Current density A/m2   *1 -   -
Winding inductance H - - -  - - -
Winding DC resistance ohm - - -  - - -
Coil flux linkage Wb - - -  - - -
Circuit loss W - - -  - - -
Joule loss W - - -  - - -
Joule loss density N/m3  - - -   -
Force N - - -  - - -
Nodal force N   - -   -
Surface force density N/m2   - -   -
Lorentz force N - - -  - - -
Lorentz force density N/m 3   *1 -   -
Permeability -  - - -   
Differential permeability -  - - -   
Stored energy J - - -  - - -
*1 Displayed only for a 3D analysis study.
464
Integration Analysis

(Element/Node)
(Line/Arc)
(Line/Arc)
Flux line
Contour
Section
Section
Vector
Table
Table
Result type Unit
Control signal - - - -  - - -
465
Operations
466
Handling Result Files
This chapter describes operations related to result files.

• Load Result Data from Result Files (page 468)
• Open Result Files (page 470)
• Delete Result Data from Cases (page 471)
• Delete Some Result Data from Result Files (page 472)
467
Operations
Load Result Data from Result Files

When analyses have been run in the background, the result data from the result files (.jplot) must be
manually loaded into each case in the project.
• Load Result Data (page 468)
• Load Result Data by Specifying a Folder (page 468)
• Load Only Result Data for the Necessary Cases After Checking the Results (page 469)
MEMO If you have followed the procedure described here, then the result files that include result data
will be associated with each case in the project when the result data is loaded. For details only on the pro-
cedure for opening result files in JMAG, see “Open Result Files” on page 470.
Load Result Data

Load the result data from result files (.jplot) obtained from analyses like the following into each case:
• Analyses that were run in the background
• Analyses that were run in batches from the [Project Manager] tree in JMAG-Designer
• Analyses that were run from JMAG-Scheduler
• Analyses that were run from a command line
 Operations From the [Project Manager] Tree
1. Open a project in JMAG-Designer.

2. To load the result data for all the cases of all the studies, right-click the project in the
[Project Manager] tree, then select [Check for New Results].
To load the result data for all the cases of the currently selected study, right-click the
study in the [Project Manager] tree, then select [Check Results for All Cases].
To load the result data for the currently selected case, right-click the study in the [Proj-
ect Manager] tree, then select [Check Results for Active Case].
The [Check for New Results] dialog is displayed.
If result files that include result data that is yet to be loaded are in the calculation folder, then
result data is loaded from those result files.
MEMO When [Do not show this dialog in the future] is selected, the [Check for New Results] dia-
log will not be displayed even when the same operation is next performed.
 Mouse Operations
1. Open a project in JMAG-Designer.

2. Drag result files from a calculation folder to the study in the [Project Manager] tree.
Result data is loaded from the result files.
However, if the model or study settings are changed during the analysis, then the loaded results
will be added to the project as a new model and study.
Load Result Data by Specifying a Folder

Load result data from all the result files (.jplot) placed in a specified folder.
468
MEMO Note that with this procedure, result data from the result files that are placed in the subfolders
of the specified folder will not be loaded.
1. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click the project, model, or study and select [Check
Results in Folder].
2. In the [Check Results in Folder] dialog, specify the folder where the result files are
placed that you want to load.
3. Click [Select Folder].
Result files that include result data that are loaded by performing this operation are copied to the
JFILES folder of the project when the project is saved. After this operation, when the project is
next opened in JMAG-Designer, the result data is loaded in advance from the copied result files.
Load Only Result Data for the Necessary Cases After Checking the Results
When running massive case calculations in the background, such as for parametric analysis or
parameter optimization, once you have checked the results (response values) in the table for the cases
that have finished calculating, you can load the result data only for the cases that you have selected.
If an SSH remote machine is used for calculations and result files remain on the SSH remote
machine, then the results can still be viewed on the local machine.
MEMO If a JMAG-RemoteSystem CPU group is used for calculations, then you will not be able to per-
form the operations that are described here.
1. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click the analysis group or study and select [Load
Multi Case Results].
2. In the [Load Multi Case Results] dialog, check the results for each case in the response
table that is displayed.
You can create graphs and correlation matrices from the results that are displayed in the table.
Enter names to filter in [Look For] to display only the cases that correspond to the conditions of
that filter in the table. Filters that have been added to studies and analysis groups can also be
used.
3. Select the checkboxes of the cases that you want to load the result data for.
4. Click [OK].
469
Operations
Open Result Files

Open result files (.jplot, .plot) in JMAG-Designer.
MEMO When result files are opened by using the procedure that is described here from an analysis that
has been run in the background, cases and result files will not be associated.
1. Do one of the following:

• From the JMAG-Designer menu bar, select [File] > [Open].
• Click [Open] on the toolbar.
2. In the [Open File] dialog, specify the file to import.
3. Click [Open].
470
Delete Result Data from Cases

• Delete Result Data from Cases to Delete Result Files at the Same Time (page 471)
• Delete Result Data from Cases While Keeping Result Files (page 471)
Delete Result Data from Cases to Delete Result Files at the Same Time
This deletes the result data for each case. When this occurs, the result files (.jplot) that include the
result data will also be deleted.

2. Select [Delete Results of Active Case] or [Delete Results of All Cases].
MEMO The “active case” refers to the case that is currently displayed in the graphics window. You
can use the case control toolbar to switch between the cases to display.
Delete Result Data from Cases While Keeping Result Files

This deletes the result data for each case. However, result files (.jplot) that include that result data
will remain.

2. Select [Delete ResultSets of Active Case from Study] or [Delete ResultSets of All Cases
from Study].
MEMO The “active case” refers to the case that is currently displayed in the graphics window. You
can use the case control toolbar to switch between the cases to display.
MEMO You can re-associate the remaining result files with the cases by using [Check for New
Results]. For details, see “Load Result Data from Result Files” on page 468.
471
Operations
Delete Some Result Data from Result Files

You can delete unnecessary physical quantity data and steps from the result files that are associated
with each case. You can perform this operation to reduce the file size of the result files.
IMPORTANT Result files where physical quantity data or steps have been deleted cannot be
restored to the state prior to when the deletion occurred.
IMPORTANT Display settings such as contour plots that reference deleted physical quantity
data are automatically deleted from the study.
1. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click the study and select [Remove Results from Plot
File].
2. In the [Remove Steps and Results] dialog, specify the steps and physical quantity data to
be deleted.
3. Click [OK].
4. In the [Confirm Modify Plot File] dialog, check the number of steps and the physical
quantity data to be deleted.
5. Click [OK] to confirm the deletion.
Click [Cancel] to cancel the deletion. Clicking [Cancel] will return you to the [Remove
Steps and Results] dialog.
472
Checking Analysis Results in Tables
In this chapter, the procedure for checking analysis results in a table format is explained.

• Displaying Analysis Results Tables (page 474)
• Restricting Items Displayed in Results Tables or Menus (page 475)
• Displaying Analysis Results Tables for Each Element or Node (page 476)
• Displaying Analysis Results of Circuits in Tables (page 477)
473
Operations
Displaying Analysis Results Tables

1. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click [Graphs] under [Results].
The [Table Results] dialog is displayed. The analysis results of each part are displayed in table
format.
3. If necessary, export the table to a file (.csv, .txt, .html).
i. To export only the table being displayed, right-click the table and select [Export].
To export all tables in the active case, click [Export All Results].
To export all tables in all cases, click [Export All Cases].
Either the [Export Data] dialog or [Export all cases data] dialog is displayed.
ii. Specify the file name, file type, and destination folder.
The file type can be selected as a CSV file (.csv), text file (.txt), or HTML file (.html).
iii. Click [Save].
4. If necessary, create response values from the table data.
i. Click [Response Graph Data] in the [Table Results] dialog.
ii. In the [Response Graph Data] dialog, set the parameters.
iii. Click [OK].
The [Table] dialog is displayed.
iv. Click [Register as Response Data].
The response values are added under [Results] > [Response Graph] > [Response Data] in the
v. To export response value results data for all cases to file (.csv, .txt, .html), click
[Export All Results].
The [Export Data] dialog is displayed.
vi. Specify the file name, file type, and destination folder and click [Save].
474
Restricting Items Displayed in Results Tables or Menus

The items displayed can be restricted in the following dialog or menu:
• [Table Results] dialog
• The menu displayed when right-clicking [Graphs] under [Results] in the JMAG-Designer [Proj-
ect Manager] tree
1. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click [Graphs] under [Result Items].

2. Select [Customize Displayed Items].
3. In the [Customize Displayed Items] dialog, clear the checkboxes for the items you wish
to hide.
4. Click [OK].
The settings in the [Customize Displayed Items] dialog are reflected in the [Table Results] dia-
log, and the menu that appears when [Graphs] is right-clicked in the [Project Manager] tree.
MEMO The item defaults displayed in the results table in the [Preference] dialog can be set. To open
the [Preference] dialog, select [Tool] > [Preference] from the menu bar.
475
Operations
Displaying Analysis Results Tables for Each Element or Node

Display the analysis results for each selected element (or vertex, edge, face, part, node, element edge,
element face) in table format.
1. Use the buttons ( , , , , , , , ) on the [Selection] toolbar to switch the

type of selections beforehand.
MEMO When selecting a node, element edge, element face, or element, [View Mesh Geometry]
or [View Mesh] must be selected.
2. In the JMAG-Designer graphics window, select an element, vertex, edge, face, part,
node, element edge, or element face, and right-click.
MEMO It is possible to select multiple items and display the table. To select multiple items, hold
down the [Ctrl] key and click the desired items. To remove from selection, hold down the [Ctrl] key
and click the desired items to remove.
4. In the [Result Table Settings] dialog, set the parameters.
5. To display the results table, click [OK].
The [Table Results] dialog is displayed.
6. To export the result table data to a file (.csv, .txt, .html), click [OK (Export Only)].
In addition, in the [Export Data] dialog, specify the file name, file type, and location,
then click [Save].
476
Displaying Analysis Results of Circuits in Tables

• Display Terminal Voltages, Terminal Temperatures, or Terminal Control Signals in Tables (page
477)
• Display Potential Differences between Terminals or Temperature Differences between Terminals
in Tables (page 477)
• Display Contact Angles Between Brushes and Commutators in Tables (page 478)
Display Terminal Voltages, Terminal Temperatures, or Terminal Control Signals in

Tables
The terminal voltage table can be displayed when an electric circuit is set in a study. The terminal
temperature table can be displayed when a thermal circuit is set in a study. The terminal control sig-
nal table can be displayed when an control circuit is set in a study.
1. Start the Circuit Editor.

i. In the [Project Manager] tree, under a study, right-click [Circuit].
ii. Select [View].
2. In the Circuit Editor, specify the terminals to be added to the table.
i. Select the terminals on the circuit.
The selected terminal is displayed in red on the circuit.
ii. With the terminal selected, right-click and select [Add Terminal to Table].
iii. In the [Terminal Setting] dialog, enter a label to be applied to the terminal.
iv. Click [OK].
v. In the Circuit Editor, from the menu bar, select [File] > [Close].
3. Display a table in JMAG-Designer.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, under [Results], right-click [Graphs] and select [Show
Table].
ii. For the voltage table, click the [Circuit Voltage] tab.
For the temperature table, click the [Component Temperature] tab.
For the control signal table, click the [Control Signal] tab.
MEMO To delete a voltage table, temperature table, or control signal table, right-click a terminal
in the Circuit Editor and select [Remove Terminal from Table].
Display Potential Differences between Terminals or Temperature Differences

between Terminals in Tables
The table for the potential difference between two terminals can be displayed when the electric cir-
cuit (or control circuit) is set for the study. The table for the temperature difference between 2 ter-
minals can be displayed when the thermal circuit is set for the study.
477
Operations
MEMO Voltage Difference component is used in an electric circuit, the voltage difference between the
terminals can be output without performing the following procedure. For details on Voltage Difference
component, see “Parameter Explanation Edition”.

i. In the [Project Manager] tree, under a study, right-click [Circuit] and select [View].
2. In the Circuit Editor, specify the combination of terminals to be added to the table.
Any combination of electric, thermal, or control circuit terminals can be added to a table.
i. For the potential difference or temperature difference, select one terminal from any
two specified terminals.
ii. With the terminal selected, right-click and select [Add Terminal to Table].
iii. In the [Terminal Setting] dialog, enter a label to be applied to the terminal.
iv. Click [OK].
v. Repeating the same procedure, name the other terminal.
vi. With any terminal selected, right-click and select [Add Terminal Difference to Table].
vii.In the [Terminal Difference Setting] dialog, specify two terminals.
viii.Click [OK].
ix. In the Circuit Editor, from the menu bar, select [File] > [Close].
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, under [Results], right-click [Graphs] and select [Show
Table].
ii. For the potential difference table, click the [Voltage Difference] tab.
For the temperature difference table, click the [Temperature Difference] tab.
MEMO To delete the potential difference table or temperature difference table, right-click the
terminal in the Circuit Editor and select [Remove Terminal from Table].
Display Contact Angles Between Brushes and Commutators in Tables

The contact angle table can be displayed when a Brush/Commutator component is used in the elec-
tric circuit.

i. In the [Project Manager] tree, under a study, right-click [Circuit] and select [View].
2. In the Circuit Editor, specify the terminals to be added to the table.
478
i. Select the brush terminals.

Depending on the terminals selected at this point, the contents output to the graph and table
will differ.
Terminal on Terminal on
the brush side the commutator side
Component for brush/commutator

• Only selecting terminals on the brush side:
A combination of the selected brush side terminals and all the terminals on the commuta-
tor side is output.
• Only selecting terminals on the commutator side:
A combination of the selected commutator side terminals and all the brush side terminals
is output.
• Selecting multiple terminals on the brush side or commutator side respectively:
All possible combinations are output from the selected terminals.
ii. With the terminal selected, right-click and select [Add Contact with Brush to Graph].
iii. In the Circuit Editor, from the menu bar, select [File] > [Close].
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, under [Results] > [Graphs], right-click [Brush Contact
Angle].
ii. Select [Show] to open the [Graph] dialog.
The legend in the brush contact angle graph uses the number of each terminal in the Brush/
Commutator component. For example, selecting the terminal in the following figure in the
[Edit Circuit] window and executing [Add Contact with Brush to Graph], “Terminals 1 - 3”
appears in the legend on the [Graph] dialog.
479
Operations
480
Checking Analysis Results in Graphs
This chapter explains the procedure for confirming analysis results in graph form.

• Displaying Time Series Graphs of Analysis Results (page 482)
• Displaying Graphs of Result Values for Specified Paths (page 483)
• Displaying Time Series Graphs of Result Values for Specified Positions (page 485)
• Creating Graphs That Take Skew Effects from 2D Analysis Results Data into Account (page 487)
• Adding Calculation Processing to Graph Data (page 488)
• Changing the Graph Display Format (page 490)
• Exporting Graph Data to Files (page 491)
• Exporting Graphs to Image Files (page 492)
• Printing Graphs (page 493)
481
Operations
Displaying Time Series Graphs of Analysis Results

1. In the [Project Manager] tree, under [Results], right-click [Graphs].
2. To display the result graph of the current case, select (physical quantity) > [Show].
To display the results of all cases in one graph, select (physical quantity) > [Show All
Cases].
To display the results of filtered cases in one graph, select (physical quantity) > [Display
by Filter].
Depending on the physical quantity, select the component to be displayed.
Example: Lorentz force method
The history graph is displayed in the [Graph] dialog.

MEMO When [Show All Cases] is selected, results for cases calculated after this operation are auto-
matically added to the graph.
MEMO For analysis studies where the [Number of Steps] is set to “1,” right-clicking on the [Graphs]
in the [Project Manager] tree will not display the physical quantity names.
MEMO For details about operations in the [Graph] dialog, see the following pages:
• “Changing the Graph Display Format” on page 490
• “Exporting Graph Data to Files” on page 491
• “Exporting Graphs to Image Files” on page 492
• “Printing Graphs” on page 493
3. Zoom in or out the graph.
• A partial area of a graph can be extended in the [Graph] tab by moving the pointer in a target
area, and then releasing the button to set the modification.
• Click [Fit to Window] to display the entire graph.
• Right-click to zoom out.
482
Displaying Graphs of Result Values for Specified Paths

Values such as magnetic flux density and magnetic field distribution on the specified path are dis-
played in a graph.
Example: An arc section graph for arbitrary regions
The following types of graph sections are available.

• Line section:
A graph of physical quantity at each point on a straight line passing through the model. The
value of the data point on the graph is calculated by interpolating the value of the node included
in each element.
• Arc section:
A graph of physical quantity at each point on an arc passing through the model. The value of the
data point on the graph is calculated by interpolating the value of the node included in each ele-
ment.
• Line section for arbitrary region including air region:
A graph of physical quantity at each point on a straight line passing through the arbitrary region.
Points are taken at evenly-spaced intervals on a line and the value of each point is calculated
using the integration method.
• Arc section graph for arbitrary region including air region:
A graph of physical quantity at each point on an arc passing through the arbitrary region. Points
are taken at evenly-spaced intervals on a line and the value of each point is calculated using the
integration method.
Arbitrary section graphs can be created for the following physical quantities.
• Magnetic field analysis: Magnetic flux density, magnetic field
• Electric field analysis: Electric field
1. Create a section graph.

i. In the [Project Manager] tree, under [Results], right-click [Section].
ii. To create a section graph, select [Section] > [New Line] or [New Arc].
To create a section graph for arbitrary region, select [Arbitrary Region] > [New Line]
or [New Arc].
iii. In the [Section Line] or [Section Arc] setting panel, define a section line.
483
Operations
MEMO A straight line or arc indicating the position in which this graph will be evaluated is dis-
played. This line is called a “section line”. The start point is red, the end point is blue, and the
center points are white in a section line.
iv. Click [OK].
A section graph is added under [Results] > [Section] in the [Project Manager] tree. Right-
click that section graph and open the menu with [Show], [Show All Cases], [Edit], [Edit
Description], [Duplicate], and [Delete].
2. Display the section graph.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, under [Results] > [Section], right-click the section
graph.
ii. To display the section graph of the current case, select [Show] > (section graph
name).
To display the results of all cases in one graph, select [Show All Cases] > [New Graph].
The [Graph] dialog appears and the section graph is displayed in the [Graph] tab.
MEMO When [Show All Cases] is selected, the results of cases calculated after this operation are
automatically added to the graph.
iii. Click the [Table] tab.
The value of each data point in the section graph is displayed in table format.
iv. Click [Close] .
484
Displaying Time Series Graphs of Result Values for Specified

Positions
The probe is set to a user-defined position and a time series graph of the physical quantity at that
position is displayed.
Probe Graph
The following two types of probe time series graphs exist.

• Probes:
Acquire the time series of physical quantities at the measurement position.
• BH Probe:
Data obtained by combining the time series of two physical quantities (magnetic flux density
with respect to the magnetic field) at the measurement position is acquired.
1. Create a probe.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, under [Results] or [Result Items], right-click [Probe].
ii. Select [New Probe] or [New BH Probe].
iii. Set the position of the probe in the [Probe] setting panel.
[Point 1] is added as the default in the [Point] list. An arrow indicating [Point 1] is displayed
iv. Click [OK].

A probe is added under [Results] in the [Project Manager] tree. Right-clicking the probe will
display a menu with [Show], [Show All Cases], [Edit], [Edit Description], [Duplicate], and
[Delete].
485
Operations
2. Display the results of the probe in a graph.

i. In the [Project Manager] tree, under [Results] > [Section], right-click the section
graph.
ii. To display the result graph of the current case, select [Show] > (probe name).
To display the results of all cases in one graph, select [Show All Cases] > [New Graph].
The [Graph] dialog is displayed. The values of analysis results in measurement positions to be
included in a probe in a graph are displayed as lines only for the specified number of compo-
nents.
When specifying the phase while creating a probe, the phase value is displayed along with the
line name under the [Graph] dialog.
MEMO When [Show All Cases] is selected, the results of cases calculated after this operation are
automatically added to the graph.
MEMO Probes can be copied to different studies or studies of different models using drag-and-
drop. In the case of probes with specified IDs, if copying to a study that has a different mesh,
results at unintended coordinates may be output.
486
Creating Graphs That Take Skew Effects from 2D Analysis Results

Data into Account
For motors, the stator or magnet may be tilted obliquely in the axial direction in order to control
torque ripple. By processing result data of the 2D analysis of the motor, virtual expression of the
effect of skewing the model can be realized.
1. Display the graph of the result data for creating the skew graph.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, under [Results], right-click [Graphs].
ii. Select (physical quantity) > [Show].
Skew graphs can be created from datasets of torque, current, voltage, and electromagnetic
force.
The [Graph] dialog is displayed.
2. Create a skew graph.
i. In the [Graph] dialog, select [Calculation] > [Skew Graph].
ii. In the [Skew Graph] dialog, set the skew parameters.
iii. Click [OK].
A new [Graph] dialog opens, and a result graph is displayed when taking the skew effect into
account.
When skew effect is taken into account, the result graph can also be displayed with the fol-
lowing procedure.
• In the [Project Manager] tree, under [Results], right-click [Graphs]. Select (Item for which
the skew graph was created) > [Skew graph] > [Show].
MEMO The skew graph data can be deleted from the [Skew Graph] context menu or [Graph
Manager] dialog in the [Project Manager] tree.
487
Operations
Adding Calculation Processing to Graph Data

Perform the following calculation processing on the graph data of the analysis result:
• [Fourier Transform]:
Performs a Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) on graph data and create new graph data.
MEMO From another operation, a discrete Fourier transform can be performed on the results data of
the distribution amount output. For details, see “Adding Calculation Processing to Analysis Results
of Distribution Quantity” on page 523.
• [Moving Average]:
Calculates moving average from graph data and create new graph data.
• [Extract Frequency]:
Performs Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) on the graph data, extracts specified frequency compo-
nents, and creates new graph data.
• [Per Depth Average]:
Calculates the average for results for each depth of lamination created in a probe. This command
is displayed for the probes of items output when an eddy current distribution calculation inside a
steel sheet is set.
• [Create Loop Integral]:
Calculates each loop’s area for the results for each depth of lamination created in a BH probe.
This command is displayed for the BH probes of items output when an eddy current distribu-
tion calculation inside a steel sheet is set.
1. Add a calculation process, display a graph of the result data.

ii. Select (physical quantity) > [Show].
2. Set the calculation.
i. In the [Graph] dialog, select [Calculation] > (calculation name).
When selecting [Fourier Transform], the [Fourier Transform] dialog is displayed.
When selecting [Moving Average], the [Moving Average] dialog is displayed.
When selecting [Extract Frequency], the [Extract Frequency] dialog is displayed.
When selecting [Per Depth Average], the [Per Depth Average] dialog is displayed.
When selecting [Create Loop Integral], the [Loop Integral] dialog is displayed.
ii. Set the parameters of the dialog for each calculation.
iii. Click [OK].
In the [Project Manager] tree, under [Results] > [Graphs] > (physical quantity), calculation
settings are added. Right-clicking it displays [Show] or [Delete] in the menu.
If [Create Graph] is selected, new graph data is created from the calculation results.
If [Show Graph after Calculation] is selected, the graph created from the calculation results is
displayed.
3. If necessary, display a new graph.
When [Create Graph] is cleared in each setting panel, execute the following operations:
488

ii. Select (Item for which calculation was executed) > (calculation name) > [Show] > (cal-
culation title).
The graph is displayed in the [Graph] dialog.

MEMO If you selected [Amplitude and Phase] or [Decibel] for [Output Type], an [Amplitude]
dataset and a [Phase] dataset are created.
MEMO Graph data can be deleted from the context menu of each graph in the [Project Man-
ager] tree or the [Graph Manager] dialog.
489
Operations
Changing the Graph Display Format

1. In the [Graph] dialog, display the graph.
See the following pages for the procedures to display the graphs.
• Creating Graphs That Take Skew Effects from 2D Analysis Results Data into Account (page
487)
• Creating Scalar Response Values (page 638)
2. If necessary, change the properties of the graph.
i. On the [Graph] tab, click [Edit graph properties]
ii. In the [Graph Properties] dialog, set the axes and display range of the graph.
iii. Click [OK].
3. If necessary, change the properties of the graph lines.
i. Click the [Line Options] tab in the [Graph] dialog.
The list of lines is displayed in table format in the [Line Options] tab.
ii. Set the properties of each graph line.
MEMO To select multiple lines, click the line on the table while holding down the [Shift] key
and [Ctrl] key on the keyboard. When multiple lines are in the selected state, switching between
show/hide of one of them also toggles show/hide of the other group of selected lines. The same
applies to [average] and [RMS].
MEMO When the column heading of the table is clicked once, the lines will be sorted in ascend-
ing order in reference to the line. Clicking the column heading again sorts the list in descending
order. A sort mark () is displayed on the column heading, which is the sort reference.
Click [Initialize Order] to restore the state before sorting the display order. Initialization of dis-
play order is valid even when the [Graph] dialog closes.
4. Expand or shrink the graph.
i. Click the [Graph] tab in the [Graph] dialog.
ii. To partially enlarge the graph, hold down the left button on the graph, move the
pointer to the desired range, and release your finger from the button.
iii. Click [Fit to Window] to display the entire graph.

iv. Right-click to zoom out.
490
Exporting Graph Data to Files

See the following pages for the procedures to display the graphs:
487)
2. In the [Graph] dialog, select [File] > (Export menu).
The export commands are as follows:
• [Export All]:
Selecting this command displays the [Export All] dialog.
• [Export Displayed]:
• [Export All (All Cases)]:
• [Export Displayed (All Cases)]:
Selecting this command displays the [Export Displayed All Case Date] dialog.
MEMO Graphs can also be exported from the context menu in the [Table] tab.
3. Specify file name, file type, save location.

The file type can be selected as a CSV file (.csv), text file (.txt), or HTML file (.html).
4. Click [Save].
491
Operations
Exporting Graphs to Image Files

See the following pages for the procedures to display the graphs.
487)
2. Specify the image size.
i. In the [Graph] dialog, select [File] > [Image Setup].
ii. In the [Image setup] dialog, set the image size.
iii. Click [OK].
3. Export the graph to an image file.
i. In the [Graph] dialog, select [File] > [Export Image].
ii. In the [Export Image] dialog, specify file name, file type, save location.
The file type can be selected from the following:
• [PNG file (.png)]
• [JPEG file (.jpg)]
• [Windows Bitmap (.bmp)]
• [Scalable Vector Graphics file (.svg)]
iii. Click [Save].
492
Printing Graphs
See the following pages for the procedures to display the graphs:
487)
2. Print.
i. In the [Graph] dialog, select [File] > [Print].
Or, click [Print] .
ii. In the [Print] dialog, select the printer and set the print range.
iii. Click [Print].
493
Operations
494
Checking the Distribution and Flux from an Image
In this chapter the procedures for checking, using an image, the distribution of physical quantities output and
flux used for analysis results is explained.

• Displaying Results Contour Plots (page 496)
• Displaying Results Vector Plots, Tensor Plots (page 498)
• Displaying Flux Lines (page 500)
• Displaying Multiple Result Plots Simultaneously (page 502)
• Applying Magnification to Displacement (page 504)
• Showing an Overlapping Model Outline Before Deformation (page 505)
• Selecting Steps and Phases to be Displayed in the Window (page 506)
• Displaying Results Images as Animations (page 507)
• Displaying Results Images of User-Defined Cross Sections (page 508)
• Displaying Partial Model Results in Full Models (page 510)
• Displaying Circuit Analysis Results on Circuit Diagram (page 512)
495
Operations
Displaying Results Contour Plots

Evaluating analysis results using an isoline map.
1. Create a contour plot.

i. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click [Results] or [Result Items].
ii. Select [New Contour Plot].
iii. In the [Contour Plot] setting panel, set the parameters.
iv. Click [OK].
[Contour Plot] is added under [Results], and the contour plot created below it is displayed.
2. Display a contour plot.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, under [Results] > [Contour Plots], select the contour
plot to display.
ii. Click [Display Contour Result] on the toolbar.

• When clicking on the model in the graphics window, the values of an analysis result such
as the coordinates of a point and the magnetic flux density is displayed (contour plot
probe).
• When contour plots of items (magnetic flux density, magnetic field, etc.) output for each
element are displayed, when clicking [Select Element] on the toolbar and then selecting
an element, the value of the analysis result for that element is displayed.
• Likewise, if a contour plot of an item (nodal force, displacement, etc.) output for each
node is displayed, when clicking [Select Node] on the toolbar and then selecting a
node, the analysis result value at that node is displayed.
MEMO Multiple result plots (contours, vectors, and flux lines) can be displayed in a single window
simultaneously. For details, see “Displaying Multiple Result Plots Simultaneously” on page 502.
3. Edit contour parameters as needed.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, under [Results] > [Contour Plots], right-click the con-
tour plot.
ii. Select [Edit].
iii. In the [Contour Plot] setting panel, edit the parameters.
MEMO Toggling between case, phase, and step is also possible during parameter editing.
iv. Click [Apply].
v. Checking the display repeat applying parameter changes and displaying as necessary.
496
vi. Click [OK] to close the [Contour Plot] setting panel.
4. Click [Display Contour Result] again to hide the contour plot.
497
Operations
Displaying Results Vector Plots, Tensor Plots

Use the vector plot to check the analysis results.
MEMO For structural analysis or thermal stress analysis, the principal stress or principal strain can be
checked by the tensor display. The procedure for creating a tensor plot is the same as for creating a vector
plot. Select [Main Stress] or [Main Strain] from the [Result Type] list on the [Vector] setting panel.
1. Create a vector plot.

ii. Select [New Vector Plot].
iii. In the [Vector Plot] setting panel, set the parameters.
iv. Click [OK].
[Vector Plot] is added under [Results], and the vector plot created below it is displayed.
2. Display a vector plot.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, under [Results] > [Vector Plots], select the vector plot
to display.
ii. Click [Display Vector Result] on the toolbar.

MEMO The scale bar can be switched to hidden. When switching to hidden, set in the [Layout]
setting panel in the [Preferences] dialog. The [Preferences] dialog appears by selecting [Tools] >
[Preferences] from the menu bar.
iii. If necessary, click  on the right side of [Display Vector Result] to toggle through the
vector plot renderings when changing the view such as rotation and pan.
Switching the rendering reduces the vector display speed in an analysis model with many ele-
ments.
• [Show Vectors During View Change]:
When this is selected, the vector plot arrow type will not be changed even during a view
change.
• [Show Line Vectors During View Change]:
When this is selected, the arrow type of the vector plot rendered only during a view
change is changed to [Line]. For [Line], the vector display speed is reduced compared to
other arrow types such as [Cone] or [Pyramid].
• [Hide Vectors During View Change]:
When this is selected, vector plot rendering is stopped temporarily only during a view
change.
3. Edit the vector parameters as necessary.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, under [Results] > [Vector Plots], right-click the vector
plot.
ii. Select [Edit].
iii. In the [Vector Plot] setting panel, edit the parameters.
498
iv. Click [Apply].

vi. Click [OK] to close the [Vector Plot] setting panel.
4. Click [Display Vector Result] again to hide the vector plot.
499
Operations
Displaying Flux Lines

Evaluates analysis results using flux lines. The following physical quantities are able to display as flux
lines:
• 2D or axisymmetric model
• Magnetic field analysis: magnetic flux density
MEMO When displaying flux lines with 2D model or axisymmetric model, vector potential must
be output to the result file. The physical quantity to be output to the result file is set by [Output
Results] on the [Output Control] setting panel of the [Study Properties] dialog.
• 3D model
• Magnetic field analysis: magnetic flux density, current density, magnetization, magnetic field
strength and Lorentz force density
• Thermal analyses: heat flux
• Electric field analysis: electric field and current density
1. Create flux lines.

ii. Select [New Flux Lines].
iii. In the [Flux Line] setting panel, set the parameters.
iv. Click [OK].
[Flux Line] is added under [Results], and the flux lines created below it are displayed.
2. Display flux lines.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, under [Results] > [Flux Line], select the flux line to dis-
play.
ii. Click [Display Flux Line] on the toolbar.

3. If necessary, edit the flux line parameters.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, under [Results] > [Flux Line], right-click the flux line.
ii. Select [Edit].
iii. In the [Flux Line] setting panel, edit the parameters.
iv. Click [Apply].
vi. Click [OK] to close the [Flux Line] setting panel.
4. Click [Display Flux Line] again to hide flux lines.

5. Output the flux line results to a table.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, under [Results] > [Flux Line], select the flux line to dis-
play.
500
ii. Select [Show Table].

The [Display Result of Flux Line] dialog is displayed.
• The name of the active study is displayed to the right of [Study Title] and the active case
number is displayed to the right of [Case].
• Under the [Result Table] tab the flux line data point coordinate values (x, y, z) and their
physical quantity components (x, y, z) are displayed.
• Under the [Line integral] tab the flux line lengths and their line integral values are dis-
played.
• Right-clicking a cell in the table displays [Export], [Copy], and [Select All].
iii. If necessary, export the table to a file.
Click the tab ([Result Table] or [Line Integral]) for the table to output to a file. In addition,
click [Export Table] to export only a table for the current step to a file, or click [Export Table
for All Steps] to export a table for each step to a CSV file.
When [Export Table] is clicked, the [Export CSV Data] dialog is displayed. Specify the file
type (.csv, .txt, .html) and export folder, and click [Save].
When [Export Table for All Steps] is clicked, the [Export CSV Files For All Flux Lines Steps]
dialog is displayed. Specify [Output Folder] and [Base Filename] and click [OK]. When the
export is finished, the same number of CSV files as the number of steps are output to the
specified folder.
iv. Click [Close].
501
Operations
Displaying Multiple Result Plots Simultaneously

Multiple result plots (contours, vectors, and flux lines) can be displayed in a single window simulta-
neously.
Simultaneous display for magnetic flux density contour plots (isolines)

and current density contour plots (shading)
1. Create multiple result plots (contours, vectors, or flux lines) for a study.
• “Displaying Flux Lines” on page 500
When result plots are added to studies, [Composite Result] is displayed under [Results] in the
2. Add simultaneous display settings to the study.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click [Composite Result] under [Results].
ii. Select [New composite result].
iii. In the [Composite Result] setting panel, set the parameters.
iv. Click [OK].
Simultaneous display settings are added under [Results] > [Composite Result] in the [Project
Manager] tree. Right-click simultaneous display settings to display a menu consisting of
[Duplicate], [Edit], and [Remove].
3. This begins the procedure for displaying result plots simultaneously.
i. When multiple simultaneous display settings are added to studies, select the simul-
taneous display setting to use under [Results] > [Composite Result] in the [Project
Manager] tree.
502
ii. Click [View Composite Result] on the toolbar.

Multiple result plots are displayed simultaneously in the graphics window.
4. Edit the simultaneous display setting parameters as necessary.
i. Select the simultaneous display setting to edit under [Results] > [Composite Result]
in the [Project Manager] tree.
ii. Select [Edit].
iii. In the [Composite Result] setting panel, edit the parameters.
iv. Click [Apply].
v. Check the display, and repeat the changing of parameters and application to the dis-
play as necessary.
vi. Click [OK] to close the [Composite Result] setting panel.
5. Click [View Composite Result] again to remove the simultaneous display.
503
Operations
Applying Magnification to Displacement

A rendering emphasizing the displacement is possible by specifying a magnification for the resulting
displacement.
Original model Model with displacement Model with scaled displacement

Even if the displacement of a model The displacement can be clearly
can be evaluated by the numerical evaluated
results, it may not be displayed.
1. Set the scale.

ii. Select [New Scaled Factor].
iii. In the [New scaling factor Settings] setting panel, set the parameters.
iv. Click [OK].
[Scale Factor] is added under [Results], and the scaling factor is displayed under the [Scale
Factor].
MEMO From the scaled displacement context menu editing, deleting, and copying can be per-
formed.
2. Display a displacement contour plot or vector plot in the graphics window.
See “Displaying Results Contour Plots” on page 496, and “Displaying Results Vector Plots,
Tensor Plots” on page 498.
3. Apply the scaling.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, under [Results] > [Scale Factor], select the scale factor
to be applied to the model.
ii. Click [Scaled Displacement] on the toolbar.

4. Edit scale parameters as necessary.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, under [Results] > [Scale Factor], select the scale factor
to edit.
ii. Select [Edit].
iii. In the [Edit scaling factor Settings] setting panel, edit the parameters.
iv. Click [Apply].
vi. Click [OK] to close the [Edit scaling factor Settings] setting panel.
5. Click [Scaled Displacement] again to clear the scale.
504
Showing an Overlapping Model Outline Before Deformation

The original geometry of the model and its displayed resultant outline when changed can be ren-
dered as an overlay. This is effective for visually checking the amount of displacement.
Original Deformed Original + Deformed

(Displacement contour plot) with [View Original Model]
1. Display a displacement contour plot or vector plot in the graphics window.

See “Displaying Results Contour Plots” on page 496, and “Displaying Results Vector Plots,
Tensor Plots” on page 498.
2. Click [Overlay Prototype] on the toolbar to render with the original diagram overlaid.
3. Click [Overlay Prototype] again to hide the original diagram.
505
Operations
Selecting Steps and Phases to be Displayed in the Window

When analysis is being performed with [Step Control] specified in [Study Properties], the step num-
ber to display can be specified. For magnetic field frequency analysis, structural frequency analysis,
or electric field frequency analysis, the phase to display can be specified.
1. Display contour plots, vector plots, or flux lines in the graphics window.
See “Displaying Results Contour Plots” on page 496, “Displaying Results Vector Plots, Tensor
Plots” on page 498, and “Displaying Flux Lines” on page 500.
2. Use the slider bar or spin box at the top left of the JMAG-Designer window to specify
the step and phase to display.
• Step slider bar, phase slider bar:
Move the slider bar left or right to change the number in the spin box next to the slider bar.
Move the slider bar left or right to match the step number or phase to be displayed.
Step slider bar
MEMO The JMAG-Designer step slider bar and the [Edit Circuit] window step slider bar are
synchronized.
• Numerical input:
The step number or phase to display using the spin box next to the slider bar can be specified.
After entering a number, press the [Enter] key on the keyboard. The specified step number or
phase is displayed.
506
Displaying Results Images as Animations

Using animation playback control, animation for analysis results of each step or phase can be dis-
played.
1. Display either of contour plots, vector plots, or flux lines in the graphics window.
See “Displaying Results Contour Plots” on page 496, “Displaying Results Vector Plots, Tensor
Plots” on page 498, and “Displaying Flux Lines” on page 500.
2. Play animation.
Using animation playback controls animation can be displayed and controlled. The function of
each animation playback control button is as follows:
MEMO It may take time to display the animation the first time, but after the first time it will be dis-
played quickly due to caching.
3. Adjust the speed of the animation as necessary.
i. Click the rightmost icon on the animation playback control.
ii. Select [Speed] > [Slow], [Medium], or [Fast].
4. Select animation playback mode.
ii. Select [Mode] > [Play once], [Loop repeatedly], or [Loop repeatedly with pause].
5. Change the animation display step and phase as necessary.
ii. Select [Step/Phase].
iii. In the [Step/Phase] dialog, set the parameters.
iv. Click [OK].
6. If necessary, save the animation in a movie file (.avi).
i. From the menu bar, select [File] > [Export Animation].
ii. In the [Export Animation] dialog, set the parameters.
iii. Click [OK].
iv. Specify the AVI file name and destination folder.
v. Click [Save].
507
Operations
Displaying Results Images of User-Defined Cross Sections

In order to check the results of a non-visible interior portion of the model, the model can be cut and
displayed at any position. To display a cut of the model, create a cut plane.
There are two types of cut planes: a “cut plane” for creating a plane and a “cut cylinder” for creating
a cylindrical surface.
Cut plane and cut cylinder
1. Create a cut plane and apply it to a model.

i. In the [Project Manager] tree, under the model, right-click [Cut Plane].
ii. Select [New Cut Plane] or [New Cut Cylinder].
iii. In the [Cut Plane] or [Cut Cylinder] setting panel, set the parameters.
MEMO The position can be set by directly moving the cut plane previewed in the graphics win-
dow.
• Cut plane:
The position of the cut plane can be changed by mouse clicking on marks (1), (2), or (3) in the
figure below and dragging in any desired direction.
(1): Rotate the cut plane about the X-axis.

(2): Move the cut plane parallel to the Y-axis.
(3): Rotate the cut plane about the Z-axis.
• Cut cylinder:
The position of the cut plane can be changed by mouse clicking on marks (1), (2), (3), or (4) in
508
the figure below and dragging in any desired direction.
(1): Rotate the cut plane about the X-axis.

(2): Move the cut plane parallel to the Y-axis.
(3): Rotate the cut plane about the Z-axis.
(4): Move the position of the cut plane in the radial direction.
iv. Click [OK].
When the cut plane is created, the cut plane settings are automatically applied to the model.
The created cut plane is displayed under [Cut Plane] in the [Project Manager] tree.
MEMO The icon image displayed in the [Project Manager] tree differs depending on the cut
plane type.
: This icon is displayed for a cut plane.
: This icon is displayed for a cut cylinder.
MEMO Editing, deleting, and copying can be performed from the cut plane context menu.
2. Change the display method for the cut plane as necessary.
• [Show Only Cut Planes] :
This can be selected when [View Mesh Outline] or [View Mesh] is selected.
• [Show Cut Planes Out Lines]
3. Clear the cut plane.
Perform one of the following operations.
• Right-click [Cut Plane] in the [Project Manager] tree and select [Hide All].
• Clear the cut plane checkbox displayed under [Cut Plane] in the [Project Manager] tree.
4. Re-apply the cut plane if necessary.
Check the cut plane checkbox displayed under [Cut Plane] in the [Project Manager] tree.
509
Operations
Displaying Partial Model Results in Full Models

From copying, the partial model results are displayed in the full model.
Example: From model copying 1/8 partial model analysis results, a full model is displayed
1. If necessary, select how to display the boundaries.

i. From the JMAG-Designer menu bar, select [Tools] > [Preferences].
ii. In the [Preferences] dialog, click [Appearance] from the navigation bar.
iii. In the [Appearance] setting panel, select the method for displaying the part bound-
ary lines.
iv. Click [OK].
2. Set model copy.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click [Model Copy].
ii. Select [Edit Model Copy].
iii. In the [Model Copy] setting panel, set the parameters.
MEMO To modify copy settings, select a copy to modify from the [Copy Type] list and modify
it. To delete a copy setting, select from the [Copy Type] list and click [Delete] .
iv. Click [OK].
3. Click [View Model Copy] on the toolbar to apply a model copy.

4. Edit the model copy parameters as needed.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click [Model Copy].
ii. Select [Edit].
iii. In the [Model Copy] setting panel, edit the parameters.
iv. Click [Apply].
510
vi. Click [OK] to close the [Model Copy] setting panel.
5. Click [View Model Copy] again to clear a model copy.
511
Operations
Displaying Circuit Analysis Results on Circuit Diagram

The following results can be displayed on a circuit diagram:
• Electric circuit:
Terminal voltage, terminal current, current vector of component, maximum/minimum value of
voltage for the entire circuit, maxi-mum/minimum value of current for the entire circuit
• Thermal circuit:
Terminal temperature, terminal heat flow, heat flow vector of component, maximum/minimum
value of temperature for the entire circuit, maximum/minimum value of heat flow for the entire
circuit

i. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click [Circuit].
ii. Select [View].
2. Use the [PostTools] toolbar to view the result values and vectors in the circuit diagram.
To check the electric circuit, click [Display Voltage Value] , [Display Current Value] , and
[Display Current Vector] .
To check the result of the thermal circuit, click [Display Temperature Value] , [Display Heat
Flow Value] , and [Display Heat Flow Vector] .
Result of thermal circuit
To change analysis steps, move the slider bar of the step control or specify the step number in the
spin box.
If both electric circuit and thermal circuit are used in a magnetic field analysis study or efficiency
map analysis study, and the time step intervals of the electric circuit and thermal circuit are not
the same, a list for circuit selection is displayed. Step control refers to the time step setting of the
circuit selected in this list.
3. Exit the Circuit Editor.
512
i. Select [File] > [Close] from the Circuit Editor menu bar.
Or, click [Close] in Circuit Editor.
513
Operations
514
Adding Calculation Processing to Analysis Results
This chapter describes the operations to add the calculation processing to analysis results.

• Calculating Magnetic Flux from Analysis Results (page 516)
• Calculating the Average Value and Total Value of Specified Parts, Faces, and Edges (page 517)
• Calculating Electromagnetic Force and Torque from Analysis Results (page 518)
• Creating Surfaces or Edges for Results Calculations (page 521)
• Creating Custom Results by Applying Expressions to Analysis Results (page 522)
• Adding Calculation Processing to Analysis Results of Distribution Quantity (page 523)
515
Operations
Calculating Magnetic Flux from Analysis Results

Calculates the flux linkage for the selected face (or edge) and displays as a table after running a mag-
netic field analysis.
MEMO This function calculates the flux linkage using analysis results. If the Magnetic Flux condition is
set in the magnetic field analysis, it is not necessary to use this function. Because this function and Mag-
netic Flux conditions are same effect.
1. Set the magnetic flux calculation to the magnetic field analysis study.
i. Right-click [Calculation] under [Results] (or [Result Items]) > [Graphs] in the [Project
Manager] tree.
ii. Select [Add Magnetic Flux Calculation].
iii. In the [Magnetic Flux] setting panel, set the parameters.
iv. Click [OK].
[Magnetic Flux] is added under [Results] > [Calculation] in the [Project Manager] tree.
2. Display the magnetic flux calculation result.
i. Right-click [Magnetic Flux] under [Results] > [Graphs] > [Calculation] in the [Project
Manager] tree.
ii. To display the active case results, select [Show].
To display the results of all cases, select [Show All Cases].
The [Graph] dialog appears and the results graph of magnetic flux calculation is displayed.
iii. Click the [Table] tab to display the results data table.
MEMO Results table of magnetic flux calculation can also be displayed running following proce-
dure.
• Right-click [Graphs] under [Results], and select [Show Table]. And click the [Magnetic Flux]
tab in the [Table Result] dialog.
516
Calculating the Average Value and Total Value of Specified Parts,

Faces, and Edges
It is possible to calculate the total values and maximum values of result distribution amounts in
specified parts (or faces, edges, sets, or mesh groups) and display them in a table format.
Part calculations, surface calculations, and edge calculations can be set for 3D models. Part calcula-
tions and edge calculations can be set for 2D models.
The following calculations can be selected.
• [Maximum Value] • [Integral]

• [Minimum Value] • [Line Integral]
• [Range] (Maximum Value - Minimum Value) • [Surface Integral]
• [Sum] • [Region Below Threshold]
• [Simple Average] • [Region Above Threshold]
• [Integral Average] • [Torque]
1. Create sets or mesh groups to calculate the physical quantities of part sets, face sets,
edge sets, element groups, element face groups, or element edge groups.
A set is a function to group selected parts, faces, edges, or vertices. A mesh group is a function to
group selected elements, element faces, element edges, or nodes.
See “Create Sets” on page 346 and “Create Mesh Groups” on page 349 for instructions on cre-
ating sets and mesh groups.
2. Set the part calculation, surface calculation, or edge calculation in the study.
i. Right-click [Calculation] under [Results] (or [Result Items]) > [Graphs] in the [Project
Manager] tree.
ii. Select either [Add Part Calculation], [Add Surface Calculation], or [Add Edge Calcula-
tion].
[Add Surface Calculation] can be selected only for 3D models.
iii. In the [Calculation] setting panel, set the parameters.
iv. Click [OK].
“Result type: Calculation title” is added under [Analysis Result] > [Graphs] > [Calculation]
(Example: “Flux density: Average value of coil”). Right-click it to display [Create Response
Value], [Edit], [Duplicate], and [Delete].
3. Display the calculation result.
i. Right-click “result type: calculation title” under [Results] > [Graphs] > [Calculation] in
ii. To display the active case results, select [Show] > (calculation title).
To display the results of all cases, select [Show All Cases] > [New graph] (or “calcula-
tion title”).
The [Graph] dialog appears and the calculation results graph is displayed.
iii. Click the [Table] tab to display the calculation results data table.
517
Operations
Calculating Electromagnetic Force and Torque from Analysis

Results
The electromagnetic force and torque recalculation function (RecalcForce) via post-processing can
be used to recalculate electromagnetic force from the input files (.jcf ) and result files (.jplot) of mag-
netic field analyses, and output to new result files.
By using the result calculation function for those new result files, electromagnetic force and torque
can be calculated for parts where Force conditions and Torque conditions are not set.
When RecalcForce is used, the results of electromagnetic force and torque for target parts can be
obtained in a period of time shorter than that of reconfiguring settings for Force conditions and
Torque conditions and running analyses again.
MEMO The RecalcForce function, Force conditions, and Torque conditions provide the same effect.
Using the RecalcForce function is not required when all required values have been obtained by setting
Force conditions and Torque conditions in analyses.
Use the RecalcForce function when it is necessary to obtain electromagnetic force and torque for
parts where Force and Torque conditions are not set after running magnetic field analyses.
 Preconditions
Input files (.jcf ) and result files (.jplot) are required for electromagnetic force recalculations via the
RecalcForce function.
• The following data must be output to result files (.jplot):
• Material properties
• Result physical quantities: Vector potential, displacement.
The output of these physical quantities is determined from the [Output Results] settings in
the [Output Control] setting panel of the [Study Properties] dialog.
• Mesh data:
The output of mesh data is determined from the [Output Results] settings in the [Output
Control] setting panel of the [Study Properties] dialog.
• The mesh data in the input JCF file and the JPLOT file must be the same.
• Analysis result files (.jplot) that use Multi Slice conditions may also be used, but result files must
be used for each slice. 3D skew model result files cannot be used.
• Errors will occur when mesh data differs between input files and result files.
• When adaptive mesh or [Generate Mesh at Each Step] is used in magnetic field analyses, use the
file “*_input.jcf” that is output to the same folder as the input file after magnetic field analysis
has completed. This file is the output file with mesh information added.
MEMO The name of the JCF file that executed analysis is given to the “*” in “*_input.jcf”.
 Procedures
1. Run the RecalcForce function from the JSOL-provided batch file (or shell file).
i. Position the input JCF file and the JPLOT file in any folder.
ii. Copy the JSOL-provided batch file (or shell file) to the same folder as Step i.
The batch file or the shell file can be found in the following folders:
• Windows (batch file):
(JMAG installation folder)\sample\Solver\ForceRecalculation
518
Windows example:
C:\Program Files\JMAG-Designer22.2\sample\Solver\ForceRecalculation
• Linux (shell file):

(JMAG installation directory)/solver/mod/tools
When using the highly parallel distributed memory-type parallel computing (MPP) function,
use RecalcForce_mpp_sample.bat (or RecalcForce_mpp_sample.sh). Otherwise, use Recalc-
Force_sample.bat (or RecalcForce_sample.sh).
iii. Open the batch file (or shell file) copied in Step ii with a text editor to edit portions of
the content, then save the batch file (or shell file).
The following example is a description of the content for RecalcForce_sample.bat. The Recal-
cForce function is executed when the “-RECALC:force” option is used.
Change the values for “JCFPATH” and “DesignerPATH” to accommodate the environment
being used. Specify the input JCF file name in “JCFPath”. There is no need to include the
extension in the file name.
###############
# Description
###############
# Environment variable
# PATH: Install directory of JMAG-Designer.
# Command
# COMMAND -IN:INPUT_FILE -OUT:binary -RECALC:force
# DesignerPATH: Full path of JMAG-Designer
# JCFPATH: Input jcf file name except ".jcf".
####(you have to check)###

set JCFPATH=2dpm
set DesignerPATH=C:\Program Files\JMAG-Designer22.2
##########################
set JAMPATH="%DesignerPATH%\jam.exe"
set InsDir=%DesignerPATH%
set PATH=%PATH%;%DesignerPATH%;
%JAMPATH% -IN:%JCFPATH%.jcf -OUT:binary -RECALC:force
del jstage3
del jcgmntr
del jri_module_version_jam
del %JCFPATH%.loss
del %JCFPATH%.monitor
pause()
iv. Run the batch file (or shell file) from Step iii.
The RecalcForce function is run, and electromagnetic force is recalculated based on the input
file and the result file.
A result file containing the calculated electromagnetic force is written with the name “XXX_-
force_all.jplot” (with the input file name given to the “XXX”). Only nodal force and Lorentz
force distribution and displacement is out-put to this file. This file can also be used for one-
way coupled analyses and the Multi-Purpose File Export Tool, etc.
519
Operations
2. Open “XXX_force_all.jplot” in JMAG-Designer.

3. Obtain electromagnetic force or torque using the [Calculation] function.
i. Right-click [Calculation] under [Results] > [Graphs] in the [Project Manager] tree.
ii. Select [Add Part Calculation].
The [Calculation] setting panel is displayed.
iii. Select parts to calculate electromagnetic force or torque.
iv. Set the parameters.
Select [Lorentz Force Density] or [Nodal Force] as the [Result Type].
To calculate torque, select [Torque] as the [Result Type], and configure settings for [Rotation
Axis]. This calculates torque around the set axis.
For the procedure after this step, see “Calculating the Average Value and Total Value of
Specified Parts, Faces, and Edges” on page 517.
520
Creating Surfaces or Edges for Results Calculations

A surface for 3D analysis or an edge for 2D analysis is created virtually in any position. Created cross
surfaces and edges can be used in flux calculations, surface calculations, and edge calculations.
1. Create a cut plane or edge for results calculations.

i. Right-click [Calculation Target] under [Results] (or [Result Items]) > [Graphs] > [Calcu-
lation] in the [Project Manager] tree.
ii. Select [Create Surface] or [Create Edge].
[Create Surface] can be selected only when a 3D analysis. [Create Edge] can be selected when
a 2D analysis.
iii. In the [Calculation Target Surface] or [Calculation Target Edge] setting panel, set the
parameters.
iv. Click [OK].
Add a surface or edge under [Results] > [Graphs] > [Calculations] > [Calculation Target] in
the [Project Manager] tree. Right-clicking them displays [Edit], [Duplicate], and [Delete] as
commands.
2. Set the magnetic flux calculation, or surface/edge calculation in the study and check the
calculation results.
For the procedures of each calculation, see the following page.
• Magnetic flux calculation:
See “Calculating Magnetic Flux from Analysis Results” on page 516.
• Surface calculation, edge calculation:
See “Calculating the Average Value and Total Value of Specified Parts, Faces, and Edges”
on page 517.
When [Select Calculation Targets] is clicked in any of the calculation setting panels, a surface
or edge can be selected. For details, see “Specifying Analysis Condition and Function Settings”
on page 66.
521
Operations
Creating Custom Results by Applying Expressions to Analysis

Results
Creates an output item by defining expressions based on results data of, such as, magnetic flux den-
sities and magnetic fields. The output items defined by this user are called “user components”.
1. Create and add a user component to JMAG-Designer.

i. From the menu bar, select [Tools] > [User Components].
ii. In the [User Components] dialog, click [Create].
iii. In the [Create User Components] dialog, set the parameters.
iv. Click [OK] to return to the [User Components] dialog.
A user component is created and the component name is displayed in the list of the [User
Components] dialog. The user component can be edited and deleted in the [User Compo-
nent] dialog.
v. Click [Close] in the [User Components] dialog.
2. Display the user component.
i. Open the setting panels of contour plot, probe and so on.
ii. Select the user component that is created from [Result Type].
Example: [Contour Plot] setting panel
iii. Specify the other parameters, and click [OK].

iv. Display the contour plot, graph of probe or so on.
522
Adding Calculation Processing to Analysis Results of Distribution

Quantity
The following calculation processing can be added to the analysis results of distribution quantity
such as magnetic flux density, temperature:
• [Fourier Transform] (distribution amount):
Runs a discrete Fourier transform (DFT) on the items output as the distribution amount in a
transient analysis.
• [Filter Calculation]:
Runs a Fourier transform on the items output as the distribution amount, extracts the specified
frequency components, and outputs the result in the time region by means of reverse transforma-
tion.
• [Difference Calculation]:
Calculates the difference and ratio of two cases for the items output as distribution amounts.
1. Set the calculation to the study.

i. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click [Calculation Tools] under [Results] (or
[Result Items]).
ii. Select either [Create Result Difference], [Create Fourier Transform], or [Create Fre-
quency Filter].
These commands are not displayed for studies that do not contain distribution results.
iii. In the [Fourier Transform], [Filter Calculation], or [Difference Calculation] setting
panel, define the calculation.
iv. Click [OK].
Either [FFT], [Filter], or [Difference] is added under [Results] > [Calculation Tools] in the
[Project Manager] tree. [Edit], [Duplicate], [Delete], [Run Current Case], and [Run All
Cases] appear as menus after right-clicking these.
If the [Execute Calculation Automatically] was selected in the each calculation setting panel,
the calculation is run automatically after setting panel of each calculation closes.
2. If necessary, run the calculation.
If the [Execute Calculation Automatically] was cleared in the each calculation setting panel, the
calculation is need to run manually.
i. Right-click “result type: calculation title” under [Results] > [Calculation Tools] in the
ii. To calculate value for active case, select [Run Current Case].
To calculate value for all cases, select [Run All Cases].
The calculation runs and the icon of the calculation displayed in the [Project Manager] is
changed.
3. Display the calculation results.
i. Open the setting panels of contour plot, vector plot, probe and so on.
523
Operations
ii. Select a calculation result from [Result Type].

In the [Result Type], the calculation result is displayed as “result type: calculation title” (ex.
“Magnetic Flux Density: FFT”).
iii. Specify the other parameters, and click [OK].

iv. Display the contour plot, vector plot, graph of probe or so on.
524
Using Scripts to Automate Results Processing
This section describes the post calculation script function.

When processing or editing the JMAG result data after importing them into the commercial software such as
Microsoft Excel, OpenOffice, and MATLAB, execution of processing can be automated by registering a series of
processes to JMAG as “post calculation scripts”.

• Adding Post Calculation Scripts (page 526)
• Setting Input Parameters for Post Calculation Script (page 528)
• Editing Post Calculation Scripts (page 528)
• Copying Post Calculation Scripts to Toolbox Scripts (page 529)
• Deleting Post Calculation Scripts (page 529)
• Running Post Calculation Scripts (page 530)
• Disabling/Enabling Post Calculation Scripts (page 531)
• Using User-Defined Response Values (page 532)
525
Operations
Adding Post Calculation Scripts

• Create New Post Calculation Scripts (page 526)
• Import Post Calculation Scripts from Files (page 527)
• Copy Results for Post Calculation Script from [Toolbox] (page 527)
Create New Post Calculation Scripts

1. In the [Project Manager] tree, under a study or analysis group, right-click [Post Calcula-
tion Scripts].
2. Select [Add Script] to start the Script Editor.
• Regarding input conventions for post calculation scripts, they are the same as normal scripts.
• If the Script Editor starts with the procedure below, only one script can be edited at a time in
the Script Editor.
Script Editor
3. Click [Copy to Toolbox] to copy the post calculation script to the [Script] tab of the tool-
box.
By copying the created post calculation script to [Toolbox], you can use it in different studies and
analysis groups.
• If the post calculation script currently being displayed is a copy of the preinstalled post calcu-
lation script, it is copied to the [Post Calculation Custom] folder in the [Script] tab
• If you created the post calculation script currently being displayed, it is copied to the [Cus-
tom] folder in the [Script] tab.
MEMO If the post calculation script of a study or analysis group is edited after the post calculation
script is copied from the study or analysis group to [Toolbox], the edited content will not be reflected
in the post calculation script in [Toolbox].
526
Import Post Calculation Scripts from Files

tion Scripts].
2. Select [Add Script From File].
3. In the [Open Script File] dialog, specify the script file (.py, .vbs, .js) to be added.
4. Click [OK].
The registered script is displayed under [Post Calculation Scripts] in the [Project Manager] tree.
Copy Results for Post Calculation Script from [Toolbox]

1. In the [Project Manager] tree, under a study or analysis group, select [Post Calculation
Scripts].
2. In the [Script] tab of [Toolbox], right-click a post calculation script.
Post calculation scripts can be found in the [Custom] folder, the [Post Calculation Custom]
folder, or the [Post Calculation Preinstall] folder.
3. Select [Copy to Post Calculation Script].
The post calculation script in Step 2. is copied to [Post Calculation Script] of the study or analy-
sis group selected in Step 1.
527
Operations
Setting Input Parameters for Post Calculation Script

When scripts are set with GUI input parameters (graphical user interface), like [Copy Current
Results to Point Array] of preinstalled post calculation scripts, the GUI is displayed.
1. In the [Project Manager] tree, under a study or analysis group > [Post Calculation
Scripts], right-click a script.
2. Select [Settings].
A dialog for setting input parameters of post calculation scripts is displayed.
3. Change the parameter value in the dialog and click [OK].
Editing Post Calculation Scripts

2. Select [Edit].
528
Copying Post Calculation Scripts to Toolbox Scripts

Add the post calculation script to the [Post Calculation Custom] folder in the [Script] tab in [Tool-
box].
2. Select [Copy to Script Toolbox].
The selected post calculation script is copied to the [Script] tab in the JMAG-Designer [Tool-
box].
• When the selected post calculation script is a copy of the preinstalled post calculation script,
it is copied to the [Post Calculation Custom] folder in the [Script] tab.
• When the selected post calculation script is created by the user, it is copied to the [Custom]
folder in the [Script] tab.
MEMO When the post calculation script of studies of analysis groups are opened from the Script
Editor, the [Copy to Toolbox] button in the Script Editor can also be used to copy the post calcula-
tion script to [Toolbox].
Deleting Post Calculation Scripts

2. Select [Delete].
529
Operations
Running Post Calculation Scripts

MEMO Script debugging can be run from the Script Editor.
 Running the registered post calculation script
2. Select [Run].
 Running all the registered post calculation scripts
tion Scripts].
2. Select [Run all].
530
Disabling/Enabling Post Calculation Scripts

When [Run all] is selected for the post calculation script, disabled scripts will not be run.
 Disabling/Enabling registered scripts
2. Select [Set Disabled].
The script is disabled.
And, [Set Disabled] is checked in the menu that appears when you right-click the script.
3. To enable a script that has been disabled, select [Set Disabled] again.
[Set Disabled] will be cleared and the script will be enabled.
 Disabling/Enabling all the registered scripts
tion Scripts].
2. Select [Disable All].
All the scripts are disabled.
And, [Set Disabled] is checked in the menu that appears when you right-click each script.
3. To enable all scripts that are disabled, right-click [Post Calculation Scripts] and select
[Enable All].
531
Operations
Using User-Defined Response Values

It is possible to register the result processed within post calculation scripts as a user-defined response
value. User-defined response values, like response values defined by the function for creating data for
response graphs, can be used for response graph data or the objective function.
MEMO For details on the creation of data for response graphs, see “Creating Scalar Response Values”
on page 638.
Notes
• To set the user-defined response values in post calculation scripts, use the following method
belonging to the Study class.
void SetUserResponseVariable(String name, int caseIndex, double value)
To acquire response values, use the following method. For details on each method, see the
JMAG-Designer Help.
double Study::GetResponseVariable(String name, int caseIndex);
Variant Study::GetResponseData(String name, int caseIndex);
• It is only possible to confirm or delete variables for the user-defined response values. Operations
such as duplicating and editing cannot be performed.
Use User-Defined Response Values for Optimization

Perform the following steps for creating user-defined response values when running multiple case
calculations using the optimization function.
1. Create a study and a first case.

2. Set the parameters for optimization.
3. Run the case.
4. Prepare the post calculation script that creates user-defined response values.
5. Set the post calculation script and run it for the current case.
By running the post calculation script at this stage, user-defined response values are created and
displayed in the [Project Manager] tree.
6. To set the range for parameters to be searched, launch the [Optimization] dialog.
For further procedures, see “Formulating Objective-Based Optimal Designs” on page 643.
532
Displaying Reports
This chapter describes the procedure for displaying analysis results in report format.
The settings and analysis results for materials and conditions of one case are output to this case report. In a para-
metric report, values of design variables for each case as well as response graphs can be output.

• Displaying Case Reports or Parametric Reports (page 534)
533
Operations
Displaying Case Reports or Parametric Reports

1. If necessary, capture the results image that is output to the case report.
Output of user-defined results image only supports case reports. Parametric reports are not sup-
ported.
i. Display the contour plot, vector plot, or flux lines in the graphics window.
For details, see “Displaying Results Contour Plots” on page 496, “Displaying Results Vector
Plots, Tensor Plots” on page 498, and “Displaying Flux Lines” on page 500.
ii. Click [Capture Image] on the toolbar.

The captured image is added to [Images] in the [Project Manager] tree. Right-click the image
to display [Edit] and [Delete] in a menu.
MEMO The show/hide setting of an element is unavailable while capturing an image.
MEMO When capturing the results image inside parts, use the cut planes function. For details on
the cut plane function, see “Displaying Results Images of User-Defined Cross Sections” on
page 508.
2. Select the items to output to the report.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click [Report].
iii. In the [Report Properties] dialog, select the checkboxes of the items to be output to
the report.
The checkbox of the results image captured in step 1 is also displayed.
iv. Click [OK].
3. Display the report.
i. Right-click [Report] in the [Project Manager] tree.
ii. Select [Case Report] or [Parametric Report].
A case report or a parametric report is displayed in HTML format.
534
Managing Input/Output Table Data
Comparing Table Results Using the Graph Manager
This chapter describes how to operate the Graph Manager.

The Graph Manager manages table data (dataset) of the result physical quantity contained in the project. The
table data used in the condition is also managed by the graph manager.
In the graph manager, you can combine multiple datasets to create a new graph. You can also compare the results
of different studies.
3 datasets graph
The operations performed in Graph Manager are as follows:

• Managing datasets:
The results are added to Graph Manager as datasets when an analysis is complete. A dataset can also be added
by creating a dataset or importing a dataset from a file. A dataset can also be created by combining the results
of differing studies because the results for all of the studies are registered in Graph Manager.
Datasets have an X-axis and a Y-axis. The results for the X-axis can be selected from multiple datasets in
Graph Manager. For example, a Lissajous curve can be drawn by creating a dataset that has current on the X-
axis and voltage on the Y-axis (combining datasets).
• Managing graphs:
A graph is displayed by selecting the results to display as a graph from the dataset list. A graph containing
multiple results can be drawn by adding multiple datasets to one graph.

• Creating Datasets (page 539)
• Deleting Datasets (page 540)
• Displaying Datasets (page 540)
• Combining Datasets (Lissajous) (page 541)
• Creating New Datasets by Adding Calculation Processing to Existing Datasets (page 542)
• Creating Graphs That Account for Skew Effects from Datasets of 2D Analysis Results (page 543)
• Adding Datasets to Graphs (page 543)
• Creating New Empty Graphs (page 543)
• Removing Datasets from Graphs (page 544)
• Deleting Graphs (page 544)
• Displaying Graphs (page 544)
537
Operations
Starting the Graph Manager

Perform either of the following operations:
• From the menu bar, select [Tools] > [Graph Manager].
• Click [Show the Graph Manager] on the toolbar.
538
Creating Datasets
A dataset created by the user is called a “user dataset”. There are three ways to create a user dataset.
The three ways to create a dataset are as follows:
• Creating a new dataset by combining table data from different studies
• Creating table data for a dataset
• Importing table data from a file (.csv, .txt, .pa)
1. In the [Graph Manager] dialog, click [Create] on the left side of the dataset list.
2. In the [Dataset Creation Wizard] dialog, select the type of dataset.
3. Click [Next].
If you select [Tabular Results Data from Multiple Studies], the [Select Studies] setting panel is
displayed.
If you select [Enter Data in a spreadsheet], the [Graph Data] setting panel is displayed.
If you select [Import data from a file], the [Import data from a file] setting panel is displayed.
4. If [Tabular Results Data from Multiple Studies] is selected, set the parameters in the
[Select Studies] and [Select Result Components] setting panels.
Clicking [Next] on the [Select Result Components] setting panel opens the [Dataset Created]
setting panel.
5. If [Enter Data in a spreadsheet] is selected, set the parameters in the [Graph Data] set-
ting panel.
Clicking [Next] on the [Graph Data] setting panel opens the [Dataset Created] setting panel.
6. If [Import data from a file] is selected, set the parameters in the [Import data from a
file] setting panel.
Clicking [Next] on the [Import data from a file] setting panel opens the [Dataset Created] set-
ting panel.
7. Check the contents of the dataset on the [Dataset Created] setting panel.
8. If you select [Do Not Add to Graph] or [Add to Existing Graph], click [Finish].
If [Do Not Add to Graph] is selected, the created dataset is added to the graph manager's dataset
list as a “user dataset”.
If [Add to Existing Graph] is selected, the created dataset is added to the graph manager's dataset
list as a “user dataset”. And the dataset is added to an existing graph.
9. If you select [Add to New Graph], click [Next]. Specify a title for the graph and click [Fin-
ish].
After clicking [Finish], the created dataset is added to the graph manager's dataset list as a “user
dataset”. A new graph is added to the graph list. If [Display graph on finishing] is selected, the
graphs created is displayed in the [Graph] dialog.
539
Operations
Displaying Datasets
1. Select a dataset from the dataset list in the [Graph Manager] dialog.
MEMO You can sort and filter datasets by using [Group] and [Show] in the upper section of the
Graph Manager.
2. Click [Display].
Or, right-click the dataset and select [Show Selected].
The [Dataset] dialog is displayed.
3. Edit the parameters as needed.
4. Click [Close].
If parameters are modified, the modifications will be reflected in the dataset list.
Deleting Datasets
Graph Manager.
2. Click [Delete].
Or, right-click the dataset and select [Delete Selected].
MEMO The dataset can still be confirmed in the [Project Manager] tree even if the dataset is deleted
from the dataset list.
540
Combining Datasets (Lissajous)

A new dataset can be created from multiple datasets by selecting the results to display on the X- and
Y-axes. Datasets are combined to confirm the relationship between the results of different parame-
ters.
Combining magnetic flux X-component and Y-component datasets
1. Select the first dataset from the dataset list in the [Graph Manager] dialog.
The first selected dataset is used for the X-axis of the newly created dataset.
Graph Manager.
2. Select the second dataset while pressing and holding the [Ctrl] key.
The second selected dataset is used for the Y-axis of the newly created dataset.
MEMO The X- and Y- axes of the dataset can be changed later using [Exchange X <-> Y].
3. Click [Transform], and select [Combine].
4. In the [Combine Datasets] dialog, set the parameters.
5. Click [OK].
The created dataset is added to the graph manager's dataset list.
If you select [Add To New Graph], a new graph is added to the graph list. Additionally, if [Dis-
play Graph On Finishing] is selected, the [Graph] dialog is appear, displaying the graph that was
created.
541
Operations
Creating New Datasets by Adding Calculation Processing to Existing

Datasets
The following calculation process can be used:
• [Fourier Transform]:
Performs a fast Fourier transform (FFT) on an existing dataset to create a new dataset.
MEMO The discrete Fourier transformation can run on result data for the amount of distribution.
For details, see “Adding Calculation Processing to Graph Data” on page 488.
• [Moving Average]:
The moving average is calculated based on existing datasets, and a new dataset is created based on
the obtained value.
• [Extract Frequency]:
Performs a fast Fourier transform (FFT) on an existing dataset, extracts the specified frequency
components, and then creates a history graph. A new dataset is created based on this graph.
Graph Manager.
2. Click [Transform], and select [Fourier Transform], [Moving Average], or [Extract Fre-
quency].
3. In the [Fourier Transform Properties], [Moving Average], or [Extract Frequency] dialog,
set the parameters.
4. Click [OK].
The created dataset is added to the graph manager's dataset list.
• If [Create Graph] is selected, the calculation results are also added to the graph list.
• If [Show Graph after Calculation] is selected, the graph created is displayed in the [Graph]
dialog.
• The [Fourier Transform] dataset and the [Extract Frequency] dataset do not belong to any
study.
• If you selected [Amplitude and Phase] or [Decibel] for [Output Type] when creating the
[Fourier Transform] dataset, an [Amplitude] dataset and a [Phase] dataset are created.
542
Creating Graphs That Account for Skew Effects from Datasets of 2D

Analysis Results
For motors, the stator or magnet may be tilted obliquely in the axial direction in order to control
torque ripple. By processing result data of the 2D analysis of the motor, virtual expression of the
effect of skewing the model can be realized.
2. Select a dataset from the dataset list.
Skew graphs can be created from torque, current, potential, and electromagnetic force datasets.
Graph Manager.
3. Click [Transform] and select [Skew Graph].
4. In the [Skew Graph] dialog, set the parameters.
For the subsequent procedures, see “Creating Graphs That Take Skew Effects from 2D Analysis
Results Data into Account” on page 487.
Adding Datasets to Graphs

1. In the [Graph Manager] dialog, to add a dataset to an existing graph, select the graph
from the graph list.
To add a dataset to a new graph, leave nothing selected from the graph list.
2. Select the dataset to be added to the graph from the dataset list.
Select multiple datasets while pressing and holding the [Ctrl] key to use multiple datasets for the
graph.
Graph Manager.
3. Click [Add Dataset to Graph].
The dataset selected in step 2 is added to the graph specified in step 1.
Creating New Empty Graphs

1. In the [Graph Manager] dialog, click [Create] on the left side of the graph list.
Or, right-click the graph list and select [Create graph].
A new graph with no dataset is added.
To add datasets to graphs, see “Adding Datasets to Graphs” on page 543.
543
Operations
Removing Datasets from Graphs

1. Select the dataset to be removed from the graph list in the [Graph Manager] dialog.
To remove multiple datasets, hold down the [Ctrl] key while selecting datasets.
2. Click [Remove Dataset from Graph].
MEMO The dataset is not deleted from this operation.
Deleting Graphs
1. Select the graph to delete from the graph list in the [Graph Manager] dialog.
2. Click [Delete] on the left side of the graph list.
Displaying Graphs
1. Select the graph to display from the graph list in the [Graph Manager] dialog.
2. Click [Display] on the left side of the graph list.
The selected graph is displayed in the [Graph] dialog.
544
Analysis Templates
Creating Templates of Analysis Models
This chapter describes the procedure for creating and using analysis templates.
An analysis template is a template containing the settings specified for a model which can be used for different
models. The following settings can be saved for a template.
• Template parameters (sets, reference targets)
• Study type and structure
• Case control (design variables including CAD parameters, case settings, optimization, expression variables,
measurement variables)
• Response table creation settings
• Study properties
• Materials
• Conditions
• Circuits
• Mesh generation method
• Mesh groups treated as parts
• Results displays (section graphs, contour plots, vector plots, etc.)
• Unit systems excluding the unit of length
• Display settings for [Result Review] dialog (or [All Cases Result View] dialog). Note that graph settings are
not included

• Procedure of Use (page 548)
• Creating an Analysis Template (page 549)
• Applying an Analysis Template to a Model (page 551)
• Checking the Contents of the Analysis Template (page 554)
547
Operations
Procedure of Use
1. Create an analysis model to be made into a template.
Analysis templates can also be created from analysis groups.
2. Create an analysis template from the model (or analysis group) from step 1.
There is a method for exporting the model to a folder as a template file (.jtmpl) and a method for
adding a template file under the [Analysis Template] tab in [Toolbox].
3. Create a new project and provide a model to apply the analysis template to.
To inherit the settings of a set from the analysis template, add an empty set to the model to
which the analysis template is to be applied. Similarly, to inherit reference target settings, add an
empty reference target to the model to which the analysis template is to be applied.
4. Apply the analysis template to the model from step 3.
When applying, associate parts and sets between the analysis template and the model the analysis
template is being applied to. For an analysis group analysis template, associate between models.
MEMO When the part names and set names match between the analysis template and the model to
which the analysis template is to be applied, the associations are automatically made so manual asso-
ciations are unnecessary.
548
Creating an Analysis Template

Saves the created analysis model as an analysis template. There are two ways to manage analysis tem-
plates.
• Add to the list under the [Analysis Templates] tab in [Toolbox]:
There is a corresponding method from JMAG-Designer Version 17.1. In this method, the analy-
sis template is saved in the JMAG user folder. To apply an analysis template to a model, drag and
drop it onto the model from under the [Analysis Templates] tab in [Toolbox].
It is also possible to add a description to an analysis template.
• Save as a JMAG analysis template file (.jtmpl) in any folder:
This is a method from JMAG-Designer Version 17.0 or earlier. In this case, it is necessary to
specify the path to the folder that the JMAG analysis template file is in when applying the analy-
sis template to a model.
Add an Analysis Template under the [Analysis Templates] Tab

1. Create an analysis model to be made into a template in JMAG-Designer.
• A model to use as an analysis template can be created normally (create a study, set materials
and conditions, run analysis, and display results).
• Use a “set” for specifying settings when creating a template for a condition which is set to
parts, faces, edges, or vertices. “Set” information of an analysis template and a “set” for a
model that is to be applied an analysis template can be linked.
• Even if a model's dimensions or geometry are partially different, to inherit the magnet mag-
netization direction, motion direction, etc. from another model, use the specified edges (or
faces or vertices) of the models. When referring to the same edge (or face, vertex) from multi-
ple conditions and functions, it is convenient to add this to a model as a reference target. For
details, see “Defining Axes and Directions” on page 68.
• To group multiple models and make into one template, create an analysis group. Analysis
groups created from multiple model studies can be added as one template.
• A model with multiple studies can be added as one analysis template.
2. Add an analysis model (or analysis group) as an analysis template.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click a study, model, or analysis group.
ii. Select [Add as Analysis Template to Toolbox].
iii. In the [Add as Analysis Template to Toolbox] dialog, set the parameters.
iv. Click [OK].
A new analysis template is added under the [Custom] folder under the [Analysis Templates]
tab in [Toolbox]. When the mouse pointer is placed over the analysis template, the descrip-
tion given for the analysis template will pop up. By selecting [Show Descriptions] near the
bottom, the description given for the analysis template is always displayed under the [Analysis
Templates] tab.
• To uniquely classify the added analysis template, right-click the [Custom] folder and select
[Create New Folder]. Since a subfolder is created in the [Custom] folder, drag and drop
the template to this folder.
549
Operations
• To change the name and description of the added analysis template, right-click the tem-
plate under the [Analysis Templates] tab and select [Property]. In the [Property of (tem-
plate name)] dialog, modify the name and description, and click [OK].
• To delete the added analysis template, right-click the template under the [Analysis Tem-
plates] tab and select [Delete].
Save an Analysis Template in Any Folder

1. Create an analysis model to be made into a template in JMAG-Designer.
• A model to use as an analysis template can be created normally (create a study, set materials
and conditions, run analysis, and display results).
• Use a “set” for specifying settings when creating a template for a condition which is set to
parts, faces, edges, or vertices. “Set” information of an analysis template and a “set” for a
model that is to be applied an analysis template can be linked.
• Even if a model's dimensions or geometry are partially different, to inherit the magnet mag-
netization direction, motion direction, etc. from another model, use the specified edges (or
faces or vertices) of the models. When referring to the same edge (or face, vertex) from multi-
ple conditions and functions, it is convenient to add this to a model as a reference target. For
details, see “Defining Axes and Directions” on page 68.
• To group multiple models and make into one template, create an analysis group. Analysis
groups created from multiple model studies can be added as one template.
• A model with multiple studies can be added as one analysis template.
2. Save an analysis model or analysis group as an analysis template file (.jtmpl) in any
folder.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click a model or analysis group.
ii. Select [Create Analysis Template].
iii. In the [Create Analysis Template] dialog, set the parameters.
iv. Click [OK].
A dialog is displayed to specify the file name and location.
v. Set the name of the analysis template and location.
The file type is set to a “JMAG template file (.jtmpl)”.
vi. Click [Save].
550
Applying an Analysis Template to a Model

1. Provide a model to apply an analysis template to.
i. Create a new project by selecting [File] > [New] from the menu bar.
ii. Import the model that is to be applied an analysis template into a project.
The analysis template can only be used between models with the same parts configuration.
CAD models, region models, and mesh models can be applied with an analysis template.
iii. Prepare to correctly inherit information from the analysis template.
To automatically associate parts between analysis templates and models, align the part names
of the model with the part names of the analysis template.
When a model is inheriting set information from an analysis template, set an empty set in the
model.
When a model is inheriting reference target information from an analysis template, set an
empty reference target in the model.
2. Apply an analysis template to the model.
The procedure for applying an analysis template differs depending on whether an analysis tem-
plate added under the [Analysis Templates] tab or a JMAG analysis template file (.jtmpl) saved in
any folder is used.
When using an analysis template added under the [Analysis Templates] tab:
i. Under the [Analysis Templates] tab in [Toolbox], click an analysis template.
ii. From under the [Analysis Templates] tab, drag and drop the analysis template onto
the model.
The drop destination can either be the model in the graphics window or the model in the
For an analysis model template, the [Part ID Matching] setting panel in the [Analysis Tem-
plate] dialog is displayed.
For an analysis group template, the [Model Selection for Analysis Template] dialog appears
before the [Analysis Template] dialog is displayed.
iii. When the [Model Selection for Analysis Template] dialog appears, associate the
analysis template with the model.
The [Template] table displays the models included in the analysis template. The [Project]
table displays the models included in the project to which the analysis template is applied.
Associations are done automatically based on model types and number of models. If associa-
tions are not made or the associations are incorrect, set the associations manually.
Associating:
• Select one model from [Template] and one model from [Project], and click [Set].
• Even if drag and dropping a model from [Project] to [Template], an association will be
made.
• By selecting [Associate the model for each study], the models in [Template] are expanded
and the studies below them are displayed. It is also possible to associate a model in [Proj-
ect] with a displayed study.
Modifying the association:
551
Operations
• Drag and drop a model from [Project] to a model already associated in [Template]. The
association is overwritten.
Releasing the association:
• Select a model in [Project], then click [Release].
• The association for a model can also be released by right-clicking on the model in [Tem-
plate] and selecting [Release].
iv. When the template and model association is completed, click [Next].
The [Part ID Matching] setting panel in the [Analysis Template] dialog is displayed.
v. In the [Part ID Matching] setting panel, parts can be associated between analysis
template models.
The parts information that is included in an analysis template is displayed in the [Template]
table. The model name included in a model that is to be applied in an analysis template is dis-
played in the [Model] table.
A group of parts is indicated by an icon with a group symbol .
If the part names match, the association is automatically made. If the part names do not
match or the associations are incorrect, please set them manually.
Associating:
• Select a part from [Model] and then drag and drop to the part in [Template] to set links.
• The part name for a model that is applied by an analysis template is displayed in the [Link
Item] column of [Template], and the parts that are linked are hidden from [Model].
• To link multiple items in [Model] to an item in [Template], click [Duplicate Set] and link
the duplicate item to the item in [Template].
Modifying the association:
• Press and drag the correct part from [Model] to the part in [Template]. The link is over-
written.
Releasing the association:
• Select the part to release its link in [Template], and then click [Release].
• A link is also released by right-clicking the part, and then selecting [Release].
Grouping the parts:
• In each table, right-click a part to include in the group, and select [Grouping Part].
Ungrouping the parts:
The part names included in each group and the number of parts needs to match, when link-
ing grouped parts in an analysis template with grouped parts in a model that is to be applied
an analysis template. Ungroup the parts and then link the parts separately when they do not
match.
• Right-click a group in each table, and select [Separate Part].
vi. When finishing associating parts, click [Next] or [Finish].
If the analysis template or the model to which an analysis has been applied has settings for set,
reference target or the equation variable, [Next] is displayed.
Clicking [Next] brings up the [Set Matching], [Reference Target Matching], or [Equation
Matching] setting panel.
552
vii.In the [Set Matching] setting panel, associate sets between the analysis template and
the model.
The set association procedure is the same as for part association.
viii.When finishing associating sets, click [Next] or [Finish].
If the analysis template or the model to which an analysis template has been applied is set
with a reference target or equation variable, [Next] is displayed.
Clicking [Next] brings up the [Reference Target Matching] or [Equation Matching] setting
panel.
ix. In the [Reference Target Matching] setting panel, associate reference targets
between the analysis template and the model.
The reference target association procedure is the same as for part association.
x. When finishing associating reference target, click [Next] or [Finish]
If the analysis template or model to which an analysis template has been applied is set with an
equation variable, [Next] is displayed.
Clicking [Next] brings up the [Equation] setting panel.
xi. Associate the corresponding equations of the analysis template and model in the
[Equation Matching] setting panel.
The equation association procedure is the same as for part association.
xii.Click [Finish].
The analysis template is applied to the model.
When applying an analysis template created from a model or study, a new study is added
under the model in the [Project Manager] tree.
When applying an analysis template created from an analysis group, a new analysis group is
added to the [Project Manager] tree.
xiii.If the [List of Setting Target is not Set] dialog is displayed after the [Analysis Tem-
plate] dialog is closed, correct the settings for the items displayed in the table. To
modify the settings later, click [Close].
The [List of Setting Target is not Set] dialog is displayed when the study added by applying
the analysis template has an analysis condition (or result setting, set, reference target) where
the information to be set is missing.
When using a JMAG analysis template file (.jtmpl) saved in any folder:
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click a model or project.
ii. Select [Apply Analysis Template].
iii. In the [Apply Analysis Template] dialog, specify an analysis template file (.jtmpl) and
click [Open].
The [Model Selection for Analysis Template] dialog or the [Part ID Matching] setting panel
in the [Analysis Template] dialog is displayed. The following procedures are the same as
“When using an analysis template added under the [Analysis Templates] tab:” on page
551.
553
Operations
Checking the Contents of the Analysis Template

The setting values of each parameter of the analysis template can be checked in the [Analysis Param-
eter View] dialog.
1. Right-click the analysis template on the [Analysis Template] tab of the [Toolbox] and
select [Check the Settings].
The [Analysis Parameter view] dialog is displayed.
• The [Analysis Parameter View] dialog of analysis templates created from the study, displays
the same content as the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog that was displayed from the context
menu of the study in the [Project Manager] tree.
• The [Analysis Parameter View] dialog of the analysis templates created from the model, dis-
plays the same content as the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog displayed from the context
menu of the model in the [Project Manager] tree.
• The [Analysis Parameter view] dialog of the analysis templates created from the analysis
group displays the same content as the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog displayed from the
context menu of the analysis group in the [Project Manager] tree.
554
Parallel Computing, Remote Execution
Performing Large Scale Calculations Using Parallel
Computing
This chapter describes the parallel computing function and the procedure of analysis execution using GPU.
 Parallel computing functions

These parallelize JMAG computing processing. The following types are available:
• Shared memory multiprocessing (SMP):
Performs parallel processing on a per-thread basis. Parallel processing is performed using one node
(machine).
This supports magnetic field analysis, iron loss analysis, thermal analysis, structural analysis, electric field
analysis, and thermal stress analysis. Hereafter, this is called SMP.
• Massive parallel processing (MPP):
Performs parallel processing on a per-process basis. Parallel processing is performed using one or more nodes
(machines) connected by a network.
This supports magnetic field analysis and thermal analysis. This also supports direct coupled analysis of mag-
netic field analysis and thermal analysis. Hereafter, this is called MPP.
• Hybrid type (SMP + MPP):
This is a method that combines SMP and MPP. After calculation processing is parallelized for each process,
the calculation processing for each process is further parallelized for each thread. Parallel processing is per-
formed using one or more nodes (machines) connected by a network.
In JMAG, if [Massively Parallel Processing (MPP)] is selected and a value of 2 or more is specified in [Degree
of Parallel Threads], hybrid parallel computing will be executed.
This type can be used for magnetic field analysis. Hereafter, this is called hybrid parallel computing.
 GPU function
The GPU (Graphics Processing Unit) in the machine used is used for JMAG computing processing.
This function can be used for magnetic field analysis.
MEMO To use the parallel computing function and GPU, in addition to the solver license for each analysis, a dedi-
cated license is required. The number of licenses required varies with the degree of parallelism. For details, see
“Licenses”.

• Running Analyses Using SMP (page 558)
• Running Analyses Using MPP/Hybrid Parallel Computing (page 559)
• Running Analyses Using GPUs (page 582)
557
Operations
Running Analyses Using SMP

The shared memory multiprocessing (SMP) function is a function that parallelizes computing pro-
cessing on a thread basis. It can be used for magnetic field analysis, iron loss analysis, thermal analy-
sis, structural analysis, electric field analysis, and thermal stress analysis.
MEMO Some functions and conditions cannot be used in analysis using SMP. For details, see “Parame-
ter Explanation Edition”.
1. Create an input file.

i. Prepare the model and create studies of magnetic field analysis, iron loss analysis,
thermal analysis, structural analysis, electric field analysis, or thermal stress analysis.
ii. Set materials and conditions.
iii. In the [Parallel Computing Setting] setting panel of the [Study Properties] dialog,
select [Shared Memory Multiprocessing (SMP)] and set [Degree of Parallelism].
MEMO When distributing multiple cases of calculation on multiple machines, it may take time
to transfer the result files. By setting the following options in the [Output Control] setting panel
of the [Study Properties] dialog, the result file size and the number of files are reduced, and the
file transfer time and the total calculation time can be shortened.
• Clear the checkboxes of an unnecessary physical quantity in [Output Results].
iv. When using Iron Loss conditions in a magnetic field analysis study, set the parallel
processing of iron loss analysis performed after the magnetic field analysis is com-
pleted in the [Study Properties] dialog [Iron Loss conditions] setting panel.
MEMO Set the above settings in the input JCF file when also using SMP for iron loss calcula-
tions by JMAG-RT.
MEMO Changes can be made to parallel computing settings when executing analysis from JMAG-
Scheduler. For details, see “Parameter Explanation Edition”.
MEMO Changes can be made to the parallel computing settings of JCF files by using environment
variables. Use these when executing analysis either from the command line or by using SSH-con-
nected remote machines. For details, see “Parameter Explanation Edition”.
558
Performing Large Scale Calculations Using Parallel Computing
Running Analyses Using MPP/Hybrid Parallel Computing

The massively parallel processing (MPP) function is a function that parallelizes computing process-
ing on a process basis. This function can be used in magnetic field analysis and thermal analysis.
This function can also be used in direct coupled analysis of magnetic field analysis and thermal anal-
ysis.
The hybrid parallel computing function is a function that parallelizes computing processing on a
process basis and further parallelizes the computing processing of each process on a thread basis.
This function can be used in magnetic field analysis.
MEMO Some functions and conditions cannot be used in an analysis using these parallel computing
functions. For details, see “Parameter Explanation Edition”.
 Procedures
1. Prepare the environment.

i. Prepare the analysis hardware environment (network configuration).
ii. Install JMAG.
iii. Prepare the MPI environment.
iv. Check network operation and the MPI environment.
2. Create input files.
• JCF file (.jcf )
• MPP hosts file (.txt)
3. Perform an analysis using MPP or the hybrid parallel computing function.
• Run with JMAG-Scheduler
• Run the MPP solver from a shell/batch file
• Run the MPP solver via ExecSolver from a shell/batch file
• Run the MPP solver from a shell/batch file with a commercial scheduler
• Run the MPP solver via ExecSolver from a shell/batch file with a commercial scheduler
559
Operations
Prepare the Environment

• Prepare the Analysis Hardware Environment (Network Configuration) (page 560)
• Install JMAG (page 561)
• Prepare the MPI Environment (page 561)
• Check Network Operation and the MPI Environment (page 563)
Prepare the Analysis Hardware Environment (Network Configuration)

For MPP and hybrid parallel computing, use a one-node many-core machine, or a cluster system
with two or more nodes connected using Infiniband (QDR or higher).
There are two main types of cluster configurations:
• (a):
When all nodes have their global IP addresses on the network within the organization
• (b):
When only the head node possesses a global IP address on the network within the organization,
and the other nodes are connected from the head node using the local IP address
Of these, communication may be delayed due to the presence of a virus check system in type (a).
Therefore, we recommend using type (b). For the network configuration, please check with the per-
son in charge of its administration in your organization.
Example of network structure

Left: (a) When all nodes have a global IP address,
Right: (b) When only the head node (Node 0) has a global IP address
560
Install JMAG
If there is a shared disk that can be accessed from all nodes in the cluster system used, install JMAG
there.
If there is no such shared disk, it is necessary to install the same version of JMAG on all nodes in a
folder with the same name and whose path is the same on all the nodes. Create each calculation
folder with the same name and whose path is the same on all the nodes.
When JMAG is not installed on a shared disk, only magnetic field analysis can be executed, and
direct coupled analysis cannot be executed.
If the network is type (a), as explained in “Prepare the Analysis Hardware Environment (Network
Configuration)” on page 560, installing a license server on a company LAN will enable the check-
out of licenses from nodes. If the network is type (b), then the license server is installed on either the
head node (Node 0) or the machine (Client) that is connected to the head node and resides on the
company LAN.
The OSs of the machines to be used as computation nodes should be unified to Windows or Linux.
Parallel computings cannot be executed in a mixed environment of Windows and Linux machines.
Prepare the same UID/PWD for all machines used for MPP or hybrid parallel computing. For
details, check with the person in charge of administration in your organization.
• If all machines are in the same domain, domain users can use used.
• In other cases, create a workgroup when using Windows.
• When using Linux, prepare local users with the same UID/PWD on all machines.
For details on installing JMAG and a license server, see the JMAG Installation Manual.
Prepare the MPI Environment

Install the Intel MPI Library. For Intel MPI Library installers and licenses, make arrangements
through your Intel distributor or use the runtime library included in JMAG-Designer.
The runtime library included in JMAG-Designer is located in the following directory. “INS_DIR”
refers to the JMAG installation directory.
INS_DIR/Solver/MPI_Runtime_Library_Installer
The Intel MPI Library 2019 is supported for JMAG-Designer Version 22.2.
For the latest information on MPI versions supported by JMAG-Designer, check the JMAG website
(https://www.jmag-international.com/). For details on installing the Intel MPI Library, see the Intel
or Intel distributor's website.
561
Operations
 Windows
Please click the installer for the Intel MPI Library, fill in the necessary information, and complete
the installation. If installing on a disk other than a shared disk, install it in the same folder on all
nodes.
In addition, set the following environment variables:
Environment variable What to set Description

PATH All nodes The full path of the installation folder of JMAG.
When JMAG-Designer is installed with the
default settings, it will be “C:\Program
Files\JMAG-Designer22.2.”
 Linux
After extracting the installer, start the Intel MPI Library installation shell and execute the installa-
tion. If installing on a disk other than a shared disk, install it in the same directory on all nodes.
In addition, set the following environment variables:

JMAG_MPI_LIBRARY All nodes The full path of the Intel MPI Library installation
_PATH directory (example: /opt/Intel/oneAPI/mpi/
or 2019.12.0/lib).
LD_LIBRARY_PATH For the following cases, set the JMAG_MPI_LI-
BRARY_PATH environment variable.
• The client and the head node are the same
machines (when not using JMAG-RemoteSys-
tem or SSH)
• Executing MPP or hybrid parallel computing
using JMAG-RemoteSystem
For the following case, set the LD_LIBRARY_-
PATH environment variable.
• Executing MPP or hybrid parallel computing
using SSH
JMAG_MPP_JPLOT_ The machine that runs Set “0” when running parallel computing from a
MASK the execution com- clustered machine that does not use a shared
mand (mpirun) for par- disk.
allel computing It is not necessary to set
“JMAG_MPP_JPLOT_MASK” when parallel
computing is run from a clustered machine that
uses a shared disk.
562
Check Network Operation and the MPI Environment

Execute the following procedures to confirm whether the network construction and installation of
Intel MPI Library were performed successfully.
 Windows
1. Start the command prompt.

2. Enter the following command and check whether the display “Intel (R) MPI Library” is
returned.
mpiexec
If the display is not returned, the Intel MPI Library installation has failed. Use the support from
Intel's distributors. If you are not using a shared disk, perform this check operation on all nodes.
3. Move to the JMAG-Designer installation folder.
Example:
cd C:\Program Files\JMAG-Designer22.2
4. Create an MPP host file (.txt) with the names of all the nodes to be used and place it in
the JMAG-Designer installation folder.
Create a text file as shown below.
• Have the file name be “jmag_hosts.txt”.
• “machine01” and “machine02” are the names of two machines among the nodes used by the
user in MPP or hybrid parallel computing. If a machine name is not recognized, enter the IP
address for that machine.
MPP hosts file (for operation confirmation)
5. Run the following command.

mpiexec -np 8 -machinefile .\jmag_hosts.txt .\vib.exe -version
It is correct if 8 version numbers (e.g. 22.0.1a) appear in the command prompt. If it is not dis-
played, either the network configuration, the machine name recognition, or the user account set-
ting has failed. Please contact your system administrator.
MEMO When MPI is run for the first time, it may be required to enter an account name and pass-
word from MPI. In that case, execute the following command from the command prompt on all
nodes:
mpiexec -register
Enter the account name
Enter the password
Execute the above command on all nodes, even if you have changed the password.
563
Operations
 Linux
1. Start the terminal.

2. Enter the command to run mpirun in the MPI installation path and check whether the
display “Intel (R) MPI Library for Linux” is returned.
Example:
opt/intel/impi/2019.12.0/intel64/bin/mpirun
If the display is not returned, the Intel MPI Library installation has failed. Use the support from
Intel's distributors. If you are not using a shared disk, perform this check operation on all nodes.
3. Create an MPP host file (.txt) with the names of all the nodes to be used and place it in
the current directory.
Create a text file as shown below.
• Have the file name be “jmag_hosts.txt”.
• “machine01” and “machine02” are the names of two machines among the nodes used by the
user in MPP or hybrid parallel computing. If a machine name is not recognized, enter the IP
address for that machine.
MPP hosts file (for operation confirmation)
4. Run the following command:

(MPI installation path)/mpirun -np 8 -machinefile .\jmag_hosts.txt date
Example:
opt/intel/impi/2019.12.0/intel64/bin/mpirun -np 8 -machinefile .\jmag_hosts.txt date
It is normal if the current date and time appear 8 times in the terminal. If it is not displayed,
either the network configuration, the machine name recognition, or the user account setting has
failed. Please contact your system administrator
564
Create Input Files

The following files are used for analysis using MPP or hybrid parallel computing:
File Description
JCF files (.jcf ) These files are required regardless of how the parallel computing job is exe-
cuted. For details, see “JCF Files (.jcf)” on page 565.
MPP hosts file (.txt) This file defines the machines (nodes) used for parallel computing. This
file is required to run parallel computing jobs using the following methods:
• Running from JMAG-Scheduler
• Starting the MPP solver from a shell/batch file
• Starting the MPP solver via ExecSolver from a shell/batch file
For details, see “MPP Hosts Files (.txt)” on page 566.
Shell/batch file for paral- This file is required to execute parallel computing jobs without using
lel computing execution JMAG-Scheduler.
Contains the command to start solver software. A file sample is provided
with the JMAG installer. For details of a given method, see the description
of that method.
• Run MPP Solvers via ExecSolver from Shell/Batch Files (page 576)
• Run MPP Solvers from Shell/Batch Files (page 573)
• Run MPP Solvers from Shell/Batch Files with Commercial Schedulers
(page 578)
• Run MPP Solvers via ExecSolver from Shell/Batch Files with Commer-
cial Schedulers (page 580)
JCF Files (.jcf)
 Creation procedure
1. Create an analysis model using the same procedure as with standard analysis.
Certain conditions and functions cannot be used in analysis using MPP or hybrid parallel com-
puting. For details, see “Parameter Explanation Edition”.
• Required settings:
For MPP, select [Massively Parallel Processing (MPP)] in the [Parallel Computing Settings]
setting panel in the [Study Properties] dialog and specify a value for [Degree of Parallel Pro-
cess].
For hybrid parallel computing, specify a value of 2 or more in [Degree of Parallel Threads].
• Optional settings:
When performing multi-case calculations in a distributed manner using multiple machines,
transferring results files can take a lot of time.
By making the following settings in the [Output Control] setting panel in the [Study Proper-
ties] dialog, the size and number of results files can be reduced, and the time required for file
transfer and overall computations can be reduced:
• Clear the checkboxes of unnecessary physical quantities in [Output Results].
565
Operations
2. Export JCF files.

• When launching JMAG-Scheduler from the JMAG-Designer [Project Manager] tree and
adding parallel computing jobs:
In this case, you do not have to export the JCF file.
However, make sure to select [Submit as individual JCF files] in the [Submit to Queue] dia-
log displayed when adding a job to JMAG-Scheduler. With this selection, JMAG-Designer
exports a JCF file during the process of submitting a job.
• When adding a parallel computing job in JMAG-Scheduler, when executing a parallel com-
puting job from a shell/batch file, or when executing a parallel computing job from a com-
mercially available job scheduler:
Right-click the JMAG-Designer [Project Manager] tree and select [Export JCF] to export a
JCF file.
MEMO When exporting a JCF file, it is necessary to select geometry data or mesh data.
The geometry data JCF file may not be able to be used depending on the parallel computing job
execution method. For details, see “Run Analyses Using MPP Function/Hybrid Parallel Comput-
ing Function” on page 568.
 Notes
• Changes can be made to parallel computing settings when executing analysis from JMAG-Sched-
uler. For details, see “Parameter Explanation Edition”.
• Parallel computing settings within input JCF files can be changed by using environment vari-
ables (JMAG_PARALLEL_TYPE, JMAG_CORES, JMAG_HYBRID_THREADS).
Use these environment variables when performing analyses that are run from the command line,
or run by using remote machines with SSH. For details, see “Parameter Explanation Edition”.
MPP Hosts Files (.txt)

This file defines the names of nodes (machines) used for MPP or hybrid parallel computing and the
maximum number of processes that can be executed by the nodes. This file is required to run paral-
lel computing jobs using the following methods:
• Running with JMAG-Scheduler
• Running the MPP solver from a shell/batch file
• Running MPP Solvers via ExecSolver from Shell/Batch Files
 Creation procedure
Use a text editor to input the node names (or IP addresses) and the number of processes for each
node in a text file. The following is a sample file. In this example, four processes are deployed on
machines machine01 to machine04.
Example of an MPP hosts file
• When using MPP in magnetic field analysis linked with Simulink, specify the machine on which
the MPP solver and Simulink are launched on the first line of the MPP hosts file. For how to
566
perform analysis when linked with Simulink, see “Simultaneously Running JMAG and Circuit
Simulators Using Mutual Results” on page 798.
 Notes
• When executing a parallel computing job from JMAG-Scheduler, the user can specify the name
and location of the MPP hosts file.
• When the parallel computing job execution method is “Run MPP solver from a shell file (batch
file)”, note the following:
• The name of the MPP hosts file can be specified by the user.
• The name of the MPP hosts file must be specified as an argument of the MPP solver execu-
tion command in a shell/batch file.
• The MPP hosts file must be in the same folder as the input JCF file.
• When the parallel computing job execution method is “Run MPP solver through ExecSolver
from a shell file (batch file)”, note the following:
• Specify the name of the MPP hosts file as “jmag_hosts.txt” or “(input JCF file name)+_
hosts.txt”. In the latter case, for example, if the JCF file name is motor.jcf, the MPP hosts file
name will be motor_hosts.txt.
• Place the MPP hosts file in the same folder as the input JCF file(s).
• When executing a parallel computing job from a commercial job scheduler, it is necessary to set
the environment variable JMAG_USE_MPI_MACHINEFILE to control the MPP solver so
that it does not refer to the MPP hosts file. For details, see “Run MPP Solvers from Shell/Batch
Files with Commercial Schedulers” on page 578 and “Run MPP Solvers via ExecSolver from
Shell/Batch Files with Commercial Schedulers” on page 580.
• When using MPP in magnetic field analysis linked with Simulink, note the following:
• Specify the name of the MPP hosts file as “jmag_hosts.txt”.
• On the first line of the MPP hosts file, specify the machine on which MPP solver and Sim-
ulink are launched.
• When using MPP in magnetic field analysis linked with STAR-CCM+, note the following:
• Specify the name of the MPP hosts file as “(input JCF file name)+_ hosts.txt”.
567
Operations
Run Analyses Using MPP Function/Hybrid Parallel Computing Function

The following types of analysis execution methods can be used using MPP or the hybrid parallel
computing function.
• (1) Executing using JMAG-Scheduler (page 571):
JMAG-Scheduler is JMAG's analysis execution and management tool.
• (2) Executing not using a job scheduler:
Without a job scheduler, solver software is started from a batch/shell file that contains execution
commands, and parallel computing is executed.
• (2-1) MPP solver direct execution (page 573)
• (2-2) MPP solver execution via ExecSolver (page 576)
• (3) Executing using a commercial job scheduler:
Use this method if the cluster used already has a job scheduler.
• (3-1) MPP solver direct execution (page 578)
• (3-2) MPP solver execution via ExecSolver (page 580)
 Features of each execution method

Execution
Add job to Required files Additional Information
method
(1) JMAG-Sched- • JCF files (geometry • Available when the cluster configuration is
uler or mesh) (a). For the cluster configuration, see “Pre-
• MPP hosts file pare the Analysis Hardware Environment
(Network Configuration)” on page 560.
• In some cases, it is necessary to build a
remote execution environment using JMAG-
RemoteSystem or SSH.
• The name and location of the MPP hosts file
can be specified.
• Functions to generate a mesh during analysis
execution are available.
• Iron Loss conditions can be used. However,
with hybrid parallel computing, the loss cal-
culation methods available are limited. For
• Care must be taken when performing effi-
ciency map analysis (speed-priority). See
“Execution method notes” below.
• Parallel computing settings within JCF files
can be changed in JMAG-Scheduler.
568
Execution
Add job to Required files Additional Information
method
(2-1) None • JCF files (mesh) • The location of the MPP hosts file has
• MPP hosts file already been specified.
• Shell file/batch file • Functions to generate a mesh during analysis
for parallel comput- execution cannot be used.
ing job execution • Iron Loss conditions cannot be used.
can be changed by using environment vari-
ables.
(2-2) None • JCF files (geometry • The name and location of the MPP hosts file
or mesh) have already been specified.
• MPP hosts file • Functions to generate a mesh during analysis
• Shell file/batch file execution are available.
for parallel comput- • Iron Loss conditions can be used. However,
ing job execution with hybrid parallel computing, the loss cal-
culation methods available are limited. For
ables.
(3-1) Commercial • JCF files (mesh) • Functions to generate a mesh during analysis
job scheduler • Shell file/batch file execution cannot be used.
for parallel comput- • Iron Loss conditions cannot be used.
ing job execution • Parallel computing settings within JCF files
ables.
(3-2) Commercial • JCF files (geometry • Functions to generate a mesh during analysis
job scheduler or mesh) execution are available.
• Shell file/batch file • Iron Loss conditions can be used. However,
for parallel comput- with hybrid parallel computing, the loss cal-
ing job execution culation method is limited. For details, see
“Parameter Explanation Edition”.
ables.
569
Operations
 Execution method notes

• When using a commercial job scheduler, “(3-1) MPP solver direct execution” is recommended.
However, executing the MPP solver directly has the following disadvantages: To avoid these dis-
advantages, select “(3-2) MPP solver execution via ExecSolver”.
• A solver report file (.html) is not generated after the analysis is completed. Also, because of
that, it is not known whether a job ended when connected with SSH.
• Intermediate files generated during analysis execution are not automatically deleted.
• Loss calculations using Iron Loss conditions are not possible.
• The functions to generate mesh during analysis execution are not available. Mesh generation
is performed during analysis when the following functions are used.
• [Generate Mesh at Each Step] (patch mesh function)
• Layered Mesh
• Multi-layer coating
• Extended slide (used until V18.0)
• Morphing
• Rotation Motion condition Eccentricity function for magnetic field analysis
• The Residual Strain condition [Use Strain Region] function for magnetic field analysis
and iron loss analysis
• When the efficiency map analysis (speed-priority) is executed, the following three types of jobs
are created.
• Efficiency map analysis (speed-priority) management job (1 job):
This job generates and manages the no-load analysis jobs and load analysis jobs described
below.
• No-load analysis job (1 job)
• Load analysis jobs (multiple jobs) generated based on the calculation resolution of the param-
eters set in the [Create Response Table] dialog
When the efficiency map analysis (speed-priority) is executed using MPP of the method using
the MPP hosts file ((1) and (2) above), the node to which the management job is assigned creates
and executes the no-load analysis job and the load analysis jobs. That is, the jobs are not distrib-
uted to each node listed in the MPP hosts file.
To distribute jobs for efficiency map analysis (speed-priority), select a method that uses a com-
mercially available job scheduler (3).
570
Run with JMAG-Scheduler

Uses JMAG-Scheduler to perform analysis using MPP or hybrid parallel computing function.
 Notes
• Only if the network type is (a) as described in “Prepare the Analysis Hardware Environment
(Network Configuration)” on page 560, can an analysis be executed using this method.
• A solver report file (.html) is generated when the analysis is completed.
• Intermediate files output during analysis execution are automatically deleted.
• Loss calculations using Iron Loss conditions are possible. However, with hybrid parallel comput-
ing, Iron Loss condition [Hysteresis Model] and [Eddy Currents in Steel Sheet] settings cannot
be used.
• For MPP, functions that generate mesh during analysis execution can be used. For example, a
geometry data JCF file in which the [Generate Mesh at Each Step] function has been set can also
be input.
For the functions that generate mesh during analysis execution, see “Execution method notes”
on page 570.
• Jobs for efficiency map analysis (speed-priority) cannot be distributed. For details, see “Execu-
tion method notes” on page 570.
• Changes can be made to parallel computing settings when executing analysis from JMAG-Sched-
uler. For details, see “Parameter Explanation Edition”.
 Required files
• JCF files (.jcf ):
Both geometry data and mesh data JCF files can be used.
• MPP hosts file (.txt):
For a description of the MPP hosts file contents, see “Create Input Files” on page 565.
The MPP hosts file is specified in the [Submit to Queue] dialog. The [Submit to Queue] dialog
is displayed when adding a job in JMAG-Scheduler or when adding a job from the JMAG-
Designer [Project Manager] tree to JMAG-Scheduler.
 Preparation: Building a remote execution environment

If the network client and head node are the same, no remote execution environment is required. If
they are different, a remote execution environment needs to be built. Either of the following envi-
ronments should be built:
• Remote execution environment using SSH:
For details on building an execution environment using SSH, see “Remote Execution of Analy-
sis and Mesh Generation” on page 585.
Note that the same account added with IntelMPI must be set for SSH.
• Remote execution environment using JMAG-RemoteSystem:
For details on how to build an execution environment using JMAG-RemoteSystem, see the
“JMAG Installation Manual”.
571
Operations
 Preparation: Setting environment variables
Linux
When using a Linux machine, in advance set the following environment variables for all computa-
tion nodes. For details on the setting methods of environment variables, see “Overview Edition”.

PATH All nodes Path to a remote system execution file (example: /opt/
intel/impi/2019.0.0/intel64/bin)
LDLIBRARY_PATH All nodes A directory in which shared libraries required by MPI
or for MPP or hybrid parallel computing are located
JMAG_MPI_LIBRARY (example: /opt/intel/impi/2019.0.0/intel64/lib).
_PATH In the following cases, set JMAG_MPI_LIBRARY_-
PATH.
• The client and the head node are the same machines
(when not using JMAG-RemoteSystem or SSH)
• Executing MPP or hybrid parallel computing using
JMAG-RemoteSystem
In the following case, set JMAG_MPI_LIBRARY_-
PATH.
• Executing MPP or hybrid parallel computing using
SSH
 Procedures
Add a job on one of the nodes (machines) listed in the MPP hosts file.
Processing not related to parallel computing, such as mesh generation and processing of results, are
performed at the node where the job was added. Therefore, if a job is added on the head node, the
head node may go down due to over-load.
The following is an example of using the procedure:
2. Select [Job] > [Add Job].
The [Add Job] dialog is displayed.
3. Specify a JCF file and click [Open].
In this dialog, parallel computing settings within JCF files can be changed (the [Parallel Com-
puting] list). For details, see “Parameter Explanation Edition”.
4. Click [Browse] to the right of [Hosts File] and specify the path of the MPP hosts file.
 Interruption procedure
Select [Job] > [Cancel Job] from the JMAG-Scheduler menu bar. Or use [Cancel Job] .
When interrupting using this procedure, the analysis results (.jplot) up to the time of the interrup-
tion can be checked.
572
Run MPP Solvers from Shell/Batch Files

Performs analysis using MPP or hybrid parallel computing without using a job scheduler. To start
the MPP solver, use a batch/shell file that contains the MPP solver execution command.
 Notes
• A solver report file (.html) is not generated after the analysis is completed.
• The functions to generate mesh during analysis execution are not available. For example, a geom-
etry data JCF file in which the [Generate Mesh for Each Step] function is set cannot be input.
on page 570.
When Parallel computing settings within input JCF files are changed, you should rewrite the -np
option and the -machine option of the shell file/batch file themselves. For details, see “Parameter
Explanation Edition”.
 Required files
Mesh data JCF files can be used. Geometry data JCF files cannot be used.
Input the name of the MPP hosts file as an argument of the MPP solver execution command in
the parallel computing execution shell/batch file.
• Shell/batch file for parallel computing execution:
Sample files of shell/batch files are included in the JMAG installation directory. Edit a copy of
one of these sample files and use it.
 Preparation: Creating a shell/batch file
Sample shell/batch files locations

“INS_DIR” is the installation directory for JMAG.
• Sample shell file (Linux)
INS_DIR/solver/mod/magnetic/sample/go_jmag_mpp_b_sample_linux.sh
• Sample batch file (Windows)

INS_DIR\sample\solver\Windows\go_jmag_mpp_b_sample_win.bat
573
Operations
Commands in shell/batch files

MPP solver execution commands must be included. Note that commands will differ depending on
the file type.
jam_intel_mpi_b is a command to execute the solver.
jplot_merge_mpp is a command to merge the generated restart files (.sav) after the calculation is fin-
ished. This command is required for 3D analysis and when restart file output is selected in [Output
Control]. This command is not required for 2D or axisymmetric analysis or for 3D analysis and
restart file output is cleared.
• Commands for shell file MPP solver (Linux)
mpirun -np "Number of processes" -machinefile "mpphostfile name"\
"/home/xxxxx/jam_intel_mpi_b" -IN:"Input jcf file name" -OUT:binary
mpirun -np "Number of processes" -machinefile "mpphostfile name"\

"/home/xxxxx/jplot_merge_mpp" "Input jcf file name without extension"\
"Number of processes" "File type" "Analysis type"
Example:
mpirun -np 8 -machinefile machines.txt /home/user/jam_intel_mpi_b -IN:motor.jcf\
-OUT:binary
mpirun -np 8 -machinefile machines.txt /home/user/jplot_merge_mpp motor 8 0 -1
• Commands for batch file MPP solver (Windows)

mpiexec -mapall -np "Number of processes" -machinefile "mpphostfile name"^
"(INS_DIR)\jam_intel_mpi_b.exe" -IN:"Input jcf file name" -OUT:binary
mpiexec -mapall -np "Number of processes" -machinefile "mpphostfile name"^

"(INS_DIR)\jplot_merge_mpp.exe" "Input jcf file name without extension"^
"Number of processes" "File type" "Analysis type"
Example:
mpiexec -mapall -np 8 -machinefile machines.txt^
"C:\Program Files\JMAG-Designer22.2\jam_intel_mpi_b.exe" -IN:motor.jcf -OUT:binary
mpiexec -mapall -np 8 -machinefile machines.txt^

"C:\Program Files\JMAG-Designer22.2\jplot_merge_mpp.exe" motor 8 0 -1
Command Option/argument Description

jam_intel_mpi_b -mapall For Windows. This option creates a network
jplot_merge_mpp mapped drive on all nodes. This option is
required when using multiple compute
nodes.
-np "Number of processes" Degree of process parallelism.
Specify the degree of process parallelism
when also executing hybrid parallel comput-
ing.
-machinefile "mpphostfile MPP hosts file name.
name"
Include the extension in the file name that is
specified here.
574
Command Option/argument Description

jam_intel_mpi_b -IN:"Input jcf file name" The input JCF file name.
Include the extension in the file name that is
specified here.
-OUT:binary Result file output format.
Specify “binary” (JPLOT file format).
jplot_merge_mpp "Input jcf file name without The input JCF file name.
extension"
Do not include the extension in the file
name that is specified here.
"Number of processes" Degree of process parallelism.
Specify the degree of process parallelism
when also executing hybrid parallel comput-
ing.
"File type" The type of files to merge.
Specify “0”. When “0” is specified, the type
of files to be merged are automatically deter-
mined from the input JCF file.
"Analysis type" The analysis type.
Specify “-1”. When “-1” is specified, the
analysis type is automatically determined
from the input JCF file.
 Procedures
1. Place JCF files (.jcf) and the MPP hosts file (.txt) in the working folder.
2. Execute the created shell/batch file.
Press [Ctrl] + [C] on the keyboard to forcibly terminate the execution.
575
Operations
Run MPP Solvers via ExecSolver from Shell/Batch Files

Performs analysis using MPP or hybrid parallel computing without using a job scheduler. Starts the
MPP solver using ExecSolver, software that manages solver software such as magnetic field analysis
and thermal analysis solver software. Uses a batch/shell file that includes the ExecSolver execution
command.
 Notes
be used.
be input.
on page 570.
When parallel computing settings within input JCF files are changed, you should rewrite the -np
 Required files
• The name must be “jmag_hosts.txt” or “(JCF file name)+_ hosts.txt”. In the latter case, for
example, if the JCF file name is motor.jcf, the MPP hosts file name will be motor_hosts.txt.
• Place the MPP hosts file in the same folder as the JCF file(s).

• Sample shell file (Linux)
INS_DIR/solver/mod/magnetic/sample/go_jmag_mpp_b_sample_linux.sh
• Sample batch file (Windows)

INS_DIR\sample\solver\Windows\go_jmag_mpp_b_sample_win.bat
576
Commands in a shell/batch file

The ExecSolver execution command must be included.
• ExecSolver commands for a shell file (Linux)
(JMAG installation directory)\solver\bin\ExecSolver input file name
• ExecSolver commands for a batch file (Windows)

(JMAG installation folder)\ExecSolver input file name
Environment variables to set in the shell/batch files

Set the following environment variables beforehand. For details on the setting methods of environ-
ment variables, see “Overview Edition”.
Environment variable Required/Optional Description

WorkDir Required Full path of the working directory that JMAG uses for
calculations.
E.g.: “/usr/work/Analysis.”
JMAG_MPI_EX- Optional Options sent to the MPI library and their arguments.
TRA_OPTION Use this environment variable if you want to use the
MPI library options when running the MPP solver
via ExecSolver. To use multiple options, enclose them
in double-quotes.
• Example: Windows
set JMAG_MPI_EXTRA_OPTION="-np 5 -dapl"
• Example: Linux (C shell)

setenv JMAG_MPI_EXTRA_OPTION "-np 5 -dapl"
• Example: Linux (bash)

export JMAG_MPI_EXTRA_OPTION="-np 5 -dapl"
 Procedures
Execute the shell file (or batch file) on any one of the nodes (machines) listed in the MPP hosts file.
Processing to add a job is performed on the node where the shell file (or batch file) was executed.
Processing that is not related to parallel computing, such as mesh generation and processing of
results, is performed at the node where the processing to add a job has been performed. Therefore,
executing a shell file (or batch file) at the head node may cause the head node to go down due to
overload.
1. Place JCF files (.jcf) and the MPP hosts file (.txt) in the working folder.
2. Execute the created shell/batch file.
Press [Ctrl] + [C] on the keyboard to forcibly terminate the execution.
577
Operations
Run MPP Solvers from Shell/Batch Files with Commercial Schedulers

Uses a commercial job scheduler to perform analysis using MPP or the hybrid parallel computing
function. To start the MPP solver, use a batch/shell file that contains the MPP solver execution com-
mand.
JMAG-Designer includes sample shell files of typical job schedulers (currently, PBS and LSF are
included).
 Notes
• A solver report file (.html) is not generated after the analysis is completed.
• The functions to generate mesh during analysis execution are not available. For example, a geom-
etry data JCF file in which the [Generate Mesh for Each Step] function is set cannot be input.
on page 570.
 Required files
Mesh data JCF files can be used. Geometry data JCF files cannot be used.

• Linux
• Sample shell for PBS:
INS_DIR/solver/mod/magnetic/sample/PBS/go_jmag_mpp_PBS_sample.sh
• Sample shell file for LSF:

INS_DIR/solver/mod/magnetic/sample/LSF/go_jmag_mpp_LSF_sample.sh
• Windows
INS_DIR\sample\solver\PBS\go_jmag_mpp_PBS_sample.sh

INS_DIR\sample\solver\LSF\go_jmag_mpp_LSF_sample.sh
578
Environment variables to set in a shell/batch file

Set the following environment variables. If an environment variable with the same name is already
set, add the following variable value. Note that depending on the file type the value to set may differ
even for the same environment variable. For details on setting environment variables, see “Overview
Edition”.
• Environment variables for a Linux shell file
Environment variable Description
PATH Execution path for the remote system
LD_LIBRARY_PATH For both the Intel MPI shared library path and the JMAG shared
library path
JMAG_USE_MPI_MACHI Defines whether the MPP solver (jam_intel_mpi_b.exe) references the
NEFILE MPP hosts file while performing MPP or hybrid parallel computing.
• If other than 1 is specified for the value of this variable, the MPP
solver does not reference an MPP hosts file, but rather uses comput-
ing resources managed by a commercial scheduler.
• If 1 is specified for the value of this variable or if this variable is not
set, the MPP solver references an MPP hosts file. In this case, the
operation is not guaranteed when the contents of the referenced MPP
hosts file and computing resources used managed by a commercial
scheduler do not match.
• Environment variables for the batch file (Windows)

PATH Full path of the installation folder of JMAG. When JMAG-Designer
is installed with the default settings, it will be “C:\Program
Files\JMAG-Designer22.2.”
JMAG_USE_MPI_MACHI See the description in“Environment variables for a Linux shell file”
NEFILE on page 579.
579
Operations
Run MPP Solvers via ExecSolver from Shell/Batch Files with Commercial Schedulers
Uses a commercial job scheduler to perform analysis using MPP or the hybrid parallel computing
function. Starts the MPP solver using ExecSolver, software that manages solver software such as
magnetic field analysis and thermal analysis solver software. Uses a batch/shell file that includes the
ExecSolver execution command.
JMAG-Designer includes sample shell files of typical job schedulers (currently, PBS and LSF are
included).
 Notes
be used.
be input.
on page 570.
 Required files
Sample shell file locations

• Linux
INS_DIR/solver/mod/magnetic/sample/PBS/go_jmag_mpp_b_patchExec_PBS.sh
INS_DIR/solver/mod/magnetic/sample/PBS/go_jmag_mpp_b_patchExec_jcf_PBS.sh
INS_DIR/solver/mod/magnetic/sample/PBS/go_jmag_mpp_b_patchExec_jproj_PBS.sh

INS_DIR/solver/mod/magnetic/sample/LSF/go_jmag_mpp_b_patchExec_LSF.sh
580
• Windows
INS_DIR\sample\solver\PBS\go_jmag_mpp_b_patchExec_PBS.sh
INS_DIR\sample\solver\PBS\go_jmag_mpp_b_patchExec_jcf_PBS.sh
INS_DIR\sample\solver\PBS\go_jmag_mpp_b_patchExec_jproj_PBS.sh

INS_DIR\sample\solver\LSF\go_jmag_mpp_b_patchExec_LSF.sh
Environment variables to set in a shell/batch file

Set the following environment variables. For details on the setting methods of environment vari-
ables, see “Overview Edition”.
Environment
Required/Optional Description
variable
JMAG_USE_MPI Required Defines whether the MPP solver (jam_intel_mpi_b.exe) ref-
_MACHINEFILE erences the MPP hosts file while performing MPP or hybrid
parallel computing.
• If other than 1 is specified for the value of this variable, the
MPP solver does not reference an MPP hosts file, but
rather uses computing resources managed by a commercial
scheduler.
• If 1 is specified for the value of this variable or if this vari-
able is not set, the MPP solver references an MPP hosts
file. In this case, the operation is not guaranteed when the
contents of the referenced MPP hosts file and computing
resources used managed by a commercial scheduler do not
match.
JMAG_MPI_EX- Optional Options sent to the MPI library and their arguments.
TRA_OPTION Use this environment variable if you want to use the MPI
library options when running the MPP solver via ExecSolver.
To use multiple options, enclose them in double-quotes.
• Example: Windows
set JMAG_MPI_EXTRA_OPTION="-np 5 -dapl"
• Example: Linux (C shell)

setenv JMAG_MPI_EXTRA_OPTION "-np 5 -dapl"
• Example: Linux (bash)

export JMAG_MPI_EXTRA_OPTION="-np 5 -dapl"
581
Operations
Running Analyses Using GPUs

GPUs (Graphics Processing Units) installed on machines are used for JMAG calculation processes.
This function can be used with magnetic field analyses.
There are two GPU solvers in JMAG.
• New GPU solver:
This GPU solver is installed in JMAG-Designer Version 20, and operates via JW_MAG_GPU
licenses. This excels in linear calculation convergence compared to the previous GPU solver, and
can additionally be used together with the shared memory-type parallel computing (SMP) func-
tion. This can be used in Windows (64bit) and Linux environments.
• Previous GPU solver:
This GPU solver is installed in JMAG-Designer Version 19.1 and earlier, and operates via
JW_MAG_SMP licenses. This can be used in Windows (64bit) environments.
Use the New GPU Solver

1. Delete the environment variable JMAG_GPU_OLD_License when it is set in machines
running analyses.
This procedure is not necessary when the environment variable JMAG_GPU_OLD_License is
not set.
2. Start JMAG-Designer, and create an analysis model.
Some functions and conditions cannot be used in analyses that use GPUs. For details, see
3. Configure settings to use GPUs.
iii. Click [Parallel] in the navigation bar to open the [Parallel Computing Settings] setting
panel.
iv. Select [Use GPU].
A single GPU is always used in analyses for the new GPU solver.
[Degree of Parallelism] settings for [Shared Memory Multiprocessing (SMP)] are used as the
degree of SMP parallels when using the new GPU solver.
v. Click [OK].
ii. Click [Run Active Case].
For procedures other than the above, see the following page:
582

MEMO Changes can be made to GPU settings when executing analysis from JMAG-Scheduler.
MEMO Changes can be made to the GPU settings of JCF files (.jcf ) by using environment vari-
ables. Use these when executing analysis either from the command line or by using SSH-con-
nected remote machines. For details, see “Parameter Explanation Edition”.
MEMO Transferring result files may take time if running calculations of several cases across a
number of machines. Configuring the following settings in the [Step Control] setting panel in the
[Study Properties] dialog prior to running analysis can reduce the size of result files and other
files, and can also reduce the amount of time required for file transfers and calculations as a
whole.
• Select [Output Table Results Only (No Mesh will be Output)].
Use the Previous GPU Solver

1. Set the environment variable JMAG_GPU_OLD_License in machines running analyses.
Specify 1 as the variable value.
For the procedure for setting environment variables, see “Overview Edition”.
2. Start JMAG-Designer, and create an analysis model.
Some functions and conditions cannot be used in analyses that use GPUs. For details, see
3. Configure settings to use GPUs.
iii. Click [Parallel] in the navigation bar to open the [Parallel Computing Settings] setting
panel.
iv. Select [Use GPU].
v. To execute magnetic field analyses or magnetic field transient analyses, check that
[Shared Memory Multi-processing (SMP)] is selected and specify the number of GPUs
to use [Degree of Parallelism].
When using an N amount of GPUs, N + 1 JW_MAG_SMP licenses (parallel computing
licenses) are consumed. The analysis is terminated with errors when the number of GPU on
the machine performing the analysis is less than the value specified in [Degree of Parallelism].
MEMO The shared memory-type parallel computing (SMP) function cannot be used when
using the previous GPU solver.
MEMO A single GPU is always used for magnetic field frequency analysis.
vi. Click [OK].

The procedure described from this point onwards is the same as that for using the new GPU
solver.
583
Operations
584
Remote Execution of Analysis and Mesh Generation
This chapter describes how to prepare and process remote execution of analysis and mesh generation.
Remote Execution means running analysis and mesh generation on another machine on the same network as
your machine. Execution commands exchanged between machines and operations that are executed, such as
analysis and mesh generation, are called “jobs”.
Remote execution of analysis is shown in (2) and (3) below:
(1) Analysis executed on a local machine, (2) Analysis executed on a remote machine,
(3) Analysis executed with computation nodes managed by the job scheduler server
Remote execution is processed by one of the following methods:

• Using remote machines directly:
This is shown in method (2) in the above figure. This method can be selected if you want to use Linux
remote machines. Jobs are passed directly from the local machine to the remote machine. It is also possible to
585
Operations
pass a job from a remote machine to another remote machine ((2)-2: two-step remote execution). In addi-
tion, the Massive Job Runner function and a hosts file allow jobs to be run on multiple remote machines
((2)-3).
MEMO If you are using a Linux remote machine, use SSH (Secure Shell), a communication method for the
secure exchange of data between machines. Job interactions between machines are encrypted and authenticated
using passwords and public/private keys.
• Using computation nodes managed by the job scheduler system:
This is shown in method (3) in the above figure. The job scheduler server allocates jobs sent from the local
machine to the computation node, and the computation node executes the given jobs.
In figure (3), the local machine, the job scheduler server, and the computation node are shown as separate
machines. However, one machine may take on multiple roles such as the local machine and job scheduler
server or the job scheduler server and the computation node.
“JMAG-RemoteSystem” provided by JMAG and commercial products such as PBS, LSF, Slurm can also be
used as a job scheduler system.

• Remote Execution Methods (page 587)
• Remote Execution Methods and OS Type (page 587)
• Directly Using a Remote Machine (page 587)
• Using Computation Nodes Managed by JMAG-RemoteSystem (page 588)
• Using Computation Nodes Managed by Commercial Job Scheduler System (page 589)
• Creating Custom Shell Scripts (page 591)
• Shell Script Sample Files (page 591)
• Commands for Submitting Jobs to the Job Scheduler System (page 592)
• Commands for Executing JMAG Programs (page 592)
• Environment Variables Required for Remote Execution (page 611)
• Adding Remote Machines and Job Scheduler System Settings on the Local Machine (page 617)
• Set on the JMAG-Designer (page 617)
• Set from the Command Line (page 618)
• Using Remote Machine to Run Analysis and Generate Mesh (page 622)
• Analysis That Cannot Be Run Using Remote Machines (page 622)
• Run Analysis and Mesh Generation from JMAG-Designer Using Remote Machines (page 623)
• Run Analysis from JMAG-Scheduler Using Remote Machines (page 624)
586
Remote Execution Methods

This section describes the characteristics of each of the three remote execution methods and the basis
for selecting the type of remote execution method.
• Remote Execution Methods and OS Type (page 587)
• Directly Using a Remote Machine (page 587)
• Using Computation Nodes Managed by JMAG-RemoteSystem (page 588)
• Using Computation Nodes Managed by Commercial Job Scheduler System (page 589)
Remote Execution Methods and OS Type

The method that can be selected depends on the OS (operating system) of your machine. Refer to
the table below and select an appropriate method:
Remote machine/
Local machine job scheduler server Methods
machine
Windows Windows • Using computation nodes managed by JMAG-
RemoteSystem
Windows Linux • Directly using a remote machine
• Using computation nodes managed by JMAG-
RemoteSystem
• Using computation nodes managed by commercial
job scheduler systems
Linux Windows This case is not supported.
Linux Linux • Directly using a remote machine
• Using computation nodes managed by commercial
job scheduler systems
Directly Using a Remote Machine

A job can be directly executed via SSH in Linux remote machines.
 Notes
• Analysis cannot be run using the following functions or tools:
• Snapshot Analysis function of magnetic field analysis
• Inductance calculation tools (motor, bus bar, coil)
587
Operations
• Results cannot be monitored during analysis.

• Suspended analysis cannot be restarted.
• Bash must be used for the login shell of the remote account.
 Required setting
Remote execution
Required setting
environment component
Local machine • Install JMAG-Designer.
• Register remote machine to JMAG-Designer.
Remote machine is added in the [SSH/Execution Script Settings] setting
panel of the [Preferences] dialog.
• Hostname or IP address of the remote machine
• TCP port used for communication between machines
• Login user name on the remote machine
• Settings for SSH authentication (login password or public/private key)
• Shell script files for job execution and job cancellation:
If you select [Run Directly] in [Remote Batch System] in the [SSH/
Execution Script Settings] dialog, these shell scripts will be generated
automatically when the job is submitted.
To use your own shell scripts, please select [Custom Script]. See “Cre-
ating Custom Shell Scripts” on page 591 for the commands to be
written in the script.
• Option settings (maximum number of simultaneous jobs, grouped
jobs)
Remote machine • Install the same versions of JMAG-Designer as your local machine.
Using Computation Nodes Managed by JMAG-RemoteSystem

JMAG-RemoteSystem is a job scheduler system provided by JMAG.
 Notes
• JMAG-RemoteSystem can be used when Windows is the operating system of the local machine.
For details on preparing the execution environments in the JMAG-RemoteSystem, see the “JMAG
Installation Manual”.
588
Remote execution
Required setting
environment component
Local machine • Install JMAG-Designer.
• Register the host name or host ID of the job scheduler server
Job scheduler server • Install JMAG-RemoteSystem.
• Register as a server in the job scheduler system.
• Register computation nodes to the job scheduler server.
Computation node (CPU • Install the same versions of JMAG-Designer as your local machine.
node) • Install the same versions of JMAG-RemoteSystem as your job scheduler
server.
Using Computation Nodes Managed by Commercial Job Scheduler System

Analysis can be run using computation nodes managed by commercial job scheduler systems such as
PBS, LSF, and Slurm.
Remote execution
environment Required setting
components
Local machine • Install the job scheduler system.
• Install JMAG-Designer.
• Register the job scheduler server to JMAG-Designer.
The server is added in the [SSH/Execution Script Settings] setting panel
of the [Preferences] dialog.
• Shell scripts for job submission and cancellation:
If you select [PBS/Torque], [LSF], or [Slurm] in [Remote Batch Sys-
tem] in the [SSH/Execution Script Settings] dialog, these shell scripts
will be generated automatically when the job is submitted.
To use your own shell scripts, please select [Custom Script]. See “Cre-
ating Custom Shell Scripts” on page 591 for the commands to be
written in the script.
• JMAG-Designer installation folders on the computation nodes
• Optional settings (maximum number of simultaneous jobs, JMAG
licensing servers referred to by computation nodes during analysis)
• Option settings for the job scheduler system (setting queues, adding
execution command options, and environment variables)
Job scheduler server See the manual of your job scheduler system.
589
Operations
Remote execution
environment Required setting
components
Computation node • Install the same versions of JMAG-Designer as your local machine.
590
Creating Custom Shell Scripts

You can register a remote machine or job scheduler system to the local machine in the [SSH/Execu-
tion Script Settings] dialog. If you select [Custom Script] in [Remote Batch System] in this dialog, cre-
ate the following shell script by yourself:
• To use a remote machine:
• Shell script for job execution:
Script that contains commands for running JMAG programs and for setting environment
variables necessary for JMAG programs
• Shell script for job cancellation
• To use computation nodes managed by the job scheduler system:
• Shell script for submitting and executing jobs:
Script that contains commands for submitting jobs, running JMAG programs, and setting
environment variables necessary for JMAG programs
• Shell script for job cancellation
This section explains the precautions for creating shell scripts.
MEMO If you select [Run Directly], [PBS/Torque], [LSF], or [Slurm] in [Remote Batch System] in the
[SSH/Execution Script Settings] dialog, these shell scripts will be generated automatically when the job
is submitted.
Notes
• The shell script must be described asynchronously. For example, use a command such as nohup
when describing an analysis execution command.
MEMO For bsub commands and qsub commands, refer to the operation manual of your job sched-
uler system.
Shell Script Sample Files
 Notes
• Sample files do not contain the execution command for JobSystem.
 Save destination
• Windows:
C:\Users\(login user name)\JMAG Designer\RemoteMachines\ssh_scripts\
• Linux:
(home directory)/(login user name)/JMAG Designer/RemoteMachines/ssh_scripts/
 Sample files
File Description
runjmag.sh Sample shell script that describes job execution commands in a simple for-
mat
canceljmag.sh Sample shell script that describes job cancel commands in a simple format
591
Operations
File Description
runjmag_lsf.sh A sample shell script that describes job execution commands for the job
scheduler LSF. bsub is used as a job submission command.
canceljmag_lsf.sh Sample shell script that describes job cancel commands for the job sched-
uler LSF
runjmag_torque.sh A sample shell script that describes job execution commands for the job
scheduler PBS. qsub is used as the job submission command.
canceljmag_torque.sh Sample shell script that describes job cancel commands for the job sched-
uler PBS
runjmagrt.sh Sample shell script that describes job execution commands for creating
RTT files
canceljmagt.sh Sample shell script that describes the job cancel command for creating
RTT files
Commands for Submitting Jobs to the Job Scheduler System

When a job is submitted to the job scheduler system, the command for submitting the job must be
described in the shell script.
See your job scheduler system manual and the files introduced in “Shell Script Sample Files” on
page 591.
Commands for Executing JMAG Programs

The shell script must contain commands for running JMAG programs. Check which execution
command should be described for the programs in the table below.
 Analysis execution modules

Module Description
JMAG-Designer (page Write the JMAG-Designer execution command in the shell for the follow-
594) ing cases:
• When using a JPROJ file as the input file to run a job.
JMAG-Designer is required if you want to include the process of export-
ing a JCF file from a JPROJ file during analysis.
ExecSolver (page 595) ExecSolver is a program that manages solver programs such as magnetic
field analysis and thermal analysis. Describe the ExecSolver execution com-
mand in the shell for the following cases:
• When using a JCF file as an input file to run a job
• When running topology optimization calculation or FEM analysis by
JMAG-RT
592
Module Description
JCoupled (page 598) JCoupled is a program that controls direct coupled analysis. Describe the
JCoupled execution command in the shell for the following cases:
• When running coupled analysis using a JCF file
• When running direct coupled analysis using the topology optimization
function in two steps.
JCoupled must be called when performing the calculations for each case.
 Massive Job Runner function

JMAG has a function that integrates the management of multiple case calculation processes. This
function is called the “Massive Job Runner”. If a commercial job scheduler system is used, the Mas-
sive Job Runner operates within that system.
Use Massive Job Runner when running multi-case analysis, such as efficiency map analysis, paramet-
ric analysis, optimization calculation, and FEM analysis by JMAG-RT.
Example: Using JobSystem to submit a job to a commercial job scheduler system
593
Operations
Massive Job Runner can be executed from two programs:
Program Description
JobSystem (recom- JobSystem is a program installed since Version 21.1. In addition to manag-
mended) (page 599) ing jobs, JobSystem can control which licenses are used to run jobs.
For more details, see “JobSystem Execution Command” on page 599.
MEMO JobSystem is also called when [Manage Jobs using JMAG Job Sys-
tem] is selected. [Manage Jobs Using JMAG Job System] is displayed in the
following dialogs and tabs:
• The [Submit to Queue] and [Submit Multiple Studies] dialogs in
JMAG-Designer
• The [Submit to Queue] dialog in JMAG-Scheduler
• The [Running] tab in the [Optimization] dialog in JMAG-Designer
• The [Create] tab of all motor setting panels in JMAG-RT Library Man-
ager
GroupedJobRunner GroupedJobRunner can only manage jobs.
(page 607) For more details, see “GroupedJobRunner Execution Command” on page
607.
MEMO GroupedJobRunner is also called when calculation is run using

the [Custom Script] remote machine with [Execute grouped jobs together]
selected. [Execute grouped jobs together] is a setting item of the [SSH/Exe-
cution Script Settings] dialog.
JMAG-Designer Execution Command
 Syntax
designer\
-w -l logfile.txt (xmlfile_path)
• Example:
/home/user/installation/JMAG222/designer\
-w -l /home/guest/logfile.log "$INFILE"
 JMAG-Designer command-line options

Only the options that are used when running jobs via SSH are listed here. For other options, see
“Scripts Edition”.
Short option Long option Value Description

-w - None Runs the job of input files in non-Window mode.
-l --log Path of the Use this option when not using a GUI so that errors occur-
log file (.log) ring during execution are recorded.
outputted Do not change the name of the log file from “logfile.log”.
This is because this file is referenced by JMAG-Scheduler
during job execution.
594
ExecSolver Execution Command
 Syntax
ExecSolver\
-rt -remote=(SSH RemoteMachine Name) -multi -reservation=(reservation key)\
(inputjcffile_path)\
(parameterXMLfile_path)
• Example 1:
/home/user/installation/JMAG222/solver/bin/ExecSolver\
-remote=SSH_remote001 "$INFILE"
• Example 2:
This is an example of executing an analysis job using the topology optimization function. The -
topology option should be described after ExecSolver.
-topology -multi "/home/user/work/JMAG/Designer.jcf"
• Example 3:
This is an example of executing a JMAG-RT job.
Set this shell script on a local machine (client). Set the shell script for executing the JCF file job
on a remote machine.
-rt -remote=RT_SSH_remote002 -multi -reservation="$JMAG_RESERVATION_KEY"\
"$INFILE"\
"$JMAG_EXTRA_FILE_1"
 ExecSolver options (analysis using remote machines)

Option Argument Required/Optional Description
-remote SSH remote Optional Performs distributed processing for jobs by using
machine name remote machines connected via SSH.
For the argument, specify the SSH/Execution
Script settings name ([Title] in the [Create
Remote Machine] dialog) that is set in JMAG-
Designer on the remote machine.
When distributed processing is not used, this
option does not need to be specified.
595
Operations

-multi None Optional Use power simulation licenses (PSL) when exe-
cuting jobs.
• This option is only available when using LM-X
license servers.
• There is no need to specify this option when
not using PSL.
• This function is enabled when both of the fol-
lowing conditions are satisfied.
• The value of the environment variable
JMAG_MULTI_LICENSE is “1”.
• The environment variable JMAG_PSL_-
CONTROL_xx is not set, or alternatively,
the value of JMAG_PSL_CONTROL_xx is
“0”. Enter the solver name in the xx at the
end of the variable name (Example:
For details on PSL, see “Licenses Edition”.
-reservation Reservation Optional Uses reserved licenses prior to executing jobs.
key value When the value of the environment variable
JMAG_RESERVATION_KEY is not empty,
specify reservation keys as arguments. Reserva-
tion keys are the value of the environment vari-
able JMAG_RESERVATION_KEY.
• This option is only available when using LM-X
license servers.
• License reservations are made with the JMAG
License Center.
-topology None Required depend- Executes topology optimization jobs.
ing on the content This option allows ExecSolver to recognize that
of the topology topology optimization jobs are included in jobs
optimization jobs currently being executed.
to be executed. When executing only one topology optimization
job, the job will be correctly recognized by Exec-
Solver due to the presence of Topology Optimiza-
tion conditions. Specifying this option is
therefore not required.
This option should be specified in the following
circumstances:
• When there is a combination of topology-opti-
mization jobs and non-topology-optimization
jobs within a single analysis group
• Direct coupled analysis jobs where Topology
Optimization conditions are set for some stud-
ies, but not for others
Note the following:

• This option should be provided as the first
argument for ExecSolver.
596

-rt None Required when exe- Executes JMAG-RT jobs.
cuting JMAG-RT
jobs
-grouped_job None Optional Calls GroupedJobRunner when executing jobs.
GroupedJobRunner is a program to group jobs.
• -grouped_job option can be used only in the
Linux environment.
• When either the –topology option or –rt
option is used, use the -grouped_job option.
• When the -grouped_job option is not used,
jobs are executed locally or remotely as usual.
For details on GroupedJobRunner, see “Adding
Remote Machines and Job Scheduler System
Settings on the Local Machine” on page 617.
-machinefile MPP hosts file Optional Option for execution.
(.txt) name This file defines the name of the nodes
(machines) used for calculations, as well as the
maximum number of processes that those nodes
can execute.
When using a commercially available job sched-
uler, use the machine files generated by that job
scheduler.
When using JMAG-Scheduler, enter node names
(or IP addresses) and the number of processes for
each node in a text file using a text editor.
A sample file is shown below. In this example,
four processes are allocated on machines 01 to
04.
Note the following:

• When the -grouped_job option is used, use the
-machinefile option.
597
Operations

• When -machinefile option is not specified, the
MPP hosts file will be obtained from the envi-
ronment variable I_MPI_HYDRA_HOST_-
FILE provided by Intel. Errors will occur if the
MPP hosts file cannot be acquired.
For I_MPI_HYDRA_HOST_FILE, see the
following page:
https://www.intel.com/content/www/us/en/
develop/documentation/mpi-developer-refer-
ence-linux/top/environment-variable-refer-
ence/hydra-environment-variables.html
-rsh Name of Optional Option for specifying remote shell program.
remote shell GroupedJobRunner activates the computation
program node via remote shell (default: ssh).
If you want to select a program other than ssh,
use this option to make changes.
Example: When using PBS remote shell program
-rsh=pbs_tmrsh,
Note the following:
• When the -grouped_job option is used,
use -rsh option.
• Only one program can be specified in the -rsh
option.
• If the remote shell command you want to use is
not in the search path, specify the full path.
• The arguments of the remote shell command
cannot be included in the -rsh option.
JCoupled Execution Command

When executing JCoupled, paramcouple.xml (JCoupled file) must be specified as an argument.
This file can be exported from JMAG-Scheduler.
 Syntax
JCoupled\
-mode=control (paramcouple.xml_path) -restart -step=(total number of analysis steps)
• Example 1:
/home/user/installation/JMAG222/JCoupled\
-mode=control $WorkDir/paramcouple.xml
• Example 2:
/home/user/installation/JMAG222/JCoupled\
-mode=control $WorkDir/paramcouple.xml -restart -step=36
598
 JCoupled command-line options

Required/
Option Argument Description
optional
-restart None Optional Use -restart in the following circumstances.
• To continue executing analysis that has com-
pleted
• To restart interrupted analysis from the step at
the time the analysis interrupted
However, direct coupled analysis that satisfies
any of the following conditions cannot be
restarted.
• Different time intervals are set for each solver
([Start time to apply], [End time to apply],
and [Divisions of time] are set in JMAG-
Scheduler).
• Using structural analysis solvers.
-step Total number of Optional When using -restart, specify the total number of
analysis steps analysis steps.
For example, specifying “-step=36” when restart-
ing analysis that has been executed up until the
23rd step will execute the 24th to 36th steps.
JobSystem Execution Command

When multiple case jobs are submitted to JMAG-Scheduler or a commercial job scheduler system in
a remote machine, these jobs can be grouped for batch execution and cancellation (Massive Job
Runner function, hereafter referred to as MJR).
JobSystem consists of two programs:
• The job management program:
This program manages (receives, schedules, and allocates) jobs.
• The computation node program:
This program controls the solver program and allocates licenses to the solver program.
Example: Submitting a job to a remote machine using JobSystem
599
Operations
 Notes
• When JobSystem is used, the massively parallel processing (MPP) function and the hybrid paral-
lel processing function cannot be used.
• The job management programs and computation node programs write log files to the calculation
directory. The log file records the following information with a timestamp (in milliseconds):
• Job start, stop, and timeout
• License checkout
• Error occurrence
The operation of the computation node is recorded in the log file written by the job manage-
ment program.
A log file name is automatically assigned based on the host name and timestamp.
• The overall progress is updated using a progress file that is frequently updated. The progress file
displays the following information:
• Status of each case (Queued, Suspended, Running, Canceled, Finished, Wait, Error)
• Calculation directory for each case
• Overall progress (%)
MEMO You cannot use the qstat command to check progress.
• At the end of a calculation, the job management program writes a report with the following
information:
• Total time of all computation
• Computation time per job
• Statistical data of computation
• When all jobs are finished, JobSystem terminates.
 Syntax
JobSystem\
--jobs=(job file path) --hosts=(host file path) --multi --license-control --debug\
--timeout=(timeout limit) --rerun=(maximum number of rerun)\
--scratch=(template name) --delete-scratch
• Example 1:
/home/user/installation/JMAG222/JobSystem\
--jobs='jobs.xml' --hosts='job_hosts.txt'
• Example 2:
/home/user/installation/JMAG222/JobSystem\
-d -l -j $INFILE --hosts='designer_job_hosts.txt' --timeout=30 --rerun=5\
--scratch='$WORK_DIR/$JOB_ID' --delete-scratch
600
 JobSystem command-line options

MEMO Values entered on the command line override the settings in the input file.
For example, if the --multi option is entered on the command line, the power simulation license will be
used when the job is run, even if the [Use Power Simulation License] is listed as cleared in the JobSystem
execution job file (.xml).
Required/
Short Option Long Option Argument Description
optional
-j --jobs Job file Required Specifies the job file.
(.xml, The default is jobs.txt in the working
.txt,.job) directory.
• The path to the job file is described in
the environment variable INFILE
when the shell script is executed. Spec-
ify $INFILE as the command argu-
ment.
• If the specified job file is not found,
JobSystem exits.
• If no job file is specified, the default
job file (jobs.txt) is used.
See below for the job file format.
- --hosts Hosts file Optional Specifies the hosts file.
(.txt) The default is hosts.txt in the working
directory.
The hosts file can be used to specify the
host name (or host ID) of the node to
use in calculation and the upper limit of
the number of cores used for each node.
Use a text editor to create the hosts file.
• If a hosts file is specified in a command
option, the machines described in the
specified hosts file are used to run the
calculation case from that command.
If the specified hosts file is not found,
only the current machine is used for
calculation. The number of cores used
in the current machine is the upper
limit of the number of cores that can
be used.
• If no hosts file is specified, the default
hosts file is used.
See below for the hosts file format.
601
Operations
Required/
optional
-m --multi - Optional Uses power simulation licenses (PSL)
when running jobs.
• This option can only be used if you are
using an LM-X license server.
• This option does not need to be speci-
fied when PSL is not used.
• This option works if both of the fol-
lowing conditions are satisfied:
• Environment variable JMAG_MUL-
TI_LICENSE parameter is “1”.
• Environment variable JMAG_PSL_-
CONTROL_xx is not set or value of
JMAG_PSL_CONTROL_xx is 0.
The xx at the end of the variable
name is the solver name (e.g.,
For more details on PSL, see “License
Edition”.
-l --license-con- - Optional Uses JobSystem to control the number of
trol regular licenses used for each job.
Note the following:
• When JMAG job system manages the
licenses, multiple jobs generated from a
single JPROJ file cannot share a single
PSL license.
• When setting a limit on the number of
PSL licenses used by one job, use the
environment variable JMAG_PSL_-
MAX.
-d --debug - Optional Writes additional information to the log
file.
- --timeout Timeout Optional When a job is not finished within the
time (min) time specified in the argument, JobSys-
tem terminates that job.
• Specify a number that is equal to or
greater than 1 and less than 35791.
Specify an integer. The unit of timeout
time is minutes and the default is 10
minutes.
• Jobs with multiple analysis such as cou-
pled analysis or magnetic field analysis
using Iron Loss conditions, will time
out when the total time elapsed exceeds
the timeout limit.
602
Required/
optional
• Operation will change depending on
the settings in [Resubmit Jobs on
Remote Machine] in JMAG-Sched-
uler.
When [Resubmit Jobs on Remote
Machine] is selected, jobs time out in
units of single cases.
When [Resubmit Jobs on Remote
Machine] is cleared, jobs time out in
units of (total number of cases/number
of simultaneously run jobs). For exam-
ple, if the total number of cases is 100
and the simultaneously run number of
jobs is 5, the job times out when the
total time elapsed for calculation of 20
cases has exceeded the timeout limit.
• The --timeout option can also be used
for analysis jobs to create JMAG-RT
models using JMAG-RT.
- --rerun Maximum Optional The --rerun option is effective when the
number of settings for timeout have been made.
retries For jobs that have been terminated, the
job will continue to rerun until the speci-
fied integer of jobs is reached.
• Specify an integer equal to or greater
than 0.
• The --rerun option can also be used for
analysis jobs to create JMAG-RT mod-
els using JMAG-RT.
- --scratch Template Optional This creates a directory in the scratch
for creating space (a temporary storage space for user
a scratch data) of each computation node and cop-
directory on ies the calculation data from the submit-
computa- ting machine to that directory.
tion nodes Using the scratch space has the following
benefits:
• When a shared disk cannot be used for
FEA calculations, scratch space can be
used instead.
• When running multiple jobs on a slow
shared disk, the scratch space can be
used to reduce the number of data cop-
ies between the shared disk and com-
putation nodes or between the control
node and computation nodes, thereby
improving performance.
603
Operations
Required/
optional
The directory created in the scratch space
of a computation node is called the
scratch directory. This directory is cre-
ated according to the template specified
in the argument.
Templates
Templates support the following key-
words:
• $WORK_DIR:
Work directory name, which is defined
by the environment variable WorkDir
when the JMAG JobSystem is run
• $USER:
User ID
• $NODE_ID:
Computation node ID, which is gener-
ated by the JMAG JobSystem and
assigned to each computation node.
• $JOB_ID:
Job ID. This ID will only have a value
if jobs are run from PBS, LSF, or
SLURM.
The following are examples of templates:

• Example 1:
Template: /temp/scratch
Example directory: /temp/scratch
• Example 2:
Template: /temp/scratch/$USER/
$JOB_ID
Example directory: /temp/scratch/
jmag_user/123
• Example 3:
Template: $WORK_DIR/$JOB_ID
Example directory: /home/jmag_user/
work/myjob/123
• Example 4:
Template: /temp/scratch/$NODE_ID
Example directory: /temp/scratch/
234ef732
Notes
• When scheduling jobs, priority is given
to computation nodes that have local
calculation data. Therefore, the order
in which jobs are run may differ when
using scratch space and when not using
scratch space.
604
Required/
optional
• Result files and log files written to the
scratch space of a computation node
are processed according to the result
transfer options (such as [Leave results
on remote machine]) in JMAG-Sched-
uler and the [Optimization] dialog.
- --delete-scratch - Optional Deletes files from the scratch space on
each computation node when the job is
finished.
If [Leave Results on Server] is selected in
the result transfer options and the --
delete-scratch option is not used, [Load
Multi Case Results] cannot be performed
after calculations have finished.
Job file format (.xml, .txt, .job)

The following formats are supported:
File Description
JobSystem execution Job To export this file, select [File Export for JMAG JobSystem Execution]
file (.xml) under [Machine (Server)] in the submit-jobs-to-JMAG-Scheduler dialogs
and click [Export].
The submit-jobs-to-JMAG-Scheduler dialogs include the following:

• JMAG-Designer
• [Submit to Queue] dialog
• [Submit Project Files] dialog
• [Submit Multiple Models] dialog
• [Submit Multiple Studies] dialog
• [Run] tab in the [Optimization] dialog
• JMAG-RT
• [Create] tab of each model's settings dialog
• [Recalculation] dialog for each model
605
Operations
File Description
Note the following:
• When using a JobSystem execution Job file, the following files are
required in the work directory:
• JobSystem execution Job file
• JPROJ file
• Files (JCF files, paramcouple.xml, etc.) and folders exported with the
JobSystem execution Job file:
Depending on the type of analysis, some files and folders are exported
with the JobSystem execution Job file. These files and folders are used
with the JobSystem execution job file. Do not change the names or
folder structure of the exported files.
• Shell script file:
You must create this file yourself.
In this file, define the environment variables (InsDir, WorkDir,
JSOL_LICENSE_PATH, INFILE) required for the calculation. Refer
to the following function tutorial, which contains a sample of this file.
[JFT 179] Simultaneous Multi-Case Execution from CUI on HPC/
Cluster
• Scheduler job files (.xml) cannot be used for input files to JobSystem.
Text file format (.txt) Use a text editor to create this file.
Write the full path of one input JCF file in each line. The figure below
describes the paths of six input files.
• Information on the number of solvers and cores used in the calculation is

obtained from the JCF file.
• The directory of each JCF file is used as the working directory for jobs
using that JCF file.
Job file (.job) Use a text editor to create this file.
• One or more jobs are supported in a single file.
• Information on the solver and the number of cores required for calcula-
tion are obtained from the job file.
Hosts file format (.txt)

Describe the information of one machine on each line (host name (or host ID): maximum number
of cores).
The following is a sample hosts file. This example describes the host IDs of five machines. The max-
imum number of cores for each computation node is set to 5.
606
Hosts File Examples
GroupedJobRunner Execution Command

Jobs can be grouped when submitting multiple jobs to JMAG-Scheduler or a commercially available
job scheduler via SSH. Grouped jobs can be executed and canceled together (the Massive Job Run-
ner function. Hereafter, called as MJR).
 Notes
• When [Execute grouped jobs together] in the [Create Remote Machine] dialog is selected, jobs
will begin after input JCF files for all jobs are written and transferred to remote machines (or job
schedulers). Jobs are not started sequentially from the initially transferred job.
• When using commercially available job schedulers, grouped jobs cannot be canceled or resub-
mitted individually.
• Errors will occur if licenses to execute grouped jobs cannot be secured.
• In the environments where there are only regular licenses, or environments where there are both
regular licenses and Power Simulation Licenses (hereafter referred to as PSLs), when executing
jobs using MJR, the MJR driver (GroupedJobRunner) reserves regular licenses immediately prior
to using those regular licenses. This is a measure to prevent jobs from terminating due to an
insufficiency of licenses while jobs are being executed.
When reserving licenses in environments where there are both regular licenses and PSLs, settings
for the environment variables JMAG_PSL_CONTROL_xx and JMAG_LI-
CENSE_COUNT_xx are referenced (with solver names entered in the xx at the end of the vari-
able names).
• JMAG_PSL_CONTROL_xx specifies whether to use PSL (1: Use only PSL for single jobs,
2: Also use regular licenses in addition to PSL for single jobs). For details, see “Licenses Edi-
tion”.
• JMAG_LICENSE_COUNT_xx specifies the upper limit for jobs to be executed simultane-
ously using regular licenses. For details on the JMAG_LICENSE_COUNT_xx type, see
“Environment Variables Required for Remote Execution” on page 611.
The number of licenses to be reserved is determined based on the following rules:
Environment The number of licenses reserved by GroupedJobRunner

Regular licenses only The number of regular licenses to be reserved is the same as the
smallest of either of the two following values.
• The number of machine cores to execute jobs
• The number of added jobs
JMAG_LICENSE_COUNT_XX settings are ignored.
607
Operations
Environment The number of licenses reserved by GroupedJobRunner

Both regular licenses and PSLs, When JMAG_LICENSE_COUNT_XX is set:
and JMAG_PSL_CON- The number of regular licenses to be reserved is the same as the
TROL_xx=2 is specified smallest of either of the following values.
• The value of JMAG_LICENSE_COUNT_xx
When JMAG_LICENSE_COUNT_XX is not set:
The number of regular licenses to be reserved is the same as the
smallest of either of the two following values.
When the number of jobs to be executed simultaneously via the value of JMAG_LI-
CENSE_COUNT_xx (the number of reserved licenses) is particularly large, GroupedJobRunner
sets JMAG_LICENSE_CHECK_WAITING for the portion of jobs that exceeds the number of
license reservations.
JMAG_LICENSE_CHECK_WAITING is an environment variable for specifying job execution
in a waiting status until licenses become available. For details, see “Licenses Edition”.
 Required settings
When grouping jobs submitted via SSH, the following settings are required:
• Select [Execute grouped jobs together] in the [Create Remote Machine] dialog.
• Add commands to operate the driver (GroupedJobRunner) for grouping process to the shell
script specified in [Run Job Script] and [Cancel Job Script].
• An example is shown below. For command arguments, see “GroupedJobRunner execution and
termination commands” on page 609.
Example 1:
if [["$ IS_GROUPED_JOB" == 1]]
then
$ InsDir/GroupedJobRunner start -in=$INFILE
else
$ InsDir/solver/bin/ExecSolver $INFILE
fi
Example 2:
This is an example of executing a JMAG-RT jobs.
if [["$ IS_GROUPED_JOB" == 1]]
then
./GroupedJobRunner start -in=$INFILE
else
./ExecSolver "$INFILE"
fi
608
 GroupedJobRunner execution and termination commands

Include the following commands in shell scripts for executing jobs and canceling jobs. Options en-
closed in [] can be omitted.
• Execution command:
Submits input files described in input file lists as jobs to computation nodes described in MPP
hosts files. Multiple jobs submitted from GroupedJobRunner are handled as one group.
GroupedJobRunner start -in = (listfile_name)\
[-machinefile=(mpphostfile_name)]
• Cancel command:
Deletes jobs on a management server. Jobs to be deleted can be specified with the -job option. If
the -job option was not specified, all grouped jobs are deleted.
GroupedJobRunner stop [-job=job_name]
Job progress can be confirmed from SSH client machines using the following command:
• Command for confirming progress:
Displays the progress status of all jobs within a job group to standard output.
GroupedJobRunner status
 GroupedJobRunner command-line options

Required/
Optional
-in List file Required Option for execution.
(.txt) name This file defines one of the following:
• List of input files (.jcf ) of jobs to be grouped
• List of job files (.xml):
Job files are files that describe jobs and input parameter
values for executing those jobs.
Job files are used when using project files (.jproj) as input
files. When using project files as input files, jobs are
grouped by project.
When using JMAG-Scheduler, JMAG-Scheduler creates

input files and job files so that users do not need to create
these themselves.
When using commercially available job schedulers, use a text
editor to write either of the following in text files.
• Absolute path to input files (or job files)
• Relative path of input files (or job files) from the directory
specified by the environment variable WorkDir
Note the following:

• Do not mix input files and job files in one list file.
609
Operations
Required/
Optional
-machinefile MPP hosts Optional Option for execution.
file (.txt) This file defines the name of the nodes (machines) used for
name calculations, as well as the maximum number of processes
that those nodes can execute.
When using a commercially available job scheduler, use the
machine files generated by that job scheduler.
When using JMAG-Scheduler, enter node names (or IP
addresses) and the number of processes for each node in a
text file using a text editor.
A sample file is shown below. In this example, four processes
are allocated on machines 01 to 04.
Note the following:

• When -machinefile is not specified, the MPP hosts file
will be obtained from the environment variable
I_MPI_HYDRA_HOST_FILE. Errors will occur if
the MPP hosts file cannot be acquired.
-job jobname Optional Option for cancellation.
When the -job option is not specified, all grouped jobs are
deleted.
-rsh Name of Optional Option for specifying remote shell program.
remote shell GroupedJobRunner activates the computation node via
program remote shell (default: ssh).
If you want to select a program other than ssh, use this
option to make changes.
Example: When using PBS remote shell program
-rsh=pbs_tmrsh,
Note the following:

• Only one program can be specified in the -rsh option.
• If the remote shell command you want to use is not in the
search path, specify the full path.
• The arguments of the remote shell command cannot be
included in the -rsh option.
610
Required/
Optional
-use_multi None Optional Option for using Power Simulation Licenses (PSL).
Power Simulation Licenses can be used when using LM-X
license servers.
Using this option can obtain the same effect as specifying “1”
as the value for the environment variable JMAG_MUL-
TI_LICENSE. For details on JMAG_MULTI_LICENSE,
see “Environment variables set by JMAG-Scheduler” on
page 611.
Environment Variables Required for Remote Execution
 Environment variables set by JMAG-Scheduler

The following environment variables are set by JMAG-Scheduler based on parameters set in the
GUI by the users when the shell scripts are called from JMAG-Scheduler.

INFILE Job input files that are passed to job execution programs (JMAG-Designer
or ExecSolver).
The value of this environment variable will be any one of the following:
• JCF file (.jcf ):
When JCF files are specified as input files in the GUI, JCF files are
passed directly to ExecSolver.
• Job list file (.xml):
When JPROJ files (.jproj) are specified as input files in the GUI, job list
files where JPROJ file paths and analysis parameters are output are passed
to JMAG-Designer. JMAG-Designer loads JPROJ files and exports JCF
files. Exported JCF files are passed to ExecSolver.
JMAG_EXTRA_FILE_xx Files that accompany input files.
(A number is entered in xx For example, XML files (rtmotor.xml) that describe settings for JMAG-RT.
at the end of the file
name)
JMAG_COUPLED_- The full path of direct coupled analysis parameter files (paramcouple.xml)
FILE are stored when JCF files are specified as input files when running direct
coupled analysis remotely via SSH.
JMAG_COUPLED_FILE is not defined when JPROJ files are specified as
input files when running direct coupled analysis remotely via SSH.
JMAG_EXTRA_ARGS Fixed arguments for Execsolver, JCoupled, and JobSystem. This stores val-
ues such as -mode.
WorkDir Directory paths that are used to execute jobs.
When executing jobs remotely, a subdirectory is created in the directory
specified in [Remote Path] in the [Create Remote Machine] dialog on a
remote machine. The input file is transferred from the local machine to
that subdirectory and the job is executed.
The absolute path of this subdirectory is the value of WorkDir.
611
Operations

JMAG_MULTI_LI- This is for using Power Simulation Licenses (PSL).
CENSE Power simulation licenses are available when using LM-X license servers.
• 0: Do not use
• 1: Use
This environment variable has the value of 1 when selecting [Use Power
Simulation License] in the [Submit to Queue] dialog.
The -multi option of ExecSolver is enabled when the value of this envi-
ronment variable is 1.
JMAG_RESERVA- License reservation key.
TION_KEY Reservation keys are available when using LM-X license servers.
The value entered in the [Reservation Key] box in the [Submit to Queue]
dialog becomes the value of this environment variable.
If the value of this environment variable and the value specified in the argu-
ment of the -reservation option of ExecSolver is the same, then reserved
licenses are used.
JMAG_SOLVER_TYPES The number of licenses required for analysis.
This environment variable is set when using GroupedJobRunner.
JMAG_PARALLEL_- Parallel computing type.
TYPE • single: Non-parallel
• SMP: Shared memory type (SMP)
• MPP: Highly parallel distributed memory type (MPP) or hybrid distrib-
uted memory type
This environment variable can be used to change input file parallel com-
puting settings. For details, see “Changing the Parallel Computing Set-
tings Using the Environment Variables and Scheduler Job Files” on page
404.
JMAG_CORES For SMP, the thread parallelism.
For MPP or hybrid parallel computing, the process parallelism.
This environment variable can be used to change input file parallel com-
404.
JMAG_HYBRID_- For hybrid parallel computing, the thread parallelism.
THREADS This environment variable can be used to change input file parallel com-
404.
JMAG_USE_GPU Whether or not GPUs are used.
Changes can be made to input file GPU settings by using this environment
variable. For details, see “Changing the Parallel Computing Settings Using
the Environment Variables and Scheduler Job Files” on page 404.
JMAG_SCRIPT_ER- Performs script error checks.
ROR_OUT The full path of script error files used by JMAG-Scheduler to determine
errors immediately after the start of job execution is stored as a value.
$WorkDir/JMAG_script_error.out
612

The error part of shell scripts is output to script error files. For example, if
an error occurs in calling or executing qsub, then that part will be output to
a script error file.
• If a script error file does not exist in the above folder, or if the content of
a script error file is empty, then JMAG determines that no error has
occurred, and will continue to execute jobs.
• When messages are output to script error files, JMAG determines that an
error has occurred, and will stop executing jobs. Messages output to
script error files are furthermore displayed in the [Status] column of
JMAG-Scheduler.
In order to perform error checks after executing shell scripts, create shell
scripts so that error content is output to script error files.
As an example, users can take advantage of this environment variable by
redirecting the standard error output of each command in a shell script to
this environment variable.
Example:
echo "$InsDir/solver/bin/ExecSolver \"$INFILE\" > $WorkDir/
tmp.log" | qsub -V -l nodes=1:ppn=8 -q med -j oe -o /dev/
null -N "JMAG" 1> $WorkDir/job.id 2>$JMAG_SCRIPT_ERROR_OUT
 Environment variables set by JobSystem

The following parameters are set by JobSystem:

JMAG_JOB_SYSTEM_- Host ID of JobSystem server. This is set at the start of all jobs.
SERVER
JMAG_MULTI- The upper limit of the number of cores used in the calculation.
CORE_LIMIT This value is referred to if the programs in JMAG use multiple cores.
 Environment variables set by users

The following environment variables must be defined before shell scripts are called from JMAG-
Scheduler.
• The commands to set some of these environment variables are included in the shell script sample
files. When editing and using the sample files, users should change the value of environment
variables in commands in accordance with the environment of the remote machine being used.
InsDir The directory where JMAG is installed (absolute path).
Example:
export InsDir=/opt/JMAG-Designer22.2
JMAG_LICENSE_SE- License server type.
LECTOR JMAG_LICENSE_SELECTOR settings are not required when using LM-
X licenses (Variable value is “lmx”).
Set “Flexlm” to use FLEXlm licenses.
Example:
export JMAG_LICENSE_SELECTOR=Flexlm
613
Operations

JSOL_LICENSE_PATH Host name or IP address of the license server when using LM-X licenses.
Describe after the @ mark (example: @TokyoServer, @192.0.2.0).
Example:
export JSOL_LICENSE_PATH=@192.0.2.0
JRI_LICENSE_FILE Host name or IP address of the license server when using FLEXlm licenses.
Describe after the @ mark (example: @TokyoServer, @192.0.2.0).
LD_LIBRARY_PATH The directory where the shared library necessary for running analyses in
JMAG is located. For 64-bit versions: “(JMAG installation directory) /
solver/mod/lib/linux64”.
When executing MPP or hybrid parallel computing using SSH, the abso-
lute path of the Intel MPI Library installation directory must be specified
(example: /opt/intel/impi/2019.0.0/intel64/lib/).
PATH Environment variables for MPP and hybrid parallel computing functions.
JMAG_MPP_- When not using these functions, setting these environment variables is not
JPLOT_MASK necessary. For details on these environment variables, see “Operations Edi-
JMAG_USE_MPI_MA- tion”/ “Running Analyses Using MPP Function/Hybrid Parallel Comput-
CHINEFILE ing Function”.
JMAG_GPU_OLD_Li- Environment variable for using the previous GPU solver in magnetic field
cense analyses. For details, see “Settings for Using the Previous GPU Solver via
Environment Variables” on page 404.
These are environment variables for use with Power Simulation Licenses (PSLs). For details, see
“Licenses Edition”.
JMAG_PSL_CON- Environment variable for controlling the use of magnetic field static analy-
TROL_ST sis (2D, 3D, axisymmetric) PSLs (JW_MAG_ST_MULTI). For details, see
“Licenses Edition”.
JMAG_PSL_CON- Environment variable for controlling the use of magnetic field transient
TROL_DP analysis (2D, axisymmetric) PSLs (JW_MAG_DPL_MULTI). For details,
see “Licenses Edition”.
JMAG_PSL_CON- Environment variable for controlling the use of magnetic field transient
TROL_TR analysis (3D) PSLs (JW_MAG_TR_MULTI). For details, see “Licenses
Edition”.
JMAG_PSL_CON- Environment variable for controlling the use of magnetic field frequency
TROL_FQ analysis (2D, 3D, axisymmetric) PSLs (JW_MAG_FQ_MULTI). For
details, see “Licenses Edition”.
JMAG_PSL_CON- Environment variable for controlling the use of iron loss analysis PSLs
TROL_LS (JW_TOOL_LOSS_MULTI). For details, see “Licenses Edition”.
JMAG_PSL_CON- Environment variable for controlling the use of thermal analysis (3D) PSLs
TROL_HT (JW_HEAT_MULTI). For details, see “Licenses Edition”.
JMAG_PSL_CON- Environment variable for controlling the use of structural analysis (2D,
TROL_DS 3D) PSLs (JW_DS_MULTI). For details, see “Licenses Edition”.
JMAG_PSL_CON- Environment variable for controlling the use of electric field analysis (2D,
TROL_EL 3D, axisymmetric) PSLs (JW_ELEC_MULTI). For details, see “Licenses
Edition”.
JMAG_PSL_CON- Environment variable for controlling the use of parallel computing func-
TROL_PA2 tion (shared memory-type (SMP)) PSLs (JW_MAG_SMP_MULTI). For
details, see “Licenses Edition”.
614

JMAG_PSL_CON- Environment variable for controlling the use of PSLs for automatic mesh
TROL_RM generation via remote machines (JW_ACIS_REMOTE_MESH_MULTI).
For details, see “Licenses Edition”.
JMAG_PSL_CON- Environment variable for controlling the use of PSL (JMAG-Express_FR_-
TROL_EXPRESS_FR MULTI) in simple evaluation.
JMAG_PSL_MAX Environment variable for specifying the maximum number of PSLs that
should be used with a single job. For details, see “Licenses Edition”.
JMAG_TOPOLO- Environment variable for specifying the degree of thread parallelism for
GY_DRIVER_NUM_- optimization control jobs in topology optimization using PSLs. For details,
THREADS see “Licenses Edition”.
These are environment variables used together with the Massive Job Runner function. For details, see
“Adding Remote Machines and Job Scheduler System Settings on the Local Machine” on page 617.
JMAG_LI- Environment variable for specifying the upper limit value of jobs to be exe-
CENSE_COUNT_ST cuted simultaneously using the regular licenses (JW_MAG_ST) of mag-
netic field static analysis (2D, 3D, axisymmetric).
CENSE_COUNT_DP cuted simultaneously using the regular licenses (JW_MAG_DPL) of mag-
netic field transient analysis (2D, axisymmetric).
CENSE_COUNT_TR cuted simultaneously using the regular licenses (JW_MAG_TR) of mag-
netic field transient analysis (3D).
CENSE_COUNT_FQ cuted simultaneously using the regular licenses (JW_MAG_FQ) of mag-
netic field frequency analysis (2D, 3D, axisymmetric).
CENSE_COUNT_LS cuted simultaneously using the regular licenses (JW_TOOL_LOSS) of
iron loss analysis.
CENSE_COUNT_HT cuted simultaneously using the regular licenses (JW_HEAT) of thermal
analysis (3D).
CENSE_COUNT_DS cuted simultaneously using the regular licenses (JW_DS) of structural anal-
ysis (2D, 3D).
CENSE_COUNT_EL cuted simultaneously using the regular licenses (JW_ELEC) of electric field
analysis (2D, 3D, axisymmetric).
CENSE_COUNT_PA2 cuted simultaneously using the regular licenses (JW_MAG_SMP) of the
parallel computing function.
The parallel computing function includes the following:
• Shared memory multiprocessing type (SMP)
• Massively parallel processing type (MPP)
• Hybrid type (SMP+MPP)
• Using the GPU (Graphics Processing Unit) via the previous GPU solver
CENSE_COUNT_RM cuted simultaneously using regular licenses for automatically generating
mesh via remote machines (JW_ACIS_REMOTE_MESH).
615
Operations
These are environment variables for using cache for calculations. For details, see “Using Cache for Cal-
culations with Environment Variables” on page 416.
JMAG_USE_CACHE Environment variable for using cache for calculations.
616
Adding Remote Machines and Job Scheduler System Settings on the

Local Machine
When using remote machines via SSH or computation nodes managed by a commercial job sched-
uler system to run analysis or generate mesh in JMAG, these remote machines and job scheduler
servers must be added to JMAG-Designer on the local machine.
The following two methods can be used:
• Adding from the JMAG-Designer [Preferences] dialog
• Adding from the command line
Set on the JMAG-Designer

1. Prepare a local machine.
i. When authenticating the SSH login using the key file, create the private key and pub-
lic key and transfer the public key to the remote machine.
2. Prepare a remote machine.
i. Install Bash if it is not installed on the remote machine.
ii. Check the following information.
• Host name or IP address
• SSH user name
• Login password for above SSH user:
This is used for SSH login using password authentication. Logging in with a passphrase is
not supported.
iii. When authenticating the SSH login using the key file, add the key transferred from
local machine.
iv. Install the same version of JMAG-Designer as the local machine.
3. Start JMAG-Designer on the local machine.
4. Set the remote machine using SSH.
i. From the menu bar, select [Tool] > [Preferences] to open the [Preferences] dialog.
ii. Click the [SSH] on the navigation bar to open the [SSH/Execution Script Settings] set-
ting panel.
iii. Click [Create] to open the [SSH/Execution Script Settings] dialog.
iv. Set remote machine settings and scripts used at job execution/canceling.
v. Click [Test Connection] to check that an SSH connection is possible between the local
and a remote machine.
The connection test result is displayed in a message dialog.
617
Operations
vi. Click [OK].

The [SSH/Execution Script Settings] setting panel in the [Preferences] dialog is displayed.
The settings performed in the [SSH/Execution Script Settings] dialog are added to the list in
the [SSH/Execution Script Settings] setting panel. When editing the setting, select it from the
list and click [Edit]. When deleting the setting, select it from the list and click [Delete].
vii.Click [OK].
MEMO Information for the remote machine set in the [SSH/Execution Script Settings] dialog
will be saved in the specified directory as a remote execution settings file (.xml). For details, see
Set from the Command Line

When using Linux in CUI mode (text mode), a remote machine connected via SSH and its execution
script, and a shell script for inputting jobs to a commercial scheduler can be set from the command
line.
MEMO Using the [Send the SSH Settings for this PC to the Remote Machine] option in the [Submit to
Queue] dialog, you can send the SSH settings on the local machine to the remote machine. Therefore,
there is no need to set a remote machine or commercial job scheduler system on the remote machine
using the command line.
MEMO Information for the remote machine set will be saved in the specified directory as a remote exe-
cution settings file (.xml). For details, see “Parameter Explanation Edition”.
Notes When Settings from the Command Line

• File paths need to be enclosed in double quotation marks (").
• When a command line and its arguments consists of two or more lines, enter a backslash (\) at
Setting Remote Machines and Shells

Execute the createSSH command. When this command is executed, the settings are saved on the
machine that executed it.
• Command (Linux):
(JMAG installation directory)/designer createSSH --title="SSH settings title"\
--address="hostname or IP address" --port="port number"\
--user="SSH login user name" --password="password"\
--keyfile="Private Key File path" --sh="RunJobScript path"\
--cancel_sh="CancelJobScript path" --path="Remote path" --job_control="on/off"\
--max_job="maximum number of jobs"
• Example 1 (Linux):
In this example, the same execution as when selecting [Remote Machine (SSH)] in the [SSH/
Execution Shell Settings] dialog occurs (this execution occurs when “--address” is included).
/home/jmag/works/designer createSSH --title="remotemachine"\
--address=10.10.10.10 --port="22" --user=user01 --password=aaaaa --sh="runjmag.sh"\
--cancel_sh="canceljmag.sh" -job_control=on -max_job=5
In this example, the same execution as when selecting [Local Machine] in the [SSH/Execution
Shell Settings] dialog occurs.
618
/home/jmag/works/designer createSSH --title="addjobtolsf"\

--sh="runjmag_lsf.sh" --cancel_sh="canceljmag_lsf.sh" -job_control=on
 createSSH command-line options

Option Argument Default Description
--title Title of the setting - Title of the setting.
If a setting with the same title exists, it will
be overwritten.
--address String - Host name or the IP address of the remote
machine (Example: MyPC, 192.0.2.0)
--port Real 22 Port ID to be used during data communi-
cation using SSH
--user String - SSH user name
--password String - Password
--keyfile String - Private key file (full path).
Both RSA keys and DSA keys are sup-
ported.
--sh String - Shell script to run a job (full path).
--cancel_sh String - Shell script to cancel a job (full path).
--path String - Location at which the computation execu-
tion directory is created on the remote
machine.
If “--path” is not set, create a subdirectory
for computation execution in the remote
user's home directory.
--job_control “on” or “off” on Flag to limit the maximum number of jobs
to run at the same time
It is possible to have multiple SSH connec-
tions at the same time so that many jobs
can be added. Prior to starting a job, the
number of simultaneous connections is
checked. If the number of simultaneous
connections exceeds the upper limit on the
remote machine, the connections are
shown as temporarily disabled.
• When “on” is selected, the number of
simultaneous jobs are limited. Specify
“max_job”.
• When “off” is selected, the number of
simultaneous jobs is not limited.
--max_job Integer 1 Maximum number of jobs to run at the
same time.
This option must be specified when “job_-
control=on”.
619
Operations
Exporting Settings
To export the settings of a remote machine and its shell script to a file, execute the exportSSH com-
mand. Only settings specified or all the settings can be exported.
(JMAG installation directory)/designer exportSSH "all or SSH settings title"\
"directory path"
In this example, all settings are exported to “/home/jmag/data”.
/home/jmag/works/designer/designer exportSSH all /home/jmag/data
In this example, the settings titled “remotemachine” are exported to “/home/jmag/data”.
/home/jmag/works/designer/designer exportSSH remotemachine /home/jmag/data
Importing Settings
To import the settings of a remote machine and its shell script from a file, execute the importSSH
command.
(JMAG installation directory)/designer importSSH "SSH settings file"
In this example, the settings titled “remotemachine” are imported.
/home/jmag/works/designer/designer importSSH remotemachine
Testing a Remote Machine Connection

To check whether an SSH connection is possible between a local machine and a remote machine, exe-
cute the connectTestSSH command. If the connection is successful, the message “Successfully con-
nected to the server” is displayed. If it fails, an error message such as “Not connected in a network
error” is displayed.
MEMO When this command is executed, the execution is the same as the execution when clicking [Test
Connection] in the [SSH/Execution Shell Settings] dialog.
(JMAG installation directory)/designer connectTestSSH "SSH settings title"
In this example, a connection test is performed on the “remotemachine” setting.
/home/jmag/works/designer/designer connectTestSSH remotemachine
Displaying a List of Settings

To display a list of the settings added to the machine used, execute the listSSH command.
(JMAG installation directory)/designer listSSH
620
Displaying the Details of Each Setting

To display the details of each setting added to the machine used, execute the displaySSH command.
(JMAG installation directory)/designer displaySSH "SSH settings title"
621
Operations
Using Remote Machine to Run Analysis and Generate Mesh

• Analysis That Cannot Be Run Using Remote Machines (page 622)
• Run Analysis and Mesh Generation from JMAG-Designer Using Remote Machines (page 623)
• Run Analysis from JMAG-Scheduler Using Remote Machines (page 624)
Analysis That Cannot Be Run Using Remote Machines

Analysis that cannot be run using Alternative methods, etc.
remote machines
Iron loss analysis studies Remote machines cannot be used for the calculations of iron
loss analysis studies, but they can be used for the calculations
of magnetic field analysis studies that are set with Iron Loss
conditions.
Studies referencing the result files (such Try one of the following methods:
as .jplot, .plot, .loss) of other studies • Add Study A and Study B to the same analysis group. Study
B refers to the result files of Study A. Set each condition and
function in Study B to reference a future result file that will
be output from Study A.
Example: Stress Distribution condition
• Place the result file to be referenced on the remote machine.

Set each condition and function to the absolute path of that
result file.
Studies using JMAG-RT Model com- Place the RTT file to be referenced on the remote machine,
ponents (studies referencing RTT files) then set the absolute path of that RTT file to the JMAG-RT
Model component.
Resuming the calculations of studies There are no alternative methods in this particular situation.
that were run using remote machines When the [Submit to Queue] dialog is used for settings for
resuming calculations as well as the settings for remote
machines, the results from before resuming the calculations
will be deleted and the calculations for the study will start
over.
622
Run Analysis and Mesh Generation from JMAG-Designer Using Remote Machines
 Remote execution of analysis
1. Start JMAG-Designer and open a project file.

2. Do one of the following:
• To run an active case in a study:
In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click the study and select [Submit Active Case to Queue].
• To run all cases in a study:
In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click the study and select [Submit All Cases to Queue].
• To run an active case of an analysis group:
In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click the analysis group and select [Submit Active Case to
Queue].
• To run all cases in an analysis group:
In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click the analysis group and select [Submit All Cases to
Queue].
• To run all cases in a model:
In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click the model and select [Submit All Studies to Queue].
• To run all cases in a project:
In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click the project and select [Submit All Models to
Queue].
3. In the [Submit to Queue] or [Submit Multiple Studies] dialog, select the remote
machine, CPU node, or job scheduler server to be used from the [Machine (Server)] list.
In [Machine (Server)], the remote machine and job scheduler server settings are displayed in the
name added in the [Title] box of the [SSH/Execution Shell Setting] dialog.
MEMO If the remote machine that you set is not displayed in the [Machine (Server)] list, restart
JMAG-Designer or JMAG-Scheduler.
4. Make any other necessary settings.
To manage jobs using the JobSystem, select [Manage Jobs Using JMAG Job System].
 Remote execution of optimization calculation

When running optimization calculation using a remote machine, select the remote machine, CPU
node, or job scheduler server to be used from the [Machine (Server)] list in the [Running] tab of the
[Optimization] dialog.
Two types of jobs can be run with topology optimization:
• Optimization control job:
Generating case with genetic algorithm and JCF file output of the generated case.
• Analysis jobs:
Analysis is run for each case with the solver program.
This job uses a solver license (for example, JW_MAG_ST or JW_MAG_ST_MULTI).
When running the two types of jobs in different remote machines, select [Submit Job Using Differ-
ent Machine Settings] in the [Run] tab.
The remote machine to use for running the optimization control job can be selected in the [Submit
to Queue] dialog that is displayed when clicking [Submit].
623
Operations
 Remote execution of mesh generation

When generating mesh with a remote machine, the JW_ACIS_REMOTE_MESH license is
required.
For procedures, see the description in “Generating Mesh in Solid Models or Region Models” on
page 380.
Run Analysis from JMAG-Scheduler Using Remote Machines

2. From the menu bar, select [Job] > [Add Job].
3. In the [Add Job] dialog, select the input file (.jcf, .jproj) and click [Open].
4. In the [Submit to Queue] or [Submit Multiple Studies] dialog, select the remote
machine, CPU node, or job scheduler server to be used from the [Machine (Server)] list.
The remote machine is displayed in the [Machine (Server)] list of the [Submit to Queue] dialog
in the name entered in the [Title] box of the [SSH/Execution Script Settings] dialog.
MEMO If the remote machine that you set is not displayed in the [Machine Name (Server Name)]
list, restart JMAG-Designer or JMAG-Scheduler.
5. Make any other necessary settings.
To manage jobs using the JobSystem, select [Manage Jobs Using JMAG Job System].
624
Multiple Calculations
(Parametric Analysis and Optimization)
Running Calculations of Multiple Cases with Some
Parameters as Variables
This chapter explains the procedure for running a parametric analysis.

The parametric analysis is used to obtain multiple results from a single study by changing one or more parame-
ters, and evaluate the effect of the change of parameters on the results.
For example, if the number of turns in coils is set every 20 turns between 50 and 110 turns, four cases are added
to the study of the existing motor model. The effect of changing the number of turns on the results can be eval-
uated.
Base model CASE_8 70 turns
8 ohm
650 r/min
CASE_1 50 turns
6 ohm
600 r/min
CASE_2 70 turns
6 ohm
600 r/min CASE_5 70 turns CASE_9 70 turns
8 ohm 8 ohm
600 r/min 700 r/min
CASE_3 90 turns
CASE_4 110 turns 6 ohm
6 ohm 600 r/min CASE_6 70 turns
600 r/min 9 ohm
600 r/min
CASE_7 70 turns
10 ohm
600 r/min
Example
The results obtained from each parameter setting can be viewed in one graph.
The parameter that varies with each case to evaluate its effect on the result is called “design parameter” and the
real value that defines the physical quantity to evaluate in each case is called “response value” in the following
descriptions.
MEMO Parametric analyses can be run from the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog. The input parameters of a study
can be confirmed in a single window in the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog. For details, see “Input Parameter and
Result Items List Display” on page 725.

• The Basic Procedure for Parametric Analysis (page 629)
• Selecting Parameters Having Values That Will Be Changed (Selecting Design Variables) (page 630)
• Assigning Values to Design Variables and Creating Multiple Cases (page 634)
• Running Analyses on Multiple Cases (page 635)
• Checking Results of Multiple Cases (page 636)
• Filtering Cases with Specified Condition (page 637)
627
Operations

• Creating Vector Response Values (page 639)
• Creating Response Graphs from Response Values (page 641)
628
Running Calculations of Multiple Cases with Some Parameters as Variables
The Basic Procedure for Parametric Analysis

1. Create a base model for parametric analysis.
i. Prepare a model.
ii. Create a study and set materials and conditions.
The study used for parametric analysis is the same as that used for ordinary computations.
See references such as JMAG's “Self Learning System” learning program.
MEMO Some parameters of materials and conditions do not allow design variables in consider-
ation of calculation accuracy and convergence. They are not displayed in the [Select CAD Param-
eters] dialog and the [Select Parameters] dialog described later.
MEMO When using a table type parameter as a design variable, create only the needed number
of data tables that will be used.
2. Determine design variables.
Parameters whose values will be changed in a parametric analysis and optimization are called
“design variables”. See “Selecting Parameters Having Values That Will Be Changed (Selecting
Design Variables)” on page 630.
3. Specify one or more design variable value and create a case for each value.
See “Assigning Values to Design Variables and Creating Multiple Cases” on page 634.
4. Run analyses on the multiple cases that were created.
See “Running Analyses on Multiple Cases” on page 635.
5. Display the Results of multiple cases.
See “Checking Results of Multiple Cases” on page 636.
6. Create response values from the results data.
See “Creating Scalar Response Values” on page 638 and “Creating Vector Response Values”
on page 639.
7. Create a response graph using the response values.
See “Creating Response Graphs from Response Values” on page 641.
629
Operations
Selecting Parameters Having Values That Will Be Changed

(Selecting Design Variables)
Parameters whose values will be changed are called “design variables”. Parameters to be used as
design variables must be specified beforehand.
• Use Parameters as Design Variables (page 630)
• Use Dimension Values as Design Variables (page 631)
• Use Part Materials as Design Variables (page 632)
• Use Material Properties as Design Variables (page 632)
Use Parameters as Design Variables

Use the following process when using parameters classified into conditions, circuits, study proper-
ties, mesh properties, and the material properties of each part as design variables:
1. Select the parameters to use as design variables.

i. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click [Case Control].
ii. Click [Select Parameters].
iii. In the [Select Parametric Parameters] dialog, the input parameters are displayed in
the tree.
Select the checkboxes for the parameters to be used as design variables.
Additionally, double-click the variable name cells and input the variable names.
For the variable names, enter a unique string consisting of half-width alphanumeric charac-
ters and the under-score (_) character.
iv. Click [OK].
MEMO When clicking [OK (Open Generate Parametric Cases)] or [OK (Open Design Table)],
you will be taken to a different dialog.
2. When determining the values of design variables from an optional expressions, or defin-
ing the relationships between design variables using expressions, define the expressions
in the [Equations] dialog.
ii. Click [Equations].
iii. In the [Equations] dialog, click [Add].
iv. In the [Edit Equation] dialog, define the expression.
v. Click [OK].
The defined expressions are displayed in the [Equations] dialog.
MEMO When an equation is selected from the list and [Modify] or [Remove] is clicked, the
equation can be changed or deleted.
vi. Click [OK].
630
Use Dimension Values as Design Variables

Use the following process when using dimension values such as length and angles as design variables:
1. When using dimension variables other than input parameters as design variables, set
constraints to locations to be used as design variables in Geometry Editor.
The extrude feature [Height] and the rotation extrude feature [Angle], etc., are input parameters,
and therefore do not require constraint settings.
For example, set the distance constraint as shown in the lower left figure. The constraints set in
Geometry Editor are displayed in the [Select CAD Parameters] dialog as shown in the lower right
figure.
2. Import the CAD parameters used as design variables into JMAG-Designer.

Design variables are parameters that are changeable analysis values.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, under a study, right-click [CAD Parameter].
ii. Click [Edit].
MEMO If a [Warning] dialog opens and a message appears reporting that the CAD link is not
established, click [Restore CAD Link]. After the link with Geometry Editor or CAD software is
established, the [Dimension List] dialog is displayed.
iii. In the [Select CAD Parameters] dialog, select the checkboxes for CAD parameters to
be used as design variables.
Additionally, double-click the variable name cells and input the variable names.
ters and the under-score (_) character. Optionally, select the following item:
• [Treat Changes In Topology As Geometry Errors (Part, Face, Edge, Vertex)] (or [Treat
Changes In Topology As Geometry Errors (Part, Edge, Vertex)])
• [Update Case Values with Geometry Adjusted Values]
MEMO CAD parameters can be filtered by using [Look For].
iv. Click [OK].

CAD parameters imported into JMAG-Designer are displayed under [CAD Parameters] in
MEMO When clicking [OK (Open Parametric Parameters)], [OK (Open Generate Parametric
Cases)] or [OK (Open Design Table)], you will be taken to a different dialog.
MEMO Dimensional parameters with checkboxes selected in the [Select CAD Parameters] dialog
also have checkboxes selected in the [Select Parameters] dialog.
3. If necessary, add a part volume (or a surface area, an edge length) as a design variable to
a study.
631
Operations
This setting is useful when wanting to change the value of a parameter in response to geometry
changes in parametric analysis or optimization.
ii. Click [Add Measurements].
iii. In the [Add Measurements] setting panel, define variables.
iv. Click [OK].
The added variables are displayed under [Measurement] in the [Project Manager] tree.
[Edit] and [Delete] are displayed as menus after right-clicking one of these variables.
MEMO If a study has results, then the measurement variables in the study cannot be deleted.
Use Part Materials as Design Variables

Use the following process when using materials applied to parts as design variables:
1. Register material data to bookmarks to be used as values for design variables, or add to
[Materials] in the [Project Manager] tree.
Adding a material data to a bookmark:

i. In the [Materials] tab of [Toolbox], right-click a material data.
ii. Select [Add to Bookmarks].
Adding a material data to a study:

i. In the [Materials] tab of [Toolbox], select a material data.
ii. Drag and drop this material data to under [Materials] in the [Project Manager] tree.
2. Select materials to be used as design variables in the [Select Parameters] dialog.

For details, see the process “Use Parameters as Design Variables” on page 630.
Use Material Properties as Design Variables

Use the following process when using material property parameters as design variables (input param-
eters that can be set in the [Material Editor] dialog), such as magnetic properties, electric properties,
thermal properties, mechanical properties, and iron loss settings:
632
1. Select material property parameters that can be used as design variables.

ii. Click [Select Material Attribute].
iii. In the [Select Material Attribute] dialog, select the checkboxes of the material prop-
erty parameters to be used as design variables.
iv. Click [OK].
2. In the [Select Parameters] dialog, select the material property parameter selected in
Step 1.
For details, see the process “Use Parameters as Design Variables” on page 630.
633
Operations
Assigning Values to Design Variables and Creating Multiple Cases

Assign the value of the design variable and create a case for each value. When there is more than one
design variable, a case with a combination of values is created.
1. In the [Generate Parametric Cases] dialog, decide the value of the design variable and
create a case for each value.
ii. Click [Create Cases].
The [Generate Parametric Cases] dialog is displayed. A list of design variables specified in the
study is displayed.
iii. Select [Type] and click [Edit]. Since a different dialog opens depending on [Type], set
the parameters and click [OK].
iv. In the [Generate Parametric Cases] dialog, confirm the setting of each design vari-
able.
The lower part of the [Generate Parametric Cases] dialog shows the number of cases created
from combinations of each of the design variable values.
v. Click [Generate].
The [Design Table] dialog is displayed.
2. Check the cases created in the [Design Table] dialog.
The [Design Table] dialog cannot only be opened from the [Generate Parametric Cases] dialog,
but also from the following procedure:
ii. Click [Design Table].
iii. Check the cases in the [Design Table] dialog.
In the [Design Table] dialog, the case number, label, geometry status, group to which it
belongs, and values of the design variables are displayed for each case.
3. Click [OK].
4. When creating multiple cases different in CAD parameter value, geometry of each case
can be checked by switching display case in graphics window using the case control bar.
MEMO When the window synchronization option for Geometry Editor is enabled, changing the
display case on the JMAG-Designer also changes the display case on the Geometry Editor.
634
Running Analyses on Multiple Cases

There are methods to run analysis from JMAG-Designer, JMAG-Scheduler, the command line, and
others. For details, see “Running Analyses from JMAG-Designer” on page 415, “Running Analyses
from JMAG-Scheduler” on page 425, and “Running Analyses from the Command Line” on page
437.
 Running using JMAG-Designer
Run all cases in a study

In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click the study and select [Run All Cases].
Run all cases in a model

In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click the model and select [Run All Studies].
 Running using JMAG-Scheduler

When running using JMAG-Scheduler, operations can be performed in JMAG-Designer during
analysis. You can also run the analysis using remote machines.
MEMO Only cases whose checkboxes are selected in the table in the [Design Table] dialog will be exe-
cuted.
MEMO If an analysis is run using JMAG-Scheduler, the result data from the result file has to be manu-
ally loaded into the project.
Batch run all cases in a study

In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click the study and select [Submit All Cases to Queue].
Batch run all cases in a model

In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click the model and select [Submit All Studies to Queue].
Batch run all cases in a project

In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click the project and select [Submit All Models to Queue].
635
Operations
Checking Results of Multiple Cases

1. Open a project that includes multiple case studies.
2. When running analysis of multiple cases from JMAG-Scheduler, the results of all cases
are imported.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click the study to which a case is imported.
ii. Select [Check Results for All Cases].
The results of all cases created by the optimization are imported into the study.
iii. From the menu bar, select [File] > [Save].
Save the project with the case imported.
 Displaying the results of one case in a graph

Display history graph as an example.
1. In the [Case Control] toolbar, select the case.

3. Select (physical quantity name)> [Show].
 Displaying the results of multiple cases in one graph

Display history graph as an example. In addition to history graphs, you can check the results of mul-
tiple cases with a single graph by using probe graphs, section graphs, calculation results, and so on.

2. Select (physical quantity name)> [Show All Cases].
MEMO The custom filter can be used to display a graph created from the result of filtering more
than one specified case. For details see “Filtering Cases with Specified Condition” on page 637.
636
Filtering Cases with Specified Condition

Conditions can be created to extract specific cases from a number of cases and the cases that match
these conditions can be added to the study. (custom filter function). The filter definition added to
the study can be used from the following dialogs and menus:
• Display Graph
• The [Response Table] dialog
• The [Response Graph] dialog
• The [Look For] box in the [All Cases Result Review] dialog
1. Add the custom filter to a study or analysis group.

i. In the [Project Manager] tree, under the study > [Results] or [Result Items], right-
click [Filter].
Or, under the analysis group, right-click [Filter].
ii. Select [New Filter].
iii. In the [Filter Definition] dialog, set extraction conditions.
iv. Click [OK] to close the [Filter Definition] dialog.
The filter definition is added in [Filter] under [Results] in the [Project Manager] tree.
Right-clicking [Filter Definition] will display [Edit], [Duplicate], [Delete] in the menu.
2. Display results using the custom filter.
The following is an example:
Display the result of extracted cases in one graph:

ii. Select (Result Physical Quantity) > [Specify Filter and Display] > (filter name).
The [Graph] dialog is displayed.
637
Operations
Creating Scalar Response Values

Calculate the response value which is one real value from the physical quantity output as the result
of each case.
1. Create response values.

The response values can be created in the [Create Response Graph Data] dialog.
Here, the [Create Response Graph Data] dialog is displayed from the [Calculation] menu of the
[Graph] dialog.
ii. Select (physical quantity name)> [Show].
For example, select [Torque] > [Torque] as indicated in the figure below.
iii. In the [Graph] dialog, select [Calculation] > [Response Graph Data].
MEMO When the data is from the same study and the same result, the data will be displayed in
the menu as one even if the case is different.
iv. In the [Create Response Graph Data] dialog, set the parameters.
v. Click [OK].
vi. In the [Table] dialog, click [Register as Response Data].
The response values are added under [Response Graph] > [Response Data] in the [Project
Manager] tree.
vii.To export response value results data for all cases to file (.csv, .txt, .html), click
[Export All].
The [Export Data] dialog is displayed. Specify the file name, file type, and destination folder
and click [Save].
638
Creating Vector Response Values

Extract vector data from the result data and add the values as variables. Use the variables to create
vector expressions.
1. Extract vector data from the result data and add it as a variable.
Vector data can be created in the [Create Vector Expression Data] dialog.
Here, the [Create Vector Expression Data] dialog is displayed from the [Calculation] menu in
the [Graph] dialog
ii. Select (physical quantity name)> [Show].
For example, select [Torque] > [Show] as indicated in the figure below.
iii. In the [Graph] dialog, select [Calculation]> [Vector Data].

MEMO When the data is from the same study and the results are the same, it is displayed in the
menu as one data even if the cases are different.
iv. In the [Create Vector Expression Data] dialog, set variables for vector expressions.
v. Click [OK].
The vector data added to the study is displayed under [Response Graph] > [Vector Expres-
sions] in the [Project Manager] tree.
2. Create vector expressions using vector data.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, under [Results] > [Response Graph], right-click [Vector
Expressions].
ii. Select [Create].
iii. In the [Edit Expression] dialog, define expressions.
iv. Click [OK].
The created vector expression is displayed under [Response Graph] > [Vector Expressions] in
3. Create response values by using the result data of vector expressions.
An example of the procedure is shown below.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, under [Results] > [Response Graph] > [Vector Expres-
sions], right-click a vector expression.
ii. Select [View] > [Show].
A graph of the selected item is displayed in the [Graph] dialog.
639
Operations
iii. In the [Graph] dialog, select [Calculation] > [Response Graph Data].
iv. In the [Response Graph Data] dialog, set the parameters and click [OK].
The response values are added under [Response Graph] > [Response Data] in the [Project
Manager] tree.
640
Creating Response Graphs from Response Values

The change in response values can be checked against the design variables on the graph.
1. If necessary, create a calculation expression to be used in the X-axis and Y-axis of the
response graph.
i. Right-click [Response Data] under [Response Graph] in the [Project Manager] tree.
ii. Select [Create Expression].
iii. In the [Edit Expression] dialog, define expressions.
iv. Click [OK].
The created expressions is added under [Response Graph] > [Response Data] in the [Project
Manager] tree.
Also, the expressions created on [X-axis] and [Y axis] in the [Response Graph] dialog will be
displayed.
2. Create a response graph.
i. Right-click [Graphs] under [Response Graph] in the [Project Manager] tree.
ii. Select [Generate].
iii. In the [Response Graph] dialog, set the graph.
iv. Click [OK].
The [Graph] dialog opens and the response graph is displayed.
The created formula is added under [Response Graph] > [Graph] in the [Project Manager]
tree. Right-clicking the response graph displays a menu with [Show], [Edit], [Edit Descrip-
tion], [Duplicate], [Delete].
3. Check the response graph.
641
Operations
642
Formulating Objective-Based Optimal Designs
In this section the procedure for performing optimization is described.

Optimization is a function to produce a design in which objective functions using one or more design variables
are optimized by varying the design variable values.
For example, an optimization function could be used to find the values for current phase and magnet width to
achieve an optimization given the objectives of torque ripple minimization and average torque maximization. In
this example, current phase and magnet width are design variables, torque ripple and average torque are response
values, and the objective functions are for torque ripple minimization and average torque maximization.
MEMO For details on optimization calculation methods and other details, please refer to the “User’s Manual of Opti-
mization in JMAG”. This manual can be obtained from the JMAG-Designer download page.

• The Basic Procedure for Optimization (page 644)
• Selecting Parameters Having Values That Will Be Changed (Selecting Design Variables) (page 649)
• Running Optimizations (page 650)
• Checking Optimization Results (page 654)
• Resuming Optimizations (page 657)
• Recreating Calculation Case of Topology Optimization (page 659)
643
Operations
The Basic Procedure for Optimization

The following optimization problems can be performed in JMAG:
• Parameter optimization:
An optimization that uses parameters such as dimensions, input current, drive speed, and mate-
rial characteristics as design variables.
• Topology optimization:
An optimization that uses design region topology (form) design variables. In topology optimiza-
tion, various forms are realized by materials being arranged in a design region.
• Topology optimization (sensitivity analysis):
This is an optimization using design region material density design variables. The degree of
influence (sensitivity) of design variables for objective functions can be evaluated. Compared to
normal topology optimization, objective functions are limited to certain types, but calculation
convergence is fast and solutions can be obtained with a small number of cases.
Execute Parameter Optimization

1. Create a base model for optimization.
i. Create a new study.
ii. Set materials, conditions, the properties of studies, and generate meshes, as with
normal analysis.
2. Determine design variables.
i. Select parameters to be used as design variables.
Design variable are parameters whose value can be changed, such as cad parameters, current
values, and material types.
See “Selecting Parameters Having Values That Will Be Changed (Selecting Design Vari-
ables)” on page 649.
3. Set the parameters for an optimization and run it.
See “Running Optimizations” on page 650.
i. Open the [Optimization] dialog.
ii. Set the range of values of design variables in the [Constraint Conditions] tab.
iii. Define the response values and objective values in the [Objective Functions] tab.
iv. Set the case to be the initial population in the [Initial Cases] tab.
v. Select an optimization engine in the [Options] tab.
[Quadratic Response Surface], [Genetic Algorithm], [Multi-Objective Genetic Algorithm],
or [MATLAB Global Optimization] can be selected.
644
vi. From the [Output] tab, specify the output path to the CSV file where the objective
function values in each case is output and the output path to the restart file, as nec-
essary.
vii.Set execution methods of optimization jobs in the [Running] tab.
viii.Execute optimization.
4. Check the optimization results.
See “Check Parameter Optimization/Topology Optimization Results” on page 654.
• Response values table
• Correlation matrix
• Response Graph
5. If necessary, change the value of parameters and re-run the optimization.
See “Resuming Optimizations” on page 657.
Execute Topology Optimization

1. Create a base model for optimization and specify a design region.
ii. Edit the geometry so that the design region consists of multiple parts of differing
materials.
The design region is the region to search for an optimal geometry.
For example, when considering the optimal solution for a design region from three materials
(air, magnetic material 1, and magnetic material 2), divide the design region into three parts
and apply the material to each part.
See the description of Topology Optimization conditions for this procedure.
iii. Set Topology Optimization conditions in a study.
In the Topology Optimization condition, set the design region and the smoothing filter.
iv. Set materials, conditions, and study properties, and perform mesh generation the
same as in a regular analysis.
The topology optimization functions have limitations. Carefully review the optimization
notes and the descriptions of Topology Optimization conditions in “Parameter Explanation
Edition”.
MEMO When performing distributed processing for multiple cases on multiple machines, it may
take some time to transfer results files. By performing the following settings in the [Output Con-
trol] setting panel in the [Study Properties] dialog before analysis execution is performed, the size
and number of results files are reduced, and the time required for file transfer and overall compu-
tation time can be reduced.
• Select [Output Table Results Only. (No Mesh will be output)].
• Clear unnecessary physical quantity outputs in [Output Results].
2. Set the optimization parameters and execute.
645
Operations
ii. Under the [Objective Functions] tab, define response value variables and objective
functions.
iii. Under the [Options] tab, select an optimization engine.
When using only one objective function, select [Genetic Algorithm (Topology)].
When using multiple objective functions, select either [Multi-Objective Genetic Algorithm
(Topology)] or [Multi-Objective Genetic Algorithm (Topology, Used until V20.0)].
iv. From the [Output] tab, specify the output path to the CSV file where the objective
function values in each case is output and the output path to the CSV file where
Gaussian weight is calculated, as necessary.
v. Under the [Running] tab, set for example the optimization job execution method.
vi. Execute optimization.
3. Check the optimization results.
See “Check Parameter Optimization/Topology Optimization Results” on page 654.
• Response table
• Correlation matrix
• Response graph
4. To resume optimization, change the parameter value and rerun the optimization.
5. When recalculating the calculation case created by optimization calculation, use the
weight CSV file to recreate the calculation case.
See “Recreating Calculation Case of Topology Optimization” on page 659.
Execute Topology Optimization (Sensitivity Analysis)

1. Create a topology optimization (sensitivity analysis) base model and specify a design
region.
ii. Edit the geometry so that the design region consists of multiple parts of differing
materials.
The design region is the region to search for an optimal geometry.
For example, when considering the optimal solution for a design region from three materials
(air, magnetic material 1, and magnetic material 2), divide the design region into three parts
and apply the material to each part.
iii. Perform Topology Optimization (Sensitivity Analysis) condition settings in the study.
In the Topology Optimization (Sensitivity Analysis) condition, set the initial values for both
the design region, as well as the material density to be applied to the nodes in that design
region.
iv. Perform settings for sets, mesh groups, or conditions used for setting objective func-
tions or constraints.
• Perform a set or mesh group settings to use the following objective functions or con-
straints:
646
[Magnetic Flux Density], [Magnetic Energy], [Eddy Current Density], [Magnetic Flux
Density Squared], [Mean Compliance], [Volume], [Stress], or magnetization direction
• Perform [Torque: Nodal Force] condition settings to use the following objective func-
tions:
[Torque] or [Torque Ripple]
• Perform Magnetic Flux condition settings to use the following objective functions:
[Flux]
• Perform [Force: Nodal Force] condition settings to use the following objective functions:
[Electromagnetic Force]
• Perform FEM Coil condition or FEM Conductor condition settings to use the following
objective functions:
[Inductance]
MEMO [Mean Compliance] is the amount of area integration of the product of load and dis-
placement.
v. The same as in a regular analysis, perform material, condition, and study property
settings, and perform mesh generation.
Select [Initial Magnetization] in the [Output Control] setting panel in the [Study Properties]
dialog, when making the magnetization direction an objective function. With this setting, the
magnetization direction of the magnet in each case can be checked after the optimization.
Topology optimization (sensitivity analysis) functions have some limitations. Carefully check
the notes on optimization and the description on the Topology Optimization (Sensitivity
Analysis) condition in “Parameter Explanation Edition”.
MEMO When performing distributed processing for multiple cases on multiple machines, it may
take some time to transfer results files. By performing the following settings in the [Output Con-
trol] setting panel in the [Study Properties] dialog before analysis execution is performed, the size
and number of results files are reduced, and the time required for file transfer and overall compu-
tation time can be reduced.
• Select [Output Table Results Only. (No Mesh will be output)].
2. Set optimization parameters and execute.
ii. Under the [Objective Functions] tab, define the objective functions to use.
iii. Under the [Options] tab, select [Sensitivity Analysis] for [Optimization Engine].
iv. From the [Output] tab, specify the output path to the CSV file where the objective
function values in each case is output.
To check objective function values in each case after a topology optimization (sensitivity anal-
ysis), set the CSV file path. The objective function values for each case in a topology optimi-
zation (sensitivity analysis) cannot be checked in JMAG-Designer.
v. Under the [Running] tab, set for example an optimization job execution method.
vi. Execute optimization.
3. Check the topology optimization (sensitivity analysis) results.
See “Checking Optimization Results” on page 654.
4. If necessary, change the parameter values and re-execute the optimization.
647
Operations
648
Selecting Parameters Having Values That Will Be Changed

(Selecting Design Variables)
Parameters whose values will be changed are called “design variable.” Parameters to be used as design
variables must be specified beforehand.
The method of selecting design variables is the same as for parametric analysis. For details, see
“Selecting Parameters Having Values That Will Be Changed (Selecting Design Variables)” on
page 630.
649
Operations
Running Optimizations
For each parameter used for optimization, it is necessary to specify the range in which to search for
the optimum value. These settings are performed in the [Optimization] dialog.
1. Open the [Optimization] dialog.

i. In the [Project Manager] tree, under a study or an analysis group > study, right-click
[Case Control].
ii. Select [Optimization].
The [Optimization] dialog can also be opened by clicking the shortcut icon .
2. Set the range of values of design variables in the [Constraint Conditions] tab.
i. Click the [Constraint Conditions] tab.
Design variables are displayed in the upper half and constraints are shown in the lower half.
ii. Input [Variable], [Min], and [Max] of each design variable displayed in [Parametric
Variable Range].
A range of values of the design variable is defined.
MEMO Clear the checkboxes on the left side of the table for design variables for whose current
case values are to be used and not changed during optimization processing. The [Max] and [Min]
settings become unnecessary.
iii. If necessary, set the constraints for parametric variables. Click [Add] under [Paramet-
ric Variable Constraints].
The [Edit Expression] dialog is displayed. In this dialog, expressions can be used to limit the
values of design variables. For example, suppose that the design variable “aa” is suppressed to
1/2 or less of the design variable “bb”, and becomes “aa/bb <= 0.5”.
MEMO The expression of the constraint conditions can also be edited with the following proce-
dure.
• Right-click the constraint condition displayed under [Response Data] in the [Project Manager]
tree, and select [Edit].
iv. Set the parameters.
v. Click [OK].
The expression you created appears in the [Optimization] dialog.
3. Set the response values to be used in the objective function in the [Objective Functions]
tab. In addition, the objective function (optimization target) is defined using the
response value that was set.
Parameter optimization and topology optimization:

Create a response value that is one real value from physical quantities output as the result of each
case (“simple average of torque”, “maximum value of Joule loss”, etc.).
Set one or multiple optimization targets by using those response values (“response value A
becomes minimum value”, “response value B becomes 10 or less”, etc.).
650
i. Click the [Objective Functions] tab.

Response values and objective functions are displayed in the upper and lower halves of the tab
respectively.
ii. To create response values from JMAG parameters, click [Add] under the [Response
Data Variables] table.
To create response values from Python scripts, click [Add (From Script)] under the
[Response Data Variables] table.
iii. Set the parameters for creating response values with the [Create Response Graph
Data] dialog.
Add Python scripts for creating response values with the [Create Response Value
From Script] dialog.
iv. Click [OK].
The response values added to the table are displayed.
To edit or delete response values, select a response value from the table and click [Modify] or
[Remove].
v. Click [Add] in [Objective Functions].
vi. In the [Edit Expression] dialog, set objective function parameters.
vii.Click [OK].
The created expression is added to the [Optimization] dialog.
viii.If necessary, enter the weight of each objective function in the [Weight] cell.
Weight is set to adjust the priority of multiple objective functions.
Topology optimization (sensitivity analysis):

As objective functions, specify which physical quantities at which locations are to be evaluated,
and how they are to be evaluated (maximization/minimization or restriction).
i. Click [Add] under [Objective Functions].
An objective function is added to the table.
ii. Perform objective function parameter settings.
iii. Select [Optimize the Magnetization Direction] to make the magnetization direction
and magnitude of the magnet an objective function in the magnetic field analysis.
iv. Click [Add] to add a new objective function to the table and set its details.
4. Under the [Initial Cases] tab, select an initial case for the optimization.
Select cases to use for initial individuals in an optimization. When automatically generating a
case as an initial individual the generation method can be selected. An existing case can also be
used as an initial individual.
5. Set the kind, method, and parameter of the optimization engine used in the [Options]
tab.
651
Operations
6. From the [Output] tab, specify the output path to the CSV file and restart file where the
case results are output.
7. In the [Running] tab, specify the execution method of the job for each case of optimiza-
tion, the machine that performs optimization control, and whether check geometry at
job execution time.
An “Optimization controller” uses an optimization engine to generate new cases based on the
results of each case in the [Optimization] dialog settings.
Cases created by optimization control are executed on each machine as jobs.
8. Click [Check] and check that the settings are correct.
If there is a mistake in setting, the [Input Error] dialog is displayed. Check that the displayed
message and data are correct.
9. Click [Run] or [Submit] at the bottom of the [Optimize] dialog to execute the optimiza-
tion.
• When [Run in Foreground] is selected under [Optimization Controller] in the [Running]
tab, the [Run] button is displayed.
• When [Submit Job Using Same Machine Settings as Analysis Jobs] is selected under [Optimi-
zation Controller] in the [Running] tab, the [Submit] button is displayed.
When clicking [Submit], a message displays asking whether or not to save the project, so
optionally click either [Yes] or [No].
A JPROJ file is added to the launched instance of JMAG-Scheduler as a job, and the optimi-
zation begins automatically.
• When [Submit Job Using Different Machine Settings (Submit Dialog will be Shown)] is
selected under [Optimization Controller] in the [Running] tab, the [Submit...] button is dis-
played.
Clicking [Submit...] opens the [Submit to Queue] dialog. In this dialog, apply settings for the
machine running the optimization controller.
Clicking [Submit Job] displays a message prompting the user whether or not to save the proj-
ect currently being displayed. Select either [Yes] or [No].
A JPROJ file is added to the launched instance of JMAG-Scheduler as a job, and the optimi-
zation begins automatically.
10.Check the progress status of the optimization and the occurrence status of the error.
• When an optimization is executed in the foreground (when [Run in Foreground] is selected
under [Optimization Controller] in the [Running] tab):
It can be checked in the [Optimization] dialog and [Run Analysis] dialog displayed after
clicking [Run].
• In the [Run Analysis] dialog, the progress of each job is displayed.
• The [Optimization] dialog shows the execution status of the case, the target values and
their tabs. The minimum value, maximum value and convergence status graph of the tar-
get value are displayed on each tab. For multi-objective optimization, a convergence status
graph is displayed on a tab different for each target value.
• When an optimization is executed in the background (when [Submit Job Using Same
Machine Settings as Analysis Jobs] or [Submit Job Using Different Machine Settings] is
selected under [Optimization Controller] in the [Running] tab):
• The progress status can be confirmed using the CSV file output to the path specified
under [CSV Output] in the [Output] tab.
652
• The error occurrence status can be confirmed using a Log file. The Log file can be
exported to the specified location using the “-l” option when launching JMAG-Designer
from the command line. For “-l” option, see “Screen Configuration Edition”.
• When batch execution for optimization is performed using only the local machine, the calcu-
lation will not proceed unless 2 or more is specified in the [Simultaneous Number of Jobs] box
of JMAG-Scheduler [Setting Number of Jobs] dialog. This is because “optimization control” is
counted as one job and “calculation of job” is counted as one job.
To edit the [Simultaneous Number of Jobs] value, select [Setting] > [Number of Jobs] from
the menu bar in the JMAG-Scheduler main window. The [Setting Number of Jobs] dialog is
displayed.
MEMO If topology optimization (sensitivity analysis) is performed in the foreground, the [Load Topol-
ogy Optimization Results] dialog appears after the computing is completed. Specify the range of cases to
import into the study and click [OK].
653
Operations
Checking Optimization Results

MEMO See following pages for details.
• “Checking Results of Multiple Cases” on page 636
• “Creating Scalar Response Values” on page 638
• “Creating Response Graphs from Response Values” on page 641
Check Parameter Optimization/Topology Optimization Results

1. Open a project that includes an optimization study.
2. When parameter optimizations were run from JMAG-Scheduler, cases generated during
a calculation and theirs results need to be manually imported into the study.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, select and right-click the study to import a case to.
ii. Select [Check for New Cases].
The case created is imported into the study. The [Check for New Cases] dialog appears, and
the number of imported cases is displayed.
iii. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click the study to which a case is imported.
iv. Select [Check Results for All Cases].
The results of all cases created by the optimization are imported into the study.
v. From the menu bar, select [File] > [Save].
Save the project with the case imported.
3. When topology optimizations were run from JMAG-Scheduler, results of cases gener-
ated during a calculation need to be manually imported into the study.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click the study in which to load cases.
ii. Select [Load Topology Optimization Results].
iii. In the [Load Topology Optimization Results] dialog, specify the cases to be loaded,
and click [OK].
iv. If necessary, from the menu bar, select [File] > [Save].
Save the project after the cases have been loaded.
For a study in which topology optimization results are being loaded, the [Save Topology
Optimization Results] dialog is displayed.
IMPORTANT From the selection made in the [Save Topology Optimization Results]
dialog, cases not yet loaded may be deleted.
4. Display the response table.
The case ID, response value, and objective function value of each calculation case are displayed
in the [Response Table].
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, under [Response Graph], right-click [Response Data]
and select [View Response Table].
The [Response Table] dialog is displayed. Each column of the dialog displays the response
value of each case and the value of the objective function.
MEMO By clicking the title of each column, the case can be sorted by the value of that column.
654
MEMO The sorted columns can be restored by selecting [Reset Sort] from the menu displayed by
right-clicking the table.
ii. Click [Close].
5. Display correlation matrix as necessary.
The correlation matrix of each calculated case result can be displayed.
and select [View Correlation].
The [Correlation Matrix] dialog is displayed.
Response value, objective function, and constraint condition are written in the heading of
each row and column of the correlation matrix. The scatter graph is displayed on the lower
left, histogram on the diagonal line, and “correlation coefficient” on the top right.
Values ranging from -1 to 1 are displayed as the correlation coefficient. The larger the abso-
lute value, the higher the correlation. The smaller the absolute value, the lower the correla-
tion. The background color of the correlation coefficient is red when the value is positive,
blue when the value is negative, and white when it is zero.
MEMO The graph is expanded when a graph is clicked. The original size is restored by clicking
again.
ii. Click [Close].
6. Display a graph of the response surface.
Create response curve graphs based on the results of each calculated case.
and select [View Response Graph].
ii. In the [Response Surface] dialog, under the [Select Cases] tab, select the checkboxes
for cases to create a response surface. Additionally, select a graph interpolation
method.
When as many cases as necessary to display the graph of the response surface on the [Select
Cases] tab are selected, the [Response Graphs] tab is activated.
iii. In the [Response Graphs] tab, check the graph of the response surface.
iv. Click [Close].
Check Topology Optimization (Sensitivity Analysis) Results

1. Open a project that includes an optimization study.
2. When topology optimization (sensitivity analysis) were run from JMAG-Scheduler,
results of cases generated during a calculation need to be manually imported into the
study.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, select the study in which to load cases, and right-click.
ii. Select [Load Topology Optimization Results].
iii. In the [Load Topology Optimization Results] dialog, specify the cases to be loaded,
and click [OK].
655
Operations
iv. If necessary, from the menu bar, select [File] > [Save].
Save the project after the cases have been loaded.
For a study in which topology optimization results are being loaded, the [Save Topology
Optimization Results] dialog is displayed.
IMPORTANT From the selection made in the [Save Topology Optimization Results]
dialog, cases not yet loaded may be deleted.
3. Check the material density distribution.
iii. In the [Contour Plot] setting panel, select [Continuous Variables (Node)] for [Result
Type].
Set other parameters as desired.
MEMO When [Shaded] or [Isolines] is selected and the checkbox for [Subdivide Quadrilateral
Faces] is selected, the contour line is adjusted and becomes smooth.
iv. Click [OK].
The created contour plot is added under [Contour Plots] in the [Project Manager] tree.
v. When multiple contour plots are created in a study, in the [Project Manager] tree,
from [Contour Plots], select the [Continuous Variables (Node)] contour plot.
vi. Click [Display Contour Result] on the toolbar.

The material density distribution is displayed.
For example, for a topology optimization that used three materials (air, magnetic material 1,
and magnetic material 2), each of the material density values would mean the following:
• Material density 0.0: Air
• Material density 1.0: Magnetic material 1 or magnetic material 2, whichever has been
applied to the part that has the smaller part ID
• Material density 2.0: Magnetic material 1 or magnetic material 2, whichever has been
applied to the part that has the larger part ID
4. If the magnetization direction of the magnet is the objective function, check the initial
magnetization vector.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click [Results].
iii. In the [Contour Plot] setting panel, select [Initial Magnetization Vector] for [Result
Type].
Subsequent steps are the same as for checking the material density distribution.
656
Resuming Optimizations
Restart the terminated optimization from the point it was terminated. Or, restart the interrupted
optimization from the first case of the generation at the time of the interruption.
MEMO The restart of optimization corresponds to the following engines provided by JMAG.
• [Genetic Algorithm]
• [Multi-Objective Genetic Algorithm]
• [Genetic Algorithm (Topology)]
• [Multi-Objective Genetic Algorithm (Topology)]
• [Multi-Objective Genetic Algorithm (Topology, Used until V20.0)]
• [Sensitivity Analysis]
MEMO The optimization may be redone from the beginning depending on the parameters that were
changed. Before making changes, confirm the parameters that do not support changes in the “Parameter
Parameter Optimization
1. When resuming an optimization that has been batch executed, load the results of the
optimization into the study once before resuming.
See “Checking Optimization Results” on page 654 for the procedure.
If you resume without loading the results, the information of the case before resume will be over-
written at the resume, and you will not be able to check the results that were output before the
resume.
3. Click the [Options] tab.
4. To resume a parameter optimization with GA/MOGA that was performed in the back-
ground using remote machines, set the SAV file (.sav) to be used.
Specify the SAV file that is specified in the [Restart File Output] in the [Output] tab when the
optimization to be resumed is performed. The SAV file contains the information needed to
resume the calculation.
i. Click [Set Restart From File].
ii. In the [Get Optimization Restart File] dialog, specify the SAV file to be used, and click
[Open].
The SAV file to be used for the calculation will be set.
5. Select [Restart From Generation xx].
A number will be assigned to the “xx” part.
6. Change each parameter as required.
7. Click [Run] or [Submit].
See step 9 and after in “Running Optimizations” on page 650.
The [Optimization] dialog will close and optimization will be run until it has reached the num-
ber of maximum generations.
657
Operations
Topology Optimization
resume.
4. Increase the value for [Number of Generations].
Only the added generations are calculated after the restart. For example, if [Number of Genera-
tions] is changed from “20” to “30” and restarted, the calculation for the added 10 generations is
executed.
See step 9 and after in “Running Optimizations” on page 650.
The [Optimization] dialog will close and optimization will be run until it has reached the num-
ber of maximum generations.
Topology Optimization (Sensitivity Analysis)

resume.
4. Change the [Max Iterations] or [Convergence Tolerance] value.
See step 9 and on in “Running Optimizations” on page 650.
658
Recreating Calculation Case of Topology Optimization

A specified calculation case can be recreated by using the input file (Designer.jcf, topologyopt_-
conf.xml) of topology optimization calculation and the CSV file containing the Gaussian weight
information.
The recreated calculation case not only has the shape data but also the settings data such as materi-
als, conditions, and design variables, so it can be used for analysis without editing.
1. Check that you have the files you need to restore the calculation case.
The following files are used to recreate calculation cases:
• CSV file containing the Gaussian weight information:
This CSV file is output when the file path including the file name is set in [NGnet/Gabor Fil-
ter Weight Output] of the [Output] tab in the [Optimization] dialog.
Specify the path of this CSV file in the [Add a Case by Specifying a Weight File] dialog
described later.
• JCF file (Designer.jcf ) of topology optimization base model:
Designer.jcf is exported to the calculation folder for each case during optimization calcula-
tion.
• To recreate the calculation case of the topology optimization study, Designer.jcf must be
located in the calculation folder of the first case in the topology optimization study.
• To recreate the calculation case of the topology optimization study belonging to the analy-
sis group, Designer.jcf must be located in the each calculation folder of the first case of all
studies in the group.
• Topology optimization setting file (topologyopt_conf.xml):
Topologyopt_conf.xml is exported to the calculation folder of each case during optimization
calculation.
• To restore the calculation case of the topology optimization study, topologyopt_conf.xml
must be located in the calculation folder of the first case of the topology optimization
study.
• To restore the calculation case of the topology optimization studies belonging to the anal-
ysis group, topologyopt_conf.xml must be located in the each calculation folder of the
first case of all studies in the group.
MEMO The calculation folder of each case in topology optimization is created in a jfiles folder that
is created in the same hierarchy as the project file. Usually, the name of the calculation folder in the
first case is “Case1”.
For example: Project file (D:\ JMAG\ProjectName.jproj):
D:\JMAG\ProjectName.jfiles\ModelName~1\StudyName~1\Case1
MEMO To restore the calculation case of a topology optimization study that was run on another
machine, duplicate the above mentioned file to your machine together with the project file that con-
tains the topology optimization study. When doing so, copy Designer.jcf and topologyopt_conf.xml
while maintaining the hierarchical structure of the folder.
2. In JMAG-Designer, open the project file that contains the topology optimization study.
3. Select topology optimization study in the [Project Manager] tree.
Or select the analysis group that the topology optimization study belongs to.
The topology optimization study or the analysis group that the topology optimization study
belongs to is activated.
659
Operations
MEMO If Designer.jcf is found in the calculation folder of the first case of the topology optimization
study, the [Add a Case by Specifying a Weight File] command is displayed in the context menu of the
study.
MEMO If Designer.jcf is found in the calculation folder of the first case of all topology optimization
studies in the analysis group, the [Add a Case by Specifying a Weight File] command is displayed in
the context menu of the analysis group.
4. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click the study or analysis group, and select [Add a
Case by Specifying a Weight File].
5. In the [Add a Case by Specifying a Weight File] dialog, specify the path to the weight CSV
file and the number of the calculation case to be recreated.
For details see “Parameter Explanation Edition”.
6. Click OK.
The recreated calculation case of an existing study or copy of an existing study is added.
660
Creating Input Files for Parametric Analysis From the
Command Line
Use the JparamGenerator command to create input files (hereinafter referred to as JPARAM files) for use with
parametric analysis from the command line based on both one JCF file that describes design variable settings,
and one CSV file that describes design variable input values. Use the JparamGenerator command to create
JPARAM files for large numbers of calculation cases at a high speed.
Run example (for -jcflink=copy)
MEMO Even when running parametric analysis by using case control in JMAG-Designer, JPARAM files are gener-
ated for each calculation case with the same folder structure as when using the JparamGenerator command.
However, when using case control in JMAG-Designer, JPRAM files are generated when the calculations for each cal-
culation case are run. Unlike when using the JparamGenerator command, JPARAM files for all cases are not gener-
ated at the same time.

• Basic Procedure for Using JparamGenerator (page 663)
• Creating Input CSV Files (page 664)
• Running JparamGenerator From the Command Line (page 665)
661
Operations
Notes
 Design Variables
The JparamGenerator command cannot be used when using the following parameters as design
variables in input JCF files:
• Geometry parameters (parameters that affect the number of parts, such as the number of poles
and the number of slots, etc.)
• Dimensional parameters (parameters that define part height and positions)
• Materials applied to parts:
Each material property values (density, etc.) can be used as design variables.
• Point-type parameters (parameters that define coordinates and directions):
Because coordinate and direction component values (x, y, z) are real-type parameters, they can be
used as design variables.
Parameter types can be checked in the [Type] column

of the [Select Parametric Parameters] dialog.
Be careful when using the following parameters for design variables:

• For flag-type parameters, design variable values must be specified in input CSV files by number,
not by name.
For example, when using magnet magnetization patterns as design variables, enter the number of
the magnetization pattern (“4” for [Parallel Pattern (Circular Direction)]) rather than the name
of the magnetization pattern ([Parallel Pattern (Circular Direction)], etc.) in input JCF files.
Use JMAG-Designer Script Help to check these numbers. JMAG-Designer Script Help is
opened by selecting [Help] > [Script Help] from the JMAG-Designer menu bar.
662
Creating Input Files for Parametric Analysis From the Command Line
Basic Procedure for Using JparamGenerator

1. Create a base model JCF file.
i. Prepare the model.
ii. Create a study, and set the materials and the conditions, etc.
Refer to the JMAG self-learning program “Self-Learning System”, etc., to create studies.
iii. Set the design variables.
Design variables are parameters that change the values in parametric analysis and optimiza-
tion.
See “Selecting Parameters Having Values That Will Be Changed (Selecting Design Vari-
ables)” on page 630 for information on procedures.
See “Notes” on page 662 for parameters that cannot be handled as design variables when
using JparamGenerator.
iv. Export JCF files.
See “Exporting Studies to JCF Files” on page 287.
Either mesh models or geometry models (solids or regions) can be exported to JCF files.
2. Create a CSV file that describes the case table for the base model.
This CSV file can be created manually by the user, or based on CSV files exported from the
JMAG-Designer [Case List] dialog.
See “Creating Input CSV Files” on page 664.
3. Run JparamGenerator from the command line with the JCF file and the CSV file as argu-
ments.
See “Running JparamGenerator From the Command Line” on page 665.
663
Operations
Creating Input CSV Files

To run the JparamGenerator command, a CSV file that describes a table of design variable values for
each calculation case is required.
This CSV file can be created manually by the user, or based on CSV files exported from the JMAG-
Designer [Case List] dialog.
 Notes
• When running JparamGenerator on Linux machines using input CSV files created with a Win-
dows machine, loading the CSV file may fail as a result of differences in character codes.
Use a CSV file with a character code that matches the JparamGenerator execution environment,
or alternatively, specify the character code to be used to load the input CSV file with the -codec
option for JparamGenerator.
 Create Based on CSV Files Exported From JMAG-Designer

Use the CSV file exported in this procedure as a sample also when creating CSV files manually.
1. Click the base model study in the [Project Manager] tree.

2. Right-click [Case Control] and select [Show Cases].
3. Check that design variables are displayed in the case table of the [Case List] dialog.
4. Click [Export] to export the case table in a CSV file format.
5. Describe the case numbers and design variable values to be added to the CSV file, and
overwrite and save.
 CSV File Format

• The label and case columns are used to name the folders where JPARAM files are to be output to
(the subfolders of the folder specified by the WorkDir environment variable).
• When a label is entered, that label will become the names of subfolders. When the same label
is used for multiple cases, then subfolder names will be “(label)-(number)”.
• When no label is entered, subfolder names will be “Case-(case number)”.
• When values and expressions are output to design variable values (when expressions enclosed in
square brackets [] are output), they are ignored. The values calculated from equations that are
described in input JCF files are then described in JPARAM files.
Left: [Design Table] dialog, Right: CSV file
664
Running JparamGenerator From the Command Line

• Procedure for Running JparamGenerator (page 665)
• JparamGenerator Errors (page 666)
• Output JPARAM Files (page 667)
Procedure for Running JparamGenerator

1. Set environment variables on the machine to run JparamGenerator.
See “Overview Edition” for information on how to set environment variables. Settings for envi-
ronment variables can also be run from the command line.
Environment variable Required/Optional Description

WorkDir Required Full path of the calculation folder.
A subfolder for each calculation case is created in
the folder that is specified by the environment
variable WorkDir. JPARAM files for each calcula-
tion case are then created in each subfolder.
2. Execute the JparamGenerator command.
Windows:
i. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.
ii. Select [Accessories] > [Command Prompt] to launch Command Prompt.
iii. Write the command.
• Enclose the file path in double quotation marks (").
• To divide a row where the command and its arguments are defined into two or more rows,
insert a “^” (a circumflex symbol) at the position to divide the row. See Windows Help for
escape characters such as circumflex symbols, etc.
Command:
(JMAG installation folder)\JparamGenerator^
-csv="input CSV file path" -base="input JCF file path"
Example 1:
"C:\Program Files\JMAG-Designer22.2\JparamGenerator"^
-csv=D:\JMAG\Data\casetable.csv -base=D:\JMAG\Data\mag.jcf
Example 2: When also including environment variable settings

set WorkDir=D:\JMAG\ParamData
"C:\Program Files\JMAG-Designer22.2\JparamGenerator"^
-csv=D:\JMAG\Data\casetable.csv -base=D:\JMAG\Data\mag.jcf
Linux:
• To divide a row where the command and its arguments are defined into two or more rows,
insert a “\” (a back-slash symbol) at the position to divide the row. See Linux Help for escape
characters such as backslashes, etc.
665
Operations
• Commands and arguments are case sensitive for Linux.
Command (bash):
(JMAG installation directory)/solver/bin/JparamGenerator\
-csv="input CSV file path"\
-base="input JCF file path"
Example (bash):
export WorkDir='pwd'
${InsDir}/JparamGenerator -csv=input.csv -base=input.jcf -jcflink=symbolic
 JparamGenerator Options
Option Description
-csv Path to an input CSV file. Required.
Specify an absolute path or a path relative to WorkDir.
-base Path to an input JCF file. Required.
Specify an absolute path or a path relative to WorkDir.
-jcflink Handles input JCF files.
• copy:
Windows environment default.
Copies an input JCF file to the same folder as a JPARAM file.
• symbolic:
Linux environment default.
Creates a symbolic link (absolute path) to an input JCF file.
• none:
Neither copying the input JCF file nor creating a symbolic link to an
input JCF file is performed.
-codec Character code used to load an input CSV file.
• local(Default):
Default. Uses the character code set in the OS.
• utf-8
-csvoutput Full path of the folder where the CSV files of analysis results are output.
The input value for [Output Path] in the [CSV File Output Settings] set-
ting panel of the [Study Properties] dialog is replaced with the value that is
specified by setting this option.
-ncpu Thread parallelism when creating a JPARAM file. The default is 1.
JparamGenerator Errors
When processing by using the JparamGenerator has finished, JparamGenerator.jlog is written to the
same folder as the input JCF file. When errors occur, check the error code that is output to Jparam-
Generator.jlog.
Error code Description

3200001: The input JCF file cannot be opened. Check the following points:
JCF file can not be opened. • That the input JCF file name and path are correct.
666
Error code Description

3200002: Design variable and equation information in the input JCF file are
No parametric information in. insufficient. Check the following points:
• Settings for design variables and equations in the input JCF file.
3200003: The input CSV file cannot be opened. Check the following points:
CSV file can not be opened. • That the input CSV file name and path are correct.
3200004: The input CSV file format is incorrect. Check the following points:
CSV format is not correct. • That there are enough columns in the input CSV file.
• Check whether or not there is a difference in the character codes
used between the input CSV file and the machine on which
JparamGenerator is run.
• Check whether a character string is used in the value of flag-type
parameters.
3200005: Failure occurs in writing JPARAM files.
jparam file writing failure
3200006: Interpretation error for equations entered in the input JCF file.
Parse error Check the following points:
• Settings for design variables and equations in the input JCF file.
320000: Error in setting or copying input JCF file symbolic links. Check the
Link error following points:
• JparamGenerator execution environments
Output JPARAM Files

When JparamGenerator is run, subfolders for the number of calculation cases are created in the
folder that is specified by the environment variable WorkDir. One JPARAM file is output for each
of these subfolders. Output JPARAM files are used together with input JCF files during analysis.
Output example (for -jcflink=copy)
• The naming of subfolders is in accordance with the labels and case column input of the input
CSV files. See “Creating Input CSV Files” on page 664.
• JPARAM files use the same names as input JCF files. When an input JCF file name is “mag.jcf”,
for example, then the JPARAM file name is “mag.jparam”.
When changing the name of either an input JCF file or a JPARAM file, ensure that the name of
the other file is also changed accordingly.
• To copy an input JCF file to the same folder as a JPARAM file (when -jcflink=copy is specified),
place the two files in the same folder.
• When a symbolic link is created in an input JCF file (when -jcflink=symbolic is specified),do not
move the input JCF file to another folder.
667
Operations
668
Coupled Analysis
Running One-Way Coupled Analyses
This section describes the process for running one-way coupled analysis.
One-way coupled analysis is a method of analysis in running a one-way analysis with one solver and using those
results with another solver.

• Basic Procedure (page 672)
• Running One-Way Coupled Analyses Using Loss (page 674)
• Running One-Way Coupled Analyses Using Temperature (page 678)
• Running One-Way Coupled Analyses Using Force (page 683)
• Running One-Way Coupled Analyses Using Stress and Displacement (page 685)
MEMO Application notes and function tutorials describe the steps for one-way coupled analysis using actual models.
Also use those as a reference.
671
Operations
Basic Procedure
1. Prepare an input file for one-way analysis.
Input data is prepared here for the analysis to output loss, temperature, electromagnetic force,
stress or displacement.
• The type of input files for running analyses in JMAG are JCF files (.jcf ). Project files (.jproj),
however, can also be used as input files.
• It is necessary to add the following settings to configurations for analyses that use only one
solver.
• Settings to output physical quantity to be transferred to the other solver.
[Output Control] setting panel parameters such as those in the [Study Properties] dialog
are applicable.
• Settings to correctly exchange physical quantity.
It is necessary to adjust the likes of the Partial Model condition in a magnetic field analy-
sis, full model conversion and circuit conversion when the model dimensions (2D, 3D,
axisymmetric) calculated with two solvers or the number of model divisions (1/2 model,
1/4 model) differ.
2. Run the analysis from step 1.
The execution method is the same as analysis that uses only one solver. The following can be
chosen.
• JMAG-Designer GUI (foreground)
• JMAG-Scheduler (background)
• Command line (background)
3. Prepare the analysis input file referring to the analysis result of step 1.
Input data is prepared here for the analysis to output either loss, temperature, electromagnetic
force, stress or displacement.
• The type of input files for running analyses in JMAG are JCF files (.jcf ). Project files (.jproj),
however, can also be used as input files.
• It is necessary to add the following settings to configurations for analyses that use only one
solver.
• Settings to receive physical quantity output from the other solver.
The likes of the Stress Distribution condition of a magnetic field analysis and the Heat
Source condition of a thermal analysis are applicable.
• Settings to correctly exchange physical quantity.
It is necessary to adjust the likes of the Partial Model condition in a magnetic field analy-
sis, full model conversion and circuit conversion when the model dimensions (2D, 3D,
axisymmetric) with two solvers or the number of model divisions differ.
4. Run the analysis from step 2.
The execution method is the same as analysis that uses only one solver. The following can be
chosen.
• JMAG-Designer GUI (foreground)
• JMAG-Scheduler (background)
• Command line (background)
672
Analysis is run separately for each solver in the above steps, but it is possible to run two analyses
continuously using the analysis group function. It is also necessary to use the analysis group func-
tion in the remote execution of one-way coupled analysis. For details, see “Running Calculations
Continuously Using Analysis Groups” on page 421.
673
Operations
Running One-Way Coupled Analyses Using Loss

• Use Loss Calculated from a Magnetic Field Analysis or Iron Loss Analysis in a Thermal Analysis
(page 674)
• Use Loss Calculated from an Electric Field Analysis in a Thermal Analysis (page 676)
Use Loss Calculated from a Magnetic Field Analysis or Iron Loss Analysis in a
Thermal Analysis
Run a magnetic field analysis or iron loss analysis to calculate the loss density. Then, run a thermal
analysis using the loss density as an input value.
MEMO To use the iron loss density resulting from the magnetic field analysis in the thermal analysis, set
the magnetic field analysis to output both the Joule loss density and the hysteresis loss density. If both the
Joule loss density and the hysteresis loss density are output in the magnetic field analysis result file, the
sum of the them will be used in the thermal analysis.
1. Run the magnetic field analysis (or magnetic field analysis + iron loss analysis).
ii. Create a magnetic field analysis study.
Static analysis, transient analysis and frequency analysis can be used as the study type.
iii. Set study properties.
• Clear [Direct coupled analysis] in the [Coupled Analysis] setting panel.
• To use the results of the magnetic field analysis for thermal analysis, select either or both
of the following checkboxes in the [Output Control] setting panel.
• [Joule Loss Density]
• [Hysteresis Loss Density]
• To use the results of iron loss analysis for thermal analysis, select either or both of the fol-
lowing checkboxes in the [Output Control] setting panel.
• [Joule Loss Density (Iron loss)]
• [Hysteresis Loss Density (Iron loss)]
iv. Set conditions.
• Set the Heat Source condition in the model when using the loss from the FEM coil or the
resistor part in a thermal analysis.
• Set the Iron Loss condition when using the result of iron loss analysis in a thermal analy-
sis. Set the material iron loss properties when running an iron loss analysis.
• Select [Output results of all slices] when using the Multi Slice condition in a magnetic
field analysis.
v. Make any other necessary settings.
Set the Periodic Boundary condition or motion condition as required.
vi. vi. Run the analysis.
For details about steps for running analysis, see the following pages:
674

2. Refer to the magnetic field analysis result file and run a thermal analysis (one-way cou-
pled analysis).
i. Prepare a 3D model.
ii. Create a thermal analysis study.
The study type can be either steady state analysis or transient state analysis.
Clear [Direct coupled analysis] in the [Coupled Analysis] setting panel.
iv. Set required conditions for using loss.
Set the Heat Source condition for the part to generate heat and select [Coupling] under
[Parameter]. Select [One Way] under [Coupling Type] and specify it to refer to the result of
the magnetic field analysis (or iron loss analysis) in step 1. Specification methods are as fol-
lows:
• Specify the magnetic field analysis (or iron loss analysis) study and case number if the
magnetic field analysis (or iron loss analysis) in step 1. and the thermal analysis are in the
same project.
• Specify the project file (.jproj), study and case number if the magnetic field analysis (or
iron loss analysis) in step 1. is in a different project.
• The result file (.jplot, .plot, .loss) of the magnetic field analysis (or iron loss analysis) in
step 1. can also be specified. The result file is exported to the calculation folder. The calcu-
lation folder path is displayed in the likes of the [Study Properties] dialog.
MEMO Set the Heat Source condition on the face when the surface Joule loss density output
from using SIBC in a magnetic field analysis is using thermal analysis. However, [Depth from
Surface] does not need to be specified.
MEMO Specify a result file “(input file name).jplot (the default is Designer.jplot)” with the
whole model calculated based on results of each section. This specification is set when using a
result file for magnetic field analysis that is specified in a Multi Slice condition.
• When the thermal analysis is a partial model and when selecting [Total Loss] as the [Ther-
mal Source Type] of the Heat Source condition, convert the loss from the magnetic field
analysis (iron loss analysis) using any of the following methods.
• Set the Partial Model conditions by thermal analysis (recommended)
• Specify the loss scale in Heat Source conditions
vi. Run the analysis.
MEMO Analysis is run separately for magnetic field analysis and thermal analysis in the above
steps, but it is possible to run two analyses continuously using the analysis group function. It is
also necessary to use the analysis group function in the remote execution of one-way coupled
analysis. For details, see “Running Calculations Continuously Using Analysis Groups” on page
421.
675
Operations
Use Loss Calculated from an Electric Field Analysis in a Thermal Analysis

Use electric field frequency analysis to calculate Joule loss density and dielectric loss density Or, use
current distribution analysis to calculate Joule loss density. Afterwards, use that as the input value to
perform thermal analysis or thermal stress analysis.
1. Run an electric field analysis.

ii. Create an electric field analysis study.
The study type corresponds to frequency analysis and current distribution analysis.
• Select [Joule Loss Density] in the [Output Control] setting panel when using Joule loss
density in a thermal analysis.
• Select [Dielectric Loss] in the [Output Control] setting panel when using dielectric loss
density in a thermal analysis.
iv. Make any other necessary settings.
v. Run the analysis.
2. Refer to the electric field analysis result file and run a thermal analysis or thermal stress
analysis (one-way coupled analysis).
ii. Create a thermal analysis or thermal stress analysis study.
The study type can be either steady state analysis or transient state analysis.
iv. Set required conditions for using loss.
Specify the Heat Source conditions. Select [One Way] as the [Coupling Type] and select
[Distribution] as the [Thermal Source Type]. Specify the referenced electric field analysis
result file (.jplot, .plot, .loss).
676
MEMO Analysis is run separately for electric field analysis and thermal analysis in the above
421.
677
Operations
Running One-Way Coupled Analyses Using Temperature

• Use Temperature Calculated from a Thermal Analysis in a Magnetic Field Analysis (page 678)
• Use Temperature Calculated from a Thermal Analysis in an Electric Field Analysis (page 679)
• Use Temperature Calculated from Thermal Analysis in a Structural Analysis (page 680)
Use Temperature Calculated from a Thermal Analysis in a Magnetic Field Analysis

Run a thermal analysis and calculate the temperature. Afterwards, use that as the input value to run
magnetic field analysis.
1. Run a thermal analysis.

• Select [Temperature] in the [Output Control] setting panel.
2. Refer to the temperature analysis result file and run a magnetic field analysis (one-way
coupled analysis).
iv. Create a material with temperature dependent properties and set to a part.
• When accounting for the temperature dependence of electrical conductivity, set the elec-
trical conductivity of temperature dependence in the [Electrical Properties] tab of the
[Material Editor] dialog.
• When accounting for the temperature dependence of relative permeability, select [Linear
(Temperature dependent)] as the [Magnetic Property Type] in the [Magnetic Properties]
tab of the [Material Editor] dialog and set the temperature dependence of relative permea-
bility.
• When accounting for the temperature dependence of magnetic properties defined by the
BH curve (magnetic flux density-magnetic field curve), select [B-H Curve (Temperature
dependent)] as the [Magnetic Property Type] in the [Magnetic Properties] tab of the
[Material Editor] dialog and set the susceptibility-temperature curve.
678
v. Set required conditions for using temperature.

Set the Temperature Distribution condition to the part to which the temperature dependent
material was applied and select [One way] under [Coupling Type]. Specify it to refer to the
result of the thermal analysis in step 1. Specification methods are as follows:
• Specify the thermal analysis study and case number if the thermal analysis in step 1. and
the structural analysis are in the same project.
• Specify the project file (.jproj), study and case number if the temperature analysis in step
1. is in a different project.
• The result file of the thermal analysis in step 1. (.jplot, .plot, .csv, .txt) can also be speci-
fied. The result file is exported to the calculation folder. The calculation folder path is dis-
played in the likes of the [Study Properties] dialog.
MEMO The temperature of the last step is mapped to the magnetic field analysis model when
referring to the result file of thermal transient state analysis or thermal stress transient state analy-
sis.
vi. Make any other necessary settings.
vii.Run the analysis.
MEMO Analysis is run separately for magnetic field analysis and thermal analysis in the above
421.
Use Temperature Calculated from a Thermal Analysis in an Electric Field Analysis

Run a thermal analysis and calculate the temperature. Afterwards, use that as the input value to per-
form electric field analysis.

679
Operations

2. Refer to the thermal analysis result file and run an electric field analysis (one-way cou-
pled analysis).
ii. Create an electric field analysis study.
This corresponds to electric field distribution analysis.
iv. Create a material with temperature dependent properties and set to a part.
• When the electric conductivity for materials is modified by temperature:
Select [Temperature Dependent] under [Conductivity] of the [Electric Properties] tab in
the [Material Editor] dialog and set the electric conductivity-temperature curve (or elec-
tric resistivity-temperature curve).
v. Set required conditions for using temperature.
Set the Temperature Distribution condition to the part to which the temperature dependent
material was applied and select [One Way] under [Coupling Type]. Specify it to refer to the
result of the temperature analysis in step 1. Specification methods are as follows:
MEMO The temperature of the last step is mapped to the magnetic field analysis model when
referring to the result file of thermal transient state analysis or thermal stress transient state analy-
sis.
Specify the Periodic Boundary condition or the motion condition as required.
MEMO Analysis is run separately for thermal analysis and electric field analysis in the above
421.
Use Temperature Calculated from Thermal Analysis in a Structural Analysis

Run a thermal analysis and calculate the temperature. Afterwards, use that as the input value to per-
form an electric field analysis.
680

• Run a thermal analysis with multiple steps when using temperature distribution in a struc-
tural analysis.
2. Refer to the thermal analysis result file and run a structural analysis (one-way coupled
analysis).
ii. Create a structural analysis study.
This supports static analysis or eigenmode.
iv. Set required conditions for using temperature.
Set the Temperature Load condition for the part that enables temperature load and select
[Temperature Distribution] or [Temperature Difference Distribution] under [Type]. Specify
it to refer to the result of the temperature analysis in step 1. Specification methods are as fol-
lows:
Specify the likes of the Periodic Boundary condition as required.
681
Operations
MEMO Analysis is run separately for thermal analysis and structural analysis in the above steps,
but it is possible to run two analyses continuously using the analysis group function. It is also nec-
essary to use the analysis group function in the remote execution of one-way coupled analysis. For
details, see “Running Calculations Continuously Using Analysis Groups” on page 421.
682
Running One-Way Coupled Analyses Using Force

• Use Electromagnetic Force Calculated from a Magnetic Field Analysis in a Structural Analysis
(page 683)
Use Electromagnetic Force Calculated from a Magnetic Field Analysis in a

Structural Analysis
Run an electric field analysis, and calculate the electromagnetic force of the nodal force (or Lorentz
force, magnetostrictive force). Afterwards, use that as the input value to perform structural analysis.
1. Run a magnetic field analysis.

• Select [Nodal Force] in the [Output Control] setting panel when the structural analysis
refers to nodal force.
• Select [Lorentz Force Density] in the [Output Control] setting panel when the structural
analysis refers to Lorentz force.
iv. Set materials.
• Set magnetostriction properties when referring to magnetostrictive force in a structural
analysis.
v. Set conditions.
• Set the force or Torque condition when referring to electromagnetic force in a structural
analysis.
Set the force or Torque condition that is used to calculate the electromagnetic force for the
structural analysis if necessary.
• Set the magnetostriction condition when referring to magnetostrictive force in a structural
analysis.
• Select [Output results of all slices] when using the Multi Slice condition in a magnetic
field analysis.
MEMO For a 2D model with a structural analysis, a magnetic field analysis result file in which
the Multi Slice condition is used cannot be referenced.
2. Refer to the magnetic field analysis result file and run a structural analysis (one-way
coupled analysis).
683
Operations

iii. Set required conditions when using force.
Set the Electromagnetic Force condition for the part that enables the load. Specify it to refer
to the result of the magnetic field analysis in step 1. Specification methods are as follows:
• Specify the magnetic field analysis study and case number if the magnetic field analysis in
step 1. and the structural analysis are in the same project.
• Specify the project file (.jproj), study and case number if the magnetic field analysis in step
• The result file (.jplot, .plot) of the magnetic field analysis in step 1. can also be specified.
The result file is exported to the calculation folder. The calculation folder path is displayed
in the likes of the [Study Properties] dialog.
Specify the Periodic Boundary condition and the constraint condition as required.
MEMO Analysis is run separately for magnetic field analysis and structural analysis in the above
421.
684
Running One-Way Coupled Analyses Using Stress and Displacement

• Use Stress or Displacement Calculated from a Structural Analysis in a Magnetic Field Analysis or
Iron Loss Analysis (page 685)
• Use Displacement Calculated from a Structural Analysis in a Thermal Analysis (page 686)
Use Stress or Displacement Calculated from a Structural Analysis in a Magnetic

Field Analysis or Iron Loss Analysis
Run a structural analysis, and calculate stress and displacement. Afterwards, use that as the input
value to perform magnetic field analysis or iron loss analysis.
MEMO It is possible to refer not only to the results of structural analysis in JMAG, but to Abaqus results
also.
1. Run a structural analysis.

The following are settings for running a structural analysis in JMAG.
• Select [Stress] in the [Output Control] setting panel when using stress in a magnetic field
analysis.
MEMO Since displacement is always output in structural analysis, setting of output is unnec-
essary.
iv. Specify any other settings for analysis as required.
Specify the Periodic Boundary condition and the constriction condition as required.
2. Refer to the structural analysis result file and run a magnetic field analysis (one-way
coupled analysis).
iv. Set a material and apply to a part.
Use materials in which the magnetic properties of stress dependencies are defined when using
stress in a magnetic field analysis. Use materials in which the iron loss properties of stress
dependencies are defined when using stress in an iron loss analysis.
Select any one of the following types of magnetic properties of stress dependencies or material
in which iron loss properties are defined.
685
Operations
• Reference material data provided by JSOL ([Materials] tab in [Toolbox]/[Soft Magnetic

Material] folder/[Steel Sheet] folder/[JSOL] folder/[Stress Dependent] folder)
• Custom Materials:
Select [Soft Magnetic Material] in the [Magnetic Properties] tab of the [Material Editor]
dialog and [B-H Curve (Stress dependent)] in [Magnetic Property Type] when using stress
in a magnetic field analysis. Specify the stress dependent BH curve.
• Select [Iron Loss Table] as the [Loss Type] in the [Loss] tab of the [Material Editor]
dialog and select [Stress Dependent] when using stress in an iron loss analysis. A stress
dependent iron loss table must be set.
• Also specify the stress dependent Joule loss coefficient table and the stress dependent
hysteresis loss coefficient table to multiply iron loss exported as an analysis result by a
coefficient dependent on the stress and magnetic flux density.
v. Set required conditions for using stress or displacement.
Set the Stress Distribution condition in the model and select [One Way] as the [Coupling
Type] when using stress. Set the Displacement condition in the model and select [One Way]
as the [Coupling Type] when using displacement.
Specify either the Stress Distribution condition or Displacement condition or both to refer to
the result of the structural analysis in step 1. Specification methods are as follows:
• Specify the structural analysis study and case number if the structural analysis in step 1.
and the magnetic field analysis are in the same project.
• Specify the project file (.jproj), study and case number if the structural analysis in step 1. is
in a different project.
• The result file of the structural analysis in step 1. (.jplot, .plot, .csv, .txt) can also be speci-
MEMO The Stress Distribution condition and the Displacement condition can be used together.
This setting can be used for each condition referring to a different structural analysis file.
MEMO When referencing a structural transient analysis result file or a thermal stress transient
state analysis result file, stress for the last step is mapped to the magnetic field analysis model.
MEMO Analysis is run separately for magnetic field analysis and structural analysis in the above
421.
Use Displacement Calculated from a Structural Analysis in a Thermal Analysis

Run a structural analysis, and calculate displacement. Afterwards, use that as the input value to per-
form thermal analysis.
686
MEMO It is possible to refer not only to the results of structural analysis in JMAG, but to Abaqus results
also.
1. Run a structural analysis.

Since displacement is always output in structural analysis, setting of output is unnecessary.
2. Refer to the structural analysis result file and run a thermal analysis (one-way coupled
analysis).
iv. Set required conditions for using displacement.
Set the Displacement condition in the model and select [One Way] as the [Coupling Type]
when using displacement.
Specify the Displacement condition to refer to the result of the structural analysis in step 1.
Specification methods are as follows:
• Specify the structural analysis study and case number if the structural analysis in step 1.
and the thermal analysis are in the same project.
• Specify the project file (.jproj), study and case number if the structural analysis in step 1. is
in a different project.
• The result file of the structural analysis in step 1. (.jplot, .plot, .csv, .txt) can also be speci-
MEMO When referencing a structural transient analysis result file, stress for the last step is
mapped to the thermal analysis model.
Specify the Periodic Boundary condition as required.
MEMO Analysis is run separately for thermal analysis and structural analysis in the above steps,
but it is possible to run two analyses continuously using the analysis group function. It is also nec-
essary to use the analysis group function in the remote execution of one-way coupled analysis. For
details, see “Running Calculations Continuously Using Analysis Groups” on page 421.
687
Operations
688
Running Direct Coupled Analyses
This chapter describes the procedures for running direct coupled analysis.
Direct coupled analysis is a coupled analysis that runs analysis in multiple solvers alternately by transferring the
results between them.

• Basic Procedure (page 690)
• Creating Input Files for Coupled Analyses (page 690)
• Running Direct Coupled Analyses from JMAG-Designer (page 691)
• Running Direct Coupled Analyses from JMAG-Scheduler (page 693)
• Running Direct Coupled Analyses from the Command Line Using JMAG-Scheduler (page 696)
689
Operations
Basic Procedure
1. Prepare multiple input files for analysis.
• JCF file is the input file format for JMAG analysis execution. JPROJ files, however, can also
be used as input files.
• One input file can be coupled with multiple input files.
For example, in a coupled analysis of a magnetic field analysis and thermal analysis, assume
that you want to simultaneously obtain the magnetic field analysis results of low frequency
and high frequency. In such a case, prepare one thermal analysis JCF file and multiple mag-
netic field analysis JCF files with different frequency.
• The following settings are required when a direct coupled analysis is performed.
• Settings for running a direct coupled analysis.
The [Coupled Analysis] setting panel parameters of the [Study Properties] dialog of the
magnetic field analysis are applicable.
• Settings to output physical quantities to be transferred to the other solver.
The [Output Control] setting panel parameters such as those in the [Study Properties]
dialog are applicable.
• Settings to receive the physical quantity output from the other solver.
Stress Distribution conditions and Displacement conditions of magnetic field analysis,
Heat Source conditions of thermal analysis, etc. are applicable.
• Settings to adjust physical quantities so they are exchanged correctly.
It is necessary to adjust the Partial Model condition in a magnetic field analysis, full model
conversion, and circuit conversion when model dimensions (2D, 3D, and axisymmetric)
have two solvers, or the number of divisions differ between the two models.
The execution method is the same as it is for an analysis that uses only one solver. A selection
from among the following can be made.
• JMAG-Designer GUI (foreground):
See “Running Direct Coupled Analyses from JMAG-Designer” on page 691.
• JMAG-Scheduler (background):
See “Running Direct Coupled Analyses from JMAG-Scheduler” on page 693.
• Command line (background):
See “Running Direct Coupled Analyses from the Command Line Using JMAG-Scheduler”
on page 696.
Creating Input Files for Coupled Analyses

For notes on creating input files etc., we will explain them in “Coupled Analysis”. Perform the fol-
lowing operation in the JMAG-Scheduler main window to open the [Setting monitoring of remote
jobs] dialog.
690
Running Direct Coupled Analyses from JMAG-Designer

• Run Direct Coupled Analyses Using Analysis Groups (page 691)
Run Direct Coupled Analyses Using Analysis Groups

MEMO When running an analysis from JMAG-Designer, its progress can be checked. However, other
operations cannot be performed during analysis in JMAG-Designer.
1. Create multiple analysis studies in one project, and set the required settings for each.
MEMO It is also possible to create another study by duplicating one study.
To duplicate, click a study in the [Project Manager] tree and select [Duplicate Study]. The analysis
type in [Study Type] in the [Duplicate Study] dialog can be changed.
2. Create an analysis group.
ii. Select [Create Analysis Group].
iii. In the [Create Analysis Group] dialog, set the parameters.
iv. Click [OK].
MEMO If a study belongs to an analysis group, cases cannot be added from the case control of
that study and the commands to execute them are not also available.
3. Set the properties of the analysis group.
iii. In the [Analysis Group Properties] dialog, set the parameters.
iv. Click [OK].
4. Execute the analysis in the analysis group.
ii. When executing the case displayed in the graphics window, select [Run Active Case].
When executing all cases in the analysis group, select [Run All Cases].
When executing the case displayed in the graphics window using JMAG-Scheduler,
select [Submit Study].
When executing all cases in the analysis group using JMAG-Scheduler, select [Submit
all cases to queue].
When [Submit Study] or [Submit all cases to queue] is selected, the [Submit Job] dialog will
be displayed. From this dialog, a remote analysis can be performed on each case.
MEMO Analysis of cases in the [Design Table] dialog are not executed even if [Run All Cases] or
[Submit all cases to queue] are selected.
MEMO If JMAG is installed on a machine on the same network as the local machine, that
machine can be used for analysis and mesh generation. This is called “remote execution”.
For remote execution, use the JMAG Remote System or a remote machine (or third-party job
scheduler) using SSH. Which one should be used depends on the OS environment of the local
and remote machines. See “Remote Execution Methods” on page 587.
691
Operations
5. If necessary, add the result file to the project after the analysis is completed.
When analysis is executed from JMAG-Scheduler or the command line, it is necessary to load
the result file manually.
• See “Load Result Data from Result Files” on page 468 for the procedure for associating
results files with studies when importing.
• For the procedures for reading only results files, see “Open Result Files” on page 470.
692
Running Direct Coupled Analyses from JMAG-Scheduler

Start JMAG-Scheduler and add a coupled analysis job.
• Add Jobs to JMAG-Scheduler from JMAG-Designer (page 693)
• Add Jobs in JMAG-Scheduler (page 694)
Add Jobs to JMAG-Scheduler from JMAG-Designer

Start JMAG-Scheduler from the [Project Manager] tree of JMAG-Designer, and run a coupled anal-
ysis.
1. Prepare analysis input files (. jcf) for use in coupled analysis.

When running coupled analysis using two solvers, the JCF file of the other analysis must be
exported. For example, when running a coupled analysis of a magnetic field analysis and thermal
analysis, export a JCF file from either one of the analysis.
For coupled analysis using three or more solvers, make sure to first export the JCF files of the two
analysis.
2. In JMAG-Designer, open a project that contains different analysis studies than step 1.
For example, when running a coupled analysis of a magnetic field analysis and thermal analysis
and the magnetic field analysis JCF file has been prepared in step 1, open the thermal analysis
project here.
3. Add a job to JMAG-Scheduler from the [Project Manager] tree in JMAG-Designer.
ii. Select [Submit Active Case to Queue] or [Submit All Cases to Queue].
MEMO “Batch processing” in JMAG-Designer is the execution of an analysis using JMAG-
Scheduler.
MEMO When [Submit All Cases to Queue] is selected, the cases where results are already output
are skipped, and only the analyses of cases where the results are not output are added as jobs in
JMAG-Scheduler.
Cases which are not selected for the case control checkbox will also be skipped.
MEMO When [Submit All Cases to Queue] is performed, added jobs are automatically grouped
into a single group. The study name (or analysis group name) is used for the group name.
iii. Click [Add File] under [Coupling Type].
iv. In the [Coupled Files] dialog, click [Add File] .

v. In the [Add File] dialog, select the JCF file from step 1.
vi. Click [Open].
Return to the [Coupled Files] dialog. The file is added to the table.
MEMO [Coupled Files] can be specified multiple times.
MEMO Select a target from a table, and then click [Delete] when deleting files from tables.
vii.Select the JCF file from the [Coupled analysis files] table and set the parameters for
coupled analysis.
693
Operations
viii.Click [OK].
ix. In the [Submit to Queue] dialog, set the parameters for job execution.
x. Click [Submit Job].
The added job is automatically run.
4. If necessary, add the result file to the project after the analysis is complete.
When analysis is executed from JMAG-Scheduler or the command line, it is necessary to read
Add Jobs in JMAG-Scheduler

This section describes the procedure for starting JMAG-Scheduler directly and running analysis.
1. Prepare multiple analysis input files (.jcf, .jproj) for use in calculations.
When using a JCF file as an input file, export the JCF file for each analysis. For example, when
performing a coupled analysis of a magnetic field analysis and thermal analysis, please export the
JCF file of both analyses.
When using a project file as an input file, create an analysis group for direct coupled analysis. For
details on how to create analysis groups, see “Run Direct Coupled Analyses Using Analysis
Groups” on page 691.
Export the study to the JCF file when the snapshot analysis function or massively parallel pro-
cessing (MPP) function is used in the magnetic field analysis study. It cannot be run directly
from the project file.
For start up procedures, see “Screen Configuration Edition”.
3. Add input files (.jcf, .jproj) as a Job to JMAG-Scheduler.
i. Select [Job] > [Add Job].
Or click . The [Add Job] dialog is displayed.
ii. Select the file type from the list and specify the file (.jcf, .jproj) as in step 1.
If the input file is a JCF file, specify only a JCF file for one analysis. For example, for a cou-
pled magnetic field analysis and coupled thermal analysis, specify one of either the magnetic
field analysis or the thermal analysis file.
MEMO When multiple JCF files are specified, all jobs created from these files are automatically
grouped into a single group. The name of the first specified JCF file is used as the group name by
default.
iii. Click [Open].
For JCF files, the [Submit Queue] dialog is displayed.
In the case of a project file, the [Submit Project File] box opens.
4. If a JCF file is specified in step 3, specify the coupled analysis file and further set param-
eters for the coupled analysis.
694
For example, in case of coupled analysis of magnetic field analysis and thermal analysis, when
specifying the magnetic field analysis file in step 3, specify the thermal analysis file here.
i. Click [Add File] under [Coupling Type].
ii. In the [Coupled Files] dialog, click [Add File].
The [Add Job] dialog is displayed.
iii. Select the file type from the list, and select the file (.jcf or .inp).
iv. Click [Open].
Return to the [Coupled Files] dialog. The file is added to the table.
MEMO Multiple files can be specified for coupling.
MEMO Select a target from a table, and then click [Remove File] when removing files from
tables.
v. Select the JCF file from the table and set the parameters for coupled analysis.
vi. Click [OK].
Returns to the [Add Job] dialog.
5. Set the parameters for job execution.
Parameters for executing jobs must be set when the JCF file is an input file and also when it is a
project file. For details on parameters, see “Parameter Explanation Edition”.
The added job is automatically run.
7. If necessary, add the result file to the project after the analysis is complete.
695
Operations
Running Direct Coupled Analyses from the Command Line Using

JMAG-Scheduler
Call JMAG-Scheduler from the command line and run coupled analyses.
• Perform Analyses Using Job Files (page 698):
Use this method when using a project file (.jproj) as an analysis input file or when changing the
step increments for each analysis.
Notes
• The command lines for direct coupled analysis in JMAG-Scheduler are only supported on Win-
dows.
• The command line is not supported for direct coupled analysis for JMAG-Designer and Abaqus.
• When analysis is executed from JMAG-Scheduler or the command line, it is necessary to read
Perform Analyses Using JCF Files

Specify the input file (.jcf ) for analysis and run the analysis.
1. In JMAG-Designer, export an input JCF file to be used for coupled analysis.

Note the following when specifying commands:
Command:
(JMAG installation folder)\scheduler.exe^
1st_JCF_file_path^
--sub 2nd_JCF_file_path
Example:
"C:\Program Files\JMAG-Designer22.2\scheduler.exe"^
"C:\mag.jcf" --sub "c:\heat.jcf"
696
MEMO If the --sub option is omitted, the analysis is performed using only the first specified JCF file.
 JMAG-Scheduler command-line options for direct coupled analysis

This section describes the JMAG-Scheduler options used when performing a direct coupled analysis
from the command line. If an option is omitted, the default values shown in the table below are
used.
For options not described here, refer to the description in “JMAG-Scheduler Command-Line
Options” on page 438.
Example:
When running a coupled analysis with the following settings using the “mag.jcf” and “heat.jcf file”:
• Average the losses over the range between the last step and the fifth step counted from the last
step.
• Use a different mesh for each analysis.
(JMAG installation folder)\scheduler.exe "c:\mag.jcf"^
--sub "c:\heat.jcf" --mapping on --avloss on --setrange on --range 5
Long option Type Default Description

--sub String - Specifies the full path of the JCF file used in the cou-
pled analysis, whichever is not specified in the argu-
ment.
Example:
--sub “D:\JMAG\Input\heat.jcf”
--mapping on/off off Enables [Use Different Mesh].
--position Real number 0 Sets the position of the temperature evaluation cross
section.
The unit of measurement is meter for a 2D model or
degree for an axisymmetric model.
--mapmax Real number 100 Specifies the upper limit of loss generation region. The
unit of measurement is meter.
--mapmin Real number -100 Specifies the lower limit of loss generation region. The
unit of measurement is meter.
--avloss on/off off Enables [Average Loss].
--setrange on/off off Calculates the average loss from the range defined from
the --rangetype and --range options.
If 'off', the average loss for all steps is used.
--rangetype time/step Step Sets how to specify the range for calculating the loss
average.
Specify by time if --rangetype=time, or by step number
if --rangetype=step.
--range Real number 0 Specifies the start of the loss average calculation range.
If --rangetype=time, the unit is (s).
The average value is calculated from the range from the
step/time specified here to the last step/time.
--rotationaverage on/off off Enables [Rotation Average].
--savemesh on/off off Enables [Generate Mesh Only Once].
697
Operations
Perform Analyses Using Job Files

Specify a job file (.xml) to run the analysis. In this method, the following points are supported:
• Project files (.jproj) as well as JCF files can be used as input files for analysis.
• Different step intervals can be set for magnetic field analysis and thermal analysis (or thermal
stress analysis).
1. Export a job file (.xml) with JMAG-Scheduler.

The job file contains the job information and the settings specified in the [Submit to Queue]
dialog and the [Coupled Files] dialog. For example, the following settings are contained.
For details on exporting job files (.xml), see “Exporting Job Settings to a File” on page 435.
Note the following when specifying commands:
Command:
(JMAG installation folder)\scheduler.exe Job_file_path
Example:
“C:\Program Files\JMAG-Designer22.2\scheduler.exe” “D:\JMAG\coupled_job.xml”
For options, refer to the description in “JMAG-Scheduler Command-Line Options” on page

438.
698
Application Study and Integration Study
Executing Application Studies
Application studies are analysis studies for specific applications.

• Efficiency map analysis study
• Create Maps in Speed-Priority Studies or Reduced Order Model Studies (page 702)
• Create Maps in Accuracy-Priority Studies (page 707)
• Create Maps from External Input Data (page 711)
• Create a Difference Map or Ratio Map (page 712)
MEMO For application study details and parameters, see “Parameter Explanation Edition”.
701
Operations
Executing Efficiency Map Analysis Studies

In efficiency map analysis studies, maps such as efficiency and loss can be created by using physical
quantity results of FEA.
An efficiency map study has the following types. For details, see “Parameter Explanation Edition”.
Type Description
[Speed Priority] FEA of multiple calculation points are run in a single case, and one map is
created from the response table which includes the analysis results. The fol-
lowing motor models are supported:
• Permanent magnet synchronous motor (3-phase, 6-phase)
• Synchronous reluctance motor (3-phase, 6-phase)
• Induction motor (3-phase, 6-phase):
However, JMAG-Designer supports 2D models only.
• Wound-field synchronous motor (3-phase, 6-phase)
[Reduced Order Model] FEA of multiple calculation points are run in a single case, and one map is
created from the response table which includes the analysis results. FEA is
run with lower calculation accuracy and calculation costs compared to
speed-priority study. The following motor models are supported:
• Permanent magnet synchronous motor (3-phase, 6-phase)
• Synchronous reluctance motor (3-phase, 6-phase)
• Induction motor (3-phase, 6-phase):
However, JMAG-Designer supports 2D models only.
The settings and input parameters that are required for analysis models are
basically the same as speed-priority study. However, some of the settings for
analysis steps and linear solver are determined by JMAG to reduce calcula-
tion time.
[Accuracy Priority] FEA of multiple cases are run, and one map is created from the response
table which includes the analysis results. A single case corresponds to one
operating point in the map. More accurate results can be obtained by link-
ing with control circuits.
This study can be used in various applications without limiting to motors.
Create Maps in Speed-Priority Studies or Reduced Order Model Studies

• Perform Efficiency Map Analysis (page 702)
• Create an Efficiency Map (page 704)
• Create a New Response Table from an Existing Response Table (page 706)
• Update Response Tables by Adding Calculation Points (page 706)
• Create an Accuracy-Priority Study from a Speed-Priority or Reduced Order Study (page 706)
Perform Efficiency Map Analysis
1. Create an efficiency map analysis study.

Below is the procedure for creating a new efficiency map analysis study.
702
i. Prepare a model.
When analyzing an induction motor, prepare a 2D model.
ii. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click the model and select [New Application
Study] > [Efficiency Map Analysis].
An efficiency map analysis study is created.
If more than one study exists in the [Project Manager] tree, the inactive (unselected) studies
can not be edited.
MEMO It is also possible to create new efficiency map analysis studies by duplicating existing studies
or application studies. In a duplicated efficiency map analysis study, certain material and condition
settings are inherited from the study this study was duplicated from. For duplicating a study, see
“Duplicating Studies” on page 282.
2. Perform material, condition, circuit, and study property settings, and mesh generation.
When executing parametric analysis with design variables being used for dimension val-
ues, perform case control settings as well.
Be sure to set the following functions and conditions:
PMSM and synchronous RM:

Circuits
• Current source:
Use one Three-phase Current Source component for calculating a three-phase motor.
Use one Multi Phase Current Source component or two Three-phase Current Source components
for calculating a dual three-phase motor or six-phase motor.
• Stator coil circuit components (FEM Coil components, Winding Three-phase Coil compo-
nents, Winding Multiphase Coil components, etc.)
Analysis conditions
• Motion condition
• Torque conditions
• Conditions for setting stator coil current (FEM Coil conditions, Coil Winding Settings func-
tion, etc.)
Induction motor:
Circuits
• Current source:
nents, etc.)
• Rotor cage circuit components (FEM Conductor components, Winding Cage components,
etc.)
Analysis conditions
tion, etc.)
703
Operations
• Conditions for setting rotor cage current (FEM Conductor conditions, or Cage Winding set-
tings function)
WFSM:
Circuits
• Current source for stator coil:
nents, Winding Multiphase Coil components, etc.)
• Current source for field coil (Current Source (1 terminal) component)
• Field coil circuit components (FEM Coil component)
Analysis conditions
tion, etc.)
• Conditions for setting field coil current (FEM Coil condition)
3. Set calculation points for creating response tables and options for analysis.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click [Response Table Creation], and select [Edit].
ii. In the [Create Response Table] dialog, set the calculation resolution.
iii. Click [OK].
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click the study and select [Run Active Case].
For procedures other than that described above, see the following pages:
whole.
• Select [Output Table Results Only. (No Mesh will be Output.)].
Create an Efficiency Map
1. Check the response table outputted from an efficiency map analysis study.
704
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click [Calculated Table] under [Efficiency Map] >
[Response Table], and select [Show].
The [Response Table] dialog is displayed.
In the response table, the current, phase, and speed and physical quantity results (torque, loss,
etc.) are displayed.
Response table
ii. Click [Close].

2. Create an efficiency map using the response table.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click [Map] under [Efficiency Map], and select
[Generate].
ii. In the [Efficiency Map] setting panel, define an efficiency map.
iii. Click [OK].
An map settings is added under [Efficiency Map] > [Map] in the [Project Manager] tree.
MEMO [Show], [Edit], [Duplicate], and [Delete] can be performed from the menu appearing
after right-clicking the map settings.
3. Display the map.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click the map settings under [Efficiency Map] >
[Map], and select [Show].
The efficiency map is displayed in the [Efficiency Map] dialog.
• From the [View] menu, the physical quantity for [Y Axis (Right)] can be switched.
• If [Edit map plot properties] is clicked, the [Map plot properties] dialog opens. In this
dialog, the minimum value and maximum value of each axis of the efficiency map, the
color of the map, etc. can be changed.
• If [Details] is clicked, the efficiency map settings and correction values are displayed.
• By right-clicking on any point in the map and selecting [Add Point], the loss ratios (hys-
teresis loss, copper loss, eddy current loss, and mechanical loss) at that point are displayed
in a pie chart.
705
Operations
Create a New Response Table from an Existing Response Table
1. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click [Response Table] under [Efficiency Map], and
select [Generate].
2. In the [Response Table Correction] dialog, set the correction values.
3. Click [OK].
In the [Project Manager] tree, under [Efficiency Map] > [Response Table], a response table with
correction values applied will be added.
Response tables with correction values applied have a “<correction>” string appended to the end
of their names.
To see the response table with the correction values applied, right-click this table in the [Project
Manager] tree, and select [Show].
Update Response Tables by Adding Calculation Points

In speed-priority studies, the results can be updated by adding new calculation points to the cases
where results have already been output.
1. Open an efficiency map study that has results.

2. Add new calculation points.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click [Response Table Creation], and select [Add
Point Sequence and Recalculate].
ii. In the [Create Response Table (Add Calculation Points)] dialog, set the calculation
points to be added.
iii. Click [OK].
For details, see following pages:
4. Check the response table.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click [Table Results] under [Efficiency Map] >
It can be confirmed in the response table that new calculation point result values are added.
Redisplay efficiency maps to recalculate efficiency maps based on updated response tables.
Create an Accuracy-Priority Study from a Speed-Priority or Reduced Order Study
1. Display the map.
706
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click the map setting under [Efficiency Map] >
2. Create an accuracy-priority study.
i. Click [Create Study].
ii. In the [Create Study] dialog, define the operating points for an accuracy-priority
study.
iii. Click [OK].
The active study is duplicated and a new accuracy-priority study is created.
Create Maps in Accuracy-Priority Studies

• Perform Efficiency Map Analysis (page 707)
• Create an Efficiency Map (page 709)
• Add Result Values to an Existing Response Table (page 710)
• Create a New Response Table from an Existing Response Table (page 710)
• Update Response Tables by Adding Calculation Points (page 710)
Perform Efficiency Map Analysis

MEMO In an accuracy-priority study coupled with a control circuit analysis, a more accurate efficiency
map taking into account for example the carrier component of an inverter can be created.
1. Create an efficiency map analysis study.

Below is the procedure for creating a new efficiency map analysis study.
i. Prepare a model.
ii. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click the model and select [New Application
Study] > [Efficiency Map Analysis].
An efficiency map analysis study is created.
If more than one study exists in the [Project Manager] tree, the inactive (unselected) studies
can not be edited.
MEMO It is also possible to create new efficiency map analysis studies by duplicating existing studies
or application studies. In a duplicated efficiency map analysis study, certain material and condition
settings are inherited from the study this study was duplicated from. For duplicating a study, see
“Duplicating Studies” on page 282.
2. Perform material, condition, circuit, and study property settings, and mesh generation.
The following settings are required:
Conditions
3. Select parameters to use as case parameters.
A case parameter is a parameter whose value changes in an efficiency map analysis study.
707
Operations
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click [Case Control], and select [Select Parame-
ters].
The [Select Parametric Parameters] dialog is displayed.
ii. Select the checkboxes for the parameters to be used as design variables. Addition-
ally, double-click the variable name cells and input the variable names.
The checkbox of speed in the motion condition should be selected.
ters and the under-score (_) character.
iii. Click [OK].
MEMO When clicking [OK (Open Generate Parametric Cases)] or [OK (Open Design Table)],
a different dialog becomes active.
4. Define case parameters.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click [Case Control], and select [Equations].
ii. In the [Equations] dialog, click [Add].
iii. In the [Edit Equation] dialog, define variables and expressions.
IMPORTANT Be sure to add the speed as a variable. Also, in an efficiency map analy-
sis study, add all physical quantities to be made variable (for example current amplitude
and current phase).
iv. Click [OK].

The defined variables and expressions are displayed in the [Equations] dialog.
MEMO When an equation is selected from the list and [Modify] or [Remove] is clicked, the
equation can be changed or deleted.
v. Click [OK].
5. Enter case parameter values (values at each operating point of an efficiency map).
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click [Response Table Creation], and select [Edit].
ii. In the [Create Response Table] dialog, defines the operating points.
iii. Click [OK (Create Cases)].
Cases are created from the settings in the [Create Response Table] dialog.
MEMO To create multiple cases by varying the values of parameters other than [Speed], [Param-
eter 1], [Parameter 2], and [Parameter 3], do so from the [Generate Parametric Cases] dialog. For
708
the [Generate Parametric Cases] dialog, see “Assigning Values to Design Variables and Creating
Multiple Cases” on page 634.
iv. By switching the case displayed in the graphics window using the case control bar,
the settings for each case can be checked.

i. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click the study and select [Run All Cases].
For procedures other than that described above, see the following pages.
whole.
• Select [Output Table Results Only. (No Mesh will be Output.)].
Create an Efficiency Map
1. Check the response table outputted from an efficiency map analysis study.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click [Calculated Table] under [Efficiency Map] >
In the response table, in each case the parameter values such as speed, and physical quantity
results (torque, loss, etc.), are displayed.
ii. Click [Close].
2. Create an efficiency map using the response table.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click [Map] under [Efficiency Map], and select
[Generate].
ii. In the [Efficiency Map] setting panel, set the efficiency map.
iii. Click [OK].
An map settings is added under [Efficiency Map] > [Map] in the [Project Manager] tree.
MEMO [Show], [Edit], [Duplicate], and [Delete] can be performed from the menu appearing
after right-clicking the map settings.
3. Display the map.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click the map settings under [Efficiency Map] >
• From the [View] menu, the physical quantity for [Y Axis (Right)] can be switched.
709
Operations
• If [Edit map plot properties] is clicked, the [Map plot properties] dialog opens. In this
dialog, the minimum value and maximum value of each axis of the efficiency map, the
color of the map, etc. can be changed.
• If [Details] is clicked, the efficiency map settings and correction values are displayed.
• By right-clicking on any point in the map and selecting [Add Point], the loss ratios (hys-
teresis loss, copper loss, eddy current loss, and mechanical loss) at that point are displayed
in a pie chart.
ii. Click [OK].
Add Result Values to an Existing Response Table

1. Create response values.
on page 639.
select [Add Result Type].
3. In the [Response Table Result Type] dialog, select the response value to be added.
4. Click [OK].
The specified response values are added to all response tables.
Create a New Response Table from an Existing Response Table
1. Create response values for total loss or loss.

on page 639.
select [Generate].
3. In the [Custom Response Table] dialog, set a new response table.
4. Click [OK].
A new response table is added under [Efficiency Map] > [Response Table] in the [Project man-
ager] tree.
If this is a customized response table, “<custom>” is appended to the end of the name.
To check a customized response table, right-click that response table in the [Project Manager]
tree, and click [Show].
Update Response Tables by Adding Calculation Points

New calculation points (calculation cases) can be added to efficiency map analysis studies. Run anal-
ysis for the added calculation points to reflect the results of that analysis in the response table.
1. Open an efficiency map study that has results.

2. Add new calculation points.
710
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click [Response Table Creation], and select [Add
Point Sequence and Recalculate].
ii. In the [Create Response Table (Add Calculation Points)] dialog, add new calculation
points.
iii. Click [OK].
For details, see following pages:
4. Check the response table.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click [Table Results] under [Efficiency Map] >
Create Maps from External Input Data

Maps can be created from external data. The following methods for use are possible:
• Create efficiency maps from measured data and compare them with efficiency maps created from
JMAG efficiency map analyses
• Export efficiency map data created on another machine to CSV files and import it into the effi-
ciency map analysis studies of the current machine
MEMO It is possible to create maps from external data for efficiency map analysis studies with no
results. However, maps created from external data cannot be displayed unless results are output to effi-
ciency map analysis studies to which the maps belong.
1. Prepare input files when importing map creation input data from files into JMAG-
Designer.
JMAG-Designer can import input data from CSV files (.csv), text files (.txt), and table files (.pa).
When preparing CSV files of actual measurement data:

A description of the CSV file format is provided in “Creating Maps from External Data” in
“Parameter Explanation Edition”. See “Parameter Explanation Edition” for details.
When preparing CSV files of maps created by JMAG efficiency map analysis studies:
Use the following procedure to export CSV files.
i. Right-click the map displayed under [Efficiency Map] > [Map] in the [Project Man-
ager] tree, and select [Show].
ii. In the [Efficiency Map] dialog, click [Export].
iii. In the [Export CSV of Efficiency Map] dialog, select the result data to be output, in
addition to the output method, and click [Export].
The CSV file is exported to the location specified.
2. Use external input data to add map settings to an efficiency map analysis study.
711
Operations
i. Right-click [Map] under [Efficiency Map] in the [Project Manager] tree, and select
[Create from External Data].
ii. In the [Efficiency Map from External Data] dialog, enter the map name in [Title].
iii. Select an input method and enter data for creating a map in the lower table.
If an input data file was prepared in Step 1, click [Import from File] and specify the
file to be imported.
For [Matrix Input], only one instance of result data can be input to one map.
For [Batch Entry Multiple Types], multiple result data can be input to one map. Select this if
you have prepared CSV files of the map created in the efficiency map analysis studies in step
1.
The following operation is for when [Batch Entry Multiple Types] is selected.
• To add a new result type column to the table, select [Add New Result Type] from the list.
Enter a result type name in the [Result Type Name] box and click [Add] .
• To delete a result data column from the table, select the result type name from the list and
click [Delete] .
• To change a result type column name, select the result type from the list and enter a new
name in the [Result Type Name] box.
MEMO The value obtained by adding result data for which [Calculate as loss] is selected is out-
put as [Total loss].
iv. Click [OK].
A new map settings is added under [Efficiency Map] > [Map] in the [Project Manager] tree.
3. Confirm the map for the external input data.
i. Right-click the map settings in Step 2 under [Efficiency Map] > [Map] in the [Project
The [Efficiency Map] dialog is displayed and the map is drawn.
Create a Difference Map or Ratio Map

This performs difference calculations (or ratio calculations) between two maps to create difference
maps (ratio maps).
Any two maps for calculating differences (ratios) may differ in model type and study type (speed-
priority/reduced order model/accuracy-priority). Difference maps (ratio maps) can be created not
only from maps created from efficiency map analysis, but also from maps created based on external
input data.
However, any two maps used for difference calculations (or ratio calculations) must be within the
same project.
MEMO It is possible to create difference maps (ratio maps) for efficiency map analysis studies with no
results. However, difference maps (ratio maps) cannot be displayed unless results are output to the effi-
ciency map analysis studies to which the maps belong.
1. Add difference map (or ratio map) settings to the efficiency map analysis study.
i. Right-click [Map] under [Efficiency Map] in the [Project Manager] tree and select
[Create a Difference Map].
712
ii. In the [Difference Efficiency Map] setting panel, enter the name of the difference
map (or ratio map) in [Title].
iii. In the [Comparison] group box, specify the two maps to calculate the difference (or
ratio) for.
Note that [[Comparison 1]-[Comparison 2]] is calculated for [Calculate Difference], and
[[Comparison 1]/[Comparison 2]] is calculated for [Calculate Ratio].
iv. In the [Result Type] table, confirm the association of the result data that the two
maps possess.
The [Result Type Association] button will not be active if all result data within the two maps
is related by matching names.
If there is any result data that is not related, click [Result Type Association] to open the
[Result Type Association] dialog.
• To perform an association, select result data under [Result Type] in the [Comparison 1]
table. Select result data in the [Comparison 2] table to associate with the result data
selected in the [Comparison 1] table, and click [Set].
MEMO One instance of result data cannot be associated with multiple result data.
• To remove an association, select the result data row in the [Comparison 1] table and click
[Release].
v. Select [Calculate Difference] or [Calculate Ratio] for [Display Type].
vi. Click [OK].
A new difference map (or ratio map) settings is added under [Efficiency Map] > [Map] in the
2. Confirm the difference map (or ratio map).
i. Right-click the map settings in Step 1 under [Efficiency Map] > [Map] in the [Project
The [Efficiency Map] dialog is displayed and the difference map (or ratio map) is drawn.
713
Operations
714
Executing Integration Analysis Studies
An integration analysis study is an analysis study of control circuits that can use multiple JMAG-RT models
(RTT files). You do not have to create an FEM model for an integration analysis study.

• Create JMAG-RT Models (page 716)
• Run an Integration Analysis Study (page 717)
• Create Maps from JMAG-RT Model Circuit Components (page 718)
• Run Direct Coupled Analysis Between Integration Analysis Studies and Magnetic Field Analysis Studies
(page 720)
MEMO For details on integration analysis study and parameters, see the “Parameter Explanation Edition”.
715
Operations
Create JMAG-RT Models

Multiple JMAG-RT models can be used in the integration analysis study. You can export the RTT
file of the JMAG-RT model from the following program.
• JMAG-RT
• JMAG-Express Classic
• JMAG-Designer Efficiency Map Study (Speed-Priority)
The following is an example of using an efficiency map analysis study (speed-priority):
1. Execute JMAG-Designer efficiency map analysis study (speed-priority).

When the analysis is completed, the calculation table is added to the [Response Table] under
[Efficiency Map] in the [Project Manager] tree.
2. Create an RTT file from the response table.
i. Right-click the calculation table displayed in the [Project Manager] tree.
ii. Select [Show].
iii. In the [Response Table] dialog, click the arrow icon on the [Export] button.
iv. Select [RTT File Export].
v. In the [Export RTT File from Response Table] dialog, set each parameter, and click
[Export].
For details on parameters, see the explanation in “Parameter Explanation Edition”.
716
Run an Integration Analysis Study

1. Create a integration model in JMAG-Designer.
ii. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click a project, and select [Integration Model].
An integration model is added to the project.
MEMO When an RTT file is imported into a project using the [Open] command in the [File]
menu, the integration model and integration analysis study are automatically added to the proj-
ect. In addition, JMAG-RT Model components are placed in the circuit of the integration analy-
sis study, and these components are automatically linked to the imported RTT files.
2. Create an integration analysis study in the integration model.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click the integration model and select [New
Study].
An integration analysis study is added to the project. Circuits are added by default to the inte-
gration analysis study.
3. Create settings for the circuit.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click the integration study and select [Show].
The Circuit Editor ([Edit Circuit] dialog) is displayed.
ii. Create a circuit diagram and set the properties of the circuit components.
Place the JMAG-RT Model components and link them to the RTT file.
The procedure for creating the circuit is the same as for the magnetic field analysis study. See
“Setting Circuits” on page 355.
4. Set other parameters.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click the integration study and select [Proper-
ties].
ii. In the [Study Properties] dialog, set the properties of the study.
The parameters that can be set in the properties of the integration analysis study are the same
as those of the magnetic field transient analysis study, with some exceptions. For parameters
on study properties, see “Parameter Explanation Edition”.
Integration analysis studies can be run on its own or can be added to and run in an analysis
group.
For procedures, see the following pages:
The result data of the integration analysis study can be viewed in a table format or a graph for-
mat.
You can also check the electric current and electric potential in Circuit Editor.
717
Operations
Create Maps from JMAG-RT Model Circuit Components

If an JMAG-RT Model component that is to be linked to the RTT file of the following motor, is
added to the circuit of the integration analysis study, a response table can be created based on the
lookup table of each RTT.
• 3-phase permanent magnet synchronous motor (LdLq model, spatial harmonic model (sinusoi-
dal drive))
• 6-phase permanent magnet synchronous motor
• 3-phase synchronous reluctance motor (spatial harmonic model (sinusoidal drive))
• 6-phase synchronous reluctance motor
• Induction machine
You can create a map from the response table that is created.
MEMO A map can be created before running the calculations in an integration analysis study.
1. Place JMAG-RT Model components in the circuit of the integration analysis study and
link them to the RTT file.
2. Create a response table from the JMAG-RT Model components.
i. Right-click the JMAG-RT Model component in step 1.
ii. Select [Create Response Table].
A new response table is created from the JMAG-RT Model components.
The response table is added under [Integration Study] > [Results] (or [Result Items]) > [Effi-
ciency Map] > [Response Table] in the [Project Manager] tree.
The same name as the JMAG-RT Model component is used for the response table name.
3. Create a map from the response table of the JMAG-RT Model component.
i. Right-click [Map] under [Integration Study] > [Results] (or [Result Items]) > [Effi-
ciency Map] in the [Project Manager] tree.
ii. Select [Create].
718
iii. In the [Efficiency Map] setting panel, select the response table for the JMAG-RT
Model component from [Response Table].
iv. Enter a value in [Max Voltage] of [Inverter Rating].
v. Modify any additional parameters as needed and click [OK].
A new map is added under [Integration Study] > [Results] (or [Result Items]) > [Efficiency
Map] > [Map] in the [Project Manager] tree.
4. Display the map created from the response table of the JMAG-RT Model component.
i. Right-click the map under [Integration Study] > [Results] (or [Result Items]) > [Effi-
ciency Map] > [Map] in the [Project Manager] tree.
ii. Select [Show].
719
Operations
Run Direct Coupled Analysis Between Integration Analysis Studies

and Magnetic Field Analysis Studies
Direct coupled analysis is possible between magnetic field transient analysis and control circuit anal-
ysis.
1. Create a magnetic field transient analysis study for a project.

i. Add an FEM model to a project, then create a magnetic field transient analysis study.
See “Creating a New Basic Study” on page 278.
ii. Set the study properties.
• Select [Direct Coupled Analysis] in the [Coupled Analysis] setting panel.
• Define analysis steps in the [Step Control] setting panel.
• When controlling analysis steps output to result files with [Control of Output Interval] in
the [Output Control] setting panel, configure settings to ensure that the analysis steps to
be referenced from the integration analysis studies are output.
• Do not select [Massively Parallel Processing (MPP)] in the [Parallel Computing Settings]
setting panel.
iii. Set the materials and conditions.
Create an analysis model the same as when running magnetic field analysis alone.
• Do not use Topology Optimization conditions.
iv. Create the mesh.
• Do not use [Generate Mesh at Each Step] (Patch mesh function).
v. Set the circuit.
• When the value at a terminal in the magnetic field analysis electric circuit is to be used in
an integration analysis study, connect the Electric FEA Input component to that terminal.
• When the value at a terminal in the magnetic field analysis control circuit is to be used in
an integration analysis study, connect the Control FEA Input component to that terminal.
• When the value obtained from an integration analysis study is to be used at a terminal
with a magnetic field analysis electric circuit, connect the Electric FEA Output compo-
nent to that terminal.
• When the value obtained from an integration analysis study is to be used at a terminal
with a magnetic field analysis control circuit, connect the Control FEA Output compo-
nent to that terminal.
2. Create an integration analysis study for the same project.
i. Add an integration analysis model to the project, then create the integration analysis
study.
See “Run an Integration Analysis Study” on page 717.
ii. Set the study properties and the circuit.
3. Add the analysis studies created in Step 1 and Step 2 to a single analysis group.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click [Project] and select [Create Analysis Group].
ii. In the [Create Analysis Group] dialog, set the parameters.
720
iii. Click [OK].

4. Use an FEA component to connect the magnetic field analysis study and the integration
analysis study.
i. Open the integration analysis study [Edit Circuit] dialog.
ii. Add the FEA component to the circuit.
Click [FEA] on the toolbar followed by clicking within the Circuit Editor window to add
the FEA component to the circuit.
iii. Select a magnetic field analysis study as a reference study in the FEA component
property settings.
Right-click the FEA component and select [Edit] to display the [FEA] setting panel.
The names of magnetic field analysis studies associated with the same analysis group as the
currently selected integration analysis study are displayed in the [Study] list for [Reference] in
the [FEA] setting panel. Select the study to link from those that are displayed.
When Electric FEA Input components, Electric FEA Output components, Control FEA
Input components, or Control FEA Output components are added to a selected magnetic
field analysis study, input terminals and output terminals are then added to the FEA compo-
nents.
iv. Complete the circuit of the integration analysis study.
The execution method is the same as when using only a single solver. Select one from the follow-
ing:
• JMAG-Designer GUI (foreground):
See “Running Analyses from JMAG-Designer” on page 415.
• JMAG-Scheduler (background):
See “Running Analyses from JMAG-Scheduler” on page 425.
When running from JMAG-Scheduler, however, run by specifying a JPROJ file. Running by
specifying a JCF file is not possible.
• Command line (background):
See “Running Analyses from the Command Line” on page 437.
IMPORTANT Coupled analysis between integration analysis studies and magnetic field
transient analysis studies cannot be restarted.
721
Operations
722
Dashboard Functions
Input Parameter and Result Items List Display
JMAG-Designer has the dashboard function for displaying study input parameter values and analysis results all
within a single window.
Using this function allows study input parameter values to be checked in a single dashboard, and each value can
also be changed. Mesh generation and analysis can also continue to be executed.
The layout and items displayed in dashboards can also be freely customized by the user. By adding customized
display settings in advance, dashboards can be used with the same display settings even with other projects.
The types of dashboards available in JMAG are as follows:
Dashboard (dialog) Description

[Analysis Parameter View] The following items can be displayed in this dialog.
dialog • Study case information
• Case parameters (design variables), equations, and measurement variables
• Study parameter values (CAD parameters, materials, conditions, study properties,
mesh properties, and circuit properties)
• FEM model diagrams, circuit diagrams, and the winding setting diagrams of the
Winding Setting function
• Response table creation settings for efficiency map analysis studies
• The analysis results (graphs, diagrams, and response tables) of all cases for studies
The following operations are possible from this dialog.

• Changing input parameter values for use with analysis
• Adding and deleting cases
• Adding and deleting design variables and equations
• Changing materials applied to parts
• Mesh generation
• Editing circuits and winding settings
• Editing the response table creation settings for efficiency map analysis
• Executing analysis (includes parametric analysis, optimization, and application stud-
ies)
• Loading result files and displaying results
• Calling the [Result View] dialog (the [All Cases Result View] dialog)
This dialog can be displayed even for individual projects, models, and analysis groups,
but can only display information for single studies.
[Result View] dialog The following items can be displayed in this dialog.
• The analysis results (graphs, diagrams, and response tables) of the currently selected
case of a study
and the information of multiple studies can be displayed within a single dialog.
725
Operations
Dashboard (dialog) Description

[All Cases Result View] The following items can be displayed in this dialog.
dialog • The analysis results (graphs, diagrams, and response tables) of all studies for cases
and the information of multiple studies can be displayed within a single dialog.

• Checking and Editing Study Input Parameter Values (page 727)
• Checking the Results of Individual Cases or All Cases in a Single Dashboard (page 738)
• Executing Parametric Analysis from the [Analysis Parameter View] Dialog and Displaying the Results (page
741)
726
Checking and Editing Study Input Parameter Values

Cases added to selected studies, the variable values of those cases, and the input parameter values of
currently selected cases are displayed in the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog. Model diagrams and
circuit diagrams, etc., can also be displayed.
Operations in the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog allow new cases can be added to studies, dis-
played input parameter values to be changed, and mesh generation and analysis to be executed.
The layout and display items of the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog can be customized by the user.
Customized display settings can be even used with other projects when those display settings are
added to JMAG-Designer in advance.
• Open the [Analysis Parameter View] Dialog (page 727)
• Change the Layout and Display Items in the [Analysis Parameter View] Dialog (page 728)
• Change Input Parameters in the [Analysis Parameter View] Dialog (page 732)
• Call Input Parameter Setting Values from the [Analysis Parameter View] Dialog (page 734)
• Generate Mesh and Execute Analysis from the [Analysis Parameter View] Dialog (page 736)
Open the [Analysis Parameter View] Dialog
 Open from the [Project Manager] tree
1. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click a study, model, project, or analysis group.
2. Select [Analysis Parameter View].
The [Analysis Parameter View] dialog is displayed.
The [Case Control] toolbar is displayed in the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog.
The [Analysis Parameter View] dialog is divided into two areas by default, with [Case List] dis-
played in the upper area and [Parametric Parameters] displayed in the lower area.
In addition to [Case List] and [Parametric Parameters], other items can also be displayed in the
[Analysis Parameter View] dialog. See “Change the Layout and Display Items in the [Analysis
Parameter View] Dialog” on page 728.
 Open from the menu
1. To check the input parameter values of a currently selected study, from the menu bar,
select [View] > [Analysis Parameter View (Current Study)].
To check the input parameter values of studies under a currently selected model, from
the menu bar, select [View] > [Analysis Parameter View (Current Model)].
727
Operations
To check the input parameter values of studies associated with currently selected analy-
sis groups, from the menu bar, select [View] > [Analysis Parameter View (Current Analy-
sis Group)].
To check the input parameter values of studies under a project, from the menu bar,
select [View] > [Analysis Parameter View (Project)].
 Open from the shortcut icon
1. Click the shortcut icon .

This opens the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog for studies.
Change the Layout and Display Items in the [Analysis Parameter View] Dialog
The [Analysis Parameter View] dialog can be divided into a maximum of four areas, and one item
can be displayed per each individual area.
Items that can be displayed in the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog are as follows:
Display Item Description

[Case List] This item is displayed in the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog by default.
This item includes cases added to selected studies, the variable values of
those cases, equations, and measurement variables. Operations such as
selecting displayed studies and adding new cases, etc., can also be executed.
[Parametric Parameters] This item is displayed in the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog by default.
This item includes the input parameter values of a currently selected case.
Input parameter values are displayed in a tree format. Operations such as
those for case parameters (design variables), etc., can also be executed.
[Circuit] This item includes circuit diagrams added to studies. Diagrams can be
enlarged/shrunk by using the middle button (wheel) on the mouse.
While circuits cannot be changed with [Circuit], the Circuit Editor can be
called instead.
[Model View] This item includes analysis model diagrams. Diagrams can be enlarged/
shrunk by using the middle button (wheel) on the mouse.
While models cannot be changed with [Model View], it is possible to
change the materials that are applied to parts.
[Winding] This item includes the winding diagrams of the Winding Setting function
set to study. Diagrams can be enlarged/shrunk by using the middle button
(wheel) on the mouse.
While winding settings cannot be changed with [Winding], the [Winding
Setting] dialog can be called instead.
[Create Response Table This item includes the response table creation settings of efficiency map
(Speed Priority)] analysis studies.
While settings cannot be changed with [Create Response Table (Speed Pri-
ority)], the [Create Response Table] dialog can be called instead.
[Result Table (Response This item includes the response tables of analysis results.
Data)]
[Result Items] This item includes analysis results (graphs, diagrams).
728
1. When the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog is opened for projects, models, or analysis
groups, specify models and studies to display in the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog.
Only the information of a single study can be displayed in the [Analysis Parameter View] box.
2. [Case List] and [Analysis Parameter View] can be freely switched between being shown/
hidden from the menu bar.
• To display only [Case List], from the menu bar, select [View] > [Show Only Case List].
• To display only [Parametric Parameters], from the menu bar, select [View] > [Show Only
Parameter List].
• To display both [Case List] and [Parametric Parameters], from the menu bar, select [View] >
[Show All].
3. In the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog, change the items displayed.
Add items using the context menu:

i. Hover the mouse pointer over an empty space in the upper area or lower area in the
[Analysis Parameter View] dialog, and right-click.
729
Operations
ii. Select [Split Left and Right].

The area is divided into two. The below diagram shows when [Split Left and Right] is exe-
cuted for the upper area.
iii. Hover the mouse pointer over an empty area, and right-click.
iv. Select items to display in the empty area, such as [Model View] and [Circuit].
Items already displayed in the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog and items not set to a cur-
rently displayed study cannot be selected.
The below diagram shows when [Model View] is selected.
When items are selected from the menu that is displayed by right-clicking an area where an
item is already displayed, the item displayed in that area is replaced by the item selected.
v. With [Model View] and [Circuit], display diagrams can be enlarged/shrunk by using
the middle button (wheel) on the mouse. Hover the mouse pointer over each area,
and rotate the middle button (wheel) on the mouse up and down.
vi. To clear only the display items in an area while leaving the area itself displayed,
hover the mouse pointer over that area, and right-click. Select [Clear].
730
To delete an area itself, hover the mouse pointer over that area, and right-click.
Select [Close].
Add items using the menus in the menu bar:

i. From the menu bar, select [View] > [Display Item List].
The [Display Items] dialog is displayed.
ii. In the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog, select the checkboxes of items to display.
A maximum of four checkboxes for a maximum of four items can be selected.
The checkboxes of items not set to a currently displayed study cannot be selected.
Settings configured in the [Display Items] dialog are immediately reflected in the [Analysis
Parameter View] dialog. Display items other than the [Case List] will be added to the lower
area.
iii. Click the [×] button to close the [Display Items] dialog.
iv. For [Model View] and [Circuit], display diagrams can be enlarged/shrunk by using the
middle button (wheel) on the mouse.
Hover the mouse pointer over each area and rotate the middle button (wheel) on the
mouse up and down.
v. To clear only the display items in an area while leaving the area itself displayed,
hover the mouse pointer over that area, and right-click. Select [Clear].
To delete an area itself, hover the mouse pointer over that area, and right-click.
Select [Close].
4. The display settings (layout and display item information) of the [Analysis Parameter
View] dialog are saved as a display item set.
Display item sets are recorded to the registry of the machine used when JMAG-Designer ends.
Added display item sets can therefore be called at any time from the [Analysis Parameter View]
dialog when using JMAG-Designer Version 20.2 or later.
i. From the menu bar, select [View] > [Display Item Set List].
ii. In the [Display Item Set List] dialog, enter a display item set name, and click [Regist].
The display settings currently being used for the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog are added
as a display item set.
iii. Click [Close].

5. To return the layout and display items of the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog back to
default, from the menu bar, select [View] > [Display Item Reset].
Only [Case List] and [Parametric Parameters] are displayed in the [Analysis Parameter View] dia-
log by default.
731
Operations
6. To call added display item sets, select [View] > [Display Item Set List] > (display item set
name) from the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog menu bar.
Display item sets can also be called via keyboard shortcuts.
Change Input Parameters in the [Analysis Parameter View] Dialog

1. The input parameter values of each case added to studies and analysis groups can be
checked and changed in the [Case List] area of the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog.
• Cases added to studies and analysis groups are displayed in the [Case List] table.
• Select and right-click cells and rows to display the menu.
• Double-click each cell to change the values of those cells.
• Cases can be added and deleted by using the buttons below the table.
• The input parameter values of cases where results are output cannot be changed. Instead,
change the input parameter values of cases that have been duplicated. To duplicate cases,
right-click a case and select [Copy]. Next, right-click again and select [Paste New Cases].
• Case parameters (design variables) added to studies are displayed in the [Case Parameters]
table. Parameters with checkboxes selected in the [Parametric Parameters] tree are also dis-
played in the [Case Parameters] table.
• Equations added to studies can be checked in the [Equations] table. Equations can be added
and deleted by using the buttons to the right of the table.
• Measurement variables added to studies can be checked in the [Measurements] table, but new
measurement variables cannot be added with the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog.
732
2. The input parameter values of a currently selected case can be checked and changed in
the [Parametric Parameters] area.
Input parameters are displayed in a tree format in categories such as [Materials] and [Condi-
tions].
• Click [Restore CAD Link] to display CAD parameter input parameters.
• Click the cells in the [Current Value] column in each tree to change the values of those cells.
• Materials can be selected from the materials used in the currently selected study as well as
materials added to [Bookmarks] in the [Materials] tab of the [Toolbox].
• Parameters with checkboxes selected in each tree are added to the [Case Parameters] table
under [Case List].
733
Operations
• Click [Edit Circuit] to start Circuit Editor which will display the circuits added to a study.
• Select [Show All Properties] to also display parameters in each tree that are not being used in
each condition or material setting panel.
3. Materials applied to parts can be changed from the [Model View] area.
i. Select a part displayed in [Model View], and right-click.
ii. Select [Material Allocation].
The [Material Allocation] dialog is displayed.
MEMO [Material Allocation] cannot be selected if there exists even a single case where analysis
has not yet finished for the study displayed in the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog.
iii. In the [Material] box, enter character strings included in material names.
Materials that include the character strings entered for names are displayed in the list.
Searches can be performed not only for custom materials, but materials provided by material
manufacturers also.
iv. Select a material from the list, and select the [Enter] key.
JMAG-Designer is displayed on the front window. The [Material] setting panel or the [Per-
manent Magnet] setting panel is opened in the [Project Manager].
MEMO Depending on the order in which operations are executed, the [Update confirmation]
dialog may be displayed before the [Material] setting panel or the [Permanent Magnet] setting
panel is opened. In these circumstances, check the content in the [Update confirmation] dialog,
then click [OK]. The [Material] setting panel or the [Permanent Magnet] setting panel will then
open afterward.
v. Edit the settings in each setting panel, and click [OK].
The [Analysis Parameter View] dialog is displayed on the front window.
4. To reflect the changed content of the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog to the study,
from the menu bar, select [File] > [Apply].
You can also use the [Apply] button when the [Case List] area is displayed.
Closing the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog without executing [Apply] will result in losing the
changes made to the input parameter values in the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog.
Call Input Parameter Setting Values from the [Analysis Parameter View] Dialog
Although the following settings cannot be configured in the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog, they
can be configured from other windows that are accessed from the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog.
• Adding and deleting analysis conditions and result settings (contour plots and vector plots, etc.)
• Adding and deleting circuit components, and wiring circuits
• Changing the winding settings of the Winding Setting function
• Changing response table creation settings for efficiency map analysis studies
734
1. To add and delete analysis conditions and result settings, move to JMAG-Designer from
the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog and execute those operations in JMAG-Designer.
i. Hover the mouse pointer over the area where [Model View] is displayed in the [Anal-
ysis Parameter View] dialog, and right-click.
ii. Select [Return main window].
JMAG-Designer is made active.
iii. Add and delete analysis conditions and result settings.
iv. Click the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog.
The [Analysis Parameter View] dialog is made active.
2. To add and delete circuit components, start the Circuit Editor from the [Analysis Param-
eter View] dialog, and execute those operations in the Circuit Editor.
i. Hover the mouse pointer over the area where [Circuit] is displayed in the [Analysis
Parameter View] dialog, and right-click.
ii. Select [Edit].
For [Circuit], this displays the Circuit Editor.
iii. Change settings in the Circuit Editor.
3. To change the winding settings of the Winding Setting function, or the response table
creation settings for efficiency map analysis studies, open the dialogs for each of the
settings from the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog, and perform those operations in
those dialogs.
i. Hover the mouse pointer over the area where [Winding] or [Create Response Table
(Speed Priority)] is displayed in the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog, and right-click.
ii. Select [Edit].
For [Winding], this opens the [Winding Setting] dialog, whereas for [Create Response Table
(Speed Priority)], this opens the [Create Response Table] dialog.
iii. Change the settings in each dialog.
4. Load the changed settings into the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog.
i. Click the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog.
ii. In the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog, from the menu bar, select [File] > [Apply].
You can also use the [Apply] button when the [Case List] area is displayed.
Settings configured in the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog, and settings configured in
JMAG-Designer, Geometry Editor, the [Winding Setting] dialog, and the [Create Response
Table] dialog are also reflected in the study, and content displayed in the [Analysis Parameter
View] dialog is updated.
735
Operations
Generate Mesh and Execute Analysis from the [Analysis Parameter View] Dialog
Mesh can be generated and analysis can be executed from menus in the menu bar and the [Case
List] button.
Run Analysis
1. In the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog, check the state icon on the [Error/Warning]
button.
When error messages and warnings are output to the currently selected case of the currently
selected study, icons will be displayed on the [Error/Warning] button.
When these icons are displayed, click [Error/Warning] to confirm the details of the warning/
error, and correct settings as required.
2. To generate mesh, from the menu bar of the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog, select
[File] > [Generate Mesh].
For studies with mesh already generated, [Regenerate Mesh] is displayed in the menu instead of
[Generate Mesh].
3. To execute analysis in the foreground, from the menu bar of the [Analysis Parameter
View] dialog, select [File] > [Run].
To execute analysis in the background, from the menu bar of the [Analysis Parameter
View] dialog, select [File] > [Submit].
The [Run] button and the [Submit] button can also be used when the [Case List] area is dis-
played.
When [Run] is selected, the [Run Analysis] dialog opens after writing JCF files, which displays
analysis progress.
When [Submit] is selected, the [Submit to Queue] dialog or the [Submit Multiple Studies] dia-
log is displayed. Specify each parameter and click [Submit Job]. JMAG-Scheduler starts, which
displays analysis progress.
MEMO When executing in the foreground, analysis is executed in the instance of JMAG-Designer
that is currently open. Therefore, the currently open instance of JMAG-Designer cannot be operated.
When executing in the background, however, data is sent from the currently open instance of JMAG-
Designer to JMAG-Scheduler. Therefore, because JMAG-Scheduler controls the analysis, the cur-
rently open instance of JMAG-Designer can still be operated.
4. From the menu bar of the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog, select [File] > [Load
Results], and load the results into the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog.
Check in the [All Cases Result View] dialog:

Click [View All Results] in the [Case List] area to open the [All Cases Result View] dialog.
Results are displayed based on the result settings (graphs and contour plots, etc.) added to the
study.
736
Check in the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog:

Add [Result Items] and [Result Table (Response Data)] to the [Analysis Parameter] dialog refer-
ring to the procedure described in “Change the Layout and Display Items in the [Analysis
Parameter View] Dialog” on page 728.
Results are displayed based on the result settings (graphs and contour plots, etc.) added to the
study.
Run Optimization
1. From the menu bar of the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog, select [File] > [Optimiza-
tion].
2. In the [Optimization] dialog, configure settings for design variables and objective func-
tions, and run optimization.
The procedure from this step onwards is the same as that for “Run Analysis” on page 736.
737
Operations
Checking the Results of Individual Cases or All Cases in a Single

Dashboard
The analysis results (graphs, diagrams, and result tables) of selected cases can be displayed in the
[Result View] dialog, and the analysis results of all cases for selected studies can be displayed in the
[All Cases Result View] dialog.
The layout and display items of the [Result View] dialog and the [All Cases Result View] dialog can
be freely customized by the user.
• Prepare Diagrams and Filters to Display in the [Result View] Dialog (page 738)
• Open the [Result View] Dialog (page 738)
• Set the Layout and Display Items in the [Result View] Dialog (page 739)
Prepare Diagrams and Filters to Display in the [Result View] Dialog

Results to display in the [Result View] dialog must be set to studies prior to opening the [Result
View] dialog. This same requirement applies to the [All Cases Result View] dialog.
1. Set the results to display in the result view.

Add settings for section graphs and contour plots, etc., to a study.
[Capture Image] can be used to also display images added to the [Images] folder in the [Proj-
ect Manager] tree.
2. Create custom filters in advance to display in the [All Cases Result View] dialog only the
results of cases that satisfy certain conditions.
It is possible to display only cases that satisfy the conditions defined by custom filters by entering
the names of those custom filters in the [Look For] box of the [All Cases Result View] dialog.
For details on the procedure for creating custom filters, see “Filtering Cases with Specified Con-
dition” on page 637.
Open the [Result View] Dialog
 Open from the [Project Manager] tree
1. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click a model, project, or analysis group.

Or right-click [Results] under a study in the [Project Manager] tree.
2. To display the results of individual cases in a single dashboard, select [Result View] >
[Show].
To display the results of all cases in a single dashboard, select [Result View] > [Show All
Cases].
For individual cases, the [Result View] dialog is displayed, and for all cases, the [All Cases Result
View] dialog is displayed.
[Response Table] displayed in the area in the upper part (or right side) of each dialog shows the
response table.
[Result View] displayed in the area in the lower part (or left side) shows result graphs and result
diagrams.
738
The [Step Control] toolbar, the [Phase Control] toolbar, and the [Case Control] toolbar are dis-
played in each dialog.
 Open from the shortcut icon
1. Click the shortcut icon .

The [All Cases Result View] dialog opens as a result of this procedure.
Set the Layout and Display Items in the [Result View] Dialog
1. When the [Result View] dialog is opened for projects, models, and analysis groups,
specify the models and studies to display in the [Result View] dialog.
2. [Result View] and [Response Table] can be switched between being shown/hidden arbi-
trarily.
Display only the response table:

From the menu bar, select [View] > [Show Only Response Table].
Display only result graphs and result diagrams:

From the menu bar, select [View] > [Show Only Result Items].
Display response tables, result graphs, and result diagrams:

From the menu bar, select [View] > [Show All].
3. Select result items to display in the [Result View] area.
Select the result items to display:

i. From the menu bar, select [Edit] > [Add Result Item].
ii. In the [Selection Result Item] dialog, select the checkboxes of the results to display.
739
Operations
Delete result items:

i. In the [Result View] dialog or [All Cases Result View] dialog, right-click a graph or
image displayed.
ii. Select [Delete Result Item].
4. Change the number of result items displayed in a single row in the [Result View] area.
i. Select [View] > [Change the Number of Displayed Items] > [1 Column Display]/[2 Col-
umn Display]/[3 Column Display].
5. By default, the size of graphs and diagrams displayed in the [Result View] area are auto-
matically adjusted to match the horizontal width of the [Result View] dialog or [All
Cases Result View] dialog.
To turn off this automatic adjustment for sizes, from the menu bar, select [View] >
[Resize the Image to Fit the Width], and clear the checkbox displayed to the left of
[Resize the Image to Fit the Width].
6. To reflect the changed content of each dialog to the study, from the menu bar, select
[File] > [Apply].
You can also use the [Apply] button.
Closing the [Result View] dialog or [All Cases Result View] dialog without clicking the [Apply]
button will result in losing the changes made to the input parameter values in the [Result View]
dialog or [All Cases Result View] dialog.
740
Executing Parametric Analysis from the [Analysis Parameter View]

Dialog and Displaying the Results
An example procedure is shown below.
1. Create a parametric analysis base model.

i. Create a study.
ii. Configure settings for materials, conditions, and study properties, and generate a
mesh.
number of machines. Result file amounts and file numbers are reduced by configuring the follow-
ing settings under [Output] in the [Study Properties] dialog prior to running analysis. This can
reduce the time required to transfer and calculate the entire files themselves.
iii. Configure settings for measurements, response values, and result displays (contour
plots, section graphs, etc.).
Measurements, response data, and result displays cannot be set in the [Analysis Parameter
View] dialog.
2. Open the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog.
i. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click the study and select [Analysis Parameter
View].
The [Analysis Parameter View] dialog is divided into two areas by default, with [Case List]
displayed in the upper area and [Parametric Parameters] displayed in the lower area.
3. In the trees displayed on the lower part of the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog, select
the checkboxes of input parameters to be used as design variables for parametric analy-
sis.
Select the checkboxes to the left of input parameters to add those input parameters to the [Case
Parameters] table.
4. Equations can be added and edited as necessary.
Variables displayed in each table can be filtered by using the [Look For] box. To remove the filter,
leave the [Look For] box blank.
Measurements can only be checked. Measurements cannot be added, removed, or modified.
5. Add cases and configure values for design variables.
When adding 1 case:

i. In the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog, click [Add Case] displayed beneath the [Case
List] table.
ii. Modify the values of the design variable for the added case.
Values can be modified by double-clicking the cell of the design variable in the table.
When adding multiple cases:

i. In the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog, click the arrow icon  on the [Add Case]
button displayed beneath the [Case List] table, and click [Create Cases].
741
Operations
ii. In the [Generate Parametric Cases] dialog, select the design variable [Type], and click
[Edit].
The [Type] will change based on the type of design variable (integer, real number, flag, table,
etc.).
The dialog that opens after clicking [Edit] will vary based on the [Type].
iii. Configure parameters in the displayed dialog, and click [OK].
iv. In the [Generate Parametric Cases] dialog, click [Generate].
The case is added to the [Case List] in the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog.
v. Modify the values of the design variable for the added case.
Values can be modified by double-clicking the cell of the design variable in the table.
6. In the upper right of the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog, click [Apply].
Content edited in the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog is reflected in the study.
7. Check the state icon displayed on the [Error/Warning] button.
When any error messages and warning messages are output for a current case of a study, icons are
displayed on the [Error/Warning] button.
When these icons are displayed, click [Error/Warning] to confirm the details of the warning/
error, and correct settings as required.
When running analyses in the foreground:

JMAG-Designer cannot be operated during analysis while the analysis is being run in the fore-
ground.
i. In the upper right of the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog, click [Run].
The analysis starts. Analysis progress is displayed in the [Run Analysis] dialog while the anal-
ysis is running.
When running analyses in the background:

JMAG-Designer can be operated during analysis while the analysis is being run in the back-
ground.
i. In the upper right of the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog, click the arrow icon  on
the [Run] button.
ii. Select [Submit].
iii. In the [Submit Job] dialog, configure parameters to be used in running the analysis,
and click [Run].
The analysis starts. Analysis progress is displayed in JMAG-Scheduler while the analysis is
running.
8. When an analysis is run in the background, the results of that analysis are loaded into
the project after the analysis ends.
i. In the upper right of the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog, click [Load Results].
9. Analysis results can be checked in the [All Cases Result View] dialog.
742
i. In the upper right of the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog, click [View All Results].
The [All Cases Result View] dialog is displayed.
Response values added to the study, contour plots, and section graphs are displayed.
743
Operations
744
Tools
Using Tools
This chapter describes the tools installed in JMAG-Designer. The following tools are available in JMAG-
Designer.
 File management
• JMAG-Explorer:
This tool manages JPROJ files, JCF files, and JPLOT files output from JMAG-Designer in a database. With
this tool, JMAG files can be browsed in a list.
 Material data creation

• Hysteresis Curve Creator:
With this tool, it is possible to create a hysteresis curve for JMAG FEA from measurement data.
 Modeling and analysis

• JMAG-Express:
This tool can be used to create and evaluate 2D motor models. Geometry Editor is used to create custom
motor shapes. The same solver as JMAG-Designer's efficiency map analysis (reduced order model) is used for
evaluation. Details are explained in the “JMAG-Express, JMAG-RT, and JMAG-RTViewer Edition”.
• JMAG-Express Classic (Name before Version 20.1: JMAG-Express):
This tool can be used to create and evaluate 2D motor models. The solver for JMAG-Express Classic is used
for evaluation. The details are explained in the “JMAG-Express, JMAG-RT, and JMAG-RTViewer Edition”.
 Analysis
• Motor Inductance Calculation:
With this tool, d-q axis inductance for a three-phase PM synchronous motor model can be computed using a
magnetic field analysis JCF file.
• Bus Bar Inductance Calculation:
With this tool, self and mutual inductance of conductors can be computed using the JCF file from a mag-
netic field analysis or a current distribution analysis.
• Coil Inductance Calculation:
With this tool, inductance in a model containing coils, such as in a transformer model, can be computed
using a magnetic field analysis JCF file.
• Field Integral Calculation:
With this tool, the magnetic flux density (or electric field) at a specified point can be computed by integra-
tion, using magnetization vectors, current density, beam current, or charge data included in magnetic field
analysis (or electric field analysis) results.
 Linking with Third-party software

• Force Export for Virtual.Lab:
With this tool, electromagnetic force computed from JMAG magnetic field transient analysis can be output
to a file that can be used in vibration/noise analysis in LMS Virtual.Lab.
747
Operations
• Force Mapping for Abaqus:

With this tool, electromagnetic and magnetostrictive force computed from JMAG magnetic field analysis can
be mapped to the input file for structural analysis in the nonlinear finite element analysis program Abaqus.
• Heat Generation Mapping for Abaqus:
With this tool, generated heat computed from JMAG magnetic field analysis and iron loss analysis can be
mapped to the input file for heat transfer analysis in the nonlinear finite element analysis program Abaqus.
• Exporting Multi-purpose Files:
With this tool, it is possible to export mesh data, analysis data (time, frequency, etc.), and result data (physi-
cal quantities) created in JMAG to a Nastran file (or CSV file or Universal file). The exported file can be used
with simulation software other than JMAG.
Results data from simulation software other than JMAG can be mapped to a JMAG input file.
• JMAG-RT:
With this tool, it is possible to compute for example motor characteristics taking into account for example
magnetic saturation in JMAG FEA and export the results in a file format (.rtt) for circuit simulators. Using
an exported RTT file, high-speed control circuit simulation can be executed while taking into account motor
characteristics.
 Result evaluation
• JMAG-RT Viewer:
With this tool, outputted RTT file data can be checked and torque-speed curves and efficiency maps can be
created based on the outputted RTT file.

• Launching Tools (page 749)
748
Using Tools
Launching Tools
The following tools can be launched from the [Tool] menu of JMAG-Designer. Select [Tool] > (tool
name) from JMAG-Designer menu bar.
• JMAG-RT
• Motor Inductance Calculation
• Bus Bar Inductance Calculation
• Coil Inductance Calculation
• Field Integral Calculation
• Force Export for Virtual.Lab
• Force Mapping for Abaqus
• Heat Generation Mapping for Abaqus
• Exporting Multi-purpose Files
• Hysteresis Curve Creator
• JMAG-Explorer
The following tool can be launched from the Windows menu.

• JMAG-Express 21.2
• JMAG-RT Viewer
749
Operations
750
JMAG-Express
Using JMAG-Express
JMAG-Express features simple procedures for creating analysis models and fast evaluation.
This chapter describes the analysis procedures using JMAG-Express.

• Use JMAG-Express to Perform Evaluation (page 754)
• Use JMAG-Express to Perform Parametric Analysis (page 759)
• Use JMAG-Express to Perform Optimization (page 764)
• Link JMAG-Express and JMAG-Designer (page 766)
• Show Hidden Parameters in the Workspace (page 767)
• Use Your Own Geometry in JMAG-Express (page 768)
753
Operations
Use JMAG-Express to Perform Evaluation

This section describes the basic procedures for using JMAG-Express.
1. Start JMAG-Express and create a new project or open an existing project.

The following procedures are for Windows:
i. Click the Windows [Start] icon.
ii. Click JMAG-Express from the list of applications to open the [JMAG-Express Startup]
dialog.
iii. To create a new project, select [Select Model/Scenario]. Select the model type and
geometry (rotor and stator). In addition, check the checkboxes for the scenarios that
you want to use.
• Under [Type], you can select [IPM], [SPM], [Outer Rotor/IPM], [Outer Rotor/SPM], or
[Induction Motor]. Once the [Type] is determined, the geometries that can be selected for
[Rotor] and [Stator] will change accordingly.
In [Rotor] or [Stator], you can select a rotor or stator geometry from the geometry library
in Geometry Editor.
If you have created geometries according to certain rules and added them to the geometry
library, these geometries can also be selected in [Rotor] or [Stator].
• A scenario is a template that contains the necessary settings (such as analysis conditions
circuits) for the evaluation items. One study is created from one scenario.
The scenarios preinstalled in JMAG-Express (hereinafter referred to as “preinstalled sce-
narios”) are categorized as [Magnetic Design], [Thermal Design], and [Structural Design].
Depending on the model type, there are different scenarios that can be selected.
[Custom] displays the analysis templates that you have added to the [Custom] folder in
the [Analysis Templates] tab in JMAG-Designer.
See “Parameter Explanation Edition” for notes on creating geometries and scenarios (anal-
ysis templates) for use in JMAG-Express.
iv. To open an existing project, select [Select File] and click the [...] button. In the [Open
JMAG Project File] dialog, specify a JPROJ file and click [Open].
When JMAG-Express is started directly, only studies supported by FR licenses can be loaded
from the JPROJ file.
754
Using JMAG-Express
v. Click [OK].
The generated studies are displayed in the JMAG-Express View (the main window of JMAG-
Express). The names of the studies are displayed in the [Evaluate] group on the [Home] tab of
the menu.
MEMO The preferences for JMAG-Express and JMAG-Designer, such as the display language and
back-ground color, can be changed in the [Preferences] dialog. To open the [Preferences] dialog from
JMAG-Express, click [Preferences] in the [File] tab.
However, when using a preinstalled scenario, do not change the settings for the units of measurement
from the defaults.
2. In each tab of the Workspace, change the parameter values.
Depending on the selected geometries and scenarios, the tabs displayed in the Workspace and the
parameters displayed on each tab will change.
Each tab displays parameters and their values. Click a value to open the entry field. Enter a new
value and press the [Enter] key on the keyboard.
When using a preinstalled model or a model created in the Geometry Editor and clicking a CAD
parameter in the [Dimension] tab, the [Model] tab will show the angle or length dimension line
related to that CAD parameter.
3. Check the results of changing the parameter values on each tab of the Data View and in
the design table.
When you change the settings on each tab in the Workspace, the diagrams displayed on the
[Model] tab, [Winding] tab, and [Circuit] tab in the Data View will be updated.
755
Operations
• To adjust the position or size of a diagram, use the buttons in the [View] group on the [View]
tab of the menu. You can also rotate the wheel button on the mouse or click the left mouse
button to adjust the diagram.
• Clearing the checkbox for a study name displayed in the [Circuit] group on the [View] tab of
the menu will hide the circuit for that study from the [Circuit] tab in the Data View.
If changes to a parameter value generates geometry that cannot be used in the analysis, or if
there is an inconsistency in the settings, an error icon will be displayed in the [Status] column
of the design table. Check the parameter values.
4. Run the analysis in the foreground.
If an analysis is run in the foreground, you will be unable to operate JMAG-Express during the
analysis. You will also be unable to exit JMAG-Express.
i. From among the studies displayed in the [Evaluate] group on the [Home] tab of the
menu, select the checkboxes for the studies to be used in the calculation.
From among the cases displayed in the design table, select the checkboxes for the
cases to be used in the calculation.
The checkboxes that are selected for a study will determine the type of analysis that will be
performed (magnetic field analysis, thermal analysis, or structural analysis).
The checkboxes that are selected for a case will determine the combination of the input values
used in a calculation.
ii. On the [Home] tab of the menu, in the [Evaluate] group, click [Run] > [Run].
The calculation of the case will start. The progress of the calculation is displayed on the prog-
ress bar.
When the calculation has finished, the result data will be loaded automatically and displayed
in the design table and on the [Result] tab of the Data View.
MEMO When result data is loaded for cases, new cases are automatically added to the design
table.
5. In the design table, check the response values.
756
Using JMAG-Express
The design table shows the values of the input parameters that have been changed from their
default values. The response values are also displayed.
• To increase or decrease the number of items displayed in the design table, click [Show/Hide
Columns] in the [Design Table] group on the [View] tab of the menu. Only those items that
are selected in the [Show/Hide Columns] dialog will be displayed in the design table.
6. Check the analysis results in the [Result] tab of the Data View.
The [Result] tab displays efficiency maps, N-T graphs, contour plots, and more. The items dis-
played will depend on the scenario that has been selected. If a transient analysis was performed in
the scenario, then the steps can be selected with the step control.
• To change the display magnification of the [Result] tab, click [Display Magnification] in the
[Result] group of the [View] tab on the menu and select a display magnification.
• To display the [Result] tab itself in a separate window, click [Open Data View in Another
Window] in the [Window] group on the [View] tab of the menu.
• You can display graphs and maps in a separate window. For example, right-clicking a graph
and selecting [Show Graph] will open the [Graph] dialog in which the right-clicked graph is
displayed. This [Graph] dialog is the same as the one in JMAG-Designer, and allows you to
check the values of the graph data points in a table. You can also change the properties of the
graph lines.
After changing the display settings for a graph in a case, right-click the graph and select
[Apply Property to All Cases] to apply the same display settings to the same type of graph in
the other cases.
• To reduce the items (maps, graphs, and plots) displayed on the [Result] tab, clear the check-
boxes for each item name displayed in the [Result] group on the [View] tab of the menu.
• To hide the results of a case from the [Result] tab, clear the checkbox for that case in the
design table.
757
Operations
7. To save the project, click the [File] tab in the menu and select [Save]. In the [Save File]
dialog, set a file name and location, and click [Save].
758
Using JMAG-Express
Use JMAG-Express to Perform Parametric Analysis

Parametric analysis is a function that allows a range of parameter values to be used to evaluate the
effect of those parameters on the analysis results.
For example, if the number of poles is given as “4, 8” and the number of slots as “12, 24, 36” respec-
tively, six cases will be generated:
(1) 4 poles, 12 slots (2) 8 poles, 12 slots
By comparing the results of these cases, you can understand the effect that changing the number of
poles and slots has on the results. Parameters that have a range of values, such as the number of poles
and slots in this example, are called “design variables”.

See “Use JMAG-Express to Perform Evaluation” on page 754.
2. Create a base case by setting the parameters in each tab of the Workspace.
3. Create a new case by specifying values for the design variables.
i. On the [Edit] tab of the menu, in the [Design Table] group, click [Add Case].
ii. In the [Generate Parametric Cases] dialog, set the values of the parameters to be
design variables.
In the figure below, “4, 8” is set for the number of poles (variable name: POLES) and “24,
36" is set for the number of slots (variable name: SLOTS). In [Type], select [Table], then click
[Edit] to open the [Edit Table Range] dialog and enter the variable values.
Materials to be used as design variable values must be added to bookmarks in advance. Open
the [Select Material] dialog by clicking the material value of the part displayed in the [Mate-
rial] tab of the Workspace. Next, right-click the material and select [Add to Bookmarks].
759
Operations
iii. Click [Add].

New cases are created and added to the design table.
4. Check the results of changes made to the parameter values in each tab of the Data View
and in the design table.
To select multiple cases, click cases while pressing the [Ctrl] key or the [Shift] key on the key-
board.
• If you select a case in the design table and click [Apply Selected Case] in the [Evaluate] group
on the [Home] tab of the menu, the data for that case will be reflected in each tab of the
Workspace and in each tab of the Data View.
• To increase or decrease the number of items displayed in the design table, click [Show/Hide
Columns] in the [Design Table] group on the [View] tab of the menu. Only those items that
are selected in the [Show/Hide Columns] dialog will be displayed in the design table.
• If changes to a parameter value generates geometry that cannot be used in the analysis, or if
there is an inconsistency in the settings, an error icon will be displayed in the [Status] column
of the design table. Check the parameter values for that case.
• To delete a case, select the case in the design table, then click [Delete Selected Case] in the
[Design Table] group on the [Edit] tab of the menu.
• You can group cases together and set filters (selection criteria) for cases. These settings can
then be used when filtering the cases to be displayed in the design table or when creating
response graphs.
To create a case group, select the cases to be added to the group in the design table, then click
[Group Selected Cases] in the [Grouping Cases] group on the [Edit] tab of the menu.
To set filters, click [Add/Delete] in the [Filter] group on the [Edit] tab of the menu. Next,
click [Add] in the [Filter List] dialog to create a filter in the [Filter Definition] dialog.
Filters to be applied to the design table can also be selected from [Constraint Filter], [Case
Group Filter], and [Custom Filter] in the [Filter] group on the [Edit] tab.
5. Run the analysis in the background using JMAG-Scheduler.
When analysis is run in the background, you can operate JMAG-Express even while the analysis
is in progress. You can also exit JMAG-Express.
760
Using JMAG-Express
i. From among the studies displayed in the [Evaluate] group on the [Home] tab of the
menu, select the checkboxes for the studies to be used in the calculation.
From among the cases displayed in the design table, select the checkboxes for the
cases to be used in the calculation.
The checkboxes that are selected for a study will determine the type of analysis that will be
performed (magnetic field analysis, thermal analysis, or structural analysis).
The checkboxes that are selected for a case will determine the combination of input values
used in a calculation.
ii. On the [Home] tab of the menu, in the [Evaluate] group, click [Run] > [Submit Cases].
iii. Click [Yes] in the message dialog that asks you to save the project file.
iv. In the [Submit to Queue] dialog, select the machine to use and the format of the
input file to be transferred to the machine, then click [Submit Job].
v. In the [Save As] dialog, specify a location to save the project file and click [Save].
JMAG-Scheduler will start and the calculations for each case will begin.
6. Load the result data into JMAG-Express.
i. If you exited JMAG-Express during analysis, start JMAG-Express and open an existing
project.
In the [JMAG-Express Startup] dialog, the name of the project file that was saved during the
batch run will be displayed in [Recent Files]. Double-click the project file to open the project.
ii. On the [Home] tab of the menu, in the [Evaluate] group, select [Check Results] >
[Check New Results].
If there is a result file (.jplot) associated with the opened project, data will be loaded from that
result file.
MEMO When result data is loaded for each case, new cases are automatically added to the design
table.
7. Check the response values for each case in the design table.
8. Check the analysis results for each case in the [Result] tab of the Data View.
The [Result] tab displays the evaluation results for cases that meet both of the following condi-
tions:
• Cases that are displayed in the design table (cases that meet the filter criteria)
• Cases for which the checkbox in the [Case] column is selected in the design table
9. Check the circuit results for each case on the [Circuit] tab of the Data View.
i. On the [Home] tab of the menu, in the [Evaluate] group, click [Display Selected
Cases].
This starts the mode where the settings and results of the case selected in the design table are
displayed on each tab of the Data View.
ii. Select a case from the design table.
The following results for the selected case are displayed in the figure on the [Circuit] tab:
• The electric circuit of the magnetic design scenario:
Voltage at each terminal and the value and direction of the current passing through each
component
761
Operations
• Equivalent thermal circuit for the thermal design scenario:

Temperature at each terminal and the value and direction of the heat flux passing through
each component
iii. If a transient analysis scenario is used, change the step in the step control to display
the circuit results for that step.
When you run a scenario where both electrical and thermal circuits are used, and each circuit
has different step settings, select the circuit from the list to link with the step control.
iv. Select another case from the design table to switch to the circuit results for the
newly selected case.
v. In the [Evaluate] group on the [Home] tab of the menu, click [Display Selected Cases]
again to cancel this mode.
10.Compare the analysis results for each case graphically on the [Graph (All Cases)] tab of
the Data View.
The [Graph (All Cases)] tab displays a single graph for each physical quantity for all cases.
11.Create a response graph and compare the response values for each case in the
[Response Graph] tab of the Data View.
A response graph is a scatter plot of the response values (e.g., maximum torque) for each case.
i. On the [Home] tab of the menu, in the [Report] group, click [Add Response Graph].
ii. In the [Response Graph] dialog, select the X and Y axes for the response graph. If nec-
essary, use filters to reduce the number of cases that will be displayed in the
response graph, then click [OK].
The newly created response graph will be displayed in the [Response Graph] tab of the Data
View.
• To change the display magnification of the [Response Graph] tab, click [Display Magnifi-
cation] in the [Result] group on the [View] tab of the menu and select a display magnifi-
cation.
• To display the [Response Graph] tab itself in a separate window, click [Open Data View in
Another Window] in the [Window] group on the [View] tab of the menu.
• You can display response graphs in a separate window. Right-clicking a response graph and
selecting [Show Graph] will open the [Graph] dialog in which the right-clicked response
graph is displayed. This [Graph] dialog is the same as the one in JMAG-Designer, and
762
Using JMAG-Express
allows you to check the values of the response graph data points in a table. You can also
change the properties of the graph lines.
After changing the display settings for a response graph in a case, right-click the response
graph and select [Apply Property to All Cases] to apply the same display settings to the
same type of response graph in the other cases.
• To delete a response graph from the [Response Graph] tab, right-click the response graph
and select [Delete Graph].
763
Operations
Use JMAG-Express to Perform Optimization

Optimization is a function that derives a combination of parameter values that can meet target val-
ues for product performance. When performing optimization, the following settings are required in
addition to the normal FEA settings:
• Objective functions:
The target values of performance. For example, “an average torque of 300 Nm or more” or “a
total loss of 1 W or less”.
• Response values:
Result values used for the objective functions. For example, “average torque” and “total loss”.
• Design variables (design parameters):
Parameters used in the combinations. Dimension parameters, geometry parameters (such as the
number of poles and the number of slots), materials for parts, winding methods, the magnetiza-
tion directions of the magnets, and more.
• Constraints:
Limits to be given to the product. Like the objective functions, these are treated as conditions
that the product must satisfy. For example, “a total weight of 5.0 kg or less”.

2. Create a base case by setting the parameters in each tab of the Workspace.
3. Perform optimization.
i. On the [Home] tab of the menu, in the [Evaluate] group, click [Optimization].
ii. On each tab of the [Optimization] dialog, set the parameters for the optimization
calculation.
• On the [Constraint Conditions] tab, set the constraint conditions and the range of values
for the design variables.
• On the [Objective Functions] tab, set the response values and the objective functions.
• On the [Initial Cases] tab, set the initial cases to be used when selecting [Quadratic
Response Surface] as the optimization engine. This tab is not necessary when using
genetic algorithms as the optimization engine.
• On the [Options] tab, select the optimization engine. The parameters to be set will vary
depending on the engine that has been selected.
• On the [Output] tab, you can choose whether or not to output the objective function val-
ues to a CSV file.
• On the [Running] tab, set the machine to be used for optimization and the format of the
input files to be transferred to the machine. You can distribute the two types of jobs to be
performed in optimization across multiple machines:
(1) Optimization control jobs:
A job that generates new cases based on both combinations of the parameter values as well
as the case results that are obtained at that time.
(2) Analysis jobs:
Jobs that perform calculations for each case.
764
Using JMAG-Express
iii. In the [Optimization] dialog, click [Run], [Batch Run], or [Batch Run...].
When the [Submit to Queue] dialog is displayed, select the machine and the format of the file
to be transferred, then click [Submit Job].
When the [Save File] dialog is displayed, specify a location to save the project file and click
[Save].
The optimization calculations will begin.
If [Run in Foreground] is selected for [Optimization Controller] in the [Running] tab of the
[Optimization] dialog, JMAG-Express cannot be operated during optimization calculations.
4. When optimization calculations are run in the background, the result data is loaded into
JMAG-Express.
i. If you exited JMAG-Express during analysis, start JMAG-Express and open an existing
project.
In the [JMAG-Express Startup] dialog, the name of the project file that was saved during the
batch run will be displayed in [Recent Files]. Double-click the project file to open the project.
ii. On the [Home] tab of the menu, in the [Evaluate] group, click [Check Results] > [Load
Multi Case Results] to open the [Load Multi Case Results] dialog. In this dialog, you
can check the response values for each case and load only the necessary cases and
their results into JMAG-Express.
MEMO When result data is loaded for each case, new cases are automatically added to the design
table.
5. Check the response values for each case in the design table.
6. Check the analysis results for each case in the [Result] tab of the Data View.
7. Check the circuit results for each case on the [Circuit] tab of the Data View.
See “Use JMAG-Express to Perform Parametric Analysis” on page 759.
8. Compare the analysis results for each case graphically on the [Graph (All Cases)] tab of
the Data View.
9. Create a response graph and compare the response values for each case in the
[Response Graph] tab of the Data View.
See “Use JMAG-Express to Perform Parametric Analysis” on page 759.
765
Operations
Link JMAG-Express and JMAG-Designer

You can switch the user interface from JMAG-Designer to the JMAG-Express View or from the
JMAG-Express View to JMAG-Designer.
Switch from JMAG-Express to JMAG-Designer

1. In the JMAG-Express View, click [Switch to JMAG-Designer] in the [Tools] group on the
[Home] tab of the menu.
2. Click [OK] in the [Confirm License Switch] dialog.
The JMAG-Express View switches to JMAG-Designer.
JMAG-Designer displays studies that were sent from JMAG-Express.
The license used changes from the FR license (e.g. JMAG-Designer_FR) to the regular license
(e.g. JMAG-Designer). If there are insufficient regular licenses, the switching will be aborted.
Switch from JMAG-Designer to JMAG-Express

1. In JMAG-Designer, right-click a project, model, study, or analysis group in the [Project
Manager] tree and click [Open JMAG-Express View].
Or, click [Show JMAG-Express View] on the graphics window.
2. If you right-clicked on a project or model with multiple studies or analysis groups in step
1, the [Open JMAG-Express View] dialog will be displayed. In this dialog, select the
study or analysis group to open in the JMAG-Express View and click [OK].
3. When the [Check License Mode] dialog is displayed, click [OK].
JMAG-Designer switches to the JMAG-Express View.
The JMAG-Express View displays studies that were transferred from JMAG-Designer. Each tab
in the Workspace in JMAG-Express displays the parameters that were selected as design variables
in JMAG-Designer (the parameters that were selected in the [Select Parametric Parameters] dia-
log).
Even after switching to the JMAG-Express View, regular licenses (e.g., JMAG-Designer) will still
be used.
766
Using JMAG-Express
Show Hidden Parameters in the Workspace

If the parameter you want to change is not displayed in the Workspace, change the design variable
settings of the study in JMAG-Designer. Follow the steps below:
1. In the JMAG-Express View, click [Switch to JMAG-Designer] in the [Tools] group on the
[Home] tab of the menu.
2. Click [OK] in the [Confirm License Switch] dialog.
The JMAG-Express View switches to JMAG-Designer.
The study sent from JMAG-Express is displayed in JMAG-Designer.
3. In the JMAG-Designer [Project Manager] tree, right-click the study and select [Select
Parameters].
4. In the [Select Parametric Parameters] dialog, select the check boxes for the parameters
to be displayed in the JMAG-Express Workspace.
• It is not necessary to give variable names to parameters.
• Point type parameters such as direction and coordinate cannot be displayed in JMAG-
Express. Instead, use Real type parameters such as direction and coordinate components.
5. Click [OK].
6. Click [Show JMAG-Express View] displayed on the graphics window.
7. When the [Check License Mode] dialog is displayed, click [OK].
JMAG-Designer switches to JMAG-Express View.
The parameters with the checkboxes in the [Select Parametric Parameters] dialog are displayed
on one of the tabs in the Workspace.
767
Operations
Use Your Own Geometry in JMAG-Express

In JMAG-Express, you can use rotor and stator geometries that you have created.
Use Geometry Created in the Geometry Editor

Follow the steps below to start the Geometry Editor and add the models to be used in JMAG-
Express to the Geometry Library.
1. Start JMAG-Express.
2. In the [JMAG-Express Startup] dialog, click [Register CAD Data] to start the Geometry
Editor.
3. Create geometry in the Geometry Editor, or from the Geometry Editor menu bar, select
[File] > [Open] to import geometry from a file.
You can also create new geometry by editing a preinstalled geometry in the Geometry Editor.
4. Set region names, sets, constraints, and region pattern features for the geometry.
For details, see the explanation in “Custom Models” under “Parameter Explanation Edition”.
• Region name settings are required.
• Settings for sets can be created here or when applying a scenario to the model.
• Constraints should be set if you want to change the dimensional parameters in JMAG-
Express.
• Region pattern features ([Region Circular Pattern] and [Region Mirror Copy]) should be set
when extending the geometry of one slot to one pole when using a model that is divided in
the circumferential direction.
5. In the [Model Manager] tree, right-click the assembly and select [Add to Geometry
Library].
6. In the [Add to Geometry Library] dialog, set the tags to be assigned to the geometry for
JMAG-Express and click [OK].
The created geometry is added to the [Custom Geometry] folder in the [Geometry Library] tab.
MEMO Pay close attention to the tag settings in the [Add to Geometry Library] dialog. JMAG-
Express identifies the type of geometry according to the tags that were set for the geometry.
7. Close the Geometry Editor.
8. In the [JMAG-Express Startup] dialog in the [Rotor] or [Stator] list, select the geometry
that was created.
9. Select a scenario and click [OK].
10.If the created geometry has enough of the required settings to be used in JMAG-
Express, the JMAG-Express View will be displayed.
If any required settings are missing, then the [Analysis Template] dialog box will open. Follow
the guidance in this dialog to set the missing sets and regions.
Depending on the missing settings, the following setting panels will be displayed in the [Analysis
Template] dialog:
• [Part ID Matching] setting panel
768
Using JMAG-Express
• [Set Matching] setting panel

• [Reference Target Matching] setting panel
In addition, if the missing settings are not resolved in the [Analysis Template] dialog alone, the
[List of Setting Target is not Set] dialog will open after the [Analysis Template] dialog has closed.
Use this dialog to create the required settings that were missing.
Use Geometry in JMAG-Express That Was Created in the Geometry Editor on

Another Machine
1. Add geometry that was created in the Geometry Editor to the Geometry Library.
i. In the [Model Manager] tree, right-click the assembly and select [Add to Geometry
Library].
ii. In the [Add to Geometry Library] dialog, set the tags to be assigned to the geometry
for JMAG-Express and click [OK].
The created geometry is added to the [Custom Geometry] folder in the [Geometry Library]
tab.
MEMO Pay close attention to the tag settings in the [Add to Geometry Library] dialog. JMAG-
Express identifies the type of geometry according to the tags that were set for the geometry.
2. Export the geometry that was added to the Geometry Library.
i. In the [Geometry Library] tab of the [Toolbox], right-click the geometry and select
[Export Library].
ii. In the [Export Libraries] dialog, specify a folder and click [Select Folder].
The geometry data (.jmdl), tag information (.xml), and preview image (.png) are exported to
the specified folder.
3. Copy the folder that contains the geometry to the machine where JMAG-Express will be
used.
4. Start JMAG-Express on the machine from Step 3.
5. In the [JMAG-Express Startup] dialog, click [Import Geometry Library].
6. In the [Import Shape Library] dialog, specify the folder from Step 3 and click [Select
Folder].
The Geometry Editor opens, and the specified folder is added to the [Custom Geometry] folder
in the [Geometry Library] tab of the [Toolbox].
7. Go to the [JMAG-Express Startup] dialog, and in the [Rotor] or [Stator] list, select the
geometry that was created.
8. Select a scenario and click [OK].
9. If the created geometry has enough of the required settings to be used in JMAG-
Express, the JMAG-Express View will be displayed.
If any required settings are missing, then the [Analysis Template] dialog box will open. Follow
the guidance in this dialog to set the missing sets and regions.
769
Operations
770
Third-party Software Links
Linking with SPEED
In this chapter, the procedure for linking JMAG-Designer to the third-party software SPEED is described.
SPEED, the Scottish Power Electronics and Electric Drives, is a simulator for motor design based on magnetic
circuit method, developed by University of Glasgow. With its analysis function that uses magnetic circuit
method, and the template-based modeling function, SPEED is capable of the high-speed calculations.
SPEED can handle motors of the following types.
• Permanent-magnetic brushless motor (PC-BDC)
• Induction motor (PC-IMD)
• DC brush motor (PC-DCM)
• Synchronous reluctance motor (PC-SRD)
Evaluating the analysis of the magnetic circuit method and finite element method for a model can be done by
linking this software with JMAG-Designer.
PC-BDC, PC-IMD

• Performing Coupled Analyses by Running JMAG and SPEED Simultaneously (page 774)
773
Operations
Performing Coupled Analyses by Running JMAG and SPEED

Simultaneously
1. Start PC-BDC or PC-IMD and design the data.
It is possible to handle various geometries of brushless PM motors with PC-BDC and induction
motors with PC-IMD.
i. Click the Start icon in Windows.
ii. Select [SPEED] > [PC-BDC] or [PC-IMD] to start up SPEED.
iii. Select Example and set each parameter to design the data.
iv. Magnetic circuit simulation is executed with SPEED.
For PC-IMD, it is a prerequisite that Drive simulation is running. Before starting GoFER,
execute [Drive simulation] by selecting [Analysis] > [Drive simulation] from the PC-IMD
menu bar.
2. Set GoFER parameters.
GoFER is responsible for managing the parameters required when using data created with
SPEED in JMAG and for launching JMAG.
i. Select [Tools] > [GoFER (FE Link)] from the PC-BDC or PC-IMD menu bar.
GoFER starts.
Depending on the state of the model, the [Materials] dialog or the [GoFER (BDC)] dialog
(or the [GoFER (IMD)] dialog) opens.
IMPORTANT For PC-IMD, if Drive simulation is not running, [GoFER (FE Link)] cannot
be selected from the menu bar.
ii. If the [Materials] dialog appears, specify a material of each part and click [OK].
Click [OK] to open the [GoFER (BDC)] dialog (or [GoFER (IMD)] dialog).
iii. In the GoFER (BDC) dialog (or the GoFER (IMD) dialog), select the problem type and
click [Options].
• GoFER (BDC)
• [Single load point]
• [Bgap distribution (open circuit)]
774
Linking with SPEED
• [Btooth waveform (open circuit)]

• [Cogging torque]
• [Torque versus gamma]
• [i-psi calculation]
MEMO PC-BDC does not address the following problems.
• i-psi Polygon
• Frequency scan
• Skewed
MEMO For SPEED data, when importing to JMAG-Designer with the coil part modeled
under the FEM Coil condition and under the circuit attached condition, set as follows:
• Select the i-psi calculation as the problem type.
• Select [Use Current Condition] in [Select Current Condition or Circuit] in the [Send to
Designer from SPEED] dialog.
• GoFER (IMD)
• [No load rotate]
MEMO PC-IMD does not support problems other than No load rotate.
Click [Options] to toggle the contents displayed in the [GoFER (BDC)] dialog (or [GoFER
(IMD)] dialog).
iv. Set the geometry and rotor position settings, and click [Next].
The parameters set here determine the geometry to be exported to JMAG-Designer.
Click [Next] to switch the contents displayed in the [GoFER (BDC)] dialog (or [GoFER
(IMD)] dialog).
v. Set the parameters for each problem, and click [Next].
The parameters set here differ depending on the type of problem.
(IMD)] dialog).
775
Operations
For parameter details, see the SPEED manual.

vi. Set the link program and click [Next].
Here a link program is set up to export SPEED data.
When linking with JMAG-Designer, it is necessary to specify “GDF Runner” as the link pro-
gram. Select [Edit using other editor] from the combo box in the [Run] group box and spec-
ify “GDF Runner” in the text box below this combo box.
GDF Runner is in the following path.
\(JMAG installation folder)\SPEED\SpeedGdfRunner.exe
MEMO If JMAG-Designer is installed with the default settings, it is in the following path.
C:\Program Files\JMAG-Designer22.2\SPEED\SpeedGdfRunner.exe
(IMD)] dialog).
vii.Set the PC-FEA parameters and click [OK].
Here, parameters for analysis are set.
776
Linking with SPEED
When [OK] is clicked, the link program (GDF Runner) is executed and the [Send to
Designer from SPEED] dialog is displayed.
3. Set parameters of GDF Runner and export SPEED data to JMAG-Designer.
GDF Runner is responsible for passing SPEED data to JMAG.
i. Set the parameters in the [Send to Designer from SPEED] dialog.
ii. Click [Send] or [Run Calculation].
Clicking [Send], JMAG-Designer starts and SPEED data is imported.
Clicking [Run Calculation], JMAG-Designer starts and SPEED data is imported to JMAG-
Designer. Also, magnetic field transient analysis on the data received by JMAG-Designer
starts.
MEMO The SPEED LINK condition is set for the data imported from SPEED to JMAG-
Designer. For the SPEED Link condition, see “Parameter Explanation Edition”.
MEMO With the link between JMAG-Designer and SPEED, the solver (DP (2D)) for 2D mag-
netic field transient analysis is used.
4. If [Send] in the [Send to Designer from SPEED] dialog is clicked, modify the data in
JMAG-Designer and run analysis as necessary.
Just after importing, material and condition settings and mesh generation are completed, how-
ever current condition and motion condition parameters must be specified. Also, a circuit can be
added to the imported model and the conditions set can be modified.
5. Confirm the analysis results with JMAG-Designer.
Even when linked with SPEED, the results can be confirmed in the JMAG-Designer window in
the same way as in ordinary analysis.
6. Confirm the analysis result with SPEED.
When executing an analysis on a JCF file for which the SPEED LINK condition is set, the
SPEED PC-BDC result file (.dat) is output in addition to a JMAG-Designer JPLOT file.
Start the PC-BDC, and read-in the result file for PC-BDC as in the following procedure.
i. If the problem type is [Single Load Point], [Bgap distribution], or [Btooth wavefrom],
select [Tools] > [MatchFE Bgap Btooth] from the menu bar and specify the dat file to
be displayed.
777
Operations
MatchFE
The finite element method analysis results in JMAG-Designer is displayed in PC-BDC. Also,
if magnetic circuit analysis has already been executed with PC-BDC for the same model, the
two analysis results can be compared on the same screen using the PC-BDC MatchFE func-
tion.
MEMO The result file for MatchFE is written to the same folder as the JMAG-Designer JPLOT
file.
778
Linking with Abaqus
In this chapter, the procedure for linking third-party software Abaqus and JMAG-Designer is described.
Abaqus is finite element analysis software provided by Dassault Systemes.

• Using JMAG Analysis Results in Abaqus (page 780)
• Using Abaqus Analysis Results in JMAG (page 783)
• Simultaneously Running JMAG and Abaqus Using Mutual Results (page 785)
779
Operations
Using JMAG Analysis Results in Abaqus

By using the following tool, the physical quantities calculated by JMAG can be used for input values
to Abaqus.
• Electromagnetic force settings for the Abaqus file:
The electromagnetic forces and magnetostrictive forces calculated from JMAG's magnetic field
analysis are mapped to the Abaqus input file (.inp) as the node loads.
• Heat source settings for the Abaqus file:
Map Joule loss (or iron loss) calculated from JMAG's magnetic field analysis (or iron loss analy-
sis) as heat source values to the Abaqus input file (.inp).
IMPORTANT An exclusive license (chargeable) is required to use the above tools.
• Use Force Calculated by JMAG in Abaqus (page 780)

• Use Loss Calculated by JMAG in Abaqus (page 781)
Use Force Calculated by JMAG in Abaqus

The electromagnetic forces and magnetostrictive forces calculated from JMAG's magnetic field anal-
ysis are used as the node load input values by Abaqus.
1. Perform magnetic field analysis with JMAG.

i. Prepare a 2D or 3D model.
Axially symmetric models or partial models with translational periodicity are not supported.
For the study type, static analysis, transient analysis, or frequency analysis can be used.
iii. Set the study properties.
• When Abaqus uses nodal force, on the [Output Control] setting panel, select [Nodal
Force].
• When Abaqus uses Lorentz force, select [Lorentz Force Density] in the [Output Control]
setting panel.
iv. Set the materials.
• When Abaqus uses magnetostrictive force, set the magnetostriction characteristics.
v. Set the conditions.
• When Abaqus uses electromagnetic force, set the Force/Torque conditions.
If necessary, in order to calculate the electromagnetic force required by Abaqus, set the
Force/Torque conditions for structural analysis separately from the Force/Torque condi-
tions for results confirmation from magnetic field analysis.
• When Abaqus refers to magnetostrictive force, set the magnetostriction conditions.
• When the Multi Slice condition is used in magnetic field analysis, select [Output results of
all slices].
MEMO If Abaqus is a 2D model, the JMAG result file where the Multi Slice condition was
used cannot be referenced.
vi. Perform other settings such as Periodic Boundary conditions, and Motion conditions.
780
Linking with Abaqus
• Abaqus cannot be used for forces occurring on regions where motion conditions have
been set.
Therefore, for example, when using the force on a rotor in a motor in Abaqus, express the
motion of the rotor relatively by setting the motion conditions on the stator side.
For the procedure on executing the analysis, see the following pages.
• Running Analyses from JMAG-Designer (page 415)
• Running Analyses from JMAG-Scheduler (page 425)
• Running Analyses from the Command Line (page 437)
2. Prepare the Abaqus input file (.inp).
• Define the analysis step using one of the following:
• STATIC
• STEADY STATE DYNAMICS
• MODAL DYNAMIC
• Dynamic: Implicit method for structural analysis
• Dynamic, Explicit: Explicit method for structural analysis
• Coupled Temperature-Displacement: Implicit method for thermal and structural analysis
• Dynamic Temperature-displacement, Explicit: Explicit method for thermal and structural
analysis
• The region where force was calculated in JMAG and the region where force is taken on in
Abaqus (element grouping or surface) must have the same shape.
• Regions that take on force must be grouped together in one grouping.
• Make sure that elements with different orders are not intermingled in regions taking on force.
3. Using the electromagnetic force setting tool for the Abaqus file, map the force calcu-
lated from JMAG to the Abaqus input file (.inp).
i. From the JMAG-Designer menu bar, select [Tools] > [Force Mapping for Abaqus].
ii. In the [Force Mapping Tool for Abaqus] dialog, set the parameters.
iii. Click [Run].
Force is mapped to the Abaqus input file (.inp).
4. Run the Abaqus analysis using the input file (.inp) into which the force calculated from
JMAG was mapped.
Use Loss Calculated by JMAG in Abaqus

Joule loss or iron loss calculated from JMAG magnetic field analysis or iron loss analysis is used as
heat source distribution input values in Abaqus.
1. Run magnetic field analysis (or magnetic field analysis + iron loss analysis).
i. Prepare a model.
For the study type, static analysis, transient analysis, or frequency analysis can be used.
781
Operations

• When using Joule loss density from magnetic field analysis results in Abaqus, select [Joule
Loss Density] on the [Output Control] setting panel.
• When using Joule loss density from iron loss analysis results in Abaqus, select [Joule Loss
Density (Iron loss)] on the [Output Control] setting panel.
iv. Set the conditions.
• When inputting FEM coil or resistive element losses for thermal analysis, set the Heat
Source conditions in the model.
• When referencing the iron loss analysis results from thermal analysis, set the Iron Loss
conditions. When iron loss analysis is carried out, also set the iron loss properties for the
materials.
• For a partial model, set the Partial Model condition.
• When the Multi Slice condition is used in magnetic field analysis, select [Output results of
all slices].
MEMO If Abaqus is a 2D model, the JMAG result file where the Multi Slice condition was used
cannot be referenced.
v. Perform other settings such as materials, Periodic Boundary conditions, and Motion
conditions.
2. Prepare the Abaqus input file (.inp).
• Define the “HEAT TRANSFER” analysis step.
3. Use Heat Generation Mapping Tool for Abaqus to map the losses calculated from JMAG
to the Abaqus input file.
i. From the JMAG-Designer menu bar, select [Tools] > [Heat Generation Mapping for
Abaqus].
ii. In the [Heat Generation Mapping Tool for Abaqus] dialog, set the parameters.
iii. Click [Run].
Loss is mapped to the Abaqus input file (.inp).
4. Run Abaqus analysis using the input file (.inp) into which the loss calculated from JMAG
was mapped.
782
Linking with Abaqus
Using Abaqus Analysis Results in JMAG

The physical quantities calculated in Abaqus can be used as input values to JMAG.
• Use Abaqus Results in a JMAG Magnetic Field Analysis (page 783)
• Use Abaqus Results in a JMAG Structural Analysis (page 784)
Use Abaqus Results in a JMAG Magnetic Field Analysis

The stress and displacement calculated in Abaqus can be used as input values to JMAG magnetic
field analysis or iron loss analysis.
1. Curry out Abaqus structural analysis.

Execute “STATIC” or “DYNAMIC” and calculate stress or displacement.
The value of the third principal stress is used for JMAG stress dependent material.
2. Set the environment variable “ABAQUSDIR” to the machine that performs JMAG analy-
sis using Abaqus results.
See the explanation of ODB files in “Files edition”.
3. Run JMAG magnetic field analysis referencing the Abaqus result file (one-way coupled
analysis).
i. Prepare a model.
Transient analysis and frequency analysis are supported.
• In the [Coupled Analysis] setting panel, clear [Direct coupled analysis].
iv. Set materials and apply them to parts.
• When using stress in magnetic field analysis, select [B-H Curve (Stress dependent)] for
[Magnetic Property Type] under the [Magnetic Properties] tab in the [Material Editor]
dialog, and set the stress dependent B-H curve.
• When using stress in iron loss analysis, select [Iron Loss Table] for [Loss Type] under the
[Loss] tab in the [Material Editor] dialog, and select [Stress Dependent]. In addition, set
the stress dependent iron loss table.
• When using stress, Stress Distribution conditions are set for parts to which stress depen-
dent materials are applied. Additionally select [One Way] for [Coupled Type] and specify
the Abaqus output database file (.odb) to be referenced.
• Set Displacement conditions when using displacement. Additionally select [One Way] for
[Coupled Type] and specify the Abaqus output database file (.odb) to be referenced.
MEMO It is possible to use Stress Distribution conditions and Displacement conditions
together, and differing Abaqus output database files are also supported.
MEMO When the Abaqus output database file to be referenced has multiple analysis step
result data, the stress and/or displacement of the last step is mapped to the magnetic field anal-
ysis model.
vi. Perform other settings such as Periodic Boundary conditions, and Motion conditions.
783
Operations

Use Abaqus Results in a JMAG Structural Analysis

Stress calculated in Abaqus can be used for JMAG structural analysis input values (initial stress).
1. Carry out Abaqus structural analysis.

Execute “STATIC” or “DYNAMIC” and calculate stress or displacement.
The value of the third principal stress is used for JMAG stress dependent material.
2. Set the environment variable “ABAQUSDIR” to the machine that performs JMAG analy-
sis using Abaqus results.
See the explanation of ODB files in “Files edition”.
3. Run JMAG structural analysis (one-way coupled analysis) by referencing the Abaqus
result file.
i. Prepare a model.
ii. Create a structure analysis study.
Eigenmode analysis or frequency analysis is supported.
iii. Set the conditions.
• Set the Initial Stress condition. Additionally select the Abaqus output database file (.odb)
in [Structural Analysis File] to be referenced.
iv. Perform other settings such as Load conditions.
For the procedure on executing the analysis, see the following pages:
784
Linking with Abaqus
Simultaneously Running JMAG and Abaqus Using Mutual Results

The following direct coupled analysis can be executed.
• JMAG magnetic field analysis <=> Abaqus coupled analysis of heat and stress:
Execute analysis from Abaqus using JMAG results (Joule loss density, force). Execute analysis
from JMAG using Abaqus results (displacement, temperature).
• JMAG magnetic field analysis <=> Abaqus dynamic analysis:
Execute analysis from Abaqus using JMAG results (force). Use results (displacement) from
Abaqus to execute an analysis with JMAG.
Below, how to execute the following patterns are described.

• Add Jobs from JMAG-Scheduler (page 785)
• Add Jobs to JMAG-Scheduler from JMAG-Designer (page 788)
• Run Analyses from the Command Line Using CseCouplingDriver (page 788)
• Execute Extensions of Executed Jobs from JMAG-Scheduler (page 790)
Add Jobs from JMAG-Scheduler

Start JMAG-Scheduler directly and execute coupled analysis.
1. Prepare an Abaqus input file (.inp).

For coupled analysis of JMAG and Abaqus, export the Abaqus INP file.
When executing coupled analysis of heat and stress, create an input file that uses one of the fol-
lowing solvers.
• COUPLED TEMPERATURE - DISPLACEMENT (complete coupled analysis of heat and
stress)
• DYNAMIC TEMPERATURE-DISPLACEMENT, EXPLICIT (heat-stress coupled
dynamic analysis by explicit integration)
When executing dynamic analysis, create an input file using one of the following solvers.
• DYNAMIC (dynamic stress/displacement analysis: implicit method)
• DYNAMIC, EXPLICIT (dynamic stress/displacement analysis: explicit method)
For details of the settings required for an Abaqus input file, see “Coupled Analysis”.
2. Prepare a JMAG input file (.jcf).
i. Prepare a model.
3D models, 2D models, and axisymmetric models are supported.
For the study type use transient analysis or frequency analysis.
• Select [Direct coupled analysis] in the [Coupled Analysis] setting panel.
• Select [Only remesh air region] in the [Coupled Analysis] setting panel if the Displace-
ment condition is used and analysis models are expected to feature large amounts of defor-
mation.
785
Operations
• When passing loss density data to Abaqus, select [Joule Loss Density] in the [Output
Control] setting panel.
• When passing node force data to Abaqus, select [Nodal Force] in the [Output Control]
setting panel. When passing Lorentz force data, select [Lorentz Force Density].
• When executing frequency analysis, set the JMAG analysis frequency with [Frequency
• When executing transient analysis, set the JMAG analysis step with [Step Control] setting
panel.
When receiving temperature distribution data from Abaqus, create materials with characteris-
tics that change with temperature and set to parts.
• When the material electrical conductivity varies with temperature:
Select [Temperature Dependent] in [Conductivity] under the [Electric Properties] tab in
the [Material Editor] dialog and set the temperature - electric conductivity curve (or tem-
perature - electric resistivity curve).
• When the soft magnetic material relative permeability varies with temperature:
Select [Linear (Temperature dependent)] in [Magnetic Property Type] under the [Mag-
netic Properties] tab in the [Material Editor] dialog and set the temperature-relative per-
meability curve.
• When the soft magnetic material B-H curve varies with temperature:
Select [B-H Curve (Temperature dependent)] in [Magnetic Property Type] under the
[Magnetic Properties] tab in the [Material Editor] dialog and set the temperature - mag-
netic susceptibility curve.
Depending on the condition, there exists restrictions on parameter settings. For details, see
“Coupled Analysis Edition”.
• If necessary, define Abaqus model geometry by setting External Solver Coupling condi-
tions.
• If necessary, define JMAG model geometry by setting Partial Model conditions.
• When receiving temperature distribution from Abaqus, set Temperature Distribution con-
ditions for parts with temperature-dependent property values.
• When receiving average temperature from Abaqus, set FEM coil conditions and FEM
Coil components.
• When receiving displacement from Abaqus, set Displacement conditions.
• When transferring loss density to Abaqus, set Temperature Distribution conditions.
• When transferring iron loss density to Abaqus, set Iron Loss conditions.
• When transferring electromagnetic force to Abaqus, set [Force: Nodal Force] conditions
(alternatively, [Force: Lorentz Force] conditions, [Torque: Nodal Force] conditions, or
[Torque: Lorentz Force] conditions).
vi. In addition, perform any other necessary settings.
Set Periodic Boundary conditions, motion conditions, etc. as desired.
IMPORTANT When setting the motion conditions, there are restrictions on places for
mesh generation and settings.
vii.Generate the mesh.
Do not create air region in the following cases:
786
Linking with Abaqus
• When selecting [FEM+BEM] as [Calculation Method] in the [Study Properties] dialog

• When selecting [Only remesh air region] in the [Mesh Properties] dialog
viii.Write to a JCF file of mesh data.
See “Screen Configuration Edition” for the startup procedure.
4. Add a JMAG input file to JMAG-Scheduler as a job.
i. Select [Job] > [Add Job].
Or click . The [Add Job] dialog is displayed.
ii. Select the file type from the list and specify a .jcf file in step 2.
iii. Click [Open].
5. Select an Abaqus input file (.inp).
i. Click [Add File] in [Coupling Type] in the [Submit to Queue] dialog to open the [Cou-
pled Files] dialog.
ii. Click [Add File] to open the [Add Job] dialog.

iii. Select a file type from the list and specify an Abaqus input file (.inp).
iv. Click [Open] to return the [Coupled Files] dialog.
The file has been added to the table.
MEMO Multiple Abaqus files that have been coupled with the JMAG file can be selected.
MEMO To delete a file from the table, select the file from the table and click [Remove File] .
6. Set parameters for coupled analysis.
i. Select an INP file from the [Coupled analysis files] table and click [Abaqus Setting].
ii. In the [External Solver Couple Setting] dialog, set the parameters for coupled analysis
with Abaqus.
iii. Click [OK] to return the [Coupled Files] dialog.
iv. Select an INP file from the [Coupled analysis files] table and set the parameters for
coupled analysis.
v. Click [OK] to return the [Submit to Queue] dialog.
vi. Set the parameters for job execution.
vii.Click [Submit Job].
The added job is executed automatically.
7. After the analysis completes, add the JMAG result file (.jplot) to the JMAG project
(.jproj).
787
Operations
Add Jobs to JMAG-Scheduler from JMAG-Designer

Start JMAG-Scheduler from the [Project Manager] tree in JMAG-Designer and execute coupled
analysis.
1. Prepare an Abaqus input file (.inp).

This is the same as in “Add Jobs from JMAG-Scheduler” on page 785.
2. Prepare JMAG input data.
This is the same as in “Add Jobs from JMAG-Scheduler” on page 785, but there is no need to
export a JCF file.
3. Add the data from step 2 as a job from the [Project Manager] tree in JMAG-Designer.
i. Right-click any study (or analysis group) in the [Project Manager] tree.
ii. To run only active cases, select [Submit Active Case to Queue].
To run all the cases included in the study, select [Submit All Cases to Queue].
MEMO In JMAG-Designer, “batch processing” means analysis execution using JMAG-Sched-
uler.
MEMO When [Submit All Cases to Queue] is selected, cases where the results have already been
output are skipped, and only the analyses from the cases where the results have not been output is
added as a job to JMAG-Scheduler.
Also, cases where the checkbox has been cleared by the case control are skipped as well.
MEMO When [Submit All Cases to Queue] is selected, the added jobs are automatically grouped
into one group. For the group name, the study name (or analysis group name) is used.
4. Select an Abaqus input file (.inp).
This is the same as in “Add Jobs from JMAG-Scheduler” on page 785.
Run Analyses from the Command Line Using CseCouplingDriver

CseCouplingDriver is a program to control a coupled analysis with JMAG and Abaqus using the
CSE (CSESIMULIA Co-Simulation Engine). Command line execution is also possible using CseC-
ouplingDriver.
Perform Coupled Analyses Using JCoupled Files
 Windows
1. Export a JCoupled file (.xml) with JMAG-Scheduler.

JCoupled files contain the path to the input file for analysis, as well as the parameters and their
values set in the [Submit to Queue], [Coupled Files], and [External Couple Setting] dialogs.
See “Exporting Job Settings to a File” on page 435 on procedures for exporting the JCoupled
file.
788
Linking with Abaqus

4. Execute the following commands:
The command cannot run properly when single quotations are included in the argument file
path for CseCouplingDriver.exe.
When a command line and its arguments consists of two or more lines, enter a “^” (hat) at the
end of each line.
Command:
(JMAG installation folder)\CseCouplingDriver.exe [Jcoupled file path]
Example:
“C:\Program Files\JMAG-Designer22.2\CseCouplingDriver.exe” “D:\JMAG\coupledjob.xml”
CseCouplingDriver command-line options

Example using options:
Restart the coupled analysis with JMAG and Abaqus and calculate to 24th step.
“C:\Program Files\JMAG-Designer22.2\CseCouplingDriver.exe” “D:\JMAG\coupledjob.xml”^
-no_abq -no_cse -restart -step=24
Option Setting Default Description

-no_abq - - When using this argument, JMAG does not start Abaqus.
Use this argument when execute the coupled analysis with
JMAG, Abaqus, and Star-CCM+. For details about this
coupled analysis, please contact your distributer.
-no_cse - - When using this argument, JMAG does not start CSE.
Use this argument when execute the coupled analysis with
JMAG, Abaqus, and Star-CCM+.
-restart - - Use this argument when execute the coupled analysis with
JMAG, and Abaqus.
When restart the coupled analysis with JMAG and
Abaqus from command line, modify “abaqus_inp_file”
and “abaqus_inp_file_pre” in a Jcoupled files manually.
• Set the Abaqus input file (.inp) for restart the calculation
as “abaqus_inp_file”.
• Set the Abaqus input file (.inp) used at previous time as
“abaqus_inp_file_pre”.
If same file is specified in “abaqus_inp_file” and
“abaqus_inp_file_pre”, error will be occurred.
-step Int - This argument is used with “-restart”.
Specify the number of calculation steps. Calculations are
run until the step specified here.
 Linux
1. Export a JCoupled file (.xml) with JMAG-Scheduler.
789
Operations
JCoupled files contain the path to the input file for analysis, as well as the parameters and their
values set in the [Submit to Queue], [Coupled Files], and [External Couple Setting] dialogs.
See “Exporting Job Settings to a File” on page 435 on procedures for exporting the JCoupled
file.
2. Execute the following commands:
When a command line and its arguments consists of two or more lines, enter a backslash (\) at
Command:
(JMAG installation directory)\solver\bin\CseCouplingDriver [Jcoupled file path]
For details on the options, see the description on “Windows” on page 788.
Execute Extensions of Executed Jobs from JMAG-Scheduler

JMAG and Abaqus direct coupled analysis performed from JMAG-Scheduler can be resumed from
the last step.
The procedure is the same as restarting JMAG alone analysis. See “Resuming Interrupted Jobs or
Continuing Completed Jobs” on page 432.
When resuming direct coupled analysis between JMAG and Abaqus that was interrupted, physical
quantity transfer may fail. To avoid the failure, run JMAG and Abaqus direct coupled analysis up to
the specified last step and resume from the last step.
790
Linking with STAR-CCM+
This chapter describes the procedure for linking third-party software STAR-CCM+ and JMAG-Designer.
STAR-CCM+ is thermal fluid analysis software provided by SIEMENS.

• Simultaneously Running JMAG and STAR-CCM+ Using Mutual Results (page 792)
• Run StarccmpCosimDriver Commands (page 795)
• Notes When Executing STAR-CCM+ and JMAG Coupled Analysis (page 795)
791
Operations
Simultaneously Running JMAG and STAR-CCM+ Using Mutual

Results
The following direct coupled analysis can be executed.
• JMAG magnetic field analysis <=> STAR-CCM+ heat flow coupled analysis (explicit coupling or
steady coupling) (volume mesh):
Executing analysis from STAR-CCM+ using JMAG results (loss density distribution). Execute
analysis from JMAG using STAR-CCM+ results (temperature distribution or average tempera-
ture).
• JMAG magnetic field analysis <=> STAR-CCM + heat flow coupled analysis (explicit coupling
or constant coupled) (surface mesh):
Execute analysis from STAR-CCM+ using JMAG results (external force or electromagnetic
force). Execute analysis from JMAG using STAR-CCM+ results (displacement).
1. Prepare the STAR-CCM+ input file (.sim).

For details, see “Coupled Analysis”.
• Select [STAR-CCM+ Explicit Coupling] or [STAR-CCM+ Steady Coupling] in models to be
selected in [Field Exchange Controls].
• In the physical quantities exchange regions, the size of the STAR-CCM+ partial models and
JMAG partial models must match, or the STAR-CCM+ partial model must be wider than
the partial model of JMAG.
• Align the units to be used with JMAG. However, as an exception, only temperature units may
be different.
• When using volume mesh, set “Zone” in [Co-Simulations] to the conversion region of the
physical quantity.
• Select either [Lead] or [Lag] in [Concurrency Mode] of [Co-Simulations].
2. Prepare a JMAG input file (.jcf).
i. Prepare a model.
3D models, 2D models, and axisymmetric models are supported.
For the study type use transient analysis or frequency analysis.
Use the same units that are being used in STAR-CCM+. However, the units of temperature
only may be different.
• Select [Direct coupled analysis] in the [Coupled Analysis] setting panel.
• To pass loss density data, select [Joule Loss Density] in the [Output Control] setting
panel.
• When executing frequency analysis, set the JMAG analysis frequency with [Frequency
• When executing transient analysis, set the JMAG analysis step with [Step Control] setting
panel.
792

When receiving temperature distribution data from STAR-CCM+, create materials with
characteristics that change with temperature and set to parts.
• When the material electrical conductivity varies with temperature:
Select [Temperature Dependent] in [Conductivity] under the [Electric Properties] tab in
the [Material Editor] dialog and set the temperature - electric conductivity curve (or tem-
perature - electric resistivity curve).
• When the soft magnetic material relative permeability varies with temperature:
Select [Linear (Temperature dependent)] in [Magnetic Property Type] under the [Mag-
netic Properties] tab in the [Material Editor] dialog and set the temperature-relative per-
meability curve.
• When the soft magnetic material B-H curve varies with temperature:
Select [B-H Curve (Temperature dependent)] in [Magnetic Property Type] under the
[Magnetic Properties] tab in the [Material Editor] dialog and set the temperature - mag-
netic susceptibility curve.
• If necessary, define the geometry of the STAR-CCM+ model by setting the External
Solver Coupling condition. In addition, it is necessary to select or clear [Run JMAG First]
in the External Solver Coupling condition in accordance with the setting for [Concur-
rency Mode] in [Co-Simulations] in STAR-CCM+.
• If necessary, set the Partial Model conditions and define the JMAG model geometry.
• When receiving temperature distribution data from STAR-CCM+, set the Temperature
Distribution conditions for the parts with temperature-dependent characteristic values.
• When receiving average temperature data from STAR-CCM+, set the FEM coil condi-
tions and the FEM Coil components.
• When passing loss density data to STAR-CCM+, set the Temperature Distribution condi-
tions.
• When passing iron loss density data to STAR-CCM+, set the Iron Loss conditions.
• When passing external force or electromagnetic force data to STAR-CCM+, set the
motion conditions.
vi. If necessary, specify the region where the received physical quantities apply.
• When displacement data is received from STAR-CCM+, set “face set” for the faces that
were displaced. Make the title of the face set the same as the motion condition.
vii.Perform other settings such as Periodic Boundary conditions.
viii.Generate the mesh.
• When selecting [FEM+BEM] in [Calculation Method], do not create an air region.
• When selecting [Only remesh air region], do not create an air region.
ix. Write to a JCF file of mesh data.
3. When using the massively parallel processing (MPP) function for JMAG calculations,
prepare the MPP hosts file (.txt).
The MPP host name must be “(JCF file name)+_ hosts.txt”. For example, if the JCF file name
prepared in step 2. is motor.jcf, the MPP hosts file name will be motor_hosts.txt.
793
Operations
4. Prepare a “StarccmpCosimDriver” execution command with the JCF file as an argument

in an editor.
“StarccmpCosimDriver” is a driver to set the JMAG coupled analysis settings in STAR-CCM+.
• When JMAG is to execute frequency analysis, specify the “StarccmpCosimDriver.exe” cou-
pled analysis time options (start time, end time, number of divisions).
• When JMAG uses transient analysis and the “StarccmpCosimDriver.exe” loss averaging
option (-avloss), specify the “StarccmpCosimDriver.exe” coupled analysis time options (start
time, end time, number of divisions).
For details, see “Run StarccmpCosimDriver Commands” on page 795.
5. Start STAR-CCM+ pre/post and open a SIM file.
6. Run the execution command prepared in step 4 from the pre/post of STAR-CCM+ in one
of the following ways.
Below is an example of the procedures for STAR-CCM+ 11.06.
• After specifying the prepared command as an argument for “starapi.bat” (STAR-CCM + bun-
dle), specify the process that was executed in the STAR-CCM+.
• Commands in STAR-CCM+ 11.06:
1) Click [Co-Simulations] > [STAR-CCM+ Co-Simulation] > [Conditions] > [Launch
Partner Option] from the STAR-CCM+ tree.
2) Select [Do not Launch] from the combo box on the right edge of [Option] in the
[Properties] window at the bottom of the tree.
3) Click [Co-Simulations] > [STAR-CCM+ Co-Simulation] > [Values] > [STAR-CCM+
Partner Host: Port] from the tree.
4) Click the button to the right of [STAR-CCM+ Partner Host: Port] in the [Properties]
window at the bottom of the tree.
5) In the displayed dialog, select the processes of “StarccmpCosimDiver” that were started
with “starapi.bat”, then click [OK].
• Specify the command prepared in STAR-CCM+ pre/post, and execute it. Select [Launch
Application and Connect].
• Commands in STAR-CCM+ 11.06:
1) Click [Co-Simulations] > [STAR-CCM+ Co-Simulation] > [Conditions] > [Launch
Partner Option] from the STAR-CCM+ tree.
2) Select [Launch Application via Command Line] from the combo box on the right edge
of [Option] in the [Properties] window at the bottom of the tree.
3) Click [Co-Simulations] > [STAR-CCM+ Co-Simulation] > [Values] > [Launch Com-
mand Line] from the tree.
4) Click the button to the right of [Command Line] in the [Properties] window at the
bottom of the tree.
5) In the displayed dialog, paste the prepared command and click [OK].
7. Run coupled analysis from the STAR-CCM+ pre/post (STAR-CCM+ side execution and
start of coupled execution).
The STAR-CCM+ and JMAG result file is output.
8. Check the results with each program.
See also “Notes When Executing STAR-CCM+ and JMAG Coupled Analysis” on page 795.
794
Run StarccmpCosimDriver Commands

“StarccmpCosimDriver.exe” is used for two-way coupling of JMAG with STAR-CCM+. Perform
two-way coupling with STAR-CCM+ via STAR-CCM+ Cosimulation API.
 Notes
• Users must define the transfer of created input files or post-calculation result files as well as job
input to the job scheduler by describing scripts.
 Call command
Write the following commands.
./StarccmpCosimDriver.exe^
"jcffile_path"
Example:
"C:\Program Files\JMAG-Designer22.2\StarccmpCosimDriver.exe"^
"D:\JMAG\motor.jcf"
IMPORTANT Specify “StarccmpCosimDriver.exe” and the JMAG input JCF file with an abso-
lute path.
MEMO If the analysis cannot be executed using the above command, try removing double quotation
marks (") around the file path that includes “StarccmpCosimDriver.exe”.
Example:
C:\Program Files\JMAG-Designer22.2\StarccmpCosimDriver.exe "D:\JMAG\motor.jcf"
MEMO In this example, the escape character (^) was used just before the newline in order to record the
executable statement into two or more lines; however, when actually using it with STAR-CCM+, remove
escape characters.
Notes When Executing STAR-CCM+ and JMAG Coupled Analysis

In STAR-CCM+ and JMAG coupled analysis, during end processing a condition occurs where
JMAG abnormally stops in an inoperable state. When this condition occurs, it is not possible to
manually perform a write of the STAR-CCM+ analysis results to the SIM file.
In this case, perform one of the following procedures. By performing one of the following proce-
dures, it is possible to obtain both STAR-CCM+ and JMAG analysis results.
 CPS procedure
Executing coupled analysis in the STAR-CCM+ GUI specifying “Connect to Partner Simulation
(Connect to Partner Simulation)” is here called “CPS”.
1. Adjust the end time and number of iterations so that STAR-CCM+ finishes before JMAG.
2. Execute coupled analysis.
STAR-CCM+ finishes first and JMAG abnormally stops during end processing.
3. Manually perform a write of the STAR-CCM+ analysis results to the SIM file.
4. Exit the STAR-CCM+ pre/post of STAR-CCM.
5. Restart the STAR-CCM+ pre/post.
795
Operations
6. Right-click the JMAG process displayed under the [Server] tab in the left pane to con-
nect.
7. After connecting, press [Exit] at the upper right of the window and select [Discard and
exit].
By performing the above, the JMAG process will end.
The JMAG result file (.jplot) will be located in the same folder (calculation folder) as the input
file (.jcf ). If there is not a result file in the same folder as the input file, use the result file placed
in a subfolder of the calculation folder.
 LAC procedure
Executing coupled analysis in the STAR-CCM+ GUI specifying “Launch Application and Connect
(Launch Application and Connect)” is here called “LAC”.
1. Adjust the end time and number of iterations so that STAR-CCM+ finishes before JMAG.
2. Execute coupled analysis.
STAR-CCM+ finishes first and JMAG abnormally stops during end processing.
3. Manually perform a write of the STAR-CCM+ analysis results to the SIM file.
4. Exit the STAR-CCM+ pre/post of STAR-CCM.
5. Since, in the case of Windows, the message “JCoupled.exe has terminated” will be dis-
played in a dialog immediately afterwards, click [Quit the Program].
6. In case of Linux, as with CPS, restart the STAR-CCM+ pre/post and after connecting to
the JMAG process, press [Exit] and select [Discard and exit].
By performing the above, the JMAG process will end.
The JMAG result file (.jplot) will be located in the same folder (calculation folder) as the input
file (.jcf ). If there is not a result file in the same folder as the input file, use the result file placed
in a subfolder of the calculation folder.
796
Linking with Circuit Simulators
This chapter describes the procedures for linking JMAG with third-party circuit simulators. JMAG can be
linked with the following circuit simulators:
• MATLAB/Simulink:
This is provided by MathWorks.
IMPORTANT Support for coupled analysis using JMAG and PSIM has been discontinued for major ver-
sions and service packs released after April 2023.

• Simultaneously Running JMAG and Circuit Simulators Using Mutual Results (page 798)
• Using JMAG Analysis Results in Circuit Simulators (JMAG-RT, JMAG-Express) (page 802)
797
Operations
Simultaneously Running JMAG and Circuit Simulators Using Mutual

Results
The External Circuit Link condition are used to run a magnetic field analysis by linking to a circuit
simulator. External Circuit Link conditions are 1 and 2.
• External Circuit Link 1 condition is used when using Simulink, PSIM MagCoupler.
• External Circuit Link 2 conditions are used when using PSIM MagCoupler - DL.
Link with Simulink

The magnetic field analysis solver can be linked to Simulink.
 Required Solver and Software

Use the following solvers and software:
• JMAG-Designer
• Transient analysis solver (TR or DP)
• MATLAB/Simulink (For 64 bit, R2007b or later.)
 Notes
• You cannot run a multiple analysis directly linked to JMAG and Simulink on a single machine
simultaneously.
 Procedure for using Simulink when using the External Circuit Link condition
1. Place the input file used in the analysis in the calculation folder.
Place the following files output with JMAG-Designer in any folder.
• JCF file (ex: jinput.jcf ):
See “Exporting Studies to JCF Files” on page 287 for instructions on exporting a JCF file.
Note the following:
• If you export a geometry JCF file when [Preprocess Model When Exporting Geometry
JCF] is not checked, the JW_ACIS_REMOTE_MESH license will be used during the
analysis.
• XML file (ex: jinput_csl.xml):
This file is also output when data set with the External Circuit Link condition is output to a
JCF file.
2. Place the MDL file and DLL file used in the analysis in the same folder as step 1.
The MDL file and DLL file used here are located in the Simulink folder in the JMAG installa-
tion folder. Copy the files from there and put them in the calculation folder.
MEMO Copy the MDL file and DLL file from the JMAG-Designer installation folder of the same
version of JMAG-Designer used for calculations.
Windows:
The Simulink folder on a Windows machine is in the following location:
(JMAG installation folder)\Simulink
798
When installing JMAG, the default setting is “C:\Program Files\JMAG-Designer22.2\Sim-

ulink”.
Use the following file.
• JMAG_SF.mdl
• jmag_simulink_interface. mexw64 (64-bit version)
• msvcp120.dll and msvcr120.dll:
Used when the Microsoft redistributable package (Microsoft Visual C++ 2013 Redistribut-
able (x86) or Microsoft Visual C++ 2013 Redistributable (x64)) is not installed.
• jmag_simulink_direct_coupler
Linux:
The Simulink directory on a Linux machine is in the following location.
(JMAG installation directory)/solver/mod/tools/simulink
Use the following file.

• JMAG_SF.mdl
• jmag_simulink_interface.mexa64 (64-bit version)
3. When using the massively parallel processing (MPP) function in JMAG magnetic field
analysis, place the MPP hosts file in the same folder as step 1.
Create the MPP hosts file according to the following rules.
• Use the fixed name “jmag_hosts.txt”.
• On the first line of the MPP hosts file, specify the machine on which MPP solver and Sim-
ulink are launched.
4. Set environment variables.
Windows:
Set the following environment variables. If an environment variable with the same name is
already set, add the following variable values.
With this setting, analysis referencing JMAG libraries can be executed.

PATH • Value 1:
JMAG installation folder (full path). When installing JMAG, the default
setting is “C:\Program Files\JMAG-Designer22.2”.
• Value 2:
The full path of the module for directly linking. When installing JMAG,
the default setting is “C:\Program Files\JMAG-Design-
er22.2\Solver\mod\mag\mod”.
• Value 3:
The full path for MPI shared libraries when using the MPP function in
JMAG magnetic field analysis. (Ex: “C:\Program
Files(x86)\Intel\impi_2019.0.0\intel64\bin”).
Linux:
If the MPP function is not used in JMAG magnetic field analysis, the setting of environment
variables is not necessary. For details on setting environment variables, see “Overview Edition”.
799
Operations
If using the MPP function, set the following environment variables. If an environment variable
with the same name is already set, add the following variable values.

PATH The full path for mpirun (parallel computing execution module).
LD_LIBRARY_PATH The full path of the Intel MPI Library installation directory (example: /
opt/Intel/oneAPI/mpi/2019.12.0/lib).
MEMO For details on the MPP function, see “Running Analyses Using MPP/Hybrid Parallel Com-
puting” on page 559.
5. Start MATLAB/Simulink.
6. Open JMAG_SF.mdl.
7. Copy all blocks from the JMAG_SF.mdl file to the currently used Simulink model or cre-
ate a Simulink circuit in the JMAG_SF.mdl file.
For details on how to create a Simulink circuit, see the Simulink manual.
8. Set the parameters in the JMAG_SF.mdl file.
• [Link table file name]:
Enter the name of the XML file (***_csl.xml) that was placed in the calculation folder in step
1.
• [Sample time]:
The time step for the analysis. The unit is “sec”.
For the default “-1”, the time step specified in Simulink is also used in the JMAG circuit
solver. If analysis takes an undue amount of time with the time step specified by Simulink,
enter a positive value for this parameter. The value entered here is used as a time step in the
JMAG circuit solver.
• [Install directory of JMAG]:
Enter the full path of the JMAG-Designer installation directory.
When JMAG is installed on a Windows machine, the default setting is “C:\Program
Files\JMAG-Designer22.2”.
• [Output log file]:
Select whether to output a JMAG magnetic field analysis log file (.txt). If an error occurs, this
file can be used for investigating the cause.
• 0: No log file is output.
• 1: A log file is output.
• [Parallel computing type]:
Select the parallel computing function to use with JMAG magnetic field analyses from the
following:
• [Do Not Use]
• [SMP]: Shared Memory Multiprocessing
• [MPP]: Massively Parallel Processing or hybrid parallel processing (SMP+MPP)
• [Degree of parallelism]:
When [SMP] is selected, specify even numbers from within a range of 2 to a maximum of 36
in [SMP Threads] as the degree of thread parallelism.
When [MPP] is selected, specify values from within a range of 1 to a maximum of 36 in
[MPP Threads] as the degree of thread parallelism. Either odd numbers or even numbers may
be used. Specify an even number from within a range of 2 to a maximum of 512 in [MPP
800
Processes] as the degree of process parallelism. The hybrid parallel processing function is used
when a value of 2 or more is specified for both [MPP Threads] and [MPP Processes].
• [Use GPU]:
Select [Use GPU] when using the GPUs (Graphics Processing Units) in machines with
JMAG calculation processes.
9. Execute the analysis.
JMAG results are output.
MEMO If Simulink terminates abnormally during analysis, the “jmag_direct_coupler.exe” process
(“jmag_simulink_direct_coupler_intel_mpi_b.exe” when the MPP function is used) remains active,
and the licenses for JMAG magnetic field analysis and the parallel computing function are not
returned. In this case, terminate the process manually. You can manually terminate the process from
Task Manager in Windows or by the “Kill” command in Linux.
801
Operations
Using JMAG Analysis Results in Circuit Simulators (JMAG-RT, JMAG-

Express)
JMAG-RT models (file extension “.rtt”) contain the parameters necessary for control circuit simula-
tion (e.g., flux linkage of coils, inductance, resistance) extracted from the results of JMAG's FEA
and can be used as circuit components.
JMAG-RT models can be created from the following programs:
• JMAG-RT
• Efficiency Map Analysis studies in JMAG-Designer
• JMAG-Express Online
For details, refer to the description of each program.
802
Running Batch Files for Analyses Linked with Third-
party Software
The methods to link JMAG with commercial simulation software, when using the displacement function (cou-
pling with third-party programs) in the motion conditions of a magnetic field analysis in JMAG, are described
below.

• Linking Processes Using Batch Files (page 804)
• Creating Batch Files (page 805)
803
Operations
Linking Processes Using Batch Files

The following steps link JMAG with commercial simulation software.
1. In JMAG-Designer, export the JCF file in the magnetic field transient analysis study set
with displacement (link with third-party program).
• The JCF file to be output can be either geometry data or mesh data. However, note that the
commands used in the batch file differ depending on which is output. See “Creating Batch
Files” on page 805.
• Eddy currents can be accounted.
• Displacement condition settings are not needed. [Direct coupled analysis] in study properties
also does not need to be selected.
• When using time exported from a third-party program in JMAG based on the step in exam-
ple #3 (option) below, [Set by External Program] must be selected in step control.
• When using physical quantity information (stress, temperature) exported from a third-party
program in JMAG based on the step in example #4 (option) below, materials with stress-
dependent or temperature-dependent magnetization properties needs to be applied. Stress
Distribution conditions and Temperature Distribution condition settings are not needed.
2. Prepare a batch file (.bat).
See “Creating Batch Files” on page 805.
3. Place the JCF file from step 1, external reference files, and the batch file from step 2 into
the working directory.
4. Run the batch file.
The coupled analysis with JMAG and the commercial simulation software will be performed.
For details on the Displacement (Link to External Program) function, see “JMAG User’s Manual
Parameter Explanation”.
For details on exporting JCF files, see the “Exporting Studies to JCF Files” on page 287.
804
Running Batch Files for Analyses Linked with Third-party Software
Creating Batch Files

This section explains the details on writing a batch file.
What is written to the batch file differs depending on what mesh generation methods are used or if
mesh data exist in the JCF file to be used.
 Notes
The following examples are described assuming that the below file exists in the working directory
(WorkDir).
• JCF file to be imported (Designer.jcf )
• External file that defines time and displacement per step (coupleddisp).
This file is created by the third-party program. Because of this, it does not need to be in the
working directory when the analysis starts.
• Batch file (.bat).
In the following example, the following character strings are used in the executable statement of the
batch file. Change the values to reflect the actual running conditions when describing the details of
the batch file.
MY_JMAG_INSTALL_DIR JMAG installation directory path

MY_STEPS Number of steps. Specify a value less than or equal to the number of
steps specified in the step control. However, do not specify when
[Set by External Program] is selected for [Type] in [Step Control].
To terminate the execution with the number of loops less than the
number of steps specified in the step control, add the terminate
command (GeneralCouplingSolver-Driver.exe -terminate) from
Example 3 to be described later.
RUN_EXTERNAL_PROGRAM Command to call third-party program
RUN_JMAG_PROGRAM Command to call JMAG
“InsDir” and “WorkDir” in the executable statement are unique environment variables for JMAG.
“InsDir” and “WorkDir” define the JMAG installation directory and the working directory, respec-
tively.
The following are example statement.
set InsDir=MY_JMAG_INSTALL_DIR
set WorkDir=.
set PATH=%PATH%;%InsDir%;
for /L %%i in (1,1,MY_STEPS) do (

RUN_EXTERNAL_PROGRAM
RUN_JMAG_PROGRAM
)
For example, if JMAG-Designer 22.2 was installed into its default directory with no changes, the
string to define the JMAG installation directory is as follows:
set InsDir=C:\Program Files\JMAG-Designer22.2
If the number of steps is set to 25, the string to define the loop is as follows:
for /L %%i in (1,1,25) do (
805
Operations
 Ex. 1: Running a coupled analysis without using the patch mesh function
Use the following executable statement when not using the patch mesh function.
MEMO For details about patch mesh function, see “JMAG User’s Manual Parameter Explanation”.
When using geometry data (Designer.jcf) that does not have mesh data:
set WorkDir=.
GeneralCouplingMesherDriver.exe -mode=initialize
GeneralCouplingSolverDriver.exe -solver_mag
)
When using mesh data (Designer.jcf):

set WorkDir=.

GeneralCouplingSolverDriver.exe -solver_mag
)
 Ex. 2: Running a coupled analysis using the patch mesh function

Use the following executable statement when using the patch mesh function.
set WorkDir=.
GeneralCouplingMesherDriver.exe -mode=initialize -in=Designer.jcf -

out=Designer_mesh.jcf
GeneralCouplingMesherDriver.exe -mode=remeshing -in=Designer_mesh.jcf -
out=Designer_patchmesh.jcf
GeneralCouplingSolverDriver.exe -solver_mag -in=Designer_patchmesh.jcf
)
 Ex. 3: Option (Inputting time from an external file (coupleddisp)

When time from the external file (coupleddisp) is obtained, it can be used in JMAG as an input
value.
When using this option, append a termination command to the end of the execution statement for
example 1 or example 2 as shown below.
RUN_JMAG_PROGRAM
)
GeneralCouplingSolverDriver.exe -terminate
806
Running Batch Files for Analyses Linked with Third-party Software
 Ex. 4: Option (Mapping a physical quantity for a result file exported by a coupled
analysis)
JMAG can use stress and temperatures exported from a third-party program as input values. Fur-
thermore, loss density and nodal force density exported by JMAG can be used as input values in a
third-party program.
The following process runs when this option is used:
• First, the third-party program performs a calculation for the most recent analysis step.
After the calculation is complete, configure it so the mesh information and physical quantity
information (stress, temperature) from the third-party program are recorded to “general_cou-
pling.plot”.
“GeneralCouplingMapperDriver.exe” maps the physical quantity for the mesh in JMAG using
mesh and physical quantity information (stress, temperature) from the third-party program that
were recorded to “general_coupling.plot”.
• Next, JMAG’s analysis program performs a calculation for the most resent analysis step.
After the calculation is complete, “GeneralCouplingMapperDriver.exe” maps the physical quan-
tity for the mesh in the third-party program recorded in “general_coupling.plot” using the phys-
ical quantity information (loss density, nodal force density) recorded to the JMAG result file, and
then records the physical quantity used for mapping to “general_coupling.plot”. During this
time, the physical quantity information previously recorded to “general_coupling.plot” is
cleared, and the only the items used for mapping this time are recorded.
Use the following execution statement when using this option.
GeneralCouplingMapperDriver.exe -map_stress_in -map_temp_in
RUN_JMAG_PROGRAM
GeneralCouplingMapperDriver.exe -map_loss_out -map_force_out
807
Operations
808
Using Scripts
Using Scripts to Automate Work
This chapter explains how to use scripts.

MEMO For tools not supporting scripts, execute the tool from the command line.

• Recording Operations in JMAG as Scripts (page 812)
• Creating Scripts in Script Editor (page 813)
• Editing Scripts in Script Editor (page 814)
• Running Scripts (page 815)
• Importing Scripts from Files (page 815)
• Exporting Scripts to Files (page 816)
811
Operations
Recording Operations in JMAG as Scripts

Operations performed in JMAG-Designer can be recorded as scripts. Recorded scripts can be edited
with a Script Editor.
1. In the [Script] setting panel of the [Preferences] dialog, set the options for automatic
recording.
ences” on page 36.
2. From the JMAG-Designer menu bar, select [Script] > [Start Recording] to start automatic
recording.
Or click [Start Recording] on the toolbar.
Automatic script recording starts and “Recording” is displayed in the toolbar.
3. Do some operations in JMAG-Designer, Geometry Editor, and Circuit Editor.
4. From the JMAG-Designer menu bar, select [Script] > [Stop Recording] to stop automatic
recording.
Or click [Stop Recording] on the toolbar.
The Script Editor opens and the recorded script is displayed.
5. If necessary, edit the script in the Script Editor.
For notes on creating and editing scripts, see “Scripts Edition”.
6. Click [Register] in the Script Editor.
The script is added to the [Custom] folder under the [Scripts] tab in [Toolbox].
7. From the Script Editor menu bar, select [File] > [Exit] to exit the Script Editor.
812
Creating Scripts in Script Editor

1. Start the Script Editor
i. Select [Scripts] > [Script Editor] from the JMAG-Designer menu bar.
Or right-click the Custom folder under the [Scripts] tab in Toolbox and select [Create New
Script].
2. Setup the environment of the Script Editor if needed.
i. From the Script Editor menu bar, select [Tools] > [Preferences].
ii. In the [Script Editor Preferences] dialog, set the parameters.
iii. Click [OK].
3. Writing a script.
From this point forward the procedure is the same as from step 5 onwards in “Recording Opera-
tions in JMAG as Scripts” on page 812.
813
Operations
Editing Scripts in Script Editor

MEMO Scripts written in Python can be edited in the Python console as well. Open the Python console
by selecting [Scripts] > [Python Console] from the JMAG-Designer menu bar.
1. Start the Script Editor and open the script.

To edit a script contained in the [Custom] folder under the [Scripts] tab in [Toolbox], perform
the following operation.
i. Right-click the script in the [Custom] folder under the [Scripts] tab in [Toolbox] in
JMAG-Designer.
ii. Select [Edit].
The Script Editor starts and the script is displayed.
To edit a preinstalled script contained in the [Preinstall] folder under the [Scripts] tab in [Tool-
box], do the following:
i. Right-click the preinstalled script in the [Preinstall] folder under the [Scripts] tab in
[Toolbox] in JMAG-Designer.
ii. Select [Duplicate].
The preinstalled script is duplicated and added to the Custom folder.
iii. Right-click the copy of the preinstalled script in the Custom folder.
iv. Select [Edit].
When starting the Script Editor and reading-in a script to be edited from a file, execute the fol-
lowing operations.
i. Select [Scripts] > [Script Editor] from the JMAG-Designer menu bar.
Or right-click the Custom folder under the [Scripts] tab in Toolbox and select [Create New
Script].
ii. From the Script Editor menu bar, select [File] > [Open].
iii. In the [Open File] dialog, specify the script file (.vbs, .py, .js).
iv. Click [Open].
2. Setup the environment of the Script Editor if needed.
See “Creating Scripts in Script Editor” on page 813.
3. Edit the script.
From this point forward the procedure is the same as from step 5 onwards in “Recording Opera-
tions in JMAG as Scripts” on page 812.
814
Running Scripts
Execute a created script or a JMAG-Designer preinstalled script.
1. In the [Scripts] tab under [Toolbox] in JMAG-Designer, right-click a script or preinstalled

script.
2. Select [Run].
The script is executed.
If [Show Script Editor when Running Script] is checked in the Script Editor's [Preferences] dia-
log, the Script Editor will be started at the same time that the script is executed.
Importing Scripts from Files

Import a script into [Toolbox] in JMAG-Designer.
1. Open the [Scripts] tab under [Toolbox].

2. Right-click the Custom folder (or one of its subfolders).
3. Select [Import Scripts].
4. In the [Import scripts] dialog, select the type of file to import from the list.
The following can be chosen.
• [Archive Files (.zip)]:
This is a compressed file containing one or more scripts output from JMAG-Designer.
• [Script Files (.py, .vbs, .js)]
• [VB Script Files (.vbs)]
• [Python Files (.py)]
• [JScript Files (.js)]
5. Specify the file to be imported.
6. Click [Open].
The script will be imported and added to the folder clicked in step 2.
815
Operations
Exporting Scripts to Files

• Export Scripts from [Toolbox] in JMAG-Designer (page 816)
• Export Scripts from Script Editor (page 816)
Export Scripts from [Toolbox] in JMAG-Designer

Export a script from JMAG-Designer.
1. Open the [Scripts] tab under [Toolbox] in JMAG-Designer.

2. When exporting all scripts in a folder, right-click the folder.
When exporting only one selected script, right-click the script.
3. Select [Export Scripts].
4. In the [Export scripts] dialog, specify the file name and destination folder.
The file type is set to “Archive Files (.zip)”.
5. Click [Save].
Export Scripts from Script Editor

Export a script from the Script Editor.
1. From the Script Editor menu bar, select [File] > [Save As].
The [Save As] dialog is displayed.
2. Specify the file name, file type, and destination folder.
The file type can be selected from the following:
• [VB Script Files (.vbs)]
• [Python Files (.py)]
• [JScript Files (.js)]
3. Click [Save].
816
Key Operations
Using Shortcuts
JMAG provides keyboard shortcuts and icons for a faster workflow.

• Accelerator Keys (Access Keys) (page 820)
• Shortcut Icons (page 821)
• Keyboard Shortcuts (page 822)
• JMAG-Designer (page 822)
• Circuit Editor ([Edit Circuit] Dialog) (page 824)
• Geometry Editor (page 825)
• Script Editor (page 826)
• Graph Manager (page 827)
• JMAG-Scheduler (page 828)
• [Analysis Parameter View] Dialog (page 828)
• [Result View] Dialog/[All Cases Result Review] Dialog (page 830)
819
Operations
Accelerator Keys (Access Keys)

JMAG menu commands can be run by using accelerator keys. When the [Alt] key is pressed while
the menu is displayed, the accelerator keys are underlined.
The accelerator keys are used together with the [Alt] key.
• Example 1:
When the accelerator key is used to perform the same operation as selecting [File] > [New] in the
figure below, press the keys [Alt], [F], and [N] in this order.
When the same key is allocated to the menu command in the same hierarchy, press the duplicated
key several times in the order the menu commands are displayed.
• Example 2:
The [V] key is allocated to both [View Solid Vertex] and [Viewpoint] in the [View] menu of
Geometry Editor.
• To run [View Solid Vertex], press the keys in the order of [Alt], [V], [V].
• To run [Viewpoint], press the keys in the order of [Alt], [V], [V], and [V].
820
Using Shortcuts
Shortcut Icons
The shortcut icons are displayed in the lower part of the JMAG-Designer graphics window.
The graphics window
 Shortcut icons
To do this Click
Open a study or analysis group in the JMAG-Express View
Open the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog
Open the [All Cases Result View] dialog
Open the [Study Properties] dialog

Open the [Equations] dialog
Open the [Optimization] dialog
Open the [Mesh Properties] dialog
 Hide and display shortcut icons

• To display all shortcut icons, press the [Ctrl] + [Alt] + [V] keys simultaneously on the keyboard.
• To hide all shortcut icons, press the [Ctrl] + [Alt] + [H] keys on the keyboard simultaneously.
• To hide or display specific shortcut icons, from the menu bar, select [View] > [Shortcut] > (the
shortcut icon name).
When the icon name has a checkmark next to it, the icon is displayed in the graphics window.
When the check mark of the icon name is removed, the icon is hidden.
821
Operations
Keyboard Shortcuts
Menu commands can be run using only the keys on the keyboard. Some of shortcut keys are dis-
played on the right of each menu command.
Shortcut key
The “+” sign used in the tables below means pressing multiple keys simultaneously. For example, the
“Ctrl + N” description means holding down the [Ctrl] key and pressing the [N] key on the key-
board.
• JMAG-Designer (page 822)
• Circuit Editor ([Edit Circuit] Dialog) (page 824)
• Geometry Editor (page 825)
• Script Editor (page 826)
• Graph Manager (page 827)
• JMAG-Scheduler (page 828)
• [Analysis Parameter View] Dialog (page 828)
• [Result View] Dialog/[All Cases Result Review] Dialog (page 830)
JMAG-Designer
 File operation
To do this Press
Create a new project Ctrl + N
Open a file (open the [Open File] dialog) Ctrl + O
Save a project (open the [Save As] dialog when a project is saved for the first
Ctrl + S
time)
 Undoing and redoing

To do this Press
Undo the previous operation Ctrl + Z
Redo the canceled operation Ctrl + Y
822
Using Shortcuts
 Tree manipulation, changing displays and modes

To do this Press
Expand all tree items in the [Project Manager] tree Shift + \
Collapse all items in the [Project Manager] tree \
Collapse all excluding items selected in the [Project Manager] tree /
Change mode to select targets F2
Change mode to zoom in/out of model view F3
Change mode to zoom into model view of a specified range F4
Change mode to rotate a model view F5
Change mode to move a model view ([Pan] ) F6
Display shortcut icons in window Ctrl + Alt + V
Hide shortcut icons in window Ctrl + Alt + H
 View control
MEMO Operations such as zoom in/out and rotation/translation of the model display can be changed
and customized to the same shortcut settings as commercial CAD software in the JMAG-Designer [Pref-
erences] dialog [Operation] setting panel. For details, see “Parameter Explanation Edition”
To do this Press
Zoom in/out the model view Scroll the mouse wheel back and forth
Rotate the model view relative to the center of the Hold down the mouse wheel and drag
window
Rotate the model view relative to the center of any Hold down Shift and drag with the mouse wheel
point button
Rotate the model view relative to the center of a Hold down Ctrl and drag with the mouse wheel
model button
Move the model view ([Pan] ) Hold down the mouse wheel and drag with the
right mouse button
 Calling the dialog

To do this Press
Open the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog Ctrl + Alt + S
Open the [All Cases Result View] dialog Ctrl + Alt + D
Open the [Study Properties] dialog Ctrl + Alt + F
Open the [Equation] dialog Ctrl + Alt + E
Open the [Optimization] dialog Ctrl + Alt + O
Open the [Mesh Properties] dialog Ctrl + Alt + U
Open the [Direct Access] dialog Ctrl + Shift + D
Open the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog of an active study Ctrl + Alt + S
Open the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog of an active model Ctrl + Alt + M
Open the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog of an active analysis group Ctrl + Alt + G
823
Operations
 Changing the window

To do this Press
Move to the next window Ctrl + Tab
Go back to the previous window Ctrl + Shift + Tab
 Calling script tools

To do this Press
Start Python console Ctrl + Alt + P
Start Script Editor Ctrl + E
 Closing
To do this Press
Close JMAG-Designer Ctrl + Q
Circuit Editor ([Edit Circuit] Dialog)
 File operation
To do this Press
Create a new circuit Ctrl + N
Export the circuit as a circuit file (open the [Export Circuit Setting] dialog) Ctrl + S
Export the circuit diagram as an image file (open the [Export Image] dialog) Ctrl + E
Register the circuit in the [Libraries] tab of [Tool Box] Ctrl + T
 Undoing and redoing

To do this Press
Undo the previous operation Ctrl + Z
Redo the canceled operation Ctrl + Y

To do this Press
Collapse all tree items in the [Circuit Manager] tree \
Change the display size of circuit diagram to fit the window F1
Enlarge the display size of circuit creation window Ctrl + ;
Reduce the display size of circuit creation window Ctrl + -
 View control
erences] dialog [Operation] setting panel. For details, see “Parameter Explanation Edition”.
To do this Press
Zoom in/out of circuit creation window Scroll the mouse wheel back and forth
824
Using Shortcuts
To do this Press
Move circuit creation window Hold down the mouse wheel and drag with the
right mouse button
 Rotating components
To do this Press
Rotate the selected components and wires 90 degrees clockwise Ctrl + R
Geometry Editor
 File operation
To do this Press
Create assembly Ctrl + N
Open a file (open the [Open file dialog] dialog) Ctrl + O
Load the model from a file and merge with an active model Ctrl + M
Save the model (open the [Import Model] dialog) Ctrl + S
 Editing sketches and features

To do this Press
Undo previous operation Ctrl + Z
Redo canceled operation Ctrl + Y
Cut selected target Ctrl + X

Copy selected target to clipboard Ctrl + C
Paste selected target from clipboard Ctrl + V
Delete selected target Delete

To do this Press
Expand all tree items in the [Model Manager] tree Shift + \
Collapse all trees in the [Model Manager] tree \
Collapse all trees excluding selected trees in the [Model Manager] tree /
Change mode to select targets F1
Change mode to zoom in/out of model view F3
Change mode to enlarge specified area of model view F4
Change mode to rotate model view F5
Change mode to move model view ([Pan] ) F6
825
Operations
 View control
erences] dialog [Operation] setting panel. For details, see “Parameter Explanation Edition”.
To do this Press
Zoom in/out of display Scroll the mouse wheel back and forth
Rotate model view relative to the center of window Hold down the mouse wheel and drag
Rotate model view relative to the center of any Hold down Shift and drag with the mouse wheel
point
Rotate model view relative to the center of a model Hold down Ctrl and drag with the mouse wheel
Move the model view ([Pan] ) Hold down the mouse wheel and drag with the
right mouse button

To do this Press
Open the [Direct Access] dialog Ctrl + Shift + D
 Closing
To do this Press
Close Geometry Editor Ctrl + Q
Script Editor
 File operations
To do this Press
Create new script Ctrl + N
Open script file Ctrl + O
Save script Ctrl + S
Re-load active tab script from file F5
Re-load scripts from all tabs from file Alt + F5
Print script Ctrl + P
Close active tab Ctrl + W
 Script Edit
To do this Press
Undo previous operation Ctrl + Z
Redo canceled operation Ctrl + Y
Cut selected character string Ctrl + X
Copy selected character string to clip board Ctrl + C
Paste character string from clip board Ctrl + V
Search specified character string within script Ctrl + F
826
Using Shortcuts
To do this Press
Search down in script F3
Search up in script Shift + F3
Replace specified character string with another in script Ctrl + R
Jump cursor to specified line Ctrl + G
Comment out selected line Ctrl + I
Clear comment out in selected line Ctrl + Shift + I
Add header information to script Ctrl + H
 Script Execution/Debugging
To do this Press
Run script Ctrl + F5
Step into script F11
Step over script F10
Break script Ctrl + Alt + Break
Stop script Shift + F5
 Exit
To do this Press
Exit Script Editor Ctrl + Q
Graph Manager
 Data set operations

To do this Press
Change display type of data set group Alt + G
Change display range of data set Alt + S
 Graph operations
To do this Press
Display graph selected from graph list Alt + D
 Help
To do this Press
Start JMAG-Designer Help Alt + H
 Exit
To do this Press
Exit Graph Manager Alt + C
827
Operations
JMAG-Scheduler
 Tree operations
To do this Press
Expand all items in job list *
Collapse all items in job list \
 Exit
To do this Press
Close JMAG-Scheduler (does not exit JMAG-Scheduler) Ctrl + W
Exit JMAG-Scheduler Ctrl + N
[Analysis Parameter View] Dialog
 Basic operations
To do this Press
Reflect setting changes made in [Analysis Parameter View] dialog to study Ctrl + S
Re-load settings from study to [Analysis Parameter View] dialog Ctrl + O
Duplicate study displayed in [Analysis Parameter View] dialog (open
Ctrl + D
[Duplicate This Study] dialog)
Display study shown in [Analysis Parameter View] dialog in JMAG-
Ctrl + T
Designer
 Changing displayed items and layouts

To do this Press
Switch the active window from the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog to the
Ctrl + Alt + U
JMAG-Designer main window
Change the model to be displayed in the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog Alt + A + UP/DOWN
Change the study to be displayed in the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog Alt + S + UP/DOWN
Display [Case List] and [Parametric Parameters] in the [Analysis Parameter
Ctrl + W
View] dialog
Display only [Case List] in the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog Ctrl + P
Display only [Parametric Parameters] in the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog Ctrl + U
Hide or display [Case List] Ctrl + Alt + T
Hide or display [Parametric Parameters] Ctrl + Alt + P
Hide or display [Circuit] Ctrl + Alt + I
Hide or display [Model View] Ctrl + Alt + V
Hide or display [Winding] Ctrl + Alt + W
Hide or display [Create Response Table (Speed Priority)] Ctrl + Alt + F
Hide or display [Result Table (Response Data)] Ctrl + Alt + S
Hide or display [Output Results] Ctrl + Alt + B
Display result items in one column Ctrl + 1
Display result items in two columns Ctrl + 2
828
Using Shortcuts
To do this Press
Display result items in three columns Ctrl + 3
Open [Display Item List] dialog Ctrl + I
Call the following display item set: Preset [Scenario Execution] Ctrl + Shift + P
Call the following display item set: A display item set that has been added by Ctrl + Shift + (a
the user numerical character
of “1” or more)
 Moving between display items

To do this Press
Move to the [Study] list in [Case List] Ctrl + Shift + S
Change active study in [Study] list under [Case List] UP/DOWN
Move to [Case List] table in [Case List] Ctrl + Shift + T
Move to [Equations] table in [Case List] Ctrl + Shift + E
Move to [Parameter] tree in [Analysis Parameters] Ctrl + Shift + G
Move to [Material] tree in [Analysis Parameters] Ctrl + Shift + M
Move to [Study Property] tree in [Analysis Parameters] Ctrl + Shift + F
Move to [Condition] tree in [Analysis Parameters] Ctrl + Shift + L
Move to [Circuit] tree in [Analysis Parameters] Ctrl + Shift + C
Move to [Mesh Property] in [Analysis Parameters] Ctrl + Shift + U
 Operations for [Case List] (including [Equation])

To do this Press
Copy selected case and create new case Ctrl + Alt + A
Create multiple new cases (open [Add Case] dialog) Ctrl + Alt + L
Delete study from currently selected case Ctrl + Alt + R
Display currently selected case in JMAG-Designer Ctrl + Alt + C
Import case from file (open [Import Data] dialog) Alt + I
Export case list to file (open [Export Data] dialog) Alt + X
Add new equation (open [modify equation parameters] dialog) Ctrl + Alt + E
829
Operations
To do this Press
Open currently selected equation (open currently selected equation in [Edit
Ctrl + Alt + M
Equation] dialog)
Delete currently selected equation Ctrl + Alt + D
 Operations in [Analysis Parameters]

To do this Press
Display all items in the active tree Shift + \
Close all items in the active tree \
Close all items excluding items selected in the active tree /
 Mesh generation, running analysis, loading results

To do this Press
Generate or regenerate mesh Ctrl + M
Run the currently displayed study in the foreground Ctrl + R
Run the currently displayed study in the background (batch execution, JMAG-
Ctrl + B
Scheduler start-up)
Run the optimization of the currently displayed study (open the [Optimiza-
Ctrl + N
tion] dialog)
Load results of study run in batch mode to the [Analysis Parameter View] dia-
Ctrl + L
log
Load result data from remote machine (does not include result file transfer) Ctrl + G
 Calling dialog or other program

To do this Press
Open [Display Error/Warning] dialog Ctrl + E
Open [All Cases Result View] dialog Alt + R
Start CAD link (Start-up Geometry Editor) Alt + D
Restore/close CAD links for all models Alt + Shift + D
 Exit
To do this Press
Close [Analysis Parameter View] dialog Ctrl + Q
[Result View] Dialog/[All Cases Result Review] Dialog

The same shortcut key can be used for [Result View] dialog and [All Cases Result Review] dialog.
To use shortcut keys in the [All Cases Result Review] dialog, replace [All Cases Result Review] with
[Result View] when reading the chart below.
 File operation
To do this Press
Reflect the changed value in the [Result View] dialog to the study Ctrl + S
830
Using Shortcuts
To do this Press
Re-load the results setting added in the study to the [Result View] dialog Ctrl + R
 Changing displayed items and layout

To do this Press
Change the model to be displayed in the [Result View] dialog Alt + A + UP/DOWN
Change the study to be displayed in the [Result View] dialog Alt + S + UP/DOWN
Display both [Response Table] and [Result Items] in the [Result View] dia-
Ctrl + W
log
Display only the [Response Table] in the [Result View] dialog Ctrl + T
Display only the [Result Items] in the [Result View] dialog Ctrl + I
Display result items in one row Ctrl + 1
Display result items in two rows Ctrl + 2
Display result items in three rows Ctrl + 3

To do this Press
Open the [Analysis Parameter View] dialog Ctrl + P
 Exit
To do this Press
Close the [Result View] dialog Ctrl + Q
831
Operations
832
Trouble Shooting
Solutions for Abnormal JMAG Termination
This chapter explains solutions for when JMAG and Geometry Editor encounter unexpected errors and termi-
nate abnormally.

• Opening Projects after JMAG-Designer Terminates Abnormally (page 836)
• Automatically Recording Scripts for Operations After Saving Projects (page 838)
835
Operations
Opening Projects after JMAG-Designer Terminates Abnormally

When JMAG-Designer or Geometry Editor encounter abnormalities and the [Fatal Error] dialog is
displayed, JMAG-Designer will attempt to create backup files. Operations performed after a previ-
ous project was saved leading up to directly prior the abnormal termination of a program are
reflected in backup files.
Backup files will differ depending on the program.
• JMAG-Designer backup files (.jprojbak):
This file format is the same as project files (.jproj).
These files use the same names as projects that were open when the abnormal termination
occurred.
These files are created in the same folder as project files.
• Geometry Editor backup files (.jmdlbak):
This file format is the same as JMAG model files (.jmdl).
These files use the same name as JMAG model files linked directly to projects that are open when
abnormal termination occurs.
These files are created in the assembly folder in the jfiles folder. The jfiles folder is located in the
same folder as the project files.
 Notes
• If the [Fatal Error] dialog is not displayed when JMAG-Designer or Geometry Editor terminate
abnormally, then backup files are not created. In these circumstances, operations performed
directly before the abnormal termination can be recreated so long as scripts exist that were saved
with the [Automatically record all operations to a script file] function. For details, see “Automat-
ically Recording Scripts for Operations After Saving Projects” on page 838.
• No changes are made to the names of already created backup files even if changes are made to the
names of the project files.
 Opening Projects after JMAG-Designer Terminates Abnormally

2. From the menu bar, select [File] > [Open].
3. Specify the project file that was open when the abnormal termination occurred.
The [Automatic backup file exists] dialog is displayed when a JMAG-Designer backup file with
the same name as the project file exists in the same folder as that project file.
4. Click [OK] to open the backup file.
Click [Cancel] to open the specified project file.
MEMO Clicking [OK] will delete the backup file after JMAG-Designer loads.
Clicking [Cancel] will not delete the backup file. Delete unnecessary backup files manually.
 Opening Projects after Geometry Editor Terminates Abnormally

2. Open the project file that was open when Geometry Editor terminated abnormally.
836
Solutions for Abnormal JMAG Termination
3. In the [Project Manager] tree, right-click the model, and select [Restore CAD Link].
The [Automatic backup file exists] dialog is displayed when a Geometry Editor backup file with
the same name as the JMAG model file linked directly to the project file exists in the following
folder.
(folder where the opened project file is positioned)/jfiles/assembly
4. Click [OK] to load models from the backup file.

Clicking [Cancel] will load models from the JMAG model file directly linked to the project.
MEMO Clicking [OK] will delete the backup file after Geometry Editor loads.
Clicking [Cancel] will not delete the backup file. Delete unnecessary backup files manually.
837
Operations
Automatically Recording Scripts for Operations After Saving

Projects
Operations performed after saving a project can be recorded to scripts. By using script files, it is pos-
sible to recreate operations performed after a previous project was saved leading up to directly prior
to the abnormal termination of JMAG-Designer or Geometry Editor.
 Script file output settings
1. From the menu bar, select [Tools] > [Preferences] to open the [Preferences] dialog.
2. In the navigation bar, click [Script] to open the [Script] setting panel.
3. Select [Automatically record all operations to a script file].
4. In the text box, enter the full path to the folder where script files are to be saved.
The folder where script files are to be saved can be specified by clicking [Browse] to open the
[Browse for folder] dialog.
5. Click [OK].
 Recreating operations using recorded script files

The following is an example procedure. Scripts can also be run by importing them into the Script
Editor:
2. Open the project file that was open when the abnormal termination occurred.
3. Right-click the [Custom] folder in the [Scripts] tab in the [Toolbox], and click [Import
Scripts].
4. In the [Import scripts] dialog, specify the script file saved to the specified location and
click [Open].
The script is added to the [Custom] folder in the [Scripts] tab.
5. Right-click the added script and select [Run].
The script is run, the operations performed up to directly prior to the abnormal termination are
reflected in the project.
838
INDEX
Classical eddy current loss density of each strain

A
region
Abaqus 779 output item 459
Acceleration Coercive force (normalized)
output item 461 output item 456
Analysis template 547 Coil flux linkage
Animation 507 output item 464
Applying Coil flux-linkage
materials to parts 314 output item 455
Average temperature (condition) Confirming
output item 460, 463 material properties 310
Average temperature (material) Contact force
output item 460, 463 output item 461
Contact pressure
output item 461
B Contact thermal resistance
output item 460, 463
Bookmarking
Continuous variables (node)
materials 313
output item 457, 460, 461, 462, 463
Contour plot 496
C Control signal
Case report 533 coordinate system 85
Changing Creating
materials 319 coordinate systems 86
Circuit current materials 296
output item 455, 464, 465 point sequence manually 90
Circuit electric power Current density
output item 455, 464, 465 output item 455, 462, 464
Circuit heat flow Current of current condition
output item 455, 460, 463 output item 455, 462
Circuit heat transfer coefficient Current vector
output item 455, 460, 463 output item 455
Circuit loss Cut cylinder 508
output item 455 Cut plane 508
Circuit voltage
output item 455, 464, 465
Circuit/Control Simulators 797 D
d-axis, q axis current
output item 459
output item 457
Classical eddy current loss density
d-axis, q-axis inductance
output item 459
output item 457
Classical eddy current loss density (lamination)
Deformation
Deleting
839
Operations
materials 303 materials 298

Demagnetization ratio (compared to reference step)
output item 456
F
Demagnetization ratio (compared to
undemagnetized state, temperature dependent) FEM coil inductance
Demagnetization ratio (compared to FEM conductor flux-linkage
undemagnetized state) output item 455
output item 456 FEM conductor inductance
Dielectric loss output item 455
output item 462 FEM conductor resistance
Dielectric loss density output item 455
output item 462 Force
Differential permeability output item 455, 462, 464
output item 456, 464 Force of external program
Displacement output item 457
output item 457, 460, 461, 463
G
E
Generating
Eddy current density (lamination) meshes 379
output item 457, 459 Global strain
Editing output item 461, 463
materials 303 Global strain (centrifugal force)
Electric breakdown factor output item 457
output item 462 Global stress
Electric field output item 461, 463
output item 462 Global stress (centrifugal force)
Electric potential output item 457
output item 461, 462 Graph Manager 537
Environment variables
InsDir 613
JMAG_JOB_SYSTEM_SERVER 613 H
JMAG_LICENSE_SELECTOR 613
Heat flow
JMAG_MPI_EXTRA_OPTION 577, 581
JMAG_MPI_LIBRARY_PATH 562, 572
JMAG_MPP_JPLOT_MASK 562 Heat flux
JMAG_MULTICORE_LIMIT 613 output item 460, 463
JMAG_USE_MPI_MACHINEFILE 579, Heat generation density
581 output item 460, 463
JRI_LICENSE_FILE 614 Heat source
JSOL_LICENSE_PATH 614 output item 460, 463
LD_LIBRARY_PATH 562, 579, 614 Heat transfer coefficient
LDLIBRARY_PATH 572 output item 460, 463
PATH 562, 572, 579 History graphs 482
WorkDir 577 Hysteresis loss
Excess eddy current loss output item 456, 459, 464
output item 459 Hysteresis loss density
Excess eddy current loss density output item 456, 459, 464
output item 459 Hysteresis loss density (lamination)
ExecSolver 445 output item 457, 459
Exporting
840
INDEX
JMAG_TOPOLOGY_DRIVER_NUM_THREAD
I
S 615
Importing JMAG_USE_CACHE 616
CAD models from CAD software 252 JMAG_USE_GPU 612
CAD models from files 100 JMAG_USE_MPI_MACHINEFILE 614
material data output from ThyssenKrupp’s Pow- Joule loss
erCore Explorer 300 output item 456, 459, 462, 464
materials 298 Joule loss density
materials from JMAG-Studio 298 output item 456, 459, 462, 464
MCMA material database 300
mesh models from files 102
model outlines 103 L
user magnetization materials 299
Lissajous 541
INFILE 611
Loading
Initial magnetization (normalized)
files 33
output item 456
Lorentz force
Initial magnetization vector
output item 457
Lorentz force density
Iron loss
Iron loss density
output item 457, 459 M
Magnetic field
J output item 455, 464
Magnetic field (lamination)
JMAG_CORES 612
JMAG_COUPLED_FILE 611
Magnetic flux density
JMAG_EXTRA_ARGS 611
JMAG_EXTRA_FILE_xx 611
Magnetic flux density (lamination)
JMAG_GPU_OLD_License 614
JMAG_HYBRID_THREADS 612 Magnetization
JMAG_MPP_JPLOT_MASK 614 output item 455, 464
JMAG_MULTI_LICENSE 612 Material Database 295
JMAG_PARALLEL_TYPE 612 Maximum sound pressure
JMAG_PSL_CONTROL_DP 614, 615 output item 461
JMAG_PSL_CONTROL_DS 614, 615 Maximum sound pressure level
JMAG_PSL_CONTROL_EL 614, 615 output item 461
JMAG_PSL_CONTROL_EXPRESS_FR 615 Merging
JMAG_PSL_CONTROL_FQ 614, 615 models 105
JMAG_PSL_CONTROL_HT 614, 615 Mises strain
JMAG_PSL_CONTROL_LS 614, 615 output item 461, 463
JMAG_PSL_CONTROL_PA2 614, 615 Mises strain (centrifugal force)
JMAG_PSL_CONTROL_RM 615 output item 457
JMAG_PSL_CONTROL_ST 614, 615 Mises stress
JMAG_PSL_CONTROL_TR 614, 615 output item 461, 463
JMAG_PSL_MAX 615 Mises stress (centrifugal force)
JMAG_RESERVATION_KEY 612 output item 457
JMAG-Scheduler 425, 438
JMAG_SCRIPT_ERROR_OUT 612
JMAG_SOLVER_TYPES 612
841
Operations
output item 456

N
Rotational velocity
Nodal force output item 456
output item 455, 462, 464 Running
Nodal force (input load) analysis from command Line 437
output item 461, 463 analysis from JMAG-Designer 415
Nodal force (magnetostriction) analysis from JMAG-Scheduler 425
output item 455 analysis remotely 622
Normal electric field batch files for analyses 803
one-way coupled analyses 671
output item 462
two-way coupled analyses 689
two-way coupled analyses using Abaqus 785
O two-way coupled analyses using Circuit/Control
Simulators 798
One-way coupled analysis 671 two-way coupled analyses using STAR-CCM+
Opening 791
existing projects 28
Operating
S
trees and tool boxes 30
optimization 643 Saving
projects 32
P Scaled factor 504
Script function 811
Parametric analysis 627 Section graphes 483
Parametric report 533 Selecting
PATH 614 items by specifying their IDs 61
Permeability items in specified regions 58
output item 464 materials 311
Permeance coefficient with the mouse 57
output item 456 Setting
Plastic strain axes 68
output item 461 circuits 355, 373, 409
Post-calculation script 525 conditions 66, 340
Principal strain directions 68
output item 461, 463 JMAG-Designer preferences 36
Principal strain (centrifugal force) magnet magnetization distributions 321
output item 457 results files to be referenced 73
Principal stress Sharing
output item 457, 461, 463 material data 304
Principal stress (centrifugal force) Shell charge
Simulink 798
Solid dipole
R output item 462
Sound pressure
Reference Coordinate System 75
output item 461
Reference magnetic flux density Sound pressure level
Reference the CSV File/Text File Format 77 SPEED 773
Relative permeability STAR-CCM+ 791
output item 456 Stored energy
Residual flux density
842
INDEX
Surface charge density Winding inductance

Surface current density WorkDir 611
output item 455
Surface force density
Surface heat generation density
Surface Joule loss density
output item 456
Temperature
Terminal temperature
Torque
output item 455
Torque of external program
output item 457
Total displacement (rotation angle)
Total displacement (X/Y/Z direction)
Total surface heat generation
output item 460
Translational velocity
output item 456
Using
reference coordinate system 75
superconductors 333
Vector plot 498

Vector potential
Velocity
output item 461
Voltage difference
Winding DC resistance
output item 464
843
Operations
844

Operations

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operations

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operations

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

JMAG Version 22.

About This Edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Add a User-Defined Viewpoint and Apply It to a Custom Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Selecting Parts, Faces, Elements, and Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Using User-Defined Coordinate Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Setting Nonlinear Characteristics Using Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Importing Models from Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Creating 2D CAD Models Using Geometry Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Scale a Basic Shape. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Creating 3D CAD Models Using Geometry Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Creating Paths and Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Creating Mesh Models Using Geometry Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Exporting Models to Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Creating Geometries Using JMAG Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Importing Models from Commercial CAD Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Using the Functions on Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Creating Analysis Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Managing Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Material Database Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Applying Materials to Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

Setting Magnet Magnetization Distributions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

Using Superconductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

Analysis Condition Settings

Setting Analysis Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Setting Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

Using JMAG-RT Models in Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

Generating Mesh with JMAG-Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

Coil Winding Settings

Automate Coil Windings/Cage Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

Running Analyses from JMAG-Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

Running Analyses from JMAG-Scheduler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425

Add a Job in the JMAG-Scheduler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428

Running Analyses from the Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437

Output Physical Quantities and Their Display Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453

Integration Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465

Handling Result Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467

Checking Analysis Results in Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473

Checking Analysis Results in Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481

Checking the Distribution and Flux from an Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495

Adding Calculation Processing to Analysis Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515

Calculating Electromagnetic Force and Torque from Analysis Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518

Using Scripts to Automate Results Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525

Displaying Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533

Managing Input/Output Table Data

Comparing Table Results Using the Graph Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537

Creating Templates of Analysis Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547

Add an Analysis Template under the [Analysis Templates] Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549

Parallel Computing, Remote Execution

Performing Large Scale Calculations Using Parallel Computing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557

Remote Execution of Analysis and Mesh Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585

Importing Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620

Running Calculations of Multiple Cases with Some Parameters as Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627

Formulating Objective-Based Optimal Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643

Procedure for Running JparamGenerator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665

Running One-Way Coupled Analyses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671

Running Direct Coupled Analyses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689

Application Study and Integration Study

Executing Application Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701

Create an Efficiency Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709

Executing Integration Analysis Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715